# Vol. 79 Friday,

No. 21 January 31, 2014

Part III



# Commodity Futures Trading Commission

17 CFR Part 75
Prohibitions and Restrictions on Proprietary Trading and Certain Interests
in, and Relationships With, Hedge Funds and Private Equity Funds; Final

Rule


### 5808 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

**COMMODITY FUTURES TRADING**

**COMMISSION**

**17 CFR Part 75**

**RIN 3038–AD05**

**Prohibitions and Restrictions on Proprietary Trading and Certain**  **Interests in, and Relationships with, Hedge Funds and Private Equity Funds** 

**AGENCY :**  Commodity Futures Trading

Commission.

**ACTION :**  Final rule.

**SUMMARY :**  The Commodity Futures Trading Commission (‘‘CFTC’’ or ‘‘Commission’’) is adopting a final ruleto implement Section 619 of the DoddFrank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the ‘‘Dodd-Frank Act’’), which contains certain prohibitions and restrictions on the ability of a banking entity and nonbank financial company supervised by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the ‘‘Board’’) to engage in proprietary trading and have certain interests in, or relationships with, a hedge fund or private equity fund. Section 619 also requires the Board, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, and the Securities and Exchange Commission to also issue regulations implementing

section 619 and directs the CFTC and those four agencies to consult and
coordinate with each other, as appropriate, in developing and issuing the implementing rules, for the purposes of assuring, to the extent possible, that such rules are comparable and provide for consistent application and implementation. To that end, although the Commission is adopting a final rule that is not a joint rule with the other agencies, the CFTC and the other agencies have worked closely together to develop the same rule text and supplementary information, except for information specific to the CFTC or the other agencies, as applicable. In particular, the CFTC’s final rule is numbered as part 75 of the Commission’s regulations, the rule text

refers to the ‘‘Commission’’ instead of the ‘‘[Agency]’’ and one section of the regulations addresses authority, purpose, scope, and relationship to other authorities with respect to the
Commission. Furthermore, it is noted that the supplementary information generally refers to the ‘‘Agencies’’ collectively when referring to

deliberations and considerations in developing the final rule by the CFTC together with the other four agencies

and references to the ‘‘final rule’’ should be deemed to refer to the final rule of the Commission as herein adopted.

**DATES :**  The final rule is effective April

1, 2014.

**FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT :**  Erik Remmler, Deputy Director, Division of Swap Dealer and Intermediary Oversight (‘‘DSIO’’), (202) 418–7630, eremmler@cftc.gov; Paul Schlichting,
Assistant General Counsel, Office of the General Counsel (‘‘OGC’’), (202) 418–

5884, pschlichting@cftc.gov; Mark Fajfar, Assistant General Counsel, OGC, (202) 418–6636, mfajfar@cftc.gov; Michael Barrett, Attorney-Advisor, DSIO, (202) 418–5598, mbarrett@ cftc.gov; Stephen Kane, Research
Economist, Office of the Chief Economist (‘‘OCE’’), (202) 418–5911, skane@cftc.gov; or Stephanie Lau, Research Economist, OCE, (202) 418–

5218, slau@cftc.gov; Commodity Futures Trading Commission, Three Lafayette Centre, 1155 21st Street NW., Washington, DC 20581.

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION :** 

Table of Contents

I. Background II. Notice of Proposed Rulemaking: Summary

of General Comments III. Scope IV. CFTC-Specific Comments

V. Overview of Final Rule

A. General Approach and Summary of

Final Rule B. Proprietary Trading Restrictions

C. Restrictions on Covered Fund Activities

and Investments D. Metrics Reporting Requirement E. Compliance Program Requirement

VI. Final Rule

A. Subpart B—Proprietary Trading

Restrictions 1. Section 75.3: Prohibition on Proprietary

Trading and Related Definitions a. Definition of ‘‘Trading Account’’b. Rebuttable Presumption for the ShortTerm Trading Account

c. Definition of ‘‘Financial Instrument’’ d. Proprietary Trading Exclusions 1. Repurchase and Reverse Repurchase

Arrangements and Securities Lending 2. Liquidity management activities 3. Transactions of Derivatives Clearing

Organizations and Clearing Agencies 4. Excluded Clearing-Related Activities of

Clearinghouse Members 5. Satisfying an Existing Delivery

Obligation 6. Satisfying an Obligation in Connection

With a Judicial, Administrative, SelfRegulatory Organization, or Arbitration Proceeding 7. Acting Solely as Agent, Broker, or

Custodian 8. Purchases or Sales Through a Deferred

Compensation or Similar Plan 9. Collecting a Debt Previously Contracted 10. Other Requested Exclusions 2. Section 75.4(a): Underwriting Exemption

a. Introduction b. Overview 1. Proposed Underwriting Exemption 2. Comments on Proposed Underwriting

Exemption 3. Final Underwriting Exemption c. Detailed Explanation of the

Underwriting Exemption 1. Acting as an Underwriter for a

Distribution of Securities a. Proposed Requirements That the

Purchase or Sale Be Effected Solely in

Connection With a Distribution of Securities for Which the Banking Entity

Acts as an Underwriter and That the Covered Financial Position Be a Security i. Proposed Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’ ii. Proposed Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’ iii. Proposed Requirement That the

Covered Financial Position Be a Security b. Comments on the Proposed

Requirements That the Trade Be Effected Solely in Connection With a Distribution for Which the Banking Entity is Acting

as an Underwriter and That the Covered Financial Position Be a Security

i. Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’

ii. Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’ iii. ‘‘Solely in Connection With’’ Standard c. Final Requirement That the Banking

Entity Act as an Underwriter for a

Distribution of Securities and the Trading Desk’s Underwriting Position Be

Related to Such Distribution i. Definition of ‘‘Underwriting Position’’ ii. Definition of ‘‘Trading Desk’’

iii. Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’

iv. Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’

v. Activities Conducted ‘‘In Connection

With’’ a Distribution

2. Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement a. Proposed Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement b. Comments Regarding the Proposed Near

Term Customer Demand Requirement

c. Final Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement 3. Compliance Program Requirement a. Proposed Compliance Program

Requirement b. Comments on the Proposed Compliance

Program Requirement c. Final Compliance Program Requirement 4. Compensation Requirement a. Proposed Compensation Requirement b. Comments on the Proposed

Compensation Requirement c. Final Compensation Requirement 5. Registration Requirement a. Proposed Registration Requirement b. Comments on Proposed Registration

Requirement c. Final Registration Requirement 6. Source of Revenue Requirement a. Proposed Source of Revenue

Requirement b. Comments on the Proposed Source of

Revenue Requirement c. Final Rule’s Approach to Assessing

Source of Revenue 3. Section 75.4(b): Market-Making

Exemption

a. Introduction

b. Overview 1. Proposed Market-Making Exemption2. Comments on the Proposed MarketMaking Exemption


### 5809 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

a. Comments on the Overall Scope of the

Proposed Exemption b. Comments Regarding the Potential

Market Impact of the Proposed Exemption 3. Final Market-Making Exemptionc. Detailed Explanation of the MarketMaking Exemption 1. Requirement to Routinely Stand Ready

to Purchase and Sell a. Proposed Requirement to Hold Self Out b. Comments on the Proposed Requirement

to Hold Self Out i. The Proposed Indicia ii. Treatment of Block Positioning Activity iii. Treatment of Anticipatory Market

Making iv. High-Frequency Trading c. Final Requirement to Routinely Stand

Ready to Purchase and Sell i. Definition of ‘‘Trading Desk’’ ii. Definitions of ‘‘Financial Exposure’’ and

‘‘Market-Maker Inventory’’ iii. Routinely Standing Ready to Buy and

Sell

2. Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement a. Proposed Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement b. Comments Regarding the Proposed Near

Term Customer Demand Requirement i. The Proposed Guidance for Determining

Compliance With the Near Term Customer Demand Requirement ii. Potential Inventory Restrictions and

Differences Across Asset Classes iii. Predicting Near Term Customer

Demand
iv. Potential Definitions of ‘‘Client,’’

‘‘Customer,’’ or ‘‘Counterparty’’ v. Interdealer Trading and Trading for

Price Discovery or To Test Market Depth vi. Inventory Management vii. Acting as an Authorized Participant or

Market Maker in Exchange-Traded

Funds viii. Arbitrage or Other Activities That

Promote Price Transparency and Liquidity ix. Primary Dealer Activities x. New or Bespoke Products or Customized

Hedging Contracts

c. Final Near Term Customer Demand

Requirement i. Definition of ‘‘Client,’’ ‘‘Customer,’’ and

‘‘Counterparty’’ ii. Impact of the Liquidity, Maturity, and

Depth of the Market on the Analysis iii. Demonstrable Analysis of Certain

Factors iv. Relationship to Required Limits 3. Compliance Program Requirement a. Proposed Compliance Program

Requirement b. Comments on the Proposed Compliance

Program Requirement c. Final Compliance Program Requirement 4. Market Making-Related Hedginga. Proposed Treatment of Market MakingRelated Hedging b. Comments on the Proposed Treatment of

Market Making-Related Hedging c. Treatment of Market Making-Related

Hedging in the Final Rule 5. Compensation Requirement a. Proposed Compensation Requirement b. Comments Regarding the Proposed Compensation Requirement c. Final Compensation Requirement 6. Registration Requirement a. Proposed Registration Requirement b. Comments on the Proposed Registration

Requirement c. Final Registration Requirement 7. Source of Revenue Analysis a. Proposed Source of Revenue

Requirement b. Comments Regarding the Proposed

Source of Revenue Requirement i. Potential Restrictions on Inventory,

Increased Costs for Customers, and Other Changes to Market-Making Services ii. Certain Price Appreciation-Related

Profits Are an Inevitable or Important Component of Market Making iii. Concerns Regarding the Workability of

the Proposed Standard in Certain

Markets or asset classes iv. Suggested Modifications to the

Proposed Requirement v. General Support for the Proposed

Requirement or for Placing Greater

Restrictions on a Market Maker’s Sources

of Revenue c. Final Rule’s Approach to Assessing

Revenues 8. Appendix B of the Proposed Rule a. Proposed Appendix B Requirement b. Comments on Proposed Appendix B c. Determination to not Adopt Proposed

Appendix B 9. Use of Quantitative Measurements 4. Section 75.5: Permitted Risk-Mitigating

Hedging Activities a. Summary of Proposal’s Approach to

Implementing the Hedging Exemption b. Manner of Evaluating Compliance with

the Hedging Exemption c. Comments on the Proposed Rule and

Approach to Implementing the Hedging Exemption

d. Final Rule 1. Compliance Program Requirement 2. Hedging of Specific Risks and

Demonstrable Reduction of Risk 3. Compensation 4. Documentation Requirement 5. Section 75.6(a)–(b): Permitted Trading in

Certain Government and Municipal Obligations a. Permitted Trading in U.S. Government

Obligations b. Permitted Trading in Foreign

Government Obligations c. Permitted Trading in Municipal

Securities d. Determination to Not Exempt

Proprietary Trading in Multilateral Development Bank Obligations 6. Section 75.6(c): Permitted Trading on

Behalf of Customers a. Proposed Exemption for Trading on

Behalf of Customers b. Comments on the Proposed Rule c. Final Exemption for Trading on Behalf

of Customers 7. Section 75.6(d): Permitted Trading by a

Regulated Insurance Company 8. Section 75.6(e): Permitted Trading

Activities of a Foreign Banking Entity a. Foreign Banking Entities Eligible for the

Exemption b. Permitted Trading Activities of a Foreign Banking Entity

9. Section 75.7: Limitations on Permitted

Trading Activities a. Scope of ‘‘Material Conflict of Interest’’ 1. Proposed rule 2. Comments on the Proposed Limitation

on Material Conflicts of Interest

a. Disclosure

b. Information Barriers

3. Final rule b. Definition of ‘‘High-Risk Asset’’ and

‘‘High-Risk Trading Strategy’’ 1. Proposed Rule 2. Comments on Proposed Limitations on

High-Risk Assets and Trading Strategies

3. Final Rule

c. Limitations on Permitted Activities That

Pose a Threat to Safety and Soundness of the Banking Entity or the Financial Stability of the United States B. Subpart C—Covered Fund Activities and

Investments

1. Section 75.10: Prohibition on

Acquisition or Retention of Ownership Interests in, and Certain Relationships
With, a Covered Fund a. Prohibition Regarding Covered Fund

Activities and Investments

b. ‘‘Covered Fund’’ Definition 1. Foreign Covered Funds 2. Commodity Pools 3. Entities Regulated Under the Investment

Company Act

c. Entities Excluded From Definition of

Covered Fund 1. Foreign Public Funds 2. Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries
3. Joint Ventures 4. Acquisition Vehicles 5. Foreign Pension or Retirement Funds 6. Insurance Company Separate Accounts 7. Bank Owned Life Insurance Separate

Accounts

8. Exclusion for Loan Securitizations and

Definition of Loan

a. Definition of Loan

b. Loan Securitizations

i. Loans ii. Contractual Rights or Assets

iii. Derivatives

iv. SUBIs and Collateral Certificates v. Impermissible Assets 9. Asset-Backed Commercial Paper

Conduits

10. Covered Bonds

11. Certain Permissible Public Welfare and

Similar Funds 12. Registered Investment Companies and

Excluded Entities

13. Other Excluded Entities d. Entities Not Specifically Excluded From

the Definition of Covered Fund

1. Financial Market Utilities

2. Cash Collateral Pools 3. Pass-Through REITS 4. Municipal Securities Tender Option

Bond Transactions 5. Venture Capital Funds

6. Credit Funds 7. Employee Securities Companies e. Definition of ‘‘Ownership Interest’’

f. Definition of ‘‘Resident of the United

States’’ g. Definition of ‘‘Sponsor’’ 1. Definition of Sponsor With Respect to

Securitizations


### 5810 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer
Protection Act, Public Law 111–203, 124 Stat. 1376
(2010).

2 See 12 U.S.C. 1851.

3 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(2) and (f)(4). The Agencies note that two of the three companies currently designated by FSOC for supervision by the Board are affiliated with insured depository institutions, and are therefore currently banking entities for purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act. The Agencies are continuing to review whether the remaining company engages in any activity subject to section 13 of the BHC Act and what, if any, requirements apply under section 13. 4 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(1)(A) and (B).

5 See id. at 1851(d)(1).

6 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(2) and (d)(4).

7 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(2). Under section 13(b)(2)(B) of the BHC Act, rules implementing section 13’s prohibitions and restrictions must be issued by: (i) The appropriate Federal banking agencies (i.e., the Board, the OCC, and the FDIC), jointly, with respect to insured depository institutions; (ii) the Board, with respect to any 2. Section 75.11: Activities Permitted in

Connection With Organizing and Offering a Covered Fund a. Scope of Exemption 1. Fiduciary Services 2. Compliance With Investment

Limitations 3. Compliance With Section 13(f) of the

BHC Act

4. No Guarantees or Insurance of Fund

Performance 5. Limitation on Name Sharing With a

Covered Fund 6. Limitation on Ownership by Directors

and Employees 7. Disclosure Requirements b. Organizing and Offering an Issuing

Entity of Asset-Backed Securities c. Underwriting and Market Making for a

Covered Fund

3. Section 75.12: Permitted Investment in

a Covered Fund a. Proposed Rule b. Duration of Seeding Period for New

Covered Funds c. Limitations on Investments in a Single

Covered Fund (‘‘Per-Fund Limitation’’) d. Limitation on Aggregate Permitted

Investments in all Covered funds (‘‘Aggregate Funds Limitation’’) e. Capital Treatment of an Investment in a

Covered Fund f. Attribution of Ownership Interests to a

Banking Entity g. Calculation of Tier 1 Capital h. Extension of Time To Divest Ownership

Interest in a Single Fund

4. Section 75.13: Other Permitted Covered

Fund Activities a. Permitted Risk-Mitigating Hedging

Activities

b. Permitted Covered Fund Activities and

Investments Outside of the United States 1. Foreign Banking Entities Eligible for the

Exemption 2. Activities or Investments Solely Outside

of the United States

3. Offered for Sale or Sold to a Resident of

the United States

4. Definition of ‘‘Resident of the United

States’’

c. Permitted Covered Fund Interests and

Activities by a Regulated Insurance Company

5. Section 75.14: Limitations on

Relationships With a Covered Fund a. Scope of Application

b. Transactions That Would Be a ‘‘Covered

Transaction’’ c. Certain Transactions and Relationships

Permitted 1. Permitted Investments and Ownerships

Interests 2. Prime Brokerage Transactions d. Restrictions on Transactions With Any

Permitted Covered Fund

6. Section 75.15: Other Limitations on

Permitted Covered Fund Activities C. Subpart D and Appendices A and B—

Compliance Program, Reporting, and

Violations 1. Section 75.20: Compliance Program

Mandate a. Program Requirement b. Compliance Program Elements c. Simplified Programs for Less Active

Banking Entities d. Threshold for Application of Enhanced

Minimum Standards 2. Appendix B: Enhanced Minimum

Standards for Compliance Programs a. Proprietary Trading Activities

b. Covered Fund Activities or Investments c. Enterprise-Wide Programs d. Responsibility and Accountability e. Independent Testing f. Training g. Recordkeeping 3. Section 75.20(d) and Appendix A:

Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements Applicable to Trading

Activities a. Approach to Reporting and

Recordkeeping Requirements Under the Proposal b. General Comments on the Proposed

Metrics c. Approach of the Final Rule d. Proposed Quantitative Measurements

and Comments on Specific Metrics

4. Section 75.21: Termination of Activities

or Investments; Authorities for

Violations

VII. Administrative Law Matters

A. Paperwork Reduction Act Analysis B. Regulatory Flexibility Act Analysis

I. Background

The Dodd-Frank Act was enacted on July 21, 2010. 1 Section 619 of the DoddFrank Act added a new section 13 to the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (‘‘BHC Act’’) (codified at 12 U.S.C. 1851) that generally prohibits any banking entity from engaging in proprietary trading or from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, sponsoring, or having certain relationships with a hedge fund or private equity fund (‘‘covered fund’’), subject to certain exemptions. 2 New section 13 of the BHC Act also provides that a nonbank financial company designated by the Financial Stability Oversight Council (‘‘FSOC’’) for supervision by the Board (while not a banking entity under section 13 of the BHC Act) would be subject to additional capital requirements, quantitative limits, or other restrictions if the company engages in certain proprietary trading or

covered fund activities. 3

Section 13 of the BHC Act generally prohibits banking entities from engaging as principal in proprietary trading for the purpose of selling financial instruments in the near term or

otherwise with the intent to resell in order to profit from short-term price

movements. 4 Section 13(d)(1) expressly exempts from this prohibition, subject
to conditions, certain activities, including:

• Trading in U.S. government, agency and municipal obligations;

• Underwriting and market makingrelated activities;

• Risk-mitigating hedging activities;

• Trading on behalf of customers;

• Trading for the general account of insurance companies; and

• Foreign trading by non-U.S. banking entities. 5

Section 13 of the BHC Act also generally prohibits banking entities from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, or sponsoring, a hedge fund or private equity fund. Section 13 contains several exemptions that permit banking entities to make limited investments in hedge funds and private equity funds, subject to a number of restrictions designed to ensure that banking entities do not

rescue investors in these funds from loss and are not themselves exposed to significant losses from investments or other relationships with these funds.

Section 13 of the BHC Act does not prohibit a nonbank financial company supervised by the Board from engaging in proprietary trading, or from having the types of ownership interests in or relationships with a covered fund that a banking entity is prohibited or restricted from having under section 13 of the
BHC Act. However, section 13 of the BHC Act provides that these activities be subject to additional capital charges, quantitative limits, or other

restrictions. 6

II. Notice of Proposed Rulemaking: Summary of General Comments

Authority for developing and adopting regulations to implement the prohibitions and restrictions of section 13 of the BHC Act is divided among the Board, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (‘‘FDIC’’), the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (‘‘OCC’’), the Securities and Exchange Commission (‘‘SEC’’), and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (‘‘CFTC’’). 7 As required by


### 5811 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

company that controls an insured depository institution, or that is treated as a bank holding company for purposes of section 8 of the International Banking Act, any nonbank financial company supervised by the Board, and any subsidiary of any of the foregoing (other than a subsidiary for which an appropriate Federal banking agency, the SEC, or the CFTC is the primary financial regulatory agency); (iii) the CFTC with respect to any entity for which it is the primary financial regulatory agency, as defined in
section 2 of the Dodd-Frank Act; and (iv) the SEC with respect to any entity for which it is the primary financial regulatory agency, as defined in

section 2 of the Dodd-Frank Act. See id.

8 See 76 FR 68846 (Nov. 7, 2011) (‘‘Joint Proposal’’).

9 See 77 FR 23 (Jan. 23, 2012) (extending the comment period to February 13, 2012).

10 See 77 FR 8332 (Feb 14, 2012) (‘‘CFTC Proposal’’).

11 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(2)(B)(ii). The Secretary of the Treasury, as Chairperson of the FSOC, is responsible for coordinating the Agencies’ rulemakings under section 13 of the BHC Act. See

id. 12 See http://www.regulations.gov/#!docketDetail;

D=OCC-2011-0014 (OCC); http://www.federal reserve.gov/newsevents/reform

_systemic.htm (Board); http://www.fdic.gov/regulations/laws/ federal/2011/11comAD85.html (FDIC); http:// www.sec.gov/comments/s7-41-11/s74111.shtml
(SEC); and http://www.cftc.gov/LawRegulation/ DoddFrankAct/Rulemakings/DF

_28

_VolckerRule/

index.htm (CFTC).

13 See Commodity Futures Trading Commission,

CFTC Staff to Host a Public Roundtable to Discuss the Proposed Volcker Rule (May 24, 2012), available

at http://www.cftc.gov/PressRoom/PressReleases/

pr6263-12; transcript available at http:// www.cftc.gov/ucm/groups/public/@newsroom/ documents/file/transcript053112.pdf

. 14 See Financial Stability Oversight Counsel, Study and Recommendations on Prohibitions on Proprietary Trading and Certain Relationships with Hedge Funds and Private Equity Funds (Jan. 18,
2011), available at http://www.treasury.gov/

initiatives/Documents/Volcker%20sec%20619%20 study%20final%201%2018%2011%20rg.pdf

. (‘‘FSOC study’’). See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(1). Prior to publishing its study, FSOC requested public

comment on a number of issues to assist in conducting its study. See 75 FR 61758 (Oct. 6, 2010). Approximately 8,000 comments were received from the public, including from members of Congress, trade associations, individual banking entities, consumer groups, and individuals.

15 See FSOC study at 5–6. section 13(b)(2) of the BHC Act, the
Board, OCC, FDIC, and SEC in October 2011 invited the public to comment on proposed rules implementing that section’s requirements. 8 The period for filing public comments on this proposal was extended for an additional 30 days, until February 13, 2012. 9 In January 2012, the CFTC requested comment on a proposal for the same common rule to implement section 13 with respect to those entities for which it is the primary financial regulatory agency and invited public comment on its proposed implementing rule through April 16,

2012. 10 The statute requires the Agencies, in developing and issuing implementing rules, to consult and
coordinate with each other, as appropriate, for the purposes of assuring, to the extent possible, that such rules are comparable and provide for consistent application and implementation of the applicable provisions of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 11

The proposed rules invited comment on a multi-faceted regulatory framework to implement section 13 consistent with the statutory language. In addition, the Agencies invited comments on the potential economic impacts of the proposed rule and posed a number of questions seeking information on the

costs and benefits associated with each aspect of the proposal, as well as on any significant alternatives that would minimize the burdens or amplify the benefits of the proposal in a manner

consistent with the statute. The Agencies also encouraged commenters to provide quantitative information and data about the impact of the proposal on entities subject to section 13, as well as
on their clients, customers, and counterparties, specific markets or asset classes, and any other entities potentially affected by the proposed rule, including non-financial small and

mid-size businesses.

The Agencies received over 18,000 comments addressing a wide variety of aspects of the proposal, including definitions used by the proposal and the exemptions for market making-related activities, risk-mitigating hedging
activities, covered fund activities and investments, the use of quantitative metrics, and the reporting proposals. The vast majority of these comments were from individuals using a version of a short form letter to express support for the proposed rule. More than 600 comment letters were unique comment letters, including from members of Congress, domestic and foreign banking

entities and other financial services firms, trade groups representing banking, insurance, and the broader financial services industry, U.S. state and foreign governments, consumer and public interest groups, and individuals. To improve understanding of the issues raised by commenters, the Agencies met

with a number of these commenters to discuss issues relating to the proposed rule, and summaries of these meetings are available on each of the Agency’s public Web sites. 12 The CFTC staff also hosted a public roundtable on the proposed rule. 13 Many of the commenters generally expressed support for the broader goals of the proposed rule. At the same time, many commenters expressed concerns about various aspects of the proposed rule. Many of these commenters requested that one or more aspects of the proposed

rule be modified in some manner in order to reflect their viewpoints and to better accommodate the scope of activities that they argued were encompassed within section 13 of the

BHC Act. The comments addressed all major sections of the proposed rule.

Section 13 of the BHC Act also required the FSOC to conduct a study (‘‘FSOC study’’) and make recommendations to the Agencies by January 21, 2011 on the implementation

of section 13 of the BHC Act. The FSOC study was issued on January 18, 2011. The FSOC study included a detailed discussion of key issues related to implementation of section 13 and recommended that the Agencies consider taking a number of specified actions in issuing rules under section 13

of the BHC Act. 14 The FSOC study also recommended that the Agencies adopt a four-part implementation and supervisory framework for identifying and preventing prohibited proprietary trading, which included a programmatic compliance regime requirement for banking entities, analysis and reporting of quantitative metrics by banking entities, supervisory review and oversight by the Agencies, and enforcement procedures for violations. 15 The Agencies carefully considered the FSOC study and its recommendations.

In formulating this final rule, the Agencies carefully reviewed all

comments submitted in connection with the rulemaking and considered the suggestions and issues they raise in light of the statutory restrictions and provisions as well as the FSOC study. The Agencies have sought to reasonably respond to all of the significant issues commenters raised. The Agencies believe they have succeeded in doing so notwithstanding the complexities involved. The Agencies also carefully considered different options suggested by commenters in light of potential costs and benefits in order to effectively implement section 13 of the BHC Act. The Agencies made numerous changes to the final rule in response to the issues and information provided by

commenters. These modifications to the rule and explanations that address

comments are described in more detail in the section-by-section description of the final rule. To enhance uniformity in both rules that implement section 13 and administration of the requirements of that section, the Agencies have been regularly consulting with each other in the development of this final rule.

Some commenters requested that the Agencies repropose the rule and/or delay adoption pending the collection of


### 5812 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

16 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); Chamber (Nov. 2011); Chamber (Nov. 2013); Members of Congress (Dec.
2011); IIAC; Real Estate Roundtable; Ass’n. of German Banks; Allen & Overy (Clearing); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BNY Mellon et al.; State Street (Feb. 2012); ICI Global; Chamber (Feb. 2012);

Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; HSBC; Western Asset Mgmt.;

Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; Columbia Mgmt.; ICI (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; British Bankers’ Ass’n.; ISDA (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Ralph Saul (Apr. 2012); BPC.

17 See 75 FR 61758 (Oct. 6, 2010). 18 If any provision of this rule, or the application thereof to any person or circumstance, is held to be invalid, such invalidity shall not affect other provisions or application of such provisions to other persons or circumstances that can be given effect without the invalid provision or application. 19 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(c)(1).

20 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(c)(2); see also Conformance Period for Entities Engaged in Prohibited Proprietary Trading or Private Equity Fund or Hedge Fund Activities, 76 FR 8265 (Feb. 14, 2011) (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5898 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley)).

21 See, Board Order Approving Extension of
Conformance Period, available at http:// www.federalreserve.gov/newsevents/press/bcreg/ bcreg20131210b1.pdf

.

22 See, e.g., Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Chamber (Dec. 2011); Thakor Study; Prof. Duffie; IHS.

23 See Prof. Duffie.

24 See IHS.

25 See, e.g., Chamber (Dec. 2011); Thakor Study; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); IHS.

26 See, e.g., RBC; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Goldman
(Covered Funds). additional information. 16 As described in part above, the Agencies have provided many and various types of opportunities for commenters to provide input on implementation of section 13

of the BHC Act and have collected substantial information in the process.

In addition to the official comment process described above, members of the public submitted comment letters in advance of the official comment period for the proposed rules and met with staff of the Agencies to explain issues of concern; the public also provided substantial comment in response to a request for comment from the FSOC regarding its findings and recommendations for implementing

section 13. 17 The Agencies provided a detailed proposal and posed numerous questions in the preamble to the proposal to solicit and explore alternative approaches in many areas. In addition, the Agencies have continued

to receive comment letters after the extended comment period deadline, which the Agencies have considered. Thus, the Agencies believe interested parties have had ample opportunity to review the proposed rules, as well as the comments made by others, and to provide views on the proposal, other
comment letters, and data to inform our

consideration of the final rules.

In addition, the Agencies have been mindful of the importance of providing certainty to banking entities and financial markets and of providing sufficient time for banking entities to understand the requirements of the final rule and to design, test, and implement compliance and reporting systems. The further substantial delay that would necessarily be entailed by reproposing the rule would extend the uncertainty that banking entities would face, which could prove disruptive to banking

entities and the financial markets.

The Agencies note, as discussed more fully below, that the final rule incorporates a number of modifications designed to address the issues raised by

commenters in a manner consistent with the statute. The preamble below also discusses many of the issues raised by commenters and explains the Agencies’ response to those comments. To achieve the purpose of the statute, without imposing unnecessary costs, the

final rule builds on the multi-faceted approach in the proposal, which includes development and implementation of a compliance program at each banking entity engaged in trading activities or that makes investments subject to section 13 of the
BHC Act; the collection and evaluation of data regarding these activities as an indicator of areas meriting additional attention by the banking entity and the relevant agency; appropriate limits on trading, hedging, investment and other activities; and supervision by the Agencies. To allow banking entities sufficient time to develop appropriate systems, the Agencies have provided for a phased-in schedule for the collection of data, limited data reporting requirements only to banking entities that engage in significant trading activity, and agreed to review the merits

of the data collected and revise the data collection as appropriate over the next 21 months. Importantly, as explained in detail below, the Agencies have also reduced the compliance burden for banking entities with total assets of less
than $10 billion. The final rule also eliminates compliance burden for firms that do not engage in covered activities or investments beyond investing in U.S. government obligations, agency guaranteed obligations, or municipal obligations.

Moreover, the Agencies believe the

data that will be collected in connection
with the final rule, as well as the compliance efforts made by banking entities and the supervisory experience that will be gained by the Agencies in reviewing trading and investment activity under the final rule, will provide valuable insights into the

effectiveness of the final rule in achieving the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act. The Agencies remain committed to implementing the final rule, and revisiting and revising the rule as appropriate, in a manner designed to ensure that the final rule faithfully implements the requirements and purposes of the statute. 18

Finally, the Board has determined, in

accordance with section 13 of the BHC Act, to provide banking entities with

additional time to conform their

activities and investments to the statute

and the final rule. The restrictions and prohibitions of section 13 of the BHC Act became effective on July 21, 2012. 19 The statute provided banking entities a period of two years to conform their

activities and investments to the requirement of the statute, until July 21, 2014. Section 13 also permits the Board to extend this conformance period, one year at a time, for a total of no more than three additional years. 20 Pursuant to this authority and in connection with this rulemaking, the Board has in a separate action extended the conformance period for an additional year until July 21,

2015. 21 The Board will continue to monitor developments to determine

whether additional extensions of the conformance period are in the public
interest, consistent with the statute. Accordingly, the Agencies do not believe that a reproposal or further delay is necessary or appropriate.

Commenters have differing views on the overall economic impacts of section

13 of the BHC Act.

Some commenters remarked that proprietary trading restrictions will have detrimental impacts on the economy such as: Reduction in efficiency of markets, economic growth, and in employment due to a loss in liquidity. 22 In particular, a commenter expressed concern that there may be high transition costs as non-banking entities replace some of the trading activities currently performed by banking entities. 23 Another commenter focused on commodity markets remarked about the potential reduction in commercial output and curtailed resource exploration due to a lack of hedging counterparties. 24 Several

commenters stated that section 13 of the

BHC Act will reduce access to debt markets—especially for smaller companies—raising the costs of capital for firms and lowering the returns on

certain investments. 25 Further, some

commenters mentioned that U.S. banks may be competitively disadvantaged relative to foreign banks due to proprietary trading restrictions and compliance costs. 26


### 5813 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

27 See, e.g., Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; AFR (Nov.
2012); Better Markets (Dec. 2011); Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Paul

Volcker.

28 See Occupy.

29 See Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Paul

Volcker.

30 See Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

31 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Better Markets (Apr. 16, 2012); David McClean; Public Citizen; Occupy.

32 See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz (citing Thomas Phillipon (2011)); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

33 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BoA; ABA (Keating); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Socie  ́te

 ́

Ge

 ́ne

 ́rale; FTN; SVB; ISDA (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Market Regulation; Real Estate Roundtable.

34 See, e.g., Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Randel

Pilo. 35 For example, with respect to the CFTC, Section 15(a) of the CEA requires such consideration only when ‘‘promulgating a regulation under this [Commodity Exchange] Act.’’ This final rule is not promulgated under the CEA, but under the BHC Act. CEA section 15(a), therefore, does not apply.

36 This CFTC Rule is being promulgated exclusively under section 13 of the BHC. Therefore,

the Commission did not conduct a cost benefit
consideration under Section 15(a) of the Commodity Exchange Act. Similarly, Executive Orders 12866 and 13563, referenced by some commenters, do not impose obligations on the

CFTC.

37 See final rule § 75.2(c).

38 The CFTC notes that provisionally registered swap dealers are registered swap dealers subject to all of the regulatory requirements applicable to registered swap dealers except as may otherwise be expressly provided in the CFTC’s regulations. 39 See 77 FR 8332 (Feb 14, 2012).

40 See, e.g., SIFMA (March Letter); Alfred Brock; Occupy the SEC. On the other hand, other commenters stated that restricting proprietary trading activity by banking entities may reduce systemic risk emanating from the financial system and help to lower the probability of the occurrence of another

financial crisis. 27 One commenter contended that large banking entities may have a moral hazard incentive to engage in risky activities without allocating sufficient capital to them, especially if market participants believe

these institutions will not be allowed to

fail. 28 Commenters argued that large banking entities may engage in activities that increase the upside return at the expense of downside loss exposure which may ultimately be borne by Federal taxpayers 29 and that subsidies associated with bank funding may

create distorted economic outcomes. 30 Furthermore, some commenters remarked that non-banking entities may fill much of the void in liquidity provision left by banking entities if banking entities reduce their current trading activities. 31 Finally, somecommenters mentioned that hyperliquidity that arises from, for instance, speculative bubbles, may harm the efficiency and price discovery function

of markets. 32

The Agencies have taken these

concerns into account in the final rule. As described below with respect to particular aspects of the final rule, the Agencies have addressed these issues by reducing burdens where appropriate, while at the same time ensuring that the final rule serves its purpose of promoting healthy economic activity. In that regard, the Agencies have sought to achieve the balance intended by Congress under section 13 of the BHC Act. Several comments suggested that a costs and benefits analysis be performed by the Agencies. 33 On the other hand,

some commenters 34 correctly stated that a costs and benefits analysis is not legally required. 35 However, the Agencies find certain of the information submitted by commenters concerning

costs and benefits and economic effects

to be relevant to consideration of the
rule, and so have considered this information as appropriate, and, on the
basis of these and other considerations, sought to achieve the balance intendedby Congress in section 619 of the DoddFrank Act. The relevant comments are

addressed therein. 36

III. Scope

Under section 13 of the BHCA, the CFTC’s final rule will be applicable to a banking entity for which the CFTC is a ‘‘primary financial regulatory agency’’ for that banking entity, as the term isdefined by section 2(12) of the DoddFrank Act. Accordingly, the final rule may apply to banking entities 37 that are, for example, registered swap dealers, 38 futures commission merchants, commodity trading advisors and commodity pool operators. The CFTC’s final rule may also apply to other types of CFTC registrants that are banking entities, but it is likely that many such other registrants will have little or no activities that would implicate the provisions of the final rule. For example, registered introducing brokers are not likely to undertake proprietary trading or invest in covered funds because their activities are generally limited to brokering. Furthermore, the CFTC’s final rule will not apply to CFTC registrants who are not banking entities.
In addition, it is noted that the CFTC may have overlapping jurisdiction with other Agencies in exercising authority under each Agency’s respective final rules. Finally, it is important to note that the jurisdictional scope of the final rule does not limit the regulatory authority of the CFTC or the other Agencies under other applicable provisions of law.

The CFTC believes that many affiliated banking entities would undertake some or all of the compliance

activities under the final rule on an affiliated enterprise-wide basis. As of the adoption of the final rule, the CFTC estimates that there are approximately 110 registered swap dealers and futures

commission merchants that would be banking entities individually and that grouping these banking entities together based on legal affiliation would result in about 45 different business enterprises.

IV. CFTC-specific comments

In addition to the information sought both by the other Agencies and the CFTC, the CFTC’s proposal 39 included 15 additional questions specifically regarding the approach the CFTC should take in regards to certain sections of the

rule. The relevant sections included provisions that were either directly related to the CFTC (e.g., definition of commodity pool, clearing exemption) and others that appeared not to be (e.g., underwriting, market making of SEC entities, securitization). Many commenters sent general responses that

touched on issues related to these 15 CFTC-specific questions, while other commenters organized their responses by question. 40 The CFTC has considered
these commenters’ views, and has responded as set forth in the relevant

sections below.

V. Overview of Final Rule

The Agencies are adopting this final rule to implement section 13 of the BHC Act with a number of changes to the proposal, as described further below. The final rule adopts a risk-based approach to implementation that relies on a set of clearly articulated characteristics of both prohibited and permitted activities and investments and is designed to effectively accomplish the statutory purpose of reducing risks posed to banking entities by proprietary trading activities and investments in or relationships with covered funds. As explained more fully below in the section-by-section analysis, the final rule has been designed to ensure that banking entities do not engage in prohibited activities or investments and to ensure that banking entities engage in permitted trading and

investment activities in a manner designed to identify, monitor and limit the risks posed by these activities and
investments. For instance, the final rule requires that any banking entity that is engaged in activity subject to section 13 develop and administer a compliance program that is appropriate to the size,


### 5814 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

41 See final rule § 75.3(a).

42 See final rule § 75.3(b).

43 See final rule § 75.3(b)(1)(i).

44 See final rule § 75.3(b)(2).

45 See final rule § 75.3(b)(1)(ii).

46 See final rule § 75.3(b)(1)(iii). scope and risk of its activities and investments. The rule requires the largest firms engaged in these activities to develop and implement enhanced compliance programs and regularly report data on trading activities to the Agencies. The Agencies believe this will permit banking entities to effectively engage in permitted activities, and the Agencies to enforce compliance with
section 13 of the BHC Act. In addition, the enhanced compliance programs will help both the banking entities and the Agencies identify, monitor, and limit risks of activities permitted under section 13, particularly involving banking entities posing the greatest risk to financial stability.

A. General Approach and Summary of

Final Rule

The Agencies have designed the final rule to achieve the purposes of section
13 of the BHC Act, which include prohibiting banking entities from engaging in proprietary trading or acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, or having certain relationships with, a covered fund, while permitting banking entities to continue to provide, and to manage and

limit the risks associated with providing, client-oriented financial services that are critical to capital generation for businesses of all sizes,
households and individuals, and thatfacilitate liquid markets. These clientoriented financial services, which include underwriting, market making, and asset management services, are important to the U.S. financial markets and the participants in those markets. At the same time, providing appropriate latitude to banking entities to provide

such client-oriented services need not
and should not conflict with clear, robust, and effective implementation of the statute’s prohibitions and

restrictions.

As noted above, the final rule takes a multi-faceted approach to implementing section 13 of the BHC Act. In particular,

the final rule includes a framework that clearly describes the key characteristics of both prohibited and permitted activities. The final rule also requires banking entities to establish a comprehensive compliance program designed to ensure compliance with the requirements of the statute and rule in a way that takes into account and reflects the banking entity’s activities, size, scope and complexity. With respect to proprietary trading, the final rule also requires the large firms that are active participants in trading activities to calculate and report meaningful quantitative data that will assist both banking entities and the Agencies in identifying particular activity that warrants additional scrutiny to distinguish prohibited proprietary trading from otherwise permissible

activities.

As a matter of structure, the final rule is generally divided into four subparts and contains two appendices, as

follows:

• Subpart A of the final rule describes the authority, scope, purpose, and relationship to other authorities of the rule and defines terms used commonly throughout the rule;

• Subpart B of the final rule prohibits proprietary trading, defines terms relevant to covered trading activity, establishes exemptions from the prohibition on proprietary trading and limitations on those exemptions, and requires certain banking entities to report quantitative measurements with respect to their trading activities;

• Subpart C of the final rule prohibits or restricts acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, and certain relationships with, a covered fund,

defines terms relevant to covered fund
activities and investments, as well as establishes exemptions from the

restrictions on covered fund activities

and investments and limitations on those exemptions;

• Subpart D of the final rule generally requires banking entities to establish a compliance program regarding compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule, including written policies and procedures, internal controls, a management framework, independent testing of the compliance program, training, and recordkeeping;

• Appendix A of the final rule details the quantitative measurements that certain banking entities may be required to compute and report with respect to certain trading activities;

• Appendix B of the final rule details

the enhanced minimum standards for programmatic compliance that certain banking entities must meet with respect to their compliance program, as required under subpart D.

B. Proprietary Trading Restrictions

Subpart B of the final rule implements the statutory prohibition on proprietary trading and the various exemptions to this prohibition included in the statute.

Section 75.3 of the final rule contains the core prohibition on proprietary trading and defines a number of related terms, including ‘‘proprietary trading’’ and ‘‘trading account.’’ The final rule’s definition of proprietary trading generally parallels the statutory definition and covers engaging as principal for the trading account of a banking entity in any transaction to purchase or sell specified types of

financial instruments. 41

The final rule’s definition of trading

account also is consistent with the statutory definition. 42 In particular, the definition of trading account in the final rule includes three classes of positions.
First, the definition includes the purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments taken principally for the purpose of short-term resale, benefitting from short-term price movements, realizing short-term arbitrage profits, or hedging another trading account position. 43 For purposes of this part of the definition, the final

rule also contains a rebuttable presumption that the purchase or sale of a financial instrument by a banking entity is for the trading account of the banking entity if the banking entity

holds the financial instrument for fewer than 60 days or substantially transfers

the risk of the financial instrument within 60 days of purchase (or sale). 44 Second, with respect to a banking entity subject to the Federal banking agencies’ Market Risk Capital Rules, the definition includes the purchase or sale

of one or more financial instruments subject to the prohibition on proprietary trading that are treated as ‘‘covered positions and trading positions’’ (or hedges of other market risk capital rule covered positions) under those capital rules, other than certain foreign exchange and commodities positions. 45 Third, the definition includes the purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity that is licensed or registered or required to be licensed or registered to engage in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer to the extent the instrument is purchased

or sold in connection with the activities that require the banking entity to be licensed or registered as such or is engaged in those businesses outside of
the United States, to the extent the instrument is purchased or sold in

connection with the activities of such

business. 46

The definition of proprietary trading also contains clarifying exclusions for certain purchases and sales of financial instruments that generally do not involve the requisite short-term trading intent, such as the purchase and sale of financial instruments arising under certain repurchase and reverse repurchase arrangements or securities


### 5815 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

47 See final rule § 75.3(d).

48 See final rule § 75.3(c).

49 See final rule § 75.4(a), (b). 50 See final rule § 75.5.

51 See final rule § 75.5(c).

52 See final rule § 75.6(a).

53 See final rule § 75.6(b).

54 See final rule § 75.6(c).

55 See final rule § 75.6(d).

56 See final rule § 75.6(e). 57 See final rule § 75.7.

58 See final rule § 75.10(b).

59 The Agencies believe that most securitization transactions are currently structured so that the issuing entity with respect to the securitization is not an affiliate of a banking entity under the BHC Act. However, with respect to any securitization that is an affiliate of a banking entity and that does not meet the requirements of the loan securitization exclusion, the related banking entity will need to

Continued lending transactions and securities acquired or taken for bona fide liquidity

management purposes. 47

In section 75.3, the final rule also

defines a number of other relevant terms, including the term ‘‘financial

instrument.’’ This term is used to define the scope of financial instruments subject to the prohibition on proprietary trading. Consistent with the statutory language, such financial instruments
include securities, derivatives, commodity futures, and options on such
instruments, but do not include loans, spot foreign exchange or spot physical

commodities. 48

In section 75.4, the final rule implements the statutory exemptions for underwriting and market making-related activities. For each of these permitted
activities, the final rule defines the exempt activity and provides a number of requirements that must be met in order for a banking entity to rely on the applicable exemption. As more fully
discussed below, these include

establishment and enforcement of a compliance program targeted to the activity; limits on positions, inventory and risk exposure addressing the requirement that activities be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties; limits on the duration of holdings and positions; defined escalation procedures to change or exceed limits; analysis justifying
established limits; internal controls and independent testing of compliance with limits; senior management accountability and limits on incentive compensation. In addition, the final rulerequires firms with significant marketmaking or underwriting activities to report data involving several metrics that may be used by the banking entity and the Agencies to identify trading activity that may warrant more detailed compliance review.

These requirements are generally designed to ensure that the banking entity’s trading activity is limited to underwriting and market making-related

activities and does not include prohibited proprietary trading. 49 These requirements are also intended to work together to ensure that banking entities identify, monitor and limit the risks

associated with these activities.

In section 75.5, the final rule implements the statutory exemption for risk-mitigating hedging. As with the underwriting and market-making exemptions, § 75.5 of the final rule contains a number of requirements that must be met in order for a banking entity to rely on the exemption. These requirements are generally designed to ensure that the banking entity’s hedging activity is limited to risk-mitigating hedging in purpose and effect. 50 Section 75.5 also requires banking entities to
document, at the time the transaction is executed, the hedging rationale for certain transactions that present heightened compliance risks. 51 As with the exemptions for underwriting and market making-related activity, these requirements form part of a broader implementation approach that also includes the compliance program requirement and the reporting of quantitative measurements.

In section 75.6, the final rule implements statutory exemptions for trading in certain government obligations, trading on behalf of customers, trading by a regulated insurance company, and trading by certain foreign banking entities outside of the United States. Section 75.6(a) of the final rule describes the government obligations in which a banking entity may trade, which include U.S. government and agency obligations, obligations and other instruments of specified government sponsored entities, and State and municipal obligations. 52 Section 75.6(b) of the final rule permits trading in certain foreign government obligations by affiliates of foreign banking entities in the United State and foreign affiliates of a U.S. banking entity abroad. 53 Section 75.6(c) of the final rule describes permitted trading on behalf of customers and identifies the types of transactions that would qualify for the exemption. 54 Section 75.6(d) of the final rule describes permitted trading by a regulated insurance company or an affiliate thereof for the general account of the insurance company, and also permits those entities to trade for a separate account of the insurance

company. 55 Finally, § 75.6(e) of the final rule describes trading permitted outside of the United States by a foreign banking entity. 56 The exemption in the final rule clarifies when a foreign banking entity will qualify to engage in such trading pursuant to sections 4(c)(9) or 4(c)(13) of the BHC Act, as required by the statute, including with respect to a foreign banking entity not currently subject to the BHC Act. As explained in detail below, the exemption also provides thatthe risk as principal, the decisionmaking, and the accounting for this activity must occur solely outside of the
United States, consistent with the

statute.

In section 75.7, the final rule prohibits a banking entity from relying on any exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading if the permitted activity would involve or result in a
material conflict of interest, result in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies, or pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or to the financial stability of the United States. 57 This

section also describes the terms material conflict of interest, high-risk asset, and high-risk trading strategy for these

purposes.

C. Restrictions on Covered Fund

Activities and Investments

Subpart C of the final rule implements the statutory prohibition on, directly or indirectly, acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in, or having certain relationships with, a covered fund, as well as the various exemptions to this prohibition included in the statute.

Section 75.10 of the final rule contains the core prohibition on covered fund

activities and investments and defines a number of related terms, including ‘‘covered fund’’ and ‘‘ownership

interest.’’ 58 The definition of covered

fund contains a number of exclusions for entities that may rely on exclusions from the Investment Company Act of 1940 contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act but that are not engaged in investment activities of the type contemplated by section 13 of the BHC Act. These include, for example, exclusions for wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, foreign pension or retirement funds, insurance company separate accounts, and public

welfare investment funds. The final rule also implements the statutory rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) and provides that a securitization of loans,

which would include loan securitization, qualifying asset backed commercial paper conduit, and qualifying covered bonds, is not covered by section 13 or the final rule. 59


### 5816 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

determine how to bring the securitization into compliance with this rule.

60 See final rule § 75.10(d)(6).

61 See final rule § 75.10(b)(6)(ii).

62 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5889 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Hagan).

63 See final rule § 75.12. 64 See final rule § 75.13(a)–(c).

65 See 12 U.S.C. 371c; see also final rule § 75.14. 66 12 U.S.C. 371c–1.

67 See final rule § 75.15. The definition of ‘‘ownership interest’’ in the final rule provides further guidance regarding the types of

interests that would be considered to be an ownership interest in a covered

fund. 60 As described in this Supplementary Information, these interests may take various forms. The definition of ownership interest also explicitly excludes from the definition ‘‘restricted profit interest’’ that is solely performance compensation for services provided to the covered fund by the banking entity (or an employee or former employee thereof), under certain

circumstances. 61 Section 75.10 of the

final rule also defines a number of other relevant terms, including the terms ‘‘prime brokerage transaction,’’ ‘‘sponsor,’’ and ‘‘trustee.’’

In section 75.11, the final rule implements the exemption for organizing and offering a covered fund provided for under section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act. Section 75.11(a) of the

final rule outlines the conditions that must be met in order for a banking entity to organize and offer a covered fund under this authority. These requirements are contained in the

statute and are intended to allow a banking entity to engage in certain traditional asset management and advisory businesses, subject to certain

limits contained in section 13 of the

BHC Act. 62 The requirements are

discussed in detail in Part VI.B.2. of this Supplementary Information. Section 75.11 also explains how these requirements apply to covered funds that are issuing entities of asset-backed securities, as well as implements the statutory exemption for underwriting and market-making ownership interests of a covered fund, including explaining the limitations imposed on such

activities under the final rule.

In section 75.12, the final rule permits a banking entity to acquire and retain,
as an investment in a covered fund, an ownership interest in a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers or holds pursuant to other authority under § 75.11. 63 This section implements section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act and related provisions. Section 13(d)(4)(A) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to make an investment in a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers, or for which it acts as sponsor, for the purposes of (i) establishing the covered fund and providing the fund with sufficient initial equity for investment to permit
the fund to attract unaffiliated investors, or (ii) making a de minimis investment in the covered fund in compliance with applicable requirements. Section 75.12 of the final rule implements this authority and related limitations, including limitations regarding theamount and value of any individual perfund investment and the aggregate value of all such permitted investments. In addition, § 75.12 requires that the aggregate value of all investments in covered funds, plus any earnings on
these investments, be deducted from the capital of the banking entity for purposes of the regulatory capital requirements, and explains how that

deduction must occur. Section 75.12 of

the final rule also clarifies how a banking entity must calculate its compliance with these investment limitations (including by deducting such investments from applicable capital, as relevant), and sets forth how a banking entity may request an extension of the period of time within

which it must conform an investment in a single covered fund. This section also explains how a banking entity must apply the covered fund investment

limits to a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset backed securities or a covered fund that is part of a

master-feeder or fund-of-funds

structure.

In section 75.13, the final rule implements the statutory exemptions described in sections 13(d)(1)(C), (D), (F), and (I) of the BHC Act that permit a banking entity: (i) To acquire and retain an ownership interest in a covered fund as a risk-mitigating hedging activity related to employeecompensation; (ii) in the case of a nonU.S. banking entity, to acquire and retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, a covered fund solely outside the United States; and (iii) to acquire and retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, a covered fund by an insurance company for its general

or separate accounts. 64

In section 75.14, the final rule implements section 13(f) of the BHC Act and generally prohibits a banking entity from entering into certain transactions

with a covered fund that would be a

covered transaction as defined in

section 23A of the Federal Reserve

Act. 65 Section 75.14(a)(2) of the final

rule describes the transactions between a banking entity and a covered fund that remain permissible under the statute and the final rule. Section 75.14(b) of the final rule implements the statute’s requirement that any transaction permitted under section 13(f) of the BHC Act (including a prime brokerage transaction) between the banking entity and a covered fund is subject to section
23B of the Federal Reserve Act, 66 which, in general, requires that the transaction

be on market terms or on terms at least as favorable to the banking entity as a comparable transaction by the banking entity with an unaffiliated third party.

In section 75.15, the final rule prohibits a banking entity from relying on any exemption to the prohibition on acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in, acting as sponsor to, or having certain relationships with, a covered fund, if the permitted activity

or investment would involve or result in
a material conflict of interest, result in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies, or pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or to the financial stability of the United States. 67 This

section also describes material conflict of interest, high-risk asset, and high-risk trading strategy for these purposes.

D. Metrics Reporting Requirement

Under the final rule, a banking entity that meets relevant thresholds specified in the rule must furnish the following quantitative measurements for each of its trading desks engaged in covered trading activity calculated in accordance with Appendix A:

• Risk and Position Limits and Usage;

• Risk Factor Sensitivities;

• Value-at-Risk and Stress VaR;

• Comprehensive Profit and Loss
Attribution;

• Inventory Turnover;

• Inventory Aging; and

• Customer Facing Trade Ratio.

The final rule raises the threshold for metrics reporting from the proposal to capture only firms that engage in significant trading activity, identified at specified aggregate trading asset and liability thresholds, and delays the datesfor reporting metrics through a phasedin approach based on the size of trading assets and liabilities. Specifically, the Agencies have delayed the reporting of metrics until June 30, 2014 for the largest banking entities that, together
with their affiliates and subsidiaries, have trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of which equal or
exceed $50 billion on a worldwide consolidated basis over the previous four calendar quarters (excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the


### 5817 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

68 See final rule § 75.20(d)(3). The final rule includes a shorter period of time for reporting quantitative measurements than was proposed for the largest banking entities. Like the monthly reporting requirement for these firms, this is intended to allow for more effective supervision of their large-scale trading operations.

69 See final rule § 75.20. 70 See final rule § 75.20(f)(1).

71 See final rule § 75.20(f)(2). 72 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(1)(A).

73 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(4).

74 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68857.

75 See, e.g., Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Capital Group; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; IAA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SVB; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Wellington.

76 See Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012);
GE (Feb. 2012); Invesco; Sen. Corker; Chamber (Feb.
2012). United States or any agency of the United States). Banking entities with $25 billion or more in trading assets and liabilities and banking entities with $10 billion or more in trading assets and liabilities would also be required to report these metrics beginning on April
30, 2016, and December 31, 2016, respectively.

Under the final rule, a banking entity required to report metrics must calculate any applicable quantitative measurement for each trading day. Each banking entity required to report must report each applicable quantitative measurement to its primary supervisory Agency on the reporting schedule

established in the final rule unless otherwise requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity. The largest banking entities with $50 billion in consolidated trading assets and liabilities must report the metrics on a monthly basis. Other banking entities required to report metrics must do so on a quarterly basis. All quantitative measurements for any calendar month must be reported no later than 10 days

after the end of the calendar month required by the final rule unless another time is requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity except for a transitional six month period during which reporting will be required no later than 30 days after the end of the calendar month. Banking entities subject to quarterly reporting will be required to report quantitative measurements within 30 days of the end of the quarter, unless another time is requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity in writing. 68

E. Compliance Program Requirement

Subpart D of the final rule requires a banking entity engaged in covered trading activities or covered fund activities to develop and implement a program reasonably designed to ensure and monitor compliance with the prohibitions and restrictions on covered trading activities and covered fund

activities and investments set forth in

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final

rule. 69 To reduce the overall burden of the rule, the final rule provides that a banking entity that does not engage in covered trading activities (other than trading in U.S. government or agency obligations, obligations of specified government sponsored entities, and state and municipal obligations) or

covered fund activities and investments need only establish a compliance program prior to becoming engaged in such activities or making such

investments. 70 In addition, to reduce the burden on smaller banking entities, a banking entity with total consolidated assets of $10 billion or less that engages in covered trading activities and/or

covered fund activities or investments may satisfy the requirements of the final rule by including in its existing compliance policies and procedures appropriate references to the requirements of section 13 and the final rule and adjustments as appropriate given the activities, size, scope and complexity of the banking entity. 71

For banking entities with total assets greater than $10 billion and less than $50 billion, the final rule specifies six elements that each compliance program established under subpart D must, at a minimum, include. These requirements focus on written policies and procedures reasonably designed to ensure compliance with the final rules, including limits on underwriting and market-making; a system of internal controls; clear accountability for compliance and review of limits, hedging, incentive compensation, and other matters; independent testing and
audits; additional documentation for covered funds; training; and recordkeeping requirements.

A banking entity with $50 billion or more total consolidated assets (or a foreign banking entity that has total U.S. assets of $50 billion or more) or that is required to report metrics under Appendix A is required to adopt an enhanced compliance program with more detailed policies, limits, governance processes, independent testing and reporting. In addition, the Chief Executive Officer of these larger banking entities must attest that the banking entity has in place a program reasonably designed to achieve compliance with the requirements of

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final

rule.

The application of detailed minimum standards for these types of banking

entities is intended to reflect the heightened compliance risks of large covered trading activities and covered

fund activities and investments and to provide clear, specific guidance to such banking entities regarding the compliance measures that would be required for purposes of the final rule. VI. Final Rule

A. Subpart B—Proprietary Trading

Restrictions

1. Section 75.3: Prohibition on Proprietary Trading and Related

Definitions

Section 13(a)(1)(A) of the BHC Act prohibits a banking entity from engaging in proprietary trading unless otherwise permitted in section 13. 72 Section 13(h)(4) of the BHC Act defines proprietary trading, in relevant part, as engaging as principal for the trading account of the banking entity in any transaction to purchase or sell, or otherwise acquire or dispose of, a security, derivative, contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or other financial instrument that the Agencies include by rule. 73

Section 75.3(a) of the proposed rule implemented section 13(a)(1)(A) of the BHC Act by prohibiting a banking entity from engaging in proprietary trading unless otherwise permitted under §§ 75.4 through 75.6 of the proposed rule. Section 75.3(b)(1) of the proposed rule defined proprietary trading in accordance with section 13(h)(4) of the BHC Act and clarified that proprietary trading does not include acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian for an unaffiliated third party. The preamble to the proposed rule explained that acting in these types of capacities does not involve trading as principal. 74

Several commenters expressed

concern about the breadth of the ban on proprietary trading. 75 Some of these commenters stated that proprietary trading must be carefully and narrowly defined to avoid prohibiting activities that Congress did not intend to limit and to preclude significant, unintended consequences for capital markets, capital formation, and the broader

economy. 76 Some commenters asserted that the proposed definition could result in banking entities being unwilling to take principal risk to provide liquidity
for institutional investors; could unnecessarily constrain liquidity in secondary markets, forcing asset managers to service client needs through alternative non-U.S. markets; could impose substantial costs for allinstitutions, especially smaller and midsize institutions; and could drive riskVerDate Mar<15>2010 23:00 Jan 30, 2014 Jkt 232001 PO 00000 Frm 00011 Fmt 4701 Sfmt 4700 E:\FR\FM\31JAR3.SGM 31JAR3emcdonald on DSK67QTVN1PROD with RULES3

### 5818 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

77 See Chamber (Feb. 2012).

78 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

79 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BOK; George Bollenbacher;
Credit Suisse (Seidel); NAIB et al.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); JPMC.

80 See Public Citizen.

81 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

82 See generally Occupy; Public Citizen; AFR et

al. (Feb. 2012). The Agencies received over fifteen thousand form letters in support of a rule with few exemptions, many of which expressed a desire to return to the regulatory scheme as governed by the Glass-Steagall affiliation provisions of the U.S. Banking Act of 1933, as repealed through the Graham-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999. See generally Sarah McGee; Christopher Wilson; Michael Itlis; Barry Rein; Edward Bright. Congress rejected such an approach, however, opting instead for the more narrowly tailored regulatory approach embodied in

section 13 of the BHC Act.

83 See final rule § 75.3(a). The final rule also replaces all references to the proposed term ‘‘covered financial position’’ with the term ‘‘financial instrument.’’ This change has no substantive impact because the definition of ‘‘financial instrument’’ is substantially identical to the proposed definition of ‘‘covered financial position.’’ Consistent with this change, the final rule replaces the undefined verbs ‘‘acquire’’ or ‘‘take’’ with the defined terms ‘‘purchase’’ or ‘‘sale’’

and ‘‘sell.’’ See final rule §§ 75.3(c), 75.2(u), (x). 84 See, e.g., Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); GE (Feb. 2012); Invesco; Sen. Corker; Chamber (Feb. 2012); JPMC.

85 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5895–96 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (stating thestatute ‘‘permits underwriting and market-makingrelated transactions that are technically trading for
the account of the firm but, in fact, facilitate the provision of near-term client-oriented financial
services.’’).

86 See ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BOK; George Bollenbacher;
Credit Suisse (Seidel); NAIB et al.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); JPMC.

87 See, e.g., AllianceBernstein; Obaid Syed; Rep.

Bachus et al.; EMTA; NASP; Sen. Hagan; Investure; Lord Abbett; Sumitomo Trust; EFAMA; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; ABA (Keating); ICE; ICSA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Putnam; ACLI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Capital Group; RBC; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Clearing House Ass’n.; Thakor Study. See also CalPERS (acknowledging that the systemic protections afforded by the Volcker Rule come at a price, including reduced liquidity to all
markets).

88 See, e.g.

, AllianceBernstein; Obaid Syed;
NASP; Investure; Lord Abbett; CalPERS; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Citigroup (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Putnam; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

89 See, e.g., Rep. Bachus et al.; Members of Congress (Dec. 2011); Lord Abbett; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); ABA (Abernathy); ICSA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Putnam; ACLI (Feb. 2012); UBS; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Capital Group; Sen. Carper et al.; Fidelity; Invesco; Clearing House Ass’n.; Thakor Study.

90 See, e.g., CalPERS (expressing the belief that a decline in banking entity proprietary trading will increase the volatility of the corporate bond market, especially during times of economic weakness or periods where risk taking declines, but noting that portfolio managers have experienced many different periods of market illiquidity and stating that the market will adapt post-implementation (e.g., portfolio managers will increase their use of CDS to reduce economic risk to specific bond positions as the liquidation process of cash bonds takes more time, alternative market matching networks will be developed)); Morgan Stanley; Capital Group; Fidelity; British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Invesco.

91 See David McClean; Public Citizen; Occupy. In response to commenters who expressed concern about risks associated with proprietary trading activities moving to non-banking entities, the Agencies note that section 13’s prohibition on proprietary trading and related exemptions apply only to banking entities. See, e.g., Chamber (Feb.
2012).

92 See final rule § 75.3(d).

93 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(6). taking to the shadow banking system. 77 Others urged the Agencies to determine that trading as agent, broker, or

custodian for an affiliate was not proprietary trading. 78

Commenters also suggested alternative approaches for defining proprietary trading. In general, theseapproaches sought to provide a brightline definition to provide increased certainty to banking entities 79 or make the prohibition easier to apply in practice. 80 One commenter stated the Agencies should focus on the economics of banking entities’ transactions and ban trading if the banking entity is exposed to market risk for a significant period of time or is profiting from changes in the

value of the asset. 81 Several commenters, including individual members of the public, urged the Agencies to prohibit banking entities from engaging in any kind of proprietary trading and require separation of trading from traditional banking activities. 82 After carefully considering comments, the Agencies are defining proprietary trading as engaging as principal for the trading account of the banking entity in any purchase or sale of one or more

financial instruments. 83 The Agencies believe this effectively restates the statutory definition. The Agencies are not adopting commenters’ suggested modifications to the proposed definition of proprietary trading or the general prohibition on proprietary trading because they generally appear to be inconsistent with Congressional intent.

For instance, some commenters appeared to suggest an approach to defining proprietary trading that would capture only bright-line, speculative proprietary trading and treat the activities covered by the statutory exemptions as completely outside the

rule. 84 However, such an approach would appear to be inconsistent with Congressional intent because, for instance, it would not give effect to the limitations on permitted activities in section 13(d) of the BHC Act. 85 For similar reasons, the Agencies are not adopting a bright-line definition of proprietary trading. 86

A number of commenters expressed concern that, as a whole, the proposed rule may result in certain negative economic impacts, including: (i) Reduced market liquidity; 87 (ii) wider spreads or otherwise increased trading

costs; 88 (iii) higher borrowing costs for

businesses or increased cost of capital; 89 and/or (iv) greater market volatility. 90 The Agencies have carefully considered commenters’ concerns about the proposed rule’s potential impact on overall market liquidity and quality. As

discussed in more detail in Parts VI.A.2. and VI.A.3., the final rule will permit banking entities to continue to provide beneficial market-making and underwriting services to customers, and therefore provide liquidity to customers and facilitate capital-raising. However, the statute upon which the final rule is based prohibits proprietary trading activity that is not exempted. As such, the termination of non-exempt proprietary trading activities of banking entities may lead to some general reductions in liquidity of certain asset classes. Although the Agencies cannot say with any certainty, there is good reason to believe that to a significant extent the liquidity reductions of this type may be temporary since the statute does not restrict proprietary trading activities of other market participants. 91 Thus, over time, non-banking entities may provide much of the liquidity that is lost by restrictions on banking entities’ trading activities. If so, eventually, the detrimental effects of increased trading costs, higher costs of capital, and greater market volatility should be mitigated.

To respond to concerns raised by commenters while remaining consistent with Congressional intent, the final rule has been modified to provide that certain purchases and sales are not proprietary trading as described in more

detail below. 92

a. Definition of ‘‘Trading Account’’

As explained above, section 13 defines proprietary trading as engaging as principal ‘‘for the trading account of the banking entity’’ in certain types of transactions. Section 13(h)(6) of the BHC Act defines trading account as any account used for acquiring or taking positions in financial instruments principally for the purpose of selling in the near-term (or otherwise with the intent to resell in order to profit from short-term price movements), and any such other accounts as the Agencies may, by rule, determine. 93

The proposed rule defined trading account to include three separate accounts. First, the proposed definition


### 5819 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

94 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(i)(A).

95 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(ii).

96 See proposed rule §§ 75.3(b)(2)(i)(B); 75.3(b)(3).

97 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(i)(C).

98 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(i)(C)(5).

99 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR 68860. 100 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii).

101 See ABA (Keating); JPMC.

102 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Paul Volcker; Credit Suisse (Seidel); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Japanese

Bankers Ass’n.

103 See ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Large Int’l Banks with U.S. Operations); Am. Express; BoA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012).

104 See ABA (Keating); JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012).

105 See ABA (Keating); Credit Suisse (Seidel).

106 See ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; Capital Group; IAA;
Credit Suisse (Seidel); ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb.
2012); NAIB et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SVB; Wellington. 107 See ABA (Keating).

108 See NAIB et al.; Occupy; but see Alfred Brock.

109 See ABA; BoA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

110 See BoA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

111 See ISDA (Feb. 2012).

112 See ABA (Keating); BoA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC. The banking agencies adopted a final rule that amends their respective market risk capital rules on August 30,

2012. See 77 FR 53060 (Aug. 30, 2012). The Agencies continued to receive and consider comments on the proposed rule to implement

section 13 of the BHC Act after that time.

113 See ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Large Int’l Banks with U.S. Operations); Am. Express; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

114 See ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Large Int’l Banks with U.S. Operations); JPMC;
State Street (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

115 See ABA (Keating); Am. Express; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC. of trading account included, consistent with the statute, any account that is used by a banking entity to acquire or

take one or more covered financial positions for short-term trading purposes (the ‘‘short-term trading account’’). 94 The proposed rule identified four purposes that would indicate short-term trading intent: (i) Short-term resale; (ii) benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements; (iii) realizing short-term arbitrage profits; or (iv) hedging one or more positions described in (i), (ii) or (iii). The proposed rule presumed that an account is a trading account if it is used to acquire or take a covered financial position (other than a position in the market risk rule trading account or the dealer trading account) that the banking entity holds for 60 days or

less. 95

Second, the proposed definition of trading account included, for certain entities, any account that contains positions that qualify for trading book capital treatment under the banking agencies’ market risk capital rules other than positions that are foreign exchange derivatives, commodity derivatives or contracts of sale of a commodity for delivery (the ‘‘market risk rule trading account’’). 96 ‘‘Covered positions’’ under the banking agencies’ market-risk capital rules are positions that are generally held with the intent of sale in

the short-term.

Third, the proposed definition of trading account included any account used by a banking entity that is a securities dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer to acquire or take positions in connection with its dealing activities (the ‘‘dealer trading account’’). 97 The proposed rule also included as a trading account any account used to acquire or take any covered financial position by a banking entity in connection with the activitiesof a dealer, swap dealer, or securitybased swap dealer outside of the United

States. 98 Covered financial positions held by banking entities that register or

file notice as securities or derivatives dealers as part of their dealing activity were included because such positions are generally held for sale to customers upon request or otherwise support the firm’s trading activities (e.g., by hedging its dealing positions). 99

The proposed rule also set forth four clarifying exclusions from the definition of trading account. The proposed rule provided that no account is a trading

account to the extent that it is used to acquire or take certain positions under repurchase or reverse repurchase arrangements, positions under securities lending transactions, positions for bona fide liquidity management purposes, or positions held by derivatives clearing organizations or clearing agencies. 100

Overall, commenters did not raise significant concerns with or objections to the short-term trading account. Several commenters argued that the definition of trading account should be limited to only this portion of the proposed definition of trading

account. 101 However, a few commenters raised concerns regarding the treatment of arbitrage trading under the proposed

rule. 102 Several commenters asserted that the proposed definition of trading

account was too broad and covered trading not intended to be covered by

the statute. 103 Some of these

commenters maintained that the Agencies exceeded their statutory authority under section 13 of the BHC Act in defining trading account to include the market risk rule trading account and dealer trading account, and argued that the definition should be limited to the short-term trading

account definition. 104 Commenters argued, for example, that an overly broad definition of trading account may

cause traditional bank activities important to safety and soundness of a banking entity to fall within the prohibition on proprietary trading to the detriment of banking organizations,
customers, and financial markets. 105 A number of commenters suggested modifying and narrowing the trading

account definition to remove the implicit negative presumption that any position creates a trading account, or that all principal trading constitutes prohibited proprietary trading unless it qualifies for a narrowly tailored exemption, and to clearly exempt activities important to safety and

soundness. 106 For example, one commenter recommended that a covered financial position be considered a trading account position only if it qualifies as a GAAP trading position. 107 A few commenters requested the Agencies define the phrase ‘‘short term’’

in the rule. 108

Several commenters argued that the

market risk rule should not be referenced as part of the definition of trading account. 109 A few of these commenters argued instead that the capital treatment of a position be used only as an indicative factor rather than a dispositive test. 110 One commenter thought that the market risk rule trading

account was redundant because itincludes only positions that have shortterm trading intent. 111 Commenters also

contended that it was difficult to consider and comment on this aspect of the proposal because the market risk capital rules had not been finalized. 112

A number of commenters objected to the dealer trading account prong of the

definition. 113 Commenters asserted that this prong was an unnecessary and unhelpful addition that went beyond the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act, and that it made the trading account determination more complex

and difficult. 114 In particular, commenters argued that the dealer trading account was too broad and introduced uncertainty because it presumed that dealers always enter into positions with short-term intent. 115 Commenters also expressed concern about the difficulty of applying this test outside the United States and requested
that, if this account is retained, the final rule be explicit about how it applies to a swap dealer outside the United States


### 5820 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

116 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Large Int’l Banks with U.S. Operations); Am. Express; JPMC.

117 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

118 See, e.g., Public Citizen.

119 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

120 See Alfred Brock.

121 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

122 See ABA (Keating); Goldman (Prop. Trading);

NAIB et al.

123 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Norinchukin.

124 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

125 See Alfred Brock.

126 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Paul Volcker. 127 See NAIB et al. See infra Part VI.A.1.d.2. (discussing the liquidity management exclusion).

128 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(6).

129 In response to commenters’ concerns about the meaning of account, the Agencies note the term ‘‘trading account’’ is a statutory concept and does not necessarily refer to an actual account. Trading account is simply nomenclature for the set of transactions that are subject to the final rule’s restrictions on proprietary trading. See ABA (Keating); Goldman (Prop. Trading); NAIB et al.

130 For example, several commenters’ concerns about the potential impact of the proposed definition of trading account were tied to the perceived narrowness of the proposed exemptions.

See ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; Capital Group; IAA; Credit Suisse
(Seidel); ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); NAIB et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SVB; Wellington.

131 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).
However, as discussed in this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**, the Agencies are not prohibiting any trading that involves profiting from changes in the value of the asset, as suggested by this commenter, because permitted activities, such as market making, can involve price appreciation-related

revenues. See infra Part VI.A.3. (discussing the final market-making exemption). 132 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68857–68858.

133 As a result, the Agencies are not excluding arbitrage trading from the trading account definition, as suggested by at least one commenter.
See, e.g., Alfred Brock. and treat U.S. swap dealers consistently. 116

In contrast, other commenters contended that the proposed rule’s definition of trading account was too narrow, particularly in its focus on short-term positions, 117 or should be simplified. 118 One commenter argued that the breadth of the trading account definition was critical because positions excluded from the trading account definition would not be subject to the proposed rule. 119 One commenter supported the proposed definition of trading account. 120 Other commenters

believed that reference to the marketrisk rule was an important addition to the definition of trading account. Some expressed the view that it should include all market risk capital rule covered positions and not just those requiring short-term trading intent. 121

Certain commenters proposed

alternate definitions. Several commenters argued against using the

term ‘‘account’’ and instead advocated applying the prohibition on proprietary trading to trading positions. 122 Foreign banks recommended applying the definition of trading account applicable to such banks in their home country, if the home country provided a clear

definition of this term. 123 These commenters argued that new definitions in the proposed rule, like trading account, would require foreign banking entities to develop new and complex procedures and expensive systems. 124

Commenters also argued that various types of trading activities should be excluded from the trading account definition. For example, one commenter asserted that arbitrage trading should not be considered trading account activity, 125 while other commenters argued that arbitrage positions and strategies are proprietary trading and

should be included in the definition of trading account and prohibited by the

final rule. 126 Another commenter argued that the trading account should include only positions primarily intended, when the position is entered into, to profit from short-term changes in the value of the assets, and that liquidity investments that do not have price changes and that can be sold whenever the banking entity needs cash should be excluded from the trading account

definition. 127

After carefully reviewing the comments, the Agencies have

determined to retain in the final rule the proposed approach for defining trading
account that includes the short-term, market risk rule, and dealer trading

accounts with modifications to address issues raised by commenters. The Agencies believe that this multi-prong approach is consistent with both the language and intent of section 13 of the BHC Act, including the express statutory authority to include ‘‘any such other account’’ as determined by the Agencies. 128 The final definition effectuates Congress’s purpose to generally focus on short-term trading while addressing commenters’ desire for greater certainty regarding the definition of the trading account. 129 In addition, the Agencies believe commenters’ concerns about the scope of the proposed definition of trading account are substantially addressed by the refined exemptions in the final rule for
customer-oriented activities, such as market making-related activities, and the exclusions from proprietary trading. 130 Moreover, the Agencies believe that it is appropriate to focus on the economics of a banking entity’s trading activity to help determine whether it is engaged in proprietary trading, as discussed further below. 131

As explained above, the short-term trading prong of the definition largely incorporates the statutory provisions. This prong covers trading involving short-term resale, price movements, and arbitrage profits, and hedging positions

that result from these activities. Specifically, the reference to short-term

resale is taken from the statute’s definition of trading account. The Agencies continue to believe it is also appropriate to include in the short-term trading prong an account that is used by a banking entity to purchase or sell one

or more financial instruments principally for the purpose of benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements, realizing short-term arbitrage profits, or hedging one or more positions captured by the short-term trading prong. The provisions regarding price movements and arbitrage focus on the intent to engage in transactions to benefit from short-term price movements (e.g., entering into a subsequent transaction
in the near term to offset or close out, rather than sell, the risks of a position held by the banking entity to benefit from a price movement occurring between the acquisition of the underlying position and the subsequent offsetting transaction) or to benefit from differences in multiple market prices, including scenarios where movement in those prices is not necessary to realize the intended profit. 132 These types of transactions are economically equivalent to transactions that are principally for the purpose of selling in

the near term or with the intent to resell to profit from short-term price movements, which are expressly covered by the statute’s definition of trading account. Thus, the Agencies believe it is necessary to include these provisions in the final rule’s short-term trading prong to provide clarity about the scope of the definition and to prevent evasion of the statute and final

rule. 133 In addition, like the proposed rule, the final rule’s short-term trading prong includes hedging one or more of the positions captured by this prong because the Agencies assume that a banking entity generally intends to hold the hedging position for only so long as the underlying position is held.

The remaining two prongs to the trading account definition apply to types of entities that engage actively in trading activities. Each prong focuses on analogous or parallel short-term trading

activities. A few commenters stated these prongs were duplicative of the short-term trading prong, and argued the Agencies should not include these prongs in the definition of trading


### 5821 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

134 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; ABA (Keating);

BoA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

135 See Occupy.

136 12 CFR 225, Appendix E.

137 Accordingly, the Agencies are not using a position’s capital treatment as merely an indicative factor, as suggested by a few commenters. 138 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68860.

139 See final rule § 75.3(b)(1)(iii).

140 An insured depository institution may be registered as a swap dealer, but only the swap dealing activities that require it to be so registered are covered by the dealer trading account. If an insured depository institution purchases or sells a

financial instrument in connection with activities of the insured depository institution that do not trigger registration as a swap dealer, such as lending, deposit-taking, the hedging of business risks, or other end-user activity, the financial instrument is included in the trading account only if the instrument falls within the statutory trading
account under § 75.3(b)(1)(i) or the market risk rule trading account under § 75.3(b)(1)(ii) of the final

rule.

141 See final rule §§ 75.3(b)(1)(i) and (ii).

142 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). 143 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading) (‘‘For instance, a banking entity’s market making-related activities with respect to credit trading may involvemaking a market in bonds (traded in a brokerdealer), single-name CDSs (in a security-based swap dealer) and CDS indexes (in a swap dealer). For regulatory or other reasons, these transactions could take place in different legal entities . . .’’).

144 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Large Int’l Banks with U.S. Operations).

145 See final rule § 75.6(e).

146 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n. account, or should only consider them

as non-determinative factors. 134 To the extent that an overlap exists between the prongs of this definition, the Agencies believe they are mutually reinforcing, strengthen the rule’s effectiveness, and may help simplify the analysis of whether a purchase or sale is conducted for the trading account. 135

The market risk capital prong covers trading positions that are covered positions for purposes of the banking agency market-risk capital rules, as well as hedges of those positions. Trading positions under those rules are positions held by the covered entity ‘‘for the purpose of short-term resale or with the intent of benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements, or to lock-in arbitrage profits.’’ 136 This definition largely parallels the provisions of section 13(h)(4) of the

BHC Act and mirrors the short-term trading account prong of both the proposed and final rules. Covered positions are trading positions under the rule that subject the covered entity to risks and exposures that must be actively managed and limited—a requirement consistent with the purposes of the section 13 of the BHC

Act.

Incorporating this prong into the trading account definition reinforces the consistency between governance of the types of positions that banking entities identify as ‘‘trading’’ for purposes of the market risk capital rules and those that are trading for purposes of the final rule

under section 13 of the BHC Act. Moreover, this aspect of the final rule reduces the compliance burden on banking entities with substantial tradingactivities by establishing a clear, brightline rule for determining that a trade is within the trading account. 137

After reviewing comments, the Agencies also continue to believe that financial instruments purchased or sold by registered dealers in connection with their dealing activity are generally held

with short-term intent and should be captured within the trading account. The Agencies believe the scope of the dealer prong is appropriate because, as noted in the proposal, positions held by a registered dealer in connection with its dealing activity are generally held for sale to customers upon request or otherwise support the firm’s trading activities (e.g., by hedging its dealingpositions), which is indicative of shortterm intent. 138 Moreover, the final rule includes a number of exemptions for the
activities in which securities dealers, swap dealers, and security-based swap dealers typically engage, such as market making, hedging, and underwriting. Thus, the Agencies believe the broad scope of the dealer trading account is balanced by the exemptions that are designed to permit dealer entities to continue to engage in customer-oriented trading activities, consistent with the statute. This approach is designed to ensure that registered dealer entities are engaged in permitted trading activities, rather than prohibited proprietary trading.

The final rule adopts the dealer trading account substantially as proposed, 139 with streamlining that eliminates the specific references to different types of securities and

derivatives dealers. The final rule adopts the proposed approach to covering trading accounts of banking entities that regularly engage in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer outside of

the United States. In the case of both domestic and foreign entities, this provision applies only to financial instruments purchased or sold in

connection with the activities that require the banking entity to be licensed or registered to engage in the business of dealing, which is not necessarily all of the activities of that banking entity. 140 Activities of a banking entity that are not covered by the dealer prongmay, however, be covered by the shortterm or market risk rule trading accounts if the purchase or sale satisfies the requirements of §§ 75.3(b)(1)(i) or (ii). 141

A few commenters stated that they do not currently analyze whether a particular activity would require dealer registration, so the dealer prong of the trading account definition would require banking entities to engage in a new type of analysis. 142 The Agencies recognize that banking entities that are registered dealers may not currently engage in such an analysis with respect to their current trading activities and, thus, this may represent a new regulatory requirement for these entities. If the regulatory analysis otherwise engaged in by banking entities is substantially similar to the dealer prong analysis required under the trading account definition, then any increased compliance burden could be

small or insubstantial. 143

In response to commenters’ concerns regarding the application of this prong to banking entities acting as dealers in jurisdictions outside the United

States, 144 the Agencies continue to believe including the activities of a banking entity engaged in the businessof a dealer, swap dealer, or securitybased swap dealer outside of the United
States, to the extent the instrument is purchased or sold in connection with
the activities of such business, is appropriate. As noted above, dealer activity generally involves short-term trading. Further, the Agencies are concerned that differing requirements for U.S. and foreign dealers may lead to regulatory arbitrage. For foreign banking entities acting as dealers outside of the United States that are eligible for the exemption for trading conducted by foreign banking entities, the Agencies believe the risk-based approach to this exemption in the final rule should help address the concerns about the scope of this prong of the definition. 145

In response to one commenter’s suggestion that the Agencies define the term trading account to allow a foreign banking entity to use of the relevant foreign regulator’s definition of this term, where available, the Agencies are concerned such an approach could lead to regulatory arbitrage and otherwise inconsistent applications of the rule. 146 The Agencies believe this commenter’s general concern about the impact of the statute and rule on foreign banking

entities’ activities outside the United States should be substantially addressed by the exemption for trading conducted by foreign banking entities under § 75.6(e) of the final rule.


### 5822 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

147 See ABA (Keating).

148 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68859.

149 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

150 See Capital Group.

151 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

152 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen (arguing that one-year demarks tax law covering short term capital gains).

153 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). 154 See Occupy.

155 See Capital Group.

156 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

157 See ABA (Keating); Am. Express; Business Roundtable; Capital Group; ICI (Feb. 2012); Investure; JPMC; Liberty Global; STANY; Chamber
(Feb. 2012).

158 See ABA (Keating); JPMC; Chamber (Feb.
2012).

159 See Am. Express; ICI (Feb. 2012).

160 See ABA (Keating); Chamber (Feb. 2012).

161 See AllianceBernstein; Business Roundtable; ICI (Feb. 2012); Investure; Liberty Global; STANY. Because the rebuttable presumption does not impact the availability of the exemptions for underwriting, market making, and other permitted activities, the Agencies do not believe this provision creates any additional burdens on permissible activities.

162 See Am. Express (noting that most foreign exchange forward transactions settle in less than one week and are used as commercial payment instruments, and not speculative trades); Capital Group.

163 See ABA (Keating). As discussed below in Part VI.C., the Agencies expect to continue to coordinate their supervisory efforts related to section 13 of the BHC Act and to share information as appropriate in order to effectively implement the requirements of

that section and the final rule.

164 See ABA (Keating); AllianceBernstein; Capital Group; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Liberty Global;
JPMC.

165 See NAIB et al.; Capital Group.

166 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n. As noted above, the Agencies believe concerns about the impacts of the definition of trading account on foreign banking entity trading activity outside of the United States are substantially addressed by the final rule’s exemption for proprietary trading conducted by foreign banking entities in final rule § 75.6(e). 167 Id.

168 See final rule § 75.3(b)(2). Commenters did not provide persuasive evidence of the benefits associated with a rebuttable presumption for positions held for greater or fewer than 60 days.

169 See, e.g., Am. Express; Capital Group; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

170 See Capital Group; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Occupy. Finally, the Agencies have declined to adopt one commenter’s recommendation that a position in a

financial instrument be considered a trading account position only if it qualifies as a GAAP trading position. 147 The Agencies continue to believe that formally incorporating accounting standards governing trading securities is not appropriate because: (i) The statutory proprietary trading provisions under section 13 of the BHC Act applies
to financial instruments, such as derivatives, to which the trading security accounting standards may not apply; (ii) these accounting standards permit companies to classify, at their discretion, assets as trading securities,

even where the assets would not otherwise meet the definition of trading securities; and (iii) these accounting standards could change in the future without consideration of the potential impact on section 13 of the BHC Act

and these rules. 148

b. Rebuttable Presumption for the ShortTerm Trading Account

The proposed rule included a rebuttable presumption clarifying when a covered financial position, by reason of its holding period, is traded with short-term intent for purposes of the short-term trading account. The Agencies proposed this presumption primarily to provide guidance to banking entities that are not subject to the market risk capital rules or are not covered dealers or swap entities and accordingly may not have experience evaluating short-term trading intent. In particular, § 75.3(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule provided that an account would be presumed to be a short-term trading account if it was used to acquire or take a covered financial position that the banking entity held for a period of 60 days or less.

Several commenters supported the rebuttable presumption, but suggested either shortening the holding period to 30 days or less, 149 or extending the period to 90 days, 150 to several
months, 151 or to one year. 152 Some of these commenters argued that specifying an overly short holding period would be contrary to the statute, invite gamesmanship, 153 and miss speculative positions held for longer than the specified period. 154 Commenters also suggested turning the presumption into a safe harbor 155 or into guidance. 156

Other commenters opposed the inclusion of the rebuttable presumption for a number of reasons and requested

that it be removed. 157 For example, these commenters argued that the presumption had no statutory basis; 158 was arbitrary; 159 was not supported by data, facts, or analysis; 160 would dampen market-making and underwriting activity; 161 or did not take into account the nature of trading in different types of securities. 162 Some commenters also questioned whether the Agencies would interpret rebuttals of the presumption consistently, 163 and stressed the difficulty and costliness of rebutting the presumption, 164 such as

enhanced documentation or other

administrative burdens. 165 One foreign banking association also argued that requiring foreign banking entities to rebut a U.S. regulatory requirement would be costly and inappropriate given that the trading activities of the banking entity are already reviewed by home country supervisors. 166 This commenter also contended that the presumption could be problematic for financial instruments purchased for long-term investment purposes that are closed within 60 days due to market fluctuations or other changed

circumstances. 167

After carefully considering the comments received, the Agencies

continue to believe the rebuttable presumption is appropriate to generally define the meaning of ‘‘short-term’’ for purposes of the short-term trading account, especially for small and regional banking entities that are not subject to the market risk capital rules and are not registered dealers or swap entities. The range of comments the Agencies received on what ‘‘short-term’’ should mean—from 30 days to one year—suggests that a clear presumption would ensure consistency in interpretation and create a level playing field for all banking entities with covered trading activities subject to the short-term trading account. Based on their supervisory experience, the Agencies find that 60 days is an appropriate cut off for a regulatory presumption. 168 Further, because the purpose of the rebuttable presumption is to simplify the process of evaluating whether individual positions are included in the trading account, the Agencies believe that implementing different holding periods based on the type of financial instrument would insert unnecessary complexity into the presumption. 169 The Agencies are not providing a safe harbor or a reverse presumption (i.e., a presumption for positions that are outside of the trading account), as suggested by some commenters, in recognition that some proprietary trading could occur outside of the 60 day period. 170

Adopting a presumption allows the Agencies and affected banking entities

to evaluate all the facts and circumstances surrounding trading activity in determining whether the activity implicates the purpose of the statute. For example, trading in a financial instrument for long-term investment that is disposed of within 60 days because of unexpected developments (e.g., an unexpected

increase in the financial instrument’s volatility or a need to liquidate the instrument to meet unexpected liquidity demands) may not be trading activity covered by the statute. To reduce the costs and burdens of rebutting the


### 5823 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

171 The Agencies believe this should help address

commenters’ concerns about the burdens associated with rebutting the presumption. See ABA (Keating); AllianceBernstein; Capital Group; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Liberty Global; JPMC; NAIB et al.; Capital Group.

172 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Clearing House
Ass’n.; JPMC.

173 The rebuttable presumption covered these trades in the proposal, but the final rule’s use of

‘‘financial instrument’’ rather than ‘‘covered financial position’’ necessitated clarifying this point

in the rule text. See final rule § 75.3(b)(2). See also

Public Citizen.

174 The Agencies do not believe these revisions have a substantive effect on the operation or scope of the final rule in comparison to the statute or proposed rule.

175 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(4). 176 See proposed rule § 75.3(c)(3)(i).

177 See proposed rule § 75.3(c)(3)(ii).

178 See proposed rule § 75.2(l), (q), (w);
§ 75.3(c)(1) and (2).

179 See 7 U.S.C. 1a(47) (defining ‘‘swap’’); 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(68) (defining ‘‘security-based swap’’).

180 7 U.S.C. 1a(24), (25).

181 7 U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(C)(i). 182 7 U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(D)(i).

183 7 U.S.C. 23.

184 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Occupy.

185 See Northern Trust; Morgan Stanley; JPMC; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Am. Express; see also AFR

et al. (Feb. 2012) (arguing that the final rule should explicitly exclude ‘‘spot’’ commodities and foreign exchange).

186 See Alfred Brock.

187 See Credit Suisse (Seidel). presumption, the Agencies will allow a banking entity to rebut the presumption for a group of related positions. 171

The final rule provides three clarifying changes to the proposed rebuttable presumption. First, in response to comments, the final rule replaces the reference to an ‘‘account’’ that is presumed to be a trading account with the purchase or sale of a ‘‘financial

instrument.’’ 172 This change clarifies that the presumption only applies to the purchase or sale of a financial

instrument that is held for fewer than 60 days, and not the entire account that is used to make the purchase or sale.
Second, the final rule clarifies that basis trades, in which a banking entity buys one instrument and sells a substantially similar instrument (or otherwise transfers the first instrument’s risk), are subject to the rebuttable presumption. 173 Third, in order to maintain consistency with definitions used throughout the final rule, the references to ‘‘acquire’’ or ‘‘take’’ a financial position have been replaced with references to ‘‘purchase’’ or ‘‘sell’’

a financial instrument. 174

c. Definition of ‘‘Financial Instrument’’

Section 13 of the BHC Act generally prohibits proprietary trading, which is defined in section 13(h)(4) to mean engaging as principal for the trading account in any purchase or sale of any security, any derivative, any contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, any option on any such security, derivative, or contract, or any other security or financial instruments that the Agencies may, by rule, determine. 175 The proposed rule defined the term ‘‘covered financial position’’ to

reference the instruments listed in section 13(h)(4), including: (i) A security, including an option on a security; (ii) a derivative, including an option on a derivative; or (iii) a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or an option on such a contract. 176 To provide additional clarity, the proposed rule also provided that, consistent with the statute, any position that is itself a loan, a commodity, or foreign exchange or currency was not a covered financial position. 177

The proposal also defined a number

of other terms used in the definition of covered financial position, including commodity, derivative, loan, and security. 178 These terms were generally defined by reference to the Federal securities laws or the Commodity Exchange Act because these existingdefinitions are generally wellunderstood by market participants and have been subject to extensive interpretation in the context of
securities, commodities, and derivatives trading.

As noted above, the proposed rule

included derivatives within the definition of covered financial position. Derivative was defined to include any swap (as that term is defined in theCommodity Exchange Act) and securitybased swap (as that term is defined in the Exchange Act), in each case as further defined by the CFTC and SEC by joint regulation, interpretation, guidance, or other action, in consultation with the Board pursuant to section 712(d) of the Dodd-Frank Act. 179 The proposed rule also included within

the definition of derivative certain other transactions that, although not included within the definition of swap or security-based swap, also appear to be, or operate in economic substance as,
derivatives, and which if not included could permit banking entities to engage in proprietary trading that is inconsistent with the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act. Specifically, the proposed definition also included: (i) Any purchase or sale of a nonfinancial commodity for deferred shipment or delivery that is intended to be physically settled; (ii) any foreign exchange forward or foreign exchange swap (as those terms are defined in the Commodity Exchange Act); 180 (iii) any agreement, contract, or transaction in foreign currency described in section 2(c)(2)(C)(i) of the Commodity Exchange

Act; 181 (iv) any agreement, contract, or transactions in a commodity other than foreign currency described in section 2(c)(2)(D)(i) of the Commodity Exchange Act; 182 and (v) any transactions

authorized under section 19 of the Commodity Exchange Act. 183 In addition, the proposed rule excluded from the definition of derivative (i) any
consumer, commercial, or other agreement, contract, or transaction that

the CFTC and SEC have further defined by joint regulation, interpretation, guidance, or other action as not within the definition of swap or security-based swap, and (ii) any identified banking product, as defined in section 402(b) of the Legal Certainty for Bank Products
Act of 2000 (7 U.S.C. 27(b)), that is subject to section 403(a) of that Act (7
U.S.C. 27a(a)).

Commenters expressed a variety of views regarding the definition of covered financial position, as well as

other defined terms used in that
definition. For instance, some commenters argued that the definition should be expanded to include transactions in spot commodities or foreign currency, even though those instruments are not included by the

statute. 184 Other commenters strongly supported the exclusion of spot commodity and foreign currency

transactions as consistent with the statute, arguing that these instruments are part of the traditional business of banking and do not represent the types of instruments that Congress designed

section 13 to address. These commenters argued that including spot commodities and foreign exchange

within the definition of covered financial position in the final rule would put U.S. banking entities at a competitive disadvantage and prevent them from conducting routine banking operations. 185 One commenter argued that the proposed definition of covered financial position was effective and

recommended that the definition should not be expanded. 186 Another commenter argued that an instrument be considered to be a spot foreign exchange
transaction, and thus not a covered financial position, if it settles within 5 days of purchase. 187 Another commenter argued that covered financial positions used in interaffiliate transactions should expressly be excluded because they are used for


### 5824 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

188 See GE (Feb. 2012).

189 See JPMC; BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

190 See Govt. of Japan/Bank of Japan; Japanese
Bankers Ass’n.; see also Norinchukin.

191 See Northern Trust; Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

192 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

193 See id.

194 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
ISDA (Feb. 2012). 195 See Alfred Brock.

196 The definition of security under the final rule is the same as under the proposal. See final rule § 75.2(y).

197 See final rule § 75.3(c)(1).

198 The definition of loan, as well as comments received regarding that definition, is discussed in

detail below in Part VI.B.1.c.8.a.

199 See final rule § 75.3(c)(2).

200 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Occupy.

201 See Occupy.

202 Several commenters supported the exclusion of spot commodity and foreign currency

transactions as consistent with the statute. See Northern Trust; Morgan Stanley; State Street (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Am. Express;

see also AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (arguing that the final rule should explicitly exclude ‘‘spot’’ commodities and foreign exchange). One commenter stated that the proposed definition should not be expanded. See Alfred Brock. With respect to the exclusion for loans, the Agencies note this is generally consistent with the rule of statutory construction regarding the sale and securitization of

loans. See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(2).

203 See JPMC; BAC; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Govt. of Japan/Bank of Japan; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.;
Northern Trust; see also Norinchukin.

204 See final rule § 75.2(h), (y).

205 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
ISDA (Feb. 2012).

206 See CFTC and SEC, Further Definition of‘‘Swap,’’ ‘‘Security-Based Swap,’’ and ‘‘SecurityBased Swap Agreement’’; Mixed swaps; Security Based Swap Agreement Recordkeeping, 78 FR 48208 (Aug. 13, 2012). internal risk management purposes and not for proprietary trading. 188

Some commenters requested that the

final rule exclude additional

instruments from the definition of covered financial position. For instance, some commenters requested that the Agencies exclude commodity and foreign exchange futures, forwards, and swaps, arguing that these instruments typically have a commercial and not financial purpose and that making them subject to the prohibitions of section 13 would negatively affect the spot market

for these instruments. 189 A few commenters also argued that foreign exchange swaps and forwards are used in many jurisdictions to provide U.S. dollar-funding for foreign banking

entities and that these instruments should be excluded since they contribute to the stability and liquidity of the market for spot foreign exchange. 190 Other commenters contended that foreign exchange swaps

and forwards should be excluded because they are an integral part of banking entities’ ability to provide trust and custody services to customers and are necessary to enable banking entities to deal in the exchange of currencies for

customers. 191

One commenter argued that the

inclusion of certain instruments within
the definition of derivative, such as purchases or sales of nonfinancial commodities for deferred shipment or delivery that are intended to be physically settled, was inappropriate. 192 This commenter alleged that these

instruments are not derivatives but

should instead be viewed as contracts for purchase of specific commodities to

be delivered at a future date. This commenter also argued that the Agencies do not have authority under

section 13 to include these instruments

as ‘‘other securities or financial instruments’’ subject to the prohibition on proprietary trading. 193

Some commenters also argued that, because the CFTC and SEC had not yet finalized their definitions of swap and security-based swap, it was inappropriate to use those definitions as part of the proposed definition of

derivative. 194 One commenter argued

that the definition of derivative was effective, although this commenter argued that the final rule should not cross-reference the definition of swap and security-based swap under the

Federal commodities and securities

laws. 195

After carefully considering the comments received on the proposal, the final rule continues to apply the prohibition on proprietary trading to the same types of instruments as listed in the statute and the proposal, which the

final rule defines as ‘‘financial
instrument.’’ Under the final rule, a financial instrument is defined as: (i) A security, including an option on a security; 196 (ii) a derivative, including an option on a derivative; or (iii) a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery. 197 The final rule excludes from the definition of financial instrument: (i)
A loan; 198 (ii) a commodity that is not an excluded commodity (other than foreign exchange or currency), a
derivative, a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or an option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery; or (iii) foreign exchange or currency. 199 An excluded commodity is defined to have the same meaning as in section 1a(19) of the Commodity Exchange Act.

The Agencies continue to believe that
these instruments and transactions,

which are consistent with those referenced in section 13(h)(4) of the BHC Act as part of the statutory definition of proprietary trading, represent the type of financial instruments which the proprietary trading prohibition of section 13 was designed to cover. While some commenters requested that this definition be expanded to include spot

transactions 200 or loans, 201 the Agencies do not believe that it is appropriate at this time to expand the scope of instruments subject to the ban on proprietary trading. 202 Similarly, while some commenters requested that
certain other instruments, such as foreign exchange swaps and forwards,

be excluded from the definition of
financial instrument, 203 the Agencies believe that these instruments appear to be, or operate in economic substance as, derivatives (which are by statute included within the scope of instruments subject to the prohibitions of section 13). If these instruments were

not included within the definition of financial instrument, banking entities could use them to engage in proprietary trading that is inconsistent with the purpose and design of section 13 of the

BHC Act.

As under the proposal, loans, commodities, and foreign exchange or currency are not included within the scope of instruments subject to section 13. The exclusion of these types of

instruments is intended to eliminate potential confusion by making clear that the purchase and sale of loans, commodities, and foreign exchange or currency—none of which are referred to in section 13(h)(4) of the BHC Act—are outside the scope of transactions to which the proprietary trading restrictions apply. For example, the spot purchase of a commodity would meet
the terms of the exclusion, but the acquisition of a futures position in the same commodity would not qualify for

the exclusion.

The final rule also adopts the definitions of security and derivative as proposed. 204 These definitions, which reference existing definitions under the

Federal securities and commodities laws, are generally well-understood by market participants and have been subject to extensive interpretation in the

context of securities and commodities trading activities. While some commenters argued that it would be inappropriate to use the definition of swap and security-based swap because those terms had not yet been finalized pursuant to public notice and

comment, 205 the CFTC and SEC have subsequently finalized those definitions after receiving extensive public comment on the rulemakings. 206 The


### 5825 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

207 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(A).

208 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(B). The language that described securities lending transactions in the proposed rule generally mirrored that contained in Rule 3a5–3 under the Exchange

Act. See 17 CFR 240.3a5–3.

209 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68862. 210 See generally ABA (Keating); Alfred Brock; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); ICBA; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Norinchukin; RBC; RMA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; UBS; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). See infra Part VI.A.d.10. for the discussion of commenters’ requests for additional exclusions from the trading account.

211 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

212 See FIA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

213 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; UBS.

214 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); UBS. For example, one commenter suggested that fully collateralized swap transactions should be exempted from the definition of trading account because they serve as funding transactions and are economically similar to repurchase agreements. See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

215 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

216 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

217 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

218 See Public Citizen. Agencies believe that this notice and comment process provided adequate opportunity for market participants to

comment on and understand those terms, and as such they are incorporated

in the definition of derivative under this

final rule.

While some commenters requested that foreign exchange swaps and

forwards be excluded from the

definition of derivative or financial instrument, the Agencies have not done

so for the reasons discussed above. However, as explained below in Part VI.A.1.d., the Agencies note that to the extent a banking entity purchases or sells a foreign exchange forward or swap, or any other financial instrument,

in a manner that meets an exclusion from proprietary trading, that

transaction would not be considered to be proprietary trading and thus would not be subject to the requirements of

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final
rule. This includes, for instance, the purchase or sale of a financial instrument by a banking entity acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian, or the purchase or sale of a security as part

of a bona fide liquidity management plan.

d. Proprietary Trading Exclusions

The proposed rule contained four exclusions from the definition of trading account for categories of transactions that do not fall within the scope of section 13 of the BHC Act because they do not involve short-term trading activities subject to the statutory prohibition on proprietary trading. These exclusions covered the purchase

or sale of a financial instrument under certain repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and securities lending arrangements, for bona fide liquidity management purposes, and by a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization in connection with clearing

activities.

As discussed below, the final rule provides exclusions for the purchase or

sale of a financial instrument under certain repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and securities lending agreements; for bona fide liquidity management purposes; by certain clearing agencies, derivatives clearing organizations in connection with clearing activities; by a member of a clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility engaged in excluded clearing activities; to satisfy existing delivery obligations; to satisfy an obligation of the banking entity in connection with a judicial, administrative, self-regulatory organization, or arbitration proceeding; solely as broker, agent, or custodian; through a deferred compensation or similar plan; and to satisfy a debt previously contracted. After considering
comments on these issues, which are
discussed in more detail below, the Agencies believe that providingclarifying exclusions for these nonproprietary activities will likely promote more cost-effective financial intermediation and robust capital formation. Overly narrow exclusions for these activities would potentially increase the cost of core banking services, while overly broad exclusions would increase the risk of allowing the types of trades the statute was designed to prohibit. The Agencies considered these issues in determining the appropriate scope of these exclusions. Because the Agencies do not believe

these excluded activities involve proprietary trading, as defined by the statute and the final rule, the Agencies do not believe it is necessary to use our exemptive authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act to deem these activities a form of permitted proprietary trading.

1. Repurchase and Reverse Repurchase Arrangements and Securities Lending

The proposed rule’s definition of trading account excluded an account used to acquire or take one or more covered financial positions that arise under (i) a repurchase or reverse repurchase agreement pursuant to which the banking entity had simultaneously agreed, in writing at the start of the transaction, to both purchase and sell a stated asset, at stated prices,

and on stated dates or on demand with the same counterparty, 207 or (ii) a transaction in which the banking entity lends or borrows a security temporarily to or from another party pursuant to a written securities lending agreement

under which the lender retains the

economic interests of an owner of such security and has the right to terminate

the transaction and to recall the loaned security on terms agreed to by the parties. 208 Positions held under these agreements operate in economic

substance as a secured loan and are not based on expected or anticipated movements in asset prices. Accordingly, these types of transactions do not appear to be of the type the statutory definition of trading account was designed to cover. 209 Several commenters expressed support for these exclusions and requested that the Agencies expand

them. 210 For example, one commenter requested clarification that all types of repurchase transactions qualify for the

exclusion. 211 Some commenters requested expanding this exclusion to cover all positions financed by, or transactions related to, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements. 212 Other commenters requested that the exclusion apply to all transactions that are analogous to extensions of credit and are not based on expected or anticipated movements in asset prices, arguing that the exclusion would be too limited in scope to achieve its objective if it is based on the legal form of the underlying contract. 213 Additionally, some commenters suggested expanding

the exclusion to cover transactions that are for funding purposes, including prime brokerage transactions, or for the purpose of asset-liability

management. 214 Commenters also recommended expanding the exclusion to include re-hypothecation of customer securities, which can produce financing structures that, like a repurchase agreement, are functionally loans. 215

In contrast, other commenters argued that there was no statutory or policy justification for excluding repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements from the trading account, and requested that

this exclusion be removed from the final

rule. 216 Some of these commenters argued that repurchase agreements could be used for prohibited proprietary trading 217 and suggested that, if repurchase agreements are excluded from the trading account, documentation detailing the use of liquidity derived from repurchase agreements should be required. 218 These


### 5826 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

219 See Public Citizen.

220 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

221 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

222 Congress recognized that repurchase agreements and securities lending agreements are loans or extensions of credit by including them in the legal lending limit. See Dodd–Frank Act section 610 (amending 12 U.S.C. 84b). The Agencies believe

the conditions of the final rule’s exclusions for repurchase agreements and securities lending agreements identify those activities that do not in normal practice represent proprietary trading and, thus, the Agencies decline to provide additional requirements for these activities, as suggested by

some commenters. See Public Citizen; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

223 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; UBS. 224 See CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8348.

225 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(C).

226 Id.

227 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(C)( 1 )–(5).

228 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68862. 229 See ABA (Keating); BoA; CH/ABASA; JPMC. See supra Part VI.A.1.b. (discussing the rebuttable presumption under § 75.3(b)(2) of the final rule); see also supra Part VI.A.1.a. (discussing the market risk rule trading account under § 75.3(b)(1)(ii) of the
final rule).

230 See CH/ABASA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

231 See CH/ABASA; JPMC; State Street (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). See also BaFin/

Deutsche Bundesbank.

232 See BoA; JPMC; RBC.

233 See ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); JPMC; NAIB et al.; State Street (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price.

234 See ABA (Keating); CH/ABASA; JPMC.

235 See ABA (Keating); BoA; CH/ABASA; JPMC.

236 See ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf
of Canadian Banks); BoA; CH/ABASA. commenters suggested that unless the liquidity is used to secure a position for a willing customer, repurchase agreements should be regarded as a strong indicator of proprietary trading. 219 As an alternative, commenters suggested that the Agencies instead use their exemptive authority pursuant to section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act to permit repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions so that such transactions must comply with the statutory limits on material conflicts of interests and high-risks assets and trading strategies, and compliance requirements under the final rule. 220 These commenters urged the Agencies to specify permissible collateral types,
haircuts, and contract terms for securities lending agreements and require that the investment of proceeds from securities lending transactions be limited to high-quality liquid assets in order to limit potential risks of these

activities. 221

After considering the comments received, the Agencies have determined to exclude repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and securities lending agreements from the definition of proprietary trading under the final

rule. The final rule defines these terms subject to the same conditions as were in the proposal. This determination recognizes that repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and securities lending agreements excluded from the definition operate in economic

substance as secured loans and do not in normal practice represent proprietary trading. 222 The Agencies will, however,

monitor these transactions to ensure this exclusion is not used to engage in prohibited proprietary trading activities.

To avoid evasion of the rule, the Agencies note that, in contrast to certain commenters’ requests, 223 only the transactions pursuant to the repurchase agreement, reverse repurchase agreement, or securities lending agreement are excluded. For example, the collateral or position that is being financed by the repurchase or reverse repurchase agreement is not excluded and may involve proprietary trading. The Agencies further note that if a banking entity uses a repurchase or reverse repurchase agreement to finance a purchase of a financial instrument, other transactions involving that financial instrument may not qualify for

this exclusion. 224 Similarly, short positions resulting from securities lending agreements cannot rely upon this exclusion and may involve proprietary trading.

Additionally, the Agencies have

determined not to exclude all transactions, in whatever legal form that may be construed to be an extension of credit, as suggested by commenters,

because such a broad exclusion would be too difficult to assess for compliance and would provide significant opportunity for evasion of the prohibitions in section 13 of the BHC

Act.

2. Liquidity Management Activities

The proposed definition of trading

account excluded an account used to acquire or take a position for the purpose of bona fide liquidity management, subject to certain requirements. 225 The preamble to the proposed rule explained that bona fide liquidity management seeks to ensure that the banking entity has sufficient, readily-marketable assets available to meet its expected near-term liquidity needs, not to realize short-term profit or benefit from short-term price

movements. 226

To curb abuse, the proposed rule required that a banking entity acquire or take a position for liquidity management

in accordance with a documented liquidity management plan that meets

five criteria. 227 Moreover, the Agencies stated in the preamble that liquidity management positions that give rise to appreciable profits or losses as a result of short-term price movements would be subject to significant Agency scrutiny and, absent compelling explanatory
facts and circumstances, would be considered proprietary trading. 228

The Agencies received a number of comments regarding the exclusion. Many commenters supported the exclusion of liquidity management activities from the definition of trading account as appropriate and necessary.
At the same time, some commenters expressed the view that the exclusion was too narrow and should be replaced with a broader exclusion permitting trading activity for asset-liability management (‘‘ALM’’). Commenters argued that two aspects of the proposed rule’s definition of ‘‘trading account’’

would cause ALM transactions to fall within the prohibition on proprietary trading—the 60-day rebuttable presumption and the reference to the market risk rule trading account. 229 For example, commenters expressed concern that hedging transactions associated with a banking entity’s residential mortgage pipeline and mortgage servicing rights, and managing credit risk, earnings at risk, capital, asset-liability mismatches, and foreign exchange risks would be among positions that may be held for 60 days

or less. 230 These commenters contended that the exclusion for liquidity management and the activity exemptions for risk-mitigating hedging and trading in U.S. government obligations would not be sufficient to permit a wide variety of ALM

activities. 231 These commenters contended that prohibiting trading for ALM purposes would be contrary to the goals of enhancing sound risk management, the safety and soundness of banking entities, and U.S. financial stability, 232 and would limit banking entities’ ability to manage liquidity. 233

Some commenters argued that the requirements of the exclusion would not provide a banking entity with sufficient flexibility to respond to liquidity needs arising from changing economic

conditions. 234 Some commenters argued the requirement that any position taken for liquidity management purposes be limited to the banking entity’s near-term funding needs failed to account for longer-term liquidity management requirements. 235 These commenters further argued that the requirements of the liquidity management exclusion might not be synchronized with the Basel III framework, particularly with respect to the liquidity coverage ratio if

‘‘near-term’’ is considered less than 30 days. 236


### 5827 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

237 See T. Rowe Price.

238 See State Street (Feb. 2012).

239 See State Street (Feb. 2012); JPMC. See also Part VI.A.1.d.10. (discussing commenter requests to
exclude inter-affiliate transactions).

240 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

241 See Occupy.

242 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

243 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

244 See section 165(b)(1)(A)(ii) of the Dodd-Frank
Act; Enhanced Prudential Standards, 77 FR 644 at 645 (Jan. 5, 2012), available at http://www.gpo.gov/ fdsys/pkg/FR-2012-01-05/pdf/2011-33364.pdf ; see also Enhanced Prudential Standards, 77 FR 76678
at 76682 (Dec. 28, 2012), available at http:// www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/FR-2012-12-28/pdf/2012- 30734.pdf

. 245 To ensure sufficient flexibility to respond to liquidity needs arising from changing economic times, a banking entity should envision and address a range of liquidity circumstances in its liquidity management plan, and provide a mechanism for periodically reviewing and revising the liquidity management plan.

246 The requirement to use highly liquid

instruments is consistent with the focus of the clarifying exclusion on a banking entity’s near-term liquidity needs. Thus, the final rules do not include commenters’ suggested revisions to this requirement. See Clearing House Ass’n.; see also Occupy; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). The Agencies decline to identify particular types of securities that will be considered highly liquid for purposes of the exclusion, as requested by some commenters, in recognition that such a determination will depend on the facts and

circumstances. See T. Rowe Price; State Street (Feb.
2012).

247 The Agencies plan to construe ‘‘near-term funding needs’’ in a manner that is consistent with the laws, regulations, and issuances related to liquidity risk management. See, e.g., Liquidity Coverage Ratio: Liquidity Risk Measurement, Standards, and Monitoring, 78 FR 71818 (Nov. 29, 2013); Basel Committee on Bank Supervision, Basel III: The Liquidity Coverage Ratio and Liquidity Risk Management Tools (January 2013) available at http://www.bis.org/publ/bcbs238.htm. The Agencies believe this should help address commenters’ concerns about the proposed requirement. See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); CH/ABASA;
BoA; JPMC.

248 See, e.g., Staff of S. Comm. on Homeland Sec.

& Governmental Affairs Permanent Subcomm. on Investigations, 113th Cong., Report: JPMorgan Chase Whale Trades: A Case History of Derivatives Risks and Abuses (Apr. 11, 2013), available athttp://www.hsgac.senate.gov/download/reportjpmorgan-chase-whale-trades-a-case-history-ofderivatives-risks-and-abuses-march-15-2013

. Commenters also requested

clarification on a number of other issues regarding the exclusion. For example, one commenter requested clarification that purchases and sales of U.S. registered mutual funds sponsored by a banking entity would be permissible. 237 Another commenter requested clarification that the deposits resulting from providing custodial services that are invested largely in high-quality

securities in conformance with the banking entity’s ALM policy would not be presumed to be ‘‘short-term trading’’

under the final rule. 238 Commenters also urged that the final rule not prohibit

interaffiliate transactions essential to the

ALM function. 239

In contrast, other commenters supported the liquidity management

exclusion criteria 240 and suggested tightening these requirements. For example, one commenter recommended that the rule require that investments made under the liquidity management exclusion consist only of high-quality liquid assets. 241 Other commenters argued that the exclusion for liquidity management should be eliminated. 242 One commenter argued that there was no need to provide a special exemption for liquidity management or ALM activities given the exemptions for trading in government obligations and risk-mitigating hedging activities. 243

After carefully reviewing the comments received, the Agencies have adopted the proposed exclusion for liquidity management with several important modifications. As limited below, liquidity management activity serves the important prudential purpose, recognized in other provisions

of the Dodd-Frank Act and in rules and guidance of the Agencies, of ensuring banking entities have sufficient liquidity to manage their short-term liquidity

needs. 244

To ensure that this exclusion is not misused for the purpose of proprietary trading, the final rule imposes a number of requirements. First, the liquidity management plan of the banking entity must be limited to securities (in keeping with the liquidity management requirements proposed by the Federal banking agencies) and specifically contemplate and authorize the particular securities to be used for liquidity management purposes; describe the amount, types, and risks of

securities that are consistent with the entity’s liquidity management; and the liquidity circumstances in which the particular securities may or must be

used. 245 Second, any purchase or sale of securities contemplated and authorized by the plan must be principally for the purpose of managing the liquidity of the banking entity, and not for the purpose of short-term resale, benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements, realizing short-term arbitrage profits, or hedging a position taken for such short-term purposes. Third, the plan must require that any securities purchased or sold for liquidity management purposes be highly liquid and limited to instruments
the market, credit and other risks of which the banking entity does not reasonably expect to give rise to appreciable profits or losses as a result of short-term price movements. 246 Fourth, the plan must limit any securities purchased or sold for liquidity management purposes to an

amount that is consistent with the banking entity’s near-term funding needs, including deviations from normal operations of the banking entity or any affiliate thereof, as estimated and documented pursuant to methods specified in the plan. 247 Fifth, the banking entity must incorporate into its compliance program internal controls, analysis and independent testing designed to ensure that activities undertaken for liquidity management purposes are conducted in accordance with the requirements of the final rule and the entity’s liquidity management plan. Finally, the plan must be consistent with the supervisory requirements, guidance and expectations regarding liquidity management of the Agency responsible for regulating the banking entity.

The final rule retains the provision that the financial instruments purchased and sold as part of a liquidity management plan be highly liquid and not reasonably expected to give rise to appreciable profits or losses as a result of short-term price movements. This requirement is consistent with the Agencies’ expectation for liquidity management plans in the supervisory context. It is not intended to prevent firms from recognizing profits (or losses) on instruments purchased and sold for liquidity management purposes. Instead, this requirement is intended to underscore that the purpose of these transactions must be liquidity management. Thus, the timing of purchases and sales, the types and duration of positions taken and the incentives provided to managers of these purchases and sales must all indicate that managing liquidity, and not taking short-term profits (or limiting short-term losses), is the purpose of

these activities.

The exclusion as adopted does not apply to activities undertaken with the stated purpose or effect of hedging aggregate risks incurred by the bankingentity or its affiliates related to assetliability mismatches or other general market risks to which the entity or affiliates may be exposed. Further, the exclusion does not apply to any trading activities that expose banking entities to

substantial risk from fluctuations in
market values, unrelated to the management of near-term funding needs, regardless of the stated purpose

of the activities. 248

Overall, the Agencies do not believe

that the final rule will stand as an obstacle to or otherwise impair the ability of banking entities to manage the


### 5828 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

249 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); BoA; CH/ABASA;
JPMC.

250 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(D).

251 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68863.

252 See Allen & Overy (Clearing); Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
State Street (Feb. 2012). 253 See IIB/EBF.

254 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

255 ‘‘Clearing agency’’ is defined in the final rule

with reference to the definition of this term in the Exchange Act. See final rule § 75.3(e)(2). ‘‘Derivatives clearing organization’’ is defined in the final rule as (i) a derivatives clearing organization registered under section 5b of the Commodity Exchange Act; (ii) a derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to CFTC regulation, is exempt from the registration requirements under section 5b of the Commodity Exchange Act; or (iii) a foreign derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to CFTC regulation, is permitted to clear for a foreign board of trade that is registered with

the CFTC.

256 See IIB/EBF; BNY Mellon et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

257 See IIB/EBF; Allen & Overy (Clearing). 258 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing); Goldman (Prop. Trading);
State Street (Feb. 2012).

259 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(2)(iii)(D).

260 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing); Goldman (Prop. Trading);
State Street (Feb. 2012).

261 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing); State Street (Feb. 2012).

See also ISDA (Feb. 2012).

262 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing).

263 See Allen & Overy (Clearing).

264 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). risks of their businesses and operate in a safe and sound manner. Banking entities engaging in bona fide liquidity management activities generally do not purchase or sell financial instruments for the purpose of short-term resale orto benefit from actual or expected shortterm price movements. The Agencies
have determined, in contrast to certain commenters’ requests, not to expand this liquidity management provision to broadly allow asset-liability management, earnings management, or scenario hedging. 249 To the extent these activities are for the purpose of profiting from short-term price movements or to hedge risks not related to short-term funding needs, they represent proprietary trading subject to section 13
of the BHC Act and the final rule; the activity would then be permissible only if it meets all of the requirements for an exemption, such as the risk-mitigating hedging exemption, the exemption for trading in U.S. government securities, or another exemption.

3. Transactions of Derivatives Clearing Organizations and Clearing Agencies

A banking entity that is a central counterparty for clearing and settlement activities engages in the purchase and

sale of financial instruments as an integral part of clearing and settling those instruments. The proposed definition of trading account excluded an account used to acquire or take one or more covered financial positions by a derivatives clearing organization registered under the Commodity Exchange Act or a clearing agency registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 in connection with clearing derivatives or securities

transactions. 250 The preamble to the proposed rule noted that the purpose of these transactions is to provide a clearing service to third parties, not toprofit from short-term resale or shortterm price movements. 251

Several commenters supported the proposed exclusion for derivatives clearing organizations and urged the Agencies to expand the exclusion to cover a banking entity’s clearing-related activities, such as clearing a trade for a customer, trading with a clearinghouse, or accepting positions of a defaulting member, on grounds that these activities are not proprietary trades and reduce systemic risk. 252 One commenter recommended expanding the exclusion to non-U.S. central counterparties 253 In contrast, one commenter argued that the exclusion for derivatives clearing organizations and clearing agencies had no statutory basis and should instead be a permitted activity under section 13(d)(1)(J). 254

After considering the comments
received, the final rule retains the exclusion for purchases and sales of financial instruments by a banking entity that is a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization in connection with its clearing

activities. 255 In response to

comments, 256 the Agencies have also incorporated two changes to the rule. First, the final rule applies the exclusion to the purchase and sale of financial instruments by a banking entity that is a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization in connection with clearing

financial instrument transactions. Second, in response to comments, 257 the

exclusion in the final rule is not limited to clearing agencies or derivatives clearing organizations that are subject to SEC or CFTC registration requirements and, instead, certain foreign clearing agencies and foreign derivatives clearing organizations will be permitted to rely on the exclusion if they are banking

entities.

The Agencies believe that clearing and settlement activity is not designed to create short-term trading profits. Moreover, excluding clearing and settlement activities prevents the final rule from inadvertently hindering the Dodd–Frank Act’s goal of promoting central clearing of financial transactions. The Agencies have narrowly tailored this exclusion by allowing only central counterparties to use it and only with respect to their clearing and settlement activity.

4. Excluded Clearing-Related Activities of Clearinghouse Members

In addition to the exclusion for trading activities of a derivatives clearing organization or clearing agency, some commenters requested an

additional exclusion from the definition of ‘‘trading account’’ for clearing-related

activities of members of these

entities. 258 These commenters noted that the proposed definition of ‘‘trading account’’ provides an exclusion for positions taken by registered derivatives clearing organizations and registered clearing agencie s 259 and requested a corresponding exclusion for certain clearing-related activities of banking entities that are members of a clearing agency or members of a derivatives clearing organization (collectively, ‘‘clearing members’’). 260

Several commenters argued that certain aspects of the clearing process may require a clearing member to engage in principal transactions. For example, some commenters argued that a clearinghouse’s default management process may require clearing members to take positions in financial instruments upon default of another clearing member. 261 According to commenters, default management processes can involve: (i) Collection of initial and variation margin from customers under an ‘‘agency model’’ of clearing; (ii) porting, where a defaulting clearing member’s customer positions and margin are transferred to another non-defaulting clearing member; 262 (iii) hedging, where the clearing house looks to clearing members and third parties to enter into risk-reducing transactions and

to flatten the market risk associated with the defaulting clearing member’s house positions and non-ported customer positions; (iv) unwinding, where the defaulting member’s open positions may be allocated to other clearing members, affiliates, or third parties pursuant to a mandatory auction process or forced
allocation; 263 and (v) imposing certain obligations on clearing members upon exhaustion of a guaranty fund. 264

Commenters argued that, absent an

exclusion from the definition of ‘‘trading account,’’ some of these clearing-related activities could be considered prohibited proprietary trading under the proposal. Two commenters specifically contended that


### 5829 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

265 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (arguing that the SEC has suggested that entities that collect margins from customers for clearedswaps may be required to be registered as brokerdealers); State Street (Feb. 2012).

266 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012).

267 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); State Street (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing).

268 See Allen & Overy (Clearing).

269 See Allen & Overy (Clearing); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). These commenters stated that, in order to ensure that a clearing member is providing accurate end-of-day prices for its open positions, a clearing house may require the member to provide firm bids for such positions, which may be tested through a ‘‘forced trade’’ with

another member. See id.; see also ISDA (Feb. 2012).

270 For example, Title VII of the Dodd-Frank Act mandates the central clearing of swaps and security-based swaps, and requires that banking entities that are swap dealers, security-based swapdealers, major swap participants or major securitybased swap participants collect variation margin from many counterparties on a daily basis for their swap or security-based swap activity. See 7 U.S.C. 2(h); 15 U.S.C. 78c–3; 7 U.S.C. 6s(e); 15 U.S.C. 78o– 10(e); Margin Requirements for Uncleared Swaps for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants, 76 FR 23732 (Apr. 28, 2011). Additionally, the SEC’s Rule 17Ad–22(d)(11) requires that each registered clearing agency establish, implement, maintain and enforce policies and procedures that set forth the clearing agency’s default management procedures.

See 17 CFR 240.17Ad–22(d)(11). See also Exchange
Act Release No. 68,080 (Oct. 12, 2012), 77 FR
66220, 66,283 (Nov. 2, 2012).

271 Centralized clearing affects counterparty risk in three basic ways. First, it redistributes counterparty risk among members through mutualization of losses, reducing the likelihood of sequential counterparty failure and contagion. Second, margin requirements and monitoring reduce moral hazard, reducing counterparty risk. Finally, clearing may reallocate counterparty risk outside of the clearing agency because netting may implicitly subordinate outside creditors’ claims relative to other clearing member claims.

272 See Proposed Rule, Cross-Border SecurityBased Swap Activities, Exchange Act Release No. 69490 (May 1, 2013), 78 FR 30968, 31,162–31,163 (May 23, 2013).

273 See final rule § 75.3(d)(5).

274 See final rule § 75.3(e)(7).

275 A number of commenters discussed the default management process and requested an

exclusion for such activities. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Clearing); State Street (Feb. 2012). See also ISDA (Feb. 2012).

276 See Allen & Overy (Clearing) (discussing rules that require unwinding self-referencing transactions through a mandatory auction (e.g., where a firm acquired CDS protection on itself as a result of a merger with another firm)).

277 See Allen & Overy (Clearing); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also ISDA (Feb.
2012).

278 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). the dealer prong of the definition of ‘‘trading account’’ may cause certain of

these activities to be considered proprietary trading. 265 Some commenters suggested alternativeavenues for permitting such clearingrelated activity under the rules. 266Commenters argued that such clearingrelated activities of banking entities should not be subject to the rule because they are risk-reducing, beneficial for the financial system, required by law under certain circumstances (e.g., central clearing requirements for swaps and security-based swaps under Title VII of the Dodd-Frank Act), and not used by banking entities to engage in proprietary trading. 267

Commenters further argued that certain activities undertaken as part of a clearing house’s daily risk management process may be impactedby the rule, including unwinding selfreferencing transactions through a mandatory auction (e.g., where a firm acquired credit default swap (‘‘CDS’’) protection on itself as a result of a merger with another firm) 268 and trade crossing, a mechanism employed by certain clearing houses to ensure the accuracy of the price discovery process in the course of, among other things, calculating settlement prices and margin requirements. 269

The Agencies do not believe that certain core clearing-related activities conducted by a clearing member, often as required by regulation or the rules and procedures of a clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility, represent proprietary trading as contemplated by the statute. For example, the clearing and settlement

activities discussed above are not conducted for the purpose of profiting from short-term price movements. TheAgencies believe that these clearingrelated activities provide important benefits to the financial system. 270 In particular, central clearing reduces counterparty credit risk, 271 which can
lead to a host of other benefits, including lower hedging costs, increased market participation, greater liquidity, more efficient risk sharing that promotes capital formation, and reduced operational risk. 272

Accordingly, in response to comments, the final rule provides that proprietary trading does not include specified excluded clearing activities by a banking entity that is a member of a clearing agency, a member of a derivatives clearing organization, or a member of a designated financial market utility. 273 ‘‘Excluded clearing activities’’ is defined in the rule to identify particular core clearing-related activities, many of which were raised by

commenters. 274 Specifically, the final rule will exclude the following activities by clearing members: (i) Any purchase or sale necessary to correct error trades made by or on behalf of customers with respect to customer transactions that are cleared, provided the purchase or sale is

conducted in accordance with certain regulations, rules, or procedures; (ii) any purchase or sale related to the management of a default or threatened imminent default of a customer, subject to certain conditions, another clearing member, or the clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility
itself; 275 and (iii) any purchase or sale required by the rules or procedures of a clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility that mitigates risk to such agency, organization, or utility that would result from the clearing by a clearing member of security-based swaps that references the member or an

affiliate of the member. 276

The Agencies are identifying specific

activities in the rule to limit the potential for evasion that may arise from a more generalized approach. However, the relevant supervisory Agencies will be prepared to provide further guidance or relief, if appropriate, to ensure that

the terms of the exclusion do not limit the ability of clearing agencies, derivatives clearing organizations, or designated financial market utilities to effectively manage their risks in

accordance with their rules and procedures. In response to commenters requesting that the exclusion be available when a clearing member is required by rules of a clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility to purchase or sell a financial instrument as part of establishing accurate prices to be used by the clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility in its end of day settlement process, 277 the Agencies note that whether this is an excluded clearing activity depends on the facts and circumstances. Similarly, the availability of other exemptions to the rule, such as the market-making exemption, depend on the facts and circumstances. This exclusion applies only to excluded clearing activities of clearing members. It does not permit a banking entity to engage in proprietary trading and claim protection for that activity because trades are cleared or settled through a central counterparty.

5. Satisfying an Existing Delivery Obligation

A few commenters requested additional or expanded exclusions from the definition of ‘‘trading account’’ for covering short sales or failures to

deliver. 278 These commenters alleged that a banking entity engages in this activity for purposes other than to


### 5830 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

279 In order to qualify for this exclusion, a banking entity’s principal trading activity that

results in its own failure to deliver must have been conducted in compliance with these rules.

280 See, e.g., 17 CFR 242.204 (requiring, among other things, that a participant of a registered clearing agency or, upon reasonable allocation, a broker-dealer for which the participant clears trades or from which the participant receives trades for
settlement, take action to close out a fail to deliver position in any equity security by borrowing or purchasing securities of like kind and quantity); 17CFR 240.15c3–3(m) (providing that, if a brokerdealer executes a sell order of a customer and does not obtain possession of the securities from the customer within 10 business days after settlement, the broker-dealer must immediately close the transaction with the customer by purchasing securities of like kind and quantity).

281 See, e.g., NSCC Rule 11, NASDAQ Rule 11810,

FINRA Rule 11810.

282 See, e.g., 17 CFR 242.204 (requiring action to close out a fail to deliver position in an equity security within certain specified timeframes); 17 CFR 240.15c3–3(m) (requiring a broker-dealer to ‘‘immediately’’ close a transaction under certain
circumstances). 283 For example, an administrative agency or SRO may require a broker-dealer to offer to buy securities back from customers where the agency or SRO finds the broker-dealer fraudulently sold

securities to those customers. See, e.g., In re Raymond James & Assocs., Exchange Act Release No. 64767, 101 S.E.C. Docket 1749 (June 29, 2011); FINRA Dep’t of Enforcement v. Pinnacle Partners Fin. Corp., Disciplinary Proceeding No. 2010021324501 (Apr. 25, 2012); FINRA Dep’t of
Enforcement v. Fifth Third Sec., Inc., No. 2005002244101 (Press Rel. Apr. 14, 2009).

284 For instance, section 29 of the Exchange Act may require a broker-dealer to rescind a contract

with a customer that was made in violation of the Exchange Act. Such rescission relief may involve the broker-dealer’s repurchase of a financial

instrument from a customer. See 15 U.S.C. 78cc; Reg’l Props., Inc. v. Fin. & Real Estate Consulting
Co., 678 F.2d 552 (5th Cir. 1982); Freeman v. Marine Midland Bank N.Y., 419 F.Supp. 440
(E.D.N.Y. 1976).

285 See proposed rule § 75.3(b)(1). 286 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

287 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(4). A common or

collective investment fund that is an investment company under section 3(c)(3) or 3(c)(11) will not be deemed to be acting as principal within the meaning of § 75.3(a) because the fund is performing a traditional trust activity and purchases and sells financial instruments solely on behalf of customers as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity, as evidenced by its regulation under 12 CFR part 9 (Fiduciary Activities of National Banks) or similar

state laws.

288 See Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Nov.
2012). benefit from short term price movements and that it is not proprietary trading as defined in the statute. In response to these comments, the final rule provides that a purchase or sale by a banking entity that satisfies an existing delivery obligation of the banking entity or its customers, including to prevent or
close out a failure to deliver, in connection with delivery, clearing, or settlement activity is not proprietary trading.

Among other things, this exclusion will allow a banking entity that is an SEC-registered broker-dealer to take

action to address failures to deliver arising from its own trading activity or the trading activity of its customers. 279 In certain circumstances, SEC-registered broker-dealers are required to take such

action under SEC rules. 280 In addition, buy-in procedures of a clearing agency, securities exchange, or national securities association may require a banking entity to deliver securities if a party with a fail to receive position

takes certain action. 281 When a banking entity purchases securities to meet an existing delivery obligation, it is engaging in activity that facilitates timely settlement of securities transactions and helps provide a purchaser of the securities with the benefits of ownership (e.g., voting and lending rights). In addition, a banking entity has limited discretion to

determine when and how to take action to meet an existing delivery obligation. 282 Providing a limited exclusion for this activity will avoid thepotential for SEC-registered brokerdealers being subject to conflicting or inconsistent regulatory requirements with respect to activity required to meet the broker-dealer’s existing delivery obligations.

6. Satisfying an Obligation in Connection With a Judicial, Administrative, Self-Regulatory Organization, or Arbitration Proceeding

The Agencies recognize that, under certain circumstances, a banking entity may be required to purchase or sell a

financial instrument at the direction of a judicial or regulatory body. For example, an administrative agency or self-regulatory organization (‘‘SRO’’) may require a banking entity to purchase or sell a financial instrument in the course of disciplinary proceedings against that banking entity. 283 A banking entity may also be obligated to purchase or sell a financial instrument in connection with a judicial or arbitration proceeding. 284 Such transactions do not represent trading for short-term profit or gain and do not constitute proprietary trading under the

statute.

Accordingly, the Agencies have determined to adopt a provision clarifying that a purchase or sale of one

or more financial instruments that satisfies an obligation of the banking entity in connection with a judicial, administrative, self-regulatory organization, or arbitration proceeding is not proprietary trading for purposes

of these rules. This clarification will avoid the potential for conflicting or inconsistent legal requirements for banking entities.

7. Acting Solely as Agent, Broker, or

Custodian

The proposal clarified that proprietary trading did not include acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian for an unaffiliated third party. 285 Commenters generally supported this aspect of the proposal. One commenter suggested that acting as agent, broker, or custodian for affiliates should be explicitly excluded from the definition of proprietary trading in the same manner as acting as agent, broker, or custodian for unaffiliated third parties. 286

Like the proposal, the final rule expressly provides that the purchase or

sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian is not proprietary trading because acting in these types of capacities does not involve trading as principal, which is one of the requisite aspects of the statutory definition of proprietary trading. 287 The final rule has been modified to include acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian on behalf of
an affiliate. However, the affiliate must comply with section 13 of the BHC Act and the final implementing rule; and may not itself engage in prohibited proprietary trading. To the extent a banking entity acts in both a principal and agency capacity for a purchase or sale, it may only use this exclusion for the portion of the purchase or sale for which it is acting as agent. The banking entity must use a separate exemption or exclusion, if applicable, to the extent it is acting in a principal capacity.

8. Purchases or Sales Through a Deferred Compensation or Similar Plan

While the proposed rule provided that the prohibition on covered fund activities and investments did not apply to certain instances where the banking entity acted through or on behalf of a pension or similar deferred compensation plan, no such similar treatment was given for proprietary trading. One commenter argued that the proposal restricted a banking entity’s ability to engage in principal-based trading as an asset manager that serves
the needs of the institutional investors, such as through ERISA pension and 401(k) plans. 288

To address these concerns, the final rule provides that proprietary trading does not include the purchase or sale of

one or more financial instrumentsthrough a deferred compensation, stockbonus, profit-sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity that is established


### 5831 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

289 See LSTA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 290 See final rule § 75.3(d)(9).

291 For example, if any margin call is not met in full within the time required by Regulation T, then Regulation T requires a broker-dealer to liquidate securities sufficient to meet the margin call or to eliminate any margin deficiency existing on the day such liquidation is required, whichever is less. See 12 CFR 220.4(d).

292 See SEC Proposed Rule, Capital, Margin, Segregation, Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for Security-Based Swap Dealers, Exchange Act Release No. 68071, 77 FR 70214 (Nov. 23, 2012); CFTC Proposed Rule, Margin Requirements for Uncleared Swaps for Swap Dealers and Major Swap Participants, 76 FR 23732 (Apr. 28, 2011); Banking Agencies’ Proposed Rule, Margin and Capital Requirements for Covered Swap Entities, 76 FR 27564 (May 11, 2011).

293 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (transactions that are not based on expected or anticipated movements in asset prices, such as fully collateralized swap transactions that serve funding purposes); Norinchukin and Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading) (derivatives that qualify for hedge accounting); GE (Feb. 2012) (transactions related to commercial contracts); Citigroup (Feb. 2012) (FX swaps and FX forwards); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (interaffiliate transactions); T. Rowe Price (purchase and sale of shares in sponsored mutual funds); RMA (cash collateral pools); Alfred Brock (arbitrage trading); ICBA (securities traded pursuant to 12 U.S.C. 1831a(f)). The Agencies are concerned that these exclusions could be used to conduct impermissible proprietary trading, and the Agencies believe some of these exclusions are more appropriately addressed by other provisions of the rule. For example, derivatives qualifying for hedge accounting may be permitted under the hedging exemption. 294 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(B). and administered in accordance with the laws of the United States or a foreign sovereign, if the purchase or sale is made directly or indirectly by the banking entity as trustee for the benefit of the employees of the banking entity or members of their immediate family. Banking entities often establish and act as trustee to pension or similar deferred compensation plans for their employees and, as part of managing these plans, may engage in trading activity. The Agencies believe that purchases or sales by a banking entity when acting through pension and similar deferred compensation plans generally occur on behalf of beneficiaries of the plan and consequently do not constitute the type of principal trading that is covered by

the statute.

The Agencies note that if a banking entity engages in trading activity for an unaffiliated pension or similar deferred compensation plan, the trading activity of the banking entity would not be proprietary trading under the final rule to the extent the banking entity was acting solely as agent, broker, or

custodian.

9. Collecting a Debt Previously

Contracted

Several commenters argued that the final rule should exclude collecting and disposing of collateral in satisfaction of debts previously contracted from the definition of proprietary trading. 289 Commenters argued that acquiring and disposing of collateral in satisfaction of debt previously contracted does not involve trading with the intent of profiting from short-term price
movements and, thus, should not be proprietary trading for purposes of this rule. Rather, this activity is a prudent and desirable part of lending and debt

collection activities.

The Agencies believe that the purchase and sale of a financial

instrument in satisfaction of a debt previously contracted does not constitute proprietary trading. The Agencies believe an exclusion for purchases and sales in satisfaction of debts previously contracted is necessary for banking entities to continue to lend to customers, because it allows banking entities to continue lending activity with the knowledge that they will not be penalized for recouping losses should a customer default. Accordingly, the final rule provides that proprietary trading does not include the purchase or sale of

one or more financial instruments in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests

the financial instrument as soon as practicable within the time period permitted or required by the appropriate financial supervisory agency. 290

As a result of this exclusion, banking entities, including SEC-registered
broker-dealers, will be able to continue providing margin loans to their customers and may take possession of margined collateral following a

customer’s default or failure to meet a margin call under applicable regulatory requirements. 291 Similarly, a banking entity that is a CFTC-registered swap dealer or SEC-registered security-based swap dealer may take, hold, and exchange any margin collateral as counterparty to a cleared or uncleared swap or security-based swap
transaction, in accordance with the rules of the Agencies. 292 This exclusion will allow banking entities to comply with existing regulatory requirements regarding the divestiture of collateral

taken in satisfaction of a debt.

10. Other Requested Exclusions

Commenters requested a number of additional exclusions from the trading account and, in turn, the prohibition on proprietary trading. In order to avoid potential evasion of the final rule, the Agencies decline to adopt any exclusions from the trading account

other than the exclusions described

above. 293 The Agencies believe that various modifications to the final rule, including in particular to the exemption for market-making related activities, address many of commenters’ concerns regarding unintended consequences of the prohibition on proprietary trading.

2. Section 75.4(a): Underwriting Exemption

a. Introduction

After carefully considering comments on the proposed underwriting exemption, the Agencies are adopting the proposed underwriting exemption substantially as proposed, but with

certain refinements and clarifications to the proposed approach to better reflect the range of securities offerings that an underwriter may help facilitate on behalf of an issuer or selling security holder and the types of activities an underwriter may undertake in

connection with a distribution of

securities to facilitate the distribution process and provide important benefits to issuers, selling security holders, or purchasers in the distribution. The Agencies are adopting such an approach because the statute specifically permits banking entities to continue providing
these beneficial services to clients, customers, and counterparties. At the same time, to reduce the potential for evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading, the Agencies are requiring, among other things, that the trading desk make reasonable efforts to

sell or otherwise reduce its underwriting position (accounting for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security) and be subject to a robust risk limit structure that is designed to prevent a trading desk from having an underwriting position that exceeds the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.

b. Overview

1. Proposed Underwriting Exemption

Section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act provides an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading for the purchase, sale, acquisition, or disposition of securities and certain

other instruments in connection with underwriting activities, to the extent that such activities are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. 294

Section 75.4(a) of the proposed rule would have implemented this exemption by requiring that a banking entity’s underwriting activities comply with seven requirements. As discussed


### 5832 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

295 See proposed rule § 75.4(a).

296 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

297 See Barclays (stating that the proposed exemption generally effectuates the aims of the statute while largely avoiding undue interference, although the commenter also requested certain technical changes to the rule text); Alfred Brock.

298 See, e.g., Lord Abbett; BoA; Fidelity; Chamber
(Feb. 2012).

299 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); BoA; Fidelity; Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). 300 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (suggesting a safe harbor for underwriting efforts that meet certain low-risk criteria, including that: The underwriting be in plain vanilla stock or bond offerings, including commercial paper, for established business and governments; and the distribution be completed within relevant time periods, as determined by asset classes, with relevant factors being the size of the issuer and the market served); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz (expressing support for a narrow safe harbor for underwriting of basic stocks and bonds that raise capital for real economy firms).

301 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (suggesting that, for example, the exemption plainly prevent high-risk, conflict ridden underwritings ofsecuritizations and structured products and crossreference Section 621 of the Dodd-Frank Act, which prohibits certain material conflicts of interest in
connection with asset-backed securities).

302 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (recommending that the Agencies prohibit banking entities from acting

as underwriter for assets classified as Level 3 under FAS 157, which would prohibit underwriting of illiquid and opaque securities without a genuine external market, and representing that such a restriction would be consistent with the statutory limitation on exposures to high-risk assets).

303 See Occupy.

304 See BoA (recommending that the Agencies establish a strong presumption that all of a banking entity’s activities related to underwriting are permitted under the rules as long as the banking entity has adequate compliance and risk management procedures).

305 See Fidelity (suggested that the rules be revised to ‘‘provide the broadest exemptions possible under the statute’’ for underwriting and certain other permitted activities). 306 See infra Part VI.A.2.c.1.c.

307 See infra Part VI.A.2.c.1.c. The term ‘‘trading
desk’’ is defined in final rule § 75.3(e)(13) as ‘‘the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that purchases or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or an

affiliate thereof.’’

308 See final rule §§ 75.4(a)(2)(i), 75.4(a)(3),
75.4(a)(4); see also infra Part VI.A.2.c.1.c.

309 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii); see also infra Part

VI.A.2.c.2.c. in more detail below, the proposed underwriting exemption required that: (i) A banking entity establish a compliance program under § 75.20; (ii) the covered financial position be a security; (iii) the purchase or sale be effected solely in connection with a

distribution of securities for which the banking entity is acting as underwriter; (iv) the banking entity meet certain dealer registration requirements, where applicable; (v) the underwriting activities be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties; (vi) the underwriting activities be designed to generate revenues primarily from fees, commissions, underwriting spreads, or other income not attributable to appreciation in the value of covered financial positions or to hedging of covered financial positions; and (vii) the compensation arrangements of persons performing underwriting activities bedesigned not to reward proprietary risktaking. 295 The proposal explained that these seven criteria were proposed so that any banking entity relying on the underwriting exemption would be engaged in bona fide underwriting

activities and would conduct those activities in a way that would not be susceptible to abuse through the taking of speculative, proprietary positions as part of, or mischaracterized as, underwriting activity. 296

2. Comments on Proposed Underwriting Exemption

As a general matter, a few commenters expressed overall support for the proposed underwriting exemption. 297 Some commenters indicated that the proposed exemption is too narrow and may negatively impact capital markets. 298 As discussed in more detail below, many commenters expressed views on the effectiveness of specific requirements of the proposed exemption. Further, some commenters requested clarification or expansion of the proposed exemption for certain activities that may be conducted in the course of underwriting.

Several commenters suggested alternative approaches to implementing the statutory exemption for underwriting activities. 299 More specifically, commenters recommended that the Agencies: (i) Provide a safe
harbor for low risk, standard underwritings; 300 (ii) better incorporate the statutory limitations on high-risk activity or conflicts of interest; 301 (iii) prohibit banking entities from underwriting illiquid securities; 302 (iv) prohibit banking entities from participating in private placements; 303 (v) place greater emphasis on adequate internal compliance and risk management procedures; 304 or (vi) make the exemption as broad as possible. 305

3. Final Underwriting Exemption

After considering the comments received, the Agencies are adopting the underwriting exemption substantially as proposed, but with important modifications to clarify provisions or to

address commenters’ concerns. As
discussed above, some commenters were generally supportive of the proposed approach to implementing the underwriting exemption, but noted certain areas of concern or uncertainty. The underwriting exemption the Agencies are adopting addresses these issues by further clarifying the scope of activities that qualify for the exemption. In particular, the Agencies are refining the proposed exemption to bettercapture the broad range of capitalraising activities facilitated by banking entities acting as underwriters on behalf of issuers and selling security holders.

The final underwriting exemption includes the following components:

• A framework that recognizes the differences in underwriting activities across markets and asset classes by establishing criteria that will be applied flexibly based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the particular type of security.

• A general focus on the ‘‘underwriting position’’ held by a banking entity or its affiliate, and managed by a particular trading desk, in

connection with the distribution of securities for which such banking entity or affiliate is acting as an

underwriter. 306

• A definition of the term ‘‘trading desk’’ that focuses on the functionality of the desk rather than its legal status, and requirements that apply at the trading desk level of organization within a banking entity or across two or more

affiliates. 307

• Five standards for determining whether a banking entity is engaged in permitted underwriting activities. Many

of these criteria have similarities to those included in the proposed rule, but with important modifications in response to comments. These standards require that:

Æ The banking entity act as an

‘‘underwriter’’ for a ‘‘distribution’’ of securities and the trading desk’s underwriting position be related to such

distribution. The final rule includes

refined definitions of ‘‘distribution’’ and ‘‘underwriter’’ to better capture the broad scope of securities offerings used by issuers and selling security holders and the range of roles that a banking entity may play as intermediary in such offerings. 308

Æ The amount and types of securities in the trading desk’s underwriting position be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties,

and reasonable efforts be made to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position within a reasonable period, taking into account the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security. 309


### 5833 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

310 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii); see also infra

Part VI.A.2.c.3.c.

311 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iv); see also infra

Part VI.A.2.c.4.c.

312 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(v); see also infra Part

VI.A.2.c.5.c.

313 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz. One of these commenters also suggested that the Agencies better incorporate the statutory limitations on material conflicts of interest and high-risk activities in the underwriting exemption by including additional provisions in the exemption to refer to these limitations. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). The Agencies note that these limitations are adopted in § 75.7 of the final rules, and this provision will apply to underwriting activities, as well as all other exempted activities.

314 See final rule § 75.4(a)(3).

315 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

316 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68859 n.101 (explaining why the Agencies declined to incorporate certain accounting standards in the proposed rule); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8344

n.107.

317 See infra Part VI.A.2.c.2.c.

318 See BoA. 319 See Fidelity.

320 See, e.g., BoA (‘‘The underwriting activities of U.S. banking entities are essential to capital formation and, therefore, economic growth and job creation.’’); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Sens. Merkley
& Levin (Feb. 2012). Æ The banking entity establish, implement, maintain, and enforce an internal compliance program that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of the underwriting exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing identifying and addressing:

D The products, instruments, or exposures each trading desk may purchase, sell, or manage as part of its underwriting activities;

D Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s underwriting activities, including the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, on the amount, types, and risk of the trading desk’s underwriting position, level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from the trading desk’s underwriting position, and period of time a security may be held;

D Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits; and

D Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading desk’s limit(s), demonstrable analysis of the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to a trading desk’s limit(s), and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval. 310

Æ The compensation arrangements of persons performing the banking entity’s underwriting activities are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading. 311

Æ The banking entity is licensed or registered to engage in the activity described in the underwriting exemption in accordance with applicable law. 312

After considering commenters’ suggested alternative approaches to implementing the statute’s underwriting exemption, the Agencies have determined to retain the general structure of the proposed underwriting exemption. For instance, two commenters suggested providing a safe harbor for ‘‘plain vanilla’’ or ‘‘basic’’ underwritings of stocks and bonds. 313 The Agencies do not believe that a safe harbor is necessary to provide certainty that a banking entity may act as an underwriter in these particular types of offerings. This is because ‘‘plain vanilla’’ or ‘‘basic’’ underwriting activity should be able to meet the requirements of the final rule. For example, the final definition of ‘‘distribution’’ includes any offering of securities made pursuant to an effective registration statement under the

Securities Act. 314

Further, in response to one commenter’s request that the final rule prohibit a banking entity from acting as an underwriter in illiquid assets that are determined to not have observable price inputs under accounting standards, 315 the Agencies continue to believe that it would be inappropriate to incorporate accounting standards in the rule because accounting standards could change in the future without consideration of the potential impact on

the final rule. 316 Moreover, the Agencies do not believe it is necessary to differentiate between liquid and less liquid securities for purposes of determining whether a banking entity may underwrite a distribution of
securities because, in either case, a banking entity must have a reasonable expectation of purchaser demand for the

securities and must make reasonable

efforts to sell or otherwise reduce its underwriting position within a reasonable period under the final

rule. 317

Another commenter suggested that the Agencies establish a strong presumption that all of a banking entity’s activities related to underwriting are permitted under the rule as long as the banking entity has adequate compliance and risk management procedures. 318 While strong compliance and risk management procedures are important for banking entities’ permitted activities, the Agencies believe that an approach focused solely on the establishment of a compliance program would likely increase the potential for evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading. Similarly, the Agencies are not adopting an exemption that is unlimited, as requested by one commenter, because the Agencies believe controls are necessary to prevent potential evasion of the statute through, among other things, retaining an unsold

allotment when there is sufficient

customer interest for the securities and

to limit the risks associated with these

activities. 319

Underwriters play an important role in facilitating issuers’ access to funding, and thus underwriters are important to the capital formation process and economic growth. 320 Obtaining new financing can be expensive for an issuer

because of the natural information advantage that less well-known issuers have over investors about the quality of their future investment opportunities. An underwriter can help reduce these costs by mitigating the information asymmetry between an issuer and its potential investors. The underwriter does this based in part on its familiarity

with the issuer and other similar issuers as well as by collecting information

about the issuer. This allows investors to look to the reputation and experience of the underwriter as well as its ability to provide information about the issuer and the underwriting. For these and other reasons, most U.S. issuers rely on

the services of an underwriter when raising funds through public offerings. As recognized in the statute, the exemption is intended to permit banking entities to continue to perform the underwriting function, which contributes to capital formation and its positive economic effects.

c. Detailed Explanation of the Underwriting Exemption

1. Acting as an Underwriter for a

Distribution of Securities

a. Proposed Requirements That the Purchase or Sale Be Effected Solely in

Connection With a Distribution of Securities for Which the Banking Entity

Acts as an Underwriter and That the

Covered Financial Position Be a Security

Section 75.4(a)(2)(iii) of the proposed rule required that the purchase or sale be effected solely in connection with a

distribution of securities for which a banking entity is acting as


### 5834 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

321 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii).

322 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii).

323 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866–68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352; 17 CFR 242.101; proposed rule § 75.4(a)(3).

324 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(3).

325 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867 (‘‘For example, the number of shares to be sold, the percentage of the outstanding shares, public float, and trading volume that those shares represent are all relevant to an assessment of magnitude. In addition, delivering a sales document, such as a prospectus, and conducting road shows are generally indicative of special selling efforts and selling methods. Another indicator of special selling efforts and selling methods is compensation that is greater than that for secondary trades but consistent with underwriting compensation for an offering.’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352; Review of Antimanipulation Regulation of Securities Offering, Exchange Act Release No. 33924 (Apr. 19, 1994), 59 FR 21681, 21684–21685 (Apr. 26, 1994).

326 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

327 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866–68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352; 17 CFR 242.101; proposed rule § 75.4(a)(4). 328 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(4). As noted in the proposal, the proposed rule’s definition differed from the definition in Regulation M because the proposed rule’s definition would also include a person who has an agreement with another underwriter to engage in a distribution of securities for or on behalf of an issuer or selling security

holder. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

329 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

330 See id. 331 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii).

332 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

333 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866 n.132; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352 n.138.

334 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

335 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC.

336 See Occupy. underwriter. 321 As discussed below, the Agencies proposed to define the terms

‘‘distribution’’ and ‘‘underwriter’’ in the proposed rule. The proposed rule also required that the covered financial position being purchased or sold by the banking entity be a security. 322

i. Proposed Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’

The proposed definition of

‘‘distribution’’ mirrored the definition of this term used in the SEC’s Regulation M under the Exchange Act. 323 More specifically, the proposed rule defined ‘‘distribution’’ as ‘‘an offering of securities, whether or not subject to registration under the Securities Act, that is distinguished from ordinary trading transactions by the magnitude of the offering and the presence of special selling efforts and selling methods.’’ 324 The Agencies did not propose to define the terms ‘‘magnitude’’ and ‘‘special selling efforts and selling methods,’’ but stated that the Agencies would expect to rely on the same factors considered in Regulation M for assessing these

elements. 325 The Agencies noted that ‘‘magnitude’’ does not imply that a distribution must be large and, therefore, this factor would not preclude small offerings or private placements from qualifying for the proposed underwriting exemption. 326

ii. Proposed Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’

Like the proposed definition of ‘‘distribution,’’ the Agencies proposed

to define ‘‘underwriter’’ in a manner

similar to the definition of this term in the SEC’s Regulation M. 327 The

definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ in the proposed rule was: (i) Any person who has agreed with an issuer or selling security holder to: (a) Purchase securities for distribution; (b) engage in a distribution of securities for or on behalf of such issuer or selling security holder; or (c) manage a distribution of

securities for or on behalf of such issuer or selling security holder; and (ii) a person who has an agreement with another person described in the preceding provisions to engage in a

distribution of such securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security

holder. 328

In connection with this proposed requirement, the Agencies noted that the precise activities performed by an underwriter may vary depending on the liquidity of the securities being underwritten and the type of distribution being conducted. To determine whether a banking entity is acting as an underwriter as part of a distribution of securities, the Agencies proposed to take into consideration the extent to which a banking entity is engaged in the following activities:

• Assisting an issuer in capitalraising;

• Performing due diligence;

• Advising the issuer on market conditions and assisting in the preparation of a registration statement or other offering document;

• Purchasing securities from an issuer, a selling security holder, or an underwriter for resale to the public;

• Participating in or organizing a syndicate of investment banks;

• Marketing securities; and

• Transacting to provide a postissuance secondary market and to facilitate price discovery. 329 The proposal recognized that there may

be circumstances in which an

underwriter would hold securities that

it could not sell in the distribution for investment purposes. The Agencies

stated that if the unsold securities were acquired in connection with underwriting under the proposed exemption, then the underwriter would be able to dispose of such securities at

a later time. 330

iii. Proposed Requirement That the

Covered Financial Position Be a Security

Pursuant to § 75.4(a)(2)(ii) of the proposed exemption, a banking entity would be permitted to purchase or sell a covered financial position that is a security only in connection with its underwriting activities. 331 The proposal stated that this requirement was meant to reflect the common usage and understanding of the term ‘‘underwriting.’’ 332 It was noted, however, that a derivative or commodity future transaction may be otherwise permitted under another exemption (e.g., the exemptions for market makingrelated or risk-mitigating hedging activities). 333

b. Comments on the Proposed Requirements That the Trade Be Effected Solely in Connection With a Distribution for Which the Banking Entity Is Acting as an Underwriter and

That the Covered Financial Position Be a Security

In response to the proposed requirement that a purchase or sale be ‘‘effected solely in connection with a

distribution of securities’’ for which the ‘‘banking entity is acting as underwriter,’’ commenters generally focused on the proposed definitions of

‘‘distribution’’ and ‘‘underwriter’’ and the types of activities that should be permitted under the ‘‘in connection

with’’ standard. Commenters did not directly address the requirement in § 75.4(a)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule, which provided that the covered financial position purchased or sold under the exemption must be a security. A number of commenters expressed general concern that the proposed underwriting exemption’s references to a ‘‘purchase or sale of a covered financial position’’ could be interpreted to require compliance with theproposed rule on a transaction-bytransaction basis. These commenters indicated that such an approach would be overly burdensome. 334

i. Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’

Several commenters stated that the proposed definition of ‘‘distribution’’ is

too narrow, 335 while one commenter stated that the proposed definition is too

broad. 336 Commenters who viewed the proposed definition as too narrow statedthat it may exclude important capitalraising and financing transactions that do not appear to involve ‘‘special selling


### 5835 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

337 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC.

338 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). In addition, one commenter expressed general concern that the proposed rule would cause a reduction in underwriting services with respect to commercial paper, which would reduce liquidity in commercial paper markets and raise the costs of capital in already tight credit markets. See Chamber
(Feb. 2012).

339 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC; LSTA (Feb. 2012).

340 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

341 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

342 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

343 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

344 See RBC.

345 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC.

346 See Goldman (Prop. Trading) (stating that this would capture, among other things, commercial paper issuances, issuer ‘‘dribble out’’ programs, and small private offerings, which involve the purchase of securities directly from an issuer with a view toward resale, but may not always be clearly distinguished by ‘‘special selling efforts and selling methods’’ or by ‘‘magnitude’’); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

347 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). This commenter indicated that expanding the

definition of ‘‘distribution’’ to include both offerings of securities by an issuer and offerings by a selling security holder that are registered under the Securities Act or that involve an offering document prepared by the issuer would ‘‘include, for example, an offering of securities by an issuer or a selling security holder where securities are sold through an automated order execution system, offerings in response to reverse inquiries and commercial paper issuances.’’ Id. 348 See RBC.

349 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC. In addition, one commenter requested the Agencies clarify that permitted underwriting activities include the acquisition and resale of securities issued in lieu of or to refinance bridge loan facilities, irrespective of whether such activities qualify as ‘‘distributions’’ under the proposal. See LSTA (Feb. 2012).

350 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

351 See Occupy.

352 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

353 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Occupy (suggesting that the Agencies exceeded their statutory authority by incorporating the Regulation M definition of ‘‘underwriter,’’ rather
than the Securities Act definition of ‘‘underwriter’’). 354 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). The term ‘‘distribution participant’’ is defined in Rule 100 of Regulation M as ‘‘an underwriter, prospective underwriter, broker, dealer, or other person who has agreed to participate or is participating in a distribution.’’ 17

CFR 242.100.

355 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

356 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

357 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). This commenter also requested a technical amendment to proposed rule § 75.4(a)(4)(ii) to clarify that the person is ‘‘participating’’ in a distribution, not ‘‘engaging’’ in a distribution. See

id.

358 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen. efforts and selling methods’’ or ‘‘magnitude.’’ 337 In particular, these commenters stated that the proposed definition of ‘‘distribution’’ may preclude a banking entity from participating in commercial paper

issuances, 338 bridge loans, 339 ‘‘at-themarket’’ offerings or ‘‘dribble out’’ programs conducted off issuer shelf registrations, 340 offerings in response to reverse inquiries, 341 offerings through an automated execution system, 342 small private offerings, 343 or selling security holders’ sales of securities of issuers with large market capitalizations that are executed as underwriting

transactions in the normal course. 344

Several commenters suggested that the proposed definition be modified to include some or all of these types of offerings. 345 For example, two commenters requested that the definition explicitly include all offerings of securities by an issuer. 346

One of these commenters further requested a broader definition that would include any offering by a selling security holder that is registered under

the Securities Act or that involves an offering document prepared by the

issuer. 347 Another commenter suggested that the rule explicitly authorize certain forms of offerings, such as offerings under Rule 144A, Regulation S, Rule101(b)(10) of Regulation M, or the socalled ‘‘section 4(1 1 ⁄ 2)’’ of the Securities
Act, as well as transactions on behalf of selling security holders. 348 Two commenters proposed approaches that

would include the resale of notes or other debt securities received by a banking entity from a borrower to replace or refinance a bridge loan. 349

One of these commenters stated that permitting a banking entity to receive

and resell notes or other debt securities from a borrower to replace or refinance a bridge loan would preserve the ability of a banking entity to extend credit and offer customers a range of financing options. This commenter further represented that such an approach

would be consistent with the exclusion of loans from the proposed definition of ‘‘covered financial position’’ and the

commenter’s recommended exclusion from the definition of ‘‘trading account’’ for collecting debts previously

contracted. 350

One commenter, however, stated that the proposed definition of

‘‘distribution’’ is too broad. This commenter suggested that the underwriting exemption should only be available for registered offerings, and the rule should preclude a banking entity from participating in a private placement. According to the commenter, permitting a banking entity to participate in a private placement may facilitate evasion of the prohibition on proprietary trading. 351

ii. Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’

Several commenters stated that the proposed definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ is

too narrow. 352 Other commenters, however, stated that the proposed definition is too broad, particularly due to the proposed inclusion of selling group members. 353

Commenters requesting a broader definition generally stated that the Agencies should instead use the Regulation M definition of ‘‘distribution participant’’ or otherwise revise the

definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ to incorporate the concept of a ‘‘distribution participant,’’ as defined under Regulation M. 354 According to these commenters, using the term ‘‘distribution participant’’ would better reflect current market practice and would include dealers that participate in an offering but that do not deal directly with the issuer or selling security holder and do not have a written agreement with the

underwriter. 355 One commenter further represented that the proposed provision for selling group members may be less inclusive than the Agencies intended because individual selling dealers or dealer groups may or may not have written agreements with an underwriter in privity of contract with the issuer. 356 Another commenter requested that, if the ‘‘distribution participant’’ concept is not incorporated into the rule, the proposed definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ be modified to include a person who has an agreement with an affiliate of an issuer or selling security holder (e.g., an agreement with a parent company to
distribute the issuer’s securities). 357

Other commenters opposed the inclusion of selling group members in the proposed definition of

‘‘underwriter.’’ These commenters stated that because selling group members do not provide a price guarantee to an issuer, they do not provide services to a customer and their activities should not qualify for the underwriting exemption. 358

A number of commenters stated that it is unclear whether the proposed underwriting exemption would permit a banking entity to act as an authorized participant (‘‘AP’’) to an ETF issuer, particularly with respect to the creation and redemption of ETF shares or ‘‘seeding’’ an ETF for a short period of


### 5836 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

359 See BoA; ICI Global; Vanguard; ICI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012). As one commenter explained, an AP may ‘‘seed’’ an ETF for a short period of time at its inception by entering into

several initial creation transactions with the ETF issuer and refraining from selling those shares to investors or redeeming them for a period of time to facilitate the ETF achieving its liquidity launch goals. See BoA.

360 See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012); Vanguard.

361 See SSgA (Feb. 2012).

362 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. 363 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

364 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

365 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

366 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

367 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC.

368 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (‘‘The reason for creating the short positions (covered and naked) is to facilitate an orderly aftermarket and to reduce price volatility of newly offered securities. This provides significant value to issuers and selling security holders, as well as to investors, by giving the syndicate buying power that helps protect against immediate volatility in the aftermarket.’’); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

369 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (‘‘Underwriters may also engage in stabilization activities under Regulation M by creating a stabilizing bid to prevent or slow a decline in the market price of a security. These activities should be encouraged rather than restricted by the Volcker Rule because they reduce price volatility and facilitate the orderly pricing and aftermarket trading of underwritten securities, thereby contributing to capital formation.’’).

370 See RBC.

371 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

372 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (stating that the call spread arrangement ‘‘may make a wider range of financing options feasible for the issuer of the convertible debt’’ and ‘‘can help it to raise more capital at more attractive prices’’). 373 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). The commenter further stated that the need to purchase the issuer’s other debt securities from investors may

arise if an investor has limited risk tolerance to the issuer’s credit or has portfolio restrictions. According to the commenter, the underwriter would typically sell the debt securities it purchased from existing investors to new investors. See id.

374 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

375 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

376 See ASF (Feb. 2012) (stating that, for example, a banking entity may respond to customer or general market demand for highly-rated mortgage paper by accumulating residential mortgage-backed securities over time and holding such securities in inventory until the transaction can be organized
and assembled).

377 See ICI (Feb. 2012) (stating that the sale of

assets to an intermediate asset-backed commercial paper or tender option bond program should be permitted under the underwriting exemption if the sale is part of the creation of a structured security).

See also AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (stating that the treatment of a sale to an intermediate entity should depend on whether the banking entity or an
external client is the driver of the demand and, if the banking entity is the driver of the demand, then the near term demand requirement should not be met). Two commenters stated that the underwriting exemption should not permit a banking entity to sell a security to an intermediate entity in the course of creating a structured product. See Occupy; Alfred Brock. These commenters were generally responding to a question on this issue in the proposal. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68868– 68869 (question 78); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8354 (question 78).

378 Final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(i). The terms

‘‘distribution’’ and ‘‘underwriter’’ are defined in final rule § 75.4(a)(3) and § 75.4(a)(4), respectively.

379 Proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii) required that ‘‘[t]he purchase or sale is effected solely in

connection with a distribution of securities for which the covered banking entity is acting as

underwriter.’’ time when it is initially launched. 359 For example, a few commenters noted that APs typically do not perform some or all of the activities that the Agencies proposed to consider to help determine whether a banking entity is acting as an

underwriter in connection with a distribution of securities, including due diligence, advising an issuer on market conditions and assisting in preparation of a registration statement or offering documents, and participating in or organizing a syndicate of investment

banks. 360

However, one commenter appeared to oppose applying the underwriting exemption to certain AP activities. According to this commenter, APs are generally reluctant to concede that they are statutory underwriters because they do not perform all the activities associated with the underwriting of an operating company’s securities. Further, this commenter expressed concern that, if an AP had to rely on the proposed underwriting exemption, the AP could be subject to heightened risk of incurring underwriting liability on the issuance of ETF shares traded by the
AP. As a result of these considerations, the commenter believed that a banking entity may be less willing to act as an AP for an ETF issuer if it were required to rely on the underwriting exemption. 361

iii. ‘‘Solely in Connection With’’

Standard

To qualify for the underwriting exemption, the proposed rule required a purchase or sale of a covered financial position to be effected ‘‘solely in

connection with’’ a distribution of securities for which the banking entity is acting as underwriter. Several commenters expressed concern that the word ‘‘solely’’ in this provision may result in an overly narrow interpretation of permissible activities. In particular,

these commenters indicated that the ‘‘solely in connection with’’ standard creates uncertainty about certain activities that are currently conducted in the course of an underwriting, such as customary underwriting syndicate

activities. 362 One commenter represented that such activities are traditionally undertaken to: Support the success of a distribution; mitigate risk to
issuers, investors, and underwriters; and facilitate an orderly aftermarket. 363 A

few commenters further stated that requiring a trade to be ‘‘solely’’ in connection with a distribution by an

underwriter would be inconsistent with
the statute, 364 may reduce future innovation in the capital-raising

process, 365 and could create market disruptions. 366

A number of commenters stated that

it is unclear whether certain activities would qualify for the proposed underwriting exemption and requested that the Agencies adopt an exemption that is broad enough to permit such

activities. 367 Commenters stated that

there are a number of activities that should be permitted under the underwriting exemption, including: (i) Creating a naked or covered syndicate short position in connection with an offering; 368 (ii) creating a stabilizing
bid; 369 (iii) acquiring positions via

overallotments 370 or trading in the market to close out short positions in

connection with an overallotment option or in connection with other
stabilization activities; 371 (iv) using call spread options in a convertible debt offering to mitigate dilution of existing
shareholders; 372 (v) repurchasing existing debt securities of an issuer in the course of underwriting a new series

of debt securities in order to stimulate demand for the new issuance; 373 (vi) purchasing debt securities of comparable issuers as a price discovery

mechanism in connection with underwriting a new debt security; 374 (vii) hedging the underwriter’s exposure to a derivative strategy engaged in with

an issuer; 375 (viii) organizing and assembling a resecuritized product, including, for example, sourcing bond collateral over a period of time in anticipation of issuing new

securities; 376 and (ix) selling a security to an intermediate entity as part of the

creation of certain structured products. 377

c. Final Requirement That the Banking Entity Act as an Underwriter for a

Distribution of Securities and the Trading Desk’s Underwriting Position

Be Related to Such Distribution

The final rule requires that the banking entity act as an underwriter for

a distribution of securities and the trading desk’s underwriting position be

related to such distribution. 378 This requirement is substantially similar to the proposed rule, 379 but with five key
refinements. First, to address

commenters’ confusion about whether


### 5837 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

380 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 381 See infra Part VI.A.3.c. (discussing the final market-making exemption).

382 See supra note 307 and accompanying text.

383 Final rule § 75.4(a)(3). the underwriting exemption applies on a transaction-by-transaction basis, the phrase ‘‘purchase or sale’’ has been modified to instead refer to the trading desk’s ‘‘underwriting position.’’ Second, to balance this more aggregated position-based approach, the final rule specifies that the trading desk is the organizational level of a banking entity (or across one or more affiliated banking entities) at which the requirements of the underwriting exemption will be assessed. Third, the Agencies have made important modifications to the

definition of ‘‘distribution’’ to better capture the various types of private and registered offerings a banking entity may be asked to underwrite by an issuer or selling security holder. Fourth, the

definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ has been refined to clarify that both members of the underwriting syndicate and selling group members may qualify as underwriters for purposes of this exemption. Finally, the word ‘‘solely’’ has been removed to clarify that a broader scope of activities conducted in connection with underwriting (e.g., stabilization activities) are permitted under this exemption. These issues are

discussed in turn below.

i. Definition of ‘‘Underwriting Position’’

In response to commenters’ concerns about transaction-by-transaction analyses, 380 the Agencies are modifying the exemption to clarify the level at which compliance with certain provisions will be assessed. The proposal was not intended to impose a transaction-by-transaction approach, and the final rule’s requirements generally focus on the long or short positions in one or more securities held by a banking entity or its affiliate, and managed by a particular trading desk, in connection with a particular

distribution of securities for which such banking entity or its affiliate is acting as an underwriter. Like § 75.4(a)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule, the definition of ‘‘underwriting position’’ is limited to positions in securities because the common usage and understanding of the term ‘‘underwriting’’ is limited to

activities in securities.

A trading desk’s underwriting position constitutes the securities positions that are acquired in connection with a single distribution for which the relevant banking entity is acting as an underwriter. A trading desk may not aggregate securities positions acquired in connection with two or

more distributions to determine its ‘‘underwriting position.’’ A trading desk may, however, have more than one ‘‘underwriting position’’ at a particular point in time if the banking entity is acting as an underwriter for more than
one distribution. As a result, the underwriting exemption’s requirements pertaining to a trading desk’s underwriting position will apply on a distribution-by-distribution basis.

A trading desk’s underwriting position can include positions in

securities held at different affiliated legal entities, provided the banking entity is able to provide supervisors or examiners of any Agency that has regulatory authority over the banking entity pursuant to section 13(b)(2)(B) of the BHC Act with records, promptly upon request, that identify any related positions held at an affiliated entity that are being included in the trading desk’s underwriting position for purposes of the underwriting exemption. Banking entities should be prepared to provide all records that identify all of the positions included in a trading desk’s underwriting position and where such positions are held.

The Agencies believe that a distribution-by-distribution approach is appropriate due to the relatively distinct nature of underwriting activities for a single distribution on behalf of an issuer or selling security holder. The Agencies

do not believe that a narrower transaction-by-transaction analysis is necessary to determine whether a banking entity is engaged in permitted underwriting activities. The Agencies also decline to take a broader approach, which would allow a banking entity to aggregate positions from multiple distributions for which it is acting as an
underwriter, because it would be more difficult for the banking entity’s internal compliance personnel and Agency supervisors and examiners to review the trading desk’s positions to assess the desk’s compliance with the underwriting exemption. A more aggregated approach would increase the number of positions in different types of

securities that could be included in the underwriting position, which would

make it more difficult to determine that an individual position is related to a particular distribution of securities for which the banking entity is acting as an
underwriter and, in turn, increase the potential for evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading.

ii. Definition of ‘‘Trading Desk’’

The proposed underwriting exemption would have applied certain requirements across an entire banking entity. To promote consistency with the market-making exemption and address potential evasion concerns, the final rule applies the requirements of the underwriting exemption at the trading desk level of organization. 381 This approach will result in the requirements of the underwriting exemption applying to the aggregate trading activities of a relatively limited group of employees on a single desk. Applying requirements at the trading desk level should facilitate banking entity and Agency monitoring and review of compliance with the exemption by limiting the location where underwriting activity may occur and allowing better identification of the aggregate trading volume that must be

reviewed to determine whether the desk’s activities are being conducted in

a manner that is consistent with the underwriting exemption, while also allowing adequate consideration of the particular facts and circumstances of the desk’s trading activities.

The trading desk should be managed and operated as an individual unit and

should reflect the level at which the profit and loss of employees engaged in underwriting activities is attributed. The term ‘‘trading desk’’ in the underwriting context is intended to encompass what is commonly thought of as an underwriting desk. A trading desk engaged in underwriting activities would not necessarily be an active market participant that engages in frequent trading activities.

A trading desk may manage an underwriting position that includes positions held by different affiliated legal entities. 382 Similarly, a trading desk may include employees working on behalf of multiple affiliated legal entities or booking trades in multiple affiliated entities. The geographic

location of individual traders is not dispositive for purposes of determining whether the employees are engaged in activities for a single trading desk.

iii. Definition of ‘‘Distribution’’

The term ‘‘distribution’’ is defined in the final rule as: (i) An offering of securities, whether or not subject to registration under the Securities Act, that is distinguished from ordinary trading transactions by the presence of special selling efforts and selling methods; or (ii) an offering of securities made pursuant to an effective registration statement under the

Securities Act. 383 In response to comments, the proposed definition has

been revised to eliminate the need to consider the ‘‘magnitude’’ of an offering and instead supplements the definition


### 5838 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

384 Proposed rule § 75.4(a)(3) defined ‘‘distribution’’ as ‘‘an offering of securities, whether or not subject to registration under the Securities Act, that is distinguished from ordinary trading transactions by the magnitude of the offering and the presence of special selling efforts and selling

methods.’’

385 The policy goals of this rule differ from thoseof the SEC’s Regulation M, which is an antimanipulation rule. The focus on magnitude is appropriate for that regulation because it helps identify offerings that can give rise to an incentive to condition the market for the offered security. To the contrary, this rule is intended to allow banking entities to continue to provide client-oriented financial services, including underwriting services. The SEC emphasizes that this rule does not have any impact on Regulation M.

386 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

387 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352; Review of Antimanipulation Regulation of Securities Offering, Exchange Act Release No. 33924 (Apr. 19, 1994), 59 FR 21681, 21684–21685 (Apr. 26, 1994).

388 The final rule does not provide safe harbors for particular distribution techniques. A safe harbor-based approach would provide certainty for specific types of offerings, but may not account for evolving market practices and distribution techniques that could technically satisfy a safe harbor but that might implicate the concerns that led Congress to enact section 13 of the BHC Act.

See RBC. 389 This clarification is intended to address commenters’ concern regarding potential limitations on banking entities’ ability to facilitate commercial paper offerings under the proposed underwriting exemption. See supra Part

VI.A.2.c.1.b.i.

390 See, e.g., Form S–1 (17 CFR 239.11); Form S–
3 (17 CFR 239.13); Form S–8 (17 CFR 239.16b);
Form F–1 (17 CFR 239.31); Form F–3 (17 CFR
239.33).

391 Although the Agencies are providing an additional prong to the definition of ‘‘distribution’’ for registered offerings, the final rule does not limit the availability of the underwriting exemption to registered offerings, as suggested by one

commenter. The statute does not include such an express limitation, and the Agencies decline to construe the statute to require such an approach. In response to the commenter stating that permitting a banking entity to participate in a private placement may facilitate evasion of the prohibition on proprietary trading, the Agencies believe this concern is addressed by the provision in the final rule requiring that a trading desk have a reasonable expectation of demand from other market participants for the amount and type of securities to be acquired from an issuer or selling security

holder for distribution and make reasonable efforts to sell its underwriting position within a reasonable period. As discussed below, the Agencies believe this requirement in the final rule appropriately addresses evasion concerns that a banking entity may retain an unsold allotment for purely speculative purposes. Further, the Agencies believe that preventing a banking entity from facilitating aprivate offering could unnecessarily hinder capitalraising without providing commensurate benefits because issuers use private offerings to raise capital in a variety of situations and the underwriting exemption’s requirements limit the potential for evasion for both registered and private offerings, as

noted above. 392 See Securities Offering Reform, Securities Act Release No. 8591 (July 19, 2005), 70 FR 44722 (Aug. 3, 2005); 17 CFR 230.405 (defining ‘‘automatic shelf
registration statement’’ as a registration statement filed on Form S–3 (17 CFR 239.13) or Form F–3 (17 CFR 239.33) by a well-known seasoned issuer pursuant to General Instruction I.D. or I.C. of such forms, respectively); 17 CFR 230.415.

393 A bought deal is a distribution technique whereby an underwriter makes a bid for securities without engaging in a preselling effort, such as book building or distribution of a preliminary

prospectus. See, e.g., Delayed or Continuous Offering and Sale of Securities, Securities Act Release No. 6470 (June 9, 1983), n.5.

394 See, e.g., 17 CFR 230.415(a)(4) (defining ‘‘at the market offering’’ as ‘‘an offering of equity securities into an existing trading market for outstanding shares of the same class at other than a fixed price’’). At the market offerings may also be referred to as ‘‘dribble out’’ programs.

395 Under the ‘‘reverse inquiry’’ process, an investor may be allowed to purchase securities from the issuer through an underwriter that is not designated in the prospectus as the issuer’s agent by having such underwriter approach the issuer

with an interest from the investor. See Joseph McLaughlin and Charles J. Johnson, Jr., ‘‘Corporate
Finance and the Securities Laws’’ (4th ed. 2006, supplemented 2012).

396 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). with an alternative prong for registered offerings under the Securities Act. 384

The proposed definition’s reference to magnitude caused some commenter concern with respect to whether it could be interpreted to preclude a banking entity from intermediating a small private placement. After considering comments, the Agencies have determined that the requirement to have special selling efforts and selling methods is sufficient to distinguish between permissible securities offerings and prohibited proprietary trading, and the additional magnitude factor is not needed to further this objective. 385 As proposed, the Agencies will rely on the

same factors considered under Regulation M to analyze the presence of special selling efforts and selling

methods. 386 Indicators of special selling efforts and selling methods include delivering a sales document (e.g., a prospectus), conducting road shows, and receiving compensation that is greater than that for secondary trades but consistent with underwriting compensation. 387 For purposes of the
final rule, each of these factors need not be present under all circumstances. Offerings that qualify as distributions under this prong of the definition include, among others, private placements in which resales may be

made in reliance on the SEC’s Rule 144A or other available exemptions 388 and, to the extent the commercial paper being offered is a security, commercial paper offerings that involve the underwriter receiving special compensation. 389

The Agencies are also adopting a second prong to this definition, which will independently capture all offerings of securities that are made pursuant to an effective registration statement under

the Securities Act. 390 The registration prong of the definition is intended to provide another avenue by which an offering of securities may be conducted under the exemption, absent other special selling efforts and selling

methods or a determination of whether such efforts and methods are being conducted. The Agencies believe this prong reduces potential administrative burdens by providing a bright-line test

for what constitutes a distribution for purposes of the final rule. In addition, this prong is consistent with the purpose and goals of the statute because it reflects a common type of securities offering and does not raise evasion concerns as it is unlikely that an entity would go through the registration process solely to facilitate or engage in speculative proprietary trading. 391 This prong would include, among other things, the following types of registered securities offerings: Offerings made pursuant to a shelf registration statement (whether on a continuous or delayed basis), 392 bought deals, 393 at the market offerings, 394 debt offerings, assetbacked security offerings, initial public offerings, and other registered offerings. An offering can be a distribution for purposes of either § 75.4(a)(3)(i) or § 75.4(a)(3)(ii) of the final rule regardless of whether the offering is issuer driven, selling security holder driven, or arises as a result of a reverse inquiry. 395

Provided the definition of distribution is met, an offering can be a distribution for purposes of this rule regardless of how it is conducted, whether by direct communication, exchange transactions, or automated execution system. 396

As discussed above, some commenters expressed concern that the proposed definition of ‘‘distribution’’ would prevent a banking entity from acquiring and reselling securities issued in lieu of or to refinance bridge loan facilities in reliance on the underwriting exemption. Bridge financing arrangements can be structured in many different ways, depending on the context and the specific objectives of the parties involved. As a result, the treatment of securities acquired in lieu of or to refinance a bridge loan and the subsequent sale of such securities under the final rule depends on the facts and circumstances. A banking entity may meet the terms of the underwriting exemption for its bridge loan activity, orit may be able to rely on the marketmaking exemption. If the banking entity’s bridge loan activity does not qualify for an exemption under the rule, then it would not be permitted to engage in such activity.


### 5839 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

397 See final rule § 75.4(a)(4).

398 The basic documents in firm commitment underwritten securities offerings generally are: (i) The agreement among underwriters, which establishes the relationship among the managing underwriter, any co-managers, and the other members of the underwriting syndicate; (ii) the underwriting (or ‘‘purchase’’) agreement, in which the underwriters commit to purchase the securities from the issuer or selling security holder; and (iii) the selected dealers agreement, in which selling group members agree to certain provisions relating

to the distribution. See Joseph McLaughlin and Charles J. Johnson, Jr., ‘‘Corporate Finance and the Securities Laws’’ (4th ed. 2006, supplemented 2012), Ch. 2. The Agencies understand that two firms may enter into a master agreement that governs all offerings in which both firms participate as members of the underwriting syndicate or as a member of the syndicate and a selling group

member. See, e.g., SIFMA Master Selected Dealers Agreement (June 10, 2011), available at www.sifma.org

. 399 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

400 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352. Post-issuance secondary market activity is expected to be conducted in accordance with the market-making exemption. 401 See infra Part VI.A.3.

402 See final rule § 75.3(e)(9) (defining the term ‘‘issuer’’ for purposes of the proprietary trading provisions in subpart B of the final rule). Under
section 2(a)(4) of the Securities Act, ‘‘issuer’’ is defined as ‘‘every person who issues or proposes to issue any security; except that with respect to certificates of deposit, voting-trust certificates, or collateral-trust certificates, or with respect to

certificates of interest or shares in an unincorporated investment trust not having a board of directors (or persons performing similar functions) or of the fixed, restricted management, or unit type, the term ‘issuer’ means the person or persons performing the acts and assuming the duties of depositor or manager pursuant to the provisions of the trust or other agreement or
instrument under which such securities are issued; except that in the case of an unincorporated association which provides by its articles for limited liability of any or all of its members, or in the case of a trust, committee, or other legal entity,

the trustees or members thereof shall not be individually liable as issuers of any security issued by the association, trust, committee, or other legal entity; except that with respect to equipment-trust
certificates or like securities, the term ‘issuer’ means the person by whom the equipment or property is or is to be used; and except that with respect to fractional undivided interests in oil, gas, or other mineral rights, the term ‘issuer’ means the owner of any such right or of any interest in such right (whether whole or fractional) who creates fractional interests therein for the purpose of public offering.’’ 15 U.S.C. 77b(a)(4).

403 Final rule § 75.4(a)(5). iv. Definition of ‘‘Underwriter’’

In response to comments, the Agencies are adopting certain modifications to the proposed definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ to better capture selling group members and to more closely resemble the definition of ‘‘distribution participant’’ in Regulation M. In particular, the Agencies are defining ‘‘underwriter’’ as: (i) A person who has agreed with an issuer or selling security holder to: (A) Purchase Securities from the issuer or selling security holder for distribution; (B) engage in a distribution of securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security holder; or (C) manage a

distribution of securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security holder; or (ii) a person who has agreed to participate or is participating in a

distribution of such securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security

holder. 397

A number of commenters requested that the Agencies broaden the underwriting exemption to permit

activities in connection with a distribution of securities by any distribution participant. A few of these commenters interpreted the proposed definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ as requiring a selling group member to have a written agreement with the underwriter to participate in the distribution. 398

These commenters noted that such a written agreement may not exist under all circumstances. The Agencies did not intend to require that members of the underwriting syndicate or the lead underwriter have a written agreement with all selling group members for each offering or that they be in privity of contract with the issuer or selling security holder. To provide clarity on this issue, the Agencies have modified the language of subparagraph (ii) of the
definition to include firms that, while not members of the underwriting syndicate, have agreed to participate or are participating in a distribution of

securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security holder.

The final rule does not adopt a
narrower definition of ‘‘underwriter,’’ as suggested by two commenters. 399 Although selling group members do not have a direct relationship with the issuer or selling security holder, they do help facilitate the successful

distribution of securities to a wider variety of purchasers, such as regional or retail purchasers that members of the underwriting syndicate may not be able to access as easily. Thus, the Agencies believe it is consistent with the purpose of the statutory underwriting exemption and beneficial to recognize and allow the current market practice of an underwriting syndicate and selling group members collectively facilitating

a distribution of securities. The Agencies note that because banking entities that are selling group members

will be underwriters under the final rule, they will be subject to all the requirements of the underwriting exemption.

As provided in the preamble to the proposed rule, engaging in the following activities may indicate that a banking entity is acting as an underwriter under § 75.4(a)(4) as part of a distribution of

securities:

• Assisting an issuer in capitalraising;

• Performing due diligence;

• Advising the issuer on market conditions and assisting in the preparation of a registration statement or other offering document;

• Purchasing securities from an issuer, a selling security holder, or an underwriter for resale to the public;

• Participating in or organizing a syndicate of investment banks;

• Marketing securities; and

• Transacting to provide a postissuance secondary market and to facilitate price discovery. 400 The Agencies continue to take the view that the precise activities performed by an underwriter will vary depending on the liquidity of the securities being underwritten and the type of distribution being conducted. A banking entity is not required to engage in each

of the above-noted activities to be considered an underwriter for purposes of this rule. In addition, the Agencies note that, to the extent a banking entity

does not meet the definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ in the final rule, it may be able to rely on the market-making exemption in the final rule for its trading activity. In response to comments noting that APs for ETFs do not engage in certain of these activities and inquiring whether an AP would be able to qualify for the underwriting exemption for certain of its activities, the Agencies believe that many AP activities, such as conducting general creations and redemptions of ETF shares, are better suited for analysis under the market-making exemption because they are driven by the demands of other market participants rather than
the issuer, the ETF. 401 Whether an AP may rely on the underwriting exemption for its activities in an ETF will depend
on the facts and circumstances, including, among other things, whether

the AP meets the definition of ‘‘underwriter’’ and the offering of ETF shares qualifies as a ‘‘distribution.’’

To provide further clarity about the scope of the definition of ‘‘underwriter,’’ the Agencies are defining the terms ‘‘selling security holder’’ and ‘‘issuer’’ in the final rule. The Agencies are using

the definition of ‘‘issuer’’ from the

Securities Act because this definition is commonly used in the context of securities offerings and is well understood by market participants. 402 A ‘‘selling security holder’’ is defined as ‘‘any person, other than an issuer, on

whose behalf a distribution is made.’’ 403

This definition is consistent with the


### 5840 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

404 See 17 CFR 242.100(b).

405 See supra Part VI.A.2.c.1.b.iii.

406 See supra notes 362, 363, 368–77 and accompanying text.

407 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

See Anti-Manipulation Rules Concerning Securities Offerings, Exchange Act Release No. 38067 (Dec. 20, 1996), 62 FR 520, 535 (Jan. 3, 1997) (‘‘Although stabilization is price-influencing activity intended to induce others to purchase the offered security, when appropriately regulated it is an effective mechanism for fostering an orderly distribution of securities and promotes the interests of
shareholders, underwriters, and issuers.’’).

408 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading). See Proposed Amendments to Regulation M: Anti-Manipulation Rules Concerning Securities Offerings, Exchange
Act Release No. 50831 (Dec. 9, 2004), 69 FR 75774, 75780 (Dec. 17, 2004) (‘‘In the typical offering, the syndicate agreement allows the managing underwriter to ‘oversell’ the offering, i.e., establish a short position beyond the number of shares to which the underwriting commitment relates. The underwriting agreement with the issuer often provides for an ‘overallotment option’ whereby the syndicate can purchase additional shares from the issuer or selling shareholders in order to cover its short position. To the extent that the syndicate short position is in excess of the overallotment option, the syndicate is said to have taken an ‘uncovered’ short position. The syndicate short position, up to the amount of the overallotment option, may be covered by exercising the option or by purchasing shares in the market once secondary trading begins.’’).

409 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
RBC; BoA; BDA (Feb. 2012).

410 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

411 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii); infra Part VI.A.2.c.2.c. (discussing the requirement to make

reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position).

412 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(B); infra Part VI.A.2.c.3.c. (discussing the required limits for trading desks engaged in underwriting activity). 413 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). The Agencies do not believe this activity is consistent with underwriting activity because it could result in an underwriting desk holding a variety of positions over time that are not directly related to a distribution of securities the desk is conducting on behalf of an issuer or selling security holder. Further, the Agencies believe this activity may bemore appropriately analyzed under the marketmaking exemption because market makers generally purchase or sell a financial instrument at the request of customers and otherwise routinely stand ready to purchase and sell a variety of related

financial instruments.

414 See id. The Agencies view this activity as inconsistent with underwriting because underwriters typically engage in other activities, such as book-building and other marketing efforts, to determine the appropriate price for a security and these activities do not involve taking positions that are unrelated to the securities subject to

distribution. See infra VI.A.2.c.2.

415 Although one commenter suggested that an underwriter’s hedging activity be permitted under the underwriting exemption, we do not believe the requirements in the proposed hedging exemption would be unworkable or overly burdensome in the context of an underwriter’s hedging activity. See Goldman (Prop. Trading). As noted above, underwriting activity is of a relatively distinct nature, which is substantially different from market-making activity, which is more dynamic and involves more frequent trading activity giving rise to a variety of positions that may naturally hedge the risks of certain other positions. The Agencies believe it is appropriate to require that a trading desk comply with the requirements of the hedging exemption when it is hedging the risks of its underwriting position, while allowing a trading desk’s market making-related hedging under the market-making exemption. definition of ‘‘selling security holder’’ found in the SEC’s Regulation M. 404

v. Activities Conducted ‘‘in Connection

With’’ a Distribution

As discussed above, several commenters expressed concern that the proposed underwriting exemption would not allow a banking entity to engage in certain auxiliary activities that may be conducted in connection with acting as an underwriter for a

distribution of securities in the normal

course. These commenters’ concerns generally arose from the use of the word ‘‘solely’’ in § 75.4(a)(2)(iii) of the proposed rule, which commenters noted

was not included in the statute’s underwriting exemption. 405 In addition,

a number of commenters discussed particular activities they believed should be permitted under the underwriting exemption and indicated the term ‘‘solely’’ created uncertainty

about whether such activities would be permitted. 406

To reduce uncertainty in response to comments, the final rule requires a trading desk’s underwriting position to be ‘‘held . . . and managed . . . in connection with’’ a single distribution for which the relevant banking entity is acting as an underwriter, rather than requiring that a purchase or sale be ‘‘effected solely in connection with’’ such a distribution. Importantly, for purposes of establishing an underwriting position in reliance on the underwriting exemption, a trading desk may only engage in activities that are related to a particular distribution of securities for which the banking entity is acting as an underwriter. Activities that may be permitted under the underwriting exemption include
stabilization activities,407 syndicate shorting and aftermarket short covering, 408 holding an unsold allotment when market conditions may make it impracticable to sell the entire allotment at a reasonable price at the time of the distribution and selling such position when it is reasonable to do

so,409 and helping the issuer mitigate its risk exposure arising from the distribution of its securities (e.g., entering into a call-spread option with an issuer as part of a convertible debt offering to mitigate dilution to existing shareholders). 410 Such activities should

be intended to effectuate the distribution process and provide benefits to issuers, selling security holders, or purchasers in the distribution. Existing laws, regulations, and self-regulatory organization rules limit or place certain requirements around many of these activities. For example, an underwriter’s subsequent

sale of an unsold allotment must comply with applicable provisions of

the Federal securities laws and the rules thereunder. Moreover, any position resulting from these activities must be included in the trading desk’s underwriting position, which is subject

to a number of restrictions in the final rule. Specifically, as discussed in more detail below, the trading desk must

make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce its underwriting position within a reasonable period,411 and each trading desk must have robust limits on, among other things, the amount, types, and risks of its underwriting position and the period of time a security may be held. 412 Thus, in general, the underwriting exemption would not permit a trading desk, for example, to acquire a position as part of

its stabilization activities and hold that position for an extended period.

This approach does not mean that any activity that is arguably connected to a distribution of securities is permitted under the underwriting exemption. Certain activities noted by commenters are not core to the underwriting function and, thus, are not permitted under the final underwriting exemption. However, a banking entity may be able to rely on another exemption for such
activities (e.g., the market-making or hedging exemptions), if applicable. For example, a trading desk would not be able to use the underwriting exemption to purchase a financial instrument from

a customer to facilitate the customer’s ability to buy securities in the

distribution. 413 Further, purchasing another financial instrument to help determine how to price the securities that are subject to a distribution would not be permitted under the underwriting exemption. 414 These two activities may be permitted under the market-making exemption, depending on the facts and circumstances. In response to one commenter’s suggestion that hedging the underwriter’s risk exposure be permissible under this exemption, the Agencies emphasize that hedging the underwriter’s risk exposure is not permitted under the underwriting exemption. 415 A banking entity must comply with the hedging exemption for such activity.

In response to comments about the sale of a security to an intermediate entity in connection with a structured


### 5841 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

416 See ICI (Feb. 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Alfred Brock.

417 A banking entity may accumulate loans in anticipation of securitization because loans are not

financial instruments under the final rule. See

supra Part VI.A.1.c.

418 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(v); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at

8353.

419 See supra Part VI.A.2.c.2.a.

420 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
BoA; BDA (Feb. 2012); RBC. Another commenter requested that this requirement be eliminated or changed to ‘‘underwriting activities of the banking entity with respect to the covered financial position must be designed to meet the near-term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.’’ See Japanese Bankers Ass’n. 421 See RBC (stating that the Board has found acceptable the retention of assets acquired in connection with underwriting activities for a period of 90 to 180 days and has further permitted holding periods of up to a year in certain circumstances, such as for less liquid securities).

422 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

423 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
BoA; BDA (Feb. 2012); RBC.

424 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA; RBC. These commenters generally stated that an underwriter for a ‘‘bought deal’’ may end up with an unsold allotment because, pursuant to this type of offering, an underwriter makes a commitment to purchase securities from an issuer or selling security holder, without pre-commitment marketing to gauge customer interest, in order to provide greater speed and certainty of execution.

See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC.

425 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (representing that because an underwriter generally backstops a rights offering by committing to exercise any rights not exercised by shareholders, the underwriter may end up holding a residual portion of the offering if investors do not exercise all of the rights).

426 See BDA (Feb. 2012). This commenter stated that underwriters frequently underwrite bonds in the fixed-income market knowing that they may need to retain unsold allotments in their inventory.

The commenter indicated that this scenario arises because the fixed-income market is not as deep as other markets, so underwriters frequently cannot sell bonds when they go to market; instead, the

underwriters will retain the bonds until a sufficient amount of liquidity is available in the market. See

id.

427 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

BoA.

428 See BoA; RBC; LSTA (Feb. 2012). One of these
commenters stated that, in the case of securities issued in lieu of or to refinance bridge loan
facilities, market conditions or investor demand may change during the period of time between extension of the bridge commitment and when the bridge loan is required to be funded or such securities are required to be issued. As a result, this commenter requested that the near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties be measured at the time of the initial extension of the bridge

commitment. See LSTA (Feb. 2012).

429 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

RBC.

430 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); CalPERS; Occupy; Public Citizen; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Sens. Merkley & Levin
(Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock.

431 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); CalPERS; Occupy;
Public Citizen; Alfred Brock.

432 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (recognizing, however, that a small portion of an underwriting may occasionally be ‘‘hung’’); CalPERS; Occupy (stating that a banking entity’s retention of unsold allotments may result in potential conflicts of
interest).

433 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

434 See Occupy (stating that the meaning of the term ‘‘substantial’’ would depend on the circumstances of the particular offering). finance product,416 the Agencies have not modified the underwriting exemption. Underwriting is distinct from product development. Thus, parties must adjust activities associated with developing structured finance products or meet the terms of other available exemptions. Similarly, the

accumulation of securities or other assets in anticipation of a securitization or resecuritization is not an activity

conducted ‘‘in connection with’’ underwriting for purposes of the exemption. 417 This activity is typically engaged in by an issuer or sponsor of a securitized product in that capacity, rather than in the capacity of an underwriter. The underwriting exemption only permits a banking entity’s activities when it is acting as an

underwriter.

2. Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

a. Proposed Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

Like the statute, § 75.4(a)(2)(v) of the proposed rule required that the underwriting activities of the banking entity with respect to the covered financial position be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. 418

b. Comments Regarding the Proposed

Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

Both the statute and the proposed rule require a banking entity’s underwriting activity to be ‘‘designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.’’ 419 Several commenters requested that this standard be interpreted in a flexible manner to allow a banking entity to participate in an offering that may require it to retain an unsold allotment for a period of time. 420 In addition, one commenter stated that the final rule should provide flexibility in this standard by recognizing that the concept of ‘‘near term’’ differs between asset classes and depends on the liquidity of the market. 421 Two commenters expressed views on how

the near term customer demand requirement should work in the context of a securitization or creating what the

commenters characterized as ‘‘structured products’’ or ‘‘structured

instruments.’’ 422

Many commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement, if narrowly interpreted, could prevent an underwriter from holding a residual position for which there is no
immediate demand from clients, customers, or counterparties. 423

Commenters noted that there are a variety of offerings that present some risk of an underwriter having to hold a residual position that cannot be sold in the initial distribution, including ‘‘bought deals,’’ 424 rights offerings,425 and fixed-income offerings. 426 A few

commenters noted that similar scenarios can arise in the case of an AP creating

more shares of an ETF than it can sell427 and bridge loans. 428 Two commenters indicated that if the rule does not provide greater clarity and flexibility with respect to the near term customer demand requirement, a banking entity may be less inclined to participate in a distribution where there is the potential risk of an unsold allotment, may price such risk into the fees charged to underwriting clients, or may be forced

into a ‘‘fire sale’’ of the unsold

allotment. 429

Several other commenters provided views on whether a banking entity

should be able to hold a residual position from an offering pursuant to the underwriting exemption, although they did not generally link their comments to the proposed near term demand requirement. 430 Many of these commenters expressed concern about permitting a banking entity to retain a portion of an underwriting and noted potential risks that may arise from such activity. 431 For example, some of these

commenters stated that retention or warehousing of underwritten securities can be an indication of impermissible proprietary trading intent (particularly if systematic), or may otherwise result in high-risk exposures or conflicts of

interests. 432 One of these commenters recommended the Agencies use a metric to monitor the size of residual positions retained by an underwriter,433 while another commenter suggested adding a requirement to the proposed exemption to provide that a ‘‘substantial’’ unsold or

retained allotment would be an indication of prohibited proprietary trading. 434 Similarly, one commenter recommended that the Agencies

consider whether there are sufficient provisions in the proposed rule to reduce the risks posed by banking entities retaining or warehousing
underwritten instruments, such as subprime mortgages, collateralized debt obligation tranches, and high yield debt of leveraged buyout issuers, which


### 5842 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

435 See CalPERS.

436 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity (expressing concern that this may result in a more concentrated supply of securities and, thus, decrease the opportunity for diversification in the portfolios of shareholders’ funds).

437 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

438 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

439 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

440 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012). 441 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

442 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

443 See Banco de Me  ́xico.

444 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF. One of these commenters represented that many banking entities serve as primary dealers in jurisdictions in which they operate, and primary dealers often: (i) Are subject to minimum purchase and other obligations in the jurisdiction’s foreign sovereign debt; (ii) play important roles in underwriting and market making in State, provincial, and municipal debt issuances; and (iii) act as intermediaries through which a government’s financial and monetary policies operate. This
commenter stated that, due to these considerations, restrictions on the ability of banking entities to act as primary dealer are likely to harm the governments they serve. See IIB/EBF.

445 Final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii). 446 The proposed rule required the underwriting activities of the banking entity with respect to the covered financial position to be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(v).

447 See supra Part VI.A.2.c.2.b. (discussing commenters’ concerns that the proposed near term customer demand requirement may limit a banking entity’s ability to retain an unsold allotment).

448 A banking entity may not structure a complex instrument on its own initiative using the underwriting exemption. It may use the underwriting exemption only with respect to distributions of securities that comply with the final rule. The Agencies believe this requirement addresses one commenter’s concern that a banking entity could rely on the underwriting exemption without regard to anticipated customer demand.

See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) In addition, a trading desk hedging the risks of an underwriting position in a complex, novel instrument must comply with the hedging exemption in the final rule.

449 An issuer or selling security holder for purposes of this rule may include, among others, corporate issuers, sovereign issuers for which the banking entity acts as primary dealer (or functional equivalent), or any other person that is an issuer, as defined in final rule § 75.3(e)(9), or a selling security holder, as defined in final rule § 75.4(a)(5). The Agencies believe that the underwriting exemption in the final rule should generally allow a primary dealer (or functional equivalent) to act as an underwriter for a sovereign government’s
issuance of its debt because, similar to other underwriting activities, this involves a banking entity agreeing to distribute securities for an issuer (in this case, the foreign sovereign) and engaging in

a distribution of such securities. See SIFMA et al. poses heightened financial risk at the top of economic cycles. 435

Other commenters indicated that

undue restrictions on an underwriter’s ability to retain a portion of an offering may result in certain harms to the capital-raising process. These commenters represented that unclear or negative treatment of residual positions will make banking entities averse to the risk of an unsold allotment, which may result in banking entities underwriting smaller offerings, less capital generation for issuers, or higher underwriting
discounts, which would increase the cost of raising capital for businesses. 436 One of these commenters suggested that a banking entity be permitted to hold a residual position under the underwriting exemption as long as it continues to take reasonable steps to attempt to dispose of the residual position in light of existing market

conditions. 437

In addition, in response to a question in the proposal, one commenter expressed the view that the rule should not require documentation with respect to residual positions held by an

underwriter. 438 In the case of
securitizations, one commenter stated

that if the underwriter wishes to retain

some of the securities or bonds in its longer-term investment book, such decisions should be made by a separate officer, subject to different standards and compensation. 439

Two commenters discussed how the

near term customer demand requirement should apply in the context of a banking entity acting as an

underwriter for a securitization or structured product. 440 One of these

commenters indicated that the near term demand requirement should be interpreted to require that a distribution of securities facilitate pre-existing client

demand. This commenter stated that a banking entity should not be considered to meet the terms of the proposed requirement if, on the firm’s own initiative, it designs and structures a complex, novel instrument and then
seeks customers for the instrument, while retaining part of the issuance on

its own book. The commenter further emphasized that underwriting should involve two-way demand—clients who want assistance in marketing their securities and customers who may wish to purchase the securities—with the banking entity serving as an intermediary. 441 Another commenter indicated that an underwriting should likely be seen as a distribution of all, or nearly all, of the securities related to a securitization (excluding any amount required for credit risk retention purposes) along a time line designed not to exceed reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. According to the commenter, this approach would serve to minimize the arbitrage and risk concentration possibilities that can arise through the securitization and sale of

some tranches and the retention of other

tranches. 442

One commenter expressed concern that the proposed near term customer demand requirement may impact a banking entity’s ability to act as primary dealer because some primary dealers are obligated to bid on each issuance of a government’s sovereign debt, without regard to expected customer demand. 443 Two other commenters expressed general concern that the proposed underwriting exemption may be too narrow to permit banking entities that act as primary dealers in or for foreign jurisdictions to continue to meet the relevant jurisdiction’s primary dealer requirements. 444

c. Final Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

The final rule requires that the amount and types of the securities in the trading desk’s underwriting position be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties,

and reasonable efforts be made to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position within a reasonable period, taking into account the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security. 445 As noted above, the near term demand standard originates from section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act, and a similar requirement was included in the proposed rule. 446 The Agencies are making certain modifications to the proposed approach in response to

comments.

In particular, the Agencies are clarifying the operation of this requirement, particularly with respect to

unsold allotments. 447 Under this requirement, a trading desk must have a reasonable expectation of demand from other market participants for the amount and type of securities to be acquired from an issuer or selling security holder for distribution. 448 Such reasonable expectation may be based on

factors such as current market conditions and prior experience with similar offerings of securities. A bankingentity is not required to engage in bookbuilding or similar marketing efforts to

determine investor demand for the securities pursuant to this requirement, although such efforts may form the basis for the trading desk’s reasonable expectation of demand. While an issuer or selling security holder can be
considered to be a client, customer, or counterparty of a banking entity acting

as an underwriter for its distribution of securities, this requirement cannot be met by accounting solely for the issuer’s or selling security holder’s desire to sell

the securities. 449 However, the


### 5843 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; Banco de

Me

 ́xico. A banking entity acting as primary dealer (or functional equivalent) may also be able to rely on the market-making exemption or other exemptions for some of its activities. See infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c. The final rule defines ‘‘client, customer, or counterparty’’ for purposes of the underwriting exemption as ‘‘market participants that may transact with the banking entity in connection with a particular distribution for which the banking entity is acting as underwriter.’’ Final
rule § 75.4(a)(7).

450 One commenter stated that, in the case of a securitization, an underwriting should be seen as a distribution of all, or nearly all, of the securities related to a securitization (excluding the amount required for credit risk retention purposes) along a time line designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012). The final rule’s near term customer demand requirement considers the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the type of security and recognizes that the amount of time a trading desk may need to hold an underwriting position may vary based on these factors. The final rule does not, however, adopt a standard that applies differently based solely on the particular type of security being
distributed (e.g., an asset-backed security versus an equity security) or that precludes certain types of securities from being distributed by a banking entity acting as an underwriter in accordance with the requirements of this exemption because the Agencies believe the statute is best read to permit a banking entity to engage in underwriting activity to facilitate distributions of securities by issuers and selling security holders, regardless of type, to provide client-oriented financial services. That reading is consistent with the statute’s language and finds support in the legislative history. See 156 Cong. Rec. S5895–S5896 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (stating that the underwriting exemption permits ‘‘transactions that are technically trading for the account of the firm but, in fact, facilitate the provision of near-term
client-oriented financial services’’). In addition, with respect to this commenter’s statement regarding credit risk retention requirements, the Agencies note that compliance with the credit risk retention requirements of Section 15G of the Exchange Act would not impact the availability of the underwriting exemption in the final rule.

451 This approach should help address

commenters’ concerns that an inflexible interpretation of the near term demand requirement could result in fire sales, higher fees for underwriting services, or reluctance to act as an underwriter for certain types of distributions that present a greater risk of unsold allotments. See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC. Further, the Agencies believe this should reduce commenters’ concerns that, to the extent a delayed distribution of securities, which are acquired as a result of an outstanding bridge loan, is able to qualify for the underwriting exemption, a stringent interpretation of the near term demand requirement could prevent a banking entity from retaining such securities if market conditions are suboptimal or marketing efforts are not entirely successful. See RBC; BoA; LSTA (Feb. 2012). In response to one commenter’s request that the Agencies allow a banking entity to assess near term demand at the time of the initial extension of the bridge commitment, the Agencies believe it could be appropriate to determine whether the banking entity has a reasonable expectation of demand from other market participants for the amount and type of securities to be acquired at that time, but note that the trading desk would continue to be subject to the requirement to make reasonable efforts to sell the resulting underwriting position at the time of the initial distribution and for the remaining time the securities are in its inventory. See LSTA (Feb.
2012).

452 The Agencies believe that requiring a trading

desk to make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce its underwriting position addresses

commenters’ concerns about the risks associated

with unsold allotments or the retention of underwritten instruments because this requirement is designed to prevent a trading desk from retaining an unsold allotment for speculative purposes when there is customer buying interest for the relevant security at commercially reasonable prices. Thus, the Agencies believe this obviates the need for certain additional requirements suggested by

commenters. See, e.g., Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb.
2012); CalPERS. The final rule strikes an appropriate balance between the concerns raised by these commenters and those noted by other commenters regarding the potential market impacts of strict requirements against holding an unsold allotment, such as higher fees to underwriting clients, fire sales of unsold allotments, or general reluctance to participate in any distribution that presents a risk of an unsold allotment. The requirement to make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position should not cause the market impacts predicted by these commenters because it does not prevent an underwriter from retaining an unsold allotment for a reasonable period or impose strict holding period

limits on unsold allotments. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity.

453 This approach is generally consistent with one commenter’s suggested approach to addressing the

issue of unsold allotments. See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading) (suggesting that a banking entity be permitted to hold a residual position under the underwriting exemption as long as it continues to take reasonable steps to attempt to dispose of the residual position in light of existing market conditions). In addition, allowing an underwriter to

retain an unsold allotment under certain circumstances is consistent with the proposal. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867 (‘‘There may be

circumstances in which an underwriter would hold

securities that it could not sell in the distribution for investment purposes. If the acquisition of such

unsold securities were in connection with the underwriting pursuant to the permitted underwriting activities exemption, the underwriter would also be able to dispose of such securities at a later time.’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352. A number of commenters raised questions about whether the rule would permit retaining an unsold

allotment. See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA; RBC;

AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); CalPERS; Occupy; Public
Citizen; Alfred Brock.

454 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity.

455 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

BoA; RBC.

456 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); CalPERS; Occupy;
Public Citizen; Alfred Brock.

457 To the extent that an AP for an ETF is able to meet the terms of the underwriting exemption for its activity, it may be able to retain ETF shares that it created if it had a reasonable expectation of buying interest in the ETF shares and engages in

reasonable efforts to sell the ETF shares. See SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA.

458 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Fidelity; SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC. expectation of demand does not require a belief that the securities will be placed immediately. The time it takes to carry out a distribution may differ based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the type of security. 450

This requirement is not intended to prevent a trading desk from distributing an offering over a reasonable time

consistent with market conditions or from retaining an unsold allotment of the securities acquired from an issuer or selling security holder where holding such securities is necessary due to

circumstances such as less-thanexpected purchaser demand at a given price. 451 An unsold allotment is, however, subject to the requirement to

make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position. 452 The definition of ‘‘underwriting position’’ includes, among other things, any residual position from the distribution that is managed by the trading desk. The final rule includes the requirement to make

reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the trading desk’s underwriting position in order to respond to

comments on the issue of when a banking entity may retain an unsold allotment when it is acting as an
underwriter, as discussed in more detail below, and ensure that the exemption is available only for activities that involve underwriting activities, and not prohibited proprietary trading. 453 As a general matter, commenters expressed differing views on whether an underwriter should be permitted to hold an unsold allotment for a certain period

of time after the initial distribution. For example, a few commenters suggested that limitations on retaining an unsold

allotment would increase the cost of raising capital 454 or would negatively impact certain types of securities offerings (e.g., bought deals, rights offerings, and fixed-income offerings). 455 Other commenters, however, expressed concern that the proposed exemption would allow a banking entity to retain a portion of a distribution for speculative purposes. 456

The Agencies believe the requirement

to make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position appropriately addresses both sets of comments. More specifically, this

standard clarifies that an underwriter generally may retain an unsold

allotment that it was unable to sell to purchasers as part of the initial distribution of securities, provided it had a reasonable expectation of buying interest and engaged in reasonable selling efforts. 457 This should reduce the potential for the negative impacts of a more stringent approach predicted by
commenters, such as increased fees for underwriting, greater costs to businesses for raising capital, and potential fire

sales of unsold allotments. 458 However, to address concerns that a banking entity may retain an unsold allotment for purely speculative purposes, the Agencies are requiring that reasonable

efforts be made to sell or otherwise


### 5844 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

459 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); CalPERS; Occupy.

460 The trading desk’s retention and sale of the unsold allotment must comply with the Federal securities laws and regulations, but is otherwise permitted under the underwriting exemption.

461 See supra note 408.

462 For example, some commenters suggested that the proposed underwriting exemption could have a chilling effect on banking entities’ willingness to engage in underwriting activities. See, e.g., Lord Abbett; Fidelity. Further, some commenters expressed concern that the proposed near term customer demand requirement might negatively impact certain forms of capital-raising if the requirement is interpreted narrowly or inflexibly.

See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA;
BDA (Feb. 2012); RBC.

463 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(i). 464 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68866; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8352.

465 The independent testing standard is discussed
in more detail in Part VI.C., which discusses the compliance program requirement in § 75.20 of the

final rule.

466 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(A).

467 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(B). A trading desk must have limits on the amount, types, and risk of the securities in its underwriting position, level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its underwriting position, and period of time a security may be held. See id.

468 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(C). reduce the underwriting position, which includes any unsold allotment, within a reasonable period. The Agencies agree with these commenters that systematic retention of an underwriting position, without engaging in efforts to sell the position and without regard to whether the trading desk is able to sell the securities at a commercially reasonable price, would be indicative of impermissible proprietary trading

intent. 459 The Agencies recognize that the meaning of ‘‘reasonable period’’ may differ based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of securities. For example, an underwriter may be more likely to retain an unsold allotment in a bond offering because liquidity in the fixed-income market is generally not as deep as that in the equity market. If a trading desk retains an underwriting position for a period of time after the distribution, the trading desk must manage the risk of its underwriting position in accordance with its inventory and risk limits and authorization procedures. As discussed above, hedging transactions undertaken

in connection with such risk management activities must be conducted in compliance with the hedging exemption in § 75.5 of the final

rule.

The Agencies emphasize that the requirement to make reasonable efforts

to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position applies to the entirety of the trading desk’s underwriting position. As a result, this requirement applies to a number of

different scenarios in which an underwriter may hold a long or short position in the securities that are the subject of a distribution for a period of time. For example, if an underwriter is facilitating a distribution of securities

for which there is sufficient investor demand to purchase the securities at the offering price, this requirement would prevent the underwriter from retaining a portion of the allotment for its own account instead of selling the securities

to interested investors. If instead there

was insufficient investor demand at the time of the initial offering, this requirement would recognize that it may be appropriate for the underwriter

to hold an unsold allotment for a reasonable period of time. Under these
circumstances, the underwriter would

need to make reasonable efforts to sell

the unsold allotment when there is

sufficient market demand for the

securities. 460 This requirement would also apply in situations where the

underwriters sell securities in excess of

the number of securities to which the underwriting commitment relates, resulting in a syndicate short position in

the same class of securities that were the subject of the distribution. 461 This provision of the final exemption would require reasonable efforts to reduce any portion of the syndicate short position attributable to the banking entity that is acting as an underwriter. Such reduction could be accomplished if, for example, the managing underwriter exercises an overallotment option or shares are purchased in the secondary market to cover the short position.

The near term demand requirement, including the requirement to make

reasonable efforts to reduce the underwriting position, represents a new regulatory requirement for banking entities engaged in underwriting. At the margins, this requirement could alter the participation decision for some banking entities with respect to certain types of distributions, such as distributions that are more likely to result in the banking entity retaining an underwriting position for a period of

time. 462 However, the Agencies recognize that liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market vary across types of securities, and the Agencies expect that the express recognition of these differences in the rule should help mitigate any incentive to exit the underwriting business for certain types of securities or types of distributions.

3. Compliance Program Requirement

a. Proposed Compliance Program Requirement

Section 75.4(a)(2)(i) of the proposed exemption required a banking entity to establish an internal compliance program, as required by § 75.20 of the proposed rule, that is designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of the underwriting exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, and independent testing. 463 This requirement was proposed so that any banking entity relying on the underwriting exemption would have reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, and independent testing in place to support its compliance with the terms of the exemption. 464

b. Comments on the Proposed Compliance Program Requirement

Commenters did not directly address the proposed compliance program requirement in the underwriting exemption. Comments on the proposed compliance program requirement of § 75.20 of the proposed rule are
discussed in Part VI.C., below.

c. Final Compliance Program Requirement

The final rule includes a compliance program requirement that is similar to the proposed requirement, but the Agencies are making certain enhancements to emphasize the importance of a strong internal compliance program. More specifically, the final rule requires that a banking entity’s compliance program specifically include reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis and independent testing 465 identifying and addressing: (i) The products, instruments or exposures each trading desk may purchase, sell, or manage as part of its underwriting

activities; 466 (ii) limits for each trading
desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s underwriting activities, including the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties; 467 (iii) internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits; 468 and (iv) authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any

trade that would exceed one or more of a trading desk’s limits, demonstrable analysis of the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to one or more of a trading desk’s limits, and independent review (i.e., by risk managers and compliance officers at the appropriate level independent of the trading desk) of


### 5845 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

469 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(D).

470 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68963–68967 (requiring certain banking entities to establish, maintain, and enforce compliance programs with, among other things: (i) Written policies and procedures that describe a trading unit’s authorized instruments and products; (ii) internal controls for each trading unit, including risk limits for each trading unit and surveillance procedures; and (iii) a management framework, including management procedures for overseeing compliance with the proposed rule).

471 See final rule §§ 75.4(a)(2)(iii), 75.4(b)(2)(iii). 472 See final rule § 75.5.

473 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(C). 474 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iii)(D).

475 See Part VI.C. (discussing the compliance program requirement in § 75.20 of the final rule).

476 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(vii); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68868; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at

8353.

477 See id.

478 See Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Better
Markets (Feb. 2012). such demonstrable analysis and approval. 469

As noted above, the proposed compliance program requirement did not include the four specific elements listed above in the proposed underwriting exemption, although each of these provisions was included in some form in the detailed compliance program requirement under Appendix C of the proposed rule. 470 The Agencies are moving these particular requirements, with certain enhancements, into the underwriting exemption because the Agencies believe these are core elements of a program to ensure compliance with the underwriting exemption. These compliance procedures must be established, implemented, maintained, and enforced for each trading desk engaged in underwriting activity under § 75.4(a) of the final rule. Each of the requirements in paragraphs (a)(2)(iii)(A) through (D) must be appropriately tailored to the individual trading activities and strategies of each trading

desk.

The compliance program requirement in the underwriting exemption is substantially similar to the complianceprogram requirement in the marketmaking exemption, except that the Agencies are requiring more detailed risk management procedures in the market-making exemption due to the nature of that activity. 471 The Agencies believe including similar compliance program requirements in the underwriting and market-making exemptions may reduce burdens associated with building and maintaining compliance programs for each trading desk.

Identifying in the compliance program the relevant products, instruments, and exposures in which a trading desk is permitted to trade will facilitate monitoring and oversight of compliance with the underwriting exemption. For example, this requirement should prevent an individual trader on an underwriting desk from establishing positions in

instruments that are unrelated to the desk’s underwriting function. Further, the identification of permissible products, instruments, and exposures will help form the basis for the specific types of position and risk limits that the banking entity must establish and is relevant to considerations throughout the exemption regarding the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security.

A trading desk must have limits on the amount, types, and risk of the securities in its underwriting position, level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its underwriting position, and period of time a security may be held. Limits established under this provision, and any modifications to these limits made through the required escalation procedures, must account for the nature and amount of the trading desk’s underwriting activities, including the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. Among other things, these limits should be designed to prevent a trading desk from systematically retaining unsold

allotments even when there is customer demand for the positions that remain in the trading desk’s inventory. The Agencies recognize that trading desks’ limits may differ across types of securities and acknowledge that trading desks engaged in underwriting activities in less liquid securities, such as corporate bonds, may require different inventory, risk exposure, and holding period limits than trading desks engaged in underwriting activities in more liquid securities, such as certain equity securities. A trading desk hedging the risks of an underwriting position must comply with the hedging exemption, which provides for compliance procedures regarding risk

management. 472

Furthermore, a banking entity must establish internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits, including the frequency, nature, and extent of a trading desk exceeding its

limits. 473 This may include the use of management and exception reports. Moreover, the compliance program must set forth a process for determining the circumstances under which a trading desk’s limits may be modified on a temporary or permanent basis (e.g., due to market changes).

As noted above, a banking entity’s compliance program for trading desks engaged in underwriting activity must also include escalation procedures that require review and approval of any

trade that would exceed one or more of a trading desk’s limits, demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to one or more of a trading desk’s limits is consistent with

the near term customer demand requirement, and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval. 474 Thus, to increase a limit of a trading desk, there must be an analysis of why such increase would be appropriate based on the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, which must be independently reviewed. A banking entity also must maintain documentation and records with respect
to these elements, consistent with the requirement of § 75.20(b)(6).

As discussed in more detail in Part VI.C., the Agencies recognize that the compliance program requirements in the final rule will impose certain costs on banking entities but, on balance, the Agencies believe such requirements are necessary to facilitate compliance with

the statute and the final rule and to

reduce the risk of evasion. 475

4. Compensation Requirement

a. Proposed Compensation Requirement

Another provision of the proposed underwriting exemption required that the compensation arrangements of persons performing underwriting activities at the banking entity must be designed not to encourage proprietary risk-taking. 476 In connection with this requirement, the proposal clarified that although a banking entity relying on the underwriting exemption may appropriately take into account revenues resulting from movements in the price of securities that the banking entity underwrites to the extent that

such revenues reflect the effectiveness with which personnel have managed underwriting risk, the banking entity should provide compensation incentives that primarily reward client
revenues and effective client service, not proprietary risk-taking. 477

b. Comments on the Proposed Compensation Requirement

A few commenters expressed general support for the proposed requirement, but suggested certain modifications that they believed would enhance the requirement and make it more

effective. 478 Specifically, one


### 5846 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

479 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

480 See Occupy.

481 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iv); proposed rule
§ 75.4(a)(2)(vii). This is consistent with the final compensation requirements in the market-making and hedging exemptions. See final rule
§ 75.4(b)(2)(v); final rule § 75.5(b)(3). 482 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); supra Part VI.A.2.c.2.c. (discussing the requirement to make

reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position).

483 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

484 See Occupy. 485 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(iv); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8353. The proposal clarified that, in the case of a financial institution that is a government securities
dealer, such institution must have filed notice of that status as required by section 15C(a)(1)(B) of the Exchange Act. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8353.

486 See Part VI.A.3.c.6. (discussing the registration requirement in the market-making exemption).

487 For example, if a banking entity is a bank engaged in underwriting asset-backed securities for which it would be required to register as a

securities dealer but for the exclusion contained in section 3(a)(5)(C)(iii) of the Exchange Act, the final rule would not require the banking entity to be aregistered securities dealer to underwrite the assetbacked securities. See 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(5)(C)(iii). commenter suggested tailoring the requirement to underwriting activity by, for example, ensuring that personnel involved in underwriting are given compensation incentives for the

successful distribution of securities off

the firm’s balance sheet and are not rewarded for profits associated with securities that are not successfully distributed (although losses from such positions should be taken into consideration in determining the employee’s compensation). This

commenter further recommended that bonus compensation for a deal be withheld until all or a high percentage

of the relevant securities are

distributed. 479 Finally, one commenter suggested that the term ‘‘designed’’

should be removed from this provision. 480

c. Final Compensation Requirement

Similar to the proposed rule, the underwriting exemption in the final rule requires that the compensation arrangements of persons performing the banking entity’s underwriting activities, as described in the exemption, be designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading. 481 The Agencies do not intend to preclude an employee of an underwriting desk from being compensated for successfulunderwriting, which involves some risktaking.

Consistent with the proposal, activities for which a banking entity has established a compensation incentive structure that rewards speculation in, and appreciation of, the market value of securities underwritten by the banking entity are inconsistent with the underwriting exemption. A banking entity may, however, take into account revenues resulting from movements in the price of securities that the banking entity underwrites to the extent that

such revenues reflect the effectiveness with which personnel have managed underwriting risk. The banking entity should provide compensation incentives that primarily reward client
revenues and effective client services, not prohibited proprietary trading. For example, a compensation plan based purely on net profit and loss with no consideration for inventory control or risk undertaken to achieve those profits

would not be consistent with the underwriting exemption. The Agencies are not adopting an approach that prevents an employee from receiving any compensation related to profits arising from an unsold allotment, as suggested by one commenter, because the Agencies believe the final rule already includes sufficient controls to prevent a trading desk from intentionally retaining an unsold allotment to make a speculative profit when such allotment could be

sold to customers. 482 The Agencies also are not requiring compensation to be vested for a period of time, as recommended by one commenter to

reduce traders’ incentives for undue risk-taking. The Agencies believe the

final rule includes sufficient controls around risk-taking activity without a compensation vesting requirement because a banking entity must establish limits for a trading desk’s underwriting position and the trading desk must

make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position within a reasonable period. 483 The Agencies continue to believe it is appropriate to focus on the design of a banking entity’s compensation structure, so the Agencies are not removing the term ‘‘designed’’ from this provision. 484 This retains an objective focus on actions that the banking entity can control—the design of its incentive compensation program—and avoids a subjective focus on whether an employee feels incentivized by compensation, which may be more
difficult to assess. In addition, the framework of the final compensation requirement will allow banking entities to better plan and control the design of their compensation arrangements,

which should reduce costs and uncertainty and enhance monitoring, than an approach focused solely on

individual outcomes.

5. Registration Requirement

a. Proposed Registration Requirement

Section 75.4(a)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule would have required that a banking entity have the appropriate dealer registration or be exempt from registration or excluded from regulation
as a dealer to the extent that, in order to underwrite the security at issue, a person must generally be a registered securities dealer, municipal securities dealer, or government securities dealer. 485 Further, if the banking entity was engaged in the business of a dealer

outside the United States in a manner for which no U.S. registration is required, the proposed rule would have required the banking entity to be subject to substantive regulation of its dealing business in the jurisdiction in which the

business is located.

b. Comments on Proposed Registration Requirement

Commenters generally did not address the proposed dealer requirement in the underwriting exemption. However, as
discussed below in Part VI.A.3.c.2.b., a

number of commenters addressed a similar requirement in the proposed market-making exemption.

c. Final Registration Requirement

The requirement in § 75.4(a)(2)(vi) of the underwriting exemption, which provides that the banking entity must be licensed or registered to engage in underwriting activity in accordance with applicable law, is substantively similar to the proposed dealer registration requirement in § 75.4(a)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule. The primary difference between the proposed requirement and the final requirement is that the Agencies have simplified the language of the rule. The Agencies have also made conforming changes to the corresponding requirement in the market-making exemption to promote consistency across the exemptions, where appropriate. 486

As was proposed, this provision will require a U.S. banking entity to be an SEC-registered dealer in order to rely on the underwriting exemption in

connection with a distribution of securities—other than exempted securities, security-based swaps, commercial paper, bankers acceptances or commercial bills—unless the banking entity is exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as a dealer. 487 To the extent that a banking entity relies on the underwriting exemption in


### 5847 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

488 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.6.c. (discussing comments on this issue with respect to the proposed dealer registration requirement in the market-making exemption).

489 See proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(vi); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867–68868; CFTC Proposal, 77

FR at 8353. 490 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867–68868 n.142; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8353 n.148.

491 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68867–68868; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8353.

492 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Occupy; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

493 See Banco de Me  ́xico (stating that primary dealers need to profit from resulting proprietary positions in foreign sovereign debt, including by holding significant positions in anticipation of future price movements, in order to make the primary dealer business financially attractive); IIB/ EBF (noting that primary dealers may actively seek to profit from price and interest rate movements of their holdings, which the relevant sovereign entitysupports because such activity provides muchneeded liquidity for securities that are otherwise largely purchased pursuant to buy-and-hold strategies by institutional investors and other entities seeking safe returns and liquidity buffers); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

494 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). 495 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

496 See Occupy (requesting that the rule require automatic disgorgement of any profits arising from appreciation in the value of positions in connection with underwriting activities).

497 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

498 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

499 See Banco de Me  ́xico; IIB/EBF; Japanese

Bankers Ass’n. connection with a distribution of municipal securities or government securities, rather than the exemption in § 75.6(a) of the final rule, this provision may require the banking entity to be registered or licensed as a municipal securities dealer or government securities dealer, if required by applicable law. However, this provision does not require a banking entity to register in order to qualify for the underwriting exemption if the banking entity is not otherwise required to register by applicable law.

The Agencies have determined that, for purposes of the underwriting exemption, rather than require a banking entity engaged in the business

of a securities dealer outside the United States to be subject to substantive regulation of its dealing business in the jurisdiction in which the business is located, a banking entity’s dealing activity outside the U.S. should only be subject to licensing or registration provisions if required under applicable foreign law (provided no U.S. registration or licensing requirements apply to the banking entity’s activities). In response to comments, the final rule recognizes that certain foreign jurisdictions may not provide for substantive regulation of dealing

businesses. 488 The Agencies do not believe it is necessary to preclude banking entities from engaging in underwriting activities in such foreign jurisdictions to achieve the goals of

section 13 of the BHC Act because these banking entities would continue to be subject to the other requirements of the underwriting exemption.

6. Source of Revenue Requirement

a. Proposed Source of Revenue Requirement

Under § 75.4(a)(2)(vi) of the proposed rule, the underwriting activities of a banking entity would have been required to be designed to generate revenues primarily from fees, commissions, underwriting spreads, or

other income not attributable to appreciation in the value of covered financial positions or hedging of covered financial positions. 489 The proposal clarified that underwriting spreads would include any ‘‘gross spread’’ (i.e., the difference between the price an underwriter sells securities to the public and the price it purchases them from the issuer) designed to compensate the underwriter for its

services. 490 This requirement provided

that activities conducted in reliance on the underwriting exemption should demonstrate patterns of revenue generation and profitability consistent
with, and related to, the services an underwriter provides to its customers in bringing securities to market, rather than changes in the market value of the

underwritten securities. 491

b. Comments on the Proposed Source of Revenue Requirement

A few commenters requested certain modifications to the proposed source of revenue requirement. These commenters’ suggested revisions were generally intended either to refine the

standard to better account for certain

activities or to make it more stringent. 492 Three commenters expressed concern that the proposed source of revenue requirement would negatively impact a banking entity’s ability to act as a primary dealer or in a similar capacity. 493

With respect to suggested
modifications, one commenter

recommended that ‘‘customer revenue’’

include revenues attributable to syndicate activities, hedging activities, and profits and losses from sales of residual positions, as long as the

underwriter makes a reasonable effort to dispose of any residual position in light of existing market conditions. 494

Another commenter indicated that the

rule would better address securitization if it required compensation to be linked in part to risk minimization for the securitizer and in part to serving customers. This commenter suggested

that such a framework would be preferable because, in the context of securitizations, fee-based compensation structures did not previously prevent banking entities from accumulating large and risky positions with significant market exposure. 495

To strengthen the proposed requirement, one commenter requested that the terms ‘‘designed’’ and ‘‘primarily’’ be removed and replaced by the word ‘‘solely.’’ 496 Two other commenters requested that this requirement be interpreted to prevent a banking entity from acting as an

underwriter for a distribution of

securities if such securities lack adiscernible and sufficiently liquid preexisting market and a foreseeable market price. 497

c. Final Rule’s Approach To Assessing

Source of Revenue

The Agencies believe the final rule

includes sufficient controls around an

underwriter’s source of revenue and have determined not to adopt the additional requirement included in proposed rule § 75.4(a)(2)(vi). The Agencies believe that removing this requirement addresses commenters’ concerns that the proposed requirement did not appropriately reflect certain revenue sources from underwriting activity 498 or may impact primary

dealer activities. 499 At the same time,

the final rule continues to include provisions that focus on whether anunderwriter is generating underwritingrelated revenue and that should limit an underwriter’s ability to generate revenues purely from price appreciation. In particular, the requirement to make reasonable efforts

to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position within a reasonable period, which was not included in the proposed rule, should limit an underwriter’s ability to gain revenues purely from price appreciation related to its underwriter position. Similarly, the determination of whether an underwriter receives special compensation for purposes of the

definition of ‘‘distribution’’ takes into account whether a banking entity is generating underwriting-related

revenue.

The final rule does not adopt a requirement that prevents an underwriter from generating any revenue from price appreciation out of concern that such a requirement could prevent an underwriter from retaining an unsold allotment under any


### 5848 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

500 See Occupy; supra Part VI.A.2.c.2. (discussing

comments on unsold allotments and the requirement in the final rule to make reasonable efforts to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position).

501 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

502 See supra Part VI.A.2.c.2.

503 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

504 See final rule § 75.4(a)(2)(ii). Further, as noted above, this exemption does not permit the

accumulation of assets for securitization. See supra

Part VI.A.2.c.1.c.v. 505 As discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra, the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ are
defined in the same manner in the final rule. Thus, the Agencies use these terms synonymously throughout this discussion and sometimes use the

term ‘‘customer’’ to refer to all entities that meet the definition of ‘‘client, customer, and counterparty’’ in the final rule’s market-making exemption.

506 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(B). 507 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68869; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8354–8355.

508 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that the proposed exemption ‘‘seemsto view market making based on a liquid, exchangetraded equity model in which market makers are simple intermediaries akin to agents’’ and that ‘‘[t]his view does not fit market making even in equity markets and widely misses the mark for the vast majority of markets and asset classes’’); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); ICI (Feb. 2012); BoA; Columbia Mgmt.; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Invesco; ASF (Feb. 2012) (‘‘The seven criteria in the proposed rule, and circumstances, which would be inconsistent with other provisions of the exemption. 500 Similarly, the Agencies are not adopting a source of revenue requirement that would prevent a banking entity from acting as

underwriter for a distribution of

securities if such securities lack adiscernible and sufficiently liquid preexisting market and a foreseeable market price, as suggested by two

commenters. 501 The Agencies believe these commenters’ concern is mitigated by the near term demand requirement, which requires a trading desk to have a reasonable expectation of demand from other market participants for the amount and type of securities to be acquired from an issuer or selling security holder

for distribution. 502 Further, one

commenter recommended a revenue requirement directed at securitization activities to prevent banking entities from accumulating large and risky positions with significant market

exposure. 503 The Agencies believe the requirement to make reasonable efforts

to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position should achieve this stated goal and, thus, the Agencies

do not believe an additional revenue requirement for securitization activity is

needed. 504

3. Section 75.4(b): Market-Making Exemption

a. Introduction

In adopting the final rule, the Agencies are striving to balance two goals of section 13 of the BHC Act: To allow market making, which is important to well-functioning markets as well as to the economy, and simultaneously to prohibit proprietary trading, unrelated to market making or other permitted activities, that poses significant risks to banking entities and the financial system. In response tocomments on the proposed marketmaking exemption, the Agencies are adopting certain modifications to the proposed exemption to better account for the varying characteristics of market making-related activities across markets and asset classes, while requiring that banking entities maintain a robust set of risk controls for their market makingrelated activities. A flexible approach to this exemption is appropriate because

the activities a market maker undertakes to provide important intermediation and liquidity services will differ based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a given type of financial instrument. The statute specifically permits banking entities to continue to provide these beneficial services to their
clients, customers, and counterparties. 505 Thus, the Agencies are adopting an approach that recognizes the full scope of market making-related activities banking entities currently undertake and requires that these activities be subject to clearly defined, verifiable, and monitored risk parameters.

b. Overview

1. Proposed Market-Making Exemption

Section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act provides an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading for the purchase, sale, acquisition, or disposition of securities, derivatives, contracts of sale of a commodity for future delivery, and options on any of the foregoing in connection with market making-related activities, to the extent that such activities are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. 506

Section 75.4(b) of the proposed rule would have implemented this statutory exemption by requiring that a banking entity’s market making-related activities comply with seven standards. As discussed in the proposal, these standards were designed to ensure that any banking entity relying on the exemption would be engaged in bona fide market making-related activities
and, further, would conduct such activities in a way that was not susceptible to abuse through the taking of speculative, proprietary positions as a part of, or mischaracterized as, market making-related activities. The Agencies proposed to use additional regulatory and supervisory tools in conjunction with the proposed market-making exemption, including quantitative measurements for banking entities engaged in significant covered trading activity in proposed Appendix A, commentary on how the Agencies proposed to distinguish between permitted market making-related activity and prohibited proprietary trading in proposed Appendix B, and a compliance regime in proposed § 75.20 and, where applicable, Appendix C of the proposal. This multi-faceted approach was intended to address the complexities of differentiating permitted market making-related activities from prohibited proprietary trading. 507

2. Comments on the Proposed MarketMaking Exemption

The Agencies received significant comment regarding the proposed market-making exemption. In this Part, the Agencies highlight the main issues, concerns, and suggestions raised by commenters with respect to the proposed market-making exemption. As discussed in greater detail below,

commenters’ views on the effectiveness of the proposed exemption varied. Commenters discussed a broad range oftopics related to the proposed marketmaking exemption including, among others: The overall scope of the proposed exemption and potential restrictions on market making in certain markets or asset classes; the potentialmarket impact of the proposed marketmaking exemption; the appropriate level of analysis for compliance with the proposed exemption; the effectiveness of the individual requirements of the proposed exemption; and specific

activities that should or should not beconsidered permitted market makingrelated activity under the rule.

a. Comments on the Overall Scope of the Proposed Exemption

With respect to the general scope of the exemption, a number of commenters expressed concern that the proposedapproach to implementing the marketmaking exemption is too narrow or restrictive, particularly with respect to less liquid markets. These commenters expressed concern that the proposed exemption would not be workable in many markets and asset classes and

does not take into account how marketmaking services are provided in those

markets and asset classes. 508 Some


### 5849 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

the related criterion for identifying permitted hedging, are overly restrictive and will make it impractical for dealers to continue making markets in most securitized products.’’); Chamber (Feb. 2012) (expressing particular concern about the commercial paper market).

509 Several commenters stated that the proposed rule would limit a market maker’s ability to maintain inventory. See, e.g., NASP; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Wellington; Prof. Duffie; Standish
Mellon; MetLife; Lord Abbett; NYSE Euronext;
CIEBA; British Columbia; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Shadow Fin. Regulatory Comm.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; STANY; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012);
IRSG; Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs

et al. (Feb. 21, 2012); Australian Bankers Ass’n.
(Feb. 2012); FEI; ASF (Feb. 2012); RBC; PUC Texas; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; IHS; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Thakor Study (stating that by artificially constraining the security holdings that a banking entity can have in its inventory for market making or proprietary trading purposes, section 13 of the BHC Act will make bank risk management less efficient and may adversely impact the

diversified financial services business model of
banks). However, some commenters stated that

market makers should seek to minimize their inventory or should not need large inventories. See,

e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz. Other commenters expressed concern that the proposed rule could limit interdealer trading. See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011).

510 See, e.g., BlackRock; Putnam; Fixed Income
Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012); MetLife; IAA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); T. Rowe
Price; Sen. Bennet; Sen. Corker; PUC Texas; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); Invesco.

511 See, e.g., Wellington; Prof. Duffie; Standish
Mellon; Commissioner Barnier; NYSE Euronext; BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; ICE; Chamber
(Feb. 2012); BDA (Feb. 2012); Putnam; FTN; Fixed
Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012); IAA; CME Group; Capital Group; PUC Texas; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); Eaton Vance; ICI (Feb. 2012); Invesco; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Thakor Study.

512 For example, some commenters stated that market makers may revert to an agency or ‘‘special

order’’ model. See, e.g., Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ACLI (Feb. 2012); Vanguard; RBC. In addition, some commenters stated that new systems will be developed, such as alternative market matching networks, but these commenters disagreed about whether such changes would happen in the near term. See, e.g., CalPERS; BlackRock; Stuyvesant; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. Other commenters stated that it is unlikely that new systems will be developed. See,

e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). One commenter stated that the proposed rule may cause a banking organization that engages in significant market-making activity togive up its banking charter or spin off its marketmaking operations to avoid compliance with the proposed exemption. See Prof. Duffie.

513 See, e.g., NASP; Wellington; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Credit Suisse (Seidel); BoA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Putnam; ICI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); NYSE Euronext; Sen. Corker; Invesco.

514 See, e.g., Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

515 See, e.g., Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR et al.
(Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

516 See Occupy (‘‘[I]t is unclear that this rule, aswritten, will markedly alter the current customerserving business. Indeed, this rule has gone to excessive lengths to protect the covered bankingentities’ ability to maintain responsible customerfacing business.’’); Alfred Brock.

517 See, e.g., Rep. Bachus et al.; IIF; Morgan Stanley (stating that beyond walled-off proprietary trading, the line is hard to draw, particularly because both require principal risk-taking and the features of market making vary across markets and asset classes and become more pronounced in times of market stress); CFA Inst. (representing that thedistinction is particularly difficult in the fixedincome market); ICFR; Prof. Duffie; WR Hambrecht.

518 See, e.g., Chamber (Feb. 2012) (citing an article by Stephen Breyer stating that society should not expend disproportionate resources trying to reduce or eliminate ‘‘the last 10 percent’’ of the risks of a certain problem); JPMC; RBC; ICFR; Sen. Hagan. One of these commenters indicated that any concerns that banking entities would engage in speculative trading as a result of an expansive market-making exemption would be addressed by
other reform initiatives (e.g., Basel III implementation will provide laddered disincentives to holding positions as principal as a result of capital and liquidity requirements). See RBC.

519 See Wellington; Paul Volcker; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

520 See Wellington.

521 See Paul Volcker.

522 See Wellington; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading);
HSBC; Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable;
ACLI (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; ERCOT; Invesco. See

also IAA (stating that it is unclear whether therequirements must be applied on a transaction-bytransaction basis or if compliance with the requirements is based on overall activities). This
issue is addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.1.c., infra.

523 See, e.g., Barclays; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). As explained above, the term ‘‘covered financial position’’ from the proposal has been replaced by the term ‘‘financial instrument’’ in the final rule. Because the types of instruments
included in both definitions are identical, the term ‘‘financial instrument’’ is used throughout this Part.

524 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); Wellington. commenters expressed particular concern that the proposed exemption may restrict or limit certain activities currently conducted by market makers (e.g., holding inventory or interdealer trading). 509 Several commenters stated that the proposed exemption would create too much uncertainty regarding compliance 510 and, further, may have a chilling effect on banking entities’ market making-related activities. 511 Due to the perceived restrictions and burdens of the proposed exemption, many commenters indicated that the rule may change the way in which market-making services are provided. 512 A number of commenters expressed the view that the proposed exemption is inconsistent with Congressional intent

because it would restrict and reducebanking entities’ current market makingrelated activities. 513

Other commenters, however, stated that the proposed exemption was too

broad and recommended that the rule place greater restrictions on market making, particularly in illiquid, nontransparent markets. 514 Many of these commenters suggested that the exemption should only be available for traditional market-making activity in relatively safe, ‘‘plain vanilla’’

instruments. 515 Two commenters represented that the proposed exemption would have little to no impact on banking entities’ current market making-related services. 516

Commenters expressed differing views regarding the ease or difficulty of distinguishing permitted market making-related activity from prohibited proprietary trading. A number of commenters represented that it is difficult or impossible to distinguish prohibited proprietary trading from permitted market making-related activity. 517 With regard to this issue,

several commenters recommended that the Agencies not try to remove all aspects of proprietary trading from market making-related activity because doing so would likely restrict certain legitimate market-making activity. 518 Other commenters were of the view that it is possible to differentiate between prohibited proprietary trading and permitted market making-related activity. 519 For example, one commenter stated that, while the analysis may
involve subtle distinctions, the

fundamental difference between a banking entity’s market-making activities and proprietary trading activities is the emphasis in market making on seeking to meet customer

needs on a consistent and reliable basis throughout a market cycle. 520 According to another commenter, holding substantial securities in a trading book for an extended period of time assumes the character of a proprietary position and, while there may be occasions when a customer-oriented purchase and subsequent sale extend over days and cannot be more quickly executed or hedged, substantial holdings of this character should be relatively rare and limited to less liquid markets. 521

Several commenters expressed general concern that the proposed exemption may be applied on a transaction-by-transaction basis and explained the burdens that may result from such an approach. 522 Commenters appeared to attribute these concerns to language in the proposed exemption referring to a ‘‘purchase or sale of a
[financial instrument]’’ 523 or to language in Appendix B indicating that the Agencies may assess certain factors and criteria at different levels, including a ‘‘single significant transaction.’’ 524 With respect to the burdens of a transaction-by-transaction analysis,


### 5850 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

525 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays (stating that ‘‘hundreds or thousands of trades can occur in a single day in a single trading unit’’).

526 See, e.g., ICI (Feb. 2012); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

527 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

528 SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

529 See id. (suggesting that the Agencies ‘‘give full effect to the statutory intent to allow market making by viewing the permitted activity on a holistic
basis’’).

530 See ACLI (Feb. 2012); Fixed Income Forum/

Credit Roundtable.

531 See Wellington; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ACLI (Feb. 2012); Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable. The Agencies address this topic in Part VI.A.3.c.1.c., infra. 532 See Wellington. This commenter did not provide greater specificity about how it would define ‘‘trading desk’’ or ‘‘aggregation unit.’’ See id.

533 See Morgan Stanley (stating that ‘‘trading unit’’ should be defined as ‘‘each organizational

unit that is used to structure and control the aggregate risk-taking activities and employees that are engaged in the coordinated implementation of a customer-facing revenue generation strategy and that participate in the execution of any covered trading activity’’); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012). One of these commenters discussed its suggested definition of ‘‘trading unit’’ in the context of the proposed requirement to record and report certain quantitative measurements, but it is unclear that the commenter was also suggesting that thisdefinition be used for purposes of the marketmaking exemption. For example, this commenter expressed support for a multi-level approach to defining ‘‘trading unit,’’ and it is not clear how a definition that captures multiple organizational levels across a banking organization would work in the context of the market-making exemption. See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (suggested that ‘‘trading unit’’ be defined ‘‘at a level that presents its activities in the context of the whole’’ and noting that the appropriate level may differ depending on the structure of the banking entity).

534 See, e.g., Wellington; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.;
Prof. Duffie; IR&M; G2 FinTech; MetLife; NYSE Euronext; Anthony Flynn and Koral Fusselman; IIF;
CalPERS; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Shadow Fin. Regulatory Comm.; John Reed; Prof. Richardson; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; ICE; BlackRock; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); WR Hambrecht; Vanguard; Capital Group; PUC Texas; SSgA (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; Fidelity; Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Invesco; ISDA (Feb. 2012); Stephen Roach; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). The Agencies respond to these comments in Part
VI.A.3.b.3., infra.

535 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); John Reed; Prof. Richardson; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Capital Group; Invesco; BDA (Feb. 2012) (Oct. 2012) (suggesting a safe harbor for any trading desk that effects more than 50 percent of its transactions through sales representatives).

536 See, e.g., Flynn & Fusselman; Prof. Colesanti

et al.

537 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); IIF; NYSE Euronext; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Barclays; BoA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading) (suggesting that the rule: (i) Provide a general grant of authority to engage in any transactions entered into as part of a banking entity’s market-making business, where ‘‘market making’’ is defined as ‘‘the business of being willing to facilitate customer purchases and sales of [financial instruments] as an intermediary over time and in size, including by holding positions in inventory;’’ and (ii) allow banking entities to monitor compliance with this exemption internally through their compliance and risk management infrastructure); PNC et al.; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

538 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Wellington; CalPERS; BlackRock; SSgA (Feb. 2012); Invesco.

539 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (suggesting that this guidance could be incorporated in banking entities’ policies and procedures for purposes of complying with the rule,

in addition to the establishment of risk limits,
controls, and metrics); JPMC; BoA; PUC Texas; SSgA (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

540 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Citigroup

(Feb. 2012).

541 See, e.g., Morgan Stanley; Stephen Roach.

542 See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; CalPERS; STANY; ICE; Vanguard; Capital Group.

543 See MetLife; Fixed Income Forum/Credit
Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012).

544 See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; Shadow Fin. Regulatory

Comm. See also Wedbush.

545 See WR Hambrecht.

546 See G2 FinTech.

547 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012).

548 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that the exemption should expressly mention the conflicts provision and provide examples to warn against particular conflicts, such as recommending clients buy poorly performing assets in order to remove them from the banking entity’s book or attempting to move market prices in favor of trading positions a banking entity has built up in order to make a profit); Stephen Roach (suggesting that the exemption integrate the limitations on permitted
activities).

549 See Fidelity (stating that the exemption needsto be as broad as possible to account for customerfacing principal trades, block trades, and market making in OTC derivatives). See also STANY (stating that it is better to make the exemption too
broad than too narrow). some commenters noted that banking entities can engage in a large volume of market-making transactions daily,

which would make it burdensome to apply the exemption to each trade. 525 A few commenters indicated that, even if the Agencies did not intend to require transaction-by-transaction analysis, the proposed rule’s language can be read to imply such a requirement. These commenters indicated that ambiguity on this issue could have a chilling effect on market making or could allow some examiners to rigidly apply the requirements of the exemption on a trade-by-trade basis. 526 Other

commenters indicated that it would be

difficult to determine whether a particular trade was or was not a market-making trade without

consideration of the relevant unit’s

overall activities. 527 One commenter elaborated on this point by stating that ‘‘an analysis that seeks to characterize specific transactions as either market making . . . or prohibited activity does not accord with the way in which modern trading units operate, which generally view individual positions as a

bundle of characteristics that contribute to their complete portfolio.’’ 528 This commenter noted that a position entered into as part of market making-related activities may serve multiple functions at one time, such as responding to customer demand, hedging a risk, and building inventory. The commenter also expressed concern that individual transactions or positions may not be severable or separately identifiable as serving a market-making purpose. 529 Two commenters suggested that the requirements in the market-making exemption be applied at the portfolio

level rather than the trade level. 530

Moreover, commenters also set forth their views on the organizational level at which the requirements of the proposed market-making exemption should apply. 531 The proposed exemption generally applied requirements to a ‘‘trading desk or other organizational unit’’ of a banking entity. In response to this proposed approach, commenters stated that compliance should be assessed at each trading desk or aggregation unit532 or at each trading

unit. 533

Several commenters suggested

alternative or additive means of implementing the statutory exemption for market making-related activity. 534 Commenters’ recommended approaches
varied, but a number of commenters requested approaches involving one or more of the following elements: (i) Safe
harbors, 535 bright lines, 536 or presumptions of compliance with the exemption based on the existence of certain factors (e.g., compliance program, metrics, general customer focus or orientation, providing liquidity, and/or exchange registration as a market maker); 537 (ii) a focus on metrics or other objective factors; 538 (iii) guidance on permitted market making-related activity, rather than rule
requirements; 539 (iv) risk management
structures and/or risk limits; 540 (v) adding a new customer-facing criterion or focusing on client-related

activities; 541 (vi) capital and liquidity
requirements; 542 (vii) development of individualized plans for each banking entity, in coordination with regulators; 543 (viii) ring fencingaffiliates engaged in market makingrelated activity; 544 (ix) margin
requirements; 545 (x) a compensationfocused approach; 546 (xi) permitting all swap dealing activity; 547 (xii) additional provisions regarding material conflicts of interest and high-risk assets and trading strategies; 548 and/or (xiii) making the exemption as broad as possible under the statute. 549


### 5851 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

550 See, e.g., AllianceBernstein; Rep. Bachus et al. (Dec. 2011); EMTA; NASP; Wellington; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Sen. Hagan; Prof. Duffie; Investure;
Standish Mellon; IR&M; MetLife; Lord Abbett; Commissioner Barnier; Quebec; IIF; Sumitomo Trust; Liberty Global; NYSE Euronext; CIEBA;

EFAMA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup
(Feb. 2012); STANY; ICE; BlackRock; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); BDA (Feb. 2012); Putnam;
Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; Western Asset Mgmt.; ACLI (Feb. 2012); IAA; CME Group; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb.
14, 2012); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 21, 2012); T.
Rowe Price; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); FEI; AFMA; Sen. Carper et al.; PUC Texas; ERCOT; IHS; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; Eaton Vance; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Union Asset; Sen. Casey; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (providing estimated impacts on asset valuation, borrowing costs, and transaction costs in the corporate bond market based on hypothetical liquidity reduction scenarios); Thakor Study. The Agencies respond to comments regarding the potential market impact of
the rule in Part VI.A.3.b.3., infra.

551 See, e.g., AllianceBernstein; Wellington;
Investure; Standish Mellon; MetLife; Lord Abbett; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Citigroup (Feb.
2012); BlackRock; Putnam; ACLI (Feb. 2012);

Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs et

al. (Feb. 21, 2012); T. Rowe Price; Sen. Carper et al.; IHS; Columbia Mgmt.; ICI (Feb. 2012) British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Thakor Study (stating that section 13 of the BHC Act will likely result in higher bid-ask spreads by causing at least some retrenchment of banks from market making, resulting in fewer market makers and less competition).

552 See, e.g., Wellington; Prof. Duffie; Standish
Mellon; Lord Abbett; IIF; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BDA (Feb. 2012); IHS; FTN; IAA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); T. Rowe Price; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); Eaton Vance; British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

553 See, e.g., Prof. Duffie (arguing that, for example, ‘‘during the financial crisis of 2007–2009, the reduced market making capacity of major dealer banks caused by their insufficient capital levels

resulted in dramatic downward distortions in corporate bond prices’’); IIF; Barclays; IAA; Vanguard; Wellington; FTN.

554 See, e.g., AllianceBernstein; Chamber (Dec. 2011); Members of Congress (Dec. 2011); Wellington; Sen. Hagan; Prof. Duffie; IR&M; MetLife; Lord Abbett; Liberty Global; NYSE

Euronext; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); NCSHA; ASF (Feb. 2012) (stating that ‘‘[f]ailure to permit the activities necessary for banking entities to act in [a] market-making capacity [in assetbacked securities] would have a dramatic adverse effect on the ability of securitizers to access the

asset-backed securities markets and thus to obtain the debt financing necessary to ensure a vibrant U.S. economy’’); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; BlackRock;
Chamber (Feb. 2012); IHS; BDA (Feb. 2012); Fixed
Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Abbott Labs et

al. (Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 21, 2012); T. Rowe Price; FEI; AFMA; SSgA (Feb. 2012);

PNC et al.; ICI (Feb. 2012); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); Thakor Study (stating that when a firm’s cost of capital goes up, it invests less—resulting in lower economic growth and lower employment—and citing supporting data indicating that a 1 percent increase in the cost of capital would lead to a $55 to $82.5 billion decline in aggregate annual capital spending by U.S. nonfarm firms and job losses between 550,000 and 1.1 million per year
in the nonfarm sector). One commenter further noted that a higher cost of capital can lead a firm
to make riskier, short-term investments. See Thakor Study.

555 See, e.g., Wellington; Standish Mellon; IR&M;
MetLife; Lord Abbett; NYSE Euronext; CIEBA; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup
(Feb. 2012); STANY; ICE; BlackRock; Fixed Income
Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012); IAA;

Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs et

al. (Feb. 21, 2012); T. Rowe Price; Vanguard;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); FEI; Sen. Carper et al.; Columbia Mgmt.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; TMA Hong Kong; Sen. Casey; IHS; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Thakor Study.

556 See, e.g., Barclays; FTN; Abbott Labs et al.
(Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 21, 2012).

557 See, e.g., AllianceBernstein (stating that, to the extent the rule reduces liquidity provided by market makers, open end mutual funds that are largely driven by the need to respond to both redemptions and subscriptions will be immediately impacted in terms of higher trading costs); Wellington (indicating that periods of extreme market stress are likely to exacerbate costs and challenges, which could force investors such as mutual funds and pension funds to accept distressed prices to fund redemptions or pay current benefits); Lord Abbett (stating that certain factors, such as reduced bank capital to support market-making businesses and economic uncertainty, have already reduced liquidity and caused asset managers to have an increased preference for highly liquid credits and expressing
concern that, if section 13 of the BHC Act further reduces liquidity, then: (i) asset managers’ increased preference for highly liquid credit could lead to unhealthy portfolio concentrations, and (ii) asset managers will maintain a larger cash cushion in portfolios that may be subject to redemption, which will likely result in investors getting poorer returns); EFAMA; BlackRock (stating that investment decisions are heavily dependent on a liquidity factor input, so as liquidity dissipates, investment strategies become more limited and returns to investors are diminished by wider spreads and higher transaction costs); CFA Inst. (noting that a mutual fund that tries to liquidate holdings to meet redemptions may have difficulty selling at acceptable prices, thus impairing the fund’s NAV for both redeeming investors and for those that remain in the fund); Putnam; Fixed

Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; ACLI; T. Rowe Price; Vanguard; IAA; FEI; Sen. Carper et al.; Columbia Mgmt.; ICI (Feb. 2012); Invesco; Union Asset; Standish Mellon; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

558 See, e.g., CIEBA (stating that for smaller issuers in particular, market makers need to have incentives to make markets, and the proposal removes important incentives); ACLI (indicating that lower liquidity will most likely result in higher

costs for issuers of debt and, for lesser known or lower quality issuers, this cost may be significant and in some cases prohibitive because the cost will vary depending on the credit quality of the issuer,

the amount of debt it has in the market, and the maturity of the security); PNC et al. (expressing concern that a regional bank’s market-making activity for small and middle market customers is more likely to be inappropriately characterized as impermissible proprietary trading due to lower trading volume involving less liquid securities); Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Abbott Labs

et al. (Feb. 14, 2012); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 21, 2012); FEI; ICI (Feb. 2012); TMA Hong Kong; Sen.
Casey.

559 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; RBC; NYSE Euronext; Credit Suisse (Seidel).

560 See, e.g., Paul Volcker; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Prof. Richardson; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Prof. Johnson.

561 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen. See

also Paul Volcker (stating that at some point, greater liquidity, or the perception of greater liquidity, may encourage more speculative trading).

562 See Prof. Richardson. b. Comments Regarding the Potential Market Impact of the Proposed Exemption

As discussed above, several commenters stated that the proposed rule would impact a banking entity’sability to engage in market makingrelated activity. Many of these commenters represented that, as a result, the proposed exemption would likely result in reduced liquidity, 550 wider bid-ask spreads, 551 increased market volatility, 552 reduced price discovery or price transparency, 553 increased costs of raising capital or higher financing costs, 554 greater costs for investors or consumers, 555 and

slower execution times. 556 Some commenters expressed particular concern about potential impacts on institutional investors (e.g., mutual funds and pension funds) 557 or on small or midsized companies. 558 A number of

commenters discussed the interrelationship between primary and secondary market activity and indicated that restrictions on market making would impact the underwriting

process. 559

A few commenters expressed the view that reduced liquidity would not necessarily be a negative result. 560 For example, two commenters noted that liquidity is vulnerable to liquidity spirals, in which a high level of market liquidity during one period feeds a sharp decline in liquidity during the next period by initially driving asset prices upward and supporting increased leverage. The commenters explained that liquidity spirals lead to ‘‘fire sales’’ by market speculators when events reveal that assets are overpriced and speculators must sell their assets to reduce their leverage. 561 According to another commenter, banking entities’ access to the safety net allows them to distort market prices and, arguably, produce excess liquidity. The commenter further represented that it would be preferable to allow the discipline of the market to choose the pricing of securities and the amount of liquidity. 562 Some commenters cited an economic study indicating that the U.S. financial system has become less efficient in generating economic growth


### 5852 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

563 See, e.g., Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz (citing Thomas Phillippon, ‘‘Has the U.S. Finance Industry Become Less Efficient?,’’ NYU Working Paper, Nov.
2011); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Prof. Johnson.

564 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that there is no convincing, independent evidence that the rule would increase trading costs or reduce liquidity, and the best evidence available suggests that the buy-side firms would greatly benefit from the competitive pressures that transparency can bring); Better Markets (Feb. 2012) (‘‘Industry’s claim that [section 13 of the BHC Act] will ‘reduce market liquidity, capital formation, and credit availability, and thereby hamper economic growth and job creation’ disregard the fact that the financial crisis did more damage to those concerns than any rule or reform possibly could.’’); Profs. Stout & Hastings; Prof. Johnson; Occupy; Public
Citizen; Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; Better Markets (June 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). One commenter stated that the proposed rule would improve market liquidity, efficiency, and price transparency. See

Alfred Brock.

565 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012);
Prof. Richardson; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Profs. Stout & Hastings; Prof. Johnson; Occupy; Public
Citizen; Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; Better Markets (June 2012). Similarly, one commenter indicated that non-banking entity market participants could fill the current role of banking entities in the market if implementation of the rule is phased in. See ACLI (Feb. 2012).

566 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

567 See Prof. Johnson.

568 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). 569 See, e.g., Wellington; Prof. Duffie; Investure; IIF; Liberty Global; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; BoA; STANY; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); FTN; Western Asset Mgmt.;
IAA; PUC Texas; ICI (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; Invesco. In addition, some commenters recognized that other market participants are likely to fill banking entities’ roles in the long term, but not in the short

term. See, e.g., ICFR; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

570 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (‘‘Major bankaffiliated market makers have large capital bases, balance sheets, technology platforms, global operations, relationships with clients, sales forces, risk infrastructure, and management processes that would take smaller or new dealers years and billions of dollars to replicate.’’).

571 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

572 See Thakor Study.

573 See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; Oliver Wyman (Feb.
2012).

574 See, e.g., MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC;
BoA; ACLI (Feb. 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

575 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

576 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); MFA; RBC. 577 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.1.b.ii. (discussing commenters’ requests for greater clarity regarding the permissibility of block positioning activity).

578 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); ICI Global; Vanguard; SSgA (Feb. 2012).

579 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); FTN; RBC; ISDA (Feb. 2012).

580 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; IIB/EBF.

581 See CME Group (requesting clarification that the market-making exemption permits a bankingentity to engage in market making in exchangetraded futures and options because the dealer registration requirement in § 75.4(b)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule did not refer to such instruments and stating that lack of an explicit exemption would reduce market-making activities in these instruments, which would decrease liquidity). But

see Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz (stating that the Agencies should pay special attention to options trading and other derivatives because they are highly volatile assets that are difficult if not impossible to effectively hedge, except through a completely matched position, and suggesting that options and similar derivatives may need to be required to be sold only as riskless principal under § 75.6(b)(1)(ii) of the proposed rule or significantly limited through capital charges); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that asset classes that are particularly hard to hedge, such as options, should be given special attention under the hedging exemption).

582 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). Other commenters, however, stated that banking entities should be limited in their ability to rely on the market-making exemption to conduct transactions in bespoke or customized derivatives. See, e.g., AFR

et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

583 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n. (stating that

transactions with affiliates and subsidiaries and related to hedging activities are a type of market making-related activity or risk-mitigating hedging activity that should be exempted by the rule);

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). According
to one of these commenters, inter-affiliate transactions should be viewed as part of a coordinated activity for purposes of determining whether a banking entity qualifies for an exemption. This commenter stated that, for example, if a market maker shifts positions held in inventory to an affiliate that is better able to manage the risk of such positions, both the market maker and its affiliate would be engaged in permitted market making-related activity. This commenter further represented that fitting the inter-affiliate swap into the exemption may be difficult (e.g., one of the affiliates entering into the swap may not be holding itself out as a willing counterparty). See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). in recent years, despite increased trading volumes. 563

Some commenters stated that it is unlikely the proposed rule would result in the negative market impacts
identified above, such as reduced market liquidity. 564 For example, a few

commenters stated that other market participants, who are not subject to section 13 of the BHC Act, may enter the market or increase their trading activities to make up for any reduction in banking entities’ market-making activity or other trading activity. 565 For instance, one of these commenters suggested that the revenue and profits from market making will be sufficient to attract capital and competition to that activity. 566 In addition, one commenter expressed the view that prohibiting proprietary trading may support more liquid markets by ensuring that banking entities focus on providing liquidity as market makers, rather than taking liquidity from the market in the course of ‘‘trading to beat’’ institutional buyers like pension funds, university
endowments, and mutual funds. 567 Another commenter stated that, while section 13 of the BHC Act may temporarily reduce trading volume and excessive liquidity at the peak of market bubbles, it should increase the long-run stability of the financial system and render genuine liquidity and credit availability more reliable over the long

term. 568

Other commenters, however, indicated that it is uncertain or unlikely that non-banking entities will enter the market or increase their trading activities, particularly in the short

term. 569 For example, one commenter noted the investment that banking

entities have made in infrastructure for trading and compliance would take smaller or new firms years and billions of dollars to replicate. 570 Another commenter questioned whether other market participants, such as hedge funds, would be willing to dedicate capital to fully serving customer needs, which is required to provide ongoing liquidity. 571 One commenter stated that even if non-banking entities move in to replace lost trading activity from banking entities, the value of the current interdealer network among market

makers will be reduced due to the exit of banking entities. 572 Several commenters expressed the view that migration of market making-related activities to firms outside the banking system would be inconsistent with Congressional intent and would have potentially adverse consequences for the safety and soundness of the U.S. financial system. 573

Many commenters requested

additional clarification on how the proposed market-making exemption would apply to certain asset classes and markets or to particular types of market making-related activities. In particular, commenters requested greater clarity regarding the permissibility of: (i) Interdealer trading, 574 including trading for price discovery purposes or to test market depth; 575 (ii) inventory

management; 576 (iii) block positioning activity; 577 (iv) acting as an authorized participant or market maker in ETFs; 578 (v) arbitrage or other activities that promote price transparency and liquidity; 579 (vi) primary dealer activity; 580 (vii) market making in futures and options; 581 (viii) market making in new or bespoke products or customized hedging contracts; 582 and (ix) inter-affiliate transactions. 583 As

discussed in more detail in Part
VI.B.2.c., a number of commenters requested that the market-making exemption apply to the restrictions on acquiring or retaining an ownership


### 5853 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

584 See, e.g., Cleary Gottlieb; JPMC; BoA; Credit
Suisse (Williams).

585 See, e.g., Occupy; Alfred Brock.

586 See, e.g., Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); John Reed.

587 Consistent with the FSOC study and the proposal, the final rule recognizes that the precise

nature of a market maker’s activities often varies depending on the liquidity, trade size, market infrastructure, trading volumes and frequency, and geographic location of the market for any particular type of financial instrument. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356; FSOC study (stating that ‘‘characteristics of permitted activities in one market or asset class may not be the same in another market (e.g., permitted activities in a liquid equity securities market may vary significantly from an illiquid over-the-counter
derivatives market)’’). 588 Certain of these requirements, like the requirements to have risk and inventory limits, risk management strategies, and monitoring and review requirements were included in the enhanced compliance program requirement in proposed Appendix C, but were not separately included in the proposed market-making exemption. Like the statute, the proposed rule would have required that market making-related activities be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demand of clients, customers, or counterparties. The Agencies are adding an explicit requirement in the final rule that a trading desk conduct analyses of customer demand for purposes of complying with this statutory requirement.

589 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii. See also final rule
§§ 75.4(b)(4), (5).

590 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.i. The term ‘‘trading

desk’’ is defined as ‘‘the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that buys or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof.’’ Final rule
§ 75.3(e)(13).

591 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(i); infra Part

VI.A.3.c.1.c.iii.

592 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii); infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c. In addition, the Agencies are adopting
a definition of the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ in § 75.4(b)(3) of the final rule. interest in a covered fund. 584 Some

commenters stated that no other

activities should be considered permitted market making-related activity under the rule. 585 In addition, a few commenters requested clarification that high-frequency trading would not qualify for the market-making exemption. 586

3. Final Market-Making Exemption

After carefully considering comment letters, the Agencies are adopting certain refinements to the proposed market-making exemption. The Agencies are adopting a market-making exemption that is consistent with the statutory exemption for this activity and designed to permit banking entities to continue providing intermediation and liquidity services. The Agencies note that, while all market-making activity should ultimately be related to the intermediation of trading, whether directly to individual customers through bilateral transactions or more broadly to a given marketplace, certain characteristics of a market-making business may differ among markets and

asset classes. 587 The final rule is

intended to account for these differences to allow banking entities tocontinue to engage in market makingrelated activities by providing customer intermediation and liquidity services
across markets and asset classes, if such activities do not violate the statutory limitations on permitted activities (e.g., by involving or resulting in a material
conflict of interest with a client, customer, or counterparty) and are

conducted in conformance with the exemption.

At the same time, the final rule requires development and implementation of trading, risk and inventory limits, risk management strategies, analyses of how the specific market making-related activities are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of customers, compensation standards, and monitoring and review requirements that are consistent with market-making

activities. 588 These requirements are designed to distinguish exempt market making-related activities from impermissible proprietary trading. In addition, these requirements are designed to ensure that a banking entity
is aware of, monitors, and limits the risks of its exempt activities consistent with the prudent conduct of market making-related activities.

As described in detail below, the final market-making exemption consists of the following elements:

• A framework that recognizes the differences in market making-related

activities across markets and asset classes by establishing criteria that can be applied based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the particular type of financial

instrument.

• A general focus on analyzing the overall ‘‘financial exposure’’ and ‘‘market-maker inventory’’ held by any given trading desk rather than a transaction-by-transaction analysis. The ‘‘financial exposure’’ reflects the aggregate risks of the financial instruments, and any associated loans, commodities, or foreign exchange or currency, held by a banking entity or its affiliate and managed by a particular trading desk as part of its marketmaking-related activities. The ‘‘marketmaker inventory’’ means all of the positions, in the financial instruments for which the trading desk stands ready to make a market that are managed by the trading desk, including the trading desk’s open positions or exposures arising from open transactions. 589

• A definition of the term ‘‘trading desk’’ that focuses on the operational functionality of the desk rather than its legal status, and requirements that apply at the trading desk level of organization within a single banking entity or across

two or more affiliates. 590 • Five requirements for determining whether a banking entity is engaged in permitted market making-related activities. Many of these criteria have

similarities to the factors included in the proposed rule, but with important modifications in response to comments. These standards require that:

Æ The trading desk that establishes and manages a financial exposure routinely stands ready to purchase and sell one or more types of financial

instruments related to its financial exposure and is willing and available to quote, buy and sell, or otherwise enter into long and short positions in those types of financial instruments for its own account, in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout market cycles, on a basis appropriate for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial

instruments; 591

Æ The amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, as required by the

statute and based on certain factors and analysis; 592

Æ The banking entity has established and implements, maintains, and enforces an internal compliance program that is reasonably designed toensure its compliance with the marketmaking exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing identifying and addressing:

D The financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to purchase

and sell in accordance with § 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the final rule;

D The actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of its financial exposure consistent with its established limits; the products, instruments, and exposures each trading desk may use for risk management purposes; the techniques and strategies each trading desk may use to manage the risks of its market making-related activities and inventory; and the process, strategies, and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions taken by the trading


### 5854 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

593 Routine market making-related risk management activity by a trading desk is permitted under the market-making exemption and, provided the standards of the exemption are met, is not required to separately meet the requirements of the hedging exemption. The circumstances under which risk management activity relating to the trading desk’s financial exposure is permitted under the market-making exemption or must separately comply with the hedging exemption are discussed

in more detail in Parts VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii. and

VI.A.3.c.4., infra.

594 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii); infra Part

VI.A.3.c.3.

595 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iv).

596 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(v); infra Part

VI.A.3.c.5.

597 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(vi); infra Part
VI.A.3.c.6. As discussed further below, this provision pertains to legal registration or licensing requirements that may apply to an entity engaged in market making-related activities, depending on the facts and circumstances. This provision would not require a banking entity to comply with registration requirements that are not required by law, such as discretionary registration with a national securities exchange as a market maker on that exchange.

598 See infra Part VI.C.3.

599 See supra Part VI.A.3.b.2.

600 Certain approaches suggested by commenters, such as relying solely on capital requirements, requiring ring fencing, permitting all swap dealing activity, or focusing solely on how traders are compensated do not appear to be consistent with the statutory language because they do not appear to limit market making-related activity to that which is designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, as required by the statute. See Prof. Duffie; STANY; ICE; Shadow Fin. Regulatory Comm.; ISDA (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012); G2

FinTech.

601 While an approach establishing a number of safe harbors that are each tailored to a specific asset class would address the need to recognize differences across asset classes, such an approach may also increase the complexity of the final rule. Further, commenters did not provide sufficient information to determine the appropriate parameters of a safe harbor-based approach. 602 As noted above, a number of commenters suggested the Agencies adopt a bright-line rule, provide a safe harbor for certain types of activities, or establish a presumption of compliance based on

certain factors. See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); John Reed; Prof. Richardson; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Capital Group; Invesco; BDA (Oct. 2012); Flynn & Fusselman; Prof. Colesanti et al.;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); IIF; NYSE Euronext; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Barclays; BoA; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); PNC et al.; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). Many of these commenters expressed general concern that the proposed market-making exemption may create uncertaintyfor individual traders engaged in market makingrelated activity and suggested that their proposed approach would alleviate such concern. The Agencies believe that the enhanced focus on risk and inventory limits for each trading desk (which

must be tied to the near term customer demand requirement) and the clarification that the finalmarket-making exemption does not require a tradeby-trade analysis should address concerns about individual traders having to assess whether they are complying with the market-making exemption on a trade-by-trade basis.

603 Several commenters suggested a guidancebased approach, rather than requirements in the

final rule. See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (suggesting that this guidance could then be incorporated in banking entities’ policies and procedures for purposes of complying with the
rule, in addition to the establishment of risk limits, controls, and metrics); JPMC; BoA; PUC Texas; SSgA (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

604 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Wellington; CalPERS; BlackRock; SSgA (Feb. 2012); Invesco.

605 See infra Part VI.C.3. (discussing the final rule’s metrics requirement). See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); Occupy (stating that there are serious limits to the capabilities of the metrics and the potential for abuse and manipulation of the input data is significant); Alfred Brock. desk to mitigate these risks are and
continue to be effective; 593

D Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities, including factors used to determine the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, on: the amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory; the amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk uses for risk management purposes; the level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure; and the period of time a financial instrument may be held;

D Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits; and

D Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading desk’s limit(s), demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to a trading desk’s limit(s) is consistent with the requirements of the market-making exemption, and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval; 594

Æ To the extent that any limit identified above is exceeded, the trading desk takes action to bring the trading desk into compliance with the limits as promptly as possible after the limit is
exceeded; 595

Æ The compensation arrangements ofpersons performing market makingrelated activities are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading; 596 and

• The banking entity is licensed orregistered to engage in market makingrelated activities in accordance with applicable law. 597 • The use of quantitative measurements to highlight activities

that warrant further review for compliance with the exemption. 598 As discussed further in Part VI.C.3., the Agencies have reduced some of the compliance burdens by adopting a more

tailored subset of metrics than was proposed to better focus on those metrics that the Agencies believe are most germane to the evaluation of the

activities that firms conduct under the market-making exemption.

In refining the proposed approach toimplementing the statute’s marketmaking exemption, the Agencies closely

considered the various alternative approaches suggested by

commenters. 599 However, like theproposed approach, the final marketmaking exemption continues to adhere to the statutory mandate that provides for an exemption to the prohibition onproprietary trading for market makingrelated activities. Therefore, the final rule focuses on providing a framework for assessing whether trading activities are consistent with market making. The Agencies believe this approach is

consistent with the statute 600 and strikes an appropriate balance between commenters’ desire for both clarity andflexibility. For example, while a brightline or safe harbor based approach would generally provide a high degree of certainty about whether an activity qualifies for the market-making exemption, it would also provide less flexibility to recognize the differences in market-making activities across markets

and asset classes. 601 In addition, any bright-line approach would be more likely to be subject to gaming and avoidance as new products and types of trading activities are developed than other approaches to implementing the market-making exemption. 602 Although a purely guidance-based approach would provide greater flexibility, it would also provide less clarity, which could make it difficult for trading personnel, internal compliance personnel, and Agency supervisors and

examiners to determine whether an activity complies with the rule and

would lead to an increased risk of evasion of the statutory requirements. 603

Some commenters suggested anapproach to implementing the marketmaking exemption that would focus on metrics or other objective factors. 604 As discussed below, a number of commenters expressed support for using the metrics as a tool to monitor trading activity and not to determine compliance with the rule. 605 While the Agencies agree that quantitative measurements are useful for purposes of monitoring a trading desk’s activities and are requiring certain banking entities to calculate, record, and report quantitative measurements to the Agencies in the final rule, the Agencies do not believe that quantitative

measurements should be used as a dispositive tool for determining


### 5855 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

606 See infra Part VI.C.3. (discussing the final metrics requirement).

607 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Citigroup
(Feb. 2012).

608 However, as discussed below, the Agencies believe risk limits can be a useful tool when they

must account for the nature and amount of a particular trading desk’s market making-related activities, including the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.

609 See MetLife; Fixed Income Forum/Credit
Roundtable; ACLI (Feb. 2012).

610 The Agencies are not, however, adding certain additional requirements suggested by commenters, such as a new customer-facing criterion, margin requirements, or additional provisions regarding material conflicts of interest or high-risk assets or trading strategies. See, e.g., Morgan Stanley; Stephen Roach; WR Hambrecht; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). The Agencies believe that the final rule includes sufficient requirements to ensure that a trading desk relying on the market-making exemption is engaged in customer-facing activity (for example, the final rule requires the trading desk to stand ready to buy and sell a type of financial instrument as market maker and that the trading desk’s market-maker inventory is designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties). The Agencies decline to include margin requirements in the final exemption because banking entities are currently subject to a number of different margin requirements, including those applicable to, amongothers: SEC-registered broker-dealers; CFTCregistered swap dealers; SEC-registered securitybased swap dealers: and foreign dealer entities. Further, the Agencies are not providing new requirements regarding material conflicts of interest and high-risk assets and trading strategies in the market-making exemption because the Agencies believe these issues are adequately addressed in
§ 75.7 of the final rule. The limitations in § 75.7 will apply to market making-related activities and all other exempted activities.

611 See supra note 550 and accompanying text. The Agencies acknowledge that reduced liquidity can be costly. One commenter provided estimated impacts on asset valuation, borrowing costs, and transaction costs in the corporate bond market based on certain hypothetical scenarios of reduced market liquidity. This commenter noted that its hypothetical liquidity shifts of 5, 10, and 15 percentile points were ‘‘necessarily arbitrary’’ but judged ‘‘to be realistic potential outcomes of the proposed rule.’’ Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). Because the Agencies have made significant modifications to the proposed rule in response to comments, the Agencies believe this commenter’s concerns about the market impacts of the proposed rule have been substantially addressed.

612 As noted above, a few commenters stated that reduced liquidity may provide certain benefits. See,

e.g., Paul Volcker; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Prof. Richardson; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Prof. Johnson. However,

a number of commenters stated that reduced liquidity would have negative market impacts. See

supra note 550 and accompanying text. 613 See supra Part VI.A.3.b.2.b.

614 See supra Part VI.A.3.b.2.b. As discussed above, a few other commenters suggested that to the extent liquidity is vulnerable to destabilizing liquidity spirals, any reduced liquidity stemming

from section 13 of the BHC Act and its implementing rules would not necessarily be a negative result. See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public

Citizen. See also Paul Volcker. These commenters also suggested that the Agencies adopt stricter conditions in the market-making exemption, as discussed throughout this Part VI.A.3. However, liquidity—essentially, the ease with which assets can be converted into cash—is not destabilizing in and of itself. Rather, liquidity spirals are a function of how firms are funded. During market downturns, when margin requirements tend to increase, firms that fund their operations with leverage face higher costs of providing liquidity; firms that run up against their maximum leverage ratios may be forced to retreat from market making, contributing to the liquidity spiral. Viewed in this light, it is

institutional features of financial markets—in particular, leverage—rather than liquidity itself that contributes to liquidity spirals.

615 Wider spreads can be costly for investors. For example, one commenter estimated that a 10 basis point increase in spreads in the corporate bond market would cost investors $29 billion per year.

See Wellington. Wider spreads can also be particularly costly for open-end mutual funds, which must trade in and out of the fund’s portfolio holdings on a daily basis in order to satisfy

Continued compliance with the market-making exemption. 606

In response to two commenters’ request that the final rule focus on a banking entity’s risk management

structures or risk limits and not on attempting to define market-making

activities, 607 the Agencies do not believe that management of risk, on its own, is sufficient to differentiate permitted market making-related activities from impermissible proprietary trading. For example, the existence of a risk management framework or risk limits, while important, would not ensure that a trading desk is acting as a market maker by engaging in customer-facing activity and providing intermediation and liquidity services. 608 The Agencies also decline to take an approach to implementing the market-making exemption that would require the development of individualized plans for each banking entity in coordination with the Agencies, as suggested by a few

commenters. 609 The Agencies believe it

is useful to establish a consistent framework that will apply to all banking entities to reduce the potential for unintended competitive impacts that could arise if each banking entity is subject to an individualized plan that is tailored to its specific organizational structure and trading activities and strategies.

Although the Agencies are not in the final rule modifying the basic structure of the proposed market-making exemption, certain general items suggested by commenters, such as enhanced compliance program elements and risk limits, have been incorporated

in the final rule text for the marketmaking exemption, instead of a separate appendix. 610 Moreover, as described below, the final market-making exemption includes specific substantive changes in response to a wide variety of

commenter concerns.

The Agencies understand that the economics of market making—and financial intermediation in general— require a market maker to be active in markets. In determining the appropriate scope of the market-making exemption, the Agencies have been mindful of commenters’ views on market making and liquidity. Several commenters stated that the proposed rule would impact a banking entity’s ability to engage in market making-related activity, with corresponding reductions in market liquidity. 611 However, commenters disagreed about whether reduced liquidity would be beneficial or detrimental to the market, or if any such

reductions would even materialize. 612 Many commenters stated that reduced liquidity could lead to other negative market impacts, such as wider spreads, higher transaction costs, greater market volatility, diminished price discovery, and increased cost of capital.

The Agencies understand that market makers play an important role in providing and maintaining liquidity throughout market cycles and that restricting market-making activity may result in reduced liquidity, with corresponding negative market impacts. For instance, absent a market maker who stands ready to buy and sell, investors may have to make large price concessions or otherwise expend resources searching for counterparties. By stepping in to intermediate trades and provide liquidity, market makers thus add value to the financial system by, for example, absorbing supply and

demand imbalances. This often means taking on financial exposures, in a principal capacity, to satisfy reasonably expected near term customer demand, as well as to manage the risks associated with meeting such demand.

The Agencies recognize that, as noted by commenters, liquidity can be associated with narrower spreads, lower transaction costs, reduced volatility, greater price discovery, and lower costs of capital. 613 The Agencies agree with these commenters that liquidity provides important benefits to the financial system, as more liquid markets are characterized by competitive market makers, narrow bid-ask spreads, and frequent trading, and that a narrowly tailored market-making exemption could negatively impact the market by, as described above, forcing investors to make price concessions or unnecessarily expend resources searching for counterparties. 614 For example, while bid-ask spreads compensate market makers for providing liquidity when
asset values are uncertain, under competitive forces, dealers compete with respect to spreads, thus lowering their profit margins on a per trade basis and benefitting investors. 615 Volatility is


### 5856 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

redemptions and subscriptions. See Wellington;

AllianceBernstein.

616 A higher cost of capital increases financing costs and translates into reduced capital

investment. While one commenter estimated that a one percent increase in the cost of capital would lead to a $55 to $82.5 billion decline in capital investments by U.S. nonfarm firms, the Agencies cannot independently verify these potential costs.
Further, this commenter did not indicate what aspect of the proposed rule could cause a one percent increase in the cost of capital. See Thakor Study. In any event, the Agencies have made significant changes to the proposed approach to implementing the market-making exemption that should help address this commenter’s concern.

617 See, e.g., CIEBA; ACLI; PNC et al.; Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Abbott Labs et al. (Feb. 14, 2012); FEI; ICI (Feb. 2012); TMA Hong
Kong; Sen. Casey.

618 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012);
Prof. Richardson; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Profs. Stout & Hastings; Prof. Johnson; Occupy; Public
Citizen; Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer; Better Markets (June 2012). 619 See, e.g., Prof. Johnson.

620 See supra note 522 (discussing commenters’ concerns regarding a trade-by-trade analysis). 621 For example, by clarifying that individual trades will not be viewed in isolation and requiring strong compliance procedures, this approach will generally allow an individual trader to operate within the compliance framework established for his or her trading desk without having to assess whether each individual transaction complies with all requirements of the market-making exemption.

622 See supra notes 565 and 569 and accompanying text (discussing comments on the issue of whether non-banking entities are likely to enter the market or increase their trading activities in response to reduced trading activity by banking entities). For example, one commenter stated that

broker-dealers that are not affiliated with a bank

would have reduced access to lender-of-last resort liquidity from the central bank, which could limit their ability to make markets during times of market stress or when capital buffers are small. See Prof.
Duffie. However, another commenter noted that the driven by both uncertainty about fundamental value and the liquidity

needs of investors. When markets are illiquid, participants may have to make large price concessions to find a counterparty willing to trade, increasing the importance of the liquidity channelfor addressing volatility. If liquiditybased volatility is not diversifiable, investors will require a risk premium for holding liquidity risk, increasing the cost of capital. 616 Commenters additionally suggested that the effects of diminished liquidity could be

concentrated in securities markets for small or midsize companies or for lesser-known issuers, where trading is already infrequent. 617 Volume in these markets can be low, increasing the inventory risk of market makers. The Agencies recognize that, if the final rule creates disincentives for banking entities to provide liquidity, these low volume markets may be impacted first.

As discussed above, the Agencies received several comments suggesting that the negative consequences associated with reduced liquidity would be unlikely to materialize under the proposed rule. For example, a few

commenters stated that non-bank
financial intermediaries, who are not subject to section 13 of the BHC Act, may increase their market-making activities in response to any reduction in market making by banking entities, a topic the Agencies discuss in more

detail below. 618 In addition, some commenters suggested that the restrictions on proprietary trading would support liquid markets by encouraging banking entities to focus on

financial intermediation activities that supply liquidity, rather than proprietary trades that demand liquidity, such asspeculative trades or trades that frontrun institutional investors. 619 The statute prohibits proprietary trading activity that is not exempted. As such, the termination of nonexempt proprietary trading activities of banking entities may lead to some general reductions in liquidity of certain asset classes. Although the Agencies cannot say with any certainty, there is good reason to believe that to a significant extent the liquidity reductions of this type may be temporary since the statute does not restrict proprietary trading activities of other market participants. Thus, over time, non-banking entities may provide much of the liquidity that is lost by restrictions on banking entities’ trading activities. If so, eventually, the detrimental effects of increased trading costs, higher costs of capital, and greater market volatility should be mitigated.

Based on the many detailed comments provided, the Agencies have

made substantive refinements to the market-making exemption that the Agencies believe will reduce the
likelihood that the rule, as implemented, will negatively impact the ability of banking entities to engage in the types of market making-related activities permitted under the statute and, therefore, will continue to promote

the benefits to investors and other market participants described above, including greater market liquidity, narrower bid-ask spreads, reduced price concessions and price impact, lower volatility, and reduced counterparty search costs, thus reducing the cost ofcapital. For instance, the final marketmaking exemption does not require a trade-by-trade analysis, which was a significant source of concern from commenters who represented, among other things, that a trade-by-trade analysis could have a chilling effect on individual traders’ willingness to engage in market-making activities. 620 Rather,

the final rule has been crafted around the overall market making-related activities of individual trading desks, with various requirements that these activities be demonstrably related to satisfying reasonably expected near term

customer demands and other marketmaking activities. The Agencies believe that applying certain requirements to the aggregate risk exposure of a trading desk, along with the requirement to establish risk and inventory limits to routinize a trading desk’s compliance

with the near term customer demand requirement, will reduce negative potential impacts on individual traders’ decision-making process in the normal course of market making. 621 In addition, in response to a large number of comments expressing concern that the proposed market-making exemption would restrict or prohibit market making-related activities in less liquid markets, the Agencies are clarifying that the application of certain requirements in the final rule, such as the frequency of required quoting and the near term demand requirement, will account for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a given type of financial instrument. Thus, banking entities will be able to continue to engage in market making-related activities across markets

and asset classes.

At the same time, the Agenciesrecognize that an overly broad marketmaking exemption may allow banking entities to mask speculative positions as liquidity provision or related hedges. The Agencies believe the requirements included in the final rule are necessaryto prevent such evasion of the marketmaking exemption, ensure compliance
with the statute, and facilitate internal banking entity and external Agency reviews of compliance with the final rule. Nevertheless, the Agencies acknowledge that these additional costs may have an impact on banking entities’willingness to engage in market makingrelated activities. Banking entities will incur certain compliance costs inconnection with their market makingrelated activities under the final rule. For example, banking entities may not currently limit their trading desks’ market-maker inventory to that which is designed not to exceed reasonably expected near term customer demand, as required by the statute.

As discussed above, commenters presented diverging views on whether non-banking entities are likely to enter

the market or increase their marketmaking activities if the final rule should cause banking entities to reduce their market-making activities. 622 The


### 5857 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

presence and evolution of market making after the enactment of the Glass-Steagall Act mutes this particular concern. See Prof. Richardson.

623 Certain non-banking entities, such as some SEC-registered broker-dealers that are not banking entities subject to the final rule, currently engage in market-making activities and, thus, should have the needed infrastructure and may attract additional capital. If the final rule has a marginal impact on banking entities’ willingness to engage in market making-related activities, these non-banking entities should be able to respond by increasing their market making-related activities. The Agencies recognize, however, that firms that do not have existing infrastructure or sufficient capital are unlikely to be able to act as market makers shortly after the final rule is implemented. Nevertheless,

because some non-bank-affiliated broker-dealers currently operate market-making desks, and because it was the dominant model prior to the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, the Agencies believe that

non-bank-affiliated financial intermediaries will be able to provide market-making services longer term. 624 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii).

625 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870 (‘‘Notably, this criterion requires that a banking entity relying on the exemption with respect to a particular transaction must actually make a market in the [financial instrument] involved; simply because a banking entity makes a market in one type of [financial instrument] does not permit it to rely on the market-making exemption for another type of [financial instrument].’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at

8355–8356.

626 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356.

627 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870–68871; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356. These proposed factors are generally consistent with the indicia used by the SEC to assess whether a broker-dealer is engaged in bona fide market making for purposes of Regulation SHO under the Exchange Act. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871 n.148; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356 n.155. 628 The Agencies noted that, with respect to this factor, the frequency of regular quotations will vary, as moderately illiquid markets may involve quotations on a daily or more frequent basis, while highly illiquid markets may trade only by appointment. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871 n.149; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356 n.156.

629 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356.

630 In the preamble to the proposed rule, the Agencies stated that the SEC’s definition of ‘‘qualified block positioner’’ may serve as guidance in determining whether a block positioner engaged in block positioning is engaged in bona fide market making for purposes of § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871 n.151; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356 n.157.

631 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356–8357.

632 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Alfred

Brock.Agencies note that prior to the GrammLeach-Bliley Act of 1999, marketmaking services were more commonlyprovided by non-bank-affiliated brokerdealers than by banking entities. As discussed above, by intermediating and facilitating trading, market makers provide value to the markets and profit from providing liquidity. Should banking entities retreat from making markets, the profit opportunities available from providing liquidity willprovide an incentive for non-bankaffiliated broker-dealers to enter the

market and intermediate trades. The Agencies are unable to assess the likely effect with any certainty, but theAgencies recognize that a marketmaking operation requires certain infrastructure and capital, which will impact the ability of non-banking entities to enter the market-making business or to increase their presence. Therefore, should banking entities retreat from making markets, there could be a transition period with reduced liquidity as non-banking entities build up the needed infrastructure and obtain capital. However, because the Agencies have substantially modified this exemption in response to comments to ensure that market making related to near-term customer demand is permitted as contemplated by the statute, the Agencies do not believe the final ruleshould significantly impact currentlyavailable market-making services. 623

c. Detailed Explanation of the MarketMaking Exemption

1. Requirement to Routinely Stand Ready To Purchase and Sell

a. Proposed Requirement To Hold Self

Out

Section 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule would have required the trading desk or other organizational unit that conducts the purchase or sale in reliance on the market-making exemption to hold itself out as being willing to buy and sell, including through entering into long and short positions in, the financial instrument for its own account on a regular or

continuous basis. 624 The proposal stated that a banking entity could rely on the proposed exemption only for the type of financial instrument that the entity actually made a market in. 625

The proposal recognized that the precise nature of a market maker’s activities often varies depending on the liquidity, trade size, market infrastructure, trading volumes and frequency, and geographic location of the market for any particular financial

instrument. 626 To account for these variations, the Agencies proposed indicia for assessing compliance with this requirement that differed between relatively liquid markets and less liquid markets. Further, the Agencies recognized that the proposed indicia could not be applied at all times and

under all circumstances because some may be inapplicable to the specific asset

class or market in which the market making-related activity is conducted.

In particular, the proposal stated that a trading desk or other organizational unit’s market making-related activities in relatively liquid markets, such asequity securities or other exchangetraded instruments, should generallyinclude: (i) Making continuous, twosided quotes and holding oneself out as willing to buy and sell on a continuous basis; (ii) a pattern of trading that includes both purchases and sales in roughly comparable amounts to provide liquidity; (iii) making continuous quotations that are at or near the market on both sides; and (iv) providing widely accessible and broadly disseminated

quotes. 627 With respect to market making in less liquid markets, the proposal noted that the appropriate indicia of market making-related activities will vary, but should generally include: (i) Holding oneself out as willing and available to provide liquidity by providing quotes on a regular (but not necessarily continuous)
basis; 628 (ii) with respect to securities, regularly purchasing securities from, or selling securities to, clients, customers, or counterparties in the secondary market; and (iii) transaction volumes and risk proportionate to historical customer liquidity and investments

needs. 629

In discussing this proposed requirement, the Agencies stated that bona fide market making-related activity may include certain block positioning and anticipatory position-taking. More specifically, the proposal indicated that

the bona fide market making-related activity described in § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule would include: (i) Block positioning if undertaken by a trading desk or other organizational unit of a banking entity for the purpose of intermediating customer trading; 630 and (ii) taking positions in securities in anticipation of customer demand, so long as any anticipatory buying or selling activity is reasonable and related to clear, demonstrable trading interest of clients, customers, or counterparties. 631

b. Comments on the Proposed Requirement To Hold Self Out

Commenters raised many issues regarding § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed exemption, which would require a trading desk or other organizational unit to hold itself out as willing to buy and

sell the financial instrument for its own account on a regular or continuous
basis. As discussed below, some commenters viewed the proposed requirement as too restrictive, while

other commenters stated that the requirement was too permissive. Two commenters expressed support for the proposed requirement. 632 A number of


### 5858 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

633 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.iii. (addressing
these concerns).

634 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ABA; Chamber (Feb. 2012); BDA (Feb.
2012); Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable;
ACLI (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; PUC Texas; PNC; MetLife; RBC; IHS; SSgA (Feb. 2012).

635 See, e.g., PNC (stating that the proposed rule needs to account for market making by regional

banks on behalf of small and middle-market customers whose securities are less liquid); ABA (stating that the rule should continue to permit banks to provide limited liquidity by buying securities that they feel are suitable for their retail and institutional customer base by stating that a bank is ‘‘holding itself out’’ when it buys and sells
securities that are suitable for its customers).

636 This issue is further discussed in Part

VI.A.3.c.1.c.iii., infra.

637 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading) (stating that

it would be burdensome for a U.S. credit marketmaking business to be required to produce and disseminate quotes for thousands of individual bond CUSIPs that trade infrequently and noting that a market maker in credit markets will typically disseminate indicative prices for the most liquid
instruments but, for the thousands of other instruments that trade infrequently, the market maker will generally provide a price for a trade upon request from another market participant); Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); RBC. See also BDA (Feb. 2012); FTN (stating
that in some markets, such as the markets for residential mortgage-backed securities and investment grade corporate debt, a market maker
will hold itself out in a subset of instruments (e.g., particular issues in the investment grade corporate debt market with heavy trading volume or that are in the midst of particular credit developments), but will trade in other instruments within the group or sector upon inquiry from customers and other dealers); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (discussing data regarding the number of U.S. corporate bonds and frequency of trading in such bonds in 2009).

638 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

639 See, e.g., RBC (recommending that the Agencies clarify that a trading desk is required to hold itself out as willing to buy and sell a particular type of ‘‘product’’); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (suggesting that the Agencies use the
term ‘‘instrument,’’ rather than ‘‘covered financial position,’’ to provide greater clarity); CIEBA (supporting alternative criteria that would require a banking entity to hold itself out generally as a
market maker for the relevant asset class, but not for every instrument it purchases and sells); Goldman (Prop. Trading). One of these commenters recommended that the Agencies recognize and permit the following kinds of activity in related financial instruments: (i) Options market makers should be deemed to be engaged in market making in all put and call series related to a particular underlying security and should be permitted to trade the underlying security regardless of whether such trade qualifies for the hedging exemption; (ii) convertible bond traders should be permitted to trade in the associated equity security; (iii) a market

maker in one issuer’s bonds should be considered
a market maker in similar bonds of other issuers;
and (iv) a market maker in standardized interest rate swaps should be considered to be engaged in market making-related activity if it engages in a customized interest rate swap with a customer upon

request. See RBC.

640 See, e.g., Morgan Stanley (suggesting that the Agencies add the phrase ‘‘or, in markets where regular or continuous quotes are not typically provided, the trading unit stands ready to provide quotes upon request’’); Barclays (suggesting addition of the phrase ‘‘to the extent that two-sided markets are typically made by market makers in a given product,’’ as well as changing the reference to ‘‘purchase or sale’’ to ‘‘market making-related activity’’ to avoid any inference of a trade-by-trade analysis). See also Fixed Income Forum/Credit

Roundtable. To address concerns about the requirement’s application to bespoke products, one commenter suggested that the rule clearly state that a banking entity fulfills this requirement if it

markets structured transactions to its client base and stands ready to enter into such transactions with customers, even though transactions may occur on a relatively infrequent basis. See JPMC. 641 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); RBC (supporting this approach as an alternative to removing the requirement from the rule, but primarily supporting its removal). See also ISDA (Feb. 2012) (stating that the analysis of compliance with the proposed requirement must carefully consider the degree of presence a market maker wishes to have in a given market, which may include being a leader in certain types of instruments, having a secondary presence in others, and potentially leaving or entering other
submarkets).

642 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). This commenter also suggested that such test be assessed at the ‘‘trading unit’’ level. See id.

643 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

644 See FTN.

645 See Flynn & Fusselman; JPMorgan.

646 See JPMC.

647 See, e.g., Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; John Reed. See infra note 751 and accompanying text (responding to these comments).

648 See Occupy. commenters provided views on statements in the proposal regarding

indicia of bona fide market making in more and less liquid markets and the permissibility of block positioning and anticipatory position-taking.

Several commenters represented that the proposed requirement was too

restrictive. 633 For example, a number of these commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement may limit a banking entity’s ability to act as a

market maker under certain circumstances, including in less liquidmarkets, for instruments lacking a twosided market, or in customer-driven,

structured transactions. 634 In addition, a few commenters expressed specific concern about how this requirementwould impact more limited marketmaking activity conducted by banks. 635

Many commenters indicated that it was unclear whether this provision would require a trading desk or other organizational unit to regularly or continuously quote every financial
instrument in which a market is made, but expressed concern that the proposed language could be interpreted in this

manner. 636 These commenters noted

that there are thousands of individual instruments within a given asset class, such as corporate bonds, and that it

would be burdensome for a market maker to provide quotes in such a large number of instruments on a regular or

continuous basis. 637 One of these commenters represented that, because customer demand may be infrequent in a particular instrument, requiring a banking entity to provide regular or continuous quotes in the instrument may not provide a benefit to its

customers. 638 A few commenters requested that the Agencies provide further guidance on this issue or modify the proposed standard to state that holding oneself out in a range of similar

instruments will be considered to be within the scope of permitted market making-related activities. 639

To address concerns about the restrictiveness of this requirement, commenters suggested certain modifications. For example, some commenters suggested adding language to the requirement to account for market making in markets that do not typicallyinvolve regular or continuous, or twosided, quoting. 640 In addition, a few commenters requested that the requirement expressly include

transactions in new instruments or

transactions in instruments that occur infrequently to address situations where a banking entity may not have previously had the opportunity to hold itself out as willing to buy and sell the applicable instrument. 641 Other commenters supported alternative criteria for assessing whether a banking entity is acting as a market maker, such as: (i) A willingness to respond to customer demand by providing prices

upon request; 642 (ii) being in the business of providing prices upon request for that financial instrument or

other financial instruments in the same or similar asset class or product
class; 643 or (iii) a historical test of market-making activity, with compliance judged on the basis of actual

trades. 644 Finally, two commenters stated that this requirement should be moved to Appendix B of the rule, 645 which, according to one of these commenters, would provide the Agencies greater flexibility to consider

the facts and circumstances of a particular activity. 646

Other commenters took the view that the proposed requirement was too permissive. 647 For example, one commenter stated that the proposed standard provided too much room for interpretation and would be difficult to

measure and monitor. This commenter expressed particular concern that a trading desk or other organizational unit could meet this requirement by regularly or continuously making wide, out of context quotes that do not present any real risk of execution and do not contribute to market liquidity. 648 Some commenters suggested the Agencies place greater restrictions on a bankingentity’s ability to rely on the marketmaking exemption in certain illiquid


### 5859 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

649 See Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); John Reed.

650 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

651 See Occupy.

652 See John Reed.

653 See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

654 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that a banking entity must have or reasonably expect at least two customers—one for each side of the trade—and must have a reasonable expectation of the second customer coming to take the position
or risk off its books in the ‘‘near term’’); AFR et al.
(Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

655 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (stating that the rule should ban market making in illiquid and opaque securities with no genuine external market, but permit market making in somewhat illiquid securities, such as certain corporate bonds, as long as the securities can be reliably valued with reference to other extremely similar securities that are regularly traded in liquid markets and the financial outcome of the transaction is reasonably predictable); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz (recommending that permitted market making be limited to assets that can be reliably valued in, at a minimum, a moderately liquid market evidenced by trading within a reasonable period, such as a week, through a real transaction and not simply with interdealer trades); Public Citizen (stating that market making should be limited to assets that can be reliably valued in a market where transactions take place on a weekly basis). 656 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (stating that such a limitation would be consistent with the proposed limitation on ‘‘high-risk assets’’ and the discussion of this limitation in proposed Appendix C); Public
Citizen; Prof. Richardson.

657 See Prof. Richardson.

658 Two commenters recommended that banking entities be required to treat trading in assets that cannot be reliably valued and that trade only by appointment, such as bespoke derivatives and structured products, as providing an illiquid bespoke loan, which are subject to higher capital charges under the Federal banking agencies’ capital

rules. See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; John Reed. Another commenter suggested that, if not directly prohibited, trading in bespoke instruments that cannot be reliably valued should be assessed an appropriate capital charge. See Public Citizen.

659 See Occupy. This commenter further suggested that the exemption exclude all activities that include: (i) Assets whose changes in value cannot be mitigated by effective hedges; (ii) new products with rapid growth, including those that do not have a market history; (iii) assets or strategies that include significant imbedded leverage; (iv) assets or strategies that have demonstrated significant historical volatility; (v) assets or strategies for which the application of capital and liquidity standards would not adequately account for the risk; and (vi) assets or strategies that result in large and significant concentrations to sectors, risk factors, or counterparties. See id.

660 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

661 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.1.a.

662 See Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); NYSE Euronext (expressing support for the indicia set forth in the FSOC study, which are substantially the same as the indicia in the proposal); Alfred Brock.

663 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

664 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

665 See ICI (Feb. 2012); ICI Global.

666 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.1.a. markets, such as assets that cannot be reliably valued, products that do not have a genuine external market, or instruments for which a banking entity does not expect to have customers wishing to both buy and sell. 649 In support of these requests, commenters stated that trading in illiquid products
raises certain concerns under the rule, including: A lack of reliable data for purposes of using metrics to monitor a banking entity’s market making-related activity (e.g., products whose valuations are determined by an internal model that can be manipulated, rather than an observable market price); 650 relation to
the last financial crisis; 651 lack of important benefits to the real

economy; 652 similarity to prohibited proprietary trading; 653 and inconsistency with the statute’srequirements that market makingrelated activity must be ‘‘designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties’’ and must not result in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. 654

These commenters also requested that the proposed requirement be modified in certain ways. In particular, several commenters stated that the proposed exemption should only permit market making in assets that can be reliably valued through external market

transactions. 655 In order to implement
such a limitation, three commenters suggested that the Agencies prohibit banking entities from market making in

assets classified as Level 3 under FAS 157. 656 One of these commenters explained that Level 3 assets are generally highly illiquid assets whose fair value cannot be determined using either market prices or models. 657 In addition, a few commenters suggested that banking entities be subject to additional capital charges for market making in illiquid products. 658 Another commenter stated that the Agenciesshould require all market makingrelated activity to be conducted on a multilateral organized electronic trading platform or exchange to make it possible to monitor and confirm certain trading

data. 659 Two commenters emphasized

that their recommended restrictions on market making in illiquid markets should not prohibit banking entities from making markets in corporate

bonds. 660

i. The Proposed Indicia

As noted above, the proposal set forth

certain indicia of bona fide market making-related activity in liquid and less liquid markets that the Agencies proposed to apply when evaluating whether a banking entity was eligible for the proposed exemption. 661 Several commenters provided their views regarding the effectiveness of the proposed indicia.

With respect to the proposed indicia for liquid markets, a few commenters expressed support for the proposed

indicia. 662 One of these commenters stated that while the proposed factors are reasonably consistent with bona fide market making, the Agencies should add two other factors: (i) A willingness to transact in reasonable quantities at quoted prices, and (ii) inventory

turnover. 663

Other commenters, however, stated that the proposed use of factors from the SEC’s analysis of bona fide market making under Regulation SHO was inappropriate in this context. In particular, these commenters represented that bona fide market making for purposes of Regulation SHO is a purposefully narrow concept that permits a subset of market makers to qualify for an exception from the ‘‘locate’’ requirement in Rule 203 of Regulation SHO. The commenters further expressed the belief that the policy goals of section 13 of the BHC Act do not necessitate a similarly narrow interpretation of market making. 664

A few commenters expressed particular concern about how the factor regarding patterns of purchases and sales in roughly comparable amounts would apply to market making in exchange-traded funds (‘‘ETFs’’). According to these commenters, demonstrating this factor could be difficult because ETF market making involves a pattern of purchases and sales of groups of equivalent securities (i.e., the ETF shares and the basket of securities and cash that is exchanged for them), not a single security. In addition,

the commenters were unsure whether

this factor could be demonstrated in times of limited trading in ETF

shares. 665

The preamble to the proposed rule also provided certain proposed indicia

of bona fide market making-related activity in less liquid markets. 666 As discussed above, commenters had differing views about whether the exemption for market making-related activity should permit banking entities to engage in market making in some or all illiquid markets. Thus, with respect to the proposed indicia for market making in less liquid markets, commenters generally stated that the
indicia should be broader or narrower, depending on the commenter’s overall view on the issue of market making in illiquid markets. One commenter stated


### 5860 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

667 See Alfred Brock.

668 See supra note 634 accompanying text. With respect to this factor, one commenter requested that the Agencies delete the parenthetical of ‘‘but not necessarily continuous’’ from the proposed factor as part of a broader effort to recognize the relative illiquidity of swap markets. See ISDA (Feb. 2012).

669 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); CIEBA. These commenters requested greater clarity or guidance on the meaning of ‘‘regular’’ in the instance of a market maker trading only by appointment. See id.

670 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

671 See Public Citizen; Occupy. One of these

commenters further noted that most markets lack a structural framework that would enable monitoring of compliance with this requirement. See Occupy.

672 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; John Reed; Public Citizen. 673 See, e.g., John Reed; Public Citizen.

674 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

675 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012)

676 See Occupy.

677 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Occupy.

678 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

679 See Occupy.

680 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871. 681 See, e.g., RBC; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). See also infra note 740 (responding to these comments).

682 See RBC (expressing concern about fire sales); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012) (expressing concern about fire sales, particularly in less liquid markets where a block position would overwhelm the market and undercut the price a market maker can obtain); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (representing that this requirement could create uncertainty about whether a longer unwind would be permissible
and, if so, under what circumstances).

683 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

684 See RBC.

685 See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Fidelity (requesting that the Agencies explicitly recognize that block trades qualify for the market-making exemption); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). that the proposed indicia are

effective. 667

The first proposed factor of market making-related activity in less liquid markets was holding oneself out as willing and available to provide liquidity by providing quotes on a regular (but not necessarily continuous)
basis. As noted above, several commenters expressed concern about a requirement that market makers provide regular quotations in less liquid instruments, including in fixed income markets and bespoke, customized

derivatives. 668 With respect to the interaction between the rule language requiring ‘‘regular’’ quoting and the proposal’s language permitting trading by appointment under certain
circumstances, some of these commenters expressed uncertainty about how a market maker trading only by appointment would be able to satisfy the proposed rule’s regular quotation requirement. 669 In addition, another commenter stated that the proposal’s recognition of trading by appointment

does not alleviate concerns about applying the ‘‘regular’’ quotation requirement to market making in less liquid instruments in markets that are not, as a whole, highly illiquid, such as

credit and interest rate markets. 670

Other commenters expressed concern about only requiring a market maker to provide regular quotations or permitting trading by appointment to qualify for the market-making exemption. With respect to regular quotations, some

commenters stated that such a requirement enables evasion of the prohibition on proprietary trading because a proprietary trader may post a quote at a time of little interest in a financial product or may post wide, out of context quotes on a regular basis with

no real risk of execution. 671 Several commenters stated that trading only by appointment should not qualify as market making for purposes of the proposed rule. 672 Some of these

commenters stated that there is no ‘‘market’’ for assets that trade only by appointment, such as customized, structured products and OTC

derivatives. 673

The second proposed criterion for market making-related activity in less liquid markets was, with respect to securities, regularly purchasing securities from, or selling securities to, clients, customers, or counterparties in the secondary market. Two commenters expressed concern about this proposed

factor. 674 In particular, one of these commenters stated that the language is fundamentally inconsistent with market making because it contemplates that only taking one side of the market is sufficient, rather than both buying and selling an instrument. 675 The other commenter expressed concern that banking entities would be allowed to accumulate a significant amount of illiquid risk because the indicia for market making-related activity in less liquid markets did not require a market maker to buy and sell in comparable amounts (as required by the indicia for liquid markets). 676

Finally, the third proposed factor of market making in less liquid markets

would consider transaction volumes and risk proportionate to historical customer liquidity and investment

needs. A few commenters indicated that there may not be sufficient information available for a banking entity to conduct such an analysis. 677 For example, one

commenter stated that historical information may not necessarily be

available for new businesses or developing markets in which a market maker may seek to establish trading operations. 678 Another commenter expressed concern that this factor would not help differentiate market making from prohibited proprietary trading because most illiquid markets do not

have a source for such historical risk

and volume data. 679

ii. Treatment of Block Positioning Activity

The proposal provided that the activity described in § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule would include block positioning if undertaken by a trading desk or other organizational unit of a banking entity for the purpose of intermediating customer trading. 680 A number of commenters supported the general language in the proposal permitting block positioning, but expressed concern about the reference to the definition of ‘‘qualified block positioner’’ in SEC Rule 3b–8(c). 681 With respect to using Rule 3b–8(c) as guidance under the proposed rule, these commenters represented that Rule 3b– 8(c)’s requirement to resell block positions ‘‘as rapidly as possible’’ would cause negative results (e.g., fire sales) or create market uncertainty (e.g., when, if ever, a longer unwind would be permitted). 682 According to one of these commenters, gradually disposing of a large long position purchased from a customer may be the best means of reducing near term price volatility associated with the supply shock of trying to sell the position at once. 683 Another commenter expressed concern about the second requirement of Rule 3b–8(c), which provides that the dealer

must determine in the exercise of reasonable diligence that the block cannot be sold to or purchased from others on equivalent or better terms.

This commenter stated that this kind of

determination would be difficult in less liquid markets because those markets do not have widely disseminated quotes that dealers can use for purposes of comparison. 684

Beyond the reference to Rule 3b–8(c), a few commenters expressed more general concern about the proposed rule’s application to block positioning activity. 685 One commenter noted that the proposal only discussed block positioning in the context of the proposed requirement to hold oneself out, which implies that block positioning activity also must meet theother requirements of the marketmaking exemption. This commenter requested an explicit recognition that banking entities meet the requirements of the market-making exemption when they enter into block trades for customers, including related trades entered to support the block, such as


### 5861 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

686 See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

687 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). This commenter estimated that investors trading out of large block positions on their own, without a market maker directly providing liquidity, would have to pay incremental transaction costs between $1.7 and $3.4 billion per year. This commenter estimated a block trading size of $850 billion, based on a haircut of total block trading volume reported for NYSE and Nasdaq. The commenter then estimated, based on market interviews and analysis of standard market impact models provided by dealers, that the market impact of executing large block orders without direct market maker liquidity provision would be the difference between the market impact costs of executing a block trade over a 5-day period versus a 1-day period—which would be approximately 20 to 50 basis points, depending

on the size of the trade. See id.

688 Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal,

77 FR at 8356–8357.

689 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (expressing concern that requiring trades to be related to clear demonstrable trading interest could curtail the market-making function by removing a market maker’s discretion to develop inventory to best serve its customers and adversely restrict liquidity); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. See also Morgan Stanley (requesting certain revisions to more closely track the statute); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012) (expressing general concern that the standard creates limitations on a market maker’s inventory). These
comments are addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.2., infra. 690 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Occupy. See

also Public Citizen (expressing general concern that accumulating positions in anticipation of demand opens issues of front running).

691 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

692 See Occupy.

693 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

694 See BoA (stating that a market maker must acquire inventory in advance of express customer demand and customers expect a market maker’s inventory to include not only the financial instruments in which customers have previously traded, but also instruments that the banking entity believes they may want to trade); Occupy.

695 See Morgan Stanley (suggesting a new standard providing that a purchase or sale must be ‘‘reasonably consistent with observable customer demand patterns and, in the case of new asset classes or markets, with reasonably expected future developments on the basis of the trading unit’s client relationships’’); Chamber (Feb. 2012) (requesting that the final rule permit market makers to make individualized assessments of anticipated customer demand based on their expertise and experience in the markets and make trades according to those assessments); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (recommending that the Agencies instead focus on how trading activities are ‘‘designed’’ to meet the reasonably expected near term demands of
clients over time, rather than whether those demands have actually manifested themselves at a given point in time); ISDA (Feb. 2012) (stating that the Agencies should clarify this language to recognize differences between liquid and illiquid markets and noting that illiquid and low volume markets necessitate that swap dealers take a longer and broader view than dealers in liquid markets).

696 See, e.g., Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy;

Public Citizen. 697 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012). See also infra note 747 (addressing this issue).

698 See Occupy.

699 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.1.b. (discussing comments on this issue). The Agencies did not

intend for the reference to ‘‘covered financial

Continued hedging transactions. 686 Finally, one commenter expressed concern that the inventory metrics in proposed Appendix A would make dealers reluctant to execute large, principal

transactions because such trades would have a transparent impact on inventory

metrics in the relevant asset class. 687

iii. Treatment of Anticipatory Market Making

In the proposal, the Agencies proposed that ‘‘bona fide market making-related activity may include taking positions in securities in anticipation of customer demand, so long as any anticipatory buying or selling activity is reasonable and related to clear, demonstrable trading interest of
clients, customers, or counterparties.’’ 688 Many commenters indicated that the language in the proposal is inconsistent with the statute’s language regarding near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. According to these commenters, the statute’s ‘‘designed’’ and ‘‘reasonably expected’’ language expressly acknowledges that a market maker may need to accumulate inventory before customer demand

manifests itself. Commenters further represented that the proposed standard may unduly limit a banking entity’s ability to accumulate inventory in anticipation of customer demand. 689

In addition, two commenters expressed concern that the proposal’s language would effectively require a banking entity to engage in impermissible front running. 690 One of

these commenters indicated that the Agencies should not restrict anticipatory trading to such a short time period. 691 To the contrary, the other commenter stated that anticipatory accumulation of inventory should be considered to be prohibited proprietary trading. 692 A few commenters noted that the standard in the proposal explicitly refers to securities and requested that the reference be changed to encompass the full scope of financial instruments covered by the rule to avoid ambiguity. 693 Several commenters recommended that the language be

eliminated 694 or modified 695 to address

the concerns discussed above.

iv. High-Frequency Trading

A few commenters stated that highfrequency trading should be considered prohibited proprietary trading under therule, not permitted market makingrelated activity. 696 For example, one commenter stated that the Agencies should not confuse high volume trading and market making. This commenter emphasized that algorithmic traders in general—and high-frequency traders in particular—do not hold themselves out in the manner required by the proposed rule, but instead only offer to buy and sell when they think it is profitable. 697 Another commenter suggested the Agencies impose a resting period on any order placed by a banking entity in reliance on any exemption in the rule by, for example, prohibiting a banking entity from buying and subsequently selling a position within a span of two

seconds. 698

c. Final Requirement To Routinely Stand Ready To Purchase and Sell

Section 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the final rule provides that the trading desk that establishes and manages the financial exposure must routinely stand ready to purchase and sell one or more types of

financial instruments related to its financial exposure and be willing and available to quote, buy and sell, or otherwise enter into long and short positions in those types of financial
instruments for its own account, in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout market cycles, on a basis appropriate for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial instruments. As
discussed in more detail below, the standard of ‘‘routinely’’ standing ready to purchase and sell one or more types

of financial instruments will be interpreted to account for differences

across markets and asset classes. In addition, this requirement provides that a trading desk must be willing and available to provide quotations and transact in the particular types of financial instruments in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout market cycles. Thus, a trading desk’s

activities would not meet the terms of the market-making exemption if, for example, the trading desk only provides wide quotations on one or both sides of the market relative to prevailing market conditions or is only willing to trade on an irregular, intermittent basis.

While this provision of the marketmaking exemption has some similarity to the requirement to hold oneself out in § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule, the Agencies have made a number of refinements in response to comments. Specifically, a number of commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement did not sufficiently account

for differences between markets and asset classes and would unduly limit certain types of market making by requiring ‘‘regular or continuous’’ quoting in a particular instrument. 699


### 5862 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

position’’ in the proposed rule to imply a single instrument, although commenters contended that the proposal may not have been sufficiently clear on this point.

700 Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal,

77 FR at 8356.

701 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ABA; Chamber (Feb. 2012); BDA (Feb.
2012); Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable;
ACLI (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; PUC Texas; PNC; MetLife; RBC; SSgA (Feb. 2012). Some commenters suggested alternative criteria, such as providing prices upon request, using a historical test of market making, or a purely guidance-based approach. See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); FTN; Flynn & Fusselman; JPMC. The Agencies are not adopting a requirement that the trading desk only provide prices upon request because the Agencies believe it would be inconsistent with market making in liquid exchange-traded instruments where market makers regularly or continuously post quotes on an exchange. With respect to one commenter’s suggested approach of a historical test of market making, this commenter did not provide enough

information about how such a test would work for the Agencies’ consideration. Finally, the final rule does not adopt a purely guidance-based approach because, as discussed further above, the Agencies

believe it could lead to an increased risk of evasion. 702 See Further Definition of ‘‘Swap Dealer,’’ ‘‘Security-Based Swap Dealer,’’ ‘‘Major Swap Participant,’’ ‘‘Major Security-Based Swap Participant’’ and ‘‘Eligible Contract Participant,’’ 77 FR 30596, 30609 (May 23, 2012) (describing market making in swaps as ‘‘routinely standing ready to enter into swaps at the request or demand of a counterparty’’).

703 As a result, activity that is considered market making under this final rule may not necessarily be considered market making for purposes of other laws or regulations, such as the U.S. securities laws,the rules and regulations thereunder, or selfregulatory organization rules. In addition, the Agencies note that a banking entity acting as an

underwriter would continue to be treated as an underwriter for purposes of the securities laws and the regulations thereunder, including any liability arising under the securities laws as a result of acting in such capacity, regardless of whether it is able to meet the terms of the market-making exemption for

its activities. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

704 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68957; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8436.

705 See Wellington; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012). 706 Morgan Stanley.

707 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68957 n.2.

708 See, e.g., Occupy (expressing concern that, with respect to the proposed definition of ‘‘trading
unit,’’ an ‘‘oversized’’ unit could combine significantly unrelated trading desks, which would impede detection of proprietary trading activity).

709 The Agencies recognize that the proposed rule’s application to a trading desk ‘‘or other organizational unit’’ would have provided banking entities with this type of flexibility to determine the level of organization at which the market-making exemption should apply based on the entity’s particular business structure and trading strategies, which would likely reduce the burdens of this aspect of the final rule. However, for the reasons noted above regarding application of this exemption to a higher organizational level than the trading The explanation of this requirement in the proposal was intended to address many of these concerns. For example, the Agencies stated that the proposed ‘‘indicia cannot be applied at all times

and under all circumstances because some may be inapplicable to the specific

asset class or market in which the market-making activity is

conducted.’’ 700 Nonetheless, the Agencies believe that certain modifications are warranted to clarify the rule and to prevent a potential chilling effect on market making-related activities conducted by banking entities.

Commenters represented that the requirement that a trading desk hold itself out as being willing to buy and sell ‘‘on a regular or continuous basis,’’ as was originally proposed, was impossible to meet or impractical in the context of many markets, especially less liquid

markets. 701 Accordingly, the final rule requires a trading desk that establishes and manages the financial exposure to ‘‘routinely’’ stand ready to trade one or more types of financial instruments related to its financial exposure. As discussed below, the meaning of ‘‘routinely’’ will account for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a type of financial
instrument, which should address commenter concern that the proposed standard would not work in less liquid markets and would have a chilling effect on banking entities’ ability to act as market makers in less liquid markets. A concept of market making that is applicable across securities, commodity
futures, and derivatives markets has not previously been defined by any of the Agencies. Thus, while this standard is based generally on concepts from the

securities laws and is consistent with the CFTC’s and SEC’s description of market making in swaps, 702 the Agencies note that it is not directly based on an existing definition of market making. 703 Instead, the approach

taken in the final rule is intended to

take into account and accommodate the

conditions in the relevant market for the

financial instrument in which the banking entity is making a market.

i. Definition of ‘‘Trading Desk’’

The Agencies are adopting a marketmaking exemption with requirements that generally focus on a financial exposure managed by a ‘‘trading desk’’ of a banking entity and such trading desk’s market-maker inventory. The market-making exemption as originally proposed would have applied to ‘‘a trading desk or other organizational unit’’ of a banking entity. In addition, for purposes of the proposed requirement to report and record certain quantitative measurements, the proposal defined the term ‘‘trading unit’’ as each of the following units of organization of a banking entity: (i) Each discrete unit that is engaged in the coordinated implementation of a revenue-generation strategy and that participates in the execution of any covered trading activity; (ii) each organizational unit

that is used to structure and control the aggregate risk-taking activities and employees of one or more trading units described in paragraph (i); and (iii) all trading operations, collectively. 704

The Agencies received few comments regarding the organizational level atwhich the requirements of the marketmaking exemption should apply, and many of the commenters that addressed

this issue did not describe their suggested approach in detail. 705 One commenter suggested that the marketmaking exemption apply to each ‘‘trading unit’’ of a banking entity, defined as ‘‘each organizational unit

that is used to structure and control the aggregate risk-taking activities and employees that are engaged in the coordinated implementation of a customer-facing revenue generation strategy and that participate in the execution of any covered trading activity.’’ 706 This suggested approach is substantially similar to the second prong of the Agencies’ proposed definition of ‘‘trading unit’’ in Appendix A of the proposal. The Agencies described this prong as generally including management or reporting divisions, groups, sub-groups, or other intermediate units of organization used by the banking entity to manage one or more discrete trading units (e.g., ‘‘North American Credit Trading,’’ ‘‘Global Credit Trading,’’ etc.). 707 The Agencies

are concerned that this commenter’s suggested approach, or any other approach applying the exemption’s requirements to a higher level of organization than the trading desk, would impede monitoring of market making-related activity and detection of impermissible proprietary trading by combining a number of different trading strategies and aggregating a larger volume of trading activities. 708 Further, key requirements in the market-making exemption, such as the required limits and risk management procedures, are generally used by banking entities for risk control and applied at the trading desk level. Thus, applying them at a broader organizational level than the trading desk would create a separate system for compliance with this exemption designed to permit a banking entity to aggregate disparate trading activities and apply limits more generally. Applying the conditions of the exemption at a more aggregated level would allow banking entities more flexibility in trading and could result in a higher volume of trading that could contribute modestly to liquidity. 709


### 5863 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

desk, the Agencies are not adopting the ‘‘or other organizational unit’’ language.

710 See final rule § 75.3(e)(13). 711 For example, the Agencies expect a banking entity may determine the foreign exchange options desk to be a trading desk; however, the Agencies do not expect a banking entity to consider an individual Japanese Yen options trader (i.e., the trader in charge of all Yen-based options trades) as a trading desk, unless the banking entity manages its profit and loss, market making, and hedging in Japanese Yen options independently of all other

financial instruments. 712 See infra note 729 and accompanying text. Several commenters noted that market-making activities may be conducted across separate affiliated legal entities. See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

713 See infra note 732 and accompanying text. Instead of taking that approach, the Agencies have determined to permit a broader range of market making-related activities that can be effectively controlled by building on risk controls used by trading desks for business purposes. This will allow an individual trader to use instruments or strategies

within limits established in the compliance program to confidently trade in the type of financial instruments in which his or her trading desk makes a market. The Agencies

believe this addresses concerns that uncertainty would negatively impact liquidity. It also addresses concerns that applying the market-making exemption at a higher level of organization would

reduce the effectiveness of the requirements in the final rule aimed at ensuring that the quality and character of trading is consistent with market making-related activity and would
increase the risk of evasion. Moreover, several provisions of the final rule are intended to account for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a given type of financial instrument in which the trading desk makes a market.

The final rule takes account of these factors to, among other things, respond

to commenters’ concerns about the proposed rule’s potential impact on market making in less liquid markets. Applying these requirements at an organizational level above the trading desk would be more likely to result in aggregation of trading in various types of instruments with differing levels of liquidity, which would make it more

difficult for these market factors to be taken into account for purposes of the exemption (for example, these factors are considered for purposes of tailoring the analysis of reasonably expected

near-term demands of customers and establishing risk, inventory, and duration limits).

Thus, the Agencies continue to believe that certain requirements of the exemption should apply to a relatively granular level of organization within a banking entity (or across two or more affiliated banking entities). These requirements of the final market-making exemption have been formulated to best

reflect the nature of activities at the trading desk level of granularity.

As explained below, the Agencies are applying certain requirements to a ‘‘trading desk’’ of a banking entity and adopting a definition of this term in the

final rule. 710 The definition of ‘‘trading desk’’ is similar to the first prong of the proposed definition of ‘‘trading unit.’’ The Agencies are not adopting the proposed ‘‘or other organizational unit’’ language because the Agencies are concerned that approach would have provided banking entities with too much discretion to independently determine the organizational level at which the requirements should apply, including a more aggregated level of organization, which could lead to evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading and the other concerns noted above. The Agencies believe that adopting an approach focused on the trading desk level will allow banking entities and the Agencies to better distinguish between permitted market making-related activities and trading that is prohibited by section 13 of the BHC Act and, thus, will prevent evasion of the statutory requirements, as
discussed in more detail below. Further, as discussed below, the Agencies believe that applying requirements at the trading desk level is balanced by the financial exposure-based approach,

which will address commenters’concerns about the burdens of trade-bytrade analyses.

In the final rule, trading desk is

defined to mean the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that buys or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof. The Agencies expect that a trading desk would be managed and operated as an

individual unit and should reflect the level at which the profit and loss of market-making traders is attributed. 711 The geographic location of individual traders is not dispositive for purposes of the analysis of whether the traders may comprise a single trading desk. For instance, a trading desk making markets in U.S. investment grade telecom corporate credits may use trading personnel in both New York (to trade

U.S. dollar-denominated bonds issued by U.S.-incorporated telecomcompanies) and London (to trade Eurodenominated bonds issued by the same type of companies). This approach allows more effective management of risks of trading activity by requiring the establishment of limits, management oversight, and accountability at the level where trading activity actually occurs. It also allows banking entities to tailor the limits and procedures to the type of

instruments traded and markets served by each trading desk.

In response to comments, and as

discussed below in the context of the ‘‘financial exposure’’ definition, a trading desk may manage a financial exposure that includes positions in different affiliated legal entities. 712 Similarly, a trading desk may include employees working on behalf of multiple affiliated legal entities or booking trades in multiple affiliated entities. Using the previous example, the U.S. investment grade telecom corporate credit trading desk may include traders working for or booking into a broker-dealer entity (for corporate bond trades), a security-based swap dealer entity (for single-name CDS trades), and/or a swap dealer entity (for index CDS or interest rate swap hedges). To clarify this issue, the definition of ‘‘trading desk’’ specifically provides that the desk can buy or sell financial instruments ‘‘for the trading account of a banking entity or an affiliate thereof.’’ Thus, a trading desk need not be constrained to a single legal entity, although it is permissible for a trading desk to only trade for a single legal entity. A trading desk booking positions in different affiliated legal entities must have records that identify all positions included in the trading desk’s financial exposure and where such positions are
held, as discussed below. 713

The Agencies believe that establishing a defined organizational level at which many of the market-making exemption’s requirements apply will address potential evasion concerns. Applyingcertain requirements of the marketmaking exemption at the trading desk level will strengthen their effectiveness and prevent evasion of the exemption by ensuring that the aggregate trading activities of a relatively limited group of traders on a single desk are conducted

in a manner that is consistent with the exemption’s standards. In particular, because many of the requirements in the market-making exemption look to the specific type(s) of financial instruments in which a market is being made, and such requirements are designed to take into account differences among markets and asset classes, the Agencies believe it is important that these requirements be applied to a discrete and identifiable unit engaged in, and operated by personnel whose responsibilities relate to, making a market in a specific set or


### 5864 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

714 See proposed rule § 75.4(b).

715 Some commenters also contended that language in proposed Appendix B raised transaction-by-transaction implications. See supra notes 522 to 529 and accompanying text (discussing commenters’ transaction-by-transaction concerns).

716 The Agencies are not adopting a transactionby-transaction approach because the Agencies are concerned that such an approach would be unduly burdensome or impractical and inconsistent with

the manner in which bona fide market makingrelated activity is conducted. Additionally, the Agencies are concerned that the burdens of such an approach would cause banking entities to significantly reduce or cease market making-related activities, which would cause negative market impacts harmful to both investors and issuers, as well as the financial system generally. 717 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870 n.146 (‘‘The Agencies note that a market maker may often make a market in one type of [financial instrument] and hedge its activities using different [financial
instruments] in which it does not make a market.’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356 n.152.

718 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iv). 719 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(E).

720 See final rule § 75.4(b)(5).

721 As noted in the proposal, certain types of market making-related activities, such as market making in derivatives, involves the retention of principal exposures rather than the retention of

actual financial instruments. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68869 n.143; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8354 n.149. This type of activity would be included under the concept of ‘‘inventory’’ in the final rule.

722 The Agencies recognize that under the statute a banking entity’s positions in loans, spot commodities, and spot foreign exchange or currency are not subject to the final rule’s restrictions on proprietary trading. Thus, a banking entity’s trading in these instruments does not need to comply with the market-making exemption or any other exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading. A banking entity may, however, include exposures in loans, spot commodities, and spot foreign exchange or currency that are related to the desk’s market-making activities in determining the trading desk’s financial exposure and in turn, the desk’ s financial exposure limits under the market-making exemption. The Agencies believe this will provide a more accurate picture of the trading desk’s financial exposure. For example, a market maker in foreign exchange forwards or swaps may mitigate the risks of its market-maker inventory with spot foreign exchange. type of financial instruments. Further, applying requirements at the trading desk level should facilitate banking entity monitoring and review of compliance with the exemption by limiting the aggregate trading volume
that must be reviewed, as well as allowing consideration of the particular

facts and circumstances of the desk’s trading activities (e.g., the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial instruments). As discussed above, the Agencies believe that applying the requirements of the market-making exemption to a higher level of organization would reduce the ability to consider the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a type of financial instrument, would impede effective monitoring and compliance
reviews, and would increase the risk of

evasion.

ii. Definitions of ‘‘Financial Exposure’’ and ‘‘Market-Maker Inventory’’

Certain requirements of the proposed market-making exemption referred to a ‘‘purchase or sale of a [financial
instrument].’’ 714 Even though the Agencies did not intend to require a trade-by-trade review, a significant number of commenters expressed concern that this language could be read to require compliance with the proposed market-making exemption on a transaction-by-transaction basis. 715 In response to these concerns, the Agencies are modifying the exemption to clarify the manner in which compliance with certain provisions will be assessed. In particular, rather than a transaction-by-transaction focus, the market-making exemption in the final rule focuses on two related aspects of market-making activity: A trading desk’s ‘‘market-maker inventory’’ and its overall ‘‘financial exposure.’’ 716

The Agencies are adopting an approach that focuses on both a tradingdesk’s financial exposure and marketmaker inventory in recognition that market making-related activity is best viewed in a holistic manner and that, during a single day, a trading desk may engage in a large number of purchases

and sales of financial instruments.

While all these transactions must be conducted in compliance with the market-making exemption, the Agencies recognize that they involve financial instruments for which the trading desk acts as market maker (i.e., by standing ready to purchase and sell that type of financial instrument) and instruments that are acquired to manage the risks of positions in financial instruments for
which the desk acts as market maker,

but in which the desk is not itself a

market maker. 717

The final rule requires that activity by a trading desk under the market-making exemption be evaluated by a banking entity through monitoring and settinglimits for the trading desk’s marketmaker inventory and financial exposure. The market-maker inventory of a trading desk includes the positions in financial instruments, including derivatives, in which the trading desk acts as market maker. The financial exposure of the trading desk includes the aggregate risks

of financial instruments in the marketmaker inventory of the trading desk plus the financial instruments, including derivatives, that are acquired to manage the risks of the positions in financial instruments for which the trading desk
acts as a market maker, but in which the trading desk does not itself make a market, as well as any associated loans, commodities, and foreign exchange that are acquired as incident to acting as a market maker. In addition, the trading desk generally must maintain its market-maker inventory and financial exposure within its market-maker inventory limit and its financial exposure limit, respectively and, to the extent that any limit of the trading desk is exceeded, the trading desk must take action to bring the trading desk into compliance with the limits as promptly as possible after the limit is

exceeded. 718 Thus, if market movements cause a trading desk’s financial exposure to exceed one or more of its risk limits, the trading desk must promptly take action to reduce its financial exposure or obtain approval for an increase to its limits through the required escalation procedures, detailed below. A trading desk may not,
however, enter into a trade that would

cause it to exceed its limits without first receiving approval through its escalation procedures. 719

Under the final rule, the term marketmaker inventory is defined to mean all of the positions, in the financial instruments for which the trading desk stands ready to make a market in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section, that are managed by the trading desk, including the trading desk’s open positions or exposures arising from open transactions. 720 Those financial instruments in which a trading

desk acts as market maker must be identified in the trading desk’s compliance program under § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(A) of the final rule. As used throughout this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**, the term ‘‘inventory’’

refers to both the retention of financial instruments (e.g., securities) and, in the context of derivatives trading, the risk exposures arising out of market-making

related activities. 721 Consistent with the statute, the final rule requires that the market-maker inventory of a trading desk be designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.

The financial exposure concept is broader in scope than market-maker inventory and reflects the aggregate risks of the financial instruments (as well as any associated loans, spot commodities, or spot foreign exchange or currency) the trading desk manages as part of its market making-related

activities. 722 Thus, a trading desk’s financial exposure will take into account a trading desk’s positions in

instruments for which it does not act as
a market maker, but which are


### 5865 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

723 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.; final rule
§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(C). 724 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that modern trading units generally view individual positions as a bundle of characteristics that contribute to their complete portfolio). See also Federal Reserve Board, Trading and Capital-Markets Activities Manual § 2000.1 (Feb. 1998) (‘‘The risk-measurement system should also permit disaggregation of risk by type and by customer, instrument, or business unit to effectively support the management and control of risks.’’).

725 See ACLI (Feb. 2012); Fixed Income Forum/
Credit Roundtable; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012).established as part of its market makingrelated activities, which includes risk mitigation and hedging. For instance, a trading desk that acts as a market maker in Euro-denominated corporate bonds may, in addition to Euro-denominated bonds, enter into credit default swap transactions on individual European corporate bond issuers or an index of European corporate bond issuers in order to hedge its exposure arising from its corporate bond inventory, in

accordance with its documented hedging policies and procedures. Though only the corporate bonds would be considered as part of the trading desk’s market-maker inventory, its overall financial exposure would also include the credit default swaps used for hedging purposes.

As noted above, the Agencies believe the extent to which a trading desk isengaged in permitted market makingrelated activities is best determined by evaluating both the financial exposure that results from the desk’s trading activity and the amount, types, and risks

of the financial instruments in the desk’s market-maker inventory. Both concepts are independently valuable

and will contribute to the effectiveness of the market-making exemption. Specifically, a trading desk’s financial exposure will highlight the net exposure and risks of its positions and, along with an analysis of the actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of that exposure
consistent with its limits, the extent to which it is appropriately managing the risk of its market-maker inventory consistent with applicable limits, all of which are significant to an analysis of whether a trading desk is engaged in market making-related activities. An assessment of the amount, types, and

risks of the financial instruments in a trading desk’s market-maker inventory will identify the aggregate amount of the desk’s inventory in financial

instruments for which it acts as market maker, the types of these financial

instruments that the desk holds at a particular time, and the risks arising from such holdings. Importantly, ananalysis of a trading desk’s marketmaker inventory will inform the extent to which this inventory is related to the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.

Because the market-maker inventory concept is more directly related to the financial instruments that a trading desk buys and sells from customers than the financial exposure concept, the Agencies believe that requiring reviewand analysis of a trading desk’s marketmaker inventory, as well as its financial exposure, will enhance compliance with

the statute’s near-term customer demand requirement. While the amount, types, and risks of a trading desk’s market-maker inventory are constrained by the near-term customer demand requirement, any other positions in financial instruments managed by the trading desk as part of its market making-related activities (i.e., those reflected in the trading desk’s financial exposure, but not included in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory) are also constrained because they must be consistent with the market-maker inventory or, if taken for hedging purposes, designed to reducethe risks of the trading desk’s marketmaker inventory.

The Agencies note that disaggregating the trading desk’s market-maker inventory from its other exposures also

allows for better identification of the trading desk’s hedging positions in instruments for which the trading desk
does not make a market. As a result, a banking entity’s systems should be able to readily identify and monitor the trading desk’s hedging positions that are not in its market-maker inventory. As discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.3., a trading desk must have certain inventory and

risk limits on its market-maker inventory, the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk may use for risk management purposes, and its financial exposure that are designed to facilitate the trading desk’s compliance with the exemption and that are based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities, including analyses regarding the reasonably expected near term demands

of customers. 723

The final rule also requires these policies and procedures to contain escalation procedures if a trade would exceed the limits set for the trading
desk. However, the final rule does not permit a trading desk to exceed the limits solely based on customer demand. Rather, before executing a

trade that would exceed the desk’s limits or changing the desk’s limits, a trading desk must first follow the relevant escalation procedures, which may require additional approval within the banking entity and provide demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase in limits is consistent with the reasonably expected near term demands of

customers.

Due to these considerations, the Agencies believe the final rule should result in more efficient compliance analyses on the part of both banking entities and Agency supervisors and examiners and should be less costly for banking entities to implement than a transaction-by-transaction or instrument-by-instrument approach. For example, the Agencies believe that some banking entities already compute and monitor most trading desks’ financial exposures for risk management or other

purposes. 724 The Agencies also believe that focusing on the financial exposure and market-maker inventory of a trading desk, as opposed to each separate
individual transaction, is consistent with the statute’s goal of reducing proprietary trading risk in the banking system and its exemption for market making-related activities. The Agencies recognize that banking entities may not currently disaggregate trading desks’ market-maker inventory from their financial exposures and that, to the extent banking entities do not currently separately identify trading desks’ market-maker inventory, requiring such disaggregation for purposes of this rule will impose certain costs. In addition, the Agencies understand that an approach focused solely on the aggregate of all the unit’s trading positions, as suggested by some commenters, would present fewer

burdens. 725 However, for the reasons discussed above, the Agencies believe such disaggregation is necessary to give

full effect to the statute’s near term customer demand requirement.

The Agencies note that whether a financial instrument or exposure stemming from a derivative is

considered to be market-maker inventory is based only on whether the

desk makes a market in the financial instrument, regardless of the type of counterparty or the purpose of the transaction. Thus, the Agencies believe that banking entities should be able to develop a standardized methodology for identifying a trading desk’s positions and exposures in the financial

instruments for which it acts as a market
maker. As further discussed in this Part, a trading desk’s financial exposure must reflect the aggregate risks managed by the trading desk as part of its market


### 5866 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

726 See final rule § 75.4(b)(4).

727 Final rule § 75.4(b)(4). For example, in the case of derivatives, a trading desk’s financial position will be the residual risks of the trading desk’s open positions. For instance, an options desk may have thousands of open trades at any given time, including hedges, but the desk will manage, among other risk factors, the trading desk’s portfolio delta, gamma, rho, and volatility. 728 As discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.3., a banking entity must establish, implement, maintain, and enforce policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing regarding the financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to purchase and sell and the products, instruments, or exposures each trading desk may use for risk management purposes. See final rule
§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii).

729 Other statutory or regulatory requirements, including those based on prudential safety and soundness concerns, may prevent or limit a banking entity from booking hedging positions in a legal entity other than the entity taking the underlying position. 730 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.4.

731 Under these circumstances, the other organizational unit would also be required to meet the hedging exemption’s documentation requirement for the risk-mitigating transaction. See final rule § 75.5(c). making-related activities, 726 and a banking entity should be able to demonstrate that the financial exposureof a trading desk is related to its marketmaking activities.

The final rule defines ‘‘financial exposure’’ to mean the ‘‘aggregate risks

of one or more financial instruments and any associated loans, commodities, or foreign exchange or currency, held by a banking entity or its affiliate and managed by a particular trading desk as part of the trading desk’s market making-related activities.’’ 727 In this context, the term ‘‘aggregate’’ does not imply that a long exposure in one

instrument can be combined with a short exposure in a similar or related instrument to yield a total exposure of zero. Instead, such a combination may reduce a trading desk’s economic exposure to certain risk factors that are
common to both instruments, but it would still retain any basis risk between

those financial instruments or potentially generate a new risk exposure in the case of purposeful hedging.

With respect to the frequency with which a trading desk should determine its financial exposure and the amount, types, and risks of the financial

instruments in its market-maker inventory, a trading desk’s financial exposure and market-maker inventory

should be evaluated and monitored at a frequency that is appropriate for the trading desk’s trading strategies and the

characteristics of the financial instruments the desk trades, including historical intraday volatility. For example, a trading desk that repeatedly acquired and then terminated significant financial exposures throughout the day but that had little or no financial exposure at the end of the day should assess its financial exposure based on its intraday activities, not simply its end-of-day financial exposure. The frequency with which a trading desk’s financial exposure and market-maker inventory will be monitored and analyzed should be specified in the trading desk’s compliance program.

A trading desk’s financial exposure reflects its aggregate risk exposures. The types of ‘‘aggregate risks’’ identified in the trading desk’s financial exposure

should reflect consideration of all significant market factors relevant to the financial instruments in which the trading desk acts as market maker or that the desk uses for risk management purposes pursuant to this exemption, including the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial instruments. Thus, market factors reflected in a trading desk’s financial exposure should include all significant and relevant factors associated with the products and

instruments in which the desk trades as market maker or for risk management purposes, including basis risk arising from such positions. 728 Similarly, an assessment of the risks of the trading desk’s market-maker inventory must reflect consideration of all significant

market factors relevant to the financial instruments in which the trading desk makes a market. Importantly, a trading desk’s financial exposure and the risks of its market-maker inventory will change based on the desk’s trading activity (e.g., buying an instrument that it did not previously hold, increasing its position in an instrument, or decreasing its position in an instrument) as well as changing market conditions related to instruments or positions managed by the trading desk.

Because the final rule defines ‘‘trading desk’’ based on operational functionality rather than corporate formality, a trading desk’s financial exposure may include positions that are booked in different affiliated legal

entities. 729 The Agencies understand that positions may be booked in different legal entities for a variety of reasons, including regulatory reasons. For example, a trading desk that makes a market in corporate bonds may bookits corporate bond positions in an SECregistered broker-dealer and may book index CDS positions acquired for hedging purposes in a CFTC-registered swap dealer. A financial exposure that reflects both the corporate bond position and the index CDS position better reflects the economic reality of the trading desk’s risk exposure (i.e., by showing that the risk of the corporate bond position has been reduced by the index CDS position). In addition, a trading desk engaged in market making-related activities in compliance with the final rule may direct another organizational unit of the banking entity or an affiliate to execute a risk-mitigating transaction on the trading desk’s behalf. 730 The other organizational unit may rely on the market-making exemption for these purposes only if: (i) The other organizational unit acts in accordance with the trading desk’s risk management policies and procedures established in accordance with § 75.4(b)(2)(iii) of thefinal rule; and (ii) the resulting riskmitigating position is attributed to the trading desk’s financial exposure (and not the other organizational unit’s financial exposure) and is included in the trading desk’s daily profit and loss calculation. If another organizational unit of the banking entity or an affiliate establishes a risk-mitigating position for the trading desk on its own accord (i.e., not at the direction of the trading desk) or if the risk-mitigating position is included in the other organizational unit’s financial exposure or daily profit
and loss calculation, then the other organizational unit must comply with the requirements of the hedging exemption for such activity. 731 It may not rely on the market-making exemption under these circumstances. Ifa trading desk engages in a riskmitigating transaction with a second trading desk of the banking entity or an affiliate that is also engaged in permissible market making-related activities, then the risk-mitigating position would be included in the first trading desk’s financial exposure and

the contra-risk would be included in the second trading desk’s market-maker inventory and financial exposure. The Agencies believe the net effect of the final rule is to allow individual trading desks to efficiently manage their own hedging and risk mitigation activities on a holistic basis, while only allowing for external hedging directed by staff outside of the trading desk under the additional requirements of the hedging exemption.

To include in a trading desk’s financial exposure either positions held at an affiliated legal entity or positions established by another organizational unit on the trading desk’s behalf, a banking entity must be able to provide supervisors or examiners of any Agency that has regulatory authority over the banking entity pursuant to section


### 5867 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

732 A banking entity must be able to provide such records when a related position is held at an affiliate, even if the affiliate and the banking entity are not subject to the same Agency’s regulatory jurisdiction. 733 The Agencies believe it is appropriate to apply the requirements of the exemption to the financial exposure of a ‘‘trading desk,’’ rather than the portfolio of a higher level of organization, for the reasons discussed above, including our concern that aggregating a large number of disparate positions and exposures across a range of trading desks could

increase the risk of evasion. See supra Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.i. (discussing the determination to apply requirements at the trading desk level).

734 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

735 See, e.g., Occupy. 736 Indeed, in the most specialized situations, such quotations may only be provided upon

request. See infra note 740 and accompanying text (discussing permissible block positioning). 13(b)(2)(B) of the BHC Act with records, promptly upon request, that identify any related positions held at an affiliated entity that are being included in the trading desk’s financial exposure for purposes of the market-making exemption. Similarly, the supervisors and examiners of any Agency that has supervisory authority over the banking entity that holds financial instruments that are being included in another trading desk’s financial exposure for purposes of the market-making exemption must have the same level of access to the records of the trading

desk. 732 Banking entities should be prepared to provide all records that identify all positions included in a trading desk’s financial exposure and where such positions are held.

As an example of how a trading desk’s market-maker inventory and financial exposure will be analyzed under the market-making exemption, assume a trading desk makes a market in a variety of U.S. corporate bonds and hedges its aggregated positions with a combination of exposures to corporate bond indexes and specific name CDS in which the desk does not make a market. To qualify for the market-making exemption, the trading desk would have to demonstrate, among other things, that: (i) The desk routinely stands ready to purchase and sell the U.S. corporate bonds, consistent with the requirement of § 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the final rule, and these instruments (or category of instruments) are identified in the trading desk’s compliance program; (ii) the trading desk’s market-maker inventory in U.S. corporate bonds is designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, consistent with the analysis and limits established by the banking entity for the trading desk; (iii) the trading desk’s exposures to corporate bond indexes and single name CDS are designed to mitigate the risk of its financial exposure, are consistent with the products, instruments, or exposures and the techniques and strategies that the trading desk may use to manage its risk effectively (and such use continues to be effective), and do not exceed the trading desk’s limits on the amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk uses for risk management purposes; and (iv) the aggregate risks of the trading desk’s exposures to U.S. corporate bonds, corporate bond indexes, and single name CDS do not exceed the trading desk’s limits on the level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure.

Our focus on the financial exposure ofa trading desk, rather than a trade-bytrade requirement, is designed to give banking entities the flexibility to acquire not only market-maker inventory, but positions that facilitate market making,such as positions that hedge marketmaker inventory. 733 As commenters pointed out, a trade-by-trade requirement would view trades in isolation and could fail to recognize that

certain trades that are not customerfacing are nevertheless integral to market making and financial

intermediation. 734 The Agencies understand that the risk-reducing effects of combining large diverse portfolios
could, in certain instances, mask otherwise prohibited proprietary trading. 735 However, the Agencies donot believe that taking a transaction-bytransaction approach is necessary to
address this concern. Rather, the Agencies believe that the broader definitions of ‘‘financial exposure’’ and ‘‘market-maker inventory’’ coupled with the tailored definition of ‘‘trading desk’’ facilitates the analysis of aggregate risk exposures and positions in a manner best suited to apply and evaluate the market-making exemption.

In short, this approach is designed to mitigate the costs of a trade-by-trade analysis identified by commenters. The Agencies recognize, however, that this approach is only effective at achieving the goals of the section 13 of the BHC Act—promoting financial intermediation and limiting speculative risks within banking entities—if there are limits on a trading desk’s financialexposure. That is, a permissive marketmaking exemption that gives banking

entities maximum discretion in acquiring positions to provide liquidity runs the risk of also allowing banking entities to engage in speculative trades. As discussed more fully in the following

Parts of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**, the final market-making exemption provides a number of controls on a trading desk’s financial exposure. These controls include, among others, a provision requiring that a trading desk’s market-maker inventory be designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected

near term demands of customers and that any other financial instruments managed by the trading desk be designed to mitigate the risk of such desk’s market-maker inventory. In addition, the final market-making exemption requires the trading desk’s compliance program to include appropriate risk and inventory limits

tied to the near term demand requirement, as well as escalation procedures if a trade would exceed such limits. The compliance program, which

includes internal controls and independent testing, is designed to prevent instances where transactions not related to providing financial intermediation services are part of a desk’s financial exposure.

iii. Routinely Standing Ready To Buy

and Sell

The requirement to routinely stand ready to buy and sell a type of financial instrument in the final rule recognizes that market making-related activities differ based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of financial instrument. For example, a trading desk acting as a market maker in highly liquid markets would engage in more regular quoting activity than a market maker in less liquid markets. Moreover, the Agencies recognize that the maturity and depth of the market also play a role in determining the character of a market maker’s activity.

As noted above, the standard of ‘‘routinely’’ standing ready to buy and

sell will differ across markets and asset classes based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the type of
financial instrument. For instance, a trading desk that is a market maker in liquid equity securities generally should engage in very regular or continuous quoting and trading activities on both sides of the market. In less liquid markets, a trading desk should engage in regular quoting activity across the relevant type(s) of financial instruments, although such quoting may be less frequent than in liquid equity

markets. 736 Consistent with the CFTC’s and SEC’s interpretation of market making in swaps and security-based swaps for purposes of the definitions of


### 5868 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

737 The Agencies will consider factors similar to those identified by the CFTC and SEC in connection

with this standard. See Further Definition of ‘‘Swap Dealer,’’ ‘‘Security-Based Swap Dealer,’’ ‘‘Major Swap Participant,’’ ‘‘Major Security-Based Swap Participant’’ and ‘‘Eligible Contract Participant’’, 77 FR 30596, 30609 (May 23, 2012)

738 The Agencies recognize that, as noted by commenters, preventing a banking entity from conducting customized transactions with customers may impact customers’ risk exposures or

transaction costs. See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies are not prohibiting this activity under the final rule, as

discussed in this Part.

739 The Agencies have considered comments on the issue of whether trading by appointment should be permitted under the final market-making exemption. The Agencies believe it is appropriate to permit trading by appointment to the extent that there is customer demand for liquidity in the relevant products.

740 As noted in the preamble to the proposed rule, the size of a block will vary among different asset classes. The Agencies also stated in the proposal that the SEC’s definition of ‘‘qualified block positioner’’ in Rule 3b–8(c) under the Exchange Act may serve as guidance for determining whetherblock positioning activity qualifies for the marketmaking exemption. In referencing that rule as guidance, the Agencies did not intend to imply that a banking entity engaged in block positioning activity would be required to meet all terms of the ‘‘qualified block positioner’’ definition at all times.
Nonetheless, a number of commenters indicated that it was unclear when a banking entity would need to act as a qualified block positioner in accordance with Rule 3b–8(c) and expressed concern that uncertainty could have a chilling effect on a banking entity’s willingness to facilitate

customer block trades. See, e.g., RBC; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). For example, a few commenters stated that certain requirements in Rule 3b–8(c) could cause fire sales or general market uncertainty. See id. After considering comments, the Agencies have decided that the reference to Rule 3b–8(c) is unnecessary for purposes of the final rule. In particular, the Agencies believe that the requirements in the market-making exemption provide sufficient safeguards, and the additional requirements of the ‘‘qualified block positioner’’ definition may present unnecessary burdens or redundancies with the rule, as adopted. For example, the Agencies believe that there is some overlap between § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the exemption, which provides that the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory must be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, and Rule 3b–8(c)(iii), which requires the sale of the shares comprising the block as rapidly as possible

commensurate with the circumstances. In other words, the market-making exemption would require a banking entity to appropriately manage its inventory when engaged in block positioning activity, but would not speak directly to the timing element given the diversity of markets to which the exemption applies.

As noted above, one commenter analyzed the potential market impact of a complete restriction on a market maker’s ability to provide direct liquidity to help a customer execute a large block trade. See

supra note 687 and accompanying text. Because the Agencies are not restricting a banking entity’s ability to engage in block positioning in the manner suggested by this commenter, the Agencies do not

believe that the final rule will cause the cited market impact of incremental transaction costs between $1.7 and $3.4 billion per year. The Agencies address this commenter’s concern about the impact of inventory metrics on a banking entity’s willingness to engage in block trading in Part VI.C.3. (discussing the metrics requirement in the final rule and noting that metrics will not be used to determine compliance with the rule but, rather, will be monitored for patterns over time to identify activities that may warrant further review).

One commenter appeared to request that block trading activity not be subject to all requirements of the market-making exemption. See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). Any activity conducted in reliance on the market-making exemption, including block trading activity, must meet the requirements of the market-making exemption. The Agencies believe the requirements in the final rule are workable for block positioning activity and do not believe it would be appropriate to subject block positioning to lesser requirements than general market-making activity. For example, trading in large block sizes can expose a trading desk to greater risk than market making in smaller sizes, particularly absent risk management requirements. Thus, the Agencies believe it is important for block positioning activity to be subject to the same requirements, including the requirements to establish risk limits and risk management procedures, as general market-making activity. 741 This approach is generally consistent with commenters’ requested clarification that a trading desk’s quoting activity will not be assessed on an instrument-by-instrument basis, but rather across a range of similar instruments for which the trading

desk acts as a market maker. See, e.g., RBC; SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); CIEBA; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

742 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

743 The Agencies recognize that there could be limited circumstances under which a trading desk’s financial exposure does not relate to the types of financial instruments that it is standing ready to buy and sell for a short period of time. However, the Agencies would expect for such occurrences to be minimal. For example, this scenario could occur if a trading desk unwinds a hedge position after the ‘‘swap dealer’’ and ‘‘security-based swap dealer,’’ ‘‘routinely’’ in the swap market context means that the trading desk should stand ready to enter into swaps or security-based swaps at the request or demand of a counterparty more frequently than occasionally. 737 The Agencies note that a trading desk may routinely stand ready to enter into
derivatives on both sides of the market, or it may routinely stand ready to enter

into derivatives on either side of the

market and then enter into one or more offsetting positions in the derivatives market or another market, particularly in the case of relatively less liquid derivatives. While a trading desk may respond to requests to trade certain products, such as custom swaps, even if it does not normally quote in the particular product, the trading desk should hedge against the resulting exposure in accordance with its financial exposure and hedging

limits. 738 Further, the Agencies continue to recognize that market makers in highly illiquid markets may trade only intermittently or at the request of particular customers, which is sometimes referred to as trading by appointment. 739 A trading desk’s block positioning activity would also meet the terms of this requirement provided that, from time to time, the desk engages in block trades (i.e., trades of a large quantity or with a high dollar value)

with customers. 740 Regardless of the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a particular type of financial instrument, a trading desk should have a pattern of providing price indications on either side of the market and a pattern of trading with

customers on each side of the market. In particular, in the case of relatively illiquid derivatives or structured
instruments, it would not be sufficient to demonstrate that a trading desk on occasion creates a customized instrument or provides a price quote in response to a customer request. Instead, the trading desk would need to be able to demonstrate a pattern of taking these actions in response to demand from multiple customers with respect to both long and short risk exposures in identified types of instruments.

This requirement of the final rule applies to a trading desk’s activity in one or more ‘‘types’’ of financial

instruments. 741 The Agencies recognize
that, in some markets, such as the corporate bond market, a market maker may regularly quote a subset of instruments (generally the more liquid instruments), but may not provide regular quotes in other related but less liquid instruments that the market maker is willing and available to trade.
Instead, the market maker would provide a price for those instruments

upon request. 742 The trading desk’s activity, in the aggregate for a particular type of financial instrument, indicates whether it is engaged in activity that is consistent with § 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the

final rule.

Notably, this requirement provides that the types of financial instruments for which the trading desk routinely stands ready to purchase and sell must

be related to its authorized marketmaker inventory and it authorized financial exposure. Thus, the types of

financial instruments for which the desk routinely stands ready to buy and sell should compose a significant portion of its overall financial exposure. The only other financial instruments contributing to the trading desk’s overall financial exposure should be those designed to hedge or mitigate the risk of the

financial instruments for which the trading desk is making a market. It

would not be consistent with the market-making exemption for a trading desk to hold only positions in, or be exposed to, financial instruments for which the trading desk is not a market

maker. 743


### 5869 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

market-making position has already been unwound or if a trading desk acquires an anticipatory hedge position prior to acquiring a market-making position. As discussed more thoroughly in Part VI.A.3.c.3., a banking entity must establish written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing that establish appropriate parameters around such activities.

744 See, e.g., Occupy; Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

745 One commenter expressed concern that abanking entity may be able to rely on the marketmaking exemption when it is providing only wide, out of context quotes. See Occupy.

746 As discussed below, this may include providing quotes in the interdealer trading market.

747 Algorithmic trading strategies that only trade when market factors are favorable to the strategy’s objectives or that otherwise frequently exit the market would not be considered to be standing ready to purchase or sell a type of financial instrument throughout market cycles and, thus, would not qualify for the market-making exemption. The Agencies believe this addresses commenters’ concerns about high-frequency trading activities that are only active in the market when it is believed to be profitable, rather than to facilitate customers. See, e.g., Better Markets (Feb. 2012). The Agencies are not, however, prohibiting all high-frequency trading activities under the final rule or otherwise limiting high-frequency trading by banking entities by imposing a resting period on their orders, as requested by certain commenters.
See, e.g., Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public

Citizen.

748 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(A).

749 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii).

750 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(C).

751 For example, a few commenters requested that the rule prohibit banking entities from market making in assets classified as Level 3 under FAS

157. See supra note 656 and accompanying text. The Agencies continue to believe that it would be inappropriate to incorporate accounting standards in the rule because accounting standards could change in the future without consideration of the potential impact on the final rule. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68859 n.101 (explaining why the Agencies declined to incorporate certain accounting standards in the proposed rule); CFTC Proposal, 77

FR at 8344 n.107.

Further, a few commenters suggested that the exemption should only be available for trading on an organized trading facility. This type of limitation would require significant and widespread market structure changes (with associated systems and infrastructure costs) in a relatively short period of time, as market making in certain assets is primarily or wholly conducted in the OTC market, and organized trading platforms may not currently exist for these assets. The Agencies do not believe that the costs of such market structure changes would be warranted for purposes of this rule. 752 As discussed above, a number of commenters expressed concern about the potential market impacts of the perceived restrictions on market making under the proposed rule, particularly with respect to less liquid markets, such as the corporate

bond market. See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; Wellington;
BlackRock; ICI.

753 Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871 (stating that

‘‘bona fide market making-related activity may include taking positions in securities in anticipation of customer demand, so long as any anticipatory buying or selling activity is reasonable and related to clear, demonstrable trading interest of clients, customers, or counterparties’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356–8357; see also Morgan Stanley (requesting certain revisions to more closely
track the statute); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

754 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii); infra Part

VI.A.3.c.2.c.

755 See BoA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

756 For example, some commenters suggested that

the final rule allow market makers to make individualized assessments of anticipated customer demand, based on their expertise and experience, and account for differences between liquid and less liquid markets. See Chamber (Feb. 2012); ISDA
(Feb. 2012). The final rule allows such assessments,

Continued A trading desk’s routine presence in the market for a particular type of
financial instrument would not, on its own, be sufficient grounds for relying on the market-making exemption. This is because the frequency at which a trading desk is active in a particular
market would not, on its own, distinguish between permitted market making-related activity and impermissible proprietary trading. In response to comments, the final rule provides that a trading desk also must be willing and available to quote, buy and sell, or otherwise enter into long and short positions in the relevant type(s) of financial instruments for its own account in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout market cycles. 744 Importantly, a trading

desk would not meet the terms of this requirement if it provides wide quotations relative to prevailing market conditions and is not engaged in other activity that evidences a willingness or availability to provide intermediation

services. 745 Under these circumstances, a trading desk would not be standing ready to purchase and sell because it is not genuinely quoting or trading with

customers.

In the context of this requirement, ‘‘commercially reasonable amounts’’ means that the desk generally must be willing to quote and trade in sizes requested by other market participants. 746 For trading desks that engage in block trading, this would include block trades requested by customers, and this language is not meant to restrict a trading desk from acting as a block positioner. Further, a trading desk must act as a market maker on an appropriate basis throughout market cycles and not only when it is

most favorable for it to do so. 747 For example, a trading desk should be facilitating customer needs in both upward and downward moving markets.

As discussed further in Part
VI.A.3.c.3., the financial instruments the trading desk stands ready to buy and sell must be identified in the trading desk’s compliance program. 748 Certain requirements in the final exemption apply to the amount, types, and risks of

these financial instruments that atrading desk can hold in its marketmaker inventory, including the near term customer demand requirement 749

and the need to have certain risk and inventory limits. 750

In response to the proposed requirement that a trading desk or other organizational unit hold itself out, some commenters requested that the Agencieslimit the availability of the marketmaking exemption to trading in particular asset classes or trading on particular venues (e.g., organized trading platforms). The Agencies are notlimiting the availability of the marketmaking exemption in the manner requested by these commenters. 751

Provided there is customer demand for liquidity in a type of financial instrument, the Agencies do not believe the availability of the market-making exemption should depend on the liquidity of that type of financial instrument or the ability to trade such instruments on an organized trading platform. The Agencies see no basis in the statutory text for either approach and believe that the likely harms to investors seeking to trade affected instruments (e.g., reduced ability to purchase or sell a particular instrument, potentially higher transaction costs) and market quality (e.g., reduced liquidity)

that would arise under such an approach would not be justified, 752 particularly in light of the minimal benefits that might result from restricting or eliminating a banking entity’s ability to hold less liquid assetsin connection with its market makingrelated activities. The Agencies believe

these commenters’ concerns are adequately addressed by the final rule’s requirements in the market-making exemption that are designed to ensure that a trading desk cannot hold risk in excess of what is appropriate to provide intermediation services designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties.

In response to comments on the proposed interpretation regarding anticipatory position-taking, 753 the Agencies note that the near term demand requirement in the final rule addresses when a trading desk may take positions in anticipation of reasonably expected near term customer

demand. 754 The Agencies believe this approach is generally consistent with the comments the Agencies received on

this issue. 755 In addition, the Agencies note that modifications to the proposed near term demand requirement in the

final rule also address commenters

concerns on this issue. 756


### 5870 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

based on historical customer demand and other relevant factors, and recognizes that near term demand may differ based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for a particular type of

financial instrument. See infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.iii.

757 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii).

758 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8357.

759 See id. 760 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871–68872; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8357.

761 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.a.

762 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Flynn & Fusselman; Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

763 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley
& Levin (Feb. 2012).

764 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); ACLI (Feb. 2012); MetLife; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; CIEBA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); SSgA (Feb. 2012); IAA (stating that the proposed requirement is too subjective and would be difficult to administer in a range of scenarios); Barclays; Prof. Duffie.

765 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); T. Rowe Price; CIEBA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Barclays; Wellington; MetLife; Chamber (Feb. 2012);
RBC; Prof. Duffie; ICI (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies respond to these

comments in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c., infra. For a discussion of comments regarding inventory management activity conducted in connection with market making, see Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.vi., infra.

766 See, e.g., ACLI (Feb. 2012); MetLife; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation (noting that a market maker may need to hold significant inventory to accommodate potential block trade requests). Two

of these commenters stated that a market maker may provide a worse price or may be unwilling to intermediate a large customer position if the market maker has to determine whether holding such position will meet the near term demand requirement, particularly if the market maker would be required to sell the block position over a short period of time. See ACLI (Feb. 2012); MetLife.

These comments are addressed in Part

VI.A.3.c.2.c.iii., infra. 767 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.a.

768 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). Another commenter suggested that the Agencies ‘‘establish clear criteria that reflect appropriate revenue from changes in the bid-ask spread,’’ noting that a legitimate market maker should be both selling and buying in a rising market (or, likewise, in a declining market). Public Citizen.

769 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); ICI Global; Vanguard; SSgA (Feb. 2012); see also infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.viii. (discussing comments on whether arbitrage trading should be permitted under the market-making exemption under certain
circumstances).

770 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC. One of these commenters agreed, however, that a trading desk that is ‘‘wholly’’ engaged in trading that is unrelated to customer demand should not qualify for the proposed market-making exemption. See Goldman (Prop. Trading). 2. Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

a. Proposed Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

Consistent with the statute, the proposed rule required that the trading desk or other organizational unit’s market making-related activities be, with respect to the financial instrument, designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. 757 This requirement is intended to prevent a trading desk from taking a speculative proprietary position that is unrelated to customer needs as part of the desk’s purported market making-related

activities. 758

In the proposal, the Agencies stated that a banking entity’s expectations of

near term customer demand should generally be based on the unique customer base of the banking entity’s specific market-making business lines

and the near term demand of those customers based on particular factors, beyond a general expectation of price appreciation. The Agencies further stated that they would not expect the activities of a trading desk or other organizational unit to qualify for the market-making exemption if the trading desk or other organizational unit is engaged wholly or principally in trading that is not in response to, or driven by, customer demands, regardless of whether those activities promote price transparency or liquidity. The proposal stated that, for example, a trading desk or other organizational unit of a banking entity that is engaged wholly or principally in arbitrage trading with

non-customers would not meet theterms of the proposed rule’s marketmaking exemption. 759

With respect to market making in a security that is executed on an exchange or other organized trading facility, the proposal provided that a market maker’s activities are generally consistent with reasonably expected near term customer

demand when such activities involve passively providing liquidity by submitting resting orders that interact

with the orders of others in a nondirectional or market-neutral trading strategy and the market maker is registered, if the exchange or organized trading facility registers market makers. Under the proposal, activities on an exchange or other organized trading facility that primarily take liquidity, rather than provide liquidity, would not qualify for the market-making exemption, even if conducted by a registered market maker. 760

b. Comments Regarding the Proposed

Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

As noted above, the proposed near term customer demand requirement would implement language found in the statute’s market-making exemption. 761 Some commenters expressed general support for this requirement. 762 For example, these commenters emphasized that the proposed near term demand requirement is an important component that restricts disguised position-taking or market making in illiquid markets. 763 Several other commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement

is too restrictive 764 because, for example, it may impede a market maker’s ability to build or retain inventory 765 or may impact a market maker’s willingness to engage in block trading. 766 Comments on particular aspects of this proposed requirement are discussed below, including the proposed interpretation of this requirement in the proposal, the requirement’s potential impact on market maker inventory, potential

differences in this standard across asset classes, whether it is possible to predict
near term customer demand, and
whether the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ or ‘‘counterparty’’ should be defined for purposes of the exemption.

i. The Proposed Guidance for Determining Compliance With the Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

As discussed in more detail above, the proposal set forth proposed guidance on how a banking entity may comply with the proposed near term customer demand requirement. 767 With respect to the language indicating that a banking entity’s determination of near term customer demand should generally be based on the unique customer base of a specific market-making business line (and not merely an expectation of future price appreciation), one commenter stated that it is unclear how a banking entity would be able to make such

determinations in markets where trades occur infrequently and customer demand is hard to predict. 768

Several commenters expressed concern about the proposal’s statement that a trading desk or other organizational unit engaged wholly or principally in trading that is not in response to, or driven by, customer demands (e.g., arbitrage trading with non-customers) would not qualify for the exemption, regardless of whether the activities promote price transparency or liquidity. 769 In particular, commenters stated that it would be difficult for a market-making business to try to divide its activities that are in response to customer demand (e.g., customer intermediation and hedging) from activities that promote price transparency and liquidity (e.g., interdealer trading to test market depth or arbitrage trading) in order to determine their proportionality. 770 Another commenter stated that, as a matter of organizational efficiency, firms will often restrict arbitrage trading


### 5871 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

771 See JPMC.

772 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871–68,872; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8357.

773 See, e.g., NYSE Euronext; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC. Comments on proposed Appendix B are
discussed further in Part VI.A.3.c.8.b., infra. This

issue is addressed in note 944 and its accompanying text, infra.

774 Some commenters stated that market makers may need to use market or marketable limit orders to build inventory in anticipation of customer demand or in connection with positioning a block

trade for a customer. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading). Two of these commenters noted that these order types may be needed to dispose of positions taken into inventory as part of market making. See RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

775 See NYSE Euronext.

776 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

777 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

778 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

779 See NYSE Euronext; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Occupy. See also infra notes 945 to 946 and accompanying text (addressing these comments). 780 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that trading units may currently register as market makers with particular, primary exchangeson which they trade, but will serve in a marketmaking capacity on other trading venues from time to time); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (noting that there are more than 12 exchanges and 40 alternative trading systems currently trading U.S. equities).

781 See Occupy. In the alternative, this commenter would require all market making to be performed on an exchange or organized trading facility. See id.

782 See NYSE Euronext (recognizing that registration status is not necessarily conclusive of engaging in market making-related activities);

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that to the extent a trading unit is registered on a particular exchange or organized trading facility for any type of financial instrument, all of its activities on that exchange or organized trading facility should be presumed to be market making); Goldman (Prop. Trading). See also infra note 945 (responding to these comments). Two commenters noted that certain exchange rules may require

market makers to deal for their own account under

certain circumstances in order to maintain fair and orderly markets. See NYSE Euronext (discussing NYSE rules); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (discussing NYSE and CBOE rules). For example, according to these commenters, NYSE Rule 104(f)(ii) requires a market maker to maintain fair and orderly markets, which may involve dealing for their own account when there is a lack of price continuity, lack of depth, or if a disparity between supply and demand exists or is reasonably anticipated. See id.

783 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). This commenter further stated that trading activities of exchange market makers may be particularly difficult to evaluate with customer-facing metrics (because ‘‘specialist’’ market makers may not have ‘‘customers’’), so conferring a positive presumption of compliance on such market makers would ensure that they can continue to contribute to liquidity,

which benefits customers. This commenter noted that, for example, NYSE designated market makers (‘‘DMMs’’) are generally prohibited from dealing with customers and companies must ‘‘wall off’’ any trading units that act as DMMs. See id. (citing NYSE
Rule 98).

784 See id. (stating that spread-related metrics, such as Spread Profit and Loss, may be useful for this purpose).

785 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); T. Rowe Price; CIEBA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Barclays; Wellington; MetLife; Chamber (Feb. 2012);
RBC; Prof. Duffie; ICI (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). These concerns are addressed

in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c., infra.

786 See, e.g., SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); T.
Rowe Price; CIEBA; ICI (Feb. 2012); RBC.

787 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012).

788 See Prof. Duffie. However, another commenter stated that a legitimate market maker should respond to customer demand rather than initiate transactions, which is indicative of prohibited proprietary trading. See Public Citizen. strategies to certain specific individual traders within the market-making organization, who may sometimes be referred to as a ‘‘desk,’’ and expressed concern that this would be prohibited

under the rule. 771

In response to the proposed interpretation regarding market making on an exchange or other organized trading facility (and certain similar language in proposed Appendix B), 772

several commenters indicated that the reference to passive submission of resting orders may be too restrictive and provided examples of scenarios where market makers may need to use market

or marketable limit orders. 773 For example, many of these commenters stated that market makers may need to

enter market or marketable limit orders to: (i) Build or reduce inventory; 774 (ii)

address order imbalances on an exchange by, for example, using market orders to lessen volatility and restorepricing equilibrium; (iii) hedge marketmaking positions; (iv) create markets; 775 (v) test the depth of the markets; (vi) ensure that ETFs, American depositary receipts (‘‘ADRs’’), options, and other instruments remain appropriately priced; 776 and (vii) respond to movements in prices in the markets. 777

Two commenters noted that distinctions

between limit and market or marketable limit orders may not be workable in the international context, where exchanges may not use the same order types as U.S. trading facilities. 778

A few commenters also addressed the proposed use of a market maker’s exchange registration status as part of the analysis. 779 Two commenters stated that the proposed rule should not require a market maker to be registered with an exchange to qualify for the proposed market-making exemption. According to these commenters, there are a large number of exchanges and organized trading facilities on which market makers may need to trade to maintain liquidity across the markets and to provide customers with favorable prices. These commenters indicated that any restrictions or burdens on such trading may decrease liquidity or make it harder to provide customers with the best price for their trade. 780 One commenter, however, stated that the exchange registration requirement is reasonable and further supported adding a requirement that traders

demonstrate adherence to the same or

commensurate standards in markets where registration is not possible. 781

Some commenters recommended certain modifications to the proposed analysis. For example, a few commenters requested that the rule presume that a trading unit is engaged in permitted market making-related activity if it is registered as a market maker on a particular exchange or organized trading facility. 782 In support of this recommendation, one commenter represented that it would be warranted because registered market makers directly contribute to maintaining liquid and orderly markets and are subject to extensive regulatory requirements in that capacity. 783 Another commenter suggested that the Agencies instead use metrics to compare, in the aggregate and over time, the liquidity that a market maker makes rather than takes as part of

a broader consideration of the marketmaking character of the relevant trading activity. 784

ii. Potential Inventory Restrictions and

Differences Across Asset Classes

A number of commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement may unduly restrict a market maker’s ability to manage its inventory. 785

Several of these commenters stated that limitations on inventory would be especially problematic for market making in less liquid markets, like the
fixed-income market, where customer

demand is more intermittent and positions may need to be held for a longer period of time. 786 Some commenters stated that the Agencies’ proposed interpretation of this requirement would restrict a market maker’s inventory in a manner that is

inconsistent with the statute. These

commenters indicated that the ‘‘designed’’ and ‘‘reasonably expected’’ language of the statute seem to recognize that market makers must anticipate customer requests and accumulate sufficient inventory to meet those reasonably expected demands. 787 In addition, one commenter represented

that a market maker must have wide latitude and incentives for initiating trades, rather than merely reacting to customer requests for quotes, to properly risk manage its positions or to prepare for anticipated customer demand or supply. 788 Many commenters requested certain modifications to the proposed requirement to limit its impact on


### 5872 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

789 See Credit Suisse (Seidel) (suggesting that the rule allow market makers to build inventory in products where they believe customer demand will exist, regardless of whether the inventory can be tied to a particular customer in the near term or to historical trends in customer demand); Barclays (recommending the rule require that ‘‘the market making-related activity is conducted by each trading unit such that its activities (including the maintenance of inventory) are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties consistent with the market and trading patterns of the relevant product, and consistent with the reasonable judgment of the banking entity where such demand cannot be determined with reasonable accuracy’’); CIEBA. In addition, some commenters suggested an interpretation that would provide greater discretion

to market makers to enter into trades based on factors such as experience and expertise dealing in the market and market exigencies. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012). Two commenters suggested that the proposed requirement should be interpreted to permit market-making activity as it currently exists. See MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012). One commenter requested that the proposed requirement be moved to Appendix B of the rule to provide greater flexibility to consider facts and circumstances of a particular activity. See JPMC.

790 See CIEBA; Morgan Stanley; RBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Alfred Brock. The Agencies respond to
these comments in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.ii., infra.

791 See ICI (Feb. 2012); CIEBA (stating that, absent a different interpretation for illiquid instruments, market makers will err on the side of holding less inventory to avoid sanctions for violating the rule);

RBC.

792 See Morgan Stanley.

793 See Wellington; MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); FTN; RBC; Alfred

Brock. These comments are addressed in Part

VI.A.3.c.2.c.iii., infra. 794 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); FTN.

795 See FTN. The commenter further indicated that errors in estimating customer demand are managed through kick-out rules and oversight by risk managers and committees, with latitude in decisions being closely related to expected or empirical costs of hedging positions until they result in trading with counterparties. See id.

796 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that banking entities should be required to collect inventory data, evaluate the data, develop policies on how to handle particular positions, and make regular adjustments to ensure a turnover of assets

commensurate with near term demand of customers). This commenter also suggested that the rule specify the types of inventory metrics that should be collected and suggested that the rate of inventory turnover would be helpful. See id.

797 See MetLife; Chamber (Feb. 2012); RBC; CIEBA; Wellington; ICI (Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock.
This issue is addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.iii., infra. 798 See ICI (Feb. 2012); CIEBA; RBC; Wellington;

Invesco.

799 See CIEBA.

800 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8439. More specifically, Appendix B stated: ‘‘In the context of market making in a security that is executed on an organized trading facility or an exchange, a ‘customer’ is any person on behalf of whom a buy or sell order has been submitted by a broker-dealer or any other market participant. In the context of market making in a [financial instrument] in an OTC market, a ‘customer’ generally would be a market participant that makes use of the market maker’s intermediation services, either by requesting such services or entering into a continuing relationship with the market maker with respect to such services.’’ Id. On this last point, the proposal elaborated that in certain cases, depending
on the conventions of the relevant market (e.g., the OTC derivatives market), such a ‘‘customer’’ may consider itself or refer to itself more generally as a
‘‘counterparty.’’ See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960 n.2; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8439 n.2.

801 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68874; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8359. In particular, Question 99
states: ‘‘Should the terms ‘client,’ ‘customer,’ or ‘counterparty’ be defined for purposes of the market making exemption? If so, how should these terms be defined? For example, would an appropriate definition of ‘customer’ be: (i) A continuing relationship in which the banking entity provides one or more financial products or services prior to
the time of the transaction; (ii) a direct and substantive relationship between the banking entity and a prospective customer prior to the transaction; (iii) a relationship initiated by the banking entity to a prospective customer to induce transactions; or (iv) a relationship initiated by the prospective customer with a view to engaging in transactions?’’

Id.

802 Comments on this issue are addressed in Part

VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra. market maker inventory. 789 Commenters’ views on the importance of permitting inventory management activity in connection with market making are discussed below in Part

VI.A.3.c.2.b.vi.

Several commenters requested that the Agencies recognize that near term customer demand may vary across

different markets and asset classes and implement this requirement flexibly. 790 In particular, many of these commenters emphasized that the concept of ‘‘near

term demand’’ should be different for less liquid markets, where transactions may occur infrequently, and for liquid
markets, where transactions occur more

often. 791 One commenter requested that the Agencies add the phrase ‘‘based on

the characteristics of the relevant market

and asset class’’ to the end of the requirement to explicitly acknowledge

these differences. 792

iii. Predicting Near Term Customer

Demand

Commenters provided views on whether and, if so how, a banking entity may be able to predict near term customer demand for purposes of the proposed requirement. 793 For example, two commenters suggested ways in which a banking entity could predict

near term customer demand. 794 One of

these commenters indicated that banking entities should be able to utilize current risk management tools to predict near term customer demand, although these tools may need to be adapted to comply with the rule’s requirements. According to this commenter, dealers commonly assess the following factors across product lines, which can relate to expected customer demand: (i) Recent
volumes and customer trends; (ii) trading patterns of specific customers; (iii) analysis of whether the firm has an ability to win new customer business; (iv) comparison of the current market conditions to prior similar periods; (v) liquidity of large investors; and (vi) the

schedule of maturities in customers’ existing positions. 795 Another

commenter stated that the

reasonableness of a market maker’s inventory can be measured by looking to the specifics of the particular market, the size of the customer base being served, and expected customer demand, which banking entities should be required to take into account in both their inventory practices and policies

and their actual inventories. This

commenter recommended that the rule permit a banking entity to assume a position under the market-making exemption if it can demonstrate a track record or reasonable expectation that it can dispose of a position in the near

term. 796

Some commenters, however, emphasized that reasonably expected

near term customer demand cannot always be accurately predicted. 797 Several of these commenters requested the Agencies clarify that banking entities will not be subject to regulatory sanctions if reasonably anticipated near

term customer demand does not materialize. 798 One commenter further noted that a banking entity entering a new market, or gaining or losing customers, may need greater flexibility in applying the near term demand requirement because its anticipated demand may fluctuate. 799

iv. Potential Definitions of ‘‘Client,’’ ‘‘Customer,’’ or ‘‘Counterparty’’

Appendix B of the proposal discussed the proposed meaning of the term ‘‘customer’’ in the context of permitted market making-related activity. 800 In addition, the proposal inquired whether
the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ or ‘‘counterparty’’ should be defined in the rule for purposes of the market-making exemption. 801 Commenters expressed varying views on the proposed interpretations in the proposal and on

whether these terms should be defined

in the final rule. 802

With respect to the proposed interpretations of the term ‘‘customer’’ in Appendix B, one commenter agreed with the proposed interpretations and expressed the belief that the interpretations will allow interdealer market making where brokers or other
dealers act as customers. However, this commenter also requested that the Agencies expressly incorporate


### 5873 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

803 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

See also Credit Suisse (Seidel); RBC (requesting that the Agencies recognize ‘‘wholesale’’ market making as permissible and representing that ‘‘[i]t is irrelevant to an investor whether market liquidity is provided by a broker-dealer with whom the
investor maintains a customer account, or whether

that broker-dealer looks to another dealer for market liquidity’’).

804 See Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

805 See FTN; ISDA (Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock.

806 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public

Citizen.

807 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen. One of these commenters also requested that the Agencies remove the terms ‘‘client’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ from the proposed near term demand requirement. See Occupy.

808 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public

Citizen. These commenters stated that other banking entities should never be ‘‘customers’’ under

the rule. See id. In addition, one of these commenters would further prevent a banking entity’s employees and covered funds from being

‘‘customers’’ under the rule. See AFR et al. (Feb.
2012).

809 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (providing a similar
definition for the term ‘‘client’’ as well); Public

Citizen.

810 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen. See

also Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (stating that a banking entity’s activities that involve attempting

to sell clients financial instruments that it originated, rather than facilitating a secondary market for client trades in previously existing financial products, should be analyzed under the underwriting exemption, not the market-making exemption; in addition, compiling inventory of financial instruments that the bank originated should be viewed as proprietary trading).

811 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

812 See Credit Suisse (Seidel) (stating that ‘‘customer’’ should be explicitly defined to include any counterparty to whom a banking entity is providing liquidity); ISDA (Feb. 2012) (recommending that, if the Agencies decide to define these terms, a ‘‘counterparty’’ should be defined as the entity on the other side of a
transaction, and the terms ‘‘client’’ and ‘‘customer’’ should not be interpreted to require a relationship beyond the isolated provision of a transaction); Japanese Bankers Ass’n. (requesting that it be clearly noted that interbank participants can be
customers for interbank market makers).

813 See ISDA (Feb. 2012). This commenter’s primary position was that further definitions are not required and could create additional and unnecessary complexity. See id.

814 See, e.g., JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); MetLife;
Credit Suisse (Seidel); BoA; ACLI (Feb. 2012); RBC;

AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). A few commenters noted that the proposed rule would permit a certain amount of interdealer trading. See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (citing statements in the proposal providing that a market maker’s ‘‘customers’’ vary depending

on the asset class and market in which intermediation services are provided and interpreting such statements as allowing interdealer market making where brokers or other dealers act as ‘‘customers’’ within the proposed construct); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (stating that interdealer trading related to hedging or exiting a customer position would be permitted, but expressing concern that requiring each banking entity to justify each of its interdealer trades as being related to one

of its own customers would be burdensome and

would reduce the effectiveness of the interdealer market). Commenters’ concerns regarding interdealer trading are addressed in Part

VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra.

815 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.8.

816 See, e.g., JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (recognizing that the proposed rule did not include specific limits on interdealer trading, but expressing concern that explicit or implicit limits could be established by supervisors during or after the conformance period). 817 See MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC;
BoA; ACLI (Feb. 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

818 See RBC (suggesting that explicitly incorporating liquidity provision to other brokers and dealers in the market-making exemption would be consistent with the statute’s reference to meeting the needs of ‘‘counterparties,’’ in addition to the
needs of clients and customers); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (recognizing that the ability to manage inventory through interdealer transactions should be accommodated in the rule, but recommending that this activity be conditioned on a market maker having an appropriate level of inventory after an interdealer transaction); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (representing that the Agencies could evaluate and monitor the amount of interdealer trading that is consistent with a particular trading unit’s market making-related or hedging activity through the customer-facing activity category of metrics); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (recommending removal or modification of any metrics or principles that would indicate that interdealer trading is not permitted).

819 See Prof. Duffie; MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012);
BDA (Feb. 2012).

820 See Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman
(Feb. 2012); MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012). See also Thakor Study (stating that, when a market maker provides immediacy to a customer, it relies on being able to unwind its positions at opportune times by trading with other market makers, who may have knowledge about impending orders from their own customers that may induce them to trade
with the market maker).

821 See MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

822 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb.
2012). See also Prof. Duffie (stating that a market maker acquiring a position from a customer may wish to rebalance its inventory relatively quickly through the interdealer network, which is often more efficient than requesting immediacy from another customer or waiting for another customer who wants to take the opposite side of the trade).

823 See Chamber (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). providing liquidity to other brokers and

dealers into the rule text. 803 Another commenter similarly stated that instead of focusing solely on customer demand,

the rule should be clarified to reflect

that demand can come from other

dealers or future customers. 804

In response to the proposal’s question
about whether the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ should
be further defined, a few commenters

stated that that the terms should not be

defined in the rule. 805 Other

commenters indicated that further

definition of these terms would be appropriate. 806 Some of these commenters suggested that there should be greater limitations on who can be

considered a ‘‘customer’’ under the

rule. 807 These commenters generally

indicated that a ‘‘customer’’ should be a person or institution with whom the banking entity has a continuing, or a direct and substantive, relationship prior to the time of the transaction. 808 In the case of a new customer, some of these commenters suggested requiring a relationship initiated by the prospective customer with a view to engaging in

transactions. 809 A few commenters indicated that a party should not be
considered a client, customer, or counterparty if the banking entity: (i) Originates a financial product and then finds a counterparty to take the other
side of the transaction; 810 or (ii) engages in transactions driven by algorithmic trading strategies. 811 Three commenters requested more permissive definitions

of these terms. 812 According to one of
these commenters, because these terms are listed in the disjunctive in the
statute, the broadest term—a ‘‘counterparty’’—should prevail. 813

v. Interdealer Trading and Trading for Price Discovery or To Test Market Depth

With respect to interdealer trading, many commenters expressed concern that the proposed rule could be interpreted to restrict a market maker’s ability to engage in interdealer trading. 814 As a general matter,

commenters attributed these concerns to statements in proposed Appendix B 815 or to the Customer-Facing Trade Ratio metric in proposed Appendix A. 816 A number of commenters requested that the rule be modified to clearly recognize interdealer trading as a component of permitted market making-related activity 817 and suggested ways in which this could be accomplished (e.g., through a definition of ‘‘customer’’ or ‘‘counterparty’’). 818

Commenters emphasized that interdealer trading provides certain market benefits, including increased market liquidity; 819 more efficient matching of customer order flow; 820 greater hedging options to reduce
risks; 821 enhanced ability to accumulate inventory for current or near term
customer demand, work down concentrated positions arising from a
customer trade, or otherwise exit a position acquired from a customer; 822 and general price discovery among

dealers. 823 Regarding the impact of interdealer trading on a market maker’s ability to intermediate customer needs, one commenter studied the potential impact of interdealer trading limits—in combination with inventory limits—on trading in the U.S. corporate bond market. According to this commenter, if interdealer trading had been prohibited


### 5874 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

824 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (basing its finding on data from 2009). This commenter also represented that the natural level of interdealer volume in the U.S. corporate bond market made up 16 percent of total trading volume in 2010. See id.

825 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley.

See also BDA (Feb. 2012) (stating that if dealers in

the fixed-income market are not able to trade with other dealers to ‘‘cooperate with each other to provide adequate liquidity to the market as a whole,’’ an essential source of liquidity will be eliminated from the market and existing values of

fixed income securities will decline and become volatile, harming both investors who currently hold such positions and issuers, who will experience
increased interest costs).

826 See Chamber (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

827 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). One commenter provided the following example of such activity: if Security A and Security B have some price correlation but neither trades regularly, then a trader may execute a trade in Security A for price discovery purposes, using the price of Security A

to make an informed bid-ask market to a customer
in Security B. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012).

828 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012) (stating that this type of trading is necessary in more illiquid markets); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

829 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

830 See Chamber (Feb. 2012).

831 See id. 832 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). This commenter represented that market makers often make trades with other dealers to test the depth of the markets at particular price points and to understand where supply and demand exist (although such trading is not conducted exclusively with other dealers). This commenter stated that testing the depth of the market is necessary to provide accurate prices to customers, particularly when customers seeks to enter trades in amounts larger than the amounts offered by dealers who have sent indications to

inter-dealer brokers. See id.

833 See id.

834 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); MFA; RBC. Inventory management is
addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c., infra.

835 See, e.g., MFA (stating that it is critical for banking entities to continue to be able to maintain sufficient levels of inventory, which is dynamic in nature and requires some degree of flexibility in application); RBC (requesting that the Agencies explicitly acknowledge that, depending on market conditions or the characteristics of a particular security, it may be appropriate or necessary for a firm to maintain inventories over extended periods of time in the course of market making-related
activities).

836 See, e.g., RBC; NYSE Euronext; Fidelity. These commenters cited a colloquy in the Congressional Record between Senator Bayh and Senator Dodd, in which Senator Bayh stated: ‘‘With respect to [section 13 of the BHC Act], the conference report states that banking entities are not prohibited from purchasing and disposing of securities and other instruments in connection with underwriting or market-making activities, provided that activity does not exceed the reasonably expected near-term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. I want to clarify this language would allow banks to maintain an appropriate dealer inventory and residual risk positions, which are essential parts of the market-making function. Without that flexibility, market makers would not be able to provide liquidity to markets.’’ 156 Cong. Rec. S5906 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Bayh).

837 See, e.g., RBC.

838 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

839 See id.

840 See MFA.

841 See RBC.

842 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

843 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). As this commenter explained, some mutual funds and ETFs track major equity indices and, when the composition of an index changes (e.g., due to the addition or removal of a security or to rising or falling values of listed shares), an announcement is made and all funds tracking the index need to rebalance their portfolios. According to the commenter, banking entities may need to step in to provide liquidity for rebalances of less liquid indices because trades executed on the open market would substantially affect share prices. The

commenter estimated that if market makers are not able to provide direct liquidity for rebalance trades, investors tracking these indices could potentially pay incremental costs of $600 million to $1.8 billion every year. This commenter identified the proposed inventory metrics in Appendix A as potentially limiting a banking entity’s willingness or ability to facilitate index rebalance trades. See id.

Two other commenters also discussed the index rebalancing scenario. See Prof. Duffie; Thakor Study. Index rebalancing is addressed in note 931, infra. and a market maker’s inventory had been limited to the average daily
volume of the market as a whole, 69 percent of customer trades would have been prevented. 824 Some commenters stated that a banking entity would beless able or willing to provide marketmaking services to customers if it could not engage in interdealer trading. 825

As noted above, a few commenters stated that market makers may use interdealer trading for price discovery

purposes. 826 Some commenters separately discussed the importance of this activity and requested that, when

conducted in connection with marketmaking activity, trading for price discovery be considered permitted market making-related activity under

the rule. 827 Commenters indicated that price discovery-related trading results in certain market benefits, including enhancing the accuracy of prices for

customers, 828 increasing price efficiency, preventing market instability, 829 improving market liquidity, and reducing overall costs for market participants. 830 As a converse,

one of these commenters stated that restrictions on such activity could result in market makers setting their prices too high, exposing them to significant riskand causing a reduction of marketmaking activity or widening of spreads

to offset the risk. 831 One commenter further requested that trading to test market depth likewise be permitted under the market-making exemption. 832 This commenter represented that the Agencies would be able to evaluate the extent to which trading for price discovery and market depth are consistent with market making-related activities for a particular market through a combination of customer-facing activity metrics, including the Inventory Risk Turnover metric, and knowledge of a banking entity’s trading business developed by regulators as part of the supervisory process. 833

vi. Inventory Management

Several commenters requested that the rule provide banking entities with greater discretion to manage their

inventories in connection with market making-related activity, including acquiring or disposing of positions in anticipation of customer demand. 834 Commenters represented that market makers need to be able to build, manage,

and maintain inventories to facilitate

customer demand. These commenters

further stated that the rule needs to provide some degree of flexibility for inventory management activities, as inventory needs may differ based on

market conditions or the characteristics of a particular instrument. 835 A few commenters cited legislative history in support of allowing banking entities to hold and manage inventory in connection with market making-related

activities. 836 Several commenters noted benefits that are associated with a market maker’s ability to appropriately manage its inventory, including being able to meet reasonably anticipated future client, customer, or counterparty
demand; 837 accommodating customer transactions more quickly and at favorable prices; reducing near term price volatility (in the case of selling a customer block position); 838 helping maintain an orderly market and provide the best price to customers (in the case of accumulating long or short positions in anticipation of a large customer sale or purchase); 839 ensuring that markets continue to have sufficient liquidity; 840 fostering a two-way market; and establishing a market-making

presence. 841 Some commenters noted that market makers may need to accumulate inventory to meet customer demand for certain products or under certain trading scenarios, such as to create units of structured products (e.g., ETFs and asset-backed securities) 842 and in anticipation of an index

rebalance. 843

Commenters also expressed views with respect to how much discretion a banking entity should have to manage its inventory under the exemption and how to best monitor inventory levels. For example, one commenter

recommended that the rule allow market makers to build inventory in products where they believe customer


### 5875 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

844 See Credit Suisse (Seidel).

845 See CalPERS; Vanguard. These commenters represented that placing increasing capital requirements on aged inventory would ease the rule’s impact on investor liquidity, allow banking entities to internalize the cost of continuing to hold a position at the expense of its ability to take on new positions, and potentially decrease the possibility of a firm realizing a loss on a position by decreasing the time such position is held. See

id. One commenter noted that some banking entities already use this approach to manage risk on their market-making desks. See Vanguard. See also Capital Group (suggesting that one way to implement the statutory exemption would be to charge a trader or a trading desk for positions held on its balance sheet beyond set time periods and to increase the charge at set intervals). These
comments are addressed in note 923, infra.

846 See Goldman (Prop. Trading) (representing that the Inventory Risk Turnover metric will allow the Agencies to evaluate the length of time that a trading unit tends to hold risk positions in inventory and whether that holding time is consistent with market making-related activities in
the relevant market).

847 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ICI (stating that an AP may trade with the ETF issuer in different capacities—in connection with traditional market-making activity,
on behalf of customers, or for the AP’s own account); ICI Global (discussing non-U.S. ETFs specifically); Vanguard; SSgA (Feb. 2012). One commenter represented that an AP’s transactions in ETFs do not create risks associated with proprietary trading because, when an AP trades with an ETF issuer for its own account, the AP typically enters into an offsetting transaction in the underlying portfolio of securities, which cancels out investment risk and limits the AP’s exposure to the difference between the market price for ETF shares
and the ETF’s net asset value (‘‘NAV’’). See Vanguard.

With respect to market-making activity in an ETF, several commenters noted that market makers play an important role in maintaining price alignment by engaging in arbitrage transactions between the ETF shares and the shares of the underlying components. See, e.g., JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading) (making similar statement with respect to ADRs as well); SSgA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); RBC. AP and market maker activity in ETFs are
addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra.

848 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012) ICI Global; Vanguard; SSgA
(Feb. 2012).

849 See JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012);
ICI (Feb. 2012) ICI Global.

850 See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012) SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA.

851 See BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); ICI Global.

852 See BoA (stating that lending the ETF shares to an investor gives the investor a more efficient way to hedge its exposure to assets correlated with those underlying the ETF).

853 See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012).

854 See, e.g., Vanguard (noting that APs may not engage in market-making activity in the ETF and expressing concern that if AP activities are not separately permitted, banking entities may exit or not enter the ETF market); SSgA (Feb. 2012) (stating that APs are under no obligation to make markets in ETF shares and requiring such an obligation would discourage banking entities from acting as
APs); ICI (Feb. 2012).

855 See SSgA (Feb. 2012). This commenter further
stated that as of 2011, an estimated 3.5 million— or 3 percent—of U.S. households owned ETFs and, as of September 2011, ETFs represented assets of approximately $951 billion. See id.

856 See BoA; Vanguard (stating that this determination may be particularly difficult in the
case of a new ETF).

857 See BoA. This commenter noted that the proposed source of revenue requirement could be interpreted to prevent a banking entity acting as AP from entering into creation and redemption transactions, ‘‘seeding’’ an ETF, engaging in ‘‘create to lend’’ transactions, and performing secondary market making in an ETF because all of these activities require an AP to build an inventory— either in ETF shares or the underlying components—which often result in revenue attributable to price movements. See id.

858 Commenters noted that this language would restrict an AP from engaging in price arbitrage to

maintain efficient markets in ETFs. See Vanguard; RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.a. (discussing the proposal’s proposed interpretation regarding arbitrage trading).

859 See BoA; Vanguard (stating that this determination may be particularly difficult in the
case of a new ETF).

860 See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012).

861 See ICI (Feb. 2012) ICI Global. These commenters provided suggested rule text on this issue and suggested that the Agencies could require a banking entity’s compliance policies and internal controls to take a comprehensive approach to the entirety of an AP’s trading activity, which would facilitate easy monitoring of the activity to ensure compliance. See id.

862 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873 (question 91) (inquiring whether the proposed exemption should be modified to permit certain arbitrage trading activities engaged in by market makers that promote liquidity or price transparency but do not

Continued demand will exist, regardless of whether the inventory can be tied to a particular

customer in the near term or to

historical trends in customer

demand. 844 A few commenters suggested that the Agencies provide banking entities with greater discretion to accumulate inventory, but discourage market makers from holding inventory for long periods of time by imposing increasingly higher capital requirements on aged inventory. 845 One commenter represented that a trading unit’s inventory management practices could be monitored with the Inventory Risk Turnover metric, in conjunction with

other metrics. 846

vii. Acting as an Authorized Participant or Market Maker in Exchange-Traded

Funds

With respect to ETF trading, commenters generally requested clarification that a banking entity can serve as an authorized participant (‘‘AP’’) to an ETF issuer or can engage in ETF market making under the proposed exemption. 847 According to commenters, APs may engage in the following types of activities with respect to ETFs: (i) Trading directly with the

ETF issuer to create or redeem ETF shares, which involves trading in ETF shares and the underlying

components; 848 (ii) trading to maintain price alignment between the ETF shares and the underlying components; 849 (iii) traditional market-making activity; 850 (iv) ‘‘seeding’’ a new ETF by entering

into several initial creation transactions with an ETF issuer and holding the ETF shares, possibly for an extended period of time, until the ETF establishes regular trading and liquidity in the secondary
markets; 851 (v) ‘‘create to lend’’
transactions, where an AP enters a

creation transaction with the ETF issuer

and lends the ETF shares to an

investor; 852 and (vi) hedging. 853 A few commenters noted that an AP may not engage in traditional market-making activity in the relevant ETF and expressed concern that the proposed rule may limit a banking entity’s ability to act in an AP capacity. 854 One

commenter estimated that APs that are banking entities make up between 20 percent to 100 percent of creation and redemption activity for individual ETFs, with an average of approximately 35 percent of creation and redemption activity across all ETFs attributed to banking entities. This commenter expressed the view that, if the rule limits banking entities’ ability to serve
as APs, then individual investors’

investments in ETFs will become more expensive due to higher premiums and

discounts versus the ETF’s NAV. 855 A number of commenters stated that certain requirements of the proposed exemption may limit a banking entity’s ability to serve as AP to an ETF, including the proposed near term customer demand requirement, 856 the proposed source of revenue requirement, 857 and language in the proposal regarding arbitrage trading. 858 With respect to the proposed near term customer demand requirement, a few commenters noted that this requirement could prevent an AP from building inventory to assemble creation units. 859 Two other commenters expressed the

view that the ETF issuer would be the banking entity’s ‘‘counterparty’’ when the banking entity trades directly with the ETF issuer, so this trading and inventory accumulation would meet the terms of the proposed requirement. 860 To permit banking entities to act as APs, two commenters suggested that trading in the capacity of an AP should bedeemed permitted market makingrelated activity, regardless of whether the AP is acting as a traditional market

maker. 861

viii. Arbitrage or Other Activities That Promote Price Transparency and Liquidity

In response to a question in the proposal, 862 a number of commenters


### 5876 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

service client, customer, or counterparty demand); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8359.

863 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); FTN; RBC; ISDA (Feb. 2012). Arbitrage trading is further discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra.

864 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

865 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC.

866 See Credit Suisse (Seidel).

867 See RBC.

868 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

869 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); RBC.

870 See RBC.

871 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; FTN; ISDA (Feb. 2012) (stating that arbitrage activities often yield positions that are ultimately put to use in serving customer demand and representing that the process of consistently trading makes a dealer ready and available to serve customers on a competitive basis).

872 See JPMC (stating that firms commonly organize their market-making activities so that risks delivered to client-facing desks are aggregated and transferred by means of internal transactions to a single utility desk (which hedges all of the risks in the aggregate), and this may optically bear some characteristics of arbitrage, although the commenter requested that such activity be recognized as permitted market making-related activity under the rule); ISDA (Feb. 2012) (stating that in some swaps markets, dealers hedge through multiple instruments, which can give an impression of arbitrage in a function that is risk reducing; for example, a dealer in a broad index equity swap may simultaneously hedge in baskets of stocks, futures, and ETFs). But see Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (‘‘When banks use complex hedging techniques or otherwise engage in trading that is suggestive of arbitrage, regulators should require them to provide evidence and analysis demonstrating what risk is being reduced.’’).

873 See FTN.

874 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading). One of these commenters stated that the customer-facing activity category of metrics, as well as other metrics, would be available to evaluate whether the trading unit is engaged in a directly customer-facing business and

the extent to which its activities are consistent with the market-making exemption. See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

875 See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz. See also AFR et

al. (Feb. 2012) (noting that arbitrage, spread, or carry trades are a classic type of proprietary trade).

876 See Occupy.

877 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that permitted activities should include trading necessary to meet the relevant jurisdiction’s primary dealer and other requirements); JPMC (indicating that the exemption

should cover all of a firm’s activities that are necessary or reasonably incidental to its acting as a primary dealer in a foreign government’s debt securities); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; IIB/EBF. See infra notes 905 to 906 and accompanying text (addressing these comments).

878 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

879 See Banco de Me  ́xico.

880 See JPMC; Banco de Me  ́xico. These commenters stated that a primary dealer is required to assume positions in foreign sovereign debt even when near term customer demand is unpredictable.

See id.

881 See Banco de Me  ́xico (stating that primary dealers need to be able to profit from their positions in sovereign debt, including by holding significant positions in anticipation of future price movements, so that the primary dealer business is financially attractive); IIB/EBF (stating that primary dealers may actively seek to profit from price and interest rate movements based on their debt holdings,which governments support as providing muchneeded liquidity for securities that are otherwise purchased largely pursuant to buy-and-hold strategies of institutional investors and other entities seeking safe returns and liquidity buffers).

882 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

883 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

884 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). This
issue is addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.iii., supra, and Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.iii., infra. stated that certain types of arbitrage activity should be permitted under the market-making exemption. 863 For example, some commenters stated that a banking entity’s arbitrage activity should be considered market making to the extent the activity is driven by creating markets for customers tied to the price differential (e.g., ‘‘box’’ strategies, ‘‘calendar spreads,’’ merger arbitrage, ‘‘Cash and Carry,’’ or basis trading) 864 or to the extent that demand is predicated on specific price relationships between instruments (e.g., ETFs, ADRs) that market makers must

maintain. 865 Similarly, another commenter suggested that arbitrage activity that aligns prices should be permitted, such as index arbitrage, ETF arbitrage, and event arbitrage. 866 One commenter noted that many markets, such as futures and options markets, rely on arbitrage activities of market makers for liquidity purposes and to maintain convergence with underlying instruments for cash-settled options, futures, and index-based products. 867 Commenters stated that arbitrage trading provides certain market benefits, including enhanced price

transparency, 868 increased market efficiency, 869 greater market liquidity, 870 and general benefits to

customers. 871 A few commenters noted that certain types of hedging activity may appear to have characteristics of arbitrage trading. 872 Commenters suggested certain methods for permitting and monitoring arbitrage trading under the exemption. For example, one commenter suggested a framework for permitting certain arbitrage within the market-making exemption, with requirements such as:(i) Common personnel with marketmaking activity; (ii) policies that cover the timing and appropriateness of arbitrage positions; (iii) time limits on arbitrage positions; and (iv) compensation that does not reward successful arbitrage, but instead pools any such revenues with market-making profits and losses. 873 A few commenters represented that, if permitted under the rule, the Agencies would be able to monitor arbitrage activities for patterns of impermissible proprietary trading through the use of metrics, as well as compliance and examination tools. 874

Other commenters stated that the exemption should not permit certain types of arbitrage. One commenter

stated that the rule should ensure that relative value and complex arbitrage strategies cannot be conducted. 875 Another commenter expressed the view that the market-making exemption should not permit any type of arbitrage

transactions. This commenter stated that, in the event that liquidity or transparency is inhibited by a lack of arbitrage trading, a market maker should

be able to find a customer who would

seek to benefit from it. 876

ix. Primary Dealer Activities

A number of commenters requested that the market-making exemption permit banking entities to meet their primary dealer obligations in foreign jurisdictions, particularly if trading in foreign sovereign debt is not separately exempted in the final rule. 877 According to commenters, a banking entity may be obligated to perform the following activities in its capacity as a primary dealer: undertaking to maintain an orderly market, preventing or correcting any price dislocations, 878 and bidding

on each issuance of the relevant jurisdiction’s sovereign debt. 879 Commenters expressed concern that a banking entity’s trading activity as primary dealer may not comply with the proposed near term customer demand requirement 880 or the proposed source of revenue requirement. 881 To address
the first issue, one commenter stated that the final rule should clarify that a banking entity acting as a primary dealer of foreign sovereign debt is engaged in primary dealer activity in response to the near term demands of the sovereign, which should be
considered a client, customer, or counterparty of the banking entity. 882 Another commenter suggested that the Agencies permit primary dealer activities through commentary stating that fulfilling primary dealer obligations

will not be included in determinations of whether the market-making exemption applies to a trading unit. 883

x. New or Bespoke Products or Customized Hedging Contracts

Several commenters indicated that the proposed exemption does not adequately address market making in new or bespoke products, including
structured, customer-driven transactions, and requested that the rule be modified to clearly permit such activity. 884 Many of these commenters


### 5877 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

885 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

886 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

887 See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

888 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

889 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

890 See Public Citizen.

891 The final rule includes certain refinements to the proposed standard, which would have required that the market making-related activities of the trading desk or other organizational unit that conducts the purchase or sale are, with respect to the financial instrument, designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. See proposed rule
§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii). 892 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii.; final rule
§ 75.4(b)(5). 893 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.3. (discussing the compliance program requirements); final rule
§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii).

894 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.i.

895 This language has been added to the final rule to respond to commenters’ concerns that the proposed near term demand requirement would be unworkable in less liquid markets or would otherwise restrict a market maker’s ability to hold and manage its inventory in less liquid markets. See

supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.ii. In addition, this provision is substantially similar to one commenter’s suggested approach of adding the phrase ‘‘based on

the characteristics of the relevant market and asset class’’ to the proposed requirement, but the Agencies have added more specificity about the

relevant characteristics that should be taken into

consideration. See Morgan Stanley.

896 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.3. emphasized the role such transactions play in helping customers hedge the unique risks they face. 885 Commenters stated that, as a result, limiting a banking entity’s ability to conduct such transactions would subject customers to increased risks and greater transaction

costs. 886 One commenter suggested that the Agencies explicitly state that a banking entity’s general willingness to engage in bespoke transactions is

sufficient to make it a market maker in unique products for purposes of the

rule. 887

Other commenters stated that banking entities should be limited in their ability to rely on the market-making exemption to conduct transactions in bespoke or

customized derivatives. 888 For example, one commenter suggested that a banking entity be required to disaggregate such derivatives into liquid risk elements and illiquid risk elements, with liquid riskelements qualifying for the marketmaking exemption and illiquid risk elements having to be conducted on a riskless principal basis under § 75.6(b)(1)(ii) of the proposed rule. According to this commenter, such an approach would not impact the end user

customer. 889 Another commenter stated that a banking entity making a market in bespoke instruments should be required

both to hold itself out in accordance with § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule and to demonstrate the purchase and

the sale of such an instrument. 890

c. Final Near Term Customer Demand Requirement

Consistent with the statute,§ 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the final rule’s marketmaking exemption requires that the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory be designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties,

based on certain market factors and analysis. 891 As discussed above in Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii., the trading desk’s market-maker inventory consists of positions in financial instruments in which the trading desk stands ready to purchase and sell consistent with the

final rule. 892 The final rule requires the

financial instruments to be identified in the trading desk’s compliance program. Thus, this requirement focuses on a trading desk’s positions in financial

instruments for which it acts as market maker. These positions of a trading desk are more directly related to the demands of customers than positions in financial instruments used for risk management purposes, but in which the trading desk

does not make a market. As noted above, a position or exposure that isincluded in a trading desk’s marketmaker inventory will remain in its market-maker inventory for as long as the position or exposure is managed by the trading desk. As a result, the trading

desk must continue to account for that position or exposure, together with other positions and exposures in its market-maker inventory, in determining whether the amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands

of customers.

While the near term customer demand requirement directly applies only to the trading desk’s market-maker inventory, this does not mean a trading desk may establish other positions, outside its market-maker inventory, that exceed what is needed to manage the risks ofthe trading desk’s market makingrelated activities and inventory. Instead, a trading desk must have limits on its market-maker inventory, the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk may use for risk management purposes, and its aggregate financial exposure that are based on the factors

set forth in the near term customer demand requirement, as well as other relevant considerations regarding the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities. A banking entity must establish, implement, maintain, and enforce a
limit structure, as well as other compliance program elements (e.g., those specifying the instruments a trading desk trades as a market maker or may use for risk management purposes and providing for specific risk management procedures), for each trading desk that are designed to prevent the trading desk from engaging in trading activity that is unrelated to making a market in a particular type of financial instrument or managing the risks associated with making a market in that type of financial instrument. 893

To clarify the application of this standard in response to comments, 894 the final rule provides two factors for assessing whether the amount, types,

and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. Specifically, the following must be

considered under the revised standard: (i) The liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of financial instrument(s), 895 and (ii) demonstrable analysis of historical customer demand, current inventory of
financial instruments, and market and other factors regarding the amount, types, and risks of or associated with positions in financial instruments in which the trading desk makes a market, including through block trades. Under the final rule, a banking entity must

account for these considerations when establishing risk and inventory limits for each trading desk. 896

For purposes of this provision, ‘‘demonstrable analysis’’ means that the analysis for determining the amount, types, and risks of financial instruments a trading desk may manage in its market-maker inventory, in accordance with the near term demand requirement,

must be based on factors that can be demonstrated in a way that makes the analysis reviewable. This may include, among other things, the normal trading records of the trading desk and market information that is readily available and retrievable. If the analysis cannot be supported by the banking entity’s books
and records and available market data,
on their own, then the other factors

utilized must be identified and documented and the analysis of those factors together with the facts gathered from the trading and market records must be identified in a way that makes it possible to test the analysis.


### 5878 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

897 As discussed further below, acquiring a position in a financial instrument in response to reasonably expected customer demand would not include creating a structured product for which
there is no current customer demand and, instead, soliciting customer demand during or after its

creation. See infra note 938 and accompanying text; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

898 The formation of structured finance products

and securitizations is discussed in detail in Part

VI.B.2.b. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

.

899 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(B), (C). 900 This natural hedge with futures would
introduce basis risk which, like other risks of the trading desk, must be managed within the desk’s

limits.

901 See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe
Price; CIEBA; ICI (Feb. 2012) RBC.

902 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public

Citizen. Importantly, a determination of whether a trading desk’s market-maker inventory is appropriate under this requirement will take into account reasonably expected near term customer demand, including historical levels of customer demand, expectations based
on market factors, and current demand. For example, at any particular time, a trading desk may acquire a position in a financial instrument in response to a customer’s request to sell the financial instrument or in response to reasonably expected customer buying interest for

such instrument in the near term. 897 In addition, as discussed below, this requirement is not intended to impede a trading desk’s ability to engage in certain market making-related activities

that are consistent with and needed to facilitate permissible trading with its clients, customers, or counterparties, such as inventory management and interdealer trading. These activities
must, however, be consistent with the analysis conducted under the final rule and the trading desk’s limits discussed

below. 898 Moreover, as explained below, the banking entity must also have in place escalation procedures to address, analyze, and document trades made in response to customer requests that would exceed one of a trading desk’s

limits.

The near term demand requirement is an ongoing requirement that applies to the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory. For instance, a trading desk may acquire exposures as a result of entering into market-making transactions with

customers that are within the desk’s market-marker inventory and financial exposure limits. Even if the trading desk is appropriately managing the risks ofits market-maker inventory, its marketmaker inventory still must be consistent with the analysis of the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, and counterparties and the liquidity, maturity and depth of the

market for the relevant instruments in the inventory. Moreover, the trading

desk must take action to ensure that its financial exposure does not exceed its financial exposure limits. 899 A trading desk may not maintain an exposure in its market-maker inventory, irrespective of customer demand, simply because the exposure is hedged and the resulting financial exposure is below the desk’s financial exposure limit. In addition, the amount, types, and risks of financialinstruments in a trading desk’s marketmaker inventory would not beconsistent with permitted marketmaking activities if, for example, the trading desk has a pattern or practice of retaining exposures in its market-maker inventory, while refusing to engage in

customer transactions when there is customer demand for those exposures at commercially reasonable prices.

The following is an example of the interplay between a trading desk’s market-maker inventory and financial exposure. An airline company customer may seek to hedge its long-term exposure to price fluctuations in jet fuel by asking a banking entity to create a structured ten-year, $1 billion jet fuel swap for which there is no liquid market. A trading desk that makes a market in energy swaps may service its customer’s needs by executing a custom jet fuel swap with the customer and holding the swap in its market-maker inventory, if the resulting transaction does not cause the trading desk to exceed its market-maker inventory limit on the applicable class of instrument, or the trading desk has received approval

to increase the limit in accordance with

the authorization and escalation procedures under paragraph(b)(2)(iii)(E). In keeping with the marketmaking exemption as provided in the final rule, the trading desk would be required to hedge the risk from this swap, either individually or as part of a set of aggregated positions, if the trade would result in a financial exposure that exceeds the desk’s financial exposure limits. The trading desk may hedge the risk of the swap, for example, by entering into one or more futures or swap positions that are identified as permissible hedging products, instruments, or exposures in the trading desk’s compliance program and that analysis, including correlation analysis as appropriate, indicates would demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate risks associated with the financial exposure from its market-making activities. Alternatively, if the trading desk also acts as a market
maker in crude oil futures, then the desk’s exposures arising from its market-making activities may naturally hedge the jet fuel swap (i.e., it may reduce its financial exposure levels resulting from such instruments). 900 The trading desk must continue to appropriately manage risks of its financial exposure over time in accordance with its financial exposure

limits.

As discussed above, several commenters expressed concern that the

near-term customer demand requirement is too restrictive and that it could impede a market maker’s ability to build or retain inventory, particularly in less liquid markets where demand is

intermittent. 901 Because customer demand in illiquid markets can be difficult to predict with precision, market-maker inventory may not closely track customer order flow. The Agencies acknowledge that market makers will face costs associated with demonstrating that market-maker inventory is designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of customers, as required by the statute

and the final rule because this is an analysis that banking entities may not currently undertake. However, the final

rule includes certain modifications to the proposed rule that are intended to reduce the negative impacts cited by
commenters, such as limitations on inventory management activity and potential restrictions on market making in less liquid instruments, which the Agencies believe should reduce the perceived burdens of the proposed near term demand requirement. For example, the final rule recognizes that liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market vary across asset classes. The Agencies expect that the express recognition of

these differences in the rule should avoid unduly impeding a market maker’s ability to build or retain inventory. More specifically, the Agencies recognize the relationship between market-maker inventory and customer order flow can vary across

asset classes and that an inflexible standard for demonstrating that inventory does not exceed reasonably expected near term demand could provide an incentive to stop making markets in illiquid asset classes.

i. Definition of ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’

In response to comments requesting further definition of the terms ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ for purposes of this standard, 902 the Agencies have defined these terms in the final rule. In particular, the final


### 5879 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

903 Final rule § 75.4(b)(3).

904 See final rule § 75.4(b)(3)(i). The Agencies are using a $50 billion threshold for these purposes in recognition that firms engaged in substantial trading activity do not typically act as customers to other market makers, while smaller regional firms may seek liquidity from larger firms as part of their market making-related activities.

905 See final rule § 75.4(b)(3)(i)(A), (B). In Appendix C of the proposed rule, a trading unit engaged in market making-related activities would have been required to describe how it identifies its customers for purposes of the Customer-Facing Trading Ratio, if applicable, including documentation explaining when, how, and why a broker-dealer, swap dealer, security-based swap dealer, or any other entity engaged in market making-related activities, or any affiliate thereof, is considered to be a customer of the trading unit. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68964. While the proposed approach would not have necessarily prevented any of these entities from being considered a customer of the trading desk, it would have required enhanced documentation and justification for treating any of these entities as a customer. The
final rule’s exclusion from the definition of client, customer, and counterparty is similar to the proposed approach, but is more narrowly focused on firms that have $50 billion or more trading assets and liabilities because, as noted above, the Agencies believe firms engaged in such substantial trading activity are less likely to act as customers to market makers than smaller regional firms. 906 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8439.

907 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading) (explaining generally how exchange-based market makers operate).

908 See ISDA (Feb. 2012). In addition, a number of commenters suggested that the rule should not limit broker-dealers from being customers of a

market maker. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); RBC; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

909 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public

Citizen. 910 A primary dealer is a firm that trades a sovereign government’s obligations directly with the sovereign (in many cases, with the sovereign’s
central bank) as well as with other customers through market making. The sovereign government may impose conditions on a primary dealer or require that it engage in certain trading in the relevant government obligations (e.g., participate in auctions for the government obligation or maintain a liquid secondary market in the government obligations). Further, a sovereign government may limit the number of primary dealers that are authorized to trade with the sovereign. A number of countries use a primary dealer system, including Australia, Brazil, Canada, China-Hong Kong, France, Germany, Greece, India, Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Mexico, Netherlands, Portugal, South Africa, South Korea, Spain, Turkey, the U.K., and

the U.S. See, e.g., Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). The Agencies note that this standard would similarly apply to the relationship between a banking entity and a sovereign that does not have a formal primary dealer system, provided the sovereign’s process functions like a primary dealer framework.

911 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). See also supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.ix. (discussing commenters’ concerns regarding primary dealer activity). Each suggestion regarding the treatment of primary dealer activity has not been incorporated into the

Continued rule defines ‘‘client,’’ ‘‘customer,’’ and ‘‘counterparty’’ as, on a collective or individual basis, ‘‘market participants that make use of the banking entity’s market making-related services by obtaining such services, responding to quotations, or entering into a continuing relationship with respect to such

services.’’ 903 However, for purposes ofthe analysis supporting the marketmaker inventory held to meet the reasonably expected near-term demands of clients, customer and counterparties, a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk does not include a trading desk or other organizational unit of another entity if that entity has $50 billion or more in total trading assets
and liabilities, measured in accordance with § 75.20(d)(1), 904 unless the trading desk documents how and why such trading desk or other organizational unit

should be treated as a customer or the

transactions are conducted anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants. 905

The Agencies believe this definition is generally consistent with the proposed interpretation of ‘‘customer’’ in the proposal. The proposal generally provided that, for purposes of market making on an exchange or other organized trading facility, a customer is any person on behalf of whom a buy or

sell order has been submitted. In the
context of the over-the-counter market, a customer was generally considered to be a market participant that makes use

of the market maker’s intermediation services, either by requesting such services or entering into a continuing relationship for such services. 906 The
definition of client, customer, and counterparty in the final rule recognizes that, in the context of market making in

a financial instrument that is executed on an exchange or other organized trading facility, a client, customer, or counterparty would be any person whose buy or sell order executes against the banking entity’s quotation posted on the exchange or other organized trading facility. 907 Under these circumstances, the person would be trading with the banking entity in response to the banking entity’s quotations and obtaining the banking entity’s market making-related services. In the context of market making in a financial
instrument in the OTC market, a client, customer, or counterparty generally would be a person that makes use of the banking entity’s intermediation services, either by requesting such services (possibly via a request-for-quote on an established trading facility) or entering into a continuing relationship with the banking entity with respect to such services. For purposes of determining the reasonably expected near-term
demands of customers, a client, customer, or counterparty generally would not include a trading desk or other organizational unit of another entity that has $50 billion or more in total trading assets except if the trading

desk has a documented reason for treating the trading desk or other organizational unit of such entity as a customer or the trading desk’s transactions are executed anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants. The Agencies believe that this exclusion balances commenters’ suggested alternatives of either defining as a client, customer, or counterparty anyone

who is on the other side of a market

maker’s trade 908 or preventing any banking entity from being a client,

customer, or counterparty. 909 The Agencies believe that the first alternative is overly broad and would not meaningfully distinguish between permitted market making-related activity and impermissible proprietary trading. For example, the Agencies are concerned that such an approach would allow a trading desk to maintain an outsized inventory and to justify such inventory levels as being tangentially related to expected market-wide demand. On the other hand, preventing any banking entity from being a client, customer, or counterparty under the final rule would result in an overly

narrow definition that would significantly impact banking entities’ ability to provide and access market making-related services. For example,

most banks look to market makers to provide liquidity in connection with their investment portfolios.

The Agencies further note that, with respect to a banking entity that acts as a primary dealer (or functional equivalent) for a sovereign government, the sovereign government and its central
bank are each a client, customer, orcounterparty for purposes of the marketmaking exemption as well as the underwriting exemption. 910 The Agencies believe this interpretation, together with the modifications in the rule that eliminate the requirement to distinguish between revenues from spreads and price appreciation and the recognition that the market-makingexemption extends to market makingrelated activities appropriately captures the unique relationship between a primary dealer and the sovereign government. Thus, generally a banking entity may rely on the market-making exemption for its activities as primary dealer (or functional equivalent) to the

extent those activities are outside of the underwriting exemption. 911


### 5880 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

rule. Specifically, the exemption for market making as applied to a primary dealer does not extend without limitation to primary dealer activities that

are not conducted under the conditions of one of the exemptions. These interpretations would be inconsistent with Congressional intent for the statute, to limit permissible market- making activity through the statute’s near term demand requirement and, thus, does not permit trading without

limitation. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that permitted activities should include trading necessary to meet the relevant jurisdiction’s primary dealer and other requirements); JPMC (indicating that the exemption

should cover all of a firm’s activities that are necessary or reasonably incidental to its acting as a primary dealer in a foreign government’s debt securities); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; IIB/EBF. Rather, recognizing that market making by primary dealers is a key function, the

limits and other conditions of the rule are flexible enough to permit necessary market making-related

activities.

912 ETF sponsors enter into relationships with one

or more financial institutions that become APs for the ETF. Only APs are permitted to purchase and redeem shares directly from the ETF, and they can do so only in large aggregations or blocks that are commonly called ‘‘creation units.’’ In response to a question in the proposal, a number of commenters expressed concern that the proposed market-making exemption may not permit certain AP and market maker activities in ETFs and requested clarification that these activities would be permitted under the market-making exemption. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873 (question 91) (‘‘Do particular marketsor instruments, such as the market for exchangetraded funds, raise particular issues that are not adequately or appropriately addressed in the proposal? If so, how could the proposal better
address those instruments, markets or market features?’’); CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8359 (question
91); supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.vii. (discussing
comments on this issue).

913 This is consistent with two commenters’ request that an ETF issuer be considered a ‘‘counterparty’’ of the banking entity when it trades directly with the ETF issuer as an AP. See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012). Further, this approach is

intended to address commenters’ concerns that the near term demand requirement may limit a banking entity’s ability to act as AP for an ETF. See BoA; Vanguard. The Agencies believe that one commenter’s concern about the impact of the proposed source of revenue requirement on AP activity should be addressed by the replacement of this proposed requirement with a metric-based focus on when a trading desk generates revenue from its trading activity. See BoA; infra Part VI.A.3.c.7.c. (discussing the new approach to assessing a trading desk’s pattern of profit and loss).

914 This does not imply that the AP must perfectly predict future customer demand, but rather that
there is a demonstrable, statistical, or historical basis for the size of the inventory held, as more fully discussed below. Consider, for example, a
fixed-income ETF with $500 million in assets. If, on a typical day, an AP generates requests for $10 to $20 million of creations or redemptions, then an inventory of $10 to $20 million in bonds upon which the ETF is based (or some small multiple
thereof) could be construed as consistent with reasonably expected near term customer demand.
On the other hand, if under the same circumstances an AP holds $1 billion of these bonds solely in its capacity as an AP for this ETF, it would be more difficult to justify this as needed for reasonably expected near term customer demand and may be indicative of an AP engaging in prohibited proprietary trading.

915 In ETF loan transactions (also referred to as
‘‘create-to-lend’’ transactions), an AP borrows the underlying instruments that form the creation
basket of an ETF, submits the borrowed instruments to the ETF agent in exchange for a creation unit of ETF shares, and lends the resulting ETF shares to

a customer that wants to borrow the ETF. At the
end of the ETF loan, the borrower returns the ETF
shares to the AP, and the AP redeems the ETF shares with the ETF agent in exchange for the underlying instruments that form the creation basket. The AP may return the underlying instruments to the parties from whom it borrowed them or may use them for another loan, as long as the AP is not obligated to return them at that time.
For the term of the ETF loan transaction, the AP hedges against market risk arising from any rebalancing of the ETF, which would change the amount or type of underlying instruments the AP would receive in exchange for the ETF compared to the underlying instruments the AP borrowed and submitted to the ETF agent to create the ETF shares.

See David J. Abner, ‘‘The ETF Handbook,’’ Ch. 12 (2010); Jean M. McLoughlin, Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, to Division of Corporation Finance, U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, dated Jan. 23,
2013, available at http://www.sec.gov/divisions/corpfin/cf-noaction/2013/davis-polk-wardwell-llp012813-16a.pdf

.

916 See SSgA (Feb. 2012). 917 A number of commenters expressed concern that the proposed rule would limit market making or AP activity in ETFs because market makers and APs engage in trading to maintain a price relationship between ETFs and their underlying components, which promotes ETF market efficiency. See Vanguard; RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Prop. Trading).

918 Some commenters suggested that a range of arbitrage trading should be permitted under the market-making exemption. See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC. Other commenters, however, stated that arbitrage trading should be prohibited

under the final rule. See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Volcker; Occupy. In response to commenters representing that it would be difficult to comply with this standard because it requires a trading desk to determine the proportionality of its activities in response to customer demand compared to its activities that are not in response to customer demand, the Agencies believe that the statute requires a banking entity to distinguish between market making-related activities that are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of customers and impermissible proprietary trading. See Goldman (Prop. Trading);

RBC. For exchange-traded funds (‘‘ETFs’’) (and related structures), Authorized Participants (‘‘APs’’) are generally the conduit for market participants seeking

to create or redeem shares of the fund (or equivalent structure). 912 For example, an AP may buy ETF shares from market participants who would

like to redeem those shares for cash or a basket of instruments upon which the ETF is based. To provide this service, the AP may in turn redeem these shares from the ETF itself. Similarly, an AP may receive cash or financial instruments from a market participant seeking to purchase ETF shares, in which case the AP may use that cash or

set of financial instruments to create
shares from the ETF. In either case, for the purpose of the market-making exemption, such market participants as

well as the ETF itself would be
considered clients, customers, or counterparties of the AP. 913 The inventory of ETF shares or underlying instruments held by the AP can

therefore be evaluated under the criteria of the market-making exemption, such as how these holdings relate to reasonably expected near term customer

demand. 914 These criteria can be similarly applied to other activities of the AP, such as building inventory to‘‘seed’’ a new ETF or engaging in ETFloan related transactions. 915 The Agencies recognize that banking entities currently conduct a substantial amount of AP creation and redemption activity
in the ETF market and, thus, if the rule were to prevent or restrict a banking entity from acting as an AP for an ETF, then the rule would impact the functioning of the ETF market. 916

Some firms, whether or not an AP in a given ETF, may also actively engage in buying and selling shares of an ETF and its underlying instruments in the market to maintain price continuity between the ETF and its underlying instruments, which are exchangeable for one another. Sometimes these firms will register as market makers on an exchange for a given ETF, but other times they may not register as market maker. Regardless of whether or not the firm is registered as a market maker on any given exchange, this activity not only provides liquidity for ETFs, but also, and very importantly, helps keep the market price of an ETF

in line with the NAV of the fund. The market-making exemption can be used to evaluate trading that is intended to maintain price continuity between these exchangeable instruments by considering how the firm quotes, maintains risk and exposure limits, manages its inventory and risk, and, in the case of APs, exercises its ability to

create and redeem shares from the fund. Because customers take positions in ETFs with an expectation that the price relationship will be maintained, such trading can be considered to be market making-related activity. 917

After considering comments, the Agencies continue to take the view that a trading desk would not qualify for the market-making exemption if it is wholly or principally engaged in arbitrage trading or other trading that is not in response to, or driven by, the demands
of clients, customers, or counterparties. 918 The Agencies believe this activity, which is not in response to or driven by customer demand, is inconsistent with the Congressional intent that market making-related activity be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands


### 5881 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

919 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC.

920 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Credit Suisse (Seidel). For example, customers have an expectation of general price alignment under these circumstances, both at the time they decide to invest in the instrument and for the remaining time they hold the instrument. To the contrary, general statistical arbitrage does not maintain a price relationship between related instruments that is expected and relied upon by customers and, thus, is not permitted under the market-making exemption. Firms engage in general statistical arbitrage to profit from differences in market prices between instruments, assets, or price

or risk elements associated with instruments or assets that are thought to be statistically related, but which do not have a direct relationship of being exchangeable, convertible, or exercisable for the

other.

921 See MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

922 A number of commenters requested that the rule be modified to clearly recognize interdealer trading as a component of permitted market making-related activity. See MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); RBC; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; BoA; ACLI (Feb. 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). One of these commenters analyzed the potential market impact of preventing interdealer trading, combined with inventory limits. See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). Because the final rule does not prohibit interdealer trading or limit inventory in the manner this commenter assumed for purposes of its analysis, the Agencies do not believe the final rule will have the market impact cited by this commenter.

923 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (recognizing that the ability to manage inventory through interdealer

transactions should be accommodated in the rule, but recommending that this activity be conditioned on a market maker having an appropriate level of inventory after an interdealer transaction).

924 Provided it is consistent with the requirements of the market-making exemption, including the near term customer demand requirement, a trading desk may trade for purposes of determining how to price

a financial instrument a customer seeks to trade with the trading desk or to determine the depth of

the market for a financial instrument a customer seeks to trade with the trading desk. See Goldman (Prop. Trading). 925 See CIEBA (stating that, absent a different interpretation for illiquid instruments, market makers will err on the side of holding less inventory to avoid sanctions for violating the rule); Morgan Stanley; RBC; ICI (Feb. 2012) ISDA (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Alfred

Brock.

926 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.ii. (discussing
comments on this issue).

927 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii)(A).

928 The final rule does not impose additional capital requirements on aged inventory to discourage a trading desk from retaining positions in inventory, as suggested by some commenters. See CalPERS; Vanguard. The Agencies believe the final rule already limit a trading desk’s ability to hold inventory over an extended period and do not see a need at this time to include additional capital requirements in the final rule. For example, a trading desk must have written policies and procedures relating to its inventory and must be able to demonstrate, as needed, its analysis of why the levels of its market-maker inventory are necessary to meet, or is a result of meeting,

customer demand. See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(ii),
(iii)(C). of clients, customers, or counterparties. For example, a trading desk would not be permitted to engage in general statistical arbitrage trading between instruments that have some degree of

correlation but where neither instrument has the capability of being exchanged, converted, or exercised for or into the other instrument. A trading desk may, however, act as market maker to a customer engaged in a statistical arbitrage trading strategy. Furthermore as suggested by some commenters, 919 trading activity used by a market maker to maintain a price relationship that is expected and relied upon by clients, customers, and counterparties is permitted as it is related to the demands of clients, customers, or counterparties

because the relevant instrument has the capability of being exchanged,
converted, or exercised for or into

another instrument. 920

The Agencies recognize that a trading desk, in anticipating and responding to customer needs, may engage in interdealer trading as part of its inventory management activities and that interdealer trading provides certain
market benefits, such as more efficient matching of customer order flow, greater hedging options to reduce risk, and enhanced ability to accumulate or exit customer-related positions. 921 The final rule does not prohibit a trading desk from using the market-making exemption to engage in interdealer trading that is consistent with and related to facilitating permissible trading with the trading desk’s clients, customers, or counterparties. 922 However, in determining the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, a trading desk generally may not account for the expected trading interests of a trading desk or other organizational unit of an entity with aggregate trading assets and liabilities of $50 billion or greater (except if the trading desk documents why and how a particular trading desk or other organizational unit at such a

firm should be considered a customer orthe trading desk or conduct marketmaking activity anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants). 923

A trading desk may engage in interdealer trading to: Establish or acquire a position to meet the reasonably expected near term demands
of its clients, customers, or counterparties, including current demand; unwind or sell positions acquired from clients, customers, orcounterparties; or engage in riskmitigating or inventory management

transactions. 924 The Agencies believe that allowing a trading desk to continue to engage in customer-related interdealer trading is appropriate because it can help a trading desk appropriately manage its inventory and risk levels and can effectively allow clients, customers, or counterparties to access a larger pool of liquidity. While the Agencies recognize that effective
intermediation of client, customer, or counterparty trading may require a trading desk to engage in a certain amount of interdealer trading, this is an activity that will bear some scrutiny by the Agencies and should be monitored by banking entities to ensure it reflects market-making activities and not impermissible proprietary trading. ii. Impact of the Liquidity, Maturity, and Depth of the Market on the Analysis

Several commenters expressed concern about the potential impact of the proposed near term demand requirement on market making in less liquid markets and requested that the Agencies recognize that near term customer demand may vary across

different markets and asset classes. 925 The Agencies understand that reasonably expected near term customer demand may vary based on the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of financial instrument(s) in which the trading desk

acts as market maker. 926 As a result, the final rule recognizes that these factors impact the analysis of reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties and theamount, types, and risks of marketmaker inventory needed to meet such

demand. 927 In particular, customer demand is likely to be more frequent in more liquid markets than in less liquid or illiquid markets. As a result, market makers in more liquid cash-based markets, such as liquid equity securities, should generally have higher rates of inventory turnover and less aged inventory than market makers in less liquid or illiquid markets. 928 Market makers in less liquid cash-based markets are more likely to hold a particular position for a longer period of

time due to intermittent customer
demand. In the derivatives markets, market makers carry open positions and manage various risk factors, such as exposure to different points on a yield curve. These exposures are analogous to inventory in the cash-based markets. Further, it may be more difficult to reasonably predict near term customer
demand in less mature markets due to,


### 5882 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

929 The Agencies agree, as suggested by one commenter, it may be appropriate for a market

maker in a new asset class or market to look to reasonably expected future developments on the basis of the trading desk’s customer relationships.

See Morgan Stanley. As discussed further below, the Agencies recognize that a trading desk could

encounter similar issues if it is a new entrant in an existing market.

930 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68871; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356–8357.

931 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. See

also Morgan Stanley; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb.
2012).

932 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
MetLife; Chamber (Feb. 2012); RBC; CIEBA; Wellington; ICI (Feb. 2012) Alfred Brock. 933 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

934 See CIEBA.

935 To determine an appropriate historical dataset, a banking entity should assess the relation between current or reasonably expected near term conditions and demand and those of prior market cycles.

936 This analysis may, where appropriate, take into account prior and/or anticipated cyclicality to
the demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, which may cause variations in the amounts, types, and risks of financial instruments needed to provide intermediation services at different points in a cycle. For example, the final rule recognizes that a trading desk may need to accumulate a larger-than-average amount of inventory in anticipation of an index rebalance. See

supra note 843 (discussing a comment on this issue). The Agencies are aware that a trading desk engaged in block positioning activity may have a less consistent pattern of inventory because of the need to take on large block positions at the request

of customers. See supra note 761 and accompanying text (discussing comments on this
issue).

Because the final rule does not prevent banking entities from providing direct liquidity for rebalance trades, the Agencies do not believe that the final rule will cause the market impacts that one commenter predicted would occur were such a restriction adopted. See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012) (estimating that if market makers are not able to provide direct liquidity for rebalance trades, investors tracking these indices could potentially pay incremental costs of $600 million to $1.8 billion every year).

937 In addition, the Agencies recognize that a new entrant to a particular market or asset class may not have knowledge of historical customer demand in

that market or asset class at the outset. See supra note 924 and accompanying text (discussing factors that may be relevant to new market entrants for purposes of determining the reasonably expected
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties).

938 One commenter suggested an approach that would allow market makers to build inventory in products where they believe customer demand will exist, regardless of whether inventory can be tied to a particular customer in the near term or to

historical trends in customer demand. See Credit Suisse (Seidel). The Agencies believe an approach that does not provide for any consideration of historical trends could result in a heightened risk
of evasion. At the same time, as discussed above, the Agencies recognize that historical trends may not always determine the amount of inventory a trading desk may need to meet reasonably expected near term demand and it may under certain circumstances be appropriate to build inventory in anticipation of a reasonably expected near term event that would likely impact customer demand.While the Agencies are not requiring that marketmaker inventory be tied to a particular customer, the Agencies are requiring that a banking entity analyze and support its expectations for near term

customer demand.

939 The Agencies recognize that a trading desk could acquire either a long or short position in among other things, a lack of historical experience with client, customer, or counterparty demands for the relevant product. Under these circumstances, the Agencies encourage banking entities to consider their experience with similar products or other relevant factors. 929

iii. Demonstrable Analysis of Certain

Factors

In the proposal, the Agencies stated that permitted market making includes taking positions in securities in anticipation of customer demand, so long as any anticipatory buying or selling activity is reasonable and related to clear, demonstrable trading interest of clients, customers, or counterparties. 930 A number of commenters expressed concern about this proposed interpretation’s impact on market makers’ inventory management activity and represented that it was inconsistent

with the statute’s near term demand standard, which permits market-making activity that is ‘‘designed’’ not to exceed the ‘‘reasonably expected’’ near term

demands of customers. 931 In response to comments, the Agencies are permitting a trading desk to take positions in reasonable expectation of customer

demand in the near term based on a demonstrable analysis that the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands

of customers.

The proposal also stated that a banking entity’s determination of near term customer demand should generally be based on the unique customer base of a specific market-making business line (and not merely an expectation of future price appreciation). Several

commenters stated that it was unclear

how such determinations should be made and expressed concern that near term customer demand cannot always be accurately predicted, 932 particularly

in markets where trades occur infrequently and customer demand is hard to predict 933 or when a banking entity is entering a new market. 934 To address these comments, the Agencies are providing additional information about how a banking entity can comply

with the statute’s near term customer demand requirement, including a new requirement that a banking entity

conduct a demonstrable assessment of reasonably expected near term customer demand and several examples of factors that may be relevant for conducting such an assessment. The Agencies believe it is important to require such demonstrable analysis to allow determinations of reasonably expected

near term demand and associated inventory levels to be monitored and tested to ensure compliance with the

statute and the final rule.

The final rule provides that, to help determine the appropriate amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory and to ensure that such inventory is designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term demands of client, customers, or counterparties, a banking entity must conduct demonstrable analysis of historical customer demand, current inventory of
financial instruments, and market and other factors regarding the amount, types, and risks of or associated with

financial instruments in which the trading desk makes a market, including through block trades. This analysis should not be static or fixed solely on
current market or other factors. Instead, an appropriately conducted analysis under this provision will be both backward- and forward-looking by taking into account relevant historical

trends in customer demand 935 and any events that are reasonably expected to occur in the near term that would likely impact demand. 936 Depending on the facts and circumstances, it may be proper for a banking entity to weigh these factors differently when conducting an analysis under this provision. For example, historical trends in customer demand may be less relevant when a trading desk is experiencing or expects to experience a change in the pattern of customer needs (e.g., requests for block positioning), adjustments to its business model (e.g., efforts to expand or contract its market shares), or changes in market

conditions. 937 On the other hand, absent these types of current or anticipated events, the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory should be relatively consistent with such trading desk’s historical profile of market-maker inventory. 938

Moreover, the demonstrable analysis required under § 75.4(b)(2)(ii)(B) should account for, among other things, how

the market factors discussed in § 75.4(b)(2)(ii)(A) impact the amount, types, and risks of market-maker inventory the trading desk may need to facilitate reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. 939 Other potential


### 5883 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

reasonable anticipation of near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. In particular, if it is expected that customers will want to buy an instrument in the near term, it may be appropriate for the desk to acquire a long position in such instrument. If it is expected that customers will want to sell the instrument, acquiring a short position may be appropriate under certain

circumstances.

940 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.iii. See FTN; Morgan Stanley (suggesting a standard that would require a position to be ‘‘reasonably consistent with observable customer demand patterns’’).

941 Complex structured products can contain a combination of several different types of risks, including, among others, market risk, credit risk, volatility risk, and prepayment risk.

942 In contrast, a trading desk may respond to requests for customized transactions, such as custom swaps, provided that the trading desk is a market maker in the risk exposures underlying the swap or can hedge the underlying risk exposures, consistent with its financial exposure and hedging limits, and otherwise meets the requirements of the market-making exemption. For example, a trading desk may routinely make markets in underlying exposures and, thus, would meet the requirements for engaging in transactions in derivatives that reflect the same exposures. Alternatively, a trading desk might meet the requirements by routinely trading in the derivative and hedging in the underlying exposures. See supra Part

VI.A.3.c.1.c.iii.

943 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

944 The Agencies are clarifying this point in response to commenters who expressed concern that the proposal would prevent an exchange market maker from using market or marketable limit

orders under these circumstances. See, e.g., NYSE

Euronext; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC. 945 See supra notes 774 to 779 and accompanying text (discussing commenters’ response to statements in the proposal requiring exchange registration as
a market maker under certain circumstances). Similarly, the final rule does not establish a presumption of compliance with the market-making exemption based on registration as a market maker with an exchange, as requested by a few

commenters. See supra note 777 and accompanying text. As noted above, activity that is considered market making for purposes of this rule may not be considered market making for purposes of other rules, including self-regulatory organization rules, and vice versa. In addition, exchange requirements for registered market makers are subject to change without consideration of the impact on this rule. Although a banking entity is not required to be an exchange-registered market maker under the final rule, a banking entity must be licensed or registered to engage in market making-related activities in accordance with applicable law. For example, abanking entity would be required to be an SECregistered broker-dealer to engage in market making-related activities in securities in the U.S. unless the banking entity is exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as a dealer under the Exchange Act. See infra Part VI.A.3.c.6.; final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(vi).

946 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading) (noting that there are more than 12 exchanges and 40 alternative trading systems currently trading U.S. equities). factors that could be used to assess reasonably expected near term customer demand and the appropriate amount, types, and risks of financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory include, among others: (i) Recent trading volumes and customer trends; (ii) trading patterns of specific

customers or other observable customer demand patterns; (iii) analysis of the banking entity’s business plan and ability to win new customer business; (iv) evaluation of expected demand

under current market conditions compared to prior similar periods; (v)

schedule of maturities in customers’ existing portfolios; and (vi) expected
market events, such as an index rebalancing, and announcements. The Agencies believe that some banking entities already analyze these and other relevant factors as part of their overall risk management processes. 940

With respect to the creation and distribution of complex structured products, a trading desk may be able to use the market-making exemption to acquire some or all of the risk exposures associated with the product if the trading desk has evidence of customer demand for each of the significant risks associated with the product. 941 To have

evidence of customer demand under these circumstances, there must be prior express interest from customers in the specific risk exposures of the product. Without such express interest, a trading

desk would not have sufficient information to support the required demonstrable analysis (e.g., information

about historical customer demand or other relevant factors). 942 The Agencies are concerned that, absent express interest in each significant risk associated with the product, a trading desk could evade the market-making exemption by structuring a deal with certain risk exposures, or amounts of risk exposures, for which there is no

customer demand and that would be retained in the trading desk’s inventory, potentially for speculative purposes. Thus, a trading desk would not beengaged in permitted market makingrelated activity if, for example, it structured a product solely to acquire a desired exposure and not to respond to

customer demand. 943 When a trading desk acquires risk exposures in these circumstances, the trading desk would be expected to enter into appropriate hedging transactions or otherwise mitigate the risks of these exposures, consistent with its hedging policies and procedures and risk limits.

With regard to a trading desk that conducts its market-making activities on an exchange or other similar anonymous trading facility, the Agencies continue to believe that market-making activities are generally consistent with reasonably expected near term customer demand when such activities involve passively providing liquidity by submitting resting orders that interact with the

orders of others in a non-directional or market-neutral trading strategy or by regularly responding to requests for quotes in markets where resting orders are not generally provided. This ensures that the trading desk has a pattern of providing, rather than taking, liquidity.
However, this does not mean that a trading desk acting as a market maker on an exchange or other similar anonymous trading facility is only permitted to use these types of orders inconnection with its market makingrelated activities. The Agencies recognize that it may be appropriate for a trading desk to enter market or marketable limit orders on an exchange or other similar anonymous trading facility, or to request quotes from other market participants, in connection with its market making-related activities for a variety of purposes including, among others, inventory management, addressing order imbalances on an exchange, and hedging. 944 In response to comments, the Agencies are not requiring a banking entity to be registered as a market maker on an exchange or other similar anonymous trading facility, if the exchange or other similar anonymous trading facility registers market makers, for purposes of

the final rule. 945 The Agencies recognize, as noted by commenters, that there are a large number of exchanges and organized trading facilities on which market makers may need to trade to maintain liquidity across the markets and to provide customers with favorable prices and that requiring registration with each exchange or other trading facility may unnecessarily restrict orimpose burdens on exchange marketmaking activities. 946

A banking entity is not required to conduct the demonstrable analysis under § 75.4(b)(2)(B) of the final rule on an instrument-by-instrument basis. The Agencies recognize that, in certain cases, customer demand may be for a particular type of exposure, and a customer may be willing to trade any

one of a number of instruments that would provide the demanded exposure.
Thus, an assessment of the amount, types, and risks of financial instruments that the trading desk may hold in market-maker inventory and that would be designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties does not

need to be made for each financial instrument in which the trading desk
acts as market maker. Instead, the amount and types of financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory should be


### 5884 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

947 See RBC; CIEBA; Wellington; ICI (Feb. 2012)

Invesco. 948 See Appendix A.

949 The Agencies recognize that for some types of positions or trading strategies, the use of ‘‘Risk

Factor Sensitivities’’ and ‘‘Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics may be ineffective and accordingly limits do not need to be set for those metrics if such ineffectiveness is demonstrated by the banking entity.

950 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii); infra Part VI.A.3.c.3.c. (discussing the meaning of ‘‘independent’’ review for purposes of this requirement). 951 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(i); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at

8355.

952 See Flynn & Fusselman; Morgan Stanley.

953 See Flynn & Fusselman.

954 See Occupy.

955 See ICI (Feb. 2012).

956 The independent testing standard is discussed
in more detail in Part VI.C., which discusses the compliance program requirement in § 75.20 of the

final rule. consistent with the types of financial

instruments in which the desk makes a market and the amount and types of

such instruments that the desk’s customers are reasonably expected to be interested in trading.

In response to commenters’ concern that banking entities may be subject to regulatory sanctions if reasonably expected customer demand does not
materialize, 947 the Agencies recognize that predicting the reasonably expected
near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties is inherently subject to changes based on

market and other factors that are difficult to predict with certainty. Thus, there may at times be differences between predicted demand and actual
demand from clients, customers, or counterparties. However, assessments of expected near term demand may not be reasonable if, in the aggregate and over longer periods of time, a trading desk exhibits a repeated pattern or practice of significant variation in the amount, types, and risks of financial instruments in its market-maker inventory in excess

of what is needed to facilitate near term

customer demand.

iv. Relationship to Required Limits

As discussed further below, a banking entity must establish limits for each trading desk on the amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory, level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure, and period of time a financial instrument may be held by a trading desk. These limits must be reasonably designed to ensure compliance with the market-making exemption, including

the near term customer demand requirement, and must take into account the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities.
Thus, the limits should account for and generally be consistent with the

historical near term demands of the
desk’s clients, customers, or counterparties and the amount, types,

and risks of financial instruments that the trading desk has historically held in market-maker inventory to meet such

demands. In addition to the limits that a trading desk selects in managing its positions to ensure compliance with the market-making exemption set out in § 75.4(b), the Agencies are requiring, for banking entities that must report metrics in Appendix A, such limits include, at
a minimum, ‘‘Risk Factor Sensitivities’’

and ‘‘Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-atRisk’’ metrics as limits, except to the extent any of the ‘‘Risk Factor Sensitivities’’ or ‘‘Value-at-Risk and

Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics are demonstrably ineffective for measuring and monitoring the risks of a trading desk based on the types of positions traded by, and risk exposures of, that

desk. 948 The Agencies believe that these metrics can be useful for measuring and managing many types of positions and trading activities and therefore can be useful in establishing a minimum set of

metrics for which limits should be applied. 949

As this requirement applies on an ongoing basis, a trade in excess of one or more limits set for a trading desk should not be permitted simply because it responds to customer demand. Rather, a banking entity’s compliance program must include escalation procedures that require review and approval of any

trade that would exceed one or more of a trading desk’s limits, demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to one or more of a trading desk’s limits is consistent with the requirements of this near term demand requirement and with the prudent management of risk by the banking entity, and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval. 950 The Agencies expect that a trading desk’s escalation procedures will generally explain the circumstances under which a trading desk’s limits can be increased, either temporarily or permanently, and that such increases must be consistent with reasonably expected near term demands of the
desk’s clients, customers, or counterparties and the amount and type of risks to which the trading desk is authorized to be exposed.

3. Compliance Program Requirement

a. Proposed Compliance Program Requirement

To ensure that a banking entity relying on the market-making exemption had an appropriate framework in place to support its compliance with the exemption, § 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the proposed rule required a banking entity to establish an internal compliance program, as required by subpart D of the proposal, designed to ensure compliance with the requirements of the market-making exemption. 951

b. Comments on the Proposed Compliance Program Requirement

A few commenters supported the proposed requirement that a banking entity establish a compliance program under § 75.20 of the proposed rule as

effective. 952 For example, one commenter stated that the requirement ‘‘keeps a strong focus on the bank’s ownworkings and allows banks to selfmonitor.’’ 953 One commenter indicated that a comprehensive compliance program is a ‘‘cornerstone of effective corporate governance,’’ but cautioned against placing ‘‘undue reliance’’ on compliance programs. 954 As discussed

further below in Parts VI.C.1. and VI.C.3., many commenters expressed concern about the potential burdens of the proposed rule’s compliance program requirement, as well as the proposed requirement regarding quantitative measurements. According to one commenter, the compliance burdens associated with these requirements may dissuade a banking entity fromattempting to comply with the marketmaking exemption. 955

c. Final Compliance Program Requirement

Similar to the proposed exemption, the market-making exemption adopted in the final rule requires that a banking entity establish and implement,
maintain, and enforce an internal compliance program required by subpart D that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliancewith the requirements of the marketmaking exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing. 956 This provision further requires that the compliance program include particular written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing identifying and addressing:

• The financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to purchase
and sell as a market maker;

• The actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or


### 5885 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

957 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii). 958 The Agencies note that a number of commenters requested that the Agencies place a greater emphasis on inventory limits and risk limits in the final exemption. See, e.g., Citigroup (suggesting that the market-making exemption utilize risk limits that would be set for each trading unit based on expected levels of customer trading— estimated by looking to historical results, target product and customer lists, and target market share—and an appropriate amount of required inventory to support that level of customer trading);

Prof. Colesanti et al. (suggesting that the exemption include, among other things, a bright-line threshold
of the amount of risk that can be retained (which cannot be in excess of the size and type required for market making), positions limits, and limits on holding periods); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (suggesting the use of specific parameters for inventory levels, along with a number of other
criteria, to establish a safe harbor); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (recommending the use of risk limits in combination with a guidance-based approach); Japanese Bankers Ass’n. (suggesting thatthe rule set risk allowances for market makingrelated activities based on required capital for such activities). The Agencies are not establishing specific limits in the final rule, as some commenters appeared to recommend, in recognition of the fact that appropriate limits will differ based on anumber of factors, including the size of the marketmaking operation and the liquidity, depth, and maturity of the market for the particular type(s) of financial instruments in which the trading desk is permitted to trade. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012); Prof. Colesanti et al. However, banking entities relying on the market-making exemption must set limits and demonstrate how the specific limits and limit methodologies they have chosen are reasonably designed to limit the amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in a trading desk’s market-maker inventory consistent with the reasonably expected near term demands of the banking entity’s clients, customers, and counterparties, subject to the market and conditions discussed above, and to commensurately control the desk’s overall financial exposure.

959 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(A) (requiring written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing regarding the financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to purchase and sell in accordance with
§ 75.4(b)(2)(i) of the final rule); final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(B) (requiring written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing regarding the products, instruments, or exposures each trading desk may use for risk management purposes). 960 This standard addresses issues raised by commenters concerning: certain language inproposed Appendix B regarding market makingrelated risk management; the market making-related hedging provision in § 75.4(b)(3) of the proposed rule; and, to some extent, the proposed source of revenue requirement in § 75.4(b)(2)(v) of the proposed rule. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8439–8440; proposed rule § 75.4(b)(3); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358; Wellington; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; PUC Texas; CIEBA; SSgA
(Feb. 2012); AllianceBernstein; Investure; Invesco; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); FTN; RBC; NYSE Euronext;
MFA. As discussed in more detail above, a numberof commenters emphasized that market makingrelated activities necessarily involve a certain amount of risk-taking to provide ‘‘immediacy’’ to

customers. See, e.g., Prof. Duffie; Morgan Stanley;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). Commenters also represented that the amount of risk a market maker needs to retain may differ

across asset classes and markets. See, e.g., Morgan Stanley; Credit Suisse (Seidel). The Agencies believe that the requirement we are adopting better recognizes that appropriate risk management will tailor acceptable position, risk and inventory limits based on the type(s) of financial instruments in which the trading desk is permitted to trade and the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of financial instrument. otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of its financial exposure consistent with the required limits; the products, instruments, and exposures each trading desk may use for risk management purposes; the techniques and strategies each trading desk may use to manage the risks of its market making-related activities and inventory; and the process, strategies, and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions taken by the trading desk to mitigate these risks are and
continue to be effective;

• Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities, that address the factors prescribed by

the near term customer demand requirement of the final rule, on:

Æ The amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory;

Æ The amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk uses for risk

management purposes;

Æ Level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure; and

Æ Period of time a financial instrument may be held;

• Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its required
limits; and

• Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading desk’s limit(s), demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to a trading desk’s limit(s) is consistent with the requirements of § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of the final rule, and independent review (i.e., by risk managers and compliance officers at the appropriate level independent of the trading desk) of such demonstrable analysis and approval. 957

The compliance program requirement in the proposed market-making exemption did not include specific references to all the compliance program elements now listed in the final
rule. Instead, these elements were generally included in the compliance requirements of Appendix C of the proposed rule. The Agencies are moving certain of these requirements into the market-making exemption to ensure that critical components are made part of thecompliance program for market makingrelated activities. Further, placing these requirements within the market-making exemption emphasizes the important role they play in overall compliance with the exemption. 958 Banking entities should note that these compliance procedures must be established, implemented, maintained, and enforced for each trading desk engaged in market making-related activities under the final rule. Each of the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(iii)(A) through (E) must be appropriately tailored to the individual trading activities and strategies of each trading desk on an ongoing basis.

As a threshold issue, the compliance program must identify the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk may trade as market maker or for risk management purposes. 959 Identifying the relevant instruments in which a trading desk is permitted to trade will facilitate monitoring and oversight of compliance with the exemption by preventing an individual trader on a market-making desk from establishing positions in instruments

that are unrelated to the desk’s marketmaking function. Further, this identification of instruments helps form the basis for the specific types of inventory and risk limits that the banking entity must establish and is relevant to considerations throughout the exemption regarding the liquidity, depth, and maturity of the market for the relevant type of financial instrument. The Agencies note that a banking entity should be able to demonstrate the relationship between the instruments in which a trading desk may act as market maker and the instruments the desk may use to manage the risk of its market making-related activities and inventory and why the instruments the desk may use to manage its risk appropriately and effectivelymitigate the risk of its market makingrelated activities without generating an entirely new set of risks that outweigh the risks that are being hedged.

The final rule provides that a banking entity must establish an appropriate risk management framework for each of itstrading desks that rely on the marketmaking exemption. 960 This includes not only the techniques and strategies that a trading desk may use to manage its risk exposures, but also the actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of its financial exposures consistent with its required limits, which are discussed in more detail below. While the Agencies do not expect a trading desk to hedge all

of the risks that arise from its market


### 5886 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

961 It may be more efficient for a banking entity to manage some risks at a higher organizational level than the trading desk level. As a result, a banking entity’s written policies and procedures may delegate the responsibility to mitigate specific risks of the trading desk’s financial exposure to an entity other than the trading desk, including another organizational unit of the banking entity or of an affiliate, provided that such organizational unit of the banking entity or of an affiliate is identified in the banking entity’s written policies and procedures. Under these circumstances, the other organizational unit of the banking entity or of an affiliate must conduct such hedging activity in accordance with the requirements of the hedging exemption in § 75.5 of the final rule, including the documentation requirement in § 75.5(c). As recognized in Part VI.A.4.d.4., hedging activity conducted by a different organizational unit than the unit responsible for the positions being hedged presents a greater risk of evasion. Further, the risks being managed by a higher organizational level than the trading desk may be generated by trading desks engaged in market making-related activity or by trading desks engaged in other permitted activities. Thus, it would be inappropriate for such hedgingactivity to be conducted in reliance on the marketmaking exemption.

962 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c. (discussing the final near term demand requirement).

963 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); MFA; RBC.

964 See, e.g., BoA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012). 965 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358.

966 As discussed above, if a trading desk operating under the market-making exemption directs a different organizational unit of the banking entity or an affiliate to establish a hedge position on the desk’s behalf, then the other organizational unit may rely on the market-making exemption to establish the hedge position as long as: (i) The other organizational unit’s hedging activity is consistent with the trading desk’s risk management policies and procedures (e.g., the hedge instrument, technique, and strategy are consistent with those identified in the trading desk’s policies and procedures); and (ii) the hedge position is attributed to the financial exposure of the trading desk and is included in the trading desk’s daily profit and loss. If a different organizational unit of the banking entity or of an affiliate establishes a hedge for the trading desk’s financial exposure based on its own determination, or if such position was not established in accordance with the trading desk’s required procedures or was included in that other organizational unit’s financial exposure and/or daily profit and loss, then that hedge position must be established in compliance with the hedging exemption in § 75.5 of the rule, including the documentation requirement in § 75.5(c). See supra

Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii. 967 For example, this may occur if a U.S. corporate bond trading desk acquires a $100 million long position in the corporate bonds of one issuer from clients, customers, or counterparties and separately acquires a $50 million short position in

another issuer in the same market sector in reasonable expectation of near term demand of clients, customers, or counterparties. Although both positions were acquired to facilitate customer demand, the positions may also naturally hedge
each other, to some extent.

968 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8361.

969 Two commenters recommended that banking entities be permitted to establish hedges prior to acquiring the underlying risk exposure under these

circumstances. See Credit Suisse (Seidel); BoA. making-related activities, the Agencies do expect each trading desk to take appropriate steps consistent with market-making activities to contain and limit risk exposures (such as by unwinding unneeded positions) and to follow reasonable procedures to monitor the trading desk’s risk exposures (i.e., its financial exposure) and hedge risks of its financial exposure to remain within

its relevant risk limits. 961

As discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.4.c., managing the risks associated with maintaining a market-maker inventory that is appropriate to meet the reasonably expected near-term demands of customers is an important part of market making. 962 The Agencies
understand that, in the context of market-making activities, inventory management includes adjustment of the amount and types of market-maker inventory to meet the reasonably expected near term demands of

customers. 963 Adjustments of the size and types of a financial exposure are also made to reduce or mitigate the risks

associated with financial instrumentsheld as part of a trading desk’s marketmaker inventory. A common strategy inmarket making is to establish marketmaker inventory in anticipation of reasonably expected customer needs

and then to reduce that market-maker inventory over time as customer

demand materializes. 964 If customer
demand does not materialize, the

market maker addresses the risks

associated with its market-maker inventory by adjusting the amount or types of financial instruments in its inventory as well as taking steps otherwise to mitigate the risk associated with its inventory.

The Agencies recognize that, to provide effective intermediation services, a trading desk engaged in permitted market making-related

activities retains a certain amount of risk arising from the positions it holds in inventory and may hedge certain aspects of that risk. The requirements in

the final rule establish controls around a trading desk’s risk management activities, yet still recognize that atrading desk engaged in market makingrelated activities may retain a certain amount of risk in meeting the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. As the Agencies noted in the proposal, where the purpose of a transaction is to hedge a market making-related position,it would appear to be market makingrelated activity of the type described in section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act. 965 The Agencies emphasize that the only risk management activities that qualify for the market-making exemption—and that are not subject to the hedging exemption—are risk management activities conducted or directed by the trading desk in connection with its market making-related activities and in conformance with the trading desk’s risk management policies and procedures. 966 A trading desk engaged in market making-related activities would be required to comply with the hedging exemption or another available exemption for any risk management or other activity that is not in conformancewith the trading desk’s required marketmaking risk management policies and procedures.

A banking entity’s written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing identifying and addressing the products, instruments, or exposures and the techniques and strategies that may be used by each trading desk to manage the risks of its market making-related activities and inventory must cover both how the trading desk may establish hedges and how such hedges are removed once the risk they were mitigating is unwound. With respect to establishing positions that hedge or otherwise mitigate the risk(s) of market making-related positions held by the trading desk, the written policies and procedures may consider the natural hedging and diversification that occurs in an aggregation of long and short positions in financial instruments for which the trading desk is a market
maker, 967 as it documents its specific risk-mitigating strategies that use

instruments for which the desk is a

market maker or instruments for which
the desk is not a market maker. Further, the written policies and procedures identifying and addressing permissible hedging techniques and strategies must

address the circumstances under which the trading desk may be permitted to engage in anticipatory hedging. Like the proposed rule’s hedging exemption, a trading desk may establish an anticipatory hedge position before it becomes exposed to a risk that it is highly likely to become exposed to, provided there is a sound risk management rationale for establishing such an anticipatory hedge position. 968 For example, a trading desk may hedge against specific positions promised to customers, such as volume-weighted average price (‘‘VWAP’’) orders or large
block trades, to facilitate the customer

trade. 969 The amount of time that an anticipatory hedge may precede the establishment of the position to be hedged will depend on market factors,


### 5887 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

970 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(B). 971 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(C).

972 See, e.g., Citigroup (Feb. 2012) (noting that itssuggested approach to implementing the marketmaking exemption, which would focus on risk limits and risk architecture, would build on existing risk limits and risk management systems already present in institutions).

973 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iv). such as the liquidity of the hedging position.

Written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing established pursuant to the final rule identifying and addressing permissible hedging techniques and strategies should be designed to prevent a trading desk from over-hedging its market-makerinventory or financial exposure. Overhedging would occur if, for example, a trading desk established a position in a financial instrument for the purported purpose of reducing a risk associated with one or more market-making positions when, in fact, that risk had already been mitigated to the full extent possible. Over-hedging results in a new risk exposure that is unrelated to market-making activities and, thus, is not permitted under the market-making exemption.

A trading desk’s financial exposure generally would not be considered to be consistent with market making-related activities to the extent the trading desk is engaged in hedging activities that are inconsistent with the management of

identifiable risks in its market-maker inventory or maintains significant hedge positions after the underlying risk(s) of the market-maker inventory have been unwound. A banking entity’s written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing regarding the trading desk’s permissible hedging techniques and strategies must be designed to prevent atrading desk from engaging in overhedging or maintaining hedge positions after they are no longer needed. 970 Further, the compliance program must provide for the process and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions taken by the trading desk to mitigate the risks of its market making-related

activities are and continue to be
effective, which would include monitoring for and addressing any scenarios where a trading desk may be engaged in over-hedging or maintaining unnecessary hedge positions or new significant risks have been introduced by the hedging activity.

As a result of these limitations, the size and risks of the trading desk’s hedging positions are naturally constrained by the size and risks of its market-maker inventory, which must be designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, as well as by the risk limits and controls

established under the final rule. This ultimately constrains a trading desk’s overall financial exposure since such position can only contain positions, risks, and exposures related to the market-maker inventory that are designed to meet current or near term customer demand and positions, risks and exposures designed to mitigate the

risks in accordance with the limits previously established for the trading

desk.

The written policies and procedures identifying and addressing a trading desk’s hedging techniques and strategies

also must describe how and under what timeframe a trading desk must remove hedge positions once the underlying risk exposure is unwound. Similarly, the compliance program established by the banking entity to specify and control the trading desk’s hedging activities in

accordance with the final rule must be designed to prevent a trading desk from purposefully or inadvertently transforming its positions taken to manage the risk of its market-maker inventory under the exemption into

what would otherwise be considered prohibited proprietary trading.

Moreover, the compliance program must provide for the process and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions taken by the trading desk tomitigate the risks of its market makingrelated activities and inventory— including the instruments, techniques, and strategies used for risk management purposes—are and continue to be effective. This includes ensuring that hedges taken in the context of market making-related activities continue to be effective and that positions taken to manage the risks of the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are not purposefully or inadvertently

transformed into what would otherwise be considered prohibited proprietary trading. If a banking entity’s monitoring procedures find that a trading desk’s risk management procedures are not
effective, such deficiencies must be promptly escalated and remedied in accordance with the banking entity’s escalation procedures. A banking entity’s written policies and procedures must set forth the process for determining the circumstances under which a trading desk’s risk management strategies may be modified. In addition, risk management techniques and strategies developed and used by a trading desk must be independently tested or verified by management separate from the trading desk.

To control and limit the amount and types of financial instruments and risks that a trading desk may hold inconnection with its market makingrelated activities, a banking entity must establish, implement, maintain, and enforce reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing identifying and addressing specific limits on a trading desk’s market-maker inventory, risk management positions, and financial exposure. In particular, the compliance program must establish limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of its market making-related activities (including the factors prescribed by the near term customer demand requirement), on the amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory, the amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk may use for risk management purposes, the level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure, and the period of time a financial instrument may be held. 971 The limits would be set, as appropriate, and supported by an analysis for specific types of financial
instruments, levels of risk, and duration of holdings, which would also be required by the compliance appendix. This approach will build on existing risk management infrastructure for market-making activities that subject traders to a variety of internal, predefined limits. 972 Each of these limits is independent of the others, and a trading desk must maintain its aggregated market-making position within each of these limits, including by taking action to bring the trading desk into compliance with the limits as promptly as possible after the limit is

exceeded. 973 For example, if changing

market conditions cause an increase in one or more risks within the trading desk’s financial exposure and that

increased risk causes the desk to exceed one or more of its limits, the trading desk must take prompt action to reduce its risk exposure (either by hedging the risk or unwinding its existing positions) or receive approval of a temporary or permanent increase to its limit through the required escalation procedures.

The Agencies recognize that trading

desks’ limits will differ across asset classes and acknowledge that trading desks engaged in market making-related activities in less liquid asset classes, such as corporate bonds, certain derivatives, and securitized products, may require different inventory, risk exposure, and holding period limits than trading desks engaged in market


### 5888 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

974 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(C). 975 For example, if a U.S. corporate bond trading desk has a prescribed limit of $200 million net exposure to any single sector of related issuers, the desk’s limits may permit it to acquire a net economic exposure of $400 million long to issuer ABC and a net economic exposure of $300 million
short to issuer XYZ, where ABC and XYZ are in the same sector. This is because the trading desk’s net exposure to the sector would only be $100 million, which is within its limits. Even though the net exposure to this sector is within the trading desk’s prescribed limits, the desk would still need to be able to demonstrate how its net exposure of $400 million long to issuer ABC and $300 million short

to issuer XYZ is related to customer demand.

976 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(D).

977 For example, a banking entity may determine to permit temporary, short-term increases to a trading desk’s risk limits due to an increase in short-term credit spreads or in response to volatility in instruments in which the trading desk makes a market, provided the increased limit is consistent with the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. As noted above, other potential circumstances that could warrant changes to a trading desk’s limits include: A change in the pattern of customer needs, adjustments to the market maker’s business model
(e.g., new entrants or existing market makers trying to expand or contract their market share), or changes in market conditions. See supra note 937 and accompanying text. 978 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(E).

979 See ICI (Feb. 2012). making-related activities in more liquid
financial instruments, such as certain listed equity securities. Moreover, the types of risk factors for which limits are established should not be limited solely
to market risk factors. Instead, such

limits should also account for all risk factors that arise from the types of

financial instruments in which the trading desk is permitted to trade. In
addition, these limits should be sufficiently granular and focused on the particular types of financial instruments in which the desk may trade. For example, a trading desk that makes a

market in derivatives would have exposures to counterparty risk, among
others, and would need to have appropriate limits on such risk. Other types of limits that may be relevant for a trading desk include, among others, position limits, sector limits, and geographic limits.

A banking entity must have a

reasonable basis for the limits it establishes for a trading desk and must have a robust procedure for analyzing, establishing, and monitoring limits, as well as appropriate escalation procedures. 974 Among other things, the banking entity’s compliance program must provide for: (i) Written policies and procedures and internal controls establishing and monitoring specific limits for each trading desk; and (ii) analysis regarding how and why these limits are determined to be appropriate

and consistent with the nature andamount of the desk’s market makingrelated activities, including

considerations related to the near term customer demand requirement. In making these determinations, a banking entity should take into account and be consistent with the type(s) of financial instruments the desk is permitted to trade, the desk’s trading and risk management activities and strategies, the history and experience of the desk, and the historical profile of the desk’s

near term customer demand and market and other factors that may impact the reasonably expected near term demands

of customers.

The limits established by a banking entity should generally reflect the amount and types of inventory and risk that a trading desk holds to meet the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. As discussed above, while the trading desk’s market-maker inventory is directly limited by the reasonably expected near term demands of customers, the positions managed by the trading desk outside of its market-maker inventory are similarly constrained by the near term demand requirement because they must be designed to manage the risks of the market-maker inventory in accordance with the desk’s risk management procedures. As a result, the trading desk’s risk management positions and aggregate financial exposure are also limited by the current and reasonably expected

near term demands of customers. A trading desk’s market-maker inventory, risk management positions, or financial exposure would not, however, be permissible under the market-makingexemption merely because the marketmaker inventory, risk management positions, or financial exposure happens to be within the desk’s prescribed

limits. 975

In addition, a banking entity must establish internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits, including the frequency, nature, and extent of a trading desk exceeding its limits and patterns regarding the portions of the trading desk’s limits that are accounted for by the trading desk’s activity. 976 This may include the use of management and exception reports. Moreover, the compliance program must set forth a process for determining the circumstances under which a trading desk’s limits may be modified on a temporary or permanent basis (e.g., due to market changes or modifications to the trading desk’s strategy). 977 This process must cover potential scenarios when a trading desk’s limits should be raised, as well as potential scenarios when a trading desk’s limits should be lowered. For example, if a trading desk experiences reduced customer demand over a period of time, that trading desk’s

limits should be decreased to address the factors prescribed by the near term demand requirement.

A banking entity’s compliance program must also include escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed one or more of a trading desk’s limits, demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to one or more of a trading desk’s limits is

consistent with the near term customer demand requirement, and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval of any increase to one or more of a trading desk’s limits. 978 Thus, in order to increase a limit of a trading desk—on either a temporary or permanent basis—there must be an analysis of why such increase would be appropriate based on the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, including the factors identified in § 75.4(b)(2)(ii) of
the final rule, which must be independently reviewed. A banking entity also must maintain documentation and records with respect
to these elements, consistent with the requirement of § 75.20(b)(6).

As already discussed, commenters have represented that the compliance costs associated with the proposed rule, including the compliance program and metrics requirements, may be significant and ‘‘may dissuade a banking entity from attempting to comply with the market making-related activities exemption.’’ 979 The Agencies believe that a robust compliance program is necessary to ensure adherence to the rule and to prevent evasion, although, as discussed in Part VI.C.3., the Agencies are adopting a more tailored set of quantitative measurements to better focus on those that are most germane to evaluating market making-related activity. The Agencies acknowledge that the compliance program requirements for the market-making exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing, represent a new regulatory requirement for banking entities and the Agencies have thus been mindful that it may impose significant costs and may cause a banking entity to reconsiderwhether to conduct market makingrelated activities. Despite the potential costs of the compliance program, the Agencies believe they are warranted to ensure that the goals of the rule and statute will be met, such as promoting


### 5889 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

980 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358.

981 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(3); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358.

982 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68870 n.146; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8356 n.152.

983 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse
(Seidel); FTN; RBC; NYSE Euronext; MFA. These
comments are addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.4.c., infra. 984 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

RBC. See also FTN (stating that the principal requirement for such hedges should be that they reduce the risk of market making).

985 See NYSE Euronext (stating that the best hedge sometimes involves a variety of complex and dynamic transactions over the time in which an asset is held, which may fall outside the parameters of the exemption); MFA; JPMC.

986 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
Credit Suisse (Seidel); NYSE Euronext; MFA; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; RBC.

987 RBC.

988 See BoA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

989 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

990 See BoA.

991 See SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). 992 See Alfred Brock.

993 See Occupy.

994 See infra notes 1073 to 1075 and accompanying text.

995 See Public Citizen.

996 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse
(Seidel); FTN; RBC; NYSE Euronext; MFA.

997 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(B); supra Part

VI.A.3.c.3.c. the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the

United States.

4. Market Making-Related Hedging

a. Proposed Treatment of Market Making-Related Hedging

In the proposal, certain hedging transactions related to market making

were considered to be made in connection with a banking entity’s market making-related activity for purposes of the market-making exemption. The Agencies explained that where the purpose of a transaction is to hedge a market making-related position,it would appear to be market makingrelated activity of the type described in section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act. 980 To qualify for the market-making exemption, a hedging transaction would have been required to meet certain requirements under § 75.4(b)(3) of the proposed rule. This provision required that the purchase or sale of a financial instrument: (i) Be conducted to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity

in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings acquired pursuant to the market-making exemption; and (ii) meet the criteria specified in § 75.5(b) of the proposed hedging exemption and, where applicable, § 75.5(c) of the proposal. 981 In the proposal, the Agencies noted that a market maker may often make a market in one type of financial instrument and hedge its activities using

different financial instruments in which it does not make a market. The Agencies stated that this type of hedging

transaction would meet the terms of the market-making exemption if the hedging transaction met the requirements of § 75.4(b)(3) of the proposed rule. 982

b. Comments on the Proposed Treatment of Market Making-Related Hedging

Several commenters recommended that the proposed market-making exemption be modified to establish a more permissive standard for market maker hedging. 983 A few of these
commenters stated that, rather thanapplying the standards of the riskmitigating hedging exemption to market maker hedging, a market maker’s hedge position should be permitted as long as it is designed to mitigate the risk associated with positions acquiredthrough permitted market makingrelated activities. 984 Other commenters emphasized the need for flexibility to permit a market maker to choose the most effective hedge. 985 In general, these commenters expressed concern that limitations on hedging market making-related positions may cause a reduction in liquidity, wider spreads, or increased risk and trading costs for

market makers. 986 For example, one commenter stated that ‘‘[t]he ability of market makers to freely offset or hedge positions is what, in most cases, makes them willing to buy and sell [financial
instruments] to and from customers, clients or counterparties,’’ so ‘‘[a]nyimpediment to hedging market makingrelated positions will decrease the willingness of banking entities to make markets and, accordingly, reduce liquidity in the marketplace.’’ 987

In addition, some commenters expressed concern that certain requirements in the proposed hedging exemption may result in a reduction in market-making activities under certain

circumstances. 988 For example, one commenter expressed concern that the proposed hedging exemption would require a banking entity to identify and tag hedging transactions when hedges in a particular asset class take place alongside a trading desk’s customer flow trading and inventory management in

that same asset class. 989 Further, a few commenters represented that the proposed reasonable correlation requirement in the hedging exemption could impact market making by discouraging market makers from entering into customer transactions that do not have a direct hedge 990 or making

it more difficult for market makers to cost-effectively hedge the fixed income securities they hold in inventory, including hedging such inventory positions on a portfolio basis. 991 One commenter, however, stated that the proposed approach is effective. 992

Another commenter indicated that it is confusing to include hedging within the market-making exemption and suggested that a market maker be required to rely on the hedging exemption under § 75.5 of the proposed rule for its hedging activity. 993

As noted above in the discussion of comments on the proposed source of revenue requirement, a number of commenters expressed concern that the proposed rule assumed that there are effective, or perfect, hedges for all market making-related positions. 994

Another commenter stated that market makers should be required to hedge whenever an inventory imbalance arises, and the absence of a hedge in such circumstances may evidence prohibited proprietary trading. 995

c. Treatment of Market Making-Related Hedging in the Final Rule

Unlike the proposed rule, the final rule does not require that market making-related hedging activities separately comply with therequirements found in the riskmitigating hedging exemption if conducted or directed by the sametrading desk conducting the marketmaking activity. Instead, the Agencies are including requirements for market making-related hedging activities within the market-making exemption in

response to comments. 996 As discussed above, a trading desk’s compliance program must include written policies and procedures, internal controls, independent testing and analysis identifying and addressing the products, instruments, exposures, techniques, and strategies a trading desk may use tomanage the risks of its market makingrelated activities, as well as the actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significant mitigate the risks of its financial exposure consistent with its required limits. 997 The Agencies believe this approach addresses commenters’ concerns that limitations on hedging market making-related positions may cause a reduction in liquidity, wider spreads, or increased risk and trading

costs for market makers because it allows banking entities to determine


### 5890 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

998 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
Credit Suisse (Seidel); NYSE Euronext; MFA; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; RBC.

999 See BoA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1000 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68961.

1001 See, e.g., letter from JPMC (stating that, to minimize risk management costs, firms commonly organize their market-making activities so that risks delivered to client-facing desks are aggregated and passed by means of internal transactions to a single utility desk and suggesting this be recognized as permitted market making-related behavior). 1002 See final rule § 75.5(c).

1003 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(vii).

1004 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68872; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358.

1005 See Prof. Duffie; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); John Reed; Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb.
2012); Public Citizen.

1006 See FTN; Alfred Brock. 1007 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

1008 See Occupy.

1009 See Occupy; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1010 See AllianceBernstein; Prof. Duffie; Investure;
STANY; Chamber (Dec. 2011).

1011 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Public

Citizen; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; John Reed;

AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Prof. Duffie; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). These
comments are addressed in note 1032, infra.

1012 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Public

Citizen.

1013 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012)

1014 See Occupy.

1015 See John Reed; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Prof. Duffie (‘‘A trader’s incentives for risk taking can be held in check by vesting incentive-based compensation over a substantial period of time. Pending compensation can thus be forfeited if a trader’s negligence causes substantial losses or if his or her employer fails.’’); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1016 See John Reed.

1017 See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; John Reed; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). how best to manage the risks of trading desks’ market making-related activities through reasonable policies and procedures, internal controls, independent testing, and analysis, rather than requiring compliance with the specific requirements of the hedging exemption. 998 Further, this approach

addresses commenters’ concerns about the impact of certain requirements of the hedging exemption on market making-related activities. 999

The Agencies believe it is consistent

with the statute’s reference to ‘‘market making-related’’ activities to permit market making-related hedging activities under this exemption. In addition, the Agencies believe it is appropriate to require a trading desk to appropriately manage its risks, consistent with its risk management procedures and limits, because management of risk is a key factor thatdistinguishes permitted market makingrelated activity from impermissible proprietary trading. As noted in the proposal, while ‘‘a market maker attempts to eliminate some [of the risks arising from] its retained principal positions and risks by hedging or otherwise managing those risks [ ], a proprietary trader seeks to capitalize on those risks, and generally only hedges or manages a portion of those risks when doing so would improve the potential profitability of the risk it retains.’’ 1000

The Agencies recognize that some banking entities may manage the risks associated with market making at a

different level than the individual trading desk. 1001 While this risk management activity is not permitted under the market-making exemption, it may be permitted under the hedging exemption, provided the requirements of that exemption are met. Thus, the Agencies believe banking entities will continue to have options available that allow them to efficiently hedge the risks arising from their market-making operations. Nevertheless, the Agencies

understand that this rule will result in

additional documentation or otherpotential burdens for market makingrelated hedging activity that is not conducted by the trading desk responsible for the market-making positions being hedged. 1002 As discussed in Part VI.A.4.d.4., hedging conducted by a different organizational unit than the trading desk that is responsible for the underlying positions presents an increased risk of evasion, so the Agencies believe it is appropriate for such hedging activity to be required to comply with the hedging exemption, including the associated documentation requirement.

5. Compensation Requirement

a. Proposed Compensation Requirement

Section 75.4(b)(2)(vii) of the proposed market-making exemption would have required that the compensation arrangements of persons performing market making-related activities at the banking entity be designed not to reward proprietary risk-taking. 1003 In the proposal, the Agencies noted that activities for which a banking entity has established a compensation incentive structure that rewards speculation in, and appreciation of, the market value of a financial instrument position held in inventory, rather than success in providing effective and timely intermediation and liquidity services to
customers, would be inconsistent with the proposed market-making exemption.

The Agencies stated that under the proposed rule, a banking entity relying on the market-making exemption should provide compensation incentives that primarily reward customer revenues
and effective customer service, not proprietary risk-taking. However, the Agencies noted that a banking entity relying on the proposed market-making exemption would be able to appropriately take into account revenues resulting from movements in the price of principal positions to the

extent that such revenues reflect the effectiveness with which personnel have managed principal risk

retained. 1004

b. Comments Regarding the Proposed Compensation Requirement

Several commenters recommended certain revisions to the proposed compensation requirement. 1005 Two commenters stated that the proposed requirement is effective, 1006 while one

commenter stated that it should be removed from the rule. 1007 Moreover, in addressing this proposed requirement, commenters provided views on:

identifiable characteristics of compensation arrangements that incentivize prohibited proprietary trading, 1008 methods of monitoring compliance with this requirement, 1009 and potential negative incentives or outcomes this requirement could

cause. 1010

With respect to suggested modifications to this requirement, a few commenters suggested that a market maker’s compensation should be subject

to additional limitations. 1011 For example, two commenters stated that compensation should be restricted to particular sources, such as fees, commissions, and spreads. 1012 One commenter suggested that compensation should not be symmetrical between gains and losses and, further, that trading gains reflecting an unusually high variance in position values should either not be reflected in compensation

and bonuses or should be less reflected than other gains and losses. 1013 Another

commenter recommended that the Agencies remove ‘‘designed’’ from the rule text and provide greater clarity about how a banking entity’s compensation regime must be

structured. 1014 Moreover, a number of commenters stated that compensation should be vested for a period of time, such as until the trader’s market making positions have been fully unwound and are no longer in the banking entity’s inventory. 1015 As one commenter explained, such a requirement would discourage traders from carrying inventory and encourage them to get out of positions as soon as possible. 1016

Some commenters also recommended that compensation be risk adjusted. 1017


### 5891 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1018 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley.

1019 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC.

1020 See Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies respond to these comments in note 1026 and its accompanying text, infra.

1021 See Occupy; Alfred Brock.

1022 See Occupy. The Agencies respond to this

comment in Part VI.A.3.c.5.c., infra.

1023 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1024 See Occupy.

1025 See AllianceBernstein; Investure; Prof. Duffie;
STANY. This issue is addressed in note 1032, infra. 1026 See AllianceBernstein; Investure.

1027 See Prof. Duffie.

1028 See STANY.

1029 See Chamber (Dec. 2011).

1030 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(v).

1031 See Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 1032 Because the Agencies are not limiting a market maker’s compensation to specific sources, such as fees, commissions, and bid-ask spreads, as recommended by a few commenters, the Agencies do not believe the compensation requirement in the

final rule will incentivize market makers to widen their quoted spreads or charge higher fees and commissions, as suggested by certain other

commenters. See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Public
Citizen; AllianceBernstein; Investure. In addition, the Agencies note that an approach requiring
revenue from fees, commissions, and bid-ask spreads to be fully distinguished from revenue from price appreciation can raise certain practical
difficulties, as discussed in Part VI.A.3.c.7. The Agencies also are not requiring compensation to be vested for a period of time, as recommended by

some commenters to reduce traders’ incentives for undue risk-taking. The Agencies believe the final rule includes sufficient controls around risk-taking activity without a compensation vesting requirement. See John Reed; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Prof. Duffie; Sens. Merkley
& Levin (Feb. 2012).

1033 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(iv); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68872; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at

8357–8358.

1034 See Occupy; Alfred Brock.

1035 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that if the requirement is not removed from

Continued A few commenters indicated that the proposed approach may be too

restrictive. 1018 Two of these commenters stated that the compensation requirement should instead be set forth as guidance in Appendix B. 1019 In addition, two commenters requested that the Agencies clarify that compensation arrangements must be designed not to reward prohibited proprietary risk-taking. These

commenters were concerned the proposed approach may restrict a banking entity’s ability to provide compensation for permitted activities, which also involve proprietary trading. 1020

Two commenters discussed

identifiable characteristics of compensation arrangements that clearly incentivize prohibited proprietary trading. 1021 For example, one commenter stated that rewarding pure profit and loss, without consideration for the risk that was assumed to capture
it, is an identifiable characteristic of an arrangement that incentivizes proprietary risk-taking. 1022 For purposes of monitoring and ensuring compliance with this requirement, one commenter noted that existing Board regulations for systemically important banking entities require comprehensive firm-wide policies that determine compensation.

This commenter stated that those regulations, along with appropriately
calibrated metrics, should ensure that compensation arrangements are not designed to reward prohibited proprietary risk-taking. 1023 For similar purposes, another commenter suggested that compensation incentives should be based on a metric that meaningfully accounts for the risk underlying profitability. 1024

Certain commenters expressed concern that the proposed compensation requirement could

incentivize market makers to act in a way that would not be beneficial to customers or market liquidity. 1025 For example, two commenters expressed concern that the requirement could

cause market makers to widen their spreads or charge higher fees because their personal compensation depends

on these factors. 1026 One commenter stated that the proposed requirement could dampen traders’ incentives and discretion and may make market makers less likely to accept trades involving significant increases in risk or profit. 1027 Another commenter expressed the view that profitability-based compensation arrangements encourage traders to

exercise due care because such arrangements create incentives to avoid

losses. 1028 Finally, one commenter stated that compliance with the proposed requirement may be difficult or impossible if the Agencies do not

take into account the incentive-based compensation rulemaking. 1029

c. Final Compensation Requirement

Similar to the proposed rule, the market-making exemption requires that the compensation arrangements of persons performing the banking entity’s market making-related activities, as described in the exemption, are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading. 1030 The language of the final compensation requirement has been modified in response to comments expressing concern about the proposed language regarding ‘‘proprietary risk-taking.’’ 1031 The Agencies note that the Agencies do not intend to preclude an employee of a market-making desk from being compensated for successful marketmaking, which involves some risktaking.

The Agencies continue to hold the view that activities for which a banking entity has established a compensation

incentive structure that rewards speculation in, and appreciation of, the market value of a position held in inventory, rather than use of that inventory to successfully provide effective and timely intermediation and liquidity services to customers, are inconsistent with permitted market making-related activities. Although abanking entity relying on the marketmaking exemption may appropriately take into account revenues resulting from movements in the price of principal positions to the extent that

such revenues reflect the effectiveness with which personnel have managed retained principal risk, a banking entity relying on the market-making exemption should provide compensation incentives that primarily reward customer revenues and effective customer service, not prohibited proprietary trading. 1032 For example, a compensation plan based purely on net profit and loss with no consideration for inventory control or risk undertaken to achieve those profits would not be consistent with the market-making exemption.

6. Registration Requirement

a. Proposed Registration Requirement

Under § 75.4(b)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule, a banking entity relying on the market-making exemption with respect to trading in securities or certain derivatives would be required to be appropriately registered as a securities dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer, or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such type of dealer, under applicable
securities or commodities laws. Further, if the banking entity was engaged in the business of a securities dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer

outside the United States in a manner for which no U.S. registration is required, the banking entity would be required to be subject to substantive regulation of its dealing business in the jurisdiction in which the business is

located. 1033

b. Comments on the Proposed Registration Requirement

A few commenters stated that the proposed dealer registration requirement is effective. 1034 However, a number of commenters opposed the proposed dealer registration requirement in whole or in part. 1035


### 5892 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

the rule, then it should only be an indicative factor of market making); Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1036 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC. This issue is addressed in note 1044 and its accompanying text, infra.

1037 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1038 See JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1039 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). See also Morgan Stanley (requesting the addition of the phrase ‘‘to the extent it is legally required to be subject to such regulation’’ to the non-U.S. dealer provisions).

1040 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; ISDA (Feb. 2012). Rather than remove the requirement entirely, one commenter recommended that the Agencies move the dealer registration requirement to proposed Appendix B, which would allow the Agencies to take into account the facts and circumstances of a particular trading activity. See
JPMC.

1041 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1042 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). 1043 See CME Group.

1044 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1045 See ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1046 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1047 See final rule § 75.4(b)(2)(vi).

1048 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.5.b. One commenter expressed concern that the instruments listed in § 75.4(b)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule could be interpreted as limiting the availability of the market-making exemption to other instruments, such as exchange-traded futures and options. In response to this comment, the Agencies note that the reference to particular instruments in § 75.4(b)(2)(iv) was intended to reflect that trading in certain types of instruments gives rise to dealer registration requirements. This provision was notintended to limit the availability of the marketmaking exemption to certain types of financial

instruments. See CME Group.

1049 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley. 1050 In response to commenters who stated that the dealer registration requirement should be removed from the rule because, among other things, registration as a dealer does not distinguish between permitted market making and impermissible proprietary trading, the Agencies recognize that acting as a registered dealer does not ensure that a banking entity is engaged in permitted market making-related activity. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; ISDA (Feb. 2012). However, this requirement recognizes that registration as a dealer is an indicator of market making-related activities in the circumstances in which a person is legally obligated to be a registered

dealer to act as a market maker.

1051 A banking entity relying on the marketmaking exemption for transactions in securitybased swaps would generally be required to be a registered security-based swap dealer and would not be required to be a registered securities dealer. However, a banking entity may be required to bea registered securities dealer if it engages in marketmaking transactions involving security-based swaps with persons that are not eligible contract participants. The definition of ‘‘dealer’’ in section 3(a)(5) of the Exchange Act generally includes ‘‘any person engaged in the business of buying and selling securities (not including security-based swaps, other than security-based swaps with or for persons that are not eligible contract participants), for such person’s own account.’’ 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(5).

To the extent, if any, that a banking entity relies on the market-making exemption for its trading in municipal securities or government securities, rather than the exemption in § 75.6(a) of the final rule, this provision may require the banking entity to be registered or licensed as a municipal securities dealer or government securities dealer.

1052 As noted above, under certain circumstances,a banking entity acting as market maker in securityCommenters’ primary concern with the requirement appeared to be its application to market making-related

activities outside of the United States for which no U.S. registration is required. 1036 For example, several commenters stated that many non-U.S. markets do not provide substantive regulation of dealers for all asset

classes. 1037 In addition, two commenters stated that booking entities may be able to rely on intra-group exemptions under local law rather than carrying dealer registrations, or a banking entity may execute customer trades through an international dealer but book the position in a non-dealer entity for capital adequacy and risk

management purposes. 1038 Several of these commenters requested, at a minimum, that the dealer registrationrequirement not apply to dealers in nonU.S. jurisdictions. 1039

In addition, with respect to the provisions that would generally require a banking entity to be a form of SEC- orCFTC-registered dealer for marketmaking activities in securities or
derivatives in the United States, a few commenters stated that these provisions

should be removed from the rule. 1040 These commenters represented that removing these provisions would be appropriate for several reasons. For example, one commenter stated that dealer registration does not help distinguish between market making and speculative trading. 1041 Another

commenter indicated that effective market making often requires a banking entity to trade on several exchange and platforms in a variety of markets, including through legal entities other than SEC- or CFTC-registered dealer

entities. 1042 One commenter expressed general concern that the proposedrequirement may result in the marketmaking exemption being unavailable for market making in exchange-traded futures and options because those markets do not have a corollary to dealer registration requirements in securities, swaps, and security-based swaps markets. 1043

Some commenters expressed particular concern about the provisions that would generally require registration as a swap dealer or a security-based swap dealer. 1044 For example, one commenter expressed concern that these provisions may require banking regulators to redundantly enforce CFTC and SEC registration requirements. Moreover, according to this commenter, the proposed definitions of ‘‘swap dealer’’ and ‘‘security-based swap

dealer’’ do not focus on the market making core of the swap dealing

business. 1045 Another commenter stated that incorporating the proposed definitions of ‘‘swap dealer’’ and ‘‘security-based swap dealer’’ is contrary

to the Administrative Procedure Act. 1046

c. Final Registration Requirement

The final requirement of the marketmaking exemption provides that the banking entity must be licensed orregistered to engage in market makingrelated activity in accordance with applicable law. 1047 The Agencies have considered comments regarding the dealer registration requirement in the proposed rule. 1048 In response to comments, the Agencies have narrowed the scope of the proposed requirement’s application to banking entities engaged in market making-related activity in foreign jurisdictions. 1049 Rather than requiring these banking entities to be subject to substantive regulation of their dealing business in the relevant foreign jurisdiction, the final rule only require a banking entity to be a registered dealer in a foreign jurisdiction to the extent required by applicable foreign law. The Agencies have also simplified the language of the proposed requirement, although the Agencies have not modified the scope of the requirement with respect to U.S. dealer registration requirements.

This provision is not intended to expand the scope of licensing or registration requirements under relevant U.S. or foreign law that are applicableto a banking entity engaged in marketmaking activities. Instead, this provision recognizes that compliance with applicable law is an essential indicator that a banking entity is engaged in market-making activities. 1050 For example, a U.S. banking entity would be expected to be an SEC-registered dealer to rely on the market-making exemption for trading in securities—other than exempted securities, security-based swaps, commercial paper, bankers acceptances, or commercial bills— unless the banking entity is exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as a dealer. 1051 Similarly, a U.S. banking entity is expected to be aCFTC-registered swap dealer or SECregistered security-based swap dealer to rely on the market-making exemption for trading in swaps or security-based swaps, respectively, 1052 unless the


### 5893 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

based swaps may be required to be a registered

securities dealer. See supra note 1051.

1053 For example, a banking entity meeting the

conditions of the de minimis exception in SEC Rule 3a71–2 under the Exchange Act would not need to be a registered security-based swap dealer to act as a market maker in security-based swaps. See 17

CFR 240.3a71–2.

1054 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1055 See 7 U.S.C. 1a(49)(A); 15 U.S.C.
78c(a)(71)(A).

1056 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley. This is consistent with one commenter’s suggestion that the Agencies add ‘‘to the extent it is legally required to be subject to such regulation’’ to the non-U.S. dealer provisions. See Morgan Stanley. 1057 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(v).

1058 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68872; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358.

1059 These concerns are addressed in Part

VI.A.3.c.7.c., infra.

1060 See infra note 1103 (responding to these
comments).

1061 See, e.g., NYSE Euronext; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); STANY; BlackRock; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb.
2012); ACLI (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; PUC Texas; SSgA (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012) Invesco; MetLife;

MFA. 1062 See, e.g., Morgan Stanley; BoA; BlackRock; T. Rowe Price; Goldman (Prop. Trading); NYSE Euronext (suggesting that principal trading by market makers in large sizes is essential in some securities, such as an AP’s trading in ETFs); Prof. Duffie; SSgA (Feb. 2012); CIEBA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); MFA. To explain its concern, one commenter stated that bid-ask spreads are useful to capture the concept of market-making revenues when a market maker is intermediating on

a close to real-time basis between balanced customer buying and selling interest for the same
instrument, but such close-in-time intermediation does not occur in many large or illiquid assets, where demand gaps may be present for days, weeks,

or months. See Morgan Stanley.

1063 See Capital Group.

1064 See NYSE Euronext; CIEBA (stating that if the rule discourages market makers from holding inventory, there will be reduced liquidity for
investors and issuers).

1065 See NYSE Euronext. For a more in-depth discussion of comments regarding the benefits of permitting market makers to hold and manage inventory, see Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.vi., infra.

1066 See, e.g., Wellington; CIEBA; MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; ICI (Feb.
2012) BoA.

1067 See MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012) SSgA (Feb. 2012). banking entity is exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as a swap dealer or security-based swap

dealer. 1053 In response to comments on whether this provision should generally require registration as a swap dealer or security-based swap dealer to make a market in swaps or security-based

swaps, 1054 the Agencies continue to believe that this requirement is appropriate. In general, a person that is engaged in making a market in swaps or security-based swaps or other activity causing oneself to be commonly known in the trade as a market maker in swaps or security-based swaps is required to be a registered swap dealer or registered security-based swap dealer, unless exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such. 1055 As noted above, compliance with applicable law is an essential indicator that a banking entity is engaged in market-making

activities.

As noted above, the Agencies have determined that, rather than require a banking entity engaged in the business of a securities dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer outside the United States to be subject to substantive regulation of its dealing business in the foreign jurisdiction in which the business is located, a banking entity’s dealing activity outside the U.S. should only be subject to licensing or registration requirements under applicable foreign law (provided no U.S. registration or licensing requirements apply to the banking entity’s activities). As a result, this requirement will not impact a banking entity’s ability toengage in permitted market makingrelated activities in a foreign jurisdiction that does not provide for substantive regulation of dealers. 1056

7. Source of Revenue Analysis

a. Proposed Source of Revenue Requirement

To qualify for the market-making exemption, the proposed rule required that the market making-related activities of the trading desk or other organizational unit be designed to generate revenues primarily from fees, commissions, bid/ask spreads or other income not attributable to appreciation

in the value of financial instrument positions it holds in trading accounts or the hedging of such positions. 1057 This proposed requirement was intended to

ensure that activities conducted in reliance on the market-making exemption demonstrate patterns of revenue generation and profitability
consistent with, and related to, the intermediation and liquidity services a market maker provides to its customers, rather than changes in the market value of the positions or risks held in inventory. 1058

b. Comments Regarding the Proposed Source of Revenue Requirement

As discussed in more detail below, many commenters expressed concern about the proposed source of revenue requirement. These commenters raised a number of concerns including, among others, the proposed requirement’s potential impact on a market maker’s inventory or on costs to customers, the difficulty of differentiating revenues from spreads and revenues from price appreciation in certain markets, and the

need for market makers to be compensated for providing

intermediation services. 1059 Several of these commenters requested that the proposed source of revenue requirement

be removed from the rule or modified in certain ways. Some commenters, however, expressed support for the proposed requirement or requested that the Agencies place greater restrictions on a banking entity’s permissible

sources of revenue under the marketmaking exemption. 1060

i. Potential Restrictions on Inventory,
Increased Costs for Customers, and Other Changes to Market-Making

Services

Many commenters stated that the proposed source of revenue requirement may limit a market maker’s ability to hold sufficient inventory to facilitate

customer demand. 1061 Several of these commenters expressed particular concern about applying this requirement to less liquid markets or to facilitating large customer positions, where a market maker is more likely to hold inventory for a longer period of time and has increased risk of potential price appreciation (or depreciation). 1062 Further, another commenter questioned how the proposed requirement would apply when unforeseen market pressure or disappearance of customer demand results in a market maker holding a particular position in inventory for longer than expected. 1063 In response to this proposed requirement, a few commenters stated that it is important

for market makers to be able to hold a certain amount of inventory to: provide liquidity (particularly in the face of

order imbalances and market volatility), 1064 facilitate large trades, and hedge positions acquired in the course of market making. 1065

Several commenters expressed concern that the proposed source of revenue requirement may incentivize a market maker to widen its quoted spreads or otherwise impose higher fees

to the detriment of its customers. 1066 For example, some commenters stated that the proposed requirement could result in a market maker having to sell a position in its inventory within an artificially prescribed period of time
and, as a result, the market maker would pay less to initially acquire the position

from a customer. 1067 Other commenters represented that the proposed source of revenue requirement would compel market makers to hedge their exposure


### 5894 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1068 See SSgA (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas.

1069 See ICI (Feb. 2012) SSgA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); BoA.

1070 See CIEBA (arguing that banking entities may be reluctant to provide liquidity when markets are declining and there are more sellers than buyers because it would be necessary to hold positions in inventory to avoid losses).

1071 See Credit Suisse (Seidel) (arguing that banking entities are likely to cease being market makers if they are: (i) Unable to take into account the likely direction of a financial instrument, or (ii)

forced to take losses if a financial instrument moves against them, but cannot take gains if the instrument’s price moves in their favor); STANY (contending that banking entities cannot afford to maintain unprofitable or marginally profitable operations in highly competitive markets, so this requirement would cause banking entities to eliminate a majority of their market-making
functions).

1072 See IR&M (arguing that domestic corporate and securitized credit markets are too large and heterogeneous to be served appropriately by a primarily agency-based trading model).

1073 See Wellington; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; PUC Texas (contending that it is impossible to predict the behavior of even the most highly correlated hedge in comparison to the underlying position); CIEBA; SSgA (Feb. 2012);
AllianceBernstein; Investure; Invesco.

1074 See Morgan Stanley; Credit Suisse (Seidel); SSgA (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; Wellington;
AllianceBernstein; Investure. 1075 See Wellington. Moreover, one commenter stated that, as a general matter, market makers need to be compensated for bearing risk related to providing immediacy to a customer. This commenter stated that ‘‘[t]he greater the inventory risk faced by the market maker, the higher the expected return (compensation) that the market maker needs,’’ to compensate the market maker for bearing the risk and reward its specialization skills
in that market (e.g., its knowledge about market conditions and early indicators that may imply future price movements in a particular direction).
This commenter did not, however, discuss the source of revenue requirement in the proposed rule.

See Thakor Study.

1076 See Capital Group; Prof. Duffie; Investure;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); STANY; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); RBC; PNC.

1077 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Sumitomo Trust; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; RBC; Capital Group.

1078 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1079 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012). See also Barclays (arguing that a bid-ask spread cannot be defined on a consistent basis with respect to many
instruments).

1080 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Morgan Stanley (‘‘Observable, actionable, bid/ask spreads exist in only a small subset of institutional products and markets. Indicative bid/ask spreads may be observable for certain products, but this pricing would typically be specific to small size standard lot trades and would not represent a spread applicable to larger and/or more illiquid trades. End-of-day valuations for assets are calculated, but they are not an effective proxy for real-time bid/ask spreads because of intra-day price movements.’’); RBC; Capital Group (arguing that bid-ask spreads in fixed-income markets are not always quantifiable or well defined and can fluctuate widely within a trading day because of small or odd lot trades, price discovery activity, a lack of availability to cover shorts, or external factors not directly related to the security being traded).

1081 See Capital Group; CIEBA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012). These commenters stated that the requirement may be problematic for the fixed-income markets because, for example, market makers must hold inventory in these markets for a longer period of time than in more liquid markets. See id.

1082 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012) (stating that these markets are characterized by even less liquidity and less frequent trading than the U.S. corporate bond market). This commenter also stated that in markets where trades are large and less frequent, such as the market for customized securitized products, appreciation in price of one position may be a predominate contributor to the overall profit and loss of the trading unit. See id.

1083 See BoA. According to this commenter, the distinction between capturing a spread and price appreciation is fundamentally flawed in some markets, like equity derivatives, because the market does not trade based on movements of a particular security or underlying instrument. This commenter indicated that expected returns are instead based on the bid-ask spread the market maker charges for implied volatility as reflected in options premiums and hedging of the positions. See id.

1084 See CIEBA (stating that because it would be difficult for a market maker to enter promptly into an offsetting swap, the market maker would not be able to generate income from the spread).

1085 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). This commenter questioned whether proposed Appendix B’s reference to ‘‘unexpected market disruptions’’ as an explanatory fact and circumstance was intended to permit such market making. See id. to price movements, which would likely

increase the cost of intermediation. 1068

Some commenters stated that the proposed source of revenue requirement may make a banking entity less willing

to make markets in instruments that it may not be able to resell immediately or

in the short term. 1069 One commenter indicated that this concern may be heightened in times of market stress. 1070 Further, a few commenters expressed the view that the proposed requirement would cause banking entities to exit the market-making business due to restrictions on their ability to make a profit from market-making activities. 1071 Moreover, in one commenter’s opinion, the proposed requirement would effectively compel market makers to trade on an agency basis. 1072

ii. Certain Price Appreciation-Related Profits Are an Inevitable or Important Component of Market Making

A number of commenters indicated that market makers will inevitably make some profit from price appreciation of certain inventory positions because changes in market values cannot be precisely predicted or hedged. 1073 In particular, several commenters emphasized that matched or perfect hedges are generally unavailable for most types of positions. 1074 According to one commenter, a provision that effectively requires a market-making business to hedge all of its principal positions would discourage essential market-making activity. The commenter explained that effective hedges may be unavailable in less liquid markets and hedging can be costly, especially in

relation to the relative risk of a trade and hedge effectiveness. 1075 A few

commenters further indicated that making some profit from price appreciation is a natural part of market making or is necessary to compensate a market maker for its willingness to take a position, and its associated risk (e.g., the risk of market changes or decreased value), from a customer. 1076

iii. Concerns Regarding the Workability of the Proposed Standard in Certain

Markets or Asset Classes

Some commenters represented that it

would be difficult or burdensome toidentify revenue attributable to the bidask spread versus revenue arising from price appreciation, either as a general matter or for specific markets. 1077 For example, one commenter expressed the opinion that the difference between the bid-ask spread and price appreciation is ‘‘metaphysical’’ in some sense, 1078

while another stated that it is almostimpossible to objectively identify a bidask spread or to capture profit and loss solely from a bid-ask spread in most

markets. 1079 Other commenters represented that it is particularly

difficult to make this distinction when trades occur infrequently or where prices are not transparent, such as in the fixed-income market where no spread is published. 1080 Many commenters expressed particular concern about the proposed requirement’s application to specific markets, including: The fixed-income
markets; 1081 the markets for
commodities, derivatives, securitized products, and emerging market

securities; 1082 equity and physical commodity derivatives markets; 1083 and customized swaps used by customers of banking entities for hedging

purposes. 1084 Another commenter expressed general concern about extremely volatile markets, where market makers often see large upward or downward price swings over time. 1085

Two commenters emphasized that the revenues a market maker generates from hedging the positions it holds in inventory are equivalent to spreads in many markets. These commenters explained that, under these
circumstances, a market maker generates revenue from the difference between the customer price for the position and the banking entity’s price for the hedge. The commenters noted that proposed Appendix B expressly recognizes this in the case of derivatives and recommended that Appendix B’s


### 5895 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1086 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). In its discussion of ‘‘customer revenues,’’ Appendix B states: ‘‘In the
case of a derivative contract, these revenues reflect the difference between the cost of entering into the derivative contract and the cost of hedging incremental, residual risks arising from the contract.’’ Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8440. See also RBC (requesting clarification on how the proposed standard would apply if a market maker took an offsetting position
in a different instrument (e.g., a different bond) and inquiring whether, if the trader took the offsetting position, its revenue gain is attributable to price appreciation of the two offsetting positions or from the bid-ask spread in the respective bonds).

1087 See Prof. Duffie; NYSE Euronext; Capital Group; RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading). See also Thakor Study (discussing market makers’ role of providing ‘‘immediacy’’ in general).

1088 See CIEBA.

1089 See, e.g., JPMC; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; CFA Inst.; ICI (Feb. 2012) Flynn &

Fusselman.

1090 See, e.g., CIEBA; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Capital Group; RBC. In addition to the
concerns discussed above, one commenter stated that the proposed requirement may set limits on the
values of certain metrics, and it would be inappropriate to prejudge the appropriate results of

such metrics at this time. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1091 See, e.g., Barclays. This commenter providedalternative rule text stating that ‘‘market makingrelated activity is conducted by each trading unit such that its activities are reasonably designed to generate revenues primarily from fees, commissions, bid-ask spreads, or other income attributable to satisfying reasonably expected

customer demand.’’ See id.

1092 See Goldman (Prop. Trading) (suggesting that the Agencies use a metrics-based approach to focus on customer revenues, as measured by Spread Profit
and Loss (when it is feasible to calculate) or other metrics, especially because a proprietary trading desk would not be expected to earn any revenues this way). This commenter also indicated that the ‘‘primarily’’ standard in the proposed rule is problematic and can be read to mean ‘‘more than 50%,’’ which is different from Appendix B’s acknowledgment that the proportion of customer revenues relative to total revenues will vary by asset

class. See id.

1093 See BoA (recommending that the guidance state that the Agencies would consider the design

and mix of such revenues as an indicator of potentially prohibited proprietary trading, but only

for those markets for which revenues are quantifiable based on publicly available data, such as segments of certain highly liquid equity markets).

1094 See CFA Inst.

1095 See ICI (Feb. 2012).

1096 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Better Markets (Feb. 2012); FTN; Public Citizen; Occupy;

Alfred Brock.

1097 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012). See also Public Citizen (arguing that the imperfection of a hedge should signal potential disqualification of the underlying position from the market-making exemption).

1098 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). This commenter further suggested that the rule identify certain red flags and metrics that could be used to monitor this requirement, such as: (i) Failure to obtain relatively low ratios of revenue-to-risk, low volatility, and relatively high turnover; (ii) significant revenues from price appreciation relative to the value of securities being traded; (iii) volatile revenues from price appreciation; or (iv) revenue from price appreciation growing out of proportion to the risk undertaken with the security.

See id.

1099 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

1100 See Occupy; Better Markets (Feb. 2012). See

supra note 1108 (addressing these comments).

1101 See Occupy.

1102 See Occupy; Public Citizen.

1103 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(v).

1104 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.7.b. guidance on this point apply equally to certain non-derivative positions. 1086

A few commenters questioned how this requirement would work in the context of block trading or otherwise facilitating large trades, where a market maker may charge a premium or discount for taking on a large position to provide ‘‘immediacy’’ to its

customer. 1087 One commenter further explained that explicitly quoted bid-ask spreads are only valid for indicated trade sizes that are modest enough to have negligible market impact, and such spreads cannot be used for purposes of a significantly larger trade. 1088

iv. Suggested Modifications to the Proposed Requirement

To address some or all of the concerns discussed above, many commenters

recommended that the source of revenue requirement be modified 1089 or removed from the rule entirely. 1090 With respect to suggested changes, some commenters stated that the Agencies should modify the rule text, 1091 use a metrics-based approach to focus on

customer revenues, 1092 or replace the proposed requirement with guidance. 1093 Some commenters requested that the Agencies modify the focus of the requirement so that, for example, dealers’ market-making activities in illiquid securities can

function as close to normal as possible 1094 or market makers can take short-term positions that may ultimately result in a profit or loss. 1095 As discussed below, some commenters stated that the Agencies should modify the proposed requirement to place greater restrictions on market maker

revenue.

v. General Support for the Proposed Requirement or for Placing Greater

Restrictions on a Market Maker’s

Sources of Revenue

Some commenters expressed support for the proposed source of revenue requirement or stated that the requirement should be more

restrictive. 1096 For example, one of these

commenters stated that a real market maker’s trading book should be fully hedged, so it should not generate profits

in excess of fees and commissions except in times of rare and extraordinary market conditions. 1097 According to another commenter, the

final rule should make it clear that banking entities seeking to rely on the market-making exemption may not generally seek to profit from price
movements in their inventories, although their activities may give rise to modest and relatively stable profits arising from their limited inventory. 1098 One commenter recommended that the proposed requirement be interpreted to limit market making in illiquid positions because a banking entity cannot have the required revenue

motivation when it enters into a position for which there is no readily discernible exit price. 1099

Further, some commenters suggested that the Agencies remove the word ‘‘primarily’’ from the provision to limit banking entities to specified sources of

revenue. 1100 In addition, one of these commenters requested that the Agencies

restrict a market maker’s revenue to fees

and commissions and remove the

allowance for revenue from bid-ask spreads because generating bid-ask revenues relies exclusively on changes in market values of positions held in inventory. 1101 For enforcement purposes, a few commenters suggested that the Agencies require banking entities to disgorge any profit obtained from price appreciation. 1102

c. Final Rule’s Approach To Assessing

Revenues

Unlike the proposed rule, the final rule does not include a requirement that a trading desk’s market making-related activity be designed to generate revenueprimarily from fees, commissions, bidask spreads, or other income not attributable to appreciation in the value of a financial instrument or hedging. 1103 The revenue requirement was one of the most commented upon aspects of the market-making exemption in the proposal. 1104

The Agencies believe that an analysis of patterns of revenue generation and profitability can help inform a judgment regarding whether trading activity is

consistent with the intermediation and liquidity services that a market maker provides to its customers in the context of the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the relevant market, as opposed to prohibited proprietary trading activities. To facilitate this type of analysis, the Agencies have included a metrics data reporting requirement that is refined from the proposed metric regarding profits and losses. The Comprehensive

Profit and Loss Attribution metric collects information regarding the daily fluctuation in the value of a trading desk’s positions to various sources, along with its volatility, including: (i)


### 5896 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1105 See Appendix A of the final rule (describing the Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution metric). This approach is generally consistent with one commenter’s suggested metrics-based approach

to focus on customer-related revenues. See Goldman (Prop. Trading); see also Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (suggesting the use of metrics to monitor a firm’s source of revenue); proposed Appendix A.

1106 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.7. and infra Part

VI.C.3. 1107 The Agencies understand that some commenters interpreted the proposed requirement as requiring that both the bid-ask spread for a

financial instrument and the revenue a market maker acquired from such bid-ask spread through

a customer trade be identifiable on a close-to-realtime basis and readily distinguishable from any additional revenue gained from price appreciation (both on the day of the transaction and for the rest of the holding period). See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Sumitomo Trust; Morgan Stanley; Barclays; RBC; Capital Group. We recognize that such a requirement would be unduly burdensome. In fact, the proposal noted that bid-ask spreads or similar spreads may not be widely disseminated on a consistent basis or otherwise reasonably ascertainable in certain asset classes for purposes of the proposed Spread Profit and Loss metric in Appendix A of the proposal. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68958–68959; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8438. Moreover, the burden associated with the proposed requirement should be further reduced because we are not adopting a stand-alone requirement regarding a trading desk’s source of revenue. Instead, when and how a trading desk generates profit and loss from its trading activities is a factor that must be considered for purposes of the near term customer demand requirement. It is not a dispositive factor for determining compliance with the exemption.

Further, some commenters expressed concern that the proposed requirement suggested market makers were not permitted to profit from price appreciation, but rather only from observable spreads or explicit fees or commissions. See, e.g., Wellington, Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; PUC Texas; CIEBA; SSgA (Feb. 2012); AllianceBernstein; Investure; Invesco. The Agencies confirm that the intent of the market-making exemption is not to preclude a trading desk from generating any revenue from price appreciation. Because this approach clarifies that a trading desk’s source of revenue is not limited to its quoted spread, the Agencies believe this quantitative

measurement will address commenters concerns that the proposed source of revenue requirement

could create incentives for market makers to widen their spreads, result in higher transaction costs, require market makers to hedge any exposure to price movements, or discourage a trading desk from making a market in instruments that it may not be able to sell immediately. See Wellington; CIEBA; MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; ICI (Feb. 2012) BoA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). The modifications to this provision are designed to better reflect when, on average and across many transactions, profits are gained rather than how they are gained, similar to the way some firms measure their profit and loss today. See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1108 See, e.g., Wellington; CIEBA; MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); PUC Texas; ICI (Feb. 2012) BoA. The Agencies are not adopting an approach that limits a market maker to specified
revenue sources (e.g., fees, commissions, and spreads), as suggested by some commenters, due to

the considerations discussed above. See Occupy; Better Markets (Feb. 2012). In response to the proposed source of revenue requirement, some commenters noted that a market maker may charge a premium or discount for taking on a large position

from a customer. See Prof. Duffie; NYSE Euronext; Capital Group; RBC; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1109 See proposed rule § 75.4(b)(2)(vi).

1110 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873, 68960– 68961; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358, 8439–8440. Profit and loss attributable to current positions that were also held by the banking entity as of the end of the prior day (‘‘existing positions); (ii) profit and loss attributable to new positions resulting from the current day’s trading activity (‘‘new positions’’); and (iii) residual profit and loss that cannot be specifically attributed to existing positions or new positions. 1105

This quantitative measurement has certain conceptual similarities to the proposed source of revenue requirement in § 75.4(b)(2)(v) of the proposed rule and certain of the proposed quantitative

measurements. 1106 However, in response to comments on those provisions, the Agencies have determined to modify the focus from particular revenue sources (e.g., fees, commissions, bid-ask spreads, and price appreciation) to when the trading desk generates revenue from its positions. The Agencies recognize that when the trading desk is engaged in market making-related activities, the day one profit and loss component of the Comprehensive Profit and LossAttribution metric may reflect customergenerated revenues, like fees, commissions, and spreads (including embedded premiums or discounts), as well as that day’s changes in market value. Thereafter, profit and loss associated with the position carried in the trading desk’s book may reflect changes in market price until the position is sold or unwound. The Agencies also recognize that the metric contains a residual component for profit and loss that cannot be specifically attributed to existing positions or new positions.

The Agencies believe that evaluation of the Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution metric could provide valuable information regarding patterns of revenue generation by market-makingtrading desks involved in marketmaking activities that may warrant
further review of the desk’s activities, while eliminating the requirement from the proposal that the trading desk demonstrate that its primary source of
revenue, under all circumstances, is fees, commissions and bid/ask spreads.

This modified focus will reduce the burden associated with the proposed source of revenue requirement and better account for the varying depth and liquidity of markets. 1107 In addition, the Agencies believe these modifications appropriately address commenters’ concerns about the proposed source of revenue requirement and reduce the potential for negative market impacts of the proposed requirement cited by
commenters, such as incentives to widen spreads or disincentives to engage in market making in less liquid

markets. 1108 The Agencies recognize that this analysis is only informative over time,

and should not be determinative of an analysis of whether the amount, types,

and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties. The Agencies believe this quantitative measurement provides appropriate flexibility to obtain information on
market-maker revenues, which is designed to address commenters’ concerns about the proposal’s source of revenue requirement (e.g., the burdens associated with differentiating spread revenue from price appreciation revenue) while also helping assess patterns of revenue generation that may

be informative over time about whether a market maker’s activities are designed to facilitate and provide customer

intermediation.

8. Appendix B of the Proposed Rule

a. Proposed Appendix B Requirement

The proposed market-making exemption would have required that the market making-related activities of the trading desk or other organizational unit of the banking entity be consistent with the commentary in proposed Appendix

B. 1109 In this proposed Appendix, the Agencies provided overviews of permitted market making-related activity and prohibited proprietary trading activity. 1110

The proposed Appendix also set forth various factors that the Agencies proposed to use to help distinguish prohibited proprietary trading from permitted market making-related activity. More specifically, proposed Appendix B set forth six factors that, absent explanatory facts and circumstances, would cause particular trading activity to be considered prohibited proprietary trading activityand not permitted market makingrelated activity. The proposed factors focused on: (i) Retaining risk in excess of the size and type required to provide

intermediation services to customers (‘‘risk management factor’’); (ii) primarily generating revenues from price movements of retained principal positions and risks, rather than customer revenues (‘‘source of revenues factor’’); (iii) generating only very small


### 5897 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1111 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68873, 68961– 68963; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8358, 8440–8442.

1112 See MetLife; ACLI (Feb. 2012).

1113 See Alfred Brock. But see, e.g., Occupy (stating that the proposed commentary only accounts for the most liquid and transparent markets and fails to accurately describe market making in most illiquid or OTC markets).

1114 See Morgan Stanley; IIF; Sumitomo Trust; ISDA (Apr. 2012); BDA (Feb. 2012) (Oct. 2012) (stating that proposed Appendix B places too great of a focus on derivatives trading and does not reflect how principal trading operations in equity
and fixed income markets are structured). One of these commenters requested that the appendix be

modified to account for certain activities conducted in connection with market making in swaps. This commenter indicated that a swap dealer may not regularly enjoy a dominant flow of customer revenues and may consistently need to make revenue from its book management. In addition, the commenter stated that the appendix should recognize that making a two-way market may be a dominant theme, but there are certain to be frequent
occasions when, as a matter of market or internal
circumstances, a market maker is unavailable to

trade. See ISDA (Apr. 2012).

1115 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 1116 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). This commenter stated that, for example, Appendix B could deem market making involving widely-traded stocks and bonds issued by well-established corporations, government securities, or highly liquid asset-backed securities as the type of plain vanilla, low risk capital activities that are presumptively permitted, provided the activity is within certain, specified parameters for inventory levels, revenue-to-risk metrics, volatility, and hedging. See id.

1117 See Morgan Stanley; Flynn & Fusselman.

1118 See JPMC. In support of such an approach, the commenter argued that sometimes proposed § 75.4(b) and Appendix B addressed the same topic
and, when this occurs, it is unclear whether compliance with Appendix B constitutes compliance with § 75.4(b) or if additional compliance steps are required. See id.

1119 See Morgan Stanley.

1120 See NYSE Euronext; Morgan Stanley.

1121 See IAA.

1122 See Wellington; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012).

1123 See Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1124 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Chamber (Feb. 2012); ICFR; Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Occupy; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011);
Public Citizen; NYSE Euronext. But see Alfred Brock (stating that the proposed factors are
effective). 1125 See Wellington; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). In particular, proposed Appendix B provided that ‘‘The particular types of trading activity described in this appendix may involve the aggregate trading activities of a single trading unit, a significant number or series of transactions occurring at one or more trading units, or a single significant transaction, among other potential scenarios.’’ Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68961; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8441. The Agencies address commenters’ trade-by-trade concerns in

Part VI.A.3.c.1.c.ii., infra.

1126 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1127 See Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012). Specifically, commenters cited statements in proposed Appendix B indicating that market makers ‘‘typically only engage in transactions with non-customers to the extent that these transactions directly facilitate or support customer transactions.’’ On this issue, the appendix further stated that ‘‘a market maker generally only transacts with non-customers to the extent necessary to hedge or otherwise manage the risks of its market making-related activities, including managing its risk with respect to movements of the price of retained principal positions and risks, to acquire positions in amounts consistent with reasonably expected near term demand of its customers, or to sell positions acquired from its customers.’’ The appendix recognized, however, that the ‘‘appropriate proportion of a market maker’s transactions that are

with customers versus non-customers varies depending on the type of positions involved and the extent to which the positions are typically hedged in non-customer transactions.’’ Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68961; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8440. Commenters’ concerns regarding interdealer trading are addressed in Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.i., infra.

1128 See Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1129 See Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012). or very large amounts of revenue per unit of risk, not demonstrating consistent profitability, or demonstrating high earnings volatility
(‘‘revenues relative to risk factor’’); (iv) not trading through a trading system

that interacts with orders of others or primarily with customers of the banking entity’s market-making desk to provide liquidity services, or retaining principal positions in excess of reasonably expected near term customer demands (‘‘customer-facing activity factor’’); (v) routinely paying rather than earning fees, commissions, or spreads (‘‘payment of fees, commissions, and spreads factor’’); and (vi) providing compensation incentives to employeesthat primarily reward proprietary risktaking (‘‘compensation incentives
factor’’). 1111

b. Comments on Proposed Appendix B

Commenters expressed differing views about the accuracy of the commentary in proposed Appendix B and the appropriateness of including such commentary in the rule. For example, some commenters stated thatthe description of market makingrelated activity in the proposed appendix is accurate 1112 or appropriately accounts for differences among asset classes. 1113 Other commenters indicated that the appendix

is too strict or narrow. 1114 Some

commenters recommended that the Agencies revise proposed Appendix B’s approach by, for example, placing greater focus on what market making is
rather than what it is not, 1115 providing presumptions of activity that will betreated as permitted market makingrelated activity, 1116 re-formulating the appendix as nonbinding guidance, 1117 or moving certain requirements of the proposed exemption to the appendix. 1118 One commenter suggested the Agencies remove Appendix B from

the rule and instead use the conformance period to analyze and develop a body of supervisory guidance that appropriately characterizes the nature of market making-related activity. 1119

A few commenters expressed concernabout the appendix’s facts-andcircumstances-based approach to distinguishing between prohibited proprietary trading and permitted market making-related activity and stated that such an approach will make

it more difficult or burdensome for banking entities to comply with the proposed rule 1120 or will generate regulatory uncertainty. 1121 As discussed below, other commenters opposed proposed Appendix B because of its level of granularity 1122 or due to perceived restrictions on interdealer trading or generating revenue from retained principal positions or risks in the proposed appendix. 1123 A number of commenters expressed concern about the complexity or prescriptiveness of the six proposed factors for distinguishing permitted market making-related activity from prohibited proprietary trading. 1124

With respect to the level of granularity of proposed Appendix B, a number of commenters expressed concern that the reference to a ‘‘single significant transaction’’ indicated that the Agencies will review compliance with the proposed market-making exemption on a trade-by-trade basis and stated that assessing compliance at the

level of individual transactions would

be unworkable. 1125 One of these commenters further stated that assessing compliance at this level of granularity

would reduce a market maker’s willingness to execute a customer sell order as principal due to concern that the market maker may not be able to immediately resell such position. The commenter noted that this chilling effect would be heightened in declining

markets. 1126

A few commenters interpreted certain statements in proposed Appendix B as limiting interdealer trading and expressed concerns regarding potential limitations on this activity. 1127 These commenters emphasized that marketmakers may need to trade with noncustomers to: (i) Provide liquidity to other dealers and, indirectly, their
customers, or to otherwise allow customers to access a larger pool of liquidity; 1128 (ii) conduct price discovery to inform the prices a market
maker can offer to customers; 1129 (iii) unwind or sell positions acquired from


### 5898 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1130 See Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012) (stating that market makers in the corporate bond, interest rate derivative, and natural gas derivative markets frequently trade with other dealers to work down a concentrated position originating with a
customer trade).

1131 See Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012).

1132 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1133 See Chamber (Feb. 2012).

1134 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1135 See Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading). On this issue, Appendix B stated that certain types of ‘‘customer revenues’’ provide the primary source of a market maker’s profitability and, while a market maker also incurs losses or generates profits as price movements occur in its retained principal positions and risks, ‘‘such losses or profits are incidental to customer revenues and significantly limited by the banking entity’s hedging activities.’’ Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68960; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8440. The Agencies address commenters’ concerns about proposed requirements regarding a market maker’s
source of revenue in Part VI.A.3.c.7.c., infra.

1136 See Morgan Stanley.

1137 See supra note 1086 and accompanying text.

1138 See supra note 1111 and accompanying text. 1139 See Alfred Brock.

1140 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

1141 Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1142 The proposed appendix stated that the Agencies would use certain quantitative measurements required in proposed Appendix A to help assess the extent to which a trading unit’s risks are potentially being retained in excess amounts, including VaR, Stress VaR, VaR Exceedance, and

Risk Factor Sensitivities. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68961–68962; CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8441. One commenter questioned whether, assuming such metrics are effective and the activity does not exceed the banking entity’s expressed risk appetite,it is necessary to place greater restrictions on risktaking, based on the Agencies’ judgment of the level of risk necessary for bona fide market making. See

ICFR.

1143 See Chamber (Feb. 2012).

1144 See Credit Suisse (Seidel).

1145 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley.

1146 See Morgan Stanley. 1147 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). This commenter suggested that the Agencies remove any negative presumptions based on revenues and instead use revenue metrics, such as Spread Profit
and Loss (when it is feasible to calculate) or other metrics for purposes of monitoring a banking entity’s trading activity. See id.

1148 See Occupy (stating that these factors are important and will provide invaluable information about the nature of the banking entity’s trading activity).

1149 See Morgan Stanley; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec.
2011).

1150 See Morgan Stanley; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011). For example, one commenter stated that because markets and trading volumes are volatile, consistent profitability and low earnings volatility are outside a market maker’s control. In support of
this statement, the commenter indicated that: (i) Customer trading activity varies significantly with market conditions, which results in volatility in a market maker’s earnings and profitability; and (ii) a market maker will experience volatility associated with changes in the value of its inventory positions, and principal risk is a necessary feature of market making. See Morgan Stanley.

1151 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011).

1152 See Morgan Stanley; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

1153 See Public Citizen.

1154 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012). customers; 1130 (iv) establish or acquire positions to meet reasonably expected
near term customer demand; 1131 (v) hedge; 1132 and (vi) sell a financial instrument when there are more buyers

than sellers for the instrument at that

time. 1133 Further, one of these commenters expressed the view that the proposed appendix’s statements areinconsistent with the statutory marketmaking exemption’s reference to ‘‘counterparties.’’ 1134

In addition, a few commenters expressed concern about statements in proposed Appendix B about a market

maker’s source of revenue. 1135 According to one commenter, the statement that profit and loss generated by inventory appreciation or depreciation must be ‘‘incidental’’ to

customer revenues is inconsistent with market making-related activity in less liquid assets and larger transactions

because market makers often must retain principal positions for longer periods of time in such circumstances and are unable to perfectly hedge these positions. 1136 As discussed above with respect to the source of revenue requirement in § 75.4(b)(v) of the proposed rule, a few commenters requested that Appendix B’s discussion

of ‘‘customer revenues’’ be modified to state that revenues from hedging will be

considered to be customer revenues in certain contexts beyond derivatives

contracts. 1137

A number of commenters discussed the six proposed factors in Appendix B that, absent explanatory facts and
circumstances, would have caused a particular trading activity to be considered prohibited proprietary trading activity and not permitted market making-related activity. 1138 With respect to the proposed factors, one commenter indicated that they are appropriate, 1139 while another commenter stated that they are complex

and their effectiveness is uncertain. 1140 Another commenter expressed the view
that ‘‘[w]hile each of the selected factors provides evidence of ‘proprietary trading,’ warrants regulatory attention, and justifies a shift in the burden of proof, some require subjective judgments, are subject to gaming or data manipulation, and invite excessive

reliance on circumstantial evidence and lawyers’ opinions.’’ 1141

In response to the proposed risk management factor, 1142 one commenter expressed concern that it could prevent a market maker from warehousing positions in anticipation of predictable
but unrealized customer demands and, further, could penalize a market maker that misestimated expected demand. This commenter expressed the view that such an outcome would be contrary to

the statute and would harm market liquidity. 1143 Another commenter requested that this presumption be removed because in less liquid markets, such as markets for corporate bonds, equity derivatives, securitized products, emerging markets, foreign exchange forwards, and fund-linked products, a market maker needs to act as principal to facilitate client requests and, as a result, will be exposed to risk. 1144

Two commenters expressed concern about the proposed source of revenue

factor. 1145 One commenter stated that this factor does not accurately reflect how market making occurs in a majority

of markets and asset classes. 1146 The other commenter expressed concern that this factor shifted the emphasis of § 75.4(b)(v) of the proposed rule, which required that market making-related activities be ‘‘designed’’ to generate revenue primarily from certain sources,

to the actual outcome of activities. 1147

With respect to the proposed revenues
relative to risk factor, one commenter supported this aspect of the proposal. 1148 Some commenters, however, expressed concern about using these factors to differentiate permitted market making-related activity from prohibited proprietary trading. 1149

These commenters stated that volatile risk-taking and revenue can be a natural result of principal market-making activity. 1150 One commenter noted that customer flows are often ‘‘lumpy’’ due to, for example, a market maker’s facilitation of large trades. 1151

A few commenters indicated that theanalysis in the proposed customerfacing activity factor may not accurately reflect how market making occurs in

certain markets and asset classes due to potential limitations on interdealer trading. 1152 According to another commenter, however, a banking entity’s non-customer facing trades should be required to be matched with existing customer counterparties. 1153 With respect to the near term customer demand component of this factor, one commenter expressed concern that itgoes farther than the statute’s activitybased ‘‘design’’ test by analyzing whether a trading unit’s inventory has exceeded reasonably expected near term customer demand at any particular point in time. 1154

Some commenters expressed concern about the payment of fees, commissions,


### 5899 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1155 See NYSE Euronext; Morgan Stanley.

1156 See Public Citizen.

1157 See NYSE Euronext.

1158 See Morgan Stanley.

1159 See Public Citizen.

1160 See Occupy. This commenter also stated that the commentary in Appendix B stating that a banking entity may give some consideration of profitable hedging activities in determining compensation would provide inappropriate

incentives. See id. 1161 See infra Part VI.C.3.; final rule Appendix A.

1162 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C); proposed rule

§ 75.5. 1163 See Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); see also Barclays; ICI (Feb. 2012); Investure;
MetLife; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; Fidelity; FTN.

1164 See Barclays.

1165 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C) (stating that ‘‘riskmitigating hedging activities’’ are permitted under
certain circumstances). and spreads factor. 1155 One commenter appeared to support this proposed

factor. 1156 According to one commenter, this factor fails to recognize that market makers routinely pay a variety of fees inconnection with their market makingrelated activity, including, for example, fees to access liquidity on another market to satisfy customer demand,
transaction fees as a matter of course, and fees in connection with hedging

transactions. This commenter also indicated that, because spreads in current, rapidly-moving markets are
volatile, short-term measurements of profit compared to spread revenue is problematic, particularly for less liquid

stocks. 1157 Another commenter stated

that this factor reflects a bias toward agency trading and principal marketmaking in highly liquid, exchangetraded markets and does not reflect the nature of principal market making in

most markets. 1158 One commenter recommended that the rule require that a trader who pays a fee be prepared to document the chain of custody to show that the instrument is shortly re-sold to

an interested customer. 1159

Regarding the proposed compensation
incentives factor, one commenter requested that the Agencies make clear that explanatory facts and circumstances cannot justify a trading unit providing compensation incentivesthat primarily reward proprietary risktaking to employees engaged in market making. In addition, the commenter recommended that the Agencies delete the word ‘‘primarily’’ from this

factor. 1160

c. Determination to Not Adopt Proposed Appendix B

To improve clarity, the final rule establishes particular criteria for the exemption and does not incorporate the commentary in proposed Appendix B regarding the identification of permitted market making-related activities. This

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION** provides guidance on the standards for compliance with the market-making exemption.

9. Use of Quantitative Measurements

Consistent with the FSOC study and the proposal, the Agencies continue to believe that quantitative measurements can be useful to banking entities and the Agencies to help assess the profile of a trading desk’s trading activity and to help identify trading activity that may warrant a more in-depth review. 1161 The Agencies will not use quantitative measurements as a dispositive tool for differentiating between permitted market making-related activities and prohibited proprietary trading. Like the framework the Agencies have developed for the market-making exemption, the Agencies recognize that there may be differences in the quantitative

measurements across markets and asset

classes.

4. Section 75.5: Permitted RiskMitigating Hedging Activities

Section 75.5 of the proposed rule implemented section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act, which provides an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading for certain risk-mitigating hedging activities. 1162 Section 13(d)(1)(C) provides an exemption for risk-mitigating hedging activities in

connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of a banking entity that are designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity in

connection with and related to such positions, contracts, or other holdings (the ‘‘hedging exemption’’). Section 75.5 of the final rule implements the hedging exemption with a number of modifications from the proposed rule to respond to commenters’ concerns as described more fully below.

a. Summary of Proposal’s Approach To Implementing the Hedging Exemption

The proposed rule would have required seven criteria to be met in order for a banking entity’s activity to qualify for the hedging exemption. First, §§ 75.5(b)(1) and 75.5(b)(2)(i) of the proposed rule generally required that the banking entity establish an internal compliance program that is designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of the hedging limitations, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, and independent testing, and that a transaction for which the banking entity is relying on the hedging exemption be

made in accordance with the compliance program established under § 75.5(b)(1). Next, § 75.5(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule required that the transaction hedge or otherwise mitigate one or more specific risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, currency or foreign exchange risk,
interest rate risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity. Moreover, § 75.5(b)(2)(iii) of the proposed rule required that the transaction be reasonably correlated, based upon the

facts and circumstances of the underlying and hedging positions and the risks and liquidity of those positions, to the risk or risks the transaction is intended to hedge or otherwise mitigate. Furthermore, § 75.5(b)(2)(iv) of the proposed rule required that the hedging transaction not give rise, at the inception of the hedge, to significant exposures that are not themselves hedged in a contemporaneous transaction. Section 75.5(b)(2)(v) of the proposed rule required that any hedge position established in reliance on the hedging exemption be subject to continuing review, monitoring and management. Finally, § 75.5(b)(2)(vi) of the proposed rule required that the compensation arrangements of persons performing the risk-mitigating hedging activities bedesigned not to reward proprietary risktaking. Additionally, § 75.5(c) of the proposed rule required the banking entity to document certain hedging transactions at the time the hedge is

established.

b. Manner of Evaluating Compliance With the Hedging Exemption

A number of commenters expressed concern that the final rule required application of the hedging exemption on a trade-by-trade basis. 1163 One commenter argued that the text of theproposed rule seemed to require a tradeby-trade analysis because each ‘‘purchase or sale’’ or ‘‘hedge’’ was subject to the requirements. 1164 The final rule modifies the proposal by generally replacing references to a ‘‘purchase or sale’’ in the § 75.5(b) requirements with ‘‘risk-mitigating hedging activity.’’ The Agencies believe this approach is consistent with the statute, which refers to ‘‘risk-mitigating hedging activity.’’ 1165


### 5900 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1166 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

1167 See Part VI.A.4.b., infra. 1168 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); AFR (June 2013); Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

1169 See, e.g., Occupy.

1170 See, e.g., Australian Bankers’ Ass’n (Feb. 2012); BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); HSBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Rep. Bachus et al.; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Stephen Roach.

1171 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); ICI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also Banco de

Me

 ́xico; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1172 See MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ABA; HSBC; Fixed Income
Forum/Credit Roundtable; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA
(Feb. 2012).

1173 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA. 1174 See Barclays; State Street (Feb. 2012); SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers
Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); BoA; PNC et al.; ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1175 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. Each of these types of

activities is discussed further below. See infra Part

VI.A.4.d.2.

1176 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1177 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Credit Suisse (Seidel).

1178 See Barclays.

1179 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
Credit Suisse (Seidel).

1180 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). Section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act specifically authorizes risk-mitigating hedging activities in connection with and related to ‘‘individual or aggregated positions, contracts or other holdings.’’ 1166 Thus, the statute does not require that exempt hedging be conducted on a trade-by-trade basis, and permits hedging of aggregated positions. The Agencies recognized this in the proposed rule, and the final rule continues to permit hedging activities in

connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions.

The statute also requires that, to be exempt under section 13(d)(1)(C), hedging activities be risk-mitigating. The final rule incorporates this statutory requirement. As explained in more detail below, the final rule requires that, in order to qualify for the exemption for risk-mitigating hedging activities: The banking entity implement, maintain, and enforce an internal compliance program, including policies and procedures that govern and control these hedging activities; the hedging activity be designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates specific, identifiable risks; the hedging activity not give rise to significant new risks that are left unhedged; the hedging activity be subject to continuing review, monitoring and management to address risk that might develop over time; and the compensation arrangements for persons performing risk-mitigating hedging activities be designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading. These requirements are designed to focus the exemption on hedging activities that are designed to reduce risk and that also demonstrably
reduce risk, in accordance with the requirement under section 13(d)(1)(C) that hedging activities be risk-mitigating to be exempt. Additionally, the final rule imposes a documentation requirement on certain types of hedges.

Consistent with the other exemptions from the ban on proprietary trading for market-making and underwriting, the Agencies intend to evaluate whether an activity complies with the hedging exemption under the final rule based on the totality of circumstances involving the products, techniques, and strategies used by a banking entity as part of its hedging activity. 1167 c. Comments on the Proposed Rule and Approach To Implementing the Hedging Exemption

Commenters expressed a variety of views on the proposal’s hedging exemption. A few commenters offered specific suggestions described more fully below regarding how, in their view, the hedging exemption should be strengthened to ensure proper oversight of hedging activities. 1168 These commenters expressed concern that the proposal’s exemption was too broad and argued that all proprietary trading could be designated as a hedge under the proposal and thereby evade the prohibition of section 13. 1169

By contrast, a number of other commenters argued that the proposal imposed burdensome requirements that were not required by statute, would limit the ability of banking entities to hedge in a prudent and cost-effective
manner, and would reduce market liquidity. 1170 These commenters argued that implementation of the requirements of the proposal would decrease safety and soundness of banking entities andthe financial system by reducing costeffective risk management options. Some commenters emphasized that the ability of banking entities to hedge their positions and manage risks taken in connection with their permissible activities is a critical element of liquid
and efficient markets, and that the cumulative impact of the proposal would inhibit this risk-mitigation by raising transaction costs and suppressing essential and beneficial hedging activities. 1171

A number of commenters expressed concern that the proposal’s hedging exemption did not permit the full

breadth of transactions in which banking entities engage to hedge or mitigate risks, such as portfolio hedging, 1172 dynamic hedging, 1173 anticipatory hedging, 1174 or scenario hedging. 1175 Some commenters stated that restrictions on a banking entity’s ability to hedge may have a chilling effect on its willingness to engage in other permitted activities, such as market making. 1176 In addition, many of
these commenters stated that, if a banking entity is limited in its ability to hedge its market-making inventory, it may be less willing or able to assume risk on behalf of customers or provide financial products to customers that are used for hedging purposes. As a result, according to these commenters, it will be more difficult for customers to hedge their risks and customers may be forced

to retain risk. 1177

Another commenter contended that the proposal represented an inappropriate ‘‘one-size-fits-all’’ approach to hedging that did not properly take into account the way banking entities and especially market intermediaries operate, particularly in less-liquid markets. 1178 Two commenters requested that the Agencies clarify that a banking entity may use its discretion to choose any hedging strategy that meets the requirements of the proposed exemption and, in particular, that a banking entity is not obligated to choose the ‘‘best hedge’’ and may use the cheapest instrument

available. 1179 One commenter suggested uncertainty about the permissibility of a situation where gains on a hedge position exceed losses on the underlying position. The commenter suggested that uncertainty may lead banking entities to not use the most cost-effective hedge, which would make hedging less efficient and raise costs for banking entities and customers. 1180 However, another commenter expressed concern about banking entities relying on the cheapest satisfactory hedge. The commenter explained that such hedges lead to more complicated risk profiles and require banking entities to engage in additional transactions to hedge the


### 5901 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1181 See Occupy.

1182 See BoA; Barclays; CH/ABASA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); HSBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; PNC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Stephen Roach.

1183 A detailed discussion of ALM activities is provided in Part VI.A.1.d.2 of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION** relating to the definition of trading account. As explained in that part, the final rule does not allow use of the hedging exemption for ALM activities that are outside of the hedging activities specifically permitted by the final rule.

1184 See BoA; JPMC; Morgan Stanley.

1185 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC; PNC et al.; ICI.

1186 See Prof. Richardson; ABA (Keating).

1187 See Barclays; BoA; ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1188 See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

1189 See HSBC.

1190 See final rule § 75.5. 1191 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC; PNC et al.; ICI (Feb. 2012); BoA; Morgan Stanley.

1192 See BoA; Barclays; CH/ABASA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); HSBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; PNC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Stephen Roach.

1193 Some commenters requested that the Agencies establish a safe harbor. See Prof. Richardson; ABA (Keating). One commenter requested that the Agencies adopt a bright-line test.

See Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

1194 A few commenters requested that the Agencies establish a presumption of compliance.

See Barclays; BoA; ISDA (Feb. 2012). 1195 One commenter suggested this principlesbased approach. See HSBC.

1196 Section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act permits ‘‘risk-mitigating hedging activities in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of a banking entity that are designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity in connection with and related to such positions, contracts, or other holdings.’’ 12
U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

1197 Some commenters were concerned that the proposed hedging exemption was too broad and that all proprietary trading could be designated as a hedge. See, e.g., Occupy.

1198 See, e.g., Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); HSBC; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Rep. Bachus et al.; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1199 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.4. exposures resulting from the imperfect, cheapest hedge. 1181

A few commenters suggested the hedging exemption be modified in favor of a simpler requirement that banking entities adopt risk limits and policies and procedures commensurate with qualitative guidance issued by the Agencies. 1182 Many of these commenters also expressed concerns that the proposed rule’s hedging exemption would not allow so-called asset-liability management (‘‘ALM’’)

activities. 1183 Some commenters proposed that the risk-mitigating hedging exemption reference a set of relevant descriptive factors rather than specific prescriptive requirements. 1184 Other alternative frameworks suggested by commenters include: (i) Reformulating the proposed requirements as supervisory guidance; 1185 (ii) establishing a safe
harbor, 1186 presumption of compliance, 1187 or bright line test; 1188 or (iii) a principles-based approach that would require a banking entity to document its risk-mitigating hedging strategies for submission to its regulator. 1189

d. Final Rule

The final rule provides a multifaceted approach to implementing the hedging exemption that seeks to ensure that hedging activity is designed to be risk-reducing in nature and not designed to mask prohibited proprietary trading. 1190 The final rule includes a number of modifications in response to

comments.

This multi-faceted approach is intended to permit hedging activities that are risk-mitigating and to limit potential abuse of the hedging exemption while not undulyconstraining the important riskmanagement function that is served by a banking entity’s hedging activities. This approach is also intended to ensure that any banking entity relying on the hedging exemption has in place appropriate internal control processes to support its compliance with the terms of the exemption. While commenters proposed a number of alternative frameworks for the hedging exemption, the Agencies believe the final rule’s multi-faceted approach most effectively

balances commenter concerns with statutory purpose. In response to commenter requests to reformulate the proposed rule as supervisory guidance, 1191 including the suggestion that the Agencies simply require banking entities to adopt risk limits and policies and procedures commensurate with qualitative Agency guidance, 1192 the Agencies believe that such an approach would provide less clarity than the adopted approach. Although a purely guidance-based approach could provide greater flexibility, it would also provide less specificity, which could make it difficult for banking entity personnel and the Agencies to determine whether an activity complies

with the rule and could lead to an increased risk of evasion of the statutoryrequirements. Further, while a brightline or safe harbor approach to the hedging exemption would generally provide a high degree of certainty about whether an activity qualifies for the exemption, it would also provide less flexibility to recognize the differences in hedging activity across markets and

asset classes. 1193 In addition, the use of any bright-line approach would more likely be subject to gaming and avoidance as new products and types of trading activities are developed than other approaches to implementing the hedging exemption. Similarly, the Agencies decline to establish a presumption of compliance because, in light of the constant innovation of trading activities and the differences in hedging activity across markets and asset classes, establishing appropriate parameters for a presumption of compliance with the hedging exemption would potentially be less capable of recognizing these legitimate differences than our current approach. 1194 Moreover, the Agencies decline to follow a principles-based approach requiring a banking entity to document its hedging strategies for submission to its regulator. 1195 The Agencies believe that evaluating each banking entity’s trading activity based on an

individualized set of documented hedging strategies could be unnecessarily burdensome and result in unintended competitive impacts since banking entities would not be subject to one uniform rule. The Agencies believe the multi-faceted approach adopted in

the final rule establishes a consistent framework applicable to all banking entities that will reduce the potential for such adverse impacts.

Further, the Agencies believe the scope of the final hedging exemption isappropriate because it permits riskmitigating hedging activities, as mandated by section 13 of the BHC

Act, 1196 while requiring a robust compliance program and other internal controls to help ensure that only genuine risk-mitigating hedges can be used in reliance on the exemption. 1197 In response to concerns that the proposed hedging exemption would reduce legitimate hedging activity and thus impact market liquidity and the banking entity’s willingness to engage in permissible customer-related activity, 1198 the Agencies note that the requirements of the final hedging exemption are designed to permit banking entities to properly mitigate specific risk exposures, consistent with the statute. In addition, hedging related to market-making activity conducted by a market-making desk is subject to the requirements of the market-making exemption, which are designed to permit banking entities to continue providing valuable intermediation and liquidity services, including related risk-management activity. 1199 Thus, the final hedging exemption will not negatively impact the safety and soundness of banking entities or the


### 5902 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1200 Some commenters believed that restrictions on hedging would have a chilling effect on banking entities’ willingness to engage in market making, and may result in customers experiencing difficulty in hedging their risks or force customers to retain

risk. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; IHS.

1201 These aspects of the compliance program requirement are described in further detail in Part

VI.C. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

**.** 1202 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1203 See BoA; Barclays; HSBC; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; see also Goldman (Prop. Trading); RBC; Barclays; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012); PNC;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). See the discussion of why the Agencies decline to take a presumption of compliance approach above.

1204 See Barclays.

1205 See ICBA; M&T Bank.

1206 See, e.g., Bank of Canada; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks). Additionally, foreign banking entities engaged in hedging activity may be able to rely on the exemption for trading activity conducted by foreign banking entities in lieu of the hedging exemption, provided they meet the requirements of the exemption for trading by foreign banking entities under § 75.6(e) of the final

rule. See infra Part VI.A.8.

1207 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC.

1208 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1209 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

1210 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Andrea Psoras. 1211 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1). The final rule retains the proposal’s requirement that the compliance program include, among other things, written hedging policies.

1212 See, e.g., BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; PNC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1213 See final rule § 75.20(a) (stating that ‘‘[t]he terms, scope and detail of [the] compliance program shall be appropriate for the types, size, scope and complexity of activities and business structure of the banking entity’’). The Agencies believe this helps address some commenters’ concern that the hedging exemption would be too limiting and burdensome for community and regional banks. See
ICBA; M&T Bank.

1214 Many of these policies and procedures were contained as part of the proposed rule’s compliance program requirements under Appendix C. They
have been moved, and in some cases modified, in order to more clearly demonstrate how they are incorporated into the requirements of the hedging exemption.

1215 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012). The final rule does not require affirmative certification of each hedge, as suggested by this commenter, because the Agencies believe it would unnecessarily slow legitimate transactions. The Agencies believe the final rule’s required management framework and escalation procedures achieve the same objective as the commenter’s suggested approach, whileimposing fewer burdens on legitimate riskmitigating hedging activity.

1216 See final rule §§ 75.20(b), 75.5(b). This approach builds on the proposal’s requirement that senior management and intermediate managers be accountable for the effective implementation of the compliance program. financial system or have a chilling effect on a banking entity’s willingness to engage in other permitted activities, such as market making. 1200

These limits and requirements are designed to prevent the type of activity conducted by banking entities in the past that involved taking large positions using novel strategies to attempt to profit from potential effects of general economic or market developments and thereby potentially offset the general

effects of those events on the revenues or profits of the banking entity. The documentation requirements in the final rule support these limits by identifying activity that occurs in reliance on the risk-mitigating hedging exemption at an organizational level or desk that is not responsible for establishing the risk or positions being hedged.

1. Compliance Program Requirement

The first criterion of the proposed hedging exemption required a banking entity to establish an internal compliance program designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of the hedging exemption and conduct its hedging activities in compliance with that program. While the compliance program under the proposal was expected to be appropriate for the size, scope, and complexity of each banking entity’s activities and structure, the proposal would have required each banking entity with significant trading activities to implement robust, detailed hedging policies and procedures and related internal controls and independent testing designed to prevent prohibited proprietary trading in the context of permitted hedging activity. 1201 These enhanced programs for banking entities with large trading activity were expected to include written hedging policies at the trading unit level and clearly articulated trader mandates for each trader designed to ensure that hedging strategies mitigated risk and were not for the purpose of engaging in prohibited proprietary trading.

Commenters, including industry groups, generally expressed support for requiring policies and procedures to monitor the safety and soundness, as well as appropriateness, of hedging activity. 1202 Some of these commenters advocated that the final rule presume that a banking entity is in compliance with the hedging exemption if the banking entity’s hedging activity is done in accordance with the written policies and procedures required under its compliance program. 1203 One commenter represented that the proposed compliance framework was burdensome and complex. 1204

Other commenters expressed concerns that the hedging exemption would be too limiting and burdensome for community and regional banks. 1205 Some commenters argued that foreign banking entities should not be subject to the requirements of the hedging exemption for transactions that do not

introduce risk into the U.S. financial

system. 1206 Other commenters stated that coordinated hedging through and by affiliates should qualify as permitted risk-mitigating hedging activity. 1207

Some commenters urged the Agencies to adopt detailed limitations on hedging activities. For example, one commenter urged that all hedging trades be labeled as such at the inception of the trade and detailed information regarding the trader, manager, and supervisor authorizing the trade be kept and

reviewed. 1208 Another commenter suggested that the hedging exemption contain a requirement that the banking entity employee who approves a hedge affirmatively certify that the hedge conforms to the requirements of the rule and has not been put in place for the direct or indirect purpose or effect of generating speculative profits. 1209 A few commenters requested limitations on

instruments that can be used for hedging purposes. 1210

The final rule retains the proposal’s requirement that a banking entity establish an internal compliance program that is designed to ensure the banking entity limits its hedgingactivities to hedging that is riskmitigating. 1211 The final rule largely retains the proposal’s approach to the compliance program requirement, except to the extent that, as requested by

some commenters, 1212 the final rule modifies the proposal to provide additional detail regarding the elements that must be included in a compliance program. Similar to the proposal, the final rule contemplates that the scope and detail of a compliance program will
reflect the size, activities, and complexity of banking entities in order to ensure that banking entities engaged in more active trading have enhanced compliance programs without imposing undue burden on smaller organizations and entities that engage in little or no trading activity. 1213 The final rule also requires, like the proposal, that the banking entity implement, maintain, and enforce the program. 1214

In response to commenter concerns about ensuring the appropriate level of senior management involvement in establishing these policies, 1215 the final rule requires that the written policies and procedures be developed and implemented by a banking entity at the appropriate level of organization and expressly address the banking entity’s requirements for escalation procedures, supervision, and governance related to hedging activities. 1216


### 5903 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1217 This approach is generally consistent with some commenters’ suggested approach of limiting the instruments that can be used for hedging purposes; although the final rules provide banking entities with discretion to determine the types of positions, contracts, or other holdings that will mitigate specific risks of individual or aggregated holdings and thus may be used for risk-mitigating hedging activity. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Andrea Psoras. In response to one commenter’s request that the final rule require all hedges to be labeled at inception and certain detailed information be documented for each hedge, the Agencies note that the final rules continue to require detailed documentation for hedging activity that presents a heightened risk of evasion. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); final rule § 75.5(c); infra Part VI.A.4.d.4. The Agencies believe a documentation requirement targeted at these scenarios balances the need to prevent evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading with the concern that documentation requirements can slow or impede legitimate risk-mitigating activity in

the normal course.

1218 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1)(i). Some commenters expressed support for the use of risk limits in determining whether trading activity qualifies for the hedging exemption. See, e.g., Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); ICI (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley.

1219 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1)(ii). 1220 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1)(iii). The final rule’s requirement to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate is discussed in greater detail

below. 1221 The proposal also contained a continuing review, monitoring, and management requirement.

See proposed rule § 75.5(b)(2)(v). The final rule modifies the proposed requirement, however, by removing the ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ requirement and instead requiring that the hedge demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate specific identifiable risks. Correlation analysis is, however, a necessary component of the analysis element in the compliance program requirement of the hedging exemption in the final rule. See final rule § 75.5(b). This change is discussed below.

1222 See Barclays.

1223 See infra Part VI.C.1. Some commenters expressed concern that the compliance program requirement would place undue burden on regional or community banks. See ICBA; M&T Bank.

1224 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC. Like the proposal, the final rule specifies that a banking entity’s compliance regime must include reasonably designed written policies and procedures regarding the positions, techniques and strategies that may be used for hedging, including documentation indicating what positions, contracts or other holdings atrading desk may use in its riskmitigating hedging activities. 1217 The focus on policies and procedures governing risk identification and mitigation, analysis and testing of position limits and hedging strategies, and internal controls and ongoing monitoring is expected to limit use of the hedging exception to risk-mitigating hedging. The final rule adds to the proposed compliance program approach by requiring that the banking entity’s written policies and procedures include position and aging limits with respect to such positions, contracts, or other holdings. 1218 The final rule, similar to the proposed rule, also requires that the compliance program contain internal controls and ongoing monitoring, management, and authorization procedures, including relevant escalation procedures. 1219 Further, the final rule retains the proposed requirement that the compliance program provide for the conduct of analysis and independent testing designed to ensure that the positions, techniques, and strategies that may be used for hedging may reasonably be expected to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks being hedged. 1220

The final rule also adds that correlation analysis be undertaken as part of the analysis of the hedging positions, techniques, and strategies that may be used. This provision effectively changes the requirement in the proposed rule that the hedge must maintain correlation into a requirement that correlation be analyzed as part of the compliance program before a hedging activity is undertaken. This provision incorporates the concept in the proposed rule that a hedge should be correlated (negatively, when sign is considered) to the risk being hedged. However, the Agencies recognize that some effective hedging activities, such as deep out-of-the-money puts and calls, may not be exhibit a strong linear correlation to the risks being hedged and also that correlation over a period of time between two financial positions does not necessarily mean one position will in fact reduce or mitigate a risk of the other. Rather, the Agencies expect the banking entity to undertake a correlation analysis that will, in many but not all instances, provide a strong indication of whether a potential hedging position, strategy, or technique will or will not demonstrably reduce the risk it is designed to reduce. It is important to recognize that the rule does not require the banking entity to prove correlation mathematically or by other specific methods. Rather, the nature and extent of the correlation analysis undertaken would be dependent on the facts and circumstances of the hedge and the underlying risks targeted. If
correlation cannot be demonstrated, then the Agencies would expect that such analysis would explain why not and also how the proposed hedging position, technique, or strategy is designed to reduce or significantly mitigate risk and how that reduction or mitigation can be demonstrated without

correlation.

Moreover, the final rule requires hedging activity conducted in reliance on the hedging exemption be subject to continuing review, monitoring, and management that is consistent with the banking entity’s written hedging policies and procedures and is designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates, the specific, identifiable risks that develop over time from hedging activity and underlying positions. 1221 This ongoing

review should consider market developments, changes in positions or the configuration of aggregated positions, changes in counterparty risk,

and other facts and circumstances

related to the risks associated with the underlying and hedging positions, contracts, or other holdings.

The Agencies believe that requiring banking entities to develop and follow detailed compliance policies and procedures related to risk-mitigating hedging activity will help both banking

entities and examiners understand the risks to which banking entities are exposed and how these risks are managed in a safe and sound manner. With this increased understanding, banking entities and examiners will be better able to evaluate whether bankingentities are engaged in legitimate, riskreducing hedging activity, rather than impermissible proprietary trading. While the Agencies recognize there are

certain costs associated with this compliance program requirement, 1222 we believe this provision is necessary to ensure compliance with the statute and

the final rule. As discussed in Part VI.C.1., the Agencies have modified the proposed compliance program structure to reduce burdens on small banking

entities. 1223

The Agencies note that hedging may occur across affiliates under the hedging exemption. 1224 To ensure that hedging across trading desks or hedging done at a level of the organization outside of the trading desk does not result in prohibited proprietary trading, the final rule imposes enhanced documentation requirements on these activities, which are discussed more fully below. The Agencies also note that nothing in the final rule limits or restricts the ability of the appropriate supervisory agency of a banking entity to place limits on interaffiliate hedging in a manner consistent with their safety and soundness authority to the extent the


### 5904 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1225 In addition, section 608 of the Dodd-Frank Act added credit exposure arising from securities borrowing and lending or a derivative transaction

with an affiliate to the list of covered transactions subject to the restrictions of section 23A of the FR
Act, in each case to the extent that such transaction causes a bank to have credit exposure to the

affiliate. See 12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7) and (8). As a consequence, interaffiliate hedging activity within a banking entity may be subject to limitation or

restriction under section 23A of the FR Act.

1226 See 17 CFR 50.52.

1227 See proposed rule § 75.5(b)(2)(ii); see also Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875.

1228 See AFR (June 2013); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

1229 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1230 See Public Citizen; see also Occupy.

1231 See Occupy.

1232 See, e.g., Japanese Bankers Ass’n. 1233 See Barclays.

1234 See ABA (Keating); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). Although certain accounting standards, such as FASB ASC Topic 815 hedge accounting
standards, address circumstances in which a transaction may be considered a hedge of another
transaction, the final rule does not refer to or expressly rely on these accounting standards because such standards: (i) are designed for financial statement purposes, not to identify proprietary trading; and (ii) change often and are likely to change in the future without consideration of the potential impact on section 13 of the BHC

Act.

1235 See JPMC.

1236 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

1237 Some commenters expressed support for the requirement that a banking entity tie a hedge to a specific risk. See AFR (June 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz. 1238 See final rule § 75.5(b)(2)(ii).

1239 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1)(iii).

1240 Some commenters represented that the proposed list of risks eligible to be hedged could justify transactions that should be considered proprietary trading. See Public Citizen; Occupy. One commenter was concerned about the proposed

inclusion of ‘‘basis risk’’ in this list. See Occupy. As noted in the proposal, the Agencies believe the inclusion of a list of eligible risks, including basis risk, helps implement the essential element of the statutory hedging exemption—i.e., that the transaction is risk-reducing in connection with a specific risk. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875. See

also 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C). Further, the Agencies believe the other requirements of the final hedging exemption, including requirements regarding internal controls and a compliance program, help to ensure that only legitimate hedging activity qualifies for the exemption.

1241 See, e.g., Occupy. agency has such authority. 1225 Additionally, nothing in the final rule limits or modifies the applicability of CFTC regulations with respect to the clearing of interaffiliate swaps. 1226

2. Hedging of Specific Risks and

Demonstrable Reduction of Risk

Section 75.5(b)(2)(ii) of the proposed rule required that a qualifying transaction hedge or otherwise mitigate one or more specific risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, currency or foreign exchange risk,
interest rate risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of a banking entity. 1227 This criterion implemented the essential element of the hedging exemption that the transaction be risk-mitigating.

Some commenters expressed support for this provision, particularly the requirement that a banking entity be able to tie a hedge to a specific risk. 1228

One of these commenters stated that a

demonstrated reduction in risk should be a key indicator of whether a hedge is in fact permitted. 1229 However, some commenters argued that the list of risks eligible to be hedged under the proposed rule, which included risks arising from aggregated positions, could justify transactions that should be viewed as prohibited proprietary trading. 1230 Another commenter

contended that the term ‘‘basis risk’’ was undefined and could heighten the potential that this exemption would be used to evade the prohibition on proprietary trading. 1231

Other commenters argued that requiring a banking entity to specify the particular risk being hedged discourages effective hedging and increases the risk at banking entities. These commenters contended that hedging activities must address constantly changing positions

and market conditions. 1232 Another commenter argued that this requirement could render a banking entity’s hedges impermissible if those hedges do not succeed in fully hedging or mitigating an identified risk as determined by a post hoc analysis and could prevent banking entities from entering into hedging transactions in anticipation of risks that the banking entity expects will arise (or increase). 1233 Certain commenters requested that the hedging exemption provide a safe harbor for positions that satisfy FASB ASC Topic 815 (formerly FAS 133) hedging accounting standards, which provides that an entity recognize derivative instruments, including certain

derivative instruments embedded in
other contracts, as assets or liabilities in the statement of financial position and

measure them at fair value. 1234 Another commenter suggested that scenario hedges could be identifiable and subject to review by the Agencies using VaR,
Stress VaR, and VaR Exceedance, as

well as revenue metrics. 1235

The Agencies have considered these comments carefully in light of the statute. Section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act provides an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading only for hedging activity that is ‘‘designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity in connection with and related to’’ individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity. 1236 Thus, while the statute permits hedging of individual or aggregated positions (as discussed more fully below), the statute requires that, to be exempt from the prohibition on proprietary trading, hedging transactions be designed to reduce specific risks. 1237 Moreover, it requires that these specific risks be in connection

with or related to the individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity.

The final rule implements these requirements. To ensure that exempt hedging activities are designed to reduce specific risks, the final rule requires that the hedging activity at inception of the hedging activity, including, without limitation, any adjustments to the hedging activity, be designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates one or more specific, identifiable risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, currency or foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, commodity price risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in

connection with and related to identified individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity, based upon the facts

and circumstances of the individual or aggregated underlying and hedging positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity and the risks and liquidity thereof. 1238 Hedging activities and limits should be based on analysis conducted by the banking entity of the appropriateness of hedging instruments, strategies, techniques, and limits. As discussed above, this analysis must include analysis of correlation between the hedge and the specific identifiable risk or risks that the hedge is designed to reduce or significantly mitigate. 1239

This language retains the focus of the statute and the proposed rule on reducing or mitigating specific and

identified risks. 1240 As discussed more fully above, banking entities are required to describe in their compliance policies and procedures the types of strategies, techniques, and positions that may be used for hedging.

The final rule does not prescribe the hedging strategy that a banking entity must employ. While one commenter urged that the final rule require each banking entity to adopt the ‘‘best hedge’’ for every transaction, 1241 the Agencies believe that the complexity of positions,

market conditions at the time of a transaction, availability of hedging


### 5905 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1242 A banking entity must satisfy the enhanced documentation requirements of § 75.5(c) if it engages in hedging activity utilizing positions, contracts, or holdings that were not identified in its written policies and procedures.

1243 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays; ICI (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley. 1244 See Barclays.

1245 Final rule § 75.5(b)(2)(iv)(B). The Agencies believe this provision addresses some commenters’ concern that the ongoing review, monitoring, and management requirement would limit hedging of aggregated positions, and that such ongoing review of individual hedge transactions with a variety of underlying risks would be impossible. See SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays; ICI (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley.

1246 See ABA (Keating); BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also AFR et al.
(Feb. 2012).

1247 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1248 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays.

1249 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 1250 See BoA.

1251 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public
Citizen; AFR (Nov. 2012).

1252 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); AFR et al.
(Feb. 2012).

1253 See FSOC study (stating that ‘‘[p]rudent riskmanagement is at the core of both institutionspecific safety and soundness, as well as macroprudential and financial stability’’).

1254 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1255 Some commenters stated that it is not always possible to hedge a new risk exposure arising from a hedge in a cost-effective manner, and requiring contemporaneous hedges would raise transaction costs and the potential for hedges to become

uneconomical. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Barclays. As noted in the proposal, the Agencies believe that requiring a contemporaneous hedge of any significant new risk that arises at the inception of a hedge is appropriate because a transaction that creates significant new risk exposure that is not itself hedged at the same time would appear to be indicative of prohibited proprietary trading. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68876. Thus, the Agencies believe this requirement is necessary to prevent evasion of the general prohibition on proprietary trading. In response to

Continued transactions, costs of hedging, and other

circumstances at the time of the transaction make a requirement that a banking entity always adopt the ‘‘best hedge’’ impractical, unworkable, and subjective.

Nonetheless, the statute requires that, to be exempt under section 13(d)(1)(C), hedging activity must be risk-mitigating. To ensure that only risk-mitigating hedging is permitted under this exemption, the final rule requires that in its written policies and procedures the banking entity identify the instruments and positions that may be used in hedging, the techniques and strategies the banking entity deems appropriate for its hedging activities, as well as position limits and aging limits on hedging positions. These written policies and procedures also must specify the escalation and approval procedures that apply if a trader seeks to conduct hedging activities beyond the limits, position types, strategies, or techniques authorized for the trader’s

activities. 1242

As noted above, commenters were

concerned that risks associated with permitted activities and holdings change over time, making a determination regarding the effectiveness of hedging activities in reducing risk dependent on the time
when risk is measured. To address this, the final rule requires that the exempt hedging activity be designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates, risk at the inception of the hedge. As explained more fully below, because risks and the effectiveness of a hedging strategy may change over time, the final rule also requires the banking entity to implement a program to review, monitor, and manage its hedging activity over the period of time the hedging activity occurs in a manner designed to reduce or significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate new or changing risks that may develop over time from both the banking entity’s hedging activities and the underlying positions. Many commenters expressed concern that the proposed ongoing review, monitoring, and management requirement would limit a banking entity’s ability to engage in aggregated position hedging. 1243 One commenter stated that because aggregated position hedging may result in modification of hedging exposures across a variety of underlying risks, even as the overall risk profile of a banking entity is reduced, it would become impossible to subsequently review, monitor, and manage individual hedging transactions for compliance. 1244 The Agencies note
that the final rule, like the statute, requires that the hedging activity relate to individual or aggregated positions, contracts or other holdings being hedged, and accordingly, the review, monitoring and management requirement would not limit the extent of permitted hedging provided for in section 13(d)(1)(C) as implied by some
commenters. Further, the final rule recognizes that the determination of whether hedging activity demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates risks that may develop over time should be ‘‘based upon the facts and circumstances of the underlying and hedging positions, contracts and other holdings of the banking entity and the risks and liquidity thereof.’’ 1245

A number of other commenters argued that a legitimate risk-reducing hedge may introduce new risks at inception. 1246 A few commenters contended that a requirement that no new risks be associated with a hedge would be inconsistent with prudent risk management and greatly reduce the ability of banking entities to reduce overall risk through hedging. 1247 A few commenters stated that the proposed requirement does not recognize that it is not always possible to hedge a new riskexposure arising from a hedge in a costeffective manner. 1248 With respect to the timing of the initial hedge and any additional transactions necessary to reduce significant exposures arising
from it, one of these commenters represented that requiring contemporaneous hedges is impracticable, would raise transaction costs, and would make hedging

uneconomic. 1249 Another commenter stated that this requirement could have a chilling effect on risk managers’ willingness to engage in otherwise permitted hedging activity. 1250

Other commenters stated that a position that does not fully offset the risk of an underlying position is not in fact a hedge. 1251 These commenters

believed that the introduction of new risks at inception of a transaction

indicated that the transaction was impermissible proprietary trading and not a hedge. 1252

The Agencies recognize that prudent risk-reducing hedging activities by banking entities are important to the efficiency of the financial system. 1253 The Agencies further recognize that hedges are generally imperfect; consequently, hedging activities can

introduce new and sometimes significant risks, such as credit risk, basis risk, or new market risk, especially when hedging illiquid positions. 1254 However, the Agencies also recognize that hedging activities present an opportunity to engage in impermissible proprietary trading designed to profit from exposure to these types of risks.

To address these competing concerns, the final rule substantially retains the proposed requirement that, at the inception of the hedging activity, the risk-reducing hedging activity does not give rise to significant new or additional risk that is not itself contemporaneously hedged. This approach is designed to allow banking entities to continue to engage in prudent risk-mitigating activities while ensuring that the hedging exemption is not used to engage in prohibited proprietary trading by taking on prohibited short-term exposures under the guise of hedging. 1255 As noted in the proposal,


### 5906 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

commenters’ concerns about transaction costs and uneconomical hedging, the Agencies note that this provision only requires additional hedging of ‘‘significant’’ new or additional risk and does not apply to any risk exposure arising from a hedge.

1256 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68876.

1257 See final rule § 75.5(b)(2)(ii).

1258 See SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1259 See Occupy.

1260 See Barclays.

1261 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

1262 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875.

1263 See, e.g., Australian Bankers’ Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Goldman (Prop. Trading); HSBC; ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Rep. Bachus et al.; RBC; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 1264 See, e.g. ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Sept. 2012); BoA; see also Barclays (expressing concern that the proposed rule could result in regulatory review of individual hedging trades for compliance on a post hoc basis); HSBC; ISDA (Apr. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); PNC; MetLife; RBC; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1265 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen; Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

1266 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (commenting that the use of the term ‘‘aggregate’’ positions was intended to note that firms do not have to hedge on a trade-by-trade basis but could not hedge on a portfolio basis); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz.

1267 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5898 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley)).

1268 See, e.g., Occupy; Public Citizen. 1269 See Public Citizen; Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb.
2012).

1270 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5898 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley)).

1271 See MetLife; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ABA (Keating); HSBC; Fixed
Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; ICI (Feb. 2012);
ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1272 The Agencies believe certain limits suggested by commenters, such as the formation of central however, the Agencies recognize that exposure to new risks may result from legitimate hedging transactions; 1256 this provision only prohibits the introduction of additional significant exposures through the hedging

transaction unless those additional exposures are contemporaneously hedged.

As noted above, the final rule recognizes that whether hedging activity will demonstrably reduce risk must be based upon the facts and circumstances of the individual or aggregated underlying and hedging positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity and the risks and liquidity thereof. 1257 The Agencies believe this approach balances commenters’ request that the Agencies clarify that a banking entity may use its discretion to choose any hedging strategy that meets the requirements of the proposed exemption 1258 with concerns that allowing banking entities to rely on the cheapest satisfactory hedge will lead to additional hedging

transactions. 1259 The Agencies expect that hedging strategies and techniques, as well as assessments of risk, will vary across positions, markets, activities andbanking entities, and that a ‘‘one-sizefits-all’’ approach would not accommodate all types of appropriate hedging activity. 1260

By its terms, section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to engage in risk-mitigating hedging activity ‘‘in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions . . . .’’ 1261 The preamble to the proposed rule made clear that, consistent with the statutory reference to mitigating risks of individual or aggregated positions, this criterion permits hedging of risks associated with aggregated positions. 1262 This approachis consistent with prudent riskmanagement and safe and sound banking practice. 1263 The proposed rule explained that, to be exempt under this provision, hedging activities must reduce risk with respect to ‘‘positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity.’’ The proposal also required that a banking entity relying on the exemption be prepared to identify the specific position or risks associated with aggregated positions being hedged and demonstrate that the hedging transaction was risk-reducing in the aggregate, as measured by appropriate risk management tools.

Some commenters were of the view that the hedging exemption applied to aggregated positions or portfolio hedging and was consistent with prudent risk-management practices. These commenters argued that permitting a banking entity to hedge aggregate positions and risks arising from a portfolio of assets would be more efficient from both a procedural and business standpoint. 1264

By contrast, other commenters argued that portfolio-based hedging could be used to mask prohibited proprietary trading. 1265 One commenter contended that the statute provides no basis for portfolio hedging, and another commenter similarly suggested that portfolio hedging should be prohibited. 1266 Another commenter suggested adopting limits that would prevent the use of the hedging exemption to conduct proprietary activity at one desk as a theoretical ‘‘hedge for proprietary trading at

another desk.’’ 1267 Among the limits suggested by these commenters were a requirement that a banking entity have a well-defined compliance program, the formation of central ‘‘risk management’’ groups to perform and monitor hedges of aggregated positions, and a requirement that the banking entity demonstrate the capacity to measure aggregate risk across the institution with precision using proven models. 1268 A few commenters suggested that the presence of portfolio hedging should be viewed as an indicator of imperfections in hedging at the desk level and be a flag used by examiners to identify and review the integrity of specific hedges. 1269

The final rule, like the proposed rule, implements the statutory language providing for risk-mitigating hedging

activities related to individual or aggregated positions. For example, activity permitted under the hedging exemption would include the hedging of one or more specific risks arising from identified positions, contracts, or other holdings, such as the hedging of the aggregate risk of identified positions of one or more trading desks. Further, the final rule requires that these hedging activities be risk-reducing with respect to the identified positions, contracts, or other holdings being hedged and that

the risk reduction be demonstrable. Specifically, the final rule requires, among other things: That the banking entity has a robust compliance program reasonably designed to ensure compliance with the exemption; that each hedge is subject to continuing review, monitoring and management designed to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks that develop over time related to the hedging activity and the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity; and that the banking entity meet a documentation requirement for hedges not established by the trading desk responsible for the underlying position or for hedges effected through a financial instrument, technique or strategy that is not specifically identified in the trading desk’s written policies and procedures. The Agencies believe this approach addresses concerns that a banking entity could use the hedging exemption to conduct proprietary activity at one desk as a theoretical hedge for proprietary trading

at another desk in a manner consistent

with the statute. 1270 Further, the Agencies believe the adopted exemption allows banking entities to engage in hedging of aggregated positions 1271 while helping to ensure that suchhedging activities are truly riskmitigating. 1272


### 5907 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

‘‘risk management’’ groups to monitor hedges of aggregated positions, are unnecessary given the

aforementioned limits in the final rule. See Occupy;

Public Citizen.

1273 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

1274 The Agencies believe that it would be inconsistent with Congressional intent to permit some or all of these activities under the hedging exemption, regardless of whether certain metrics could be useful for monitoring such activity. See
JPMC. 1275 See proposed rule § 75.5(b)(2)(ii) (requiring that the hedging transaction ‘‘hedges or otherwise mitigates one or more specific risks . . . arising in

connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of [the] banking entity’’). The proposal noted that this requirement would include, for example, dynamic hedging. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875.

1276 The proposal noted that this corresponding modification to the hedge should also be reasonably correlated to the material changes in risk that are intended to be hedged or otherwise mitigated, as required by § 75.5(b)(2)(iii) of the proposed rule.

1277 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; see also Better Markets (Feb. 2012), Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

1278 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n. 1279 See, e.g., BoA; Barclays; ISDA (Apr. 2012);

PNC; PNC et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.

2012).

1280 See, e.g., Occupy; Public Citizen; AFR et. al.
(Feb. 2012); AFR (June 2013); Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1281 See BoA; Barclays; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Seidel); FTN; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); STANY; see also Chamber
(Feb. 2012).

1282 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1283 See BoA; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012). As discussed above, market-maker hedging at the trading desk level is no longer subject to the hedging exemption and is instead subject to the requirements of the market-making exemption, which is designed to permit banking entities to continue providing legitimate market-makingservices, including managing the risk of marketmaking activity. See also supra Part VI.A.3.c.4. of

this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

**.**

1284 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading);
Chamber (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012); see also FTN; BoA. As noted above, several commenters questioned whether the hedging exemption should apply to ‘‘portfolio’’ hedging and whether portfolio hedging may create the potential for abuse of the hedging exemption. The term ‘‘portfolio hedging’’ is not used in the statute. The language of section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to engage in risk-mitigating hedging activity ‘‘in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions . . . .’’ 1273 After consideration of the comments regarding portfolio hedging, and in light of the statutory language, the Agencies are of the view that the statutory language is clear on its face that a banking entity may engage in risk-mitigating hedging in connection with aggregated positions of the banking entity. The permitted hedging activity, when involving more than one position, contract, or other holding, must be in connection with or related to aggregated positions of the banking entity.

Moreover, hedging of aggregated positions under this exemption must be

related to identifiable risks related to specific positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity. Hedging activity must mitigate one or more specific risks arising from an identified position or aggregation of positions. The

risks in this context are not intended to be more generalized risks that a trading
desk or combination of desks, or the banking entity as a whole, believe exists based on non-position-specific modeling or other considerations. For example, the hedging activity cannot be designed to: Reduce risks associated with the banking entity’s assets and/or liabilities generally, general market

movements or broad economic conditions; profit in the case of a general economic downturn;

counterbalance revenue declines generally; or otherwise arbitrage market

imbalances unrelated to the risks resulting from the positions lawfully held by the banking entity. 1274 Rather, the hedging exemption permits the banking entity to engage in trading activity designed to reduce or otherwise mitigate specific identifiable risks

related to identified individual or aggregated positions that the banking entity is otherwise lawfully permitted to

have.

When undertaking a hedge to mitigate the risk of an aggregation of positions, the banking entity must be able to specifically identify the risk factors arising from this set of positions. In identifying the aggregate set of positions that is being hedged for purposes of § 75.5(b)(2)(ii) and, where applicable, § 75.5(c)(2)(i), the banking entity needs to identify the positions being hedged with sufficient specificity so that at any point in time, the specific financial instrument positions or components of financial instrument positions held by the banking entity that comprise the set of positions being hedged can be clearly

identified.

The proposal would have permitted a series of hedging transactions designed to rebalance hedging position(s) based on changes resulting from permissible activities or from a change in the price

or other characteristic of the individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings being hedged. 1275 The Agencies recognized that, in such dynamic hedging, material changes in risk may require a corresponding modification to the banking entity’s current hedge positions. 1276

Some commenters questioned the risk-mitigating nature of a hedge if, at inception, that hedge contained component risks that must be dynamically managed throughout the life of the hedge. These commenters stated that hedges that do not continuously match the risk ofunderlying positions are not in fact riskmitigating hedges in the first place. 1277

On the other hand, other commenters argued that banking entities must be permitted to engage in dynamic hedging activity, such as in response to market

conditions which are unforeseeable or out of the control of the banking entity, 1278 and expressed concern that the limitations of the proposed rule, especially the requirement that hedging

transactions ‘‘maintain a reasonable level of correlation,’’ might impede truly risk-reducing hedging activity. 1279

A number of commenters asserted

that there could be confusion over the meaning of ‘‘reasonable correlation,’’ which was used in the proposal as part of explaining what type of activity would qualify for the hedging exemption. Some commenters urged requiring that there be a ‘‘high’’ or ‘‘strong’’ correlation between the hedge and the risk of the underlying asset. 1280

Other commenters indicated that uncertainty about the meaning of

reasonable correlation could limit valid risk-mitigating hedging activities

because the level of correlation between a hedge and the risk of the position or aggregated positions being hedged changes over time as a result of changes

in market factors and conditions. 1281 Some commenters represented that the proposed provision would cause certain

administrative burdens 1282 or may result in a reduction in market-making

activities in certain asset classes. 1283 A few commenters expressed concern that the reasonable correlation requirement could render a banking entity’s hedges impermissible if they do not succeed in being reasonably correlated to the

relevant risk or risks based on an afterthe-fact analysis that incorporates market developments that could not have been foreseen at the time the hedge was placed. These commenters tended to favor a different approach or a type

of safe harbor based on an initial

determination of correlation. 1284 Some commenters argued the focus of the hedging exemption should be on risk

reduction and not on reasonable


### 5908 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1285 See, e.g., FTN; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Apr. 2012); see also Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

1286 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). Consistent with the FSOC study and the proposal, the Agencies continue to believe that quantitative measurements can be useful to banking entities and the Agencies to help assess the profile of a trading desk’s trading activity and to help identify trading activity that may warrant a more in-depth review. See infra Part VI.C.3.; final rule Appendix A. The Agencies do not intend to use quantitative measurements as a dispositive tool for differentiating between permitted hedging activities and prohibited proprietary trading.

1287 Some commenters stated that the hedging exemption should focus on risk reduction, not

reasonable correlation. See, e.g., FTN; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Apr. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy. One of these

commenters noted that demonstrated risk reduction should be a key requirement. See Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

1288 See FTN; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ISDA (Apr. 2012); see also Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

1289 See final rule § 75.5(b)(1)(iii). 1290 Some commenters expressed concern that the proposed ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ requirement might impede truly risk-reducing activity. See, e.g., BoA; Barclays; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Seidel); FTN; Goldman (Prop. Trading); ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Morgan Stanley;

PNC; PNC et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); STANY. Some of these commenters stated that the proposed requirement would cause

administrative burdens. See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1291 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading);
Chamber (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012; see also FTN.

1292 By contrast, the proposed requirement did not specify that the hedging activity reduce risk ‘‘at the inception of the hedge.’’ See proposed rule
§ 75.5(b)(2)(ii).

1293 Some commenters noted that hedging activities must address constantly changing positions and market conditions and expressed concern about requiring a banking entity to identify the particular risk being hedged. See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Barclays. 1294 A few commenters expressed concern that the proposed ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ requirement would render hedges impermissible if not reasonably correlated to the relevant risk(s) based

on a post hoc analysis. See, e.g., Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Chamber (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1295 Some commenters questioned the riskmitigating nature of a hedge if, at inception, it contained risks that must be dynamically managed throughout the life of the hedge. See, e.g., AFR et

al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen. correlation. 1285 One commenter suggested that risk management metrics

such as VaR and risk factor sensitivities could be the focus for permitted hedging instead of requirements like reasonable correlation under the proposal. 1286

In consideration of commenter concerns about the proposed reasonable correlation requirement, the final rule modifies the proposal in the following key respects. First, the final rule modifies the requirement of ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ by providing that the hedge demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate specific

identifiable risks. 1287 This change is designed to reinforce that hedging activity should be demonstrably risk reducing or mitigating rather than simply correlated to risk. This change acknowledges that hedges need not simply be correlated to underlying positions, and that hedging activities should be consciously designed to reduce or mitigate identifiable risks, not simply the result of pairing correlated positions, as some commenters suggested. 1288 As discussed above, the Agencies do, however, recognize that

correlation is often a critical element of demonstrating that a hedging activity reduces the risks it is designed to address. Accordingly, the final rule requires that banking entities conduct correlation analysis as part of the required compliance program in order to utilize the hedging exemption. 1289 The Agencies believe this change better

allows consideration of the facts and circumstances of the particular hedging activity as part of the correlation analysis and therefore addresses commenters’ concerns that the proposed reasonable correlation requirement
could cause administrative burdens, impede legitimate hedging activity, 1290 and require an after-the-fact analysis. 1291

Second, the final rule provides that the determination of whether an activity or strategy is risk-reducing or mitigating
must, in the first instance, be made at the inception of the hedging activity. A trade that is not risk-reducing at its inception is not viewed as a hedge for purposes of the exemption in § 75.5. 1292

Third, the final rule requires that the banking entity conduct analysis and independent testing designed to ensure that the positions, techniques, and strategies used for hedging are reasonably designed to reduce or otherwise mitigate the risk being hedged. As noted above, such analysis and testing must include correlation analysis. Evidence of negative correlation may be a strong indicator that a given hedging position or strategy is risk-reducing. Moreover, positive correlation, in some instances, may be an indicator that a hedging position orstrategy is not designed to be riskmitigating. The type of analysis and factors considered in the analysis

should take account of the facts and circumstances, including type of position being hedged, market conditions, depth and liquidity of the market for the underlying and hedging position, and type of risk being hedged.

The Agencies recognize that markets and risks are dynamic and that the risks from a permissible position or aggregated positions may change over time, new risks may emerge in the positions underlying the hedge and in the hedging position, new risks may emerge from the hedging strategy over time, and hedges may become less effective over time in addressing the

related risk. 1293 The final rule, like the proposal, continues to allow dynamic hedging. Additionally, the final rule requires the banking entity to engage in ongoing review, monitoring, and management of its positions and related hedging activity to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the risks that develop over time. This ongoing hedging activity must be designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, and must demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, the material changes in risk that develop over time from the positions, contracts, or other holdings intended to be hedged or otherwise mitigated in the same way, as required for the initial hedging activity. Moreover, the banking entity is required under the final rule to support its decisions regarding appropriate hedging positions, strategies and techniques for its ongoing hedging activity in the same manner as for its initial hedging activities. In this manner, the final rule permits a banking entity to engage in effective management of its risks throughout changing market conditions 1294 while also seeking to prohibit the banking entity from taking large proprietary positions through action or inaction related to an otherwise permissible hedge. 1295

As explained above, the final rule requires a banking entity relying on the hedging exemption to be able to demonstrate that the banking entity is exposed to the specific risks being hedged at the inception of the hedge and any adjustments thereto. However, in the proposal, the Agencies requested comment on whether the hedging exemption should be available in certain cases where hedging activity begins before the banking entity becomes exposed to the underlying risk. The Agencies proposed that the hedging exemption would be available in certain cases where the hedge is established ‘‘slightly’’ before the banking entity becomes exposed to the underlying risk if such anticipatory hedging activity: (i) Was consistent with appropriate risk management practices; (ii) otherwise met the terms of the hedging exemption; and (iii) did not involve the potential for speculative profit. For example, a banking entity that was contractually obligated or otherwise highly likely to


### 5909 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1296 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68875.

1297 See, e.g., Barclays; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Credit Suisse
(Seidel); BoA; PNC et al.; ISDA (Feb. 2012).

1298 See BoA; Credit Suisse (Seidel); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; PNC et al.; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1299 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); BoA.

1300 See PNC et al.

1301 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; Comm. on Capital Market Regulation. As discussed above, hedging activity relying on this exemption cannot be designed to: Reduce risks associated with the banking entity’s assets and/or liabilities generally, general market movements or broad economic conditions; profit in the case of a general economic
downturn; counterbalance revenue declines generally; or otherwise arbitrage market imbalances unrelated to the risks resulting from the positions lawfully held by the banking entity.

1302 See ABA (Keating); CH/ABASA; see also
Credit Suisse (Seidel); PNC; PNC et al.; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). One commenter argued that anticipatory hedging should not be permitted because it represents illegal front running. See Occupy. The Agencies note that not all anticipatory hedging would constitute illegal front running. Any activity that is illegal under another provision of law, such as front running under section 10(b) of the Exchange Act, remains illegal; and section 13 of the BHC Act and any implementing rules thereunder do not represent a grant of authority to engage in any such activity.

See 15 U.S.C. 78j.

1303 As discussed above, the final hedging exemption replaces the ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ concept with the requirement that hedging activity ‘‘demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate’’ specific, identifiable risks.

1304 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); see also Part VI.C.3.d., infra.

1305 This requirement modifies proposed rule
§ 75.5(b)(2)(ii) and (iii). As discussed above, the addition of ‘‘demonstrably reduces or significantly mitigates’’ language replaces the proposed ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ requirement.

1306 The proposed rule contained a similar provision, except that the proposed provision also required that the continuing review maintain a reasonable level of correlation between the hedge transaction and the risk being hedged. See proposed
rule § 75.5(b)(2)(v). As discussed above, the proposed ‘‘reasonable correlation’’ requirement was removed from that provision and instead a requirement has been added to the compliance program provision that correlation analysis be undertaken when analyzing hedging positions, techniques, and strategies before they are implemented.

1307 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

1308 See proposed rule § 75.5(b)(2)(vi). become exposed to a particular risk could engage in hedging that risk in advance of actual exposure. 1296

A number of commenters argued that anticipatory hedging is a necessary and prudent activity and that the final rule should permit anticipatory hedging more broadly than did the proposed

rule. 1297 In particular, commenters were concerned that permitting hedging activity only if it occurs ‘‘slightly’’

before a risk is taken could limit hedging activities that are crucial to risk

management. 1298 Commenters expressed concern that the proposed approach would, among other things, make it difficult for banking entities to accommodate customer requests for transactions with specific price or size

executions 1299 and limit dynamic hedging activities that are important to sound risk management. 1300 In addition, a number of commenters requested that the rule permit banking entities to engage in scenario hedging, a form of anticipatory hedging that addresses potential exposures to ‘‘tail risks.’’ 1301

Some commenters expressed concern about the proposed criterion that the hedging activity not involve the potential for speculative profit. 1302 These commenters argued that the proper focus of the hedging exemption should be on the purpose of the transaction, and whether the hedge is correlated to the underlying risks being hedged (in other words, whether the hedge is effective in mitigating risk). 1303 By contrast, another commenter urged the Agencies to adopt a specific metric to track realized profits on hedging activities as an indicator of prohibited arbitrage trading. 1304

Like the proposal, the final rule does not prohibit anticipatory hedging. However, in response to commenter concerns that the proposal would limit a banking entity’s ability to respond to customer requests and engage in prudent risk management, the final rule does not retain the proposed requirement discussed above that an anticipatory hedge be established ‘‘slightly’’ before the banking entity becomes exposed to the underlying risk

and meet certain conditions. To address commenter concerns with the statutory mandate, several parts of the final rule are designed to ensure that all hedging activities, including anticipatory hedging activities, are designed to be risk reducing and not impermissible proprietary trading activities. For example, the final rule retains the proposed requirement that a banking entity have reasonably designed policies and procedures indicating the positions, techniques and strategies that each trading desk may use for hedging. These policies and procedures should specifically address when anticipatory hedging is appropriate and what policies and procedures apply to anticipatory hedging.

The final rule also requires that a banking entity relying on the hedging exemption be able to demonstrate that the hedging activity is designed to reduce or significantly mitigate, and does demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, specific,

identifiable risks in connection with individual or aggregated positions of the banking entity. 1305 Importantly, to use the hedging exemption, the final rule requires that the banking entity subject its hedging activity to continuing review, monitoring, and management that is designed to reduce or significantly mitigate specific, identifiable risks, and that demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates identifiable risks, in

connection with individual or aggregated positions of the banking entity. 1306 The final rule also requires ongoing recalibration of the hedging activity by the banking entity to ensure that the hedging activity satisfies the requirements set out in § 75.5(b)(2) and is not prohibited proprietary trading. If an anticipated risk does not materialize within a limited time period contemplated when the hedge is entered into, under these provisions, the banking entity would be required to extinguish the anticipatory hedge or otherwise demonstrably reduce the risk associated with that position as soon as reasonably practicable after it is determined that the anticipated risk will not materialize. This requirement focuses on the purpose of the hedge as a trade designed to reduce anticipated risk and not for other purposes. The Agencies will (and expect that banking
entities also will) monitor the activities of banking entities to identify prohibited trading activity that is disguised as anticipatory hedging.

As noted above, one commenter suggested the Agencies adopt a metric to monitor the profitability of a banking entity’s hedging activity. 1307 We are not adopting such a metric because we do

not believe it would be useful to monitor the profit and loss associated with hedging activity in isolation without considering the profit and loss

associated with the individual or aggregated positions being hedged. For example, the commenter’s suggested metric would not appear to provide information about whether the gains arising from hedging positions offset or mitigate losses from individual or aggregated positions being hedged.

3. Compensation

The proposed rule required that the compensation arrangements of persons performing risk-mitigating hedging activities be designed not to reward proprietary risk-taking. 1308 In the proposal, the Agencies stated that hedging activities for which a banking entity has established a compensation

incentive structure that rewards speculation in, and appreciation of, the

market value of a covered financial position, rather than success in reducing


### 5910 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1309 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68868.

1310 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

1311 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); AFR (June 2013).

1312 See Morgan Stanley.

1313 One commenter stated that the compensation requirement should restrict only compensation arrangements that incentivize employees to engage in prohibited proprietary risk-taking, rather than apply to hedging activities. See Morgan Stanley.

1314 Thus, the Agencies agree with one commenter who stated that compensation for hedging should not be based purely on profits derived from hedging. However, the final rule does not require compensation vesting, as suggested by this commenter, because the Agencies believe the final hedging exemption includes sufficient requirements to ensure that only risk-mitigating hedging is permitted under the exemption without a compensation vesting provision. See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); AFR (June 2013). 1315 See 12 U.S.C. 5641.

1316 For example, as explained under the proposal, a hedge would be established at a different level of organization of the banking entity if multiple market-making desks were exposed to similar risks and, to hedge such risks, a hedge was established at the direction of a supervisor or risk manager responsible for more than one desk rather than at each of the market-making desks that established the initial positions, contracts, or other holdings. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68876 n.161. 1317 See AFR (June 2013); Occupy.

1318 See Occupy.

1319 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR (June 2013).

1320 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Barclays; see also Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

1321 See JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1322 See JPMC; Barclays.

1323 See Barclays; JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Japanese Bankers

Ass’n.

1324 See JPMC. risk, are inconsistent with permitted risk-mitigating hedging activities. 1309

Commenters generally supported this requirement and indicated that its inclusion was very important and

valuable. 1310 Some commenters argued

that the final rule should limit compensation based on profits derived from hedging transactions, even if thosehedging transactions were in fact riskmitigating hedges, and urged that employees be compensated instead based on success in risk mitigation at the end of the life of the hedge. 1311 In contrast, other commenters argued that the compensation requirement should restrict only compensation arrangements that incentivize employees to engage in prohibited proprietary risk-taking. 1312

After considering comments received on the compensation requirements of the proposed hedging exemption, the final rule substantially retains the proposed requirement that the compensation arrangements of persons performing risk-mitigating hedging activities be designed not to reward prohibited proprietary trading. The final

rule is also modified to make clear that rewarding or incentivizing profit making from prohibited proprietary trading is not permitted. 1313

The Agencies recognize that compensation, especially incentive compensation, may be both an important motivator for employees as well as a useful indicator of the type of activity that an employee or trading desk is engaged in. For instance, an incentive compensation plan that rewards an employee engaged in activities under the hedging exemption based primarily on whether that employee’s positions appreciate in value instead of whether such positions reduce or mitigate risk would appear to be designed to reward prohibitedproprietary trading rather than riskreducing hedging activities. 1314 Similarly, a compensation arrangement that is designed to incentivize an employee to exceed the potential losses

associated with the risks of the underlying position rather than reduce risks of underlying positions would appear to reward prohibited proprietary trading rather than risk-mitigating hedging activities. The banking entity should review its compensation arrangements in light of the guidance and rules imposed by the appropriate Federal supervisor for the entity regarding compensation. 1315

4. Documentation Requirement

Section 75.5(c) of the proposed rule would have imposed a documentation requirement on certain types of hedging transactions. Specifically, for any transaction that a banking entity conducts in reliance on the hedging exemption that involved a hedge established at a level of organization different than the level of organization establishing or responsible for the positions, contracts, or other holdings the risks of which the hedging transaction is designed to reduce, the banking entity was required, at a
minimum, to document: The riskmitigating purpose of the transaction; the risks of the individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of a banking entity that the transaction is designed to reduce; and the level of organization that is establishing the hedge. 1316 Such documentation was required to be established at the time the hedging transaction is effected. The Agencies expressed concern in the proposal that hedging transactions

established at a different level of organization than the positions being hedged may present or reflect heightened potential for prohibited proprietary trading, either at the trading desk level or at the level instituting the hedging transaction. In other words, the further removed hedging activities are from the specific positions, contracts, or other holdings the banking entity intends to hedge, the greater the danger that such activity is not limited to hedging specific risks of individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity, as required by the rule. Some commenters argued that the final rule should require comprehensive documentation for all activity conducted pursuant to the hedging exemption, regardless of where it occurs in an organization. 1317 One of these

commenters stated that such documentation can be easily and quickly produced by traders and noted that traders already record execution details of every trade. 1318 Several commenters argued that the rule should impose a requirement that banks label all hedges at their inception and provide information regarding the specific risk being offset, the expected duration of the hedge, how it will be monitored,
how it will be wound down, and the names of the trader, manager, and supervisor approving the hedge. 1319

Some commenters requested that the documentation requirement be applied at a higher level of organization, 1320 and some commenters noted that policies and procedures alone would be sufficient to address hedging activity,

wherever conducted within the organization. 1321 Two commenters indicated that making the documentation requirement narrower is necessary to avoid impacts or delays in daily trading operations that could lead to a banking entity being exposed to greater risks. 1322 A number of commenters stated that any enhanced documentation requirement would be burdensome and costly, and would impede rapid and effective risk mitigation, whether done at a trading desk or elsewhere in the banking entity. 1323

At least one commenter also argued that a banking entity should be permitted to consolidate some or all of its hedging activity into a trading desk that is not responsible for the underlying positions without triggering a requirement that all hedges undertaken by a trading desk be documented solely because the hedges are not undertaken by the trading desk that originated the underlying position. 1324

The final rule substantially retains the proposed requirement for enhanced documentation for hedging activity


### 5911 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1325 One commenter suggested that the rule require documentation when a banking entity needs to engage in new types of hedging transactions that are not covered by its hedging policies, although this commenter’s suggested approach would only apply when a hedge is conducted two levels above

the level at which the risk arose. See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies agree that documentation is needed when a trading desk is acting outside of its hedging policies and procedures. However, the final rule does not limit this documentation requirement to circumstances when the hedge is conducted two organizational levels above the trading desk. Such an approach would be less effective than the adopted approach at addressing evasion concerns. 1326 See final rule § 75.5(c)(3).

1327 See proposed rule § 75.6.

1328 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(A), (C), (F), and (H). 1329 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(A).

1330 The Agencies proposed that United States ‘‘agencies’’ for this purpose would include those agencies described in section 201.108(b) of the Board’s Regulation A. See 12 CFR 201.108(b). The Agencies also noted that the terms of the exemption would encompass the purchase or sale of enumerated government obligations on a forward
basis (e.g., in a to-be-announced market). In addition, this would include pass-through or participation certificates that are issued and guaranteed by a government-sponsored entity (e.g., the Federal National Mortgage Association and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation) in

connection with its securitization activities.

1331 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68878.

1332 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1333 See BoA; CalPERS; Credit Suisse (Seidel); CME Group; Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; FIA; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; PNC;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). conducted under the hedging exemption if the hedging is not conducted by the specific trading desk establishing or responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings, the risks of which the hedging activity is designed

to reduce. The final rule clarifies that a banking entity must prepare enhanced documentation if a trading desk establishes a hedging position and is not the trading desk that established the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings. The final rule also requires enhanced documentation for hedges established to hedge aggregated positions across two or more desks. This change in the final rule clarifies that the level of the organization at which the trading desk exists is important for determining whether the trading desk established or is responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings. The final rule recognizes that a trading desk may be responsible for hedging aggregated positions of that
desk and other desks, business units, or affiliates. In that case, the trading desk putting on the hedge is at least one step removed from some of the positions being hedged. Accordingly, the final rule provides that the documentation requirements in § 75.5 apply if a trading desk is hedging aggregated positions that include positions from more than one trading desk.

The final rule adds to the proposal by requiring enhanced documentation for hedges established by the specific trading desk establishing or directly responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings, the risks of which the purchases or sales are designed to reduce, if the hedge is effected through a financial instrument, technique, or strategy that is not specifically identified in the trading desk’s written policies and procedures as a product, instrument, exposure, technique, or strategy that the trading desk may use for hedging. 1325 The Agencies note that this documentation requirement does not apply to hedging activity conducted by a trading desk inconnection with the market makingrelated activities of that desk or by a trading desk that conducts hedging

activities related to the other permissible trading activities of that desk so long as the hedging activity is

conducted in accordance with the compliance program for that trading

desk.

The Agencies continue to believe that, for the reasons stated in the proposal, it is appropriate to retain documentation of hedging transactions conducted by those other than the traders responsible for the underlying position in order to permit evaluation of the activity. In

order to reduce the burden of the documentation requirement while still giving effect to the rule’s purpose, the final rule requires limited documentation for hedging activity that is subject to a documentation requirement, consisting of: (1) The specific, identifiable risk(s) of the identified positions, contracts, or other holdings that the purchase or sale isdesigned to reduce; (2) the specific riskmitigating strategy that the purchase or sale is designed to fulfill; and (3) the trading desk or other business unit that is establishing and responsible for the hedge transaction. As in the proposal,

this documentation must be established contemporaneously with the hedging

transaction. Documentation would be contemporaneous if it is completed reasonably promptly after a trade is executed. The banking entity is required to retain records for no less than 5 years (or such longer period as may be required under other law) in a form that allows the banking entity to promptly produce such records to the Agency on

request. 1326 While the Agencies recognize this documentation requirement may result in certain costs, the Agencies believe this requirement is necessary to prevent evasion of the

statute and final rule.

5. Section 75.6(a)–(b): Permitted Trading in Certain Government and Municipal Obligations

Section 75.6 of the proposed rule permitted a banking entity to engage in trading activities that were authorized by section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, 1327 including trading in certain government obligations, trading on behalf of customers, trading by insurance companies, and trading outside of the United States by certain foreign banking

entities. 1328 Section 75.6 of the final rule generally incorporates these same statutory exemptions. However, the

final rule has been modified in some ways in response to comments received on the proposal.

a. Permitted Trading in U.S. Government Obligations

Section 13(d)(1)(A) permits trading in various U.S. government, U.S. agency and municipal securities. 1329 Section 75.6(a) of the proposed rule, which implemented section 13(d)(1)(A) of the BHC Act, permitted the purchase or sale

of a financial instrument that is an obligation of the United States or any agency thereof or an obligation, participation, or other instrument of or issued by the Government National Mortgage Association, the Federal National Mortgage Association, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, a Federal Home Loan Bank, the Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation or a Farm Credit System institution chartered under and subject to the provisions of the Farm Credit Act of 1971 (12 U.S.C. 2001 et seq.). 1330 The proposal did not contain an exemption for trading in derivatives referencing exempt U.S. government and agency securities, but requested comment on

whether the final rule should contain an exemption for proprietary trading in options or other derivatives referencing an exempt government obligation. 1331

Commenters were generally supportive of the manner in which the proposal implemented the exemption for permitted trading in U.S. government and U.S. agency obligations. 1332 Many commenters argued that the exemption for permissible proprietary trading in government obligations should be expanded, however, to include trading in derivatives on government obligations. 1333 These commenters asserted that failure to provide an exemption would adversely impact liquidity in the underlying government obligations themselves and increase


### 5912 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1334 See BoA; FIA; HSBC; JPMC; Morgan Stanley; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

1335 See Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Fixed
Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; FIA.

1336 See Barclays; CME Group; Fixed Income
Forum/Credit Roundtable; see also UBS.

1337 See CME Group; see also Morgan Stanley;

PNC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

1338 See Barclays; CME Group; JPMC.

1339 See Occupy; Alfred Brock. 1340 See supra note 1335. 1341 See infra Part VI.A.3.c.2.c.i. borrowing costs to governments. 1334

Several commenters asserted that U.S. government and agency obligations and

derivatives on those instruments are substitutes and pose the same investment risks and opportunities. 1335 According to some commenters, the significant connections between these markets and the interchangeable nature of these instruments significantly contribute to price discovery, in particular, in the cash market for U.S. Treasury obligations. 1336 Commenters also argued that trading in Treasury futures and options improves liquidity in Treasury securities markets by providing an outlet to relieve any supply and demand imbalances in spot obligations. Many commenters argued that the authority to engage in trading in derivatives on U.S. government, agency, and municipal obligations is inherent in the statutory exceptions granted by section 13(d)(1)(A) to trade in the underlying obligation. 1337 To the extent there is any doubt about the scope of those exemptions, commenters urged the Agencies to use the exemptive authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) if necessary to permit proprietary trading in derivatives on government obligations. 1338 Two commenters opposed providing an exemption for proprietary trading in derivatives on exempt government obligations. 1339

The final rule has not been modified to permit a banking entity to engage in proprietary trading of derivatives on U.S. government and agency obligations.

The Agencies note that the cash market for exempt government obligations is already one of the most liquid markets in the world, and the final rule will permit banking entities to participate fully in these cash markets. In addition, the final rule permits banking entities to make a market in U.S. government securities and in

derivatives on those securities. Moreover, the final rule allows banking

entities to continue to use U.S. government obligations and derivatives on those obligations in risk-mitigating hedging activities permitted by the rule. Further, proprietary trading in derivatives on such obligations will continue by entities other than banking

entities.

Proprietary trading of derivatives on U.S. government obligations is not necessary to promote and protect the safety and soundness of a banking entity or the financial stability of the United

States. Commenters offered no compelling reasons why derivatives on exempt government obligations pose little or no risk to the financial system as compared to derivatives on other financial products for which proprietary trading is generally prohibited and did not indicate how proprietary trading in derivatives of U.S. government and agency obligations by banking entities would promote the safety and

soundness of those entities or the financial stability of the United States. For these reasons, the Agencies have not determined to provide an exemption for proprietary trading in derivatives on exempt government obligations.

The Agencies believe banking entities will continue to provide significant support and liquidity to the U.S. government and agency security markets through permitted trading in the cash exempt government obligations markets, making markets in government obligation derivatives and through derivatives trading for hedging purposes. The final rule adopts the same approach as the proposed rule for the exemption for permitted trading in U.S. government and U.S. agency obligations. In response to commenters, the Agencies are clarifying how banking entities would be permitted to use Treasury derivatives on Treasury securities when relying on the exemptions for market-making related activities and risk-mitigating hedging activities. The Agencies agree with commenters that some Treasury

derivatives are close economic substitutes for Treasury securities and provide many of the same economic

exposures. 1340 The Agencies also

understand that the markets for Treasury securities and Treasury futures are fully integrated, and that trading in

these derivative instruments is essential to ensuring the continued smooth functioning of market-making related activities in Treasury securities. Treasury derivatives are frequently usedby market makers to hedge their marketmaking related positions across many different types of fixed-income
securities. Under the final rule, market makers will generally be able to continue their practice of using Treasury futures to hedge their activities as block positioners off exchanges. Additionally, when engaging in permitted market-making related or riskmitigating hedging activities in accordance with the requirements in §§ 75.4(b) or 75.(5), the final rule permits banking entities to acquire a short or long position in Treasury futures through manual trading or automated processes. For example, a banking entity would be permitted to use Treasury futures to hedge the duration risk (i.e., the measure of a bond’s price sensitivity to interest rates movements) associated with the banking entity’s market-making in Treasury

securities or other fixed-income products, provided that the banking entity complies with the market-making requirements in § 75.4(b). In their market making, banking entities also frequently trade Treasury futures (and acquire a corresponding long or short position) in reasonable anticipation of
the near-term demands of their clients, customers, and counterparties. For example, banking entities may acquire a long or short position in Treasury futures to hedge anticipated market risk when they reasonably expect clients, customers, or counterparties will seek toestablish long or short positions in onor off-the-run Treasury securities. Similarly, banking entities could acquire a long or short position in the ‘‘Treasury basis’’ to hedge the anticipated basis risk associated with making markets for clients, customers, or counterparties that are reasonably expected to engage in basis trading of the price spread between Treasury futures and Treasury securities. A banking entity can also use Treasury futures (or other derivatives on exempt government obligations) to hedge other risks such as the aggregated interest rate risk for specifically identified loans as

well as other financial instruments such as asset-backed securities, corporate bonds, and interest rate swaps. Therefore, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances, banking entities would be permitted to acquire a very large long or short position in Treasury derivatives provided that they comply with the requirements in §§ 75.4(b) or 75.(5). The Agencies also understand that banking entities that have been designated as ‘‘primary dealers’’ by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York are required to underwrite issuances of Treasury securities. This necessitates the banking entities to frequently establish very large short positions in Treasury futures to order to hedge the duration risk associated with potentially owning a large volume of Treasury securities. As described
below, 1341 the Agencies note that, with


### 5913 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1342 See supra note 910 (explaining the functions of primary dealers).

1343 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.2.b.ix. (discussing commenters’ concerns regarding primary dealer activity, as well as one commenter’s request for such an interpretation).

1344 See final rule § 75.6(a)(4). 1345 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68878.

1346 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t Obligations); Allen & Overy (Canadian Banks); BoA; Australian
Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); AFMA; Banco de

Me

 ́xico; Bank of Canada; Ass’n of German Banks; BAROC; Barclays; BEC (citing the National Institute of Banking and Finance); British Bankers’ Ass’n.;
BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Mexican Banking Comm’n.; French Treasury et al.; EFAMA; ECOFIN; EBF; French Banking Fed’n.; FSA (Apr. 2012); FIA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); HSBC; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Association; IIB/EBF; ICFR; ICSA; IRSG; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; OSFI; British Columbia;
Que  ́bec; Sumitomo Trust; TMA Hong Kong; UBS;

Union Asset.

1347 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t Obligations);
Bank of Canada; British Columbia; Ontario; IIAC; Quebec; IRSG; IIB/EBF; Mitsubishi; Gov’t of Japan/ Bank of Japan; Australian Bankers Ass’n (Feb.
2012); AFMA; Banco de Me  ́xico; Ass’n. of German Banks; ALFI; Embassy of Switzerland.

1348 See Ass’n. of German Banks; Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF; ICFR; FIA; Mitsubishi; Sumitomo Trust; Allen & Overy (Gov’t Obligations).

1349 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Banco

de Me  ́xico; Barclays; BaFIN/Deutsche Bundesbank; EFAMA; Union Asset; TMA Hong Kong; ICI (Feb. 2012) (arguing that such an exemption would be consistent with Congressional intent to limit the extra-territorial application of U.S. law). 1350 See Banco de Me  ́xico; Barclays; BoA; Gov’t of Japan/Bank of Japan; IIAC; OSFI.

1351 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations);
AFMA; Banco de Me  ́xico; Ass’n. of German Banks; Barclays; Mexican Banking Comm’n.; EFAMA; EBF; French Banking Fed’n.; Goldman (Prop. Trading);
HSBC; IIB/EBF; HSBC; ICSA; T. Rowe Price; UBS; Union Asset; IRSG; EBF; Mitsubishi (citing Japanese Bankers Ass’n. and IIB); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); ICI Global.

1352 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations) (contending that ‘‘even if not primary dealers, banking entities or their branches or agencies acting in certain foreign jurisdictions, such as Singapore and India, are still required to hold or transact in local sovereign debt under local law’’); BoA; Barclays; Citigroup; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012).

1353 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations);
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); BoA; Banco

de Me  ́xico; Barclays; Citigroup; Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF; see also JPMC (suggesting that, at a minimum, the Agencies should make clear that all of a firm’s activities that are necessary or reasonably incidental to its acting as a primary dealer in a foreign government’s debt securities are protected by the market-making-related permitted activity); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

As discussed in Parts VI.A.2.c.2.c. and

VI.A.2.c.2.b.ix of this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

, the Agencies believe primary dealing activities would generally qualify under the scope of the market-making or underwriting exemption. respect to a banking entity that acts as a primary dealer for Treasury securities, the U.S. government will be considered a client, customer, or counterparty of the banking entity for purposes of the market-making exemption. 1342 We believe this interpretation appropriately captures the unique relationship between a primary dealer and the government. Moreover, this interpretation clarifies that a banking entity may rely on the market-making exemption for its activities as primary

dealer to the extent those activities are outside the scope of the underwriting exemption. 1343

The final rule also includes an exemption for obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or an agency of the United States. An obligation guaranteed by the U.S. or an agency of the U.S. is, in effect, an obligation of the U.S. or that agency.

The final rule also includes an exemption for an obligation of the FDIC, or any entity formed by or on behalf of the FDIC for the purpose of facilitating the disposal of assets acquired or held by the FDIC in its corporate capacity or

as conservator or receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (‘‘FDI Act’’) or Title II of the Dodd-Frank

Act. 1344 These FDIC receivership and conservatorship operations are

authorized under the FDI Act and Title

II of the Dodd-Frank Act and are designed to lower the FDIC’s resolution costs. The Agencies believe that an exemption for these types of obligations would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States because they facilitate the FDIC’s ability to conduct receivership and conservatorship operations in an orderly manner, thereby limiting risks to the financial system generally that might

otherwise occur if the FDIC was restricted in its ability to conduct these operations.

b. Permitted Trading in Foreign Government Obligations

The proposed rule did not contain an exemption for trading in obligations of foreign sovereign entities. As part of the proposal, however, the Agencies specifically requested comment on whether proprietary trading in the obligations of foreign governments would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States under section 13(d)(1)(J) of the

BHC Act. 1345

The treatment of proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations prompted a significant number of comments. Many commenters, including foreign governments, foreign and domestic banking entities, and various trade groups, argued that the final rule should permit trading in foreign sovereign debt, including obligations issued by political subdivisions of foreign governments. 1346 Representatives from foreign governments such as Canada, Germany, Luxembourg, Japan, Australia, and Mexico specifically requested an exemption for trading in obligations of their governments and argued that an exemption was necessary and appropriate to maintain and promote financial stability in their markets. 1347 Some commenters also requested an exemption for trading in obligations of
multinational central banks, such as Eurobonds issued or guaranteed by the European Central Bank. 1348

Many commenters argued that the same rationale for the statutory exemption for proprietary trading in U.S. government obligations supported exempting proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt and related obligations. 1349 Commenters contended that lack of an express exemption for trading in foreign sovereign obligations could critically impact the functioning of money market operations of foreign central banks and limit the ability of foreign sovereign governments to conduct monetary policy or finance their operations. 1350 These commenters also contended that an exemption for proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt would promote and protect the safety and soundness and the financial stability of the United States by avoiding the possible negative effects of a contraction of government bond market liquidity. 1351

Commenters also contended that in some foreign markets, local regulations or market practice require U.S. banking entities operating in those jurisdictions to hold, trade or support government issuance of local sovereign securities. They also indicated that these

instruments are traded in the United

States or on U.S. markets. 1352 In addition, a number of commenters contended that U.S. and foreign banking entities often perform functions for foreign governments similar to those provided in the United States by U.S. primary dealers and alleged that restricting these trading activities would have a significant negative impact on the ability of foreign governments to implement their monetary policy and on liquidity for such securities in many foreign markets. 1353 A few commenters further argued that banking entities use foreign sovereign debt, particularly debt of their home country and of the country in which they are operating, to manage their risk by posting sovereign securities as collateral in foreign jurisdictions, to manage international rate and foreign exchange risk (particularly in local operations), and for liquidity and asset-liability management purposes in different


### 5914 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1354 See Citigroup; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012).

1355 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); BoA.

1356 See Barclays; IIAC; UBS; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; IIB/EBF.

1357 See Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

1358 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Banco

de Me  ́xico; IIB/EBF; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia.

1359 See Sumitomo Trust; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (Govt. Obligations); BoA; ICI Global; RBC; ICFR; ICI (Feb.
2012); Bank of Canada; Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia;
Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Chamber
(Feb. 2012); BAROC. See also IIB/EBF. 1360 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1361 See Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); IIB/EBF; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; UBS; see also

BAROC.

1362 See BoA; Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore
Banks); IIB/EBF; Norinchukin; OSFI; Cadwalader
(on behalf of Thai Banks); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; UBS; see also BAROC; ICFR; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; Que  ́bec.

1363 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t Obligations).

1364 See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations);

HSBC.

1365 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Prof. Johnson; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1366 See Prof. Johnson; Better Markets (Feb. 2012). 1367 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); see also Prof. Johnson.

1368 See final rule § 75.6(e).

1369 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68862.

1370 See final rule § 75.3(d)(3). countries. 1354 Similarly, commenters expressed concern that the lack of an exemption for trading in foreign government obligations could adversely interact with other banking regulations, such as liquidity requirements under the Basel III capital rules that encourage financial institutions to hold large concentrations of sovereign bonds to match foreign currency denominated obligations. 1355 Commenters also expressed particular concern that the limitations and obligations of section 13 of the BHC Act would likely be problematic and unduly burdensome if banking entities were able to trade in foreign sovereign obligations only under the market making or other proposed exemptions from the proprietary trading prohibition. 1356 One commenter expressed the view that lack of an exemption for proprietary trading in foreign government obligations together with the proposed exemption for trading that occurs solely outside the U.S. may cause foreign banks to close their U.S. branches to avoid being subject to section 13 of the BHC Act and any final

rule thereunder. 1357

According to some commenters, providing an exemption only for proprietary trading in U.S. government obligations, without a similar exemption for foreign government obligations, would be discriminatory and inconsistent with longstanding principles of national treatment and with U.S. treaty obligations, such as obligations under the World Trade Organization framework or bilateral trade agreements. 1358 In addition, several commenters argued that not exempting proprietary trading of foreign sovereign debt may encourage foreign regulators to enact similar regulations to

the detriment of U.S. financial institutions operating abroad. 1359 However, another commenter disagreed that the failure to exempt trading in foreign government obligations would violate trade agreements or that the proposal discriminated in any way against foreign banking entities’ ability to compete with U.S. banking entities in

the U.S. 1360

Based on these concerns, some commenters suggested that the Agencies exempt proprietary trading by foreign banking entities in obligations of their home or host country. 1361 Other commenters suggested allowing trading in foreign government obligations that meet some condition on quality (e.g., OECD-member country obligations, government bonds eligible as collateral for Federal Reserve advances, sovereign bonds issued by G–20 countries, or other highly liquid or rated
instruments). 1362 One commenter indicated that in their view, provided appropriate risk-management procedures are followed, investing in non-U.S. government securities is as low risk as investing in U.S. government securities despite current price volatility in certain types of sovereign debt. 1363 Some commenters also suggested the final rule give deference to home country regulation and permit foreign banking entities to engage in proprietary trading in any government obligation to the extent that such trading is permitted by the entity’s primary regulator. 1364

By contrast, other commenters argued that proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations represents a risky activity and that there is no effective way to draw the line between safe and unsafe foreign debt. 1365 Two of these commenters pointed to several publicly reported instances where proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations resulted in significant losses to certain firms. These commenters argued that restricting proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt would not cause reduced liquidity in government bond markets since banking entities would still be permitted to make a market in and underwrite foreign government obligations. 1366 A few commenters suggested that, if the final rule exempted proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt, foreign governments should commit to pay for any damage to the U.S. financial system related to proprietary trading in their obligations pursuant to such exemption. 1367

The Agencies carefully considered all the comments related to proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt in light of the language, purpose and standards for exempting activity contained in

section 13 of the BHC Act. Under section 13(d)(1)(J), the Agencies may grant an exemption from the prohibitions of the section for any activity that the Agencies determine would promote and protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity and the financial stability of the United

States.

The Agencies note as an initial matter that section 13 permits banking

entities—both inside the United States

and outside the United States—to make markets in and to underwrite all types of securities, including all types of foreign sovereign debt. The final rule implements the statutory market-making and underwriting exemptions, and thus, the key role of banking entities in facilitating trading and liquidity in foreign government debt through market-making and underwriting is maintained. This includes underwriting and marketmaking as a primary dealer in foreign sovereign obligations. Banking entities may also hold foreign sovereign debt in their long-term
investment book. In addition, the final rule does not prevent foreign banking entities from engaging in proprietary trading outside of the United States in any type of sovereign debt. 1368 Moreover, the Agencies continue to believe that positions, including positions in foreign government obligations, acquired or taken for the bona fide purpose of liquidity management and in accordance with a documented liquidity management plan

that is consistent with the relevant Agency’s supervisory requirements, guidance and expectations regarding liquidity management are not covered by the prohibitions in section 13. 1369 The final rule continues to incorporate

this view. 1370

The issue raised by commenters,
therefore, is the extent to which proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations by U.S. banking entities anywhere in the world and by foreign banking entities in the United States is consistent with promoting and protecting the safety and soundness of the banking entity and the financial stability of the United States. Taking


### 5915 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1371 See final rule § 75.6(b). Some commenters requested an exemption for trading in obligations of

multinational central banks. See Ass’n. of German Banks; Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF; ICFR; FIA; Mitsubishi; Sumitomo Trust; Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations). In the case of a foreign banking entity that is owned or controlled by a second foreign banking entity domiciled in a country other than the home country of the first foreign banking entity, the final rule would permit the eligible U.S. operations of the first foreign banking entity to engage in proprietary trading only in the sovereign debt of the first foreign banking entity’s home country, and would permit the U.S. operations of the second foreign banking entity to engage in proprietary trading only in the sovereign debt of the home country of the second foreign banking entity. As noted earlier, other provisions of the final rule

make clear that the rule does not restrict the proprietary trading outside of the United States of either foreign banking organization in debt of any foreign sovereign.

1372 See Part VI.A.5.c., infra. Many commenters requested an exemption for trading in foreign sovereign debt, including obligations issued by political subdivisions of foreign governments. See,

e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); BoA;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; Bank of Canada; Ass’n. of German Banks; BAROC; Barclays. 1373 As part of this exemption, for example, the U.S. operations of a European bank would be able to trade in obligations issued by the European Central Bank. Many commenters represented that the same rationale for exempting trading in U.S. government obligations supports exempting trading in foreign sovereign debt. See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Banco de Me  ́xico; Barclays;
EFAMA; ICI (Feb. 2012).

1374 The Agencies believe this approach appropriately balances commenter concerns that proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations represents a risky activity and the interest in preserving the ability of U.S. operations of foreign banking entities to continue to support the smooth functioning of markets in foreign sovereign obligations in the same manner as U.S. banking entities are permitted to support the smooth functioning of markets in U.S. government and agency obligations. See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Prof. Johnson; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012).

1375 See final rule § 75.6(c). Many commenters requested an exemption for trading in foreign sovereign debt, and some commenters suggested exempting proprietary trading by foreign banking entities in obligations of their home country. See,

e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); BoA; FSA (Apr. 2012); Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); IIB/EBF; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; UBS.

1376 Commenters argued that in some foreign markets, U.S. banks operating in those jurisdictions are required by local regulation or market practice to trade in local sovereign securities. See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); AFMA; Ass’n. of German Banks; Barclays; EBF; Goldman (Prop. Trading); UBS.

1377 Some commenters represented that the limitations and obligations of section 13 would be problematic and unduly burdensome on banking entities because they would only be able to trade in foreign sovereign obligations under existing exemptions, such as the market-making exemption.

See Barclays; IIAC; UBS; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; IIB/EBF.

1378 See, e.g., BoA; Citigroup; Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF; Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012).;

Banco de Me  ́xico; Barclays. The Agencies recognize some commenters’ representation that restricting trading in foreign sovereign debt would not necessarily cause reduced liquidity in government bond markets because banking entities would still be able to make a market in and underwrite foreign government obligations. See Prof. Johnson; Better
Markets (Feb. 2012). into account the information provided by commenters, the Agencies’ understanding of market operations, and the purpose and language of section 13, the Agencies have determined to grant a limited exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading for trading in foreign sovereign obligations under

certain circumstances.

This exemption, which is contained in § 75.6(b) of the final rule, permits the U.S. operations of foreign banking entities to engage in proprietary trading in the United States in the foreign sovereign debt of the foreign sovereign under whose laws the banking entity— or the banking entity that controls it— is organized (hereinafter, the ‘‘home country’’), and any multinational central bank of which the foreign sovereign is a member so long as the purchase or sale as principal is not made by an insured depository institution. 1371 Similar to the exemption for proprietary trading in U.S. government obligations, the permitted trading activity in the U.S. by the eligible U.S. operations of a foreign banking entity would extend to obligations of political subdivisions of the foreign banking entity’s home

country. 1372

Permitting the eligible U.S. operations of a foreign banking entity to engage in proprietary trading in the United States in the foreign sovereign obligations of the foreign entity’s home country allows these U.S. operations of foreign banking entities to continue to support the smooth functioning of markets in foreign sovereign obligations in the same manner as U.S. banking entities are permitted to support the smooth functioning of markets in U.S. government and agency obligations. 1373 At the same time, the risk of these trading activities is largely determined by the foreign sovereign that charters the foreign bank. By not permitting proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt in insured depository institutions (other than in accordance with the limitations in other exemptions), the exemption limits the direct risks of these activities to insured depository institutions in keeping with the

statute. 1374 Thus, the Agencies have determined that this limited exemption for proprietary trading in foreign sovereign obligations promotes and protects the safety and soundness of banking entities and also promotes and protects the financial stability of the

United States.

The Agencies have also determined topermit a foreign bank or foreign brokerdealer regulated as a securities dealer and controlled by a U.S. banking entity to engage in proprietary trading in the obligations of the foreign sovereign under whose laws the foreign entity is organized (hereinafter, the ‘‘home country’’), including obligations of an agency or political subdivision of that foreign sovereign. 1375 This limited exemption is necessary to allow U.S. banking organizations to continue to own and acquire foreign banking organizations and broker-dealers without requiring those foreign banking organizations and broker-dealers to discontinue proprietary trading in the sovereign debt of the foreign banking entity’s home country. 1376 The Agencies have determined that this limited exemption will promote the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States by allowing U.S. banking entities to

continue to be affiliated with and operate foreign banking entities and

benefit from international diversification and participation in global financial markets. 1377 However, the Agencies intend to monitor activity of banking entities under this exemption to ensure that U.S. banking entities are not seeking to evade the restrictions of section 13 by using an affiliated foreign bank or broker-dealer to engage in proprietary trading in foreign sovereign

debt on behalf of or for the benefit of other parts of the U.S. banking entity.

Apart from this limited exemption, the Agencies have not extended this exemption to proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt by U.S. banking
entities for several reasons. First, section 13 was primarily concerned with the risks posed to the U.S. financial system by proprietary trading activities. This risk is most directly transmitted by U.S. banking entities, and while commenters alleged that prohibiting U.S. banking entities from engaging in proprietary trading in debt of foreign sovereigns would harm liquidity in those markets, the evidence provided by commenters did not sufficiently indicate that permitting U.S. banking entities to engage in proprietary trading (as opposed to market-making or underwriting) in debt of foreign sovereigns contributed in any significant degree to the liquidity of markets in foreign sovereign

instruments. 1378 Thus, expanding the exemption to permit U.S. banking entities to engage in proprietary trading in debt of foreign sovereigns would likely increase the risks to these entities and the U.S. financial system without a significant concomitant and offsetting benefit. As explained above, these U.S.


### 5916 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1379 Representatives from foreign governments stated that an exemption allowing trading in obligations of their governments is necessary to maintain financial stability in their markets. See,

e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Bank of Canada; IRSG; IIB/EBF; Gov’t of Japan/Bank of Japan; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Banco

de Me  ́xico; Ass’n. of German Banks; ALFI. Commenters argued that exempting trading in foreign sovereign debt would avoid the possible negative impacts of a contraction of government bond market liquidity. See, e.g., BoA; Citigroup; Goldman (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF. Additionally, commenters suggested that failing to provide an exemption for this activity would impact money market operations of foreign central banks and limit the ability of foreign sovereign governments to conduct monetary policy or finance their operations. See, e.g., Barclays; BoA; Gov’t of Japan/ Bank of Japan; OSFI. A number of commenters also argued that, since U.S. and foreign banking entities often perform functions for foreign governments similar to those provided in the U.S. by U.S. primary dealers, the lack of an exemption would have a significant, negative impact on the ability of foreign governments to implement monetary policy and on liquidity in many foreign markets. See, e.g., Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); Australian
Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); BoA; Banco de Me  ́xico; Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF. Some commenters argued that banking entities and their customers use foreign sovereign debt to manage their risk by posting collateral in foreign jurisdictions and to manage international rate and foreign exchange risk. See Citigroup (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012).

1380 The Agencies generally concur with

commenters’ concerns that because the lack of an exemption could result in negative consequences— such as harming liquidity in foreign sovereign debt markets, making it more difficult and more costly for foreign governments to fund themselves, or subjecting banking entities to increased concentration risk—systemic risk could increase or there could be spillover effects that would harm global markets, including U.S. markets. See IIF; EBF; ICI Global; HSBC; Barclays; ICI (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; Union Asset. Additionally, in
consideration of one commenter’s statements, the Agencies believe that failing to provide this exemption may cause foreign banks to close their
U.S. branches, which could harm U.S. markets. See Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

1381 See, e.g., BoA; Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); IIB/EBF; OSFI; UBS; BAROC; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC.

1382 Some commenters suggested permitting nonU.S. banking entities to trade in any government obligation to the extent that such trading is permitted by the entity’s primary regulator. See Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); HSBC.

1383 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); see also Prof. Johnson. 1384 See Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); IIB/EBF; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Norinchukin; RBC;

Sumitomo Trust; UBS.

1385 See Barclays; FIA.

1386 See Barclays.

1387 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68878 n.165. entities are permitted by the final ruleto continue to engage fully in marketmaking in and underwriting of debt of foreign sovereigns anywhere in the world. The only restriction placed on

these entities is on the otherwise impermissible proprietary trading in these instruments for the purpose of selling in the near term or otherwise

with the intent to resell in order to profit from short-term price movements.

The Agencies recognize that, depending on the extent to which banking entities subject to the rule have contributed to the liquidity of trading markets for foreign sovereign debt, the lack of an exemption for proprietary trading in foreign sovereign debt could result in certain negative impacts on the markets for such debt. In general, the Agencies believe these concerns should be mitigated somewhat by the refined exemptions for market making, underwriting and permitted trading activity of foreign banking entities; however, those exemptions do not address certain of the collateral, capital, and other operational issues identified by commenters. 1379 Foreign sovereign

debt of home and host countries generally serves these purposes. Due to the relationships among global financial markets, permitting trading that supports these essential functions promotes the financial stability and the safety and soundness of banking

entities. 1380 In contrast, a broad exemption for proprietary trading in all foreign sovereign debt without the

limitations contained in the underwriting, market making and hedging exemptions could lead to more complicated risk profiles and significant unhedged risk exposures that section 13 of the BHC Act is designed to address. Thus, the Agencies believe use of section 13(d)(1)(J) exemptive authority to permit proprietary trading in foreign government obligations in certain limited circumstances is appropriate.

The Agencies decline to follow commenters’ suggested alternative of allowing trading in foreign government obligations if the obligations meet a particular condition on quality, such as obligations of OECD member

countries. 1381 The Agencies do not believe such an approach responds to the statutory purpose of limiting risks posed to the U.S. financial system by proprietary trading activities as directly as our current approach, which is structured to limit the exposure of banking entities, including insured depository institutions, to the risks of foreign sovereign debt. Additionally, the Agencies decline to permit proprietary trading in any obligation permitted under the laws of the foreign banking entity’s home country, 1382 because such an approach could result in unintended competitive impacts since banking entities would not be subject to one

uniform standard inside the United
States. Further, unlike some commenters, the Agencies do not believe it is appropriate to require foreign governments to commit to paying for any damage to the U.S. financial system resulting from the foreign sovereign debt exemption. 1383

The proposal also did not contain an exemption for trading in derivatives on foreign government obligations. Many commenters who recommended providing an exemption for proprietary trading in foreign government obligations also requested that the exemption be extended to derivatives on foreign government obligations. 1384 Two of these commenters urged that trading in derivatives on foreign sovereign obligations should be exempt for the same reason that trading in derivatives on U.S. government obligations is exempt because such trading supports liquidity and price stability in the market for the underlying government obligations. 1385 One commenter recommended that the Agencies use the authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) to grant an exemption for proprietary trading in derivatives on foreign government obligations. 1386

The final rule has not been modified in § 75.6(b) to permit a banking entity to engage in proprietary trading in derivatives on foreign government obligations. As noted above, the Agencies have determined not to permit proprietary trading in derivatives on U.S. exempt government obligations under section 13(d) and, for the same
reasons, have determined not to extend the permitted activities to include proprietary trading in derivatives on foreign government obligations.

c. Permitted Trading in Municipal

Securities

Section 75.6(a) of the proposed rule implemented an exemption to the prohibition against proprietary trading under section 13(d)(1)(A) of the BHC Act, which permits trading in certain governmental obligations. This exemption permits the purchase or sale of obligations issued by any State or any political subdivision thereof (the ‘‘municipal securities trading exemption’’). The proposed rule included both general obligation bonds and limited obligation bonds, such as revenue bonds, within the scope of this municipal securities trading exemption. The proposed rule, however, did not extend to obligations of ‘‘agencies’’ of States or political subdivisions

thereof. 1387

Many commenters, including industry participants, trade groups, and Federal and state governmental representatives, argued that the municipal securities trading exemption should be interpreted to permit banking entities to engage in proprietary trading in a broader range of municipal securities, including the


### 5917 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1388 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Ashurst; Ass’n. of
Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; BDA (Feb. 2012); Capital Group; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012); CHFA; Eaton Vance; Fidelity;
Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; HSBC; MEFA; Nuveen Asset Mgmt.; Sens. Merkley & Levin
(Feb. 2012); Am. Pub. Power et al.; MSRB; Fidelity; State of New York; STANY; SIFMA (Municipal
Securities) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012);
North Carolina; T. Rowe Price; Sumitomo Trust; UBS; Washington State Treasurer; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

1389 See, e.g., CHFA; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012); Am. Pub. Power et al.; North Carolina; Washington State Treasurer; see also NABL; Ashurst; BDA (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Eaton Vance; Fidelity; MEFA; MSRB; Am. Pub.

Power et al.; Nuveen Asset Mgmt.; PNC; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); UBS.

1390 See Ashurst; Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Eaton
Vance; Am. Pub. Power et al.; SIFMA (Municipal
Securities) (Feb. 2012); North Carolina; T. Rowe Price; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also Capital Group (arguing that municipal securities are not generally used as a profit making strategy and thus, including all municipal securities in the exemption by itself should not adversely affect the safety and soundness of banking entities); PNC (arguing that the safe and sound nature of trading in State and municipal agency obligations was ‘‘a fact recognized by Congress in 1999 when it authorized well capitalized national banks to underwrite and deal in, without limit, general obligation, limited obligation and revenue bonds issued by or on behalf of any State, or any public agency or authority of any State or political subdivision of a State’’); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). 1391 See, e.g., MSRB; City of New York; Am. Pub.

Power et al.; Wells Fargo; State of New York; Washington State Treasurer; ABA (Keating); Capital Group; North Carolina; Eaton Vance; Port Authority; Connecticut; Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Ashurst; Nuveen Asset Mgmt.; SIFMA (Municipal
Securities) (Feb. 2012).

1392 See, e.g., MSRB (stating that, based on data from Thomson Reuters, 41.4 percent of the municipal securities issued in FY 2011 were issued by agencies and authorities).

1393 See 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(29).

1394 See ABA (Keating); Ashurst; BoA; Capital Group; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Eaton Vance; Fidelity; MEFA; MTA–NY; MSRB; Am. Pub.

Power et al.; NABL; NCSL; State of New York; Nuveen Asset Mgmt.; Port Authority; PNC; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); North Carolina; T. Rowe Price; UBS; Washington State Treasurer; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

1395 See Ashurst; Citigroup (Jan. 2012) (noting that the National Bank Act explicitly lists State agencies and authorities as examples of political
subdivisions); MSRB.

1396 See, e.g., Citigroup (Jan. 2012).

1397 See, e.g., MSRB; Citigroup (Jan. 2012). In
addition to the Federal securities laws, the National Bank Act explicitly includes agencies and authorities as examples of political subdivisions.

See 12 U.S.C. 24(seventh) (permitting investments in securities ‘‘issued by or on behalf of any State or political subdivision of a State, including any municipal corporate instrumentality of 1 or more States, or any public agency or authority of any State or political subdivision of a State . . . .’’). In addition, a number of banking regulations also include agencies as examples of political subdivisions or define political subdivision to include municipal agencies, authorities, districts, municipal corporations and similar entities. See,

e.g., 12 CFR 1.2; 12 CFR 160.30; 12 CFR 161.38; 12 CFR 330.15. Further, for purposes of the tax-exempt bond provisions in the Internal Revenue Code, Treasury regulations treat obligations issued by or ‘‘on behalf of’’ States or political subdivisions by ‘‘constituted authorities’’ as obligations of such States or political subdivisions, and the Treasury regulations define the term ‘‘political subdivision’’ to mean ‘‘any division of any State or local governmental unit which is a municipal corporation or which has been delegated the right to exercise part of the sovereign power of the

unit. . . .’’ See 26 CFR 1.103–1(b).

1398 See ABA (Keating); Ashurst; Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); MSRB; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1399 See Occupy.

1400 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

1401 See 26 U.S.C. 141. In general, the rules applicable to the issuance of tax-exempt private activity bonds under the Internal Revenue Code of
1986, as amended (the ‘‘Code’’) are more restrictive than those applicable to traditional governmental bonds issued by States or political subdivisions thereof. Section 146 of the Code imposes an annual State bond volume cap on most tax-exempt private activity bonds that is tied to measures of State populations. Sections 141–150 of the Code impose other additional restrictions on tax-exempt private activity bonds, including, among others, eligible project and use restrictions, bond maturity restrictions, land and existing property financing restrictions, an advance refunding prohibition, and a public approval requirement. following: Obligations issued directly by States and political subdivisions thereof; obligations issued by agencies,
constituted authorities, and similar governmental entities acting as

instrumentalities on behalf of States and political subdivisions thereof; and obligations issued by such governmental entities that are treated as political

subdivisions under various more expansive definitions of political

subdivisions under Federal and state

laws. 1388 These commenters argued that States and municipalities often issue obligations through agencies and

instrumentalities and that these obligations generally have the same level of risk as direct obligations of States and political subdivisions. 1389 Commenters asserted that permitting trading in a broader group of municipal

securities would be consistent with the terms and purposes of section 13 and would not adversely affect the safety and soundness of banking entities

involved in these transactions or create additional risk to the financial stability

of the United States. 1390

Commenters expressed concerns that the proposed rule would result in a bifurcation of the municipal securities

market that would achieve no meaningful benefits to the safety and soundness of banking entities, create administrative burdens for determining whether or not a municipal security qualifies for the exemption, result in inconsistent applications across different States, increase costs, and decrease liquidity in the diverse municipal securities market. 1391 Commenters also argued that the market for securities issued by agencies and instrumentalities of States and political

subdivisions thereof would be especially disrupted, and would affect about 40 percent of the municipal

securities market. 1392

Commenters recommended that the final rule provide a broad exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading for municipal securities, based on the definition of ‘‘municipal securities’’ used in section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange

Act, 1393 which is understood by market participants and by Congress, and has a well-settled meaning and an established body of law. 1394 Other commenters contended that adopting the same definition of municipal securities as

used in the Federal securities laws would reduce regulatory burden, remove uncertainty, and lead to

consistent treatment of these securities under the banking and securities

laws. 1395 According to some commenters, the terms ‘‘agency’’ and ‘‘political subdivision’’ are used differently under some State laws, and some State laws identify certain agencies as political subdivisions or define political subdivision to include agencies. 1396 Commenters also noted

that a number of Federal statutes and regulations define the term ‘‘political subdivision’’ to include municipal agencies and instrumentalities. 1397 Commenters suggested that the Agencies interpret the term ‘‘political subdivision’’ in section 13 more broadly than in the proposal to include a wider range of State and municipal governmental obligations issued by agencies and instrumentalities or, alternatively, that the Agencies use the exemptive authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) if necessary to permit proprietary trading of a broader array of State and municipal obligations. 1398

On the other hand, one commenter contended that bonds issued by agencies and instrumentalities of States or municipalities pose risks to the banking system because the commenter

believed the market for these bonds has not been properly regulated or

controlled. 1399 A few commenters also recommended tightening the proposed municipal securities trading exemption to exclude conduit obligations that benefit private businesses and private organizations. 1400 One commenter suggested that the proposed municipal securities trading exemption should not apply to tax-exempt municipal bonds that benefit private businesses (referred to as ‘‘private activity bonds’’ in the

Internal Revenue Code 1401) and that allow private businesses to finance private projects at lower interest rates as


### 5918 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1402 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

1403 See final rule § 75.6(a)(3).

1404 Many commenters requested that the final rule use the definition of ‘‘municipal securities’’ used in the Federal securities laws because, among other reasons, the industry is familiar with that definition and such an approach would promote

consistent treatment of these securities under banking and securities laws. See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Ashurst; BoA; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Citigroup (Jan. 2012); NCSL; Port Authority; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); MSRB. Section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange Act defines the term ‘‘municipal securities’’ to mean ‘‘securities which are direct obligations of, or obligations guaranteed as to principal or interest by, a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any agency or instrumentality of a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any municipal corporate instrumentality of one or more States, or any security which is an industrial development bond
(as defined in section 103(c)(2) of Title 26) the interest on which is excludable from gross income under section 103(a)(1) of Title 26 if, by reason of the application of paragraph (4) or (6) of section 103(c) of Title 26 (determined as if paragraphs
(4)(A), (5), and (7) were not included in such section 103(c)), paragraph (1) of such section 103(c) does not apply to such security.’’ See 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(29).

1405 The definition of municipal securities in section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange Act has outdated tax references to the prior law under the former Internal Revenue Code of 1954, including particularly references to certain provisions involving the concept of ‘‘industrial development

bonds.’’ The successor current Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, replaces the prior definition of ‘‘industrial development bonds’’ with
a revised, more restrictive successor definition of ‘‘private activity bonds’’ and related definitions of ‘‘exempt facility bonds’’ and ‘‘small issue bonds.’’ In recognition of the numerous tax law changes since the last statutory revision of section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange Act in 1970 and the potential attendant confusion, the Agencies determined to use a simpler, streamlined, independent definition of municipal securities for purposes of the municipal securities trading exception. This revised definition is intended to encompass, among others, any securities that are covered by the definition of the term ‘‘municipal securities’’ under section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange Act. 1406 Many commenters requested that the municipal securities trading exemption be interpreted to include a broader range of State and municipal obligations issued by agencies and

instrumentalities. See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Ashurst;
BoA; BDA (Feb. 2012); Fixed Income Forum/Credit Roundtable; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

1407 See, e.g., Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Ashurst;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Dec.
2011); BlackRock; Fixed Income Forum/Credit

Roundtable.

1408 Commenters represented that the proposed rule would result in inconsistent applications of the exemption across States and political subdivisions. The Agencies also recognize, as noted by commenters, that the proposed rule would likely have resulted in a bifurcation of the municipal

securities market and associated administrative burdens and disruptions. See, e.g., MSRB; Am. Pub.

Power et al.; Port Authority; Citigroup (Jan. 2012);

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012).

1409 Commenters asserted that permitting trading in a broader group of municipal securities would be consistent with the terms and purposes of

section 13. See, e.g., Ashurst; Citigroup (Jan. 2012);
Eaton Vance; Am. Pub. Power et al.; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012). 1410 Commenters argued that obligations issued by agencies and instrumentalities generally have the same level of risk as direct obligations of States and political subdivisions. See, e.g., CHFA; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Am. Pub. Power et al.; North Carolina. In response to one commenter’s concern that the markets for bonds issued by agencies and instrumentalities are not properly regulated, the Agencies note that all types of municipal securities, as defined under the securities laws to include, among others, State direct obligation bonds and agency or instrumentality bonds, are generally subject to the same regulations under the securities laws. Thus, the Agencies do not believe that obligations of agencies and instrumentalities are subject to less effective regulation than obligations of States and political subdivisions. See Occupy.

1411 Commenters noted that a number of Federal statutes and regulations define ‘‘political subdivision’’ to include municipal agencies and

instrumentalities. See, e.g., MSRB; Citigroup (Jan.
2012).

1412 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy. The Agencies do not believe it is appropriate to exclude conduit obligations, which are tax-exempt municipal bonds, from this exemption because such obligations are used to finance important projects related to, for example, multi-family housing, healthcare (hospitals and nursing homes), colleges and universities, power and energy companies and resource recovery facilities. See U.S. Securities & Exchange Comm’n., Report on the Municipal
Securities Market 7 (2012), available at http:// www.sec.gov/news/studies/2012/ munireport073112.pdf

.

1413 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68878. a result of the exemption from Federal

income taxation for the interest received by investors. 1402

The final rule includes the statutory exemption for proprietary trading of obligations of any State or political

subdivision thereof. 1403 In response to the public comments and for the reasons discussed below, this exemption uses the definition of the term ‘‘municipal security’’ modeled after the definition of ‘‘municipal securities’’ under section 3(a)(29) of the Exchange Act, 1404 but with simplifications. 1405 The final rule defines the term ‘‘municipal security’’ to mean ‘‘a security which is a direct obligation of or issued by, or an obligation guaranteed as to principal or interest by, a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any agency or instrumentality of a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any municipal corporate instrumentality of one or more States or political

subdivisions thereof.’’

The final rule modifies the proposal to permit proprietary trading in obligations issued by agencies and instrumentalities acting on behalf of States and municipalities (e.g., port authority bonds and bonds issued by municipal agencies or corporations). 1406 As noted by commenters, many States and municipalities rely on securities issued by agencies and instrumentalities to fund essential activities, including utility systems, infrastructure projects, affordable housing, hospitals, universities, and other nonprofit

institutions. 1407 Both obligations issued directly by States and political subdivisions thereof and obligations issued by an agency or instrumentality of such a State or local governmental entity are ultimately obligations of the State or local governmental entity on whose behalf they act. Moreover, exempting obligations issued by State and municipal agencies and

instrumentalities in the same manner as the direct obligations of States and municipalities lessens potential inconsistent treatment of government obligations across States and municipalities that use different funding methods for government projects. 1408

The Agencies believe that interpreting the language of section 13(d)(1)(A) of the BHC Act to provide an exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading for obligations issued by States and municipal agencies and

instrumentalities as described above is consistent with the terms and purposes

of section 13 of the BHC Act. 1409 The Agencies recognize that state and political subdivision agency obligations generally present the same level of risk as direct obligations of States and political subdivisions. 1410 Moreover, the Agencies recognize that other Federal laws and regulations define the term ‘‘political subdivision’’ to include municipal agencies and

instrumentalities. 1411 The Agencies decline to exclude from this exemption conduit obligations that benefit private entities, as suggested by some

commenters. 1412

The proposal did not exempt proprietary trading of derivatives on obligations of States and political subdivisions. The proposal solicited comment on whether exempting proprietary trading in options or other derivatives referencing an obligation of a State or political subdivision thereof

was consistent with the terms and purpose of the statute. 1413 The Agencies did not receive persuasive information on this topic and, for the same reasons

discussed above related to derivatives on U.S. government securities, the Agencies have determined not to provide an exemption for proprietary trading in municipal securities, beyond the underwriting, market-making, hedging and other exemptions provided generally in the rule. The Agencies note that banking entities may trade derivatives on municipal securities under any other available exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading,


### 5919 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1414 See id.

1415 Commenters argued that including obligations of multilateral developments banks in a foreign sovereign debt exemption is necessary to avoid endangering international cooperation in financial regulation and potential retaliatory prohibitions against U.S. government obligations.

See Ass’n. of German Banks; Sumitomo; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). Additionally, some commenters represented that an exemption for obligations of international and multilateral development banks is appropriate for many of the same reasons provided for exempting U.S. government obligations and foreign sovereign debt generally. See Ass’n. of German Banks; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); IIB/EBF; ICFR; ICI Global; FIA; Sumitomo Trust; Allen & Overy (Gov’t. Obligations); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1416 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(D). 1417 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68879.

1418 This language generally mirrors that used in the Board’s Regulation Y, OCC interpretive letters, and the SEC’s Rule 3a5–1 under the Exchange Act.

See 12 CFR 225.28(b)(7)(ii); 17 CFR 240.3a5–1(b); OCC Interpretive Letter 626 (July 7, 1993). 1419 See, e.g., Am. Express; BoA; ISDA (Apr.
2012); RBC; SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

1420 See, e.g., Am. Express; SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1421 See Am. Express.

1422 See RBC. The Agencies note that acting as a block positioner is expressly contemplated and included as part of the exemption for market making-related activities under the final rule.

1423 See BoA; SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1424 See SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1425 See SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). providing the requirements of the relevant exemption are met.

d. Determination to Not Exempt Proprietary Trading in Multilateral Development Bank Obligations

The proposal did not exempt proprietary trading in obligations of

multilateral banks or derivatives on multilateral development bank obligations but requested comment on

this issue. 1414 A number of commenters argued that the final rule should include an exemption for obligations of multilateral development banks. 1415

The Agencies have not included an exemption to permit banking entities to engage in proprietary trading in obligations of multilateral development banks at this time. The Agencies do not believe that providing an exemption for trading obligations of multilateral development banks will help enhance the markets for these obligations and therefore promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and U.S. financial stability.

6. Section 75.6(c): Permitted Trading on

Behalf of Customers

Section 13(d)(1)(D) of the BHC Act provides an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading for the purchase, sale, acquisition, or disposition of financial instruments on

behalf of customers. 1416 The statute

does not define when a transaction or activity is conducted ‘‘on behalf of

customers.’’

a. Proposed Exemption for Trading on

Behalf of Customers

Section 75.6(b) of the proposed rule implemented the exemption for trading on behalf of customers by exempting three types of trading activity. Section 75.6(b)(i) of the proposed rule provided that a purchase or sale of a financial

instrument occurred on behalf of customers if the transaction (i) was conducted by a banking entity acting as investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, trustee, or in a similar fiduciary capacity for the account of that customer, and (ii) involved solely

financial instruments for which the banking entity’s customer, and not the banking entity or any affiliate of the banking entity, was the beneficial owner. This exemption was intended to permit trading activity that a banking entity conducts in the context of providing investment advisory, trust, or fiduciary services to customers provided that the banking entity structures the activity so that the customer, and not the banking entity, benefits from any gains and suffers any losses on the traded positions.

Section 75.6(b)(ii) of the proposed rule exempted the purchase or sale of a covered financial position if the banking entity was acting as riskless principal. 1417 Under the proposed rule, a banking entity qualified as a riskless principal if the banking entity, after having received an order to purchase or sell a covered financial position from a customer, purchased or sold the covered financial position for its own account to offset a contemporaneous sale to or purchase from the customer. 1418

Section 75.6(b)(iii) of the proposed rule permitted trading by a banking entity that was an insurance company for the separate account of insurance policyholders. Under the proposed rule, only a banking entity that is an insurance company directly engaged in the business of insurance and subject to regulation by a State insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator was eligible for this prong of the exemption for trading on behalf of customers. Additionally, the purchase or sale of the covered financial position was exempt only if it was solely for a separate account established by the insurance company in connection with one or more insurance policies issued by that insurance company under which all profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of the financial

instrument were allocated to the separate account and inured to the

benefit or detriment of the owners of the insurance policies supported by the separate account, and not the banking entity. These types of transactions are customer-driven and do not expose the banking entity to gains or losses on the value of separate account assets even though the banking entity is treated as

the owner of those assets for certain

purposes. b. Comments on the Proposed Rule

Several commenters contended that the Agencies construed the statutory exemption too narrowly by limiting permissible proprietary trading on behalf of customers to only three categories of transactions. 1419 Some of these commenters argued the exemption in the proposal was not consistent with the statutory language or Congressional intent to permit all transactions that are

‘‘on behalf of customers.’’ 1420 One of these commenters expressed concern that the proposed exemption for trading on behalf of customers may beconstrued to permit only customerdriven transactions involving securities

and not other financial instruments such as foreign exchange forwards and

other derivatives. 1421

Several commenters urged the Agencies to expand the exemption for trading on behalf of customers to permit other categories of customer-driven transactions in which the banking entity may be acting as principal but that serve legitimate customer needs including capital formation. For example, one commenter urged the Agencies to permit customer-driven transactions in which the banking entity has no ready counterparty but that are undertaken at the instruction or request of a customer or client or in anticipation of such an instruction or request, such as facilitating customer liquidity needs or block positioning transactions. 1422 Other commenters urged the Agencies to exempt transactions where the banking entity acts as principal to

accommodate a customer and substantially and promptly hedges the

risks of the transaction. 1423 Commenters argued that these kinds of transactions are similar in purpose and level of risk to riskless principal transactions. 1424 Commenters also argued that these

transactions could be viewed as marketmaking related activities, but indicated that the potential uncertainty and costs of making that determination would discourage banking entities from taking principal risks to accommodate

customer needs. 1425 Commenters also requested that the Agencies expressly


### 5920 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1426 See SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1427 See, e.g., Alfred Brock; ICBA; Occupy.

1428 See ICBA.

1429 See Occupy.

1430 See Public Citizen.

1431 See Occupy; Alfred Brock.

1432 See Occupy; Public Citizen. Conversely, other commenters supported the approach taken in the proposed rule without requesting such a definition.

See Alfred Brock.

1433 See, e.g., Am. Express; SIMFA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1434 See Am. Express. 1435 See ACLI; Chris Barnard; NAMIC; Fin.
Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012).

1436 See Chris Barnard.

1437 See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); NAMIC.

1438 See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); NAMIC.

1439 See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); NAMIC.

1440 See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); NAMIC.

1441 See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); NAMIC. 1442 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5896 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (arguing that ‘‘this permitted activity is intended to allow financial firms to use firm funds to purchase assets
on behalf of their clients, rather than on behalf of
themselves.’’).

1443 Some commenters urged narrowing the exemption. See, e.g., Alfred Brock; ICBA; Occupy. The Agencies believe the final rule is appropriately narrow to limit potential abuse.

1444 See final rule § 75.6(c)(1)(ii)–(iii). See also proposed rule § 75.6(b)(2)(i)(B)–(C). permit transactions on behalf of customers to create structured products, as well as for client funding needs, customer clearing, and prime brokerage,

if these transactions are included within the trading account. 1426

In contrast, some commenters supported the proposed approach for implementing the exemption for trading on behalf of customers or urged narrowing the exemption. 1427 One commenter expressed general support for the requirement that all profits (or losses) from the transaction flow to the customer and not the banking entity providing the service for a transaction to be exempt. 1428 One commenter

contended that the statute did not permit transactions on behalf of customers to be performed by an

investment adviser. 1429 Another commenter argued that the final rule should permit a banking entity to engage in a riskless principal transaction only where the banking entity has already arranged for another

customer to be on the other side of the

transaction. 1430 Other commenters urged the Agencies to ensure that both parties to the transaction agree beforehand to the time and price of any relevant trade to ensure that the banking entity solely stands in the middle of the transaction and in fact passes on all gains (or losses) from the transaction to

the customers. 1431 Commenters also urged the Agencies to define other key terms used in the exemption. For instance, some commenters requested

that the final rule define which entities may qualify as a ‘‘customer’’ for purposes of the exemption. 1432

Some commenters urged the Agencies to provide uniform guidance on how the Agencies will interpret the riskless principal exemption. 1433 One commenter urged the Agencies to clarify how the riskless principal exemption would be implemented with respect to transactions in derivatives, including a hedged derivative transaction executed at the request of a customer. 1434

Several commenters generally expressed support for the exemption for trading for the separate account of insurance policyholders under the proposed rule. 1435 One commenter requested that the final rule more clearly articulate who may qualify as a permissible owner of an insurance policy to whom the profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of a

financial instrument allocated to the separate account may inure. 1436

Several commenters argued that certain types of separate account activities, including the allocation of seed money by an insurance company to a separate account or the offering of certain non-variable separate account contracts by the insurance company, would not appear to be permitted under the proposal. 1437 Commenters also expressed concern that these separate account activities might not satisfy the proposed requirement that all profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of the financial position inure to the

benefit or detriment of the owners of the insurance policies supported by the separate account, and not the insurance

company. 1438 In addition, commenters argued that under the proposed rule, these activities would appear to fall outside of the exemption for activities in the general account of an insurance company because the proposed rule defined a general account as excluding

a separate account. 1439 Commenters urged the Agencies to more closely align the exemptions for trading by an insurance company for the general account and separate account. 1440 According to these commenters, this change would permit insurance companies to continue to engage in the business of insurance by offering the full suite of insurance products to their

customers. 1441

c. Final Exemption for Trading on

Behalf of Customers

The Agencies have carefully

considered the comments and are adopting the exemption for trading on

behalf of customers with several modifications. The Agencies believe that the final rule implements the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(D) in a manner consistent with the legislative intent to allow banking entities to use their own funds to purchase or sell financial instruments when acting on

behalf of their customers. 1442 At the
same time, the limited activities permitted under the final rule limit the potential for abuse. 1443

The final rule slightly modifies the proposed rule by providing that a banking entity is not prohibited from trading on behalf of customers when that activity is conducted by the banking entity as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity for a customer and so long as the transaction is conducted for
the account of, or on behalf of the customer and the banking entity does

not have or retain a beneficial ownership of the financial instruments. The final rule removes the proposal’s express exemption for investment
advisers. After further consideration, the Agencies do not believe an express

reference to investment advisers is necessary because investment advisers generally act in a fiduciary capacity on

behalf of clients in a manner that is separately covered by other exclusions and exemptions in the final rule. Additionally, the final rule deletes the proposal’s express exemption for commodity trading advisors because the legal relationship between a commodity trading advisor and its client depends

on the facts and circumstances of each relationship. Therefore, the Agencies determined that it was appropriate to limit the discussion to fiduciary obligations generally and to omit any specific discussion of commodity trading advisors. In order to ensure that a banking entity utilizes this exemption to engage only in transactions for

customers and not to conduct its own trading activity, the final rule (consistent with the proposed rule) requires that the purchase or sale of

financial instruments be conducted for

the account of the customer and that it involve solely financial instruments of
which the customer, and not the banking entity, is beneficial owner. 1444 The final rule, like the proposed rule, permits transactions in any financial instrument, including derivatives such as foreign exchange forwards, so long as


### 5921 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1445 Some commenters expressed concern that the proposed exemption for trading on behalf of customers may be construed to not permit transactions in foreign exchange forwards and other

derivatives. See Am. Express; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1446 See Occupy; Public Citizen.

1447 See final rule § 75.6(c)(2).

1448 Some commenters urged the Agencies to ensure that the banking entity passes on all gains
(or losses) from the transaction to the customers.

See Occupy; Public Citizen.

1449 See RBC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012). 1450 See, e.g., Am. Express; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1451 See, e.g., 12 CFR 225.28(b)(7)(ii); 17 CFR 240.3a5–1(b); OCC Interpretive Letter 626 (July 7, 1993). One commenter stated that a banking entity should only be allowed to engage in a riskless principal transaction where the banking entity has already arranged for another customer to be on the

other side of the transaction. See Public Citizen. The Agencies believe that the contemporaneous requirement in the final rule addresses this

comment.

1452 One commenter requested an exemption for transactions at the instruction or request of a customer or client or in anticipation of such an instruction or request, such as facilitating customer liquidity needs or block positioning transactions.

See RBC.

1453 Some commenters requested an exemption for these types of transactions. See BoA; SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1454 Some commenters stated that the potential uncertainty and costs of determining whether an activity qualifies for the market-making exemption would discourage banking entities from taking principal risks to accommodate customer needs.
See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies believe that adjustments made to the market-making exemption in the final rule helpaddress this concern. Specifically, the final marketmaking exemption better accounts for the varying characteristics of market-making across markets and

assets classes.

1455 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

1456 See final rule § 75.3(d)(4)–(6). See also infra

Part VI.A.1.d.3–4.

1457 Some commenters requested that the Agencies more closely align the exemptions for trading by an insurance company for the general account and separate account. See ACLI; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity
Insurers); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012);

NAMIC.

1458 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(F).

1459 One commenter requested clarification on who may qualify as a permissible owner of an insurance policy to whom the profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of a financial instrument allocated to the separate account may

inure. See Chris Barnard. The Agencies note that the proposed requirement that all profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of a financial

instrument inure to the benefit or detriment of the ‘‘owners of the insurance policies supported by the separate account’’ has been removed. See proposed
rule § 75.6(b)(2)(iii)(C). Instead, the final rule requires that the income, gains, and losses from assets allocated to a separate account be credited to

Continued those transactions are on behalf of

customers. 1445

While some commenters requested

that the final rule define ‘‘customer’’ for purposes of this exemption, 1446 the Agencies believe the requirements of this exemption address commenters’ underlying concerns about what constitutes a ‘‘customer.’’ Specifically, the Agencies believe that requiring a transaction relying on this exemption to be conducted in a fiduciary capacity for
a customer, to be conducted for the
account of the customer, and to involve solely financial instruments of which

the customer is beneficial owner address the underlying concerns that a transaction could qualify for this exemption if done on behalf of an

indirect customer or on behalf of a customer not served by the banking entity.

The final rule also provides that a banking entity may act as riskless principal in a transaction in which the banking entity, after receiving an order to purchase (or sell) a financial instrument from a customer, purchases (or sells) the financial instrument for its

own account to offset the contemporaneous sale of the financial instrument to (purchase from) the

customer. 1447 Any transaction conducted pursuant to the exemption for riskless principal activity must be customer-driven and may not expose the banking entity to gains (or losses) on

the value of the traded instruments as principal. 1448 Importantly, the final rule does not permit a banking entity to purchase (or sell) a financial instrument without first having a customer order to buy (sell) the instrument. While some commenters requested that the Agencies modify the final rule to permit activity
without a customer order, 1449 the Agencies are concerned that broadening the exemption in this manner would enable banking entities to evade the requirements of section 13 and engage in prohibited proprietary trading under the guise of trading on behalf of

customers.

Several commenters requested that the final rule explain how a banking entity may determine when it is acting as riskless principal. 1450 The Agencies note that riskless principal transactions typically are undertaken as an alternative method of executing orders by customers to buy or sell financial instruments on an agency basis. Acting as riskless principal does not include acting as underwriter or market maker in the particular financial instrument and is generally understood to be equivalent to agency or brokerage

transactions in which all of the risks associated with ownership of financial instruments are borne by customers. The Agencies have generally equivalent standards for determining when a banking entity acts as riskless principal and require that the banking entity, after receiving an order to buy (or sell) a
financial instrument from a customer, buys (or sells) the instrument for its own account to offset a contemporaneous sale to (or purchase from) the

customer. 1451 The Agencies intend to determine whether a banking entity acts as riskless principal in accordance with and subject to the requirements of these

standards.

Some commenters requested that the final rule permit a greater variety of

transactions to be conducted on behalf of customers. Many of these
transactions, such as transactions that facilitate customer liquidity needs or block positioning transactions 1452 or transactions in which the banking entity acts as principal to accommodate a customer and substantially and promptly hedges the risks of the

transaction, 1453 may be permissible under the market-making exemption. To

the extent these transactions are conducted by a market maker, the Agencies believe that the restrictions and limits required in connection with market making-related activities are important for limiting the risks to the banking entity from these

transactions. 1454 While some commenters requested that clearing and settlement activities and prime brokerage activities be viewed as permitted proprietary trading on behalf
of customers, 1455 these transactions are not considered proprietary trading as an

initial matter under the final rule. 1456

Finally, the Agencies have decided to move the exemption for trading activity conducted by an insurance company for a separate account into the provision exempting trading activity in an insurance company’s general account in order to better align the two exemptions. 1457 As discussed below in Part VI.A.7., the final rule provides exemptions for trading activity conducted by an insurance company that is a banking entity either in the general account or in a separate account of customers in § 75.6(d). As explained below, the statute specifically exempts trading activity that is conducted by a regulated insurance company engaged

in the business of insurance for the general account of the company if

conducted in accordance with applicable state law and if not prohibited by the appropriate Federal banking agencies. 1458 Unlike activity for the general account of an insurance company, investments made by regulated insurance companies in separate accounts in accordance with applicable state law are made on behalf

of and for the benefit of customers of the insurance company. 1459 Also unlike


### 5922 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

or charged against the account without regard to other income, gains or losses of the insurance

company. See final rule § 75.2(z) (definition of ‘‘separate account’’). Thus, the final rule no longer references ‘‘owners of the insurance policies supported by the separate account.’’ The Agencies note, however, that the final rule requires exempted separate account transactions to be ‘‘conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled.’’ See final rule
§ 75.6(d)(3).

1460 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(F).

1461 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(D).

1462 See proposed rule §§ 75.6(b)(2)(iii), 75.6(c). 1463 See proposed rule § 75.3(c)(6).

1464 See proposed rule § 75.2(z).

1465 The Agencies noted in the proposal they would not consider profits to inure to the benefit of the banking entity if the banking entity were solely to receive payment, out of separate account profits, of fees unrelated to the investment performance of the separate account. 1466 The proposed rule provided definitions of the terms ‘‘State insurance regulator’’ and ‘‘foreign insurance regulator.’’ See proposed rule § 75.3(c)(4),
(13).

1467 See, e.g., Alfred Brock; Chris Barnard; Fin.
Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); TIAA–CREF;

NAMIC.

1468 See, e.g., ACLI (Jan. 2012); Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); Country Fin. et al. ; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity
Insurers). general accounts (which are supported by all of the assets of the insurance company), a separate account is supported only by the assets in that

account and does not have call on the other assets of the company. The customer benefits (or loses) based solely on the performance of the assets in the separate account. These arrangements are the equivalent for insurance companies of fiduciary accounts at
banks. For these reasons, the final rule recognizes that separate accounts at regulated insurance companies

maintained in accordance with applicable state insurance laws are exempt from the prohibitions in section 13 as acquisitions on behalf of

customers.

7. Section 75.6(d): Permitted Trading by a Regulated Insurance Company

Section 13(d)(1)(F) permits a banking entity that is a regulated insurance company acting for its general account, or an affiliate of an insurance company acting for the insurance company’s general account, to purchase or sell a financial instrument subject to certain conditions (the ‘‘general account exemption’’). 1460 Section 13(d)(1)(D) permits a banking entity to purchase or

sell a financial instrument on behalf of

customers. 1461 In the proposed rule, the Agencies viewed Section 13(d)(1)(D) as permitting an insurance company to purchase or sell a financial instrument for certain separate accounts (the ‘‘separate account exemption’’). The proposal implemented both these exemptions with respect to activities of insurance companies, in each case subject to the restrictions discussed

below. 1462

Section 75.6(c) of the proposed rule implemented the general account exemption by generally restating the statutory requirements of the exemption

that:

• The insurance company directly engage in the business of insurance and be subject to regulation by a State insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator;

• The insurance company or its affiliate purchase or sell the financial instrument solely for the general account of the insurance company;

• The purchase or sale be conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled; and

• The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation with the

Council and the relevant insurance
commissioners of the States, must not have jointly determined, after notice and comment, that a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described above is insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity or of the financial stability of the

United States.

The proposed rule defined the term ‘‘general account’’ to include all of the assets of the insurance company that are not legally segregated and allocated to separate accounts under applicable

State law. 1463

As noted above in Part VI.A.6.a., § 75.6(b)(iii) of the proposed rule provided an exemption for a banking entity that is an insurance company when it acted through a separate

account for the benefit of insurance policyholders. The proposed rule defined a ‘‘separate account’’ as an account established or maintained by a regulated insurance company subject to regulation by a State insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator under which income, gains, and losses,
whether or not realized, from assets
allocated to such account, are, in accordance with the applicable contract, credited to or charged against such account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the insurance

company. 1464

To limit the potential for abuse of the separate account exemption, the proposed rule included requirements designed to ensure that the separate account trading activity is subject to appropriate regulation and supervision

under insurance laws and not structured so as to allow gains or losses from trading activity to inure to the benefit or detriment of the banking entity. 1465 In particular, the proposed rule provided that a purchase or sale of a financial instrument qualified for the separate account exemption only if:

• The banking entity is an insurance company directly engaged in the business of insurance and subject to regulation by a State insurance regulator or foreign insurance regulator; 1466

• The banking entity purchases or sells the financial instrument solely for a separate account established by the insurance company in connection with one or more insurance policies issued by that insurance company;

• All profits and losses arising from the purchase or sale of the financial instrument are allocated to the separate

account and inure to the benefit or

detriment of the owners of the insurance policies supported by the separate account, and not the banking entity; and

• The purchase or sale is conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment and other laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is

domiciled.

The proposal explained that the proposed separate account exception represented transactions on behalf of

customers because the insurance-relatedtransactions are generally customerdriven and do not expose the banking entity to gains or losses on the value of separate account assets, even though the banking entity may be treated as the

owner of those assets for certain

purposes.

Commenters generally supported the general account exemption and the separate account exemption for regulated insurance companies as

consistent with both the statute and Congressional intent to accommodate

the business of insurance. 1467 For instance, commenters argued that the statute was designed to appropriately
accommodate the business of insurance, subject to regulation in accordance with relevant insurance company investment laws, in recognition that insurance company investment activities are already subject to comprehensive regulation and oversight. 1468

A few commenters expressed

concerns about the definition of ‘‘general account’’ and ‘‘separate


### 5923 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1469 See, e.g., Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); ACLI (Jan. 2012); Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers).

1470 See Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers).

1471 See ACLI (Jan. 2012); NAMIC.

1472 See Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); ACLI (Jan. 2012); NAMIC; see also Nationwide.

1473 See Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); ACLI (Jan. 2012); NAMIC; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); see also Nationwide.

1474 See Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); ACLI (Jan. 2012).

1475 See USAA.

1476 See HSBC Life. 1477 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1478 See ACLI (Jan. 2012); Fin. Services
Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); Mutual of Omaha;

NAMIC.

1479 See final rule § 75.2(p), (bb). Some commenters expressed concerns about the proposed definitions of ‘‘general account’’ and ‘‘separate account,’’ including that the proposed definition of ‘‘separate account’’ excluded some legitimate separate account activities that do not fall within the proposed general account definition. See, e.g., ACLI (Jan. 2012); NAMIC; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers). See also proposed rule
§§ 75.2(z), 75.3(c)(5).

1480 The Federal banking agencies have not at this time determined, as part of the final rule, that the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of any particular State or jurisdiction are insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity, or of the financial stability of the United States. The Federal banking agencies expect to monitor, in conjunction with the FSOC, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of States or jurisdictions to which exempt transactions are subject and make such determinations in the future, where appropriate. The Agencies believe the final approach addresses one commenter’s request that the Agencies consult with the foreign insurance supervisor of an insurance company regulated outside of the United States before finding that an insurance activity conducted by the foreign company was inconsistent with the safety and soundness or financial stability. See HSBC Life. account.’’ 1469 One commenter argued the definition of general account was

unclear. 1470 A few commenters expressed concern that the proposed definition of separate account inappropriately excluded some separate
accounts, such as certain insurance company investment activities such as guaranteed investment contracts, which would also not fall within the proposed definition of general account. 1471 Several commenters argued that the

final rule should be modified so that all insurance company investment activity permitted under applicable insurance laws would qualify for either the general account exemption or the separate account exemption. 1472

Some commenters argued that the prohibition in the proposed definition of separate account against any profits or losses from activity in the account inuring to the benefit (or detriment) of the insurance company would exclude some activity permitted by insurance regulation in separate accounts. 1473 For example, commenters contended that an insurer may allocate its own funds to a separate account as ‘‘seed money’’ and the profits and losses on those funds

inure to the benefit or detriment of the insurance company. 1474

Some commenters expressed specific concerns about the scope or requirements of the proposal. For instance, one commenter argued that the final rule should provide that a trade is exempt if the trade is made by an affiliate of the insurance company in

accordance with state insurance law. 1475 Another commenter urged that the Agencies consult with the foreign insurance supervisor of an insurance company regulated outside of the United States before finding that an insurance activity conducted by the foreign insurance company was inconsistent with the safety and soundness or financial stability. 1476

One commenter suggested that insurance company affiliates of banking entities should expressly be made subject to data collection and reporting requirements to prevent possible

evasion of the restrictions of section 13 and the final rule using their insurance

affiliates. 1477 By contrast, other commenters argued that the reporting and recordkeeping and compliance requirements of the rule should not apply to permitted insurance company

investment activities. 1478 These commenters argued that insurance companies are already subject to comprehensive regulation of the kinds and amounts of investments they can

make under insurance laws and regulations and that additional recordkeeping obligations would impose unnecessary compliance

burdens on these entities without producing significant offsetting benefits.

After considering the comments received and the language and purpose
of the statute, the final rule has been

modified to better account for the language of the statute and more appropriately accommodate the

business of insurance.

As explained in the proposal, section 13(d)(1)(F) of the BHC Act specifically and broadly exempts the purchase, sale, acquisition, or disposition of securities and other instruments by a regulated insurance company engaged in the business of insurance for the general account of the company (and by an affiliate solely for the general account of the regulated insurance company). Section 13(d)(1)(D) of the statute also specifically exempts the same activity

when done on behalf of customers. As explained in the proposal, separate accounts managed and maintained by insurance companies as part of the business of insurance are generally customer-driven and do not expose the banking entity to gains or losses on the value of assets held in the separate account, even though the banking entity may be treated as the owner of the assets for certain purposes. Unlike the general account of the insurance company, separate accounts are managed on behalf of specific customers, much as a bank would manage a trust or fiduciary

account.

For these reasons, the final rule retains both the general account exemption and the separate account exemption. The final rule removes any gap between the definition of general account and the definition of separate account by defining the general account

to be all of the assets of an insurance company except those allocated to one

or more separate accounts. 1479 The final rule also combines the general account exemption and the separate account exemption into a single section. This makes clear that both exemptions are available only:

• If the insurance company or its affiliate purchases or sells the financial instruments solely for the general account of the insurance company or a separate account of the insurance

company;

• The purchases or sales of financial

instruments are conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled; and

• The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation with the Financial Stability Oversight Council

and the relevant insurance

commissioners of the States and relevant foreign jurisdictions, as appropriate, have not jointly
determined, after notice and comment, that a particular law, regulation, or written guidance regarding insurance is insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity, or the financial stability of the United

States. 1480

Like section 13(d)(1)(F) of the BHC Act, the final rule permits an affiliate of an insurance company to purchase and

sell financial instruments in reliance on the general account exemption, so long as that activity is for the general account of the insurance company. Similarly, the final rule implements section 13(d)(1)(D) and permits an affiliate of an insurance company to purchase and sell financial instruments for a separate account of the insurance company, so long as the separate account is


### 5924 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1481 Although one commenter requested that the final rule exempt a trade as long as the trade is made by an affiliate of the insurance company in accordance with state insurance law, the Agencies believe the final approach properly implements the

statute. See USAA.

1482 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(1) (requiring that the Agencies issue regulations regarding ‘‘internal controls and recordkeeping, in order to insure compliance with this section’’).

1483 Section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act provides an exemption to the prohibition on proprietary trading for trading conducted by a foreign banking entity pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act, if the trading occurs solely outside of the United States, and the banking entity is not directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the United

States or of one or more States. See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(H).

1484 This section’s discussion of the concept ‘‘solely outside of the United States’’ is provided solely for purposes of the rule’s implementation of
section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act, and does not affect a banking entity’s obligation to comply with additional or different requirements under applicable securities, banking, or other laws.

1485 See proposed rule § 75.6(d).

1486 See, e.g., IIB/EBF; ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); BoA.

1487 See IIB/EBF; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia;
EBF; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Cadwalader (on behalf
of Thai Banks).

1488 See BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; ICSA; IIB/ EBF; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Credit Suisse (Seidel); George Osbourne. 1489 See ICE; ICI Global; BoA; Citigroup (Feb.
2012); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; IIB/EBF.

1490 See BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; Norinchukin; IIF; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); ICFR; BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

As discussed below in Part VI.C. of this

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

**,** other parts of the final rule address commenters’ concerns regarding the compliance burden on foreign banking entities.

1491 See Norinchukin; Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Barclays; EBF; Commissioner Barnier;
Ass’n. of German Banks; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Chamber
(Dec. 2012).

1492 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (arguing that the final rule’s foreign trading exemption should not exempt foreign affiliates of U.S. banking entities when they engage in trading activity abroad); see also Occupy; Alfred Brock. established and maintained at the insurance company.

Importantly, the final rule applies only to covered trading activity in a general or separate account of a licensed insurance company engaged in the

business of insurance under the supervision of a State or foreign insurance regulator. As in the statute, an affiliate of an insurance company may not rely on this exemption for activity in any account of the affiliate (unless it,
too, meets the definition of an insurance company). An affiliate may rely on the exemption to the limited extent that the affiliate is acting solely for the account of the insurance company. 1481

As noted above, one commenter requested that the final rule impose special data and reporting obligations on insurance companies. Other commenters argued that insurance companies are already subject to comprehensive regulation under insurance laws and regulations and that additional recordkeeping obligations would impose unnecessary compliance

burdens on these entities without producing significant offsetting benefits.
In accordance with the statute, 1482 the Agencies expect insurance companies to have appropriate compliance programs in place for any activity subject to

section 13 of the BHC Act.

The final rule contains a number of

other related definitions that are intended to help make clear the limitations of the insurance company exemption, including definitions of foreign insurance regulator and State insurance regulator.

8. Section 75.6(e): Permitted Trading Activities of a Foreign Banking Entity

Section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC

Act 1483 permits certain foreign banking entities to engage in proprietary trading that occurs solely outside of the United States (the ‘‘foreign trading exemption’’). 1484 The statute does not define when a foreign banking entity’s trading occurs solely outside of the

United States.

The proposed rule defined both the type of foreign banking entity that is eligible for the exemption and activity that constitutes trading solely outside of the United States. The proposed rule effectively precluded a foreign banking entity from engaging in proprietary trading through a transaction that had any connection with the United States, including: Trading with any party located in the United States; allowing U.S. personnel of the foreign banking entity to be involved in the purchase or sale; or executing any transaction in the United States (on an exchange or otherwise). 1485

In general, commenters emphasized the importance of and supported an exemption for foreign trading activities of foreign banking entities. However, a number of commenters expressed concerns that the proposed foreign trading exemption was too narrow and would not be effective in permitting foreign banking entities to engage in foreign trading activities. 1486 For instance, many commenters stated that the proposal’s prohibition on trading activities that have any connection to

the U.S. was not consistent with the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act where the risk of the trading activity is

taken or held outside of the United States and does not implicate the U.S. safety net. 1487 These commenters argued that, since one of the principal purposes

of section 13 of the BHC Act is to limit the risk posed by prohibited proprietary trading to the Federal safety net, the safety and soundness of U.S. banking entities, and the financial stability of the United States, the exemption for foreign trading activity should similarly focus on whether the trading activity involves principal risk being taken or held by the foreign banking entity inside the United

States. 1488

Many commenters argued that the proposal’s transaction-based approach to implementing the foreign trading exemption would harm U.S. markets and U.S. market participants. For example, some commenters argued that the proposed exemption would cause foreign banks to exit U.S. markets or shrink their U.S.-based operations, thereby resulting in less liquidity and greater fragmentation in markets without producing any significant offsetting benefit. 1489 Commenters also asserted that the proposal would impose significant compliance costs on the foreign operations of foreign banking entities and would lead to foreign firms refusing to trade with U.S. counterparties, including the foreign operations of U.S. entities, to avoid compliance costs associated with relying on another exemption under the proposed rule. 1490 Additionally, commenters argued that the proposal represented an improper extraterritorial application of U.S. law that could be found to violate international treaty obligations of the United States, such as

those under the North American Free Trade Agreement, and might result in retaliation by foreign countries in their treatment of U.S. banking entities

abroad. 1491

a. Foreign Banking Entities Eligible for the Exemption

The statutory language of section 13(d)(1)(H) provides that, in order to be eligible for the foreign trading exemption, the banking entity must not be directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under

the laws of the United States or of one or more States. The proposed rule limited the scope of the exemption to banking entities that are organized under foreign law and, as applicable, controlled only by entities organized under foreign law.

Commenters generally supported this aspect of the proposal. 1492 However, some commenters requested that the

final rule be modified to allow U.S. banking entities’ affiliates or branches that are physically located outside of the United States (‘‘foreign operations of U.S. banking entities’’) to engage in proprietary trading outside of the United States pursuant to this


### 5925 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1493 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Sen. Carper; IIF; ABA (Keating); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Abbot

Labs. et al. (Feb. 14, 2012).

1494 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

1495 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(H).

1496 See final rule § 75.6(e)(1)(ii).

1497 Section 75.6(e)(2) addresses only when a

transaction will be considered to have been conducted pursuant to section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act. Although the statute also references section
4(c)(13) of the BHC Act, the Board has to date applied the general authority contained in that section solely to the foreign activities of U.S. banking organizations which, by the express terms
of section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act, are unable to rely on the foreign trading exemption. 1498 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(9).

1499 See 12 CFR 211.20 et seq.

1500 Commenters noted that the Board’s Regulation K contains a number of limitations that may not be appropriate to include as part of the requirements of the foreign trading exemption. See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); HSBC Life. Accordingly, the final rule does not retain the proposal’s requirement that the activity be conducted in compliance with subpart B of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.20 through 211.30). However, the exemption in section
13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act and the final rule operates as an exemption and is not a separate grant of authority to engage in an otherwise impermissible activity. To the extent a banking entity is a foreign banking organization, it remains subject to the Board’s Regulation K and must, as a separate matter, comply with any and all applicable rules and requirements of that regulation.

1501 See 12 CFR 211.23(a), (c), and (e). The proposed rule referenced only the qualifying test under section 211.23(a) of the Board’s Regulation K; however, because there are two other methods by which a foreign banking organization may meet the requirements to be considered a qualified foreign banking organization, the final rule incorporates a reference to those provisions as well.

1502 This modification to the definition of foreign banking organization is necessary because, under the International Banking Act and the Board’s Regulation K, depository institutions that are located in, or organized under the laws of a commonwealth, territory, or possession of the United States, are foreign banking organizations. However, for purposes of the Federal securities laws and certain banking statutes, such as section
2(c)(1) of the BHC Act and section 3 of the FDI Act,

these same entities are defined to be and treated as
domestic entities. For instance, these entities act as

domestic broker-dealers under U.S. securities laws and their deposits are insured by the FDIC. Because one of the purposes of section 13 is to protect insured depository institutions and the U.S. financial system from the perceived risks of proprietary trading and covered fund activities, the Agencies believe that these entities should be

considered to be located within the United States for purposes of section 13. The final rule includes
within the definition of State a commonwealth, territory or possession of the United States, the
District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto
Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands, American Samoa, Guam, or the United States Virgin Islands.

1503 This clarification would be applicable solely
in the context of section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act. The application of section 4(c)(9) to foreign companies in other contexts is likely to involve different legal and policy issues and may therefore merit different approaches.

1504 See final rule § 75.6(e)(2)(ii)(B). For purposes of determining whether, on a fully consolidated basis, it meets the requirements under § 75.6(e)(2)(ii)(B), a foreign banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization should base its calculation on the consolidated global assets, revenues, and income of the top-tier affiliate within the foreign banking entity’s structure.

1505 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(9); 12 CFR 211.23(a),
(c), and (e); final rule § 75.6(e)(2)(ii)(B). exemption. 1493 These commenters argued that, unless foreign operations of U.S. banking entities are provided similar authority to engage in proprietary trading outside of the United States, foreign operations of U.S. banking entities would be at a competitive disadvantage abroad with respect to foreign banking entities. One
commenter also asserted that, unless foreign operations of U.S. banking entities were able to effectively access foreign markets, they could be shut out

of those markets and would be unable to effectively manage their risks in a safe

and sound manner. 1494

As noted above, section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act specifically provides that its exemption is available only to a banking entity that is not ‘‘directly or indirectly’’ controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws

of the United States or of one or more

States. 1495 Because of this express statutory threshold requirement, a foreign subsidiary controlled, directly or indirectly, by a banking entity organized

under the laws of the United States or one of its States, and a foreign branch office of a banking entity organized

under the laws of the United States or one of the States, may not take advantage of this exemption.

Like the proposal, the final rule incorporates the statutory requirement that the banking entity conduct its trading activities pursuant to sections 4(c)(9) or 4(c)(13) of the BHC Act. 1496

The final rule retains the tests in the proposed rule for determining when a banking entity would meet that requirement. The final rule provides qualifying criteria for both a banking entity that is a qualifying foreign banking organization under the Board’s Regulation K and a banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization for purposes of Regulation K. 1497

Section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act applies to any company organized under the laws of a foreign country the greater part

of whose business is conducted outside the United States, if the Board by regulation or order determines that, under the circumstances and subject to the conditions set forth in the regulation or order, the exemption would not be substantially at variance with the purposes of the BHC Act and would be in the public interest. 1498 The Board has implemented section 4(c)(9) as part of subpart B of the Board’s Regulation

K, 1499 which specifies a number of conditions and requirements that a foreign banking organization must meet in order to act pursuant to that authority. 1500 The qualifying conditions and requirements include, for example, that the foreign banking organization

demonstrate that more than half of its worldwide business is banking and that more than half of its banking business

is outside the United States. 1501 Under the final rule a banking entity that is a qualifying foreign banking organization for purposes of the Board’s Regulation K, other than a foreign bank as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the International Banking Act of 1978 that is organized under the laws of any commonwealth, territory, or possession of the United States, will qualify for the exemption for proprietary trading activity of a foreign banking entity. 1502 Section 13 of the BHC Act also applies to foreign companies that control a U.S. insured depository institution but that are not currently subject to the BHC Act generally or to the Board’s Regulation K—for example, because the foreign company controls a savings association or an FDIC-insured industrial loan company. Accordingly, the final rule also provides that a foreign banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization would be considered to be conducting activities ‘‘pursuant to section 4(c)(9)’’ for purposes of this exemption 1503 if the entity, on a fully-consolidated basis, meets at least two of three requirements

that evaluate the extent to which the foreign banking entity’s business is
conducted outside the United States, as measured by assets, revenues, and

income. 1504 This test largely mirrors the qualifying foreign banking organization test that is made applicable under section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act and section 211.23(a), (c), or (e) of the Board’s Regulation K, except that the test does not require the foreign entity

to demonstrate that more than half of its banking business is outside the United

States. 1505 This difference reflects the fact that foreign entities subject to
section 13 of the BHC Act, but not the BHC Act generally, are likely to be, in many cases, predominantly commercial firms. A requirement that such firms

also demonstrate that more than half of their banking business is outside the United States would likely make the exemption unavailable to such firms and subject their global activities to the prohibition on proprietary trading.

b. Permitted Trading Activities of a Foreign Banking Entity

As noted above, the proposed rule laid out a transaction-based approach to


### 5926 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1506 See proposed rule § 75.6(d).

1507 See BoA; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Seidel); George
Osbourne; IIB/EBF.

1508 See Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; Cadwalader
(on behalf of Thai Banks); IIF; ICE; Banco de

Me

 ́xico; ICFR; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb.
2012); BAROC.

1509 See ICE.

1510 See, e.g., RBC. 1511 See, e.g., IIF; ICE; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Mexican Banking Comm’n.; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb.
2012); Banco de Me  ́xico; OSFI. In addition, a few commenters argued that Canadian and Mexican financial firms frequently use U.S. infrastructure to conduct their trading activities in Canada or

Mexico. See, e.g., OSFI; Banco de Me  ́xico; Mexican Banking Comm’n.

1512 See, e.g., ICE; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale (arguing that the requirement would impair capital raising efforts of many U.S. companies); Australian Bankers Ass’n.
(Feb. 2012); Canadian Minister of Fin.; Ass’n. of

German Banks.

1513 See IIB/EBF.

1514 See Bank of Canada; Banco de Me  ́xico; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks).

1515 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Candian
Banks). 1516 See IIF.

1517 See BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; ICSA; IIB/ EBF; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Credit Suisse (Seidel); George Osbourne.

1518 See IIB/EBF.

1519 See IIB/EBF.

1520 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(J). implementing the foreign trading exemption and provided that a

transaction would be considered to qualify for the exemption only if (i) the transaction was conducted by a banking entity not organized under the laws of

the United States or of one or more States; (ii) no party to the transaction was a resident of the United States; (iii) no personnel of the banking entity that was directly involved in the transaction was physically located in the United States; and (iv) the transaction was executed wholly outside the United

States. 1506

Many commenters objected to the proposed exemption, arguing that it was

unworkable and would have unintended consequences. For example, commenters argued that prohibiting a foreign banking entity from conducting a proprietary trade with a resident of the United States, including a subsidiary or branch of a U.S. banking entity, wherever located, would likely cause foreign banking entities to be unwilling to enter into permitted trading transactions with foreign subsidiaries or

branches of U.S. firms. 1507 In addition, some commenters represented that it

would be difficult to determine and track whether a party is a resident of the United States or that this requirement would require non-U.S. banking entities to inefficiently bifurcate their activities into U.S.-facing and non-U.S.-facing trading desks. 1508 For example, one commenter noted that trading on many exchanges and platforms is anonymous (i.e., each party to the trade is unaware of the identity of the other party to the trade), so a foreign banking entity would likely have to avoid U.S. trading platforms and exchanges entirely to avoid transactions with any resident of

the United States. 1509 Further, commenters stated that the proposed rule could deter foreign banking entities from conducting business with U.S. parties outside of the United States, which could also incentivize foreign market centers to limit participation by U.S. parties on their markets. 1510

Commenters also expressed concern about the requirement that transactions be executed wholly outside of the United States in order to qualify for the proposed foreign trading exemption. Commenters represented that foreign banking entities currently use U.S. trading platforms to trade in certain products (such as U.S.-listed securities or a variety of derivatives contracts), to take advantage of robust U.S.
infrastructure, and for time zone

reasons. 1511 Commenters indicated that the proposed requirement could harm the competitiveness of U.S. trading platforms and the liquidity available on

such facilities. 1512 Some commenters stated that this requirement would effectively result in most foreign banking entities moving their trading operations and personnel outside of the United States and executing transactions on exchanges outside of the

United States. 1513 These commenters

stated that the relocation of these activities would reduce trading activity in the United States that supports the financial stability and efficiency of U.S.
markets. Moreover, these commenters argued that, if foreign banking entities relocate their personnel from the United
States to overseas, this would diminish U.S. jobs with no concomitant benefit. They also contended that the proposal was at cross purposes with other parts

of the Dodd-Frank Act and would hinder growth of market infrastructure being developed under the requirements of Title VII of that Act, including use ofswap execution facilities and securitybased swap execution facilities to enhance transparency in the swaps

markets and use of central clearinghouses to reduce counterparty risk for the parties to a swap

transaction. 1514 For example, one commenter represented that the proposed exemption could make it difficult for non-U.S. swap entities to comply with potential mandatory execution requirements under Title VII

of the Dodd-Frank Act and could cause market fragmentation across borders through the creation of parallel

execution facilities outside of the
United States, which would result in less transparency and greater systemic

risk. 1515 In addition, another commenter stated that the proposed requirement would force issuers to dually list their securities to permit trading on non-U.S. exchanges and, further, clearing and settlement systems would have to be set up outside of the United States, which would create inefficiencies, operational risks, and potentially systemic risk by adding needless complexity to the financial system. 1516

Instead of the proposal’s transactionbased approach to implementing the foreign trading exemption, many commenters suggested the final rule adopt a risk-based approach. 1517 These

commenters noted that a risk-based approach would prohibit or significantly limit the amount of

financial risk from such activities that

could be transferred to the United States by the foreign trading activity of foreign banking entities. 1518 Commenters also noted that foreign trading activities of most foreign banking entities are already subject to activities limitations, capital requirements, and other prudential requirements of their home-country supervisor(s). 1519

The Agencies have carefully

considered these comments and have determined to modify the approach in the final rule. The Agencies believe that the revisions mitigate the potential adverse impacts of the proposed approach while still remaining faithful to the overall purpose of section 13(d)(1)(H). Also, the Agencies believe that section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act, which authorizes the Agencies to provide an exemption from the prohibition on proprietary trading for any activity the Agencies determine by rule ‘‘would promote and protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity and the financial stability of the
United States,’’ 1520 supports allowing foreign banking entities to use U.S.

infrastructure and trade with certain U.S. counterparties in certain circumstances, which will promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and U.S. financial stability.

Overall, the comments illustrated that both the mechanical steps of the specified transactions to purchase or sell various instruments (e.g., execution, clearing), and the identity of the entity for whose trading account the specified trading is conducted are important. 1521

Consistent with the comments described above, the Agencies believe that the


### 5927 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1522 See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(1) (directing the FSOC to study and make recommendations on implementing section 13 so as to, among other things, protect taxpayers and consumers and enhance financial stability by minimizing the risk that insured depository institutions and the affiliates of insured depository institutions will engage in unsafe and unsound activities).

1523 See, e.g., 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (stating that the foreign trading exemption ‘‘recognize[s] rules of international comity by permitting foreign banks, regulated and backed by foreign taxpayers, in the course of operating outside of the United States to engage in activities permitted under relevant foreign law.’’). 1524 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(J).

1525 The proposed rule also contained a definition of ‘‘resident of the United States’’ that was designed to capture the scope of U.S. counterparties that, if involved in the transaction, would preclude that transaction from being considered to have occurred solely outside the United States. The final rule addresses this point by including a definition, for purposes of § 75.6(e) only, of the term ‘‘U.S. entity.’’ 1526 Personnel that arrange, negotiate, or execute a purchase or sale conducted under the exemption for trading activity of a foreign banking entity must
be located outside of the United States. Thus, for example, personnel in the United States cannot solicit or sell to or arrange for trades conducted under this exemption. Personnel in the United

States also cannot serve as decision makers in transactions conducted under this exemption. Personnel that engage in back-office functions, such as clearing and settlement of trades, would not be considered to arrange, negotiate, or execute a purchase or sale for purposes of this provision.

1527 This provision is not intended to restrict the ability of a U.S. branch or affiliate of a foreign banking entity to provide funds collected in the United States to its foreign parent for general

purposes.

1528 ‘‘U.S. entity’’ is defined for purposes of this provision as any entity that is, or is controlled by, or is acting on behalf of, or at the direction of, any other entity that is, located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of
any State. See final rule § 75.6(e)(4).

1529 This provision would generally allow market intermediaries to engage in market-making, underwriting or similar market intermediation

functions. application of section 13(d)(1)(H) and their exemptive authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) should focus on both how the transaction occurs and which entity will

bear the risk of those transactions. Although the statute does not define expressly what it means to act ‘‘as a principal’’ (acting as principal ordinarily means acting for one’s own account), the combination of references to engaging as principal and to a trading account focuses on an entity’s incurring risks of profit and loss through taking ownership of securities and other
instruments. Thus, the final rule provides an exemption for trading activities of foreign banking entities that

addresses both the location of the facilities that effect the acquisition, holding, and disposition of such positions, and the location of the banking entity that incurs such risks through acquisition, holding, and disposition of such positions.

The Agencies believe this approach is consistent with one of the principal purposes of section 13, which is to limit risks that proprietary trading poses to the U.S. financial system. 1522 Further, the purpose of section 13(d)(1)(H) is to limit the extraterritorial application of section 13 as it applies to foreign banking entities. 1523

In addition, prohibiting foreign banking entities from using U.S. infrastructure or trading with all U.S. counterparties could cause certain trading activities to move offshore, with corresponding negative impacts on U.S. market participants, including U.S. banking entities. For example, movement of trading activities offshore, particularly in U.S. financial
instruments, could result in bifurcated

markets for these instruments that are less efficient and less liquid and could reduce transparency for oversight of trading in these instruments. In addition, reducing access to foreign counterparties for U.S. instruments

could concentrate risks in the United States and to its financial system. Moreover, the statute provides separate exemptions for U.S. banking entities to engage in underwriting and market making-related activities, subject to certain requirements, and there is no evidence that limiting the range of potential customers for these entities would further the purposes of the statute. In fact, it is possible that limiting the customer bases of U.S. banking entities, as well as other U.S. firms that are not banking entities, could reduce their ability to effectively manage their inventories and risks and

could also result in concentration risk.

These potential effects of the approach taken in the proposal appear

to be inconsistent with the statute’s goals, including the promotion and protection of the safety and soundness of banking entities and U.S. financial stability. To the contrary, the exemptive approach taken in the final rule appears to be more consistent with the goals of the statute and would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and U.S. financial stability by limiting the risks of foreign banking entities’ proprietary trading activities to the U.S. financial system, while also allowing U.S. markets to continue to operate efficiently in conjunction with foreign markets (rather than creating incentives to establish barriers between U.S. and foreign markets). 1524

Thus, in response to commenter
concerns, the final rule has been

modified to better reflect the text and achieve the overall purposes of the statute (by ensuring that the principal risks of proprietary trading by foreign banking entities allowed under the foreign trading exemption remain solely outside of the United States) while mitigating potentially adverse effects on competition. 1525 In order to ensure these risks remain largely outside of the United States, and to limit potential risk

that could flow to the U.S. financial system through trades by foreign banking entities with or through U.S.
entities, the final rule includes several conditions on the availability of the exemption. Specifically, in addition to limiting the exemption to foreign banking entities, the final rule provides that the exemption for the proprietary trading activity of a foreign banking entity is available only if:

• The banking entity engaging as principal in the purchase or sale (including any personnel of the banking entity or its affiliate that arrange, negotiate or execute such purchase or sale) is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State; 1526

• The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes the decision to purchase or sell as principal

is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

• The purchase or sale, including any transaction arising from risk-mitigating hedging related to the instruments purchased or sold, is not accounted for as principal directly or on a consolidated basis by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

• No financing for the banking entity’s purchase or sale is provided, directly or indirectly, by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State; 1527

• The purchase or sale is not conducted with or through any U.S. entity, 1528 other than:

Æ A purchase or sale with the foreign operations of a U.S. entity, if no personnel of such U.S. entity that are

located in the United States are involved in the arrangement, negotiation or execution of such purchase or sale.

The Agencies believe it is appropriate to exercise their exemptive authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) to also allow, under clause (vi) of the final rule, the following types of purchases or sales conducted with a U.S. entity:

Æ A purchase or sale with an unaffiliated market intermediary acting as principal, 1529 provided the purchase


### 5928 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1530 See final rule § 75.6(e)(5). 1531 See, e.g., 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (‘‘However, these subparagraphs are not intended to permit a U.S. banking entity to avoid the restrictions on proprietary trading simply by setting up an offshore subsidiary or reincorporating offshore, and regulators should enforce them accordingly.’’).

1532 See final rule § 75.6(e)(1)(i).

1533 A number of commenters also requested that the foreign trading exemption permit proprietary trading of foreign sovereign debt or similar obligations of foreign governments. As discussed in

Part VI.A.5.b. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

, the final rule addresses banking entities’ ability to engage in transaction in these types of instruments
in § 75.6(b).

1534 See final rule § 75.6(e)(5). For example, under this definition, a bank that is exempt from registration as a swap dealer under the de minimis exception to swap dealer registration requirements could be a market intermediary for transactions in

swaps. See 17 CFR 1.3(ggg)(4). or sale is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as a central

counterparty; or

Æ A purchase or sale through an unaffiliated market intermediary, provided the purchase or sale is conducted anonymously (i.e. each party to the purchase or sale is unaware of the identity of the other party(ies) to the purchase or sale) on an exchange or similar trading facility and promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as a central

counterparty.

The requirements are designed to ensure that any foreign banking entity engaging in trading activity under this exemption does so in a manner that ensures the risk, decision-making, arrangement, negotiation, execution and financing of the activity resides solely

outside the United States and limits the risk to the U.S. financial system from trades by foreign banking entities with or through U.S. entities.

The final rule specifically recognizes that, for purposes of the exemption for trading activity of a foreign banking entity, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank, or any subsidiary thereof, is located in the United States; however, a foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operation of the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary. 1530 This provision helps give effect to the statutory language limiting the foreign trading exemption to activities of foreign banking entities that occur solely outside of the United States by clarifying that the U.S. operations of foreign banking entities may not conduct proprietary trading based on this exemption.

The Agencies have considered whether the concerns raised by commenters that the foreign operations of U.S. banking entities would be disadvantaged in competing outside the United States warrant an exemption under section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act that extends to foreign operations of U.S. banking entities. The competitiveness of U.S. banking entities

outside the United States often improves the potential for the operations of U.S. firms outside the

United States to succeed and be profitable, and thereby, often improves the safety and soundness of the entity and financial stability in the United

States. However, Congress has determined to generally prohibit U.S. banking entities (including foreign branches and subsidiaries thereof) from engaging in proprietary trading because of the perceived risks of those activities to banking entities and the U.S.

economy. 1531 Allowing U.S. banking entities to conduct, through branches or subsidiaries that are physically located
outside the United States, the same proprietary trading activities those U.S. firms are expressly prohibited from conducting directly through their operations located within the United States would subject U.S. banking entities and the U.S. economy to the very risks section 13 is designed to avoid. The risks of proprietary trading would continue to be borne by the U.S. banking entity whether the activity is conducted by the U.S. banking entity through units physically located inside

or outside of the United States. Moreover, the robust trading markets

that exist overseas could allow U.S. banking entities to shift their prohibited proprietary trading activities to

branches or subsidiaries that are physically located outside the United States under such an exemption, without achieving a meaningful elimination of risk. Accordingly, the Agencies have not exercised their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) at this time to allow U.S. banking entities to conduct otherwise prohibited proprietary trading activities through operations located outside the United States. As a consequence, and consistent with the statutory language and purpose of section 13(d)(1)(H) of the BHC Act, the final rule provides that the exemption is available only if the banking entity is not organized under, or directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under,

the laws of the United States or of one

or more States. 1532

As discussed above, many commenters requested that the final rule permit a foreign banking entity to engage in proprietary trading transactions with a greater variety of counterparties, including counterparties that are located in or organized and incorporated under the laws of the

United States or of one or more

States. 1533 These commenters also requested that the final rule not require that any purchase or sale under the exemption be executed wholly outside

of the United States.

As described above and in response to
commenters’ concerns, the final rule provides that a foreign banking entity generally may engage in trading activity under the exemption with U.S. entities, provided the transaction is with the foreign operations of an unaffiliated U.S. firm (whether or not the U.S. firm is a banking entity subject to section 13 of the BHC Act) and does not involve any personnel of the U.S. entity that are

in the United States and involved in the arrangement, negotiation, or execution of the transaction. The Agencies have also exercised their exemptive authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) to allow foreign banking entities to engage in a transaction that is either through an unaffiliated market intermediary and executed anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility (regardless of whether the ultimate counterparty is a U.S. entity or not) or is executed with a U.S. entity that is an unaffiliated market intermediary acting as principal, provided in either case that the transaction is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as a central counterparty.

For purposes of the final rule, market intermediary is defined as an unaffiliated entity, acting as an intermediary, that is: (i) A broker or dealer registered with the SEC under section 15 of the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such; (ii) a swap dealer registered with the CFTC under section 4s of the Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such; (iii) a security-based swap dealer registered

with the SEC under section 15F of the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such; or (iv) a futures commission merchant registered with the CFTC under section 4f of the Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation

as such. 1534

These provisions of the final rule, viewed as a whole, prevent the


### 5929 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1535 See final rule § 75.6(e)(3)(v)(A).

1536 The Agencies believe that this provision

should address commenters’ concerns that the proposed rule could cause foreign banking entities to avoid conducting business with U.S. firms

outside the United States or could incentivize foreign market places to restrict access to U.S. firms.
See, e.g., RBC. 1537 Under the final rule, ‘‘anonymous’’ means that each party to a purchase or sale is unaware of the identity of the other party(ies) to the purchase

or sale. See final rule § 75.3(e)(1).

1538 See, e.g., 15 U.S.C. 78f(c)(1) (providing that a national securities exchange shall deny membership to (A) any person, other than a natural person, which is not a registered broker or dealer or (B) any natural person who is not, or is not associated with, a registered broker or dealer).

1539 See final rule § 75.3(e)(6) (defining the term ‘‘exchange’’). The rule refers to an ‘‘exchange or similar trading facility.’’ A similar trading facility for these purposes may include, for example, an alternative trading system. 1540 In addition, allowing a foreign banking entity to trade directly with a U.S. end user customer under the foreign trading exemption could give the foreign banking entity a competitive advantage over U.S. banking entities with respect to trading in the

United States. exemption for trading of foreign banking entities from weakening U.S. trading

markets and U.S. firms that are either not subject to the provisions of section

13 or that conduct activities in compliance with other parts of section 13. For instance, the final rule permits a foreign banking entity to trade under the exemption with the foreign operations of a U.S. firm, so long as the purchase or sale does not involve any personnel of the U.S. firm who are

located in the United States and involved in arranging, negotiating or executing the trade. 1535 Transactions

that occur outside of the United States between foreign operations of U.S. entities and foreign banking entities improve access to and functioning of liquid markets without raising the concerns for increased risk to banking

entities in the U.S. that motivated

enactment of section 13 of the BHC Act. The final rule permits a foreign banking entity to engage in transactions with theforeign operations of both U.S. nonbanking and U.S. banking entities. Among other things, this approach will ensure that the foreign operations of U.S. banking entities continue to be able to access foreign markets. 1536 The language of the exemption expressly requires that trading with the foreign operations of a U.S. entity may not involve the use of personnel of the U.S. entity who are located in the United States for purposes of arranging, negotiating, or executing transactions.

Under the final rule, the exemption in no way exempts the U.S. or foreign operations of the U.S. banking entities from having to comply with the

restrictions and limitations of section 13. Thus, the U.S. and foreign operations of a U.S. banking entity that is engaged in permissible market making-related activities or other permitted activities may engage in those transactions with a foreign banking entity that is engaged in proprietary trading in accordance with the exemption under § 75.6(e) of the final rule. Importantly, the final rule does not impose a duty on the foreign banking entity or the U.S. banking entity to ensure that its counterparty is conducting its activity in conformance

with section 13 of the BHC Act and the
final rule. Rather, that burden is at all times on each party subject to section 13 to ensure that it is conducting its activities in accordance with section 13 and this implementing rule.

The final rule also permits, pursuant to section 13(d)(1)(J), a foreign banking entity to trade through an unaffiliated market intermediary if the trade is conducted anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility and is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization. 1537 Allowing foreign banking entities to generally conduct anonymous proprietary trades on U.S. exchanges and similar anonymous trading facilities allows these exchanges and facilities—which are generally not subject to section 13 and do not take the risks section 13 is designed to address— to serve the widest possible range of counterparties. This prevents the potential adverse impacts from possible reductions in competitiveness of or liquidity available on these regulated exchanges and facilities, which could also harm other U.S. market participants who trade on these exchanges and facilities. In addition, the Agencies recognize that anonymous trading on exchanges and similar anonymous trading facilities promotes transparency and that prohibiting foreign banking entities from trading on U.S. exchanges and similar anonymous trading facilities under this exemption would likely reduce transparency for trading in U.S.

financial instruments. All of these considerations support the Agencies’ exercise of their exemptive authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) to allow such trading by foreign banking entities.

The final rule requires that foreign banking entities trade through an unaffiliated market intermediary to access a U.S. exchange or trading facility in recognition that existing laws and regulations generally require this

structure. 1538 For purposes of this exemption, an exchange would include, unless the context otherwise requires, any designated contract market, swap execution facility, or foreign board of trade registered with the CFTC, and any exchange or security-based swap execution facility, as such terms are defined under the Exchange Act. 1539 This provision of the final rule requires that foreign banking entities trade anonymously and that the trade be centrally cleared and settled. The Agencies understand that in these circumstances, the foreign banking entity would not have any prior information regarding its counterparty to the trade. Requiring that the trade be executed anonymously preserves the benefits of allowing U.S. entities to participate in such trades, while reducing the potential for evasion of section 13 that could occur if foreign banking entities directly arranged purchases and sales with U.S.

entities. 1540 The final rule specifies that a trade is anonymous if each party to the purchase or sale is unaware of the identity of the other party(ies) to the purchase or sale. That is, it is lack of knowledge of the identity of the counterparty(ies) to the trade that is

relevant. The final rule does not prohibit foreign banking entities from accessing a trading facility through an unaffiliated U.S. market intermediary (which the foreign banking entity would necessarily know), so long as the foreign banking entity is not aware of the identity of the counterparty to the

transaction.

Similarly, also pursuant to section 13(d)(1)(J), the final rule allows a foreign banking entity to trade with an unaffiliated market intermediary acting in a principal capacity and effecting a
market intermediation function, in a

transaction that is not conducted on an exchange or similar anonymous trading facility, as long as the trade is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization. This provision recognizes

that not all financial instruments are traded on an exchange or similar anonymous trading facility and, thus, allows foreign banking entities to trade and contribute to market liquidity in all types of U.S. financial instruments without requiring separate market infrastructure to be developed outside the U.S. for such trading activity, which

could result in inefficiencies and reduce U.S. market liquidity. Market

intermediaries can serve the same general purpose as exchanges or similar trading facilities in intermediating between buyers and sellers, particularly in asset classes that do not generally trade on these exchanges or facilities, although this intermediation function


### 5930 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1541 In addition, allowing a foreign banking entity to trade through or with a U.S. affiliate under the exemption for trading activity of a foreign banking entity could give the foreign banking entity a competitive advantage over U.S. banking entities that are subject to limitations on their trading activities. Thus, the Agencies are not permitting a foreign banking entity to trade through a U.S. affiliate as agent, as requested by some commenters.
See, e.g., IIB/EBF. However, the Agencies recognize that, with respect to trading anonymously, there is no way to know the identity of the counterparty to the trade. Thus, a foreign banking entity would not be in violation of this rule if it traded through an unaffiliated market intermediary on an exchange, in accordance with the exemption for trading activity of a foreign banking entity, and the counterparty to its trade happened to be an affiliated entity. 1542 As discussed above, centralized clearing redistributes counterparty risk among members of a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization through mutualization of losses, reducing the likelihood of sequential counterparty failure and
contagion. See supra note 271 and accompanying

text. 1543 Section 75.8 of the proposed rule regarding limitations on permitted trading activities is consistent with § 75.17 of the proposed rule regarding other limitations on permitted covered funds activities. Accordingly, the discussion regarding proposed rule § 75.8 and final rule § 75.7 in this part also pertain to § 75.17 of the proposed
rule and § 75.16 of the final rule. See also Part

VI.B.6., infra.

1544 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(2).

1545 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012);
Public Citizen; Paul Volcker.

1546 See Alfred Brock.

1547 See IIB/EBF; Ass’n. of German Banks. may not be as immediate in the case of

market intermediaries.

In either case (i.e., for either an anonymous trade or a trade with an unaffiliated market intermediary), if the U.S. counterparty to the transaction is a banking entity subject to section 13 and these rules, it must comply with an exemption to the prohibition onproprietary trading, such as the marketmaking exemption or the exemption for riskless principal transactions. Allowing foreign banking entities to trade with
unaffiliated U.S. market intermediaries, including banking entities engaged in permitted market making-related activities, expands the range of potential buyers and sellers for which the U.S. entities can trade and may result in more efficient and timely matching of trades, reducing inventory risks to the U.S. market intermediary. At the same time, this exemption does not permit a U.S. market intermediary that is subject

to section 13 of the BHC Act to conduct trading activities other than in compliance with the provisions of section 13. Thus, the Agencies believe it is appropriate to allow foreign banking entities to conduct such trading under the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(J).

To reduce risks to U.S. entities and the potential for evasion, the provisions allowing trading with U.S. entities include two additional protections.
First, the final rule does not allow a foreign banking entity to trade through an affiliated U.S. entity under the exemption out of concern that it could

increase the risk of evasion. 1541 Second, a foreign banking entity’s trades conducted through an unaffiliated market intermediary on an exchange or conducted directly with an unaffiliated market intermediary must be promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as central counterparty. Consistent with the goals of section 13 to reduce risk to banking entities and the U.S. financial system, this requirement is designed to reduce risk to U.S. entities arising from foreign banking entities’ proprietary trading activity, particularly counterparty risk, and preclude foreign banking entities from relying on the exemption for trading that creates exposure of U.S. counterparties pursuant to bilateral, uncleared transactions, which poses heightened counterparty credit risks. 1542

This condition is also consistent with the systemic risk benefits of central clearing and may incentivize the use of central clearing for trading by foreign banking entities and foreign affiliates of U.S. banking entities. The Agencies believe this approach is consistent with and reinforces the goals of the central clearing framework of Title VIII of the

Dodd-Frank Act.

The final rule does not allow a foreign banking entity to trade with a broader range of U.S. entities under the exemption because the Agencies are concerned such an approach may result in adverse competitive impacts between U.S. banking entities and foreign banking entities with respect to their trading in the United States, which could harm the safety and soundness of banking entities and U.S. financial stability. For example, such an approach could allow foreign banking entities to

act as market makers for U.S. customers under the exemption in § 75.6(e) of the final rule so long as the foreign banking entity held the risk of its market-making
trades outside the United States. In turn, this could give foreign banking entities a competitive advantage over U.S. banking entities with respect to U.S. market-making activities because foreign banking entities could trade directly with U.S. non-banking entities without incurring the additional costs, or being subject to the limitations, associated with the market-making or other exemptions under the rule. This competitive disparity in turn could create a significant potential for regulatory arbitrage. The Agencies do not believe this result was intended by
the statute. Instead, the final rule seeks to alleviate the concern that an overly broad approach to the exemption (e.g., permitting trading with all U.S. counterparties) may result in competitive impacts and increased risks to the U.S. financial system, while mitigating the concern that an overly narrow approach to the exemption (e.g., prohibiting trading with any U.S. counterparty) may cause market bifurcations, reduce the efficiency and liquidity of markets, and harm U.S. market participants.

9. Section 75.7: Limitations on Permitted Trading Activities

Section 75.8 of the proposed rule implemented section 13(d)(2) of the

BHC Act, 1543 which provides that a banking entity may not engage in certain exempt activities (e.g., permitted market making-related activities, risk-mitigating hedging, etc.) if the activity would

involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the banking entity
and its clients, customers, or counterparties; result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading strategy; or pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or U.S. financial stability. 1544 The Agencies sought comment on proposed definitions of the
terms ‘‘material conflict of interest,’’ ‘‘high-risk asset,’’ and ‘‘high-risk trading strategy’’ for these purposes.

With respect to general comments regarding the proposed rule, commenters generally agreed on the need to limit banking entities’ proprietary trading activities so as to

avoid material conflicts of interest and material exposures to high-risk trading strategies and high-risk assets. 1545 One commenter expressed support for the Agencies’ proposed approach, stating that the proposed rule was clear and

structured in such a manner so that it

should remain effective even as

financial markets evolve and change. 1546 As discussed in greater
detail below, most commenters suggested amendments, clarification, or alternative approaches. For example, some commenters expressed concern regarding the application of the prudential backstops to the activities of foreign banking entities. 1547 The Agencies did not receive any comments on the prohibition against transactions or activities that pose a threat to the safety or soundness of the banking entity or the financial stability of the

United States.

As explained in detail below, the Agencies have carefully reviewed


### 5931 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1548 The Agencies note that proposed Appendix C, which required banking entities to describe how they comply with these provisions, will be adopted as Appendix B with similar requirements regarding compliance with the limitations on permitted

activities.

1549 Section 75.17(b) of the proposed rule defined the scope of material conflicts of interest which, if arising in connection with permitted covered fund activities, are prohibited. 1550 See, e.g., U.S. Senate Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations, Wall Street and the Financial Crisis: Anatomy of a Financial Collapse (Apr. 13, 2011), available at http:// hsgac.senate.gov/public/

_ files/Financial

_Crisis/ FinancialCrisisReport.pdf

.

1551 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68893.

1552 See proposed rule § 75.8(b)(1).

1553 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68893. 1554 See id.

1555 See proposed rule § 75.8(b)(1)(B). comments on the proposed rule’s implementation of the prudential backstops under section 13(d)(2) of the BHC Act, including commenters’ suggestions for expanding, contracting, or revising the proposed rule. After carefully considering these comments, the Agencies continue to believe the expansive scope of section 13 of the BHC Act supports a similarly inclusive approach focusing on the facts and circumstances of each potential conflict or high-risk activity. Therefore, and in

consideration of all issues discussed below, the Agencies are adopting the final rule substantially as proposed. 1548 The Agencies intend to develop additional guidance regarding best practices for addressing potential material conflicts of interest, high-risk assets and trading strategies and practices that pose significant risks to safety and soundness and to the U.S. financial system as the Agencies and banking entities gain experience with implementation of the requirements and

limitations in section 13 of the BHC Act and this rule, which are all generally designed to limit risky behavior in trading and investment activities.

a. Scope of ‘‘Material Conflict of

Interest’’

1. Proposed Rule

Section 75.8(b) of the proposed rule defined the scope of material conflicts of interest which, if arising in connection with a permitted trading activity, were prohibited under the proposal. 1549 As noted in the proposal, conflicts of interest may arise in a variety of circumstances related to permitted trading activities. For example, a banking entity may acquire substantial amounts of nonpublic

information about the financial condition of a particular company or issuer through its lending, underwriting, investment advisory or other activities which, if improperly transmitted to and used in trading operations, would permit the banking entity to use such
information to its customers’, clients’ or counterparties’ disadvantage. Similarly, a banking entity may conduct a transaction that places the banking entity’s own interests ahead of its obligations to its customers, clients or counterparties, or it may seek to gain by treating one customer involved in a transaction more favorably than another

customer involved in that transaction. Concerns regarding conflicts of interest are likely to be elevated when a transaction is complex, highly structured or opaque, involves illiquid
or hard-to-value instruments or assets, requires the coordination of multiple internal groups (such as multiple trading desks or affiliated entities), or involves a significant asymmetry of information or transactional data among participants. 1550 In all cases, the

existence of a material conflict of interest depends on the specific facts

and circumstances. 1551

To address these types of material conflicts of interest, § 75.8(b) of the proposed rule specified that a material conflict of interest between a banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties exists if the banking entity engages in any transaction, class of transactions, or activity that would involve or result in the banking entity’s interests being materially adverse to the
interests of its client, customer, or counterparty with respect to such
transaction, class of transactions, or activity, unless the banking entity has appropriately addressed and mitigated the conflict of interest, and subject to specific requirements provided in the proposal, through either (i) timely and effective disclosure, or (ii) information

barriers. 1552 Unless the conflict of interest is addressed and mitigated in one of the two ways specified in the proposal, the related transaction, class of transactions or activity would be prohibited under the proposed rule, notwithstanding the fact that it may be otherwise permitted under §§ 75.4 through 75.6 of the proposed rule. 1553

However, the Agencies determined that while these conflicts may be material for purposes of the proposed rule, the mere fact that the buyer and seller are on opposite sides of a transaction and have differing economic

interests would not be deemed a

‘‘material’’ conflict of interest with respect to transactions related to bona fide underwriting, market making, riskmitigating hedging or other permitted activities, assuming the activities are

conducted in a manner that is consistent with the proposed rule and securities, derivatives, and banking laws and regulations.

Section 75.8(b)(1) of the proposed rule described the two requirements that must be met in cases where a banking entity addresses and mitigates a material conflict of interest through timely and
effective disclosure. First, § 75.8(b)(1)(A)(i) of the proposed rule required that the banking entity, prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, for which a conflict may arise, make clear, timely and

effective disclosure of the conflict or potential conflict of interest, together with any other necessary information. This would also require such disclosure to be provided in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient to permit a
reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully

understand the conflict of interest. 1554 Disclosure that is only general or generic, rather than specific to the individual, class, or type of transaction or activity, or that omits details or other information that would be necessary to
a reasonable client’s, customer’s, or counterparty’s understanding of the
conflict of interest, would not meet this standard. Second, § 75.8(b)(1)(ii) of the proposed rule required that the disclosure be made explicitly and effectively, and in a manner that provides the client, customer, or counterparty the opportunity to negate, or substantially mitigate, any materially
adverse effect on the client, customer, or counterparty that was created or would be created by the conflict or potential

conflict. 1555

The Agencies noted that, in order to provide the requisite opportunity for the client, customer or counterparty to negate or substantially mitigate the disadvantage created by the conflict, the disclosure would need to be provided sufficiently close in time to the client’s, customer’s, or counterparty’s decision to engage in the transaction or activity to give the client, customer, or counterparty an opportunity to meaningfully evaluate and, if necessary, take steps that would negate or substantially mitigate the conflict. Disclosure provided far in advance of a particular transaction, such that the client, customer, or counterparty is unlikely to take that disclosure into account when evaluating the
transaction, would not suffice. Conversely, disclosure provided without a sufficient period of time for the client, customer, or counterparty to

evaluate and act on the information it


### 5932 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1556 See, e.g., 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(4)(B)(i)(I)–(IV) (finding that disclosure and physical separation of personnel and activities addresses the potential that consumers might be misled by the broker-dealer
activities of banks). 15 U.S.C. 80b–6(3) (‘‘It shall be unlawful for any investment adviser, by use of the mails or any means or instrumentality of interstate commerce, directly or indirectly . . . acting as principal for his own account, knowingly to sell any security to or purchase any security from a client, or acting as broker for a person other than such client, knowingly to effect any sale or purchase of any security for the account of such client, without disclosing to such client in writing before the completion of such transaction the capacity in which he is acting and obtaining the
consent of the client to such transaction.’’). See also Form ADV, the form used by investment advisers to register with the Securities and Exchange
Commission and state securities authorities, and, in particular, Form ADV Part 2: Uniform Requirements

for the Investment Adviser Brochure and Brochure Supplements. A registered investment adviser generally must deliver the Form ADV brochure,

which contains disclosure about conflicts of interest, to its prospective and existing clients. See
17 CFR 275.204–3; Amendments to Form ADV, Investment Advisers Act Release No. 3060 (July 28, 2010) 75 FR 49234 (Aug. 12, 2010) (‘‘We are adopting a requirement that investment advisers registered with us provide prospective and existing clients with a narrative brochure written in plain English . . . We believe these amendments will greatly improve the ability of clients and prospective clients to evaluate firms offering advisory services and the firms’ personnel, and to

understand relevant conflicts of interest that the firms and their personnel face and their potential
effect on the firms’ services.’’). 1557 See proposed rule § 75.8(b)(2).

1558 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68894.

1559 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(3).

1560 See Alfred Brock. receives, or disclosure provided after
the fact, would also not suffice under the proposal. The Agencies note that the proposed definition would not prevent or require disclosure with respect to transactions or activities that align the interests of the banking entity with its clients, customers, or counterparties or

that otherwise do not involve ‘‘material’’

conflicts of interest as discussed above.

The proposed disclosure standard reflected the fact that some types of conflicts may be appropriately resolved through the disclosure of clear and meaningful information to the client, customer, or counterparty that provides such party with an informed opportunity to consider and negate or substantially mitigate the conflict.
However, in the case of a conflict in
which a client, customer, or counterparty does not have sufficient information and opportunity to negate or mitigate the materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or counterparty created by the conflict, the existence of that conflict of interest would prevent the banking entity from availing itself of any exemption (e.g., the underwriting or market-making exemptions) with respect to the relevant transaction, class of transactions, or activity. The Agencies note that the proposed disclosure provisions were provided solely for purposes of the proposed

rule’s definition of material conflict of interest, and did not affect a banking entity’s obligation to comply with

additional or different disclosure or other requirements with respect to a conflict under applicable securities, banking, or other laws (e.g., section 27B of the Securities Act, which governs conflicts of interest relating to certain
securitizations; section 206 of the
Investment Advisers Act of 1940, which governs conflicts of interest between
investment advisers and their clients; or 12 CFR 9.12, which applies to conflicts

of interest in the context of a national bank’s fiduciary activities).

Section 75.8(b)(2) of the proposed rule described the requirements that must be met in cases where a banking entity uses information barriers that are reasonably designed to prevent a material conflict of interest from having a materially
adverse effect on a client, customer or counterparty. Information barriers can

be used to restrict the dissemination of information within a complex organization and to prevent material conflicts by limiting knowledge and coordination of specific business activities among units of the entity. Examples of information barriers
include, but are not limited to, restrictions on information sharing, limits on types of trading, and greater separation between various functions of the firm. Information barriers may also require that banking entity units or

affiliates have no common officers or employees. Such information barriers have been recognized in Federal

securities laws and rules as a means to address or mitigate potential conflicts of interest or other inappropriate

activities. 1556

In order to address and mitigate a conflict of interest through the use of the information barriers pursuant to § 75.8(b)(2) of the proposed rule, a banking entity would be required to
establish, maintain, and enforce

information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and procedures, including physical separation of personnel, functions, or limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking into consideration the nature of the banking entity’s business, to prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. Importantly, the proposed rule also provided that, notwithstanding a banking entity’s

establishment of such information barriers if the banking entity knows or should reasonably know that a material conflict of interest arising out of a specific transaction, class or type of transactions, or activity may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty, the banking entity may not rely on those

information barriers to address and mitigate any conflict of interest. In such cases, the transaction or activity would be prohibited, unless the banking entity otherwise complied with the requirements of proposed § 75.8(b)(1). 1557 This aspect of the proposal was intended to make clear that, in specific cases in which a banking entity has established an

information barrier but knows or should reasonably know that it has failed or will fail to prevent a conflict of interest arising from a specific transactions or activity that disadvantages a client, customer, or counterparty, the

information barrier is insufficient to

address that conflict and the transaction would be prohibited, unless the banking entity is otherwise able to address and mitigate the conflict through timely and

effective disclosure under the proposal. 1558

The proposed definition of material

conflict of interest did not address instances in which a banking entity has made a material misrepresentation to its client, customer, or counterparty in
connection with a transaction, class of transactions, or activity, as such transactions or activity appears to

involve fraud rather than a conflict of

interest. This is because such misrepresentations are generally illegal under a variety of Federal and State regulatory schemes (e.g., the Federal securities laws). 1559 In addition, the Agencies noted that any activity involving a material misrepresentation
to, or other fraudulent conduct with respect to, a client, customer, or counterparty would not be permitted under the proposed rule in the first

instance.

2. Comments on the Proposed

Limitation on Material Conflicts of

Interest

Commenters expressed a variety of views regarding the treatment of

material conflicts of interest under the proposal, including the manner in which conflicts may be mitigated or

eliminated. One commenter believed that the proposed material conflict of interest provisions would be

effective. 1560 Another commenter stated

that conflicts of interest were

unavoidable but that the final rule

should ensure that institutional

investors have confidence that the banking entities they are dealing with


### 5933 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1561 See Paul Volcker.

1562 See Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin; Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

1563 See Public Citizen.

1564 See, e.g., Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1565 See Occupy. 1566 See, e.g., Lynda Aiman-Smith; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1567 See Rep. Blumenauer et al.; Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

1568 See IIB/EBF; EBF.

1569 See ASF (Conflicts) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); LSTA (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012).

1570 See BDA (Feb. 2012).

1571 See Occupy.

1572 See Occupy; ISDA (Apr. 2012); Better
Markets (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012); ICFR. 1573 See Occupy.

1574 See Public Citizen; see also AFR et al. (Feb.
2012).

1575 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012)

1576 See Occupy.

1577 See, e.g., Occupy.

1578 See ISDA (Apr. 2012); Arnold & Porter.

1579 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Apr. 2012).

1580 See ISDA (Apr. 2012).

1581 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

1582 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); ICFR (questioning the effectiveness of enforcement mechanisms if oral disclosure permitted under the rule); Occupy.

1583 See ICFR. are not operating at a conflict with investors’ goals. 1561

Other commenters expressed differing views on whether the proposed rule’s provisions for addressing conflicts of interest through disclosure or information barriers were appropriate. A

few commenters stated there is no statutory basis for allowing conflicts of interest in connection with exempted activities even if banking entities provide disclosure or establish
information barriers, and the rule should prohibit banking entities from engaging in permitted activities if

material conflicts of interest exist. 1562

One commenter believed the definition did not appear to address issues of
customer favoritism, in which a bank is financially incentivized to treat one customer more favorably than another (typically less sophisticated)

customer. 1563 Some commenters believed that the proposed definition of

material conflict of interest was too vague or narrow and suggested it should be strengthened by either expanding the types of transactions that may result in a material conflict of interest or by imposing additional limitations or

restrictions on transactions. 1564 For instance, one commenter suggested the final rule consider depositors of a banking entity to be ‘‘customers’’ for the purpose of this provision, impose a fiduciary duty on any banking entity conducting an exempt activity pursuant to section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, and impose size restrictions on any banking entity engaging in proprietary trading under an exemption. This commenter also stated that a banking entity inherently has a material conflict of

interest with its customer when it takes the opposite side of a transaction and,
therefore, that the final rule should require a banking entity to disgorge all principal gains from transactions conducted pursuant to any exemption under section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, including market-making, trading in U.S. government obligations, insurance company activities and other exempt

activities. 1565 In addition, a few
commenters stated that, if disclosure or information barriers were permitted to mitigates conflicts under the final rule, clients of the banking entity must be required to acknowledge in writing that they understand the potential conflicts of interest present in order for any disclosure to be effective in mitigating a

conflict of interest. 1566

Some commenters believed that the Agencies should consider issuing additional guidance regarding the

definition of material conflicts of interest, high-risk assets, and high-risk trading strategies. 1567 One commenter

stated that the final rule should limit the extraterritorial impact of section 13 by only applying the restrictions of section 13(d)(2) of the BHC Act to the U.S. operations or activities of foreign banking entities and that the regulation of safety and soundness of the foreign operations and activities of foreign banking entities should be left to the home country regulator or supervisor of a foreign banking entity. 1568

Some commenters provided general suggestions on enhancing compliance with the prohibition on material

conflicts of interest. A common suggestion among industry participants was to implement the prohibition on

material conflicts of interest under these

rules in a manner consistent with theimplementation of section 621 of DoddFrank. 1569 One commenter suggested that trading in government obligations should not be subject to the material conflict of interest provision because government obligations are broadly traded and do not present the types of conflicts addressed by the proposed

rule. 1570 In contrast, one commenter stated banking entities should be required to receive pre-trade clearance from the Federal Reserve for trading in certain government obligations like municipal bonds and mortgage-backed
securities, due to their role in the 2008

financial crisis. 1571

a. Disclosure

Some commenters expressed concern about potential difficulties associated with the proposed disclosure provision and provided suggestions to address these difficulties. For example, a few commenters noted the difficulty in determining what constitutes effective
disclosure, 1572 especially in relation to the volume of disclosure or the impact of information asymmetry in illiquid markets. 1573 One commenter stated that unless the rule requires full disclosure of a banking entity’s trading strategy and the rationale behind it, allowing disclosure will permit the banking entity to protect itself without adequately mitigating the harm of the

conflict. This commenter also noted the practical difficulties associated with disclosing anticipated future conflicts

and conflicts in the context of block trading. 1574 Another commenter stated market participants understand inherent

conflicts of interest and believed

disclosure in such situations would be burdensome and unnecessary. 1575 One

commenter stated that the rule should require a banking entity to negate, not just permit the client, customer, or counterparty to substantially mitigate, the materially adverse effect of the

conflict. 1576

A few commenters disagreed with the disclosure provision, noting that Congress specifically considered and rejected disclosure as a mitigation method for purposes of section 621 of

the Dodd-Frank Act and that this indicates the Agencies should not permit a material conflict of interest to be mitigated through disclosure for purposes of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 1577

Commenters were in disagreement as to the extent and timing of disclosure that should be required under the rule.

Some commenters stated the disclosure provisions would slow trading, and suggested the rule require only one-time disclosure at the inception of the business relationship 1578 or periodic disclosures to address ongoing

conflicts. 1579 One of these commenters noted that extensive trade-by-trade disclosure requirements create the risk

of unintended breaches of confidentiality. 1580 Other commenters requested the Agencies provide additional guidance, such as when transaction-specific disclosure is

necessary, 1581 whether disclosure
should be written, 1582 and what

constitutes ‘‘reasonable detail.’’ 1583


### 5934 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1584 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter; Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012); Better Markets (Feb. 2012);
Public Citizen; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Lynda

Aiman-Smith.

1585 See Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin
(Feb. 2012); Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

1586 See Arnold & Porter.

1587 See Arnold & Porter.

1588 See Alfred Brock (stating there is no such thing as a ‘‘sophisticated party’’).

1589 See ICFR.

1590 See Alfred Brock.

1591 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy;

Public Citizen.

1592 See Occupy.

1593 See Public Citizen (contending that this

would undermine the Dodd-Frank Act’s requirement to promote sound management, ensure financial stability, and reduce systemic risk).

1594 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). 1595 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1596 See ISDA (Apr. 2012) (arguing that its suggested guidance was derived from prior SEC and self-regulatory organization guidance on
information barriers).

1597 The Agencies note that the definition of

material conflict of interest and the disclosure provisions related to that definition apply solely for purposes of the rule’s definition of material conflict of interest, and does not affect the scope of that term in other contexts or a banking entity’s obligation to comply with additional or different requirements with respect to a conflict under applicable securities, banking, or other laws (e.g., section 27B of the Securities Act, which governs conflicts of interest relating to certain securitizations; section
206 of the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, which applies to conflicts of interest between investment
advisers and their clients; or 12 CFR 9.12, which applies to conflicts of interest in the context of a national bank’s fiduciary activities).

1598 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(3). 1599 See Occupy.

1600 See Occupy.

1601 See Occupy.

1602 See Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). In addition, some commenters provided suggestions on whether parties should be required to acknowledge receipt of disclosures 1584 or affirmatively consent to the conflict. 1585 One commenter proposed allowing a majority of a committee of independent board members to approve consent to

waivers of conflicts of interest. 1586 One

commenter believed disclosure and consent by a sophisticated investor ought to be sufficient to serve as a waiver to most types of conflict of

interest. 1587 In contrast, another commenter asserted general disclosure

or waivers of conflicts should never be allowed, and the Agencies should not provide any additional guidance as to the extent, timing, frequency, or scope of disclosure appropriate in any given

situation. 1588 Similarly, one commenter asserted the Agencies should not provide guidance on what issues can be addressed by disclosure, as such guidance would be ‘‘dangerously prescriptive and would introduce moral

hazards.’’ 1589

b. Information Barriers

A few commenters addressed the information barriers provision of the proposed rule. One commenter expressed support for the proposed approach, 1590 while three commenters stated this provision was ineffective. 1591 A few commenters opposed the information barriers provision because they believed information barriers would make conflict mitigation more

difficult 1592 or would effectively mandate that no single officer be aware of a banking entity’s collective operations. 1593

A few commenters also requested the Agencies provide guidance regarding

the use of information barriers. One commenter requested the Agencies specify the type and nature of information barriers and where they are practical to implement. 1594 Another commenter believed that the Agencies should view information barriers favorably. This commenter stated that

information barriers should be permitted for addressing conflicts of interest unless the banking entity knows, or should reasonably know, that

the information barrier would not be effective in restricting the spread of

information that could lead to the

conflict. 1595 To provide greater clarity,

another commenter recommended the Agencies provide guidance on certain elements that may be used to determine

the reasonableness of information
barriers, such as memorialization of procedures and documentation of actions taken pursuant to such procedures. 1596

3. Final Rule

After considering carefully comments received on the proposal as well as the purpose and language of section 13 of the BHC Act, the Agencies have adopted the final rule largely as proposed. Under the final rule, a banking entity that engages in any transaction, class of transactions, or activity that would involve or result in the banking entity’s interests being materially adverse to the
interests of its client, customer, or counterparty with respect to the
transaction, class of transactions, or activity, must address and mitigate the conflict of interest, where possible, through either timely and effective

disclosure or informational barriers. 1597 This requirement is in addition to, and does not supplant, any limitations or prohibitions contained in other laws. For example, a material misrepresentation by a banking entity to its client, customer, or counterparty in connection with market-making activities may involve fraud and is generally illegal under a variety of Federal and State regulatory schemes
(e.g., the Federal securities laws) 1598 as well as being prohibited under section

13 of the BHC Act.

The Agencies believe that certain of commenters’ suggested modifications to the proposed rule are outside the scope of the Agencies’ statutory authority. For example, the Agencies do not believe section 13 of the BHC Act provides statutory authority to directly impose limits on the size of banking entities 1599 or to implement specific fiduciary standards on banking entities. 1600 In addition, the Agencies do not believe it is appropriate to expand the definition

of ‘‘customer’’ to include individuals and entities that solely make use of the bank’s traditional banking services

because section 13 is focused on the trading activities and investment in which banking entities may be

involved. 1601

The final rule recognizes that a banking entity may address or substantially mitigate a potential conflict of interest by making adequate disclosures or creating and enforcing

informational barriers. Some commenters argued that the legislative history of the Dodd-Frank Act suggests

that disclosure or informational barriers are not adequate to address a material

conflict of interest. 1602 However, section 13 of the BHC Act directs the Agencies

to define ‘‘material conflict of interest’’ and gives the Agencies discretion to

determine how to define this term for purposes of the rule. Under the final
rule, a material conflict of interest exists when the banking entity engages in

transactions or activities that cause its interests to be materially adverse to the
interests of its client, customer, or counterparty. At the same time, the final rule provides banking entities the opportunity to take certain actions to
address the conflict, such that the conflict does not have a materially
adverse effect on that client, customer, or counterparty. Under the final rule, a banking entity may address a conflict by establishing, maintaining, and enforcing information barriers reasonably designed to avoid a conflict’s materially adverse effect, or by disclosing the

conflict in a manner that allows the client, customer, or counterparty to substantially mitigate or negate any materially adverse effect created by the conflict of interest. The Agencies believe that, to the extent the materially

adverse effect of a conflict has been substantially mitigated, negated, or avoided, it is appropriate to allow the


### 5935 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1603 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter.

1604 See Occupy. 1605 See ISDA (Apr. 2012).

1606 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012) (suggesting that a disclosure regime can facilitate abuse by enabling market participants to point to obscure and meaningless disclosure as a shield against liability); Occupy (arguing that a large volume of

disclosed information can be difficult to understand
or can serve to hide relevant information).

1607 See final rule § 75.7(b)(1)(i) and final rule
§ 75.16(b)(1)(i). 1608 See, e.g., 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(4)(B)(i)(I)—(IV) (finding that disclosure and physical separation of personnel and activities addresses the potential that consumers might be misled by the broker-dealer
activities of banks); 15 U.S.C. 80b–6(3) (‘‘It shall be unlawful for any investment adviser, by use of the mails or any means or instrumentality of interstate commerce, directly or indirectly . . . acting as principal for his own account, knowingly to sell any security to or purchase any security from a client, or acting as broker for a person other than such client, knowingly to effect any sale or purchase of any security for the account of such client, without disclosing to such client in writing before the completion of such transaction the capacity in which he is acting and obtaining the
consent of the client to such transaction.’’). See also Form ADV, the form used by investment advisers to register with the Securities and Exchange
Commission and state securities authorities, and, in particular, Form ADV Part 2: Uniform Requirements

for the Investment Adviser Brochure and Brochure Supplements. A registered investment adviser generally must deliver the Form ADV brochure,

which contains disclosure about conflicts of interest, to its prospective and existing clients. See
17 CFR 275.204–3; Amendments to Form ADV, Investment Advisers Act Release No. 3060 (July 28, 2010) 75 FR 49234 (Aug. 12, 2010) (‘‘We are adopting a requirement that investment advisers registered with us provide prospective and existing clients with a narrative brochure written in plain English . . . We believe these amendments will greatly improve the ability of clients and prospective clients to evaluate firms offering advisory services and the firms’ personnel, and to

understand relevant conflicts of interest that the firms and their personnel face and their potential
effect on the firms’ services.’’).

1609 See Public Citizen; see also AFR et al. (Feb.
2012). transaction, class of transaction, or activity under the final rule. Continuing

to view the conflict as a material

conflict of interest under these circumstances would not appear to benefit the banking entity’s client, customer, or counterparty. The

disclosure standard under the final rule requires clear and meaningful information be provided to the client, customer, or counterparty in a manner that provides such party the opportunity to negate or substantially mitigate, any materially adverse effects on such party created by the conflict.

Some commenters suggested that obtaining consent to or waiver of

disclosed conflicts should be sufficient to comply with the rule. 1603 The Agencies do not believe that consent or

waivers alone are sufficient to address
material conflicts of interest, and continue to believe that any banking entity using disclosure to address a conflict of interest should be required to provide any client, customer, or counterparty with whom the banking entity has a conflict with the opportunity to negate or substantially mitigate the materially adverse effect of
the conflict on the client, customer, or counterparty. The Agencies believe this approach, which applies equally to all types of clients, customers, or counterparties, will reduce the potential for unintended or differing impacts on certain types of clients, customers, or counterparties. In response to one commenter’s suggestion that the final rules require full negation of the materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or counterparty, the Agencies continue to believe it is appropriate to allow a transaction or activity to
continue if the client, customer, or counterparty is provided an opportunity to substantially mitigate the materially

adverse effect. 1604 The Agencies are concerned that requiring the conflict’s impact to be fully negated under all circumstances could prevent a banking entity from providing a service to a particular customer despite that customer’s knowledge of the conflict and ability to substantially reduce the

effect of the conflict on that customer.

With regards to commenters’

statements that information barriers and

disclosure will not work to address the harm caused by conflicts, the Agencies emphasize that under the final rule, like the proposed rule, a banking entity may

use disclosure or information barriers to address a conflict only in those instances where the disclosure provides the client, customer, or counterparty with the opportunity to negate or substantially mitigate any materially

adverse effect of the conflict on that entity or the information barriers are reasonably designed to prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. If the banking entity is unable to effectively use disclosure or information barriers in a way that meets the rule’s requirements, then the banking entity is prohibited from engaging in the
conflicted transaction, class of transaction, or activity. Additionally, the Agencies note that the material conflict of interest provisions in the final rule do not preempt any duties owed to parties outside the transaction, including any duty of confidentiality. 1605

In response to commenters’

statements that the volume of

information included in a disclosure or

the manner in which the disclosure is presented may make it difficult for a customer to identify and understand the relevant information regarding the
conflict, 1606 the Agencies note that the final rule requires disclosure of the conflict or potential conflict be clear, timely, and effective and that the disclosure includes any other necessary information. Disclosure is also required to be provided in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient to permit a
reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully

understand the conflict of interest. 1607 Thus, disclosure that is only general or generic, that omits details or other information that would be necessary to
a reasonable client’s, customer’s, or counterparty’s understanding of the
conflict of interest, or that is hidden in a large volume of needless information

would not meet this standard. The Agencies believe these provisions of the final rule are designed to ensure that

customers receive sufficient information about the conflict of interest so that they are well informed and, as required by the rule, able to negate or substantially mitigate any materially adverse effect of

the conflict.

In addition to requiring that customers are provided with detailed
information about the conflict, the final rule, like the proposal, requires that disclosure is made prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, for which a conflict may arise and is otherwise timely. As a result, under § 75.7(b)(2)(i), disclosure must be provided sufficiently close in time to
the client’s, customer’s, or counterparty’s decision to engage in the transaction or activity to give the client,

customer, or counterparty an opportunity to meaningfully evaluate and take steps that would negate or substantially mitigate the conflict. This approach is similar to the approach permitted by a variety of consumer protection statutes and regulations for addressing potential conflicts of interest

in consumer transactions. 1608

Some commenters requested that the final rule permit a conflict to be negated or substantially mitigated through generic or periodic disclosures, such as at the beginning of a trading relationship or on an annual basis.

Other commenters stated that some conflicts, such as anticipated future

conflicts or those that arise in the context of block trading, may require the banking entity to provide disclosure in

advance of the actual conflict in order
to allow the client, customer, or counterparty the opportunity to mitigate the materially adverse effect. 1609 The


### 5936 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1610 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); ICFR; Occupy; Alfred Brock.

1611 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter; Sens. Merkley &
Levin (Feb. 2012); Better Markets (Feb. 2012);
Public Citizen; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Lynda

Aiman-Smith.

1612 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

but see Occupy.

1613 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68893. Thus, the Agencies are not adopting one commenter’s suggestion that the final rule consider all transactions by a banking entity to involve a material conflict of interest because the banking entity is necessarily on the opposite side of a
transaction with its client, customer, or

counterparty. See Occupy.

1614 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1615 The Agencies note examples of information barriers that may address or substantially mitigate

a material conflict of interest include restrictions on information sharing, limits on types of trading, prohibitions on common officers or employees

between functions. Such information barriers have been recognized in Federal securities laws as a means to address or mitigate potential conflicts of interest or other inappropriate activities. See, e.g., 17 U.S.C. 78o(g).

1616 See Public Citizen.

1617 The Agencies note that a banking entity subject to Appendix B of the final rule must implement a compliance program that includes, among other things, policies and procedures that explain how the banking entity monitors and prohibits conflicts of interest with clients, customers, and counterparties. As part of maintaining and enforcing information barriers, a banking entity should have processes to review, test, and modify information barriers on a continuing basis. In addition, banking entities should have ongoing monitoring to maintain and to enforce information barriers, for example by identifying whether such barriers have not prevented unauthorized information sharing and addressing instances in which the barriers were not effective. This may require both remediating any identified breach as well as updating the information barriers to prevent further breaches, as necessary. Periodic assessment of the effectiveness of information barriers and periodic review of the written policies and procedures are also important

to the maintenance and enforcement of effective information barriers and reasonably designed policies and procedures. Such assessments can be done either (i) internally by a qualified employee or (ii) externally by a qualified independent party.

See Part VI.C.2.e., infra.

1618 If a conflict occurs to the detriment of a client, customer, or counterparty despite an information barrier, the Agencies would also expect the banking entity to review the effectiveness of its information barrier and make adjustments, as necessary, to avoid future occurrences, or review whether such information barrier is appropriate for that type of conflict.

1619 See, e.g., U.S. Senate Permanent Subcommittee on Investigations, Wall Street and the Financial Crisis: Anatomy of a Financial Collapse (Apr. 13, 2011), available at http:// hsgac.senate.gov/public/

_ files/Financial

_Crisis/ FinancialCrisisReport.pdf

. Agencies emphasize, however, that disclosure provided far in advance of a particular transaction, such that the client, customer, or counterparty is unlikely to take that disclosure into account when evaluating the
transaction, would not suffice. At the same time, disclosure provided without a sufficient period of time for the client, customer, or counterparty to evaluate
and act on the information it receives, or disclosure provided after the fact, would also not be permissible

disclosure under the final rules. The Agencies believe that, in considering the effectiveness of disclosures, the type, timing and frequency of disclosures depends significantly on the customer relationship, the type of transaction, and the matter that creates the potential
conflict. Therefore, while written disclosures may be appropriate in certain circumstances, the Agencies are not requiring banking entities to provide
written disclosure, 1610 or obtain documentation showing that disclosure
was received, 1611 because the Agencies believe it is more important that disclosure is timely than documented. For example, if disclosure were required to be in writing, this might slow a banking entity’s ability to provide the
disclosure to the relevant customer, which could impede the customer’s ability to consider the disclosed information and take steps to negate or substantially mitigate the conflict’s effect on the customer. The Agencies

further note that the final rule does not prevent or require disclosure with respect to transactions or activities that align the interests of the banking entity
with its clients, customers, or counterparties.

As noted above, one commenter expressed concern about the burdens of disclosing inherent conflicts and stated such disclosure is unnecessary because market participants understand inherent

conflicts of interest. 1612 As noted in the proposal, certain inherent conflicts, such as the mere fact that the buyer and seller are on opposite sides of a transaction and have differing economic
interests, would not be deemed a

‘‘material’’ conflict of interest with respect to permitted activities. 1613 The Agencies continue to believe that

information barriers can be an effective means of addressing conflicts of interest that may arise through, for example, the spread of information among trading desks engaged in different trading activities that may result in potentially inappropriate informational advantage. The Agencies are not adopting one commenter’s suggestion that the final rule specify the particular types of

scenarios where information barriers may be effective 1614 because, as discussed below, the Agencies believe banking entities are better positioned to

determine when information barriers may be effective given their trading

activities and business structure. 1615 In response to one commenter’s concern that information barriers may result in the banking entity’s management not being aware of the firm’s collective operations, 1616 the Agencies note that information barriers do not require this
result. Rather, information barriers

would be established between relevant personnel or functions while other personnel, including senior managers, internal auditors, and compliance personnel, would have access to each group separated by the barrier.

The final rule continues to recognize that a banking entity may address or substantially mitigate a conflict of interest through use of information barriers. In order to address and mitigate a conflict of interest through the use of the information barriers, a banking entity is required to establish, maintain,

and enforce information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and procedures, including physical separation of personnel, functions, or limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking into consideration the nature of the banking entity’s business, to prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a materially adverse effect on a client,

customer or counterparty. 1617 Importantly, the final rule also provides that, notwithstanding a banking entity’s

establishment of such information barriers, if the banking entity knows or should reasonably know that a material conflict of interest arising out of a specific transaction, class or type of transactions, or activity may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty, the banking entity may not rely on those

information barriers to address and mitigate any conflict of interest. In such cases, the transaction or activity would be prohibited, unless the banking entity otherwise complied with the requirements of § 75.7(b)(2)(i). 1618

While some commenters requested

that the final rule include additional limitations as part of implementing the material conflict of interest provisions in section 13(d)(2), the Agencies do not

believe additional restrictions are appropriate at this time. Concerns regarding conflicts of interest are likely

to be elevated when a transaction is complex, highly structured or opaque, involves illiquid or hard-to-value instruments or assets, requires the coordination of multiple internal groups (such as multiple trading desks or affiliated entities), or involves a significant asymmetry of information or transactional data among participants. 1619 In all cases, the question of whether a material conflict of interest exists will depend on an evaluation of the specific facts and circumstances. For example, certain


### 5937 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1620 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

1621 See Occupy; ISDA (Apr. 2012); Better
Markets (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading)
(Feb. 2012); ICFR; Alfred Brock; Public Citizen;

AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Arnold & Porter; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1622 For a full discussion of the final rule’s compliance requirements, including a discussion of the specific compliance requirements applicable to different banking entities, see Part VI.C. of this

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

, infra. 1623 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68894. The Agencies noted that a banking entity subject to proposed Appendix C must implement a compliance program that includes, among other things, policies and procedures that explain how the banking entity monitors and prohibits exposure to high-risk assets and high-risk trading strategies, and identifies a variety of assets and strategies (e.g., assets or strategies with significant embedded leverage). See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68894 n.215.

1624 See Alfred Brock. 1625 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers
Ass’n.; Investure; AllianceBernstein; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

1626 See Obaid Syed.

1627 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Johnson & Prof. Stiglitz; Occupy.

1628 See Alfred Brock.

1629 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen.

1630 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

1631 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1632 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1633 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). simple transactions may implicate

conflicts of interest that cannot be mitigated by disclosure or restricted by
information barriers. On the other hand, certain highly structured and complex transactions may involve conflicts of interest that can be mitigated by disclosure or restricted by information

barriers.

The Agencies believe that conflicts of

interest must be determined and

addressed in accordance with the specific facts and circumstances presented. One commenter suggested that the proposed rule be modified so that a banking entity could conclusively rely on information barriers unless it

knows or has reason to know that policies, procedures, and controls establishing barriers would not be effective in restricting the spread of

information. 1620 By focusing on whether a banking entity knows or has reason to know that its policies and procedures
would not be effective, rather than on what the banking entity knows or should reasonably know about a conflict of interest that may involve or result in
a material adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty, the commenter’s suggestion has the potential to allow a banking entity to engage in transactions that involve a
material conflict of interest. Therefore, the Agencies have determined not to adopt the commenter’s suggested approach. Similarly, the Agencies are rejecting some commenters’ suggestions that the final rule prescribe the method, scope, or specific content of

disclosures. 1621 The Agencies believe that specific guidance on disclosure may provide an incentive for banking

entities to consider the form of disclosure provided, rather than

whether disclosure can address the

substance of the conflict as determined by the specific facts and circumstances at hand. Moreover, the Agencies believe banking entities are in the best position to identify and evaluate the conflicts present in their business as well as the most effective method of disclosing such conflicts. Banking entities must tailor their compliance programs to identify, monitor, and evaluate potential

conflicts based on their business structure and specific activities and customer relationships. 1622 Finally, some commenters requested that the final rule specifically address the conflict of interest provisions related

to asset-backed securitizations

contained in section 621 of the DoddFrank Act. As explained below in Part VI.B.1., some securitizations are subject
to the final rule, and others such as securitizations of loans are not subject to section 13 of the BHC Act. For any

securitization that meets the definition
of covered fund under the final rule, relationships with and transactions by a banking entity involving those securitizations remain subject to the requirements of section 13, including the requirements of section 13(d)(2). In addition, the banking entity would be subject to the limitations contained in

section 621 of the Dodd-Frank Act and any rules regarding conflicts of interest relating to securitizations implemented

under that section. The final rule in no way limits the application of section621 of that Act with respect to an assetbacked security that is subject to that

section.

b. Definition of ‘‘High-Risk Asset’’ and ‘‘High-Risk Trading Strategy’’

1. Proposed Rule

Section 75.8(c) of the proposed rule defined ‘‘high-risk asset’’ and ‘‘high-risk trading strategy’’ for purposes of the proposed limitations on permitted trading activities. Proposed § 75.8(c)(1) defined a ‘‘high-risk asset’’ as an asset or group of assets that would, if held by the banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity

would incur a substantial financial loss or would fail. Proposed § 75.8(c)(2) defined a ‘‘high-risk trading strategy’’ as a trading strategy that would, if engaged in by the banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial

financial loss or would fail. 1623

2. Comments on Proposed Limitations on High-Risk Assets and Trading Strategies

With respect to the prohibition on transactions or activities that expose banking entities to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies, one commenter stated the provisions were
effective, 1624 while other commenters stated the proposed rule was too

vague 1625 and implied that banking entities may be required to exit positions in periods of market stress, further reducing liquidity. 1626 A few commenters suggested the Agencies identify and prohibit certain types of high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies under the rule. 1627 In contrast, one commenter asserted the Agencies should not specify certain classes of assets or trading strategies as ‘‘high

risk.’’ 1628 A few commenters requested greater clarity on the proposed definitions and suggested the Agencies provide additional guidance. 1629 One of these commenters suggested the Agencies simplify compliance byestablishing safe harbors, setting predetermined risk limits within risk-based approaches, or allowing individualbanking entities to set practical riskbased standards that the Agencies can

review. 1630

One commenter suggested integrating the ban on high-risk activities throughout the rule and stated that, given the evolving nature of financial markets, regulators should have the flexibility to update criteria for identifying high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. 1631 This commenter stated the definition of high-risk trading strategies was appropriately broad and flexible, but suggested improving the rule by encompassing trading strategies that are so complex the risk or value thereof cannot be reliably and objectively determined. 1632 The commenter also suggested that the quantitative measurements collected under proposed Appendix A could beutilized to help inform whether a highrisk asset or trading strategy exists. 1633

One commenter stated that in large concentrations, all assets can be high risk. This commenter suggestedevaluating transactions on a case-bycase basis and believed all activity exempted under section 13(d)(1) of theBHC Act should be viewed as ‘‘highrisk’’ absent prior regulatory approval. This commenter further suggested that high-risk assets or trading strategies be defined to include any asset or trading strategy that would have forced a


### 5938 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1634 See Occupy. 1635 See BDA (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

1636 See Occupy.

1637 See Occupy.

1638 See § 75.20 and Appendix B of the final rule,
also discussed in Part VI.C., infra. 1639 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(1)(B).

1640 See final rule §§ 75.10(b)–(c). The term banking entity is defined in final rule § 75.2(c). banking entity to exit the market during
the 2008 financial crisis, and that leverage, rehypothecation, concentration limits, and high frequency trading should be viewed as indicia of high-risk trading strategies. Finally, this commenter suggested the Agencies require banking entity CEOs to certify that their institution’s activities do not result in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. 1634

3. Final rule

After considering carefully the comments received, the Agencies have modified the final rule to provide that a high-risk asset means an asset or group of assets that would, if held by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would

incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States. Similarly, the final rule defines high-risk trading strategy to include any strategy that would, if engaged in by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would

incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United States.

Importantly, under the final rule, banking entities that engage in activities pursuant to an exemption must have a reasonably designed compliance program in place to monitor and understand whether it is exposed to high-risk assets or trading strategies. For instance, any banking entity engaged in activity pursuant to the market-making exemption in § 75.4(b) must, as part of its compliance program, have reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis and independent testing regarding the limits for each trading desk, including limits on the level of exposures to relevant risk factors that the trading desk may incur. These policies and procedure and any activity conducted pursuant to the final rule will be evaluated by the Agencies, as appropriate, as part of ensuring the safety and soundness of banking entitiesand monitoring for exposures to highrisk activities or assets.

While some commenters stated that the definition of high risk asset or trading strategy should be more clearly defined, the Agencies believe that it is appropriate to include a broad

definition of these terms that accounts

for different facts and circumstances that may impact whether a particular asset or trading strategy is high-risk with respect to a banking entity. As stated by
commenters, this framework is effective and flexible enough to be utilized by the Agencies in a variety of contexts. For instance, a trading strategy or asset may be high-risk to one banking entity but not another, or may be high-risk to a banking entity under some market conditions but not others. As part of evaluating whether a banking entity is exposed to a high-risk asset or trading strategy, the Agencies expect that a variety of factors will be considered, such as the presence of excess leverage, rehypothecation or excessively high
concentration of assets, or unsafe and unsound trading strategies.

We believe an approach limiting this provision’s applicability to certain permitted activities or creating a safe harbor for certain assets or trading strategies would be inconsistent with the statutory language, which prohibits any permitted activity that involves orresults in a material exposure to a highrisk asset or high-risk trading

strategy. 1635 In addition, the Agencies decline to identify any particular assets or trading strategies as per se high-risk because a determination of the specific risk posed to a banking entity depends

on the facts and circumstances. 1636 Certain facts and circumstances may
include, but are not limited to, the amount of capital at risk in a
transaction, whether or not the transaction can be hedged, the amount of leverage present in the transaction, and the general financial condition of the banking entity engaging in the transaction. In response to one

commenter’s recommendation that the Agencies adopt a CEO certification requirement specific to the high-risk provisions, 1637 the Agencies believe such a requirement is unnecessary in light of the required management framework in the compliance program provision of § 75.20 of the final rule, as

well as the CEO certification requirement included in the final

rule. 1638

c. Limitations on Permitted Activities That Pose a Threat to Safety and Soundness of the Banking Entity or the Financial Stability of the United States

Finally, as the Agencies did not receive any comments on the proposed rule’s limitations on permitted activities that pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or to the financial stability of the United States and the proposed approach mirrored the statutory language, the Agencies have determined no changes to final rule are necessary.

B. Subpart C—Covered Fund Activities

and Investments

As noted above and except as otherwise permitted, section 13(a)(1)(B) of the BHC Act generally prohibits a banking entity from acquiring or retaining any ownership in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund. 1639 Section 13(d) of the BHC Act contains certain exemptions to this prohibition. Subpart C of the final rule implements these and other provisions of section 13 related to covered funds. Additionally, subpart C

contains a discussion of the internal controls, reporting and recordkeeping requirements applicable to covered fund
activities and investments, and incorporates by reference the minimum compliance standards for banking entities contained in subpart D of the final rule, as well as Appendix B, to the extent applicable.

1. Section 75.10: Prohibition on Acquisition or Retention of Ownership Interests in, and Certain Relationships
With, a Covered Fund

Section 75.10 of the final rule defines the scope of the prohibition on the acquisition and retention of ownership interests in, and certain relationships
with, a covered fund. It also defines a number of key terms, including the

definition of covered fund.

The term ‘‘covered fund’’ specifies the types of entities to which the prohibition contained in § 75.10(a) applies, unless the activity is specifically permitted under an available exemption contained in subpart C of the final rule. 1640 The final rule modifies the proposed definition of covered fund in a number of key aspects. The Agencies have defined the

term ‘‘covered fund’’ with reference to sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (‘‘Investment Company Act’’) with some additions and subject to a number of
exclusions, several of which have been modified from permitted activity exemptions included in the proposal.

The Agencies have tailored the final definition to include entities of the type that the Agencies believe Congress intended to capture in its definition of private equity fund and hedge fund in section 13(h)(2) of the BHC Act by reference to section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of


### 5939 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1641 See infra note 1726 and accompanying text regarding the meaning of the term ‘‘offer’’ as used in the final rule’s inclusion of certain commodity pools as covered funds.

1642 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(ii). 1643 See final rule § 75.10(d)(6), (8), (9), and (10).

1644 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BoA; Goldman (Covered Funds); Rep. Himes;
SVB; Scale.

1645 See final rule § 75.10(a).

1646 See proposed rule § 75.10(a); see also Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68896. 1647 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012).

1648 See Credit Suisse (Williams); Arnold & Porter; UBS; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.

1649 See, e.g., Credit Suisse (Williams); Arnold & Porter; UBS; NAB; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012).

1650 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter.

1651 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); LSTA (Feb. 2012). the Investment Company Act. Thus, the final definition focuses on the types of entities formed for the purpose of investing in securities or derivatives for resale or otherwise trading in securities
or derivatives, and that are offered and sold in offerings that do not involve a public offering, but typically involve offerings to institutional investors and high-net worth individuals (rather than to retail investors). These types of funds are not subject to all of the securities law protections applicable with respect to funds that are registered with the SEC as investment companies, and the Agencies therefore believe that these types of entities may be more likely to engage in risky investment strategies. At the same time, the Agencies have

tailored the definition to exclude entities that have more general corporate purposes and do not present the same risks for banking entities as

those associated with the funds
described above, as well as certain other

entities as further discussed below.

The final rule also contains a revised version of the proposal’s treatment of certain foreign funds as covered funds,

which has been modified from the proposal and tailored to include only the types of foreign funds that the Agencies believe are intended to be the
focus of the statute, such as certain foreign funds that are established by U.S. banking entities and not otherwise subject to the Investment Company Act.

The Agencies have not included all commodity pools within the definition of covered fund as proposed. Instead,
and as discussed in more detail below, the Agencies have included only commodity pools for which the commodity pool operator has claimed exempt pool status under section 4.7 of the CFTC’s regulations or that could qualify as exempt pools and which have not been publicly offered 1641 to persons who are not qualified eligible persons

under section 4.7 of the CFTC’s regulations. 1642 Qualified eligible persons are typically institutional investors, banking entities and high net worth individuals (rather than retail investors). This more tailored approach, together with the various exclusions

from the covered fund definition in the final rule, is designed to include as covered funds those commodity pools that are similar to funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) while not also including as covered funds entities, like commercial end-users or registered investment companies, whose activities do not implicate the concerns that section 13 was designed to address.

Finally, other related terms, including ‘‘ownership interest,’’ ‘‘resident of the United States,’’ ‘‘sponsor,’’ and ‘‘trustee,’’ are also defined in § 75.10(d)

of the final rule. 1643 As explained below, these terms are largely defined in the same manner as in the proposal although with certain changes, including changes to help clarify the scope of these definitions as requested by commenters. Some of these terms and related provisions also have been reorganized to improve clarity. As explained in more detail below, the Agencies received a number of comments relating to some of the terms defined in § 75.10. Some comments directly relate to the scope of the proposed rule and the economic effects associated with the prohibitions on

covered funds activities and
investments, some of which commenters argued did not further the purposes of section 13. 1644 The Agencies have carefully considered

these and other comments when defining the key terms used in the statute and in providing certain

exclusions to the definition of the term covered fund. The Agencies also have sought to provide guidance below, where appropriate, on how these key terms would operate in order to better enable banking entities to understand their obligations under section 13 and

the final rule.

a. Prohibition Regarding Covered Fund

Activities and Investments

Section 75.10(a) of the final rule implements section 13(a)(1)(B) of the BHC Act and prohibits a banking entity from, directly or indirectly, acquiring or retaining as principal an equity, partnership, or other ownership interest in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund, unless otherwise permitted under subpart C of the final rule. 1645 This provision of the rule reflects the statutory prohibition.

The general prohibition in § 75.10(a) of the proposed rule applied solely to the acquisition or retention of an ownership interest in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund, ‘‘as principal.’’ 1646 Commenters generally supported this approach, arguing that applying the prohibition related to

covered fund activities and investments by a banking entity only to instances where the banking entity acts as principal is consistent with the statutory focus on principal activity. 1647 The final rule takes this approach as discussed

below.

The proposed rule and preamble accompanying it described potential exemptions from the definition of ownership interest for a variety of interests, including interests related to employee benefit plans, interests held in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously contracted, positions as trustee, or interests acquired as agent,

broker or custodian. Commenters provided information on each of these types of ownership interests, and generally supported excluding each of these from the section’s prohibition on acquiring or retaining an ownership

interest in a covered fund.

A significant number of commenters focused on employee benefit plans. Commenters generally argued that the prohibition in section 13(a) of the BHC Act did not encompass interests held on behalf of employees through an employee benefit plan. While the proposed rule did not explicitly cover certain ‘‘qualified plans’’ under the
Internal Revenue Code, a number of commenters argued that the prohibition should not cover activity or investments related to other types of employee benefit plans that are not a ‘‘qualified plan’’ under the Internal Revenue

Code. 1648 A significant number of commenters urged exclusion of interests in and relationships with foreign employee benefit plans. 1649 Commenters argued that the risks of investments made through employee benefit plans are borne by the employee beneficiaries of these plans, and any decision to cover employee benefit plans or investments made by these plans under the prohibitions in section

13 of the BHC Act would eliminate or severely restrict the availability of employee programs that are widely offered, regulated and endorsed under a system of Federal, state and foreign

laws. 1650

Commenters also supported the exemption under the proposed rule for holdings in satisfaction of a debt previously contracted in good faith. 1651


### 5940 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1652 See proposed rule § 75.14(b).

1653 See, e.g., ABA (Keating).

1654 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Arnold & Porter;

NAB.

1655 See final rule § 75.3(d)(7)–(9).

1656 A banking entity acting as agent, broker, or custodian is not acting ‘‘as principal’’ under the final rule so long as the activity is conducted for
the account of, or on behalf of, a customer and the banking entity does not have or retain beneficial ownership of such ownership interest, as noted above. This provision is consistent with the final rule’s treatment of banking entities acting on behalf of customers as trustee or in a fiduciary capacity.

1657 The Agencies note that this provision does not permit joint investments between the banking entity and its employees. Rather, this provision is intended to enable banking entities to maintain deferred compensation and other similar plans formed for the benefit of employees. The Agencies recognize that, since it is possible an employee may forfeit its interest in such a plan, the banking entity may have a residual or reversionary interest in the assets referenced under the plan. However, other than such residual or reversionary interests, a banking entity may not rely on this provision to

invest in a covered fund.

1658 See final rule § 75.10(a)(2). For instance, as part of engaging in its traditional trust company functions, a bank or savings association typically may act through an entity that is excluded from the definition of investment company under section
3(c)(3) or 3(c)(11). This would be included within the scope of acting on behalf of customers as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity, provided that it meets the applicable requirements of the exclusion

under the final rule. 1659 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(2).

1660 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(2). Sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, in relevant part, provide two exclusions from the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ for: (1) Any issuer whose outstanding securities are beneficially owned by not more than one hundred persons and which is not making and does not presently propose to make apublic offering of its securities (other than shortterm paper); or (2) any issuer, the outstanding securities of which are owned exclusively by persons who, at the time of acquisition of such securities, are qualified purchasers, and which is not making and does not at that time propose to make a public offering of such securities. See 15 U.S.C. 80a-3(c)(1) and (c)(7).

1661 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(1). This provision of the proposal recognized that banking entities may acquire an ownership interest in or relationship with a covered fund as a result of a counterparty’s failure to

repay a bona fide debt and without an intent to engage in those activities as principal. 1652

Several commenters urged revision to the proposal to add a specific exclusion for investments held by a banking entity in the capacity of trustee (including as trustee for a charitable trust). 1653 These commenters argued that failing to recognize and exempt these types of activities in the final rule would prevent banking entities that act as trustees from effectively meeting their trust and fiduciary obligations and from providing these services to customers. Commenters also argued that the exemption for trust activities should not be dependent on the duration of the trust because the law governing the duration of trusts is changing and varies across jurisdictions. 1654

As with the proposed rule, the prohibition in § 75.10(a) of the final rule applies only to the acquisition or retention of an ownership interest in, or sponsorship of, a covered fund as principal. The Agencies continue to

believe section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address the risks attendant to principal activity and not those that are borne by customers of the banking entity or for which the banking entity lacks design or intent to take a proprietary interest as principal.

In order to address commenter concerns regarding the types of activity that are subject to the prohibition, the Agencies have modified and reorganized the final rule to make the scope of acting ‘‘as principal’’ clear and more consistent with the proprietary trading restrictions under the final

rule. 1655 The final rule provides that the prohibition does not include acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in a covered fund by a banking entity: (1) Acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian, so long as the activity is
conducted for the account of, or on behalf of, a customer, and the banking entity and its affiliates do not have or retain beneficial ownership of the ownership interest; 1656 (2) through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof)

that is established and administered in

accordance with the law of the United States or a foreign sovereign, if the ownership interest is held or controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity as trustee for the benefit of people who are or were employees of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof); 1657 (3) in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests the ownership interest as soon as practicable, and in no event may the banking entity retain such instrument for longer than such period permitted by the appropriate agency; or (4) on behalf

of customers as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity for a customer that is not a covered fund, so long as the activity is conducted for the account of,
or on behalf of, the customer, and the banking entity and its affiliates do not have or retain beneficial ownership of such ownership interest. 1658

Because these activities do not involve the banking entity engaging in an activity intended or designed to take ownership interests in a covered fund as principal, they do not appear to be the types of activities that section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address. However, the Agencies note that in order to prevent a banking entity from evading the requirements of section 13
and the final rule, the exclusions for these activities do not permit a banking entity to engage in establishing, organizing and offering, or acting as sponsor to a covered fund in a manner other than as permitted elsewhere in the final rule. The Agencies intend to

monitor these activities and investments

for efforts to evade the restrictions in

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule on banking entities’ investments in and relationships with covered funds.

b. ‘‘Covered Fund’’ Definition

Section 13(h)(2) of the BHC Act defines hedge fund and private equity

fund to mean an issuer that would be an investment company, but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, or ‘‘such similar funds’’ as the Agencies determine by rule. 1659 Given that the statute defines ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity fund’’ without differentiation, the proposed

rule and the final rule combine the

terms into the definition of a ‘‘covered fund.’’ Sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act are exclusions commonly relied on by a wide variety

of entities that would otherwise be covered by the broad definition of ‘‘investment company’’ contained in

that Act. 1660 The proposal included as a covered fund any entity that would be an investment company but for the

exclusion from that definition contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, any foreign entity that would also be an investment company but for those same exclusions were the foreign entity to be organized
or offered in the United States, and a commodity pool as defined in section 1a(10) of the Commodity Exchange

Act. 1661 The preamble to the proposal recognized that this definition was broad and specifically requested

comment on whether and how the

definition of covered fund should be modified for purposes of the final rule.

Commenters contended that the

definition of covered fund should not focus exclusively on whether an entity relies on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. Commenters argued that sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act are exclusions commonly relied on by a wide variety of entities that would otherwise be covered by the broad definition of ‘‘investment company’’

contained in that Act. Under the Investment Company Act, any entity that holds investment securities (i.e.,


### 5941 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1662 15 U.S.C. 80a-3(a)(1)(A) and (C). The definition of securities is very broad under the Investment Company Act and has been interpreted
to include instruments such as loans, that would not be regarded as securities under the Securities Act of 1933 and the Securities Exchange Act of
1934. In addition, the determination of what constitutes an ‘‘investment security’’ under the Investment Company Act requires complex analysis

and consideration of a broad set of facts and

circumstances.

1663 See, e.g., NVCA.

1664 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BlackRock; AHIC; Sen. Carper et al.; Rep.

Garrett et al. 1665 See ABA (Keating); ABA (Abernathy); SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Allen & Overy
(on behalf of Canadian Banks); Deutsche Bank (Repackaging Transactions); ICI (Feb. 2012); Putnam; JPMC; GE (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); Rep. Himes; BOK; Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered Funds);

BoA; NAIB et al.; PNC; SunTrust; Nationwide;
STANY; BNY Mellon et al.; RMA; Goldman (Covered Funds); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; IRSG; ISDA (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; Citigroup (Jan. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Eaton Vance; Fidelity; SBIA; River Cities; Ashurst; Sen.
Hagan; Sen. Bennet.

1666 As discussed below, the Agencies have modified the final rule to include only certain commodity pools within the definition of covered

fund.

1667 See NVCA; see also SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating).

1668 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); ABA (Abernathy); Canaan (Young); Canaan (Ahrens); Canaan (Kamra); Growth Managers; River Cities; SVB; EVCA.

1669 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Deutsche Bank (Repackaging
Transactions); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1670 See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); JPMC; LSTA (Feb. 2012).

1671 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); Eaton Vance; Fidelity; GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; JPMC; PNC; RBC;
SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); AFME et al.

1672 See AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization)
(Feb. 2012). 1673 See AFME et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary
Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating).

1674 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BlackRock; Credit Suisse (Williams); SSgA
(Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Deutsche Bank (Repackaging Transactions); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1675 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Ashurst; Barclays; BDA (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); Commercial Real Estate Fin. Council; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Nuveen Asset
Mgmt.; PNC; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Vanguard; Wells Fargo (Covered Funds).

1676 See Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Barclays; JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012); see also FSOC study at 62–63 (suggesting a characteristics-based approach considering compensation structure; trading/ investment strategy; use of leverage; investor composition); ABA (Keating); BNY Mellon et al.; Northern Trust, SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Deutsche Bank (Repackaging Transactions); T. Rowe Price; RMA (suggesting use of

characteristics derived from the SEC’s Form PF for registration of investment advisers of private funds).

1677 See RBC (citing FSOC study). generally all securities other than U.S. government securities) representing at least 40 percent of the entity’s total

assets would be an investment

company. 1662 According to commenters, this definition and the accompanying exclusions are part of a securities law and regulatory framework designed for purposes different than the prudential purpose that underlies section 13 of the

BHC Act. 1663

A number of comments received on the proposal argued that the proposed definition of covered fund was overly

broad and would lead to anomalous
results inconsistent with the words, structure, and purpose of section 13. 1664 For instance, many commenters asserted that the proposed rule’s definition of

covered fund would cause a number of commonly used corporate entities that are not traditionally thought of as hedge funds or private equity funds, such as wholly-owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, and acquisition vehicles, to be subject to the covered fund restrictions of section 13. These commenters argued that this interpretation of section 13 would cause a disruption to the operations of banking entities and their closely related affiliates that does not

relate to the intent of section 13 and therefore cause an unnecessary burden on banking entities. Commenters argued that the words, structure and purpose of section 13 allow the Agencies to adopt

a more tailored definition of covered

fund that focuses on vehicles used for investment purposes that were the target

of section 13’s restrictions.

In particular, commenters requested

that the final rule exclude at least the following from the definition of covered fund: U.S. registered investment companies (including mutual funds); the foreign equivalent of U.S. registered investment companies; business development companies; wholly-owned subsidiaries; joint ventures; acquisition
vehicles; financial market utilities; foreign pension or retirement funds; insurance company separate accounts;loan securitizations, including assetbacked commercial paper conduits; cash management vehicles or cash collateral pools; credit funds; real estate

investment trusts; various securitization vehicles; tender option bond programs; and venture capital funds. 1665 Commenters requested some of these exclusions in order to mitigate the impact of the proposal’s inclusion of commodity pools as part of the

definition of covered fund. 1666

Some commenters argued that the proposal failed to distinguish between different types of investment funds. 1667 These commenters expressed the view that the statute provides the Agencies with the discretion to distinguish between investment funds generally and a subset of funds—hedge funds and private equity funds—that may engage in particularly risky trading and investment activities. For example, several commenters argued that the proposed rule’s restrictions on covered

fund investments should not cover venture capital funds that provide investment capital to new

businesses. 1668 Others argued an

exclusion for securitization vehicles
such as securitizations that are backed, in whole or in part, by assets that are not loans, including corporate debt repackagings, 1669 CLOs, 1670 ABCP
conduits, 1671 insurance-linked

securities, 1672 and synthetic securitizations backed by

derivatives. 1673

As a potential solution to some of
these concerns, a number of commenters argued that the Agencies should define covered fund by reference to characteristics that are designed to distinguish hedge funds and private equity funds from other types of entities that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 1674 Commenters believed this approach would help exclude some of the corporate vehicles and funds mentioned above that they did not believe were intended by Congress to be included as hedge funds and private equity funds
and therefore reduce costs that, in the
commenters’ view, did not further the purposes of section 13. 1675

These commenters proposed a number of different potential types of characteristics for defining hedge fund and private equity fund. Some

commenters focused on certain

structural or investment characteristics found in traditional private equity funds and hedge funds, such as investor redemption rights, performance compensation fees, leverage and the use of short-selling. 1676 Another commenter argued that the characteristics used to

define a covered fund should focus on the types of speculative behavior that
the statute was intended to address, citing characteristics such as volatility of asset performance and high leverage. 1677

In contrast to the majority of the commenters, one commenter urged that characteristics be used to expand the proposed definition to include any


### 5942 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1678 See Occupy.

1679 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

1680 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); AFR

et al. (Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock.

1681 See Occupy (also arguing in favor of including entities that rely on rule 3a-1 (which provides an exemption for issuers that hold less than 45% of their assets in securities excluding government securities) or 3a-6 (which provides an exemption for foreign banks and insurance companies) to avoid being regulated as investment companies under the Investment Company Act).

1682 See, e.g., ABA (Keating). 1683 For instance, bank common trust and collective funds that qualify for the exclusion from the definition of investment company pursuant to
section 3(c)(3) or 3(c)(11) of the Investment Company Act are not covered funds. See 15 U.S.C. 78a-3(c)(3) and (c)(11). These funds are subject to supervision and regulation by a Federal banking agency, thus helping to distinguish them from traditional hedge funds and private equity funds which are generally not themselves subject to such supervision or regulation.

1684 See final rule § 75.10(c)(12).

1685 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(2) (emphasis added). 1686 In addition to the readings described above, one commenter argued that the section could be read to provide that both the reference to issuers covered by section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act in the first part of section
13(h)(2) and the reference to similar funds in the second part of the section should be read as qualified by the clause ‘‘as the Agencies may by rule. . . determine.’’ Under this reading, Congress granted the Agencies authority to determine by rule whether an entity described by the first part would

be covered and whether an issuer would be deemed to be a similar fund under the second part. See

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012). issuer that exhibits characteristics of proprietary trading that the statute prohibits to be done by a banking entity. 1678 According to this commenter, any fund engaging in more than minimal proprietary trading should be a covered fund and subject to the requirements of section 13.

However, not all commenters supported a characteristics-based definition. One commenter opposed a
characteristics-based definition, suggesting that the final rule rely only on the statutory reference to the Investment Company Act, and arguing that using characteristics to define a covered fund (e.g., leverage) could create opportunities for circumvention

of the rule. 1679 Commenters that generally supported the proposed definition argued that its broad scope prevented circumvention. 1680

One commenter argued in favor of broadening the definition of covered fund to include entities that rely on an

exclusion from the definition of investment company other than those contained in section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7), such as section 3(c)(2) (which provides

an exclusion for underwriters and brokers) or 3(c)(6) (which provides an exclusion for entities engaged in a business other than investing in securities). 1681 By contrast, other commenters argued that an entity

should not be considered a covered fund if the entity relies on an exclusion or exemption contained in the Investment Company Act other than an exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) under that Act, such as the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(3)

for bank collective investment

funds. 1682

The Agencies have carefully

considered all of the comments related

to the definition of covered fund. While the Agencies believe that the proposal reflected a reasonable interpretation of the statutory provision, on further review and in light of the comments the Agencies have determined to adopt a different approach. The Agencies have revised the final rule to address many of the concerns raised by commenters regarding the scope of the original proposal in a manner the Agencies believe is a better reading of the statutory provision because it is both consistent with the language, purpose

and structure of section 13 and avoids unintended consequences of the less precise definitional approach of the proposal.

In the final rule, the Agencies have joined the definitions of ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity fund’’ into a single definition ‘‘covered fund’’ (as in the statute) and have defined this term as any issuer that would be an investment company as defined in the Investment Company Act but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act with a number of express exclusions and additions (explained below) as determined by the Agencies. Thus, for example, an entity

that invests in securities and relies on any exclusion or exemption from the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ under the Investment Company Act

other than the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act

would not be considered a covered fund so long as it satisfies the conditions of another Investment Company Act exclusion or exemption. 1683 Such an entity would not be an investment company but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7), and the Agencies have modified the final rule to explicitly exclude such an entity. 1684

The Agencies believe this definition is
consistent with the words, structure, purpose and legislative history of

section 13 of the BHC Act. As noted above, section 13(h)(2) provides that the terms ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity

fund’’ mean an issuer that would be an investment company as defined in the Investment Company Act (15 U.S.C.

80a–1 et seq.), but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act, or such similar funds as the Agencies may, by rule, as provided in subsection (b)(2),

determine. 1685 The statutory provision contains two parts: A first part that refers to any issuer that is ‘‘an investment company, as defined in the Investment Company Act, but for section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Act’’; and a second part that covers ‘‘such similar funds as the [Agencies] may, by rule . . . determine.’’ The proposed rule offered a reading of this provision as a simple concurrent definition with two self-contained, supplementary parts. Under this approach, all entities covered by part one of the definition

would be included in the definitions of ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity fund,’’ and the role of the Agencies under the second part was limited to considering whether and how to augment the scope of the primary statutory definition.

As noted above, commenters argued that this interpretation led to unintended consequences that were not consistent with other provisions of section 13 or the purposes of section 13, and that other interpretations of the

definition of covered fund were

consistent with both the words and the purpose of the statute. Also as explained above, commenters offered multiple alternative interpretations of the definition of, the scope of the prohibition on ownership interests in, and relationships with, a covered

fund. 1686

The Agencies believe that the language of section 13(h)(2) can best be interpreted to provide two alternative

definitions of the entities to be covered by the statutory terms ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity fund.’’ Under this reading, the first part of section 13(h)(2)

contains a base definition that

references the noted exclusions under the Investment Company Act (the ‘‘default definition’’), while the second part grants the Agencies the authority to adopt an alternate definition that is triggered by agency action (the ‘‘tailored definition’’). Thus, if the Agencies do not act by rule, the definition is set by reference to the Investment Company
Act and the relevant exclusions alone; if the Agencies act by rule, the definitions are set by the Agencies under that rule. As noted above, the Agencies have determined to exercise the authority under the second part of the statute to define ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity

fund’’ in the final rule.

Relying on the Agencies’ authority to adopt an alternative, tailored definition of ‘‘hedge fund’’ and ‘‘private equity
fund,’’ the final rule references funds

that are similar to the funds in the base


### 5943 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1687 See 156 Cong. Reg. S.5894–5895 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley).

1688 The Agencies believe that the choice of the tailored definition is supported by the legislative history that suggests that Congress may have

foreseen that its base definition could lead to unintended results and might be overly broad, too
narrow, or otherwise off the mark. Part two of the statutory definition was not originally included in the bill reported by the Senate Committee on April 30, 2010. While the addition of part two did not receive specific comment, Rep. Frank, a co-sponsor and principal architect of the Dodd-Frank Act, noted that the default definition ‘‘could technically apply to lots of corporate structures, and not just the hedge funds and private equity funds’’ and
confirmed that ‘‘[w]e do not want these overdone.’’

See 156 Cong. Rec. H5226 (daily ed. June 30, 2010) (statement of Reps. Himes and Frank) (noting intent that subsidiaries or joint ventures not be included within the definition of covered fund); 156 Cong. Rec. S5904–05 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sens. Boxer and Dodd) (noting broad definition of hedge fund and private equity fund and recommending that the Agencies take steps to ensure definition is reasonably tailored). 1689 For example, the Dodd-Frank Act requires banking entities to serve as a source of financial strength to their insured depository institutions and requires certain banking entities to form intermediate holding companies to separate their

financial and non-financial activities. See Sections 167, 616(d) & 626 of the Dodd-Frank Act. These provisions would be severely undermined if the prohibitions on investments and activities contained in section 13 were applied to ownership of intermediate holding companies. For instance, a bank holding company would not be able to serve as a source of strength to an intermediate holding company (or any subsidiary thereof) that is a

covered fund due to the transaction restrictions
contained in section 13(f). See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f). As another example, the Agencies have made certain

modifications to the final rule to make clear that it will not affect the resolution authority of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, including by excluding from the covered fund definition issuers formed by or on behalf of the Corporation for the purpose of facilitating the disposal of assets acquired in the Corporation’s capacity as

conservator or receiver. See § 75.10(c)(13).

1690 As discussed in Part VI.C.1 of this

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION** regarding the compliance program requirements of the final rule, the Agencies will consider information maintained and provided by banking entities under the compliance program mandate to help monitor potential evasions of the prohibitions and restrictions of section 13. Additionally and consistent with the statute, the final rule permits the Agencies to jointly determine to include within the definition of covered fund any fund excluded from that definition. The Agencies expect that this authority may be used to help address situations of

evasion. 1691 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012). alternative provided in the first
alternative definition—that is, an issuer that would be an investment company under the Investment Company Act but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act.

The additions and exclusions from that definition represent further determinations by the Agencies regarding the scope of that definition

that were made in the course of a rulemaking conducted in accordance with section 13(b)(2) of the BHC Act.

The Agencies believe that this reading of the statutory provision is consistent with the purpose of section 13. That purpose appears to be to limit theinvolvement of banking entities in highrisk proprietary trading, as well as their investment in, sponsorship of, and other connections with, entities that engage in

investment activities for the benefit of banking entities, institutional investors and high-net worth individuals. 1687 Further, the Agencies believe that the provision permits them to tailor the scope of the definition to funds that engage in the investment activities contemplated by section 13 (as opposed, for example, to vehicles that merely serve to facilitate corporate structures); doing so allows the Agencies to avoid
the unintended results, some of which commenters identified, that might

follow from a definition that is inappropriately imprecise. 1688

The Agencies also note that nothingin the structure or history of the DoddFrank Act suggests that the definition of hedge fund and private equity fund was

intended to necessitate a fundamental restructuring of banking entities by disallowing investments in common corporate vehicles such as intermediate holding companies, joint operating companies, acquisition vehicles and similar entities that do not engage in the types of investment activities contemplated by section 13. Moreover, other provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act and existing banking laws and regulations would be undermined or vitiated by a reading that restricts investments in these types of corporate

vehicles and structures. 1689

Based on the interpretive and policy considerations raised by commenters, the language of section 13(h)(2), and the language, structure, and purpose of the Dodd-Frank Act, the Agencies have adopted a tailored definition of covered

fund in the final rule that covers issuers of the type that would be investment companies but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act with exclusions for certain specific types of issuers in order to focus the

covered fund definition on vehicles used for the investment purposes that were the target of section 13. The

definition of covered fund under the

final rule also includes certain funds organized and offered outside of the United States in order to address foreign fund structures and certain commodity pools that might otherwise allow

circumvention of the restrictions of section 13. The Agencies also expect to exercise the statutory anti-evasion authority provided in section 13(e) of the BHC Act and other prudential

authorities in order to address instances

of evasion. 1690

As discussed above, an alternative approach to defining a covered fund would be to reference fund characteristics. Commenters arguing for a characteristics-based approach stated that it would more precisely tailor the

final rule to the intent of section 13 and limit the potential for undue burden on banking entities. A characteristics-based
definition, however, could be less effective than the approach taken in the final rule as a means to prohibit banking entities, either directly or indirectly, from engaging in the covered fund activities limited or proscribed by

section 13. A characteristics-based approach also could require more analysis by banking entities to apply those characteristics to every potential covered fund on a case-by-case basis, and create greater opportunity for
evasion. As discussed below, the Agencies have sought to address some of the concerns raised by commenters suggesting a characteristics-based approach by tailoring the definition of covered fund to provide exclusions for certain entities that rely on section
3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act and otherwise would be

treated as covered funds.

Some commenters discussed the potential cost to banking entities to analyze the covered fund status of certain entities if the Agencies were to define the term covered fund by
reference to sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7), arguing that this analysis would be costly. 1691 A characteristics-based approach could mitigate the costs associated with an investment company analysis but, depending on the
characteristics, could result in additional compliance costs in some cases to the extent banking entities would be required to implement policies and procedures to prevent potential covered funds from having characteristics that would bring them

within the covered fund definition. Furthermore, banking entities may currently rely on section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act to avoid registering various entities under the Investment Company Act, and the costs to analyze the status of these entities under a statutory-based definition of covered fund are generally already included as part of the fund formation process and the costs of determining covered fund status may thus be mitigated, especially given the exclusions provided in the final rule.

The entities excluded from the

definition of covered fund are described
in detail in section (c) below.


### 5944 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1692 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(1)(iii).

1693 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); BNY Mellon et al.; BlackRock; ABA (Keating); AFTI; AFG; ICI Global; Ass’n. of
Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); JPMC;
BoA; Goldman (Covered Funds); Bank of Montreal et al. (Jan. 2012); AGC; Cadwalader (on behalf of
Thai Banks); ALFI; BVI; EBF; British Bankers
Ass’n.; French ACP; AFME et al.; F&C; IIF; ICSA;
IMA; EFAMA; UKRCBC; AIMA; AFMA; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); IFIC; Allen & Overy
(on behalf of Canadian Banks); RBC; French
Treasury et al.; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; TCW; Govt. of Japan/Bank of Japan.

1694 See JPMC; see also Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; Govt. of Japan/ Bank of Japan.

1695 UCITS are public limited companies that, under a series of directives issued by the EU
Commission, coordinate distribution and management of unit trusts or collective investment

schemes in financial instruments on a cross-border basis throughout the European Union on the basis of the authorization of a single member state.

1696 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ABA (Keating); AFG; AFTI; BoA; French Banking Fed’n.; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also BNY Mellon et al.; BlackRock; ICI
Global; Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); JPMC; BoA; Goldman (Covered Funds); Bank

of Montreal et al. (Jan. 2012); AGC; Cadwalader (on
behalf of Thai Banks); ALFI; BVI; EBF; British
Bankers Ass’n.; French ACP; AFME et al.; F&C; IIF;

ICSA; IMA; EFAMA; UKRCBC; AIMA; AFMA; Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); IFIC; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); RBC; French Treasury et al.; Hong Kong Inv. Funds
Ass’n.; HSBC Life; ICSA Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia (arguing that foreign banking organization

would have to determine how a fund would be regulated under U.S. law before making
investments in funds in their home markets).

1697 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ABA (Keating); SSgA (Feb. 2012); BoA;
Goldman (Covered Funds).

1698 See Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012);

BlackRock.

1699 See BlackRock; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; ABA (Keating); IIB/EBF. These commenters argued that the proposed definition of a covered fund could result in virtually every foreign fund being considered a covered fund, regardless of whether the fund is similar to a hedge fund or private equity fund.

1700 See, e.g., AGC; Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); Goldman (Covered Funds); BoA; GE (Feb. 2012); Japanese
Bankers Ass’n.; EBF.

1701 See Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012);
AFG; BNY Mellon et al.; BlackRock; Goldman
(Covered Funds); IIB/EBF.

1702 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Goldman (Covered Funds); Credit Suisse (Williams); ABA (Keating); IIB/EBF; Barclays; BoA; GE (Feb. 2012) (discussing the uncertainty with respect to foreign-based loan and securitization programs and whether they would be
deemed covered funds). 1. Foreign Covered Funds

In order to prevent evasion of the prohibition and purposes of section 13, the proposal included within the definition of covered fund any issuer organized or offered outside of the United States (‘‘foreign covered fund’’)

that would be a covered fund were it organized or offered in the United

States. 1692

Commenters expressed concern that the proposed treatment of foreign covered funds was overly broad, exceeded the Agencies’ statutory authority, was not consistent with principles of national treatment, and

violated international treaties. 1693 Commenters expressed concern about the difficulties of applying Investment Company Act concepts to foreign funds that are structured to comply with regulatory schemes under local laws outside the United States. They also argued that it would be burdensome and costly to require foreign banking entities to interpret and apply U.S. securities laws to foreign structures that are designed primarily to be offered and

sold outside the United States. 1694 Commenters also contended that foreign mutual fund equivalents, such as retail Undertakings for Collective Investments

in Transferable Securities (‘‘UCITS’’), 1695 would be treated as covered funds under the proposal even though they generally are similar to U.S. registered investment companies, which are not covered funds, meaning that under the proposal the scope of foreign funds captured was broader than the scope of domestic funds. 1696 These commenters argued that a foreign fund organized and offered outside of the

United States should not be treated as a covered fund simply because the foreign fund may (or could) rely on the exclusion under section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act were it

to be offered in the United States. 1697

Some commenters argued that the proposal did not clearly identify which foreign funds would be covered, thereby creating uncertainty about the scope of

funds to which section 13 would apply. 1698 Several commenters argued that the proposal’s foreign covered fund

definition could be read to include a foreign fund, even if its securities were never offered and sold to U.S. persons, because the fund could theoretically be

offered in the United States in reliance on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). 1699 Commenters argued that the definition of foreign covered fund should be

tailored. 1700 Some commenters argued that foreign funds that are not made available for sale in the U.S. or actively

marketed to U.S. investors should be specifically excluded from the

definition of covered fund. 1701 Several other commenters supported narrowing the definition of foreign covered fund to those foreign funds with characteristics similar to domestic hedge funds or private equity funds. 1702 After considering the comments in light of the statutory provisions and purpose of section 13, the Agencies

have modified the final rule to more effectively tailor the scope of foreign

funds that would be covered funds under the rule and better implement the language and purpose of section 13. As
noted above, section 13 of the BHC Act applies to the global operations of U.S. banking entities, and one of the purposes of section 13 is to reduce the risk to the U.S. financial system of

activities with and investments in covered funds. The Agencies proposed to include foreign funds within the

definition of covered fund in order to more effectively accomplish the purpose of section 13. In particular, the Agencies

were concerned that a definition of

covered fund that did not include foreign funds would allow U.S. banking entities to be exposed to risks and engage in covered fund activities

outside the United States that are specifically prohibited in the United

States. This result would undermine section 13 and pose risks to U.S. banking entities and the stability of the U.S. financial system that section 13 was designed to prevent.

At the same time, section 13 includes other provisions that explicitly limit its extra-territorial application to the activities of foreign banks outside the United States. As explained below, section 13 specifically exempts certain activities in covered funds conducted by foreign banking entities solely outside of

the United States.

Based on these considerations and the information provided by commenters, the Agencies have revised the definition

of covered fund in the final rule to include certain foreign funds under

certain circumstances. The final rule provides that a foreign fund is included

within the definition of covered fund only for any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized or established under the laws of the United States or of any State. Under this definition a foreign fund becomes a covered fund only with respect to the U.S. banking entity (or foreign affiliate of a U.S. banking entity) that acts as a sponsor to the foreign fund or has an ownership interest in the foreign fund. Under the rule, a foreign fund is any entity that: (i) Is organized

or established outside the United States and the ownership interests of which are offered and sold solely outside the United States; (ii) is, or holds itself out as being, an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or


### 5945 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1703 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(iii).

1704 See also Goodwin, Procter & Hoar LLP, SEC
Staff No-Action Letter (Feb. 28, 1997); Touche Remnant & Co., SEC Staff No-Action Letter (Aug.
27, 1984).

1705 See final rule § 75.10(b)(2). Because any

issuer that offers its securities under the U.S. securities laws that may rely on an exclusion or exemption from the definition of investment company other than the exclusions contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company
Act would not be a covered fund, this exclusion is designed to provide equivalent treatment for foreign

covered funds.

1706 See § 75.10(c)(1). 1707 See proposal rule § 75.10(b)(1)(ii).

1708 Commodity interests include: (i) Commodity for future delivery, security futures product, or swap; (ii) agreement, contract, or transaction
described in section 2(c)(2)(C)(i) or 2(c)(2)(D)(i) of the Commodity Exchange Act; (iii) commodity option authorized under section 4c of the Commodity Exchange Act; or (iv) leveraged

transaction authorized under section 23 of the Commodity Exchange Act. See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68897 n.224 and accompanying text.

1709 See, e.g., ABA (Keating) (citing see, e.g., CFTC Interpretative Letter No. 86–22, Comm. Fut. L. Rep. (CCH) ¶ 23,280 (Sept. 19, 1986)); SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); BlackRock; Goldman (Covered Funds); Wells Fargo
(Covered Funds); BoA; EFAMA; TCW; ISDA (Feb.
2012); Arnold & Porter; BNY Mellon et al.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse
(Williams); RMA; IIB/EBF.

1710 See Goldman (Covered Funds); TCW; IIB/

EBF.

1711 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); BlackRock. 1712 See, e.g., BoA.

1713 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Goldman (Covered Funds); BlackRock; Wells Fargo (Covered Funds); BNY Mellon, et al.; SSgA (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); ABA (Keating); FIA; IIB/EBF; BoA.

1714 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

1715 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock; Occupy; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1716 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Alfred Brock.

1717 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1718 See Occupy. otherwise trading in securities; and (iii) has as its sponsor the U.S. banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) or has issued an ownership interest that is owned directly or indirectly by the U.S. banking entity (or an affiliate thereof). 1703 A foreign fund therefore may be a covered fund with respect to the U.S. banking entity that sponsors the
fund, but not be a covered fund with respect to a foreign bank that invests in the fund solely outside the United

States.

This approach is designed to include

within the definition of covered fund only foreign entities that would pose risks to U.S. banking entities of the type section 13 was designed to address. The Agencies note that any foreign fund, including a foreign fund sponsored or owned by a foreign banking entity, that

is offered or sold in the United States in

reliance on the exclusions in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act would be included in the

definition of covered fund under § 75.10(b)(1)(i) of the final rule unless it meets the requirements of an exclusion

from that definition as discussed

below. 1704 Thus, the rule is designed to provide parity—and no competitive advantages or disadvantages—between

U.S. and non-U.S. funds sold within the

United States.

To further ensure that this approach to foreign funds is consistent with the scope of coverage applied within the
United States, the final rule excludes from the definition of covered fund any foreign issuer that, were it subject to
U.S. securities laws, would be able to rely on an exclusion or exemption from the definition of investment company

other than the exclusions contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 1705

As explained below, the final rule also contains an exclusion for foreign public funds. 1706 This is designed to prevent the extension of the definition of covered fund from including foreign funds that are similar to U.S. registered investment companies, which are by statute not covered by section 13. 2. Commodity Pools

Under the proposal, the Agencies proposed to use their authority to expand the definition of covered fund to include a commodity pool as defined in section 1a(10) of the Commodity Exchange Act. 1707 A commodity pool is defined in the Commodity Exchange Act to mean any investment trust, syndicate, or similar form of enterprise operated for the purpose of trading in commodity

interests. 1708 The Agencies proposed to include commodity pools in the

definition of covered fund because some commodity pools are managed and

structured in a manner similar to a

covered fund.

Some commenters objected to this expansion of the definition of covered fund as beyond the scope of section 13. Commenters argued that covering commodity pools would extend section 13 of the BHC Act to any entity that engages in a single commodity, futures or swap transaction, including entities that share few, if any, of the

characteristics or risk associated with private equity funds or hedge funds. 1709 For example, some commenters argued that many non-bank businesses that are not investment companies but that hedge risks using commodity interests

would be treated as covered funds if all commodity pools were covered. 1710 In addition, registered mutual funds, pension funds, and many investment companies that rely on exclusions or exceptions other than section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act would be covered as commodity pools. Commenters argued that the CFTC has ample authority to regulate the activities of commodity pools and commodity pool operators, and nothing in section 13 indicates that Congress intended section 13 to govern commodity pool activities or investments in commodity pools. 1711 Commenters also argued that expanding the definition of covered fund to include commodity pools would have the unintended consequence of limiting all covered transactions between a banking entity sponsor or investor in a commodity pool and the commodity pool itself. 1712 If a commercial end user is a commodity pool for example, this restriction could limit access to credit for that entity.

Commenters that opposed the proposal’s inclusion of commodity pools generally asserted that, if commodity pools were nonetheless

included as covered funds under the final rule, the definition of commodity pool should be modified so that it would include only those pools that engage ‘‘primarily’’ or ‘‘principally’’ in commodities trading and exhibit

characteristics similar to those of conventional hedge funds and private equity funds. 1713 Other commenters urged the Agencies to incorporate the exemptions from the commodity pool operator registration requirements under the Commodity Exchange Act (such as rule 4.13(a)(4)). 1714

Some commenters supported including commodity pools within the
definition of covered fund, 1715 with some suggesting that this approach would be consistent with the goals of

the statute. 1716 One commenter asserted that including commodity pools would be necessary to prevent banking entities from indirectly engaging in prohibited proprietary trading through commodity pools. 1717 Another commenter asserted that the inclusion of commodity pools

was advisable because the CFTC has in the past viewed many commodity pools as similar to hedge funds. 1718

After carefully considering these comments, the Agencies have

determined not to include all commodity pools as covered funds as proposed. Instead, and taking into
account commenters’ concerns, the Agencies have taken a more tailored approach that is designed to more accurately identify those commodity pools that are similar to issuers that would be investment companies as defined the Investment Company Act of 1940 but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of


### 5946 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1719 See 7 U.S.C. 1a(10).

1720 Id. The CFTC and its divisions have provided interpretative guidance with respect to the meaning of the definition of commodity pool. See, e.g., 46 FR 26004, 26005 (May 8, 1981) (adopting the CFTC’s regulatory definition of commodity pool in 17 CFR 4.10(d), which is substantively identical to the definition in section 1a(10) of the Commodity Exchange Act); 77 FR 11252, 11258 (Feb. 24, 2012) (explaining the need for swaps to be included in the de minimis exclusion and exemption in 17 CFR 4.5
and 4.13); CFTC Staff Letter 12–13 (Oct. 11, 2012) (providing interpretative guidance to equity real
estate investment trusts); and CFTC Staff Letters
Nos. 12–14 (Oct. 11, 2012) and 12–45 (Dec. 7, 2012) (providing interpretative relief that certain securitization vehicles are not commodity pools).

1721 17 CFR 4.7(a)(1)(iii).

1722 Although section 3(c)(1) itself does not limit the types of investors who may invest in a fund relying on that exclusion, section 3(c)(1) provides that the fund may not conduct a public offering. A fund relying on section 3(c)(1) therefore must offer and sell its interests in offerings that are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, which offerings generally are limited to persons who meet certain qualification standards. 1723 See, e.g., CFTC regulations 3.10(c) and 4.13
and CFTC Staff Letters Nos. 12–37 (Nov. 29, 2012) (relief from registration for operators of certain types of family office pools), 12–40 (Dec. 4, 2012) (relief from registration for operators of business development companies that meet certain
conditions) and 12–44 (Dec. 7, 2012) (relief from registration for operators of mortgage real estate
investment trusts that meet certain conditions). See also supra note 1720.

1724 17 CFR 4.7(a)(2) and (a)(3).

1725 Although section 4.7 requires that all participation units be owned by qualified eligible persons, this element of the final rule has been modified to include pools for which ‘‘substantially all’’ participation units are owned by qualified eligible persons to prevent avoidance of covered fund status by distributing a small number of participation units to persons who are not qualified eligible persons.

1726 See 77 FR 9734, 9741 (Feb. 17, 2012) (describing the meaning of the term ‘‘offer’’ in the context of the business conduct standards for swap dealers and major swap participants with counterparties adopted by the CFTC). The term

‘‘offered’’ as used in this section of the final rule is not intended to denote an ‘‘offer’’ for purposes

of the Securities Act of 1933. that Act, consistent with section 13(h)(2) of the BHC Act.

Under the final rule, as a threshold
matter, a collective investment vehicle

must determine whether it is a ‘‘commodity pool’’ as that term is defined in section 1a(10) of the Commodity Exchange Act. 1719 The Agencies note that collective investment

vehicles need to make this determination for purposes of complying with the Commodity Exchange Act regardless of whether commodity pools are covered funds. Under section 1a(10), a commodity pool is ‘‘any investment trust, syndicate, or similar form of enterprise operated for the purpose of trading commodity

interests.’’ 1720 If a collective investment
vehicle meets that definition, the commodity pool would be considered a covered fund provided it meets one of

two alternative tests and does not also qualify for an exclusion from the covered fund definition (e.g., the exclusion for registered investment companies).

First, a commodity pool will be a covered fund if it is an ‘‘exempt pool’’ under section 4.7(a)(1)(iii) of the CFTC’s regulations, 1721 meaning that it is a commodity pool for which a registered commodity pool operator has elected to claim the exemption provided by section 4.7 of the CFTC’s regulations. The Agencies believe that such commodity pools are appropriately
considered covered funds because, like funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7), these commodity pools sell their participation units in restricted offerings that are not registered under the

Securities Act of 1933 and are offered only to investors who meet certain heightened qualification standards, as

discussed above. 1722 The Agencies therefore have determined that they properly are considered ‘‘such similar funds’’ as specified in section 13(h)(2) of

the BHC Act.

Alternatively, a commodity pool for which exempt pool status under section 4.7 of the CFTC’s regulations has not been elected may also be a covered fund if the pool features certain elements that make the pool substantively similar to exempt pools under section 4.7. The Agencies are including the alternative definition of commodity pools that are covered funds because, if the Agencies had included only pools for which exempt pool status had been elected, covered fund status for pools in which banking entities are invested could easily be avoided merely by not electing exempt pool status under section 4.7. The following is a description of the elements of a pool that would cause a pool that is not an exempt pool under

section 4.7 to be a covered fund.

The first element is that a commodity pool operator for the pool is registered pursuant to the Commodity Exchange Act in connection with the operation of that commodity pool. This element is present for all pools that are exempt pools under section 4.7 because exempt pool status can only be elected by registered commodity pool operators.

This element excludes from the definition of covered fund an entity that is a commodity pool, but for which the pool operator has been either exempted from registration as a commodity pool operator or excluded from the definition of commodity pool operator under theCFTC’s regulations or pursuant to a noaction letter issued by CFTC staff. 1723

The second element under the

alternative definition is that substantially all of the commodity pool’s participation units are owned only by qualified eligible persons under section 4.7(a)(2) and (a)(3). 1724 This

element is consistent with the requirement under section 4.7 that exempt pool status can only be claimed if the participation units in the pool are only offered or sold to qualified eligible

persons. 1725 Moreover, the inclusion of this element aligns the elements of the

alternative test with features that define funds that rely on sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act

of 1940.

The assessment as to whether the commodity pool in question satisfies

this condition must be made at the time that the banking entity is required to make the following determinations: whether it can obtain new participation units in the commodity pool, whether it can retain previously purchased participation units in the commodity pool, and whether it can act as the commodity pool’s sponsor. The Agencies believe this to be appropriate because it would require the banking entity to consider current information regarding the commodity pool and its participants rather than assess the composition of the pool’s participants over time even though its investments in or relationships with the pool do not change, which could be difficult depending upon the length of time that the pool has been in operation and the

records available at the time of

determination.

Finally, the third element under the

alternative definition is that the commodity pool participation units have not been publicly offered to persons other than qualified eligible persons. Consistent with CFTC regulations addressing the meaning of

‘‘offer’’ in the context of the CFTC’s regulations, the term ‘‘offer’’ as used in § 75.10(b)(1)(ii)(B) ‘‘has the same meaning as in contract law, such that, if accepted the terms of the offer would form a binding contract.’’ 1726 This aspect of the alternative definition is intended to limit the ability for commodity pools to avoid classification as covered funds through an offer, eitherin the past or currently ongoing, to nonqualified eligible persons ‘‘in name only’’ where there is no actual offer to non-qualified eligible persons.

Accordingly, unless the pool operator can show that the pool’s participation units have been actively and publicly offered to non-affiliated parties that are not qualified eligible persons whereby such non-qualified eligible persons could in fact purchase a participation unit in the commodity pool, a pool that

features the other elements listed in the


### 5947 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1727 17 CFR 4.24 (2013).

1728 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BlackRock; AHIC; Sen. Carper et al.; Rep.

Garrett et al.

1729 Funds relying on section 3(c)(7) must be owned exclusively by qualified purchasers, as defined in the Investment Company Act. The Agencies note in this regard that section 4.7 of the CFTC’s regulations use substantially the same definition of a qualified purchaser in defining the term qualified eligible person. 1730 Operators of commodity pools currently must consider whether they are required to register with the CFTC as commodity pool operators, and whether the pools have the characteristics that would make it possible for the operator to claim an exemption under section 4.7. These concepts thus should be familiar to commodity pools and their operators, and including these concepts in the final rule should allow banking entities more easily to determine if a particular commodity pools is a covered fund than if the Agencies were to develop new concepts solely for purposes of the final rule. 1731 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(1).

1732 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter; BoA; Goldman
(Covered Funds); ICI (Feb. 2012); Putnam; TCW; Vanguard. According to these commenters, a registered investment company may use security or commodity futures, swaps, or other commodity interests in various ways to manage its investment portfolio and be swept into the broad definition of ‘‘commodity pool’’ contained in the Commodity Exchange Act.

1733 See Arnold & Porter; Goldman (Covered
Funds); see also SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); ABA (Keating); BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); JPMC; (requesting clarification that registered investment companies are not banking entities); TCW. alternative definition would be a covered fund. Such a showing will not turn solely on whether the commodity pool has filed a registration statement to offer its participation units under the

Securities Act of 1933 or whether the commodity pool operator has prepared

a disclosure document consistent with the provisions of section 4.24 of the CFTC’s regulations. 1727 Rather, the pool operator would need to show that a reasonably active effort, based on the
facts and circumstances, has been undertaken by brokers and other sales personnel to publicly offer the pool’s participation units to non-affiliated parties that are not qualified eligible

persons.

In taking this more tailored approach to commodity pools that will be covered funds, the Agencies are more closely aligning the types of commodity pools

that will be covered funds under the

final rule with section 13’s definition of a hedge fund and private equity fund by reference to section 3(c)(1) or section 3(c)(7), and addressing concerns of commenters that the proposal was overly broad and would lead to
outcomes inconsistent with the words, structure, and purpose of section 13. 1728 The Agencies believe that the types of commodity pools described above generally are similar to funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) in that, like funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7), these commodity pools may be owned only by investors who meet certain heightened qualification
standards, as discussed above. 1729 Further, the Agencies believe that the

final rule’s identification of the elements of a commodity pool that is a covered fund are clearly established and readily ascertainable such that once it is determined whether an entity is a commodity pool, an assessment that is already necessary to comply with the Commodity Exchange Act, then the

further determination of whether an entity that is a commodity pool is also

a covered fund can be made based on readily ascertainable information.

In adopting this approach, the Agencies also are utilizing the current regulatory structure promulgated by the

CFTC under the CEA. As the CFTC regulates commodity pools, commodity pool operators, and commodity trading advisors that advise commodity pools, the Agencies believe that it is beneficial to utilize an already established set of rules, regulations, and guidance. The Agencies considered alternative approaches provided by the commenters, but have adopted the approach taken in the final rule for the

reasons discussed above and because the Agencies believe that the final rule, by incorporating concepts with which commodity pools and their operators are familiar, more clearly delineates the commodity pools that are covered

funds. 1730

The Agencies believe that the final rule’s tailored approach to commodity pools includes in the definition of covered fund commodity pools that are similar to funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7). The Agencies also note in this regard that a commodity pool that would be a covered fund even under this tailored approach will not be a covered fund if the pool also qualifies

for an exclusion from the covered fund definition, including the exclusion for registered investments companies. Accordingly, this approach excludes

from covered funds entities like commercial end users and registered investment companies, whose activities do not implicate the concerns section 13 was designed to address. Rather, the final rule limits the commodity pools

that will be included as covered funds

to those that are similar to other covered funds except that they are not generally subject to the Investment Company Act

of 1940 due to the instruments in which they invest. For all of these reasons, the Agencies believe that the final rule’s approach to commodity pools addresses both the Agencies’ concerns about the potential for evasion and commenters’

concerns about the breadth of the proposed rule, and provides that the commodity pools captured as covered
funds are ‘‘such similar funds,’’ consistent with section 13(h)(2) of the

BHC Act.

The Agencies acknowledge that as a result of including certain commodity pools in the definition of covered fund, the prohibitions under section 13(f) and § 75.14 may result in certain structural changes in the industry. The Agencies note that these changes (e.g., bankaffiliated FCMs may not be able to lend money in certain clearing transactions to affiliated commodity pools that are covered funds) may result in certain changes in the way related entities do
business with each other. However, the Agencies believe that because the industry is competitive with asignificant number of alternative nonaffiliate competitors, the changes would not result in a less competitive landscape for investors in commodity pools.

3. Entities Regulated Under the Investment Company Act

The proposed rule did not specifically include registered investment companies (including mutual funds) or business development companies

within the definition of covered

fund. 1731 As explained above, the statute references funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. Registered investment companies and business development companies do not rely on either section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act and are instead registered or regulated in

accordance with the Investment Company Act.

Many commenters argued that registered investment companies and business development companies would

be treated as covered funds under the proposed definition if commodity pools

are treated as covered funds. 1732 A few commenters argued that the final ruleshould specifically provide that all SECregistered funds are excluded from the definition of covered fund (and the definition of banking entity) to avoid any uncertainty about whether section 13 applies to these types of funds. 1733

Commenters also requested that the

final rule exclude from the definition of

covered fund entities formed to establish registered investment companies during the seeding period.
These commenters contended that, during the early stages of forming and seeding a registered investment company, an entity relying on section 3(c)(1) or (3)(c)(7) may be created to


### 5948 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1734 See ICI (Feb. 2012); TCW.

1735 See final rule § 75.10(c)(12). 1736 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68856.

1737 See final rule § 75.2(a) (defining ‘‘affiliate’’ for purposes of the final rule).

1738 See 12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(2); 12 CFR 225.2(e).

1739 See, e.g., 12 CFR 211.10(a)(11);
225.28(b)(6)(i); 225.86(b)(3); Unicredito, 86 Fed.
Res. Bull. 825 (2000); Societe Generale, 84 Fed. Res.
Bull. 680 (1998); Commerzbank AG, 83 Fed. Res. Bull. 678 (1997); The Governor and Company of the
Bank of Ireland, 82 Fed. Res. Bull. 1129 (1996); Mellon Bank Corp., 79 Fed. Res. Bull. 626 (1993); Bayerische Vereinsbank AG, 73 Fed. Res. Bull. 155
(1987). 1740 See, e.g., Societe Generale, 84 Fed. Res. Bull. 680 (1998) (finding that a bank holding company

does not control a mutual fund for which it holds up to 5 percent of the voting shares and also provides investment advisory, administrative and other services, has directors or employees who comprise less than 25 percent of the board of directors of the fund (including the chairman of the
board), and has three senior officer interlocks and a number of junior officer interlocks).

1741 See letter dated June 24, 1999, to H. Rodgin Cohen, Esq., Sullivan & Cromwell (First Union Corp.), from Jennifer J. Johnson, Secretary of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (finding that a bank holding company does not control a mutual fund for which it provides investment advisory and other services and that complies with the limitations of section 4(c)(7) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(7)), so long as (i) the bank holding company reduces its interest in the fund to less than 25 percent of the fund’s voting shares after a six-month period, and (ii) a majority of the fund’s directors are independent of the bank holding company and the bank holding company cannot select a majority of the board) (‘‘First Union Letter’’); H.R. Rep. No. 106–434 at 153 (1999) (Conf. Rep.) (noting that the Act permits a financial holding company to sponsor and distribute all types of mutual funds and investment companies); see also 12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(1), (6).

1742 See, e.g., H.R. Rep. No. 106–434 at 153 (1999) (Conf. Rep.) (noting that the Act permits a financial holding company to sponsor and distribute all types of mutual funds and investment companies).

1743 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(1); 12 CFR 225.86. facilitate the development of a track record for the registered investment company so that it may be marketed to

unaffiliated investors. 1734

The Agencies did not intend to include registered investment companies and business development companies as covered funds under the proposal. Section 13’s definition of private equity fund and hedge fund by reference to section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act appears to reflect Congress’ concerns about banking entities’ exposure to and relationships with investment funds that explicitly are excluded from SEC regulation as investment companies. The Agencies do not believe it would be appropriate to treat as a covered fund registered investment companies and business development companies,

which are regulated by the SEC as investment companies. The Agencies believe that the proposed rule’s inclusion of commodity pools would have resulted in some registered investment companies and business development companies being covered funds, a result the Agencies did not intend. The Agencies, in addition to narrowing the commodity pools that

will be included as covered funds as
discussed above, have also modified the final rule to exclude SEC-registered investment companies and business development companies from the

definition of covered fund. 1735

The Agencies also recognize that an entity that becomes a registered investment company or business development company might, during its seeding period, rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). The Agencies have determined to exclude these seeding vehicles from

the covered fund definition for the same reasons the Agencies determined to exclude entities that are operating as registered investment companies or business development companies as

discussed in more detail below in Part

VI.B.1.c.12 of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

.

The Agencies also understand that registered investment companies may establish and hold subsidiary entities that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) in

order to trade in various financial instruments for the registered investment company parent. If a registered investment company were itself a banking entity, section 13 and the final rule would prohibit the registered investment company from sponsoring or investing in such an investment subsidiary. But a registered investment company would only itself be a banking entity if it is an affiliate of an insured depository institution. As explained in the proposal, a registered investment company, such as a mutual fund or exchange traded fund, or an entity that has made an effective election to be regulated as a business development company, would not be an affiliate of a banking entity for purposes of section 13 of that Act solely by virtue of being advised, or organized, sponsored and managed by a banking entity in accordance with the BHC Act (including section 13) and the Board’s Regulation Y. 1736

Under the BHC Act, an entity (including a registered investment company) would generally be considered an affiliate of a banking entity, and therefore a banking entity itself, if it controls, is controlled by, or

is under common control with an insured depository institution. 1737 Pursuant to the BHC Act, a company controls another company if: (i) The company directly or indirectly or acting through one or more other persons owns, controls, or has power to vote 25 per cent or more of any class of voting securities of the company; (ii) the company controls in any manner the election of a majority of the directors of trustees of the other company; or (iii)
the Board determines, after notice and opportunity for hearing, that the company directly or indirectly exercises a controlling influence over the management or policies of the

company. 1738

The Board’s regulations and orders have long recognized that a bank holding company may organize, sponsor, and manage a mutual fund such as a registered investment company, including by serving as investment adviser to registered investment company, without controlling the registered investment company for purposes of the BHC

Act. 1739 For example, the Board has permitted a bank holding company to own up to 5 percent of the voting shares of a registered investment company for which the bank holding company provides investment advisory,
administrative, and other services, and

has a number of director and officer interlocks, without finding that the bank holding company controls the fund. 1740 The Board has also permitted a bank holding company to own less than 25 percent of the voting shares of a registered investment company and provide similar services without finding that the bank holding company controls the fund, so long as the fund limits its investments to those permissible for the holding company to make itself. 1741

The BHC Act, as amended by the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act, and the Board’s Regulation Y authorize a bank holding company that qualifies as a financial holding company to engage in
a broader set of activities, and to have a broader range of relationships or
investments with entities, than bank holding companies. 1742 For instance, a financial holding company may engage in, or acquire shares of any company engaged in, any activity that is financial

in nature or incidental to such financial activity, including any activity that a bank holding company is permitted to engage in or acquire by regulation or

order. 1743 In light of the foregoing, for purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act a financial holding company may own more than 5 percent (and less than 25 percent) of the voting shares of a registered investment company for which the holding company provides investment advisory, administrative,

and other services and has a number of
director and officer interlocks, without


### 5949 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1744 See First Union Letter (June 24, 1999); see also 12 CFR 225.86(b)(3) (authorizing a financial holding company to organize, sponsor, and manage a mutual fund so long as (i) the fund does not exercise managerial control over the entities in
which the fund invests, and (ii) the financial holding company reduces its ownership in the fund, if any, to less than 25 percent of the equity of the fund within one year of sponsoring the fund or such additional period as the Board permits).

1745 See final rule §§ 75.10(c)(12) and 75.20(e). Under the final rule, these seeding vehicles also must comply with the limitations on leverage under the Investment Company Act that apply to registered investment companies and SEC-regulated business development companies. See final rule
§ 75.10(c)(12).

1746 See final rule § 75.10(c). 1747 See 156 Cong. Rec. H5226 (daily ed. June 30, 2010) (statement of Reps. Himes and Frank) (noting intent that subsidiaries or joint ventures not be
included within the definition of covered fund); 156 Cong. Rec. S5904–05 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sens. Boxer and Dodd) (noting broad definition of hedge fund and private equity fund and recommending that the Agencies take steps to ensure definition is reasonably tailored); see also FSOC study at 61–63.

1748 As discussed above, the proposed rule generally included in the covered fund definition a foreign fund that, were it organized or offered

under the laws of the United States or offered to
U.S. residents, would meet the definition of a
domestic covered fund (i.e., would need to rely section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act). Many commenters argued that this definition

is too broad and could include as covered funds various types of foreign funds, like UCITS, that commenters argued should not be included. See,

e.g., JPMC; BlackRock.

1749 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; UBS; ICI
Global; BlackRock; TCW; State Street (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); IAA; JPMC; Goldman (Covered
Funds); BoA; Credit Suisse (Williams); BNY
Mellon, et al.; Union Asset; EFAMA; BVI; IRSG, SEB; IIB/EBF; GE (Feb. 2012) (commenting on the

overbreadth of the definition because of the effect on foreign issuers of asset-backed securities); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1750 See BlackRock; Vanguard.

1751 See BlackRock.

1752 See ASF (Feb. 2012).

1753 See Union Asset; EFAMA; BVI.

1754 See Goldman (Covered Funds).

1755 See AFMA.

1756 See BoA.

1757 See BVI.

1758 See Goldman (Covered Funds).

See AFMA.

See BoA. controlling the fund for purposes of the

BHC Act. 1744

So long as a bank holding company or financial holding company complies
with these limitations, it would not,
absent other facts and circumstances, control a registered investment company and the registered investment company for purposes of section 13 (and any subsidiary thereof) would not itself be a banking entity subject to the

restrictions of section 13 of the BHC Act and any final implementing rules (unless the registered investment company itself otherwise controls an insured depository institution). Also consistent with the Board’s precedent regarding bank holding company control of and relationships with funds, a seeding vehicle that will become aregistered investment company or SECregulated business development company would not itself be viewed as violating the requirements of section 13 during the seeding period so long as the banking entity that establishes the seeding vehicle operates the vehicle pursuant to a written plan, developed in accordance with the banking entity’s compliance program, that reflects the banking entity’s determination that the vehicle will become a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company within the time period provided by section 13(d)(4) and § 75.12 for seeding a

covered fund. 1745

c. Entities Excluded From Definition of

Covered Fund

As noted above, the final rule

excludes a number of entities from the

definition of covered fund. 1746 As discussed in more detail below, these exclusions more effectively tailor the definition of covered fund to those types of entities that section 13 was designed

to focus on. The exclusions thus are designed to provide certainty, mitigate compliance costs and other burdens, and address the potential over-breadth

of the covered fund definition and related requirements without such exclusions by permitting banking

entities to invest in and have other relationships with entities that do not relate to the statutory purpose of section
13. These exclusions, described in more
detail below, take account of information provided by many commenters regarding entities that would likely be included within the proposed definition of a covered fund, but that are not traditionally thought of as hedge funds or private equity

funds. 1747 Finally, the Agencies note that providing exclusions from the
covered fund definition, rather than providing permitted activity exemptions as proposed in some cases, aligns the final rule with the statute in applying the restrictions imposed by section 13(f) on transactions with covered funds only

to transactions with issuers that are

defined as covered funds and thus raise the concerns section 13 was designed to

address.

The Agencies recognize, however,

that the final rule’s definition of covered fund does not include certain pooled investment vehicles. For example, the

definition of covered fund excludes business development companies, entities that rely on section 3(c)(5)(C), 3(c)(3), or 3(c)(11) of the Investment Company Act, and certain foreignpublic funds that are subject to homecountry regulation. The Agencies expect that the types of pooled investment vehicles sponsored by the financial services industry will continue to evolve, including in response to the final rule, and the Agencies will be monitoring this evolution to determine whether excluding these and other types of entities remains appropriate. The Agencies will also monitor use of the exclusions for attempts to evade the requirements of section 13 and intend to use their authority where appropriate to prevent evasions of the rule.

1. Foreign Public Funds

As discussed above, under the proposal a covered fund was defined to include the foreign equivalent of any

covered fund in order to address the potential for circumvention. Many commenters argued that the proposed definition could capture non-U.S. public retail funds, such as UCITS. 1748 These commenters contended that nonU.S. public retail funds should be

excluded from the definition of covered fund because they are regulated in their home jurisdiction; commenters noted that similar funds registered in the
United States, such as mutual funds, are

not covered funds. 1749

Some commenters were concerned that the proposed definition could inadvertently capture exchange-traded funds trading in foreign jurisdictions, 1750 separate accounts set up to fund foreign pension plans, 1751

non-U.S. issuers of asset-backed

securities, 1752 and non-U.S. regulated funds specifically designed for

institutional investors. 1753 Commenters also provided several potential effects of capturing foreign public funds under

the covered fund definition: U.S. banking entities would incur unnecessary and substantial costs to

rebrand and restructure their non-U.S. regulated funds, 1754 banking entities could be eliminated from the potential pool of counterparties, thereby affecting pricing and efficiency, 1755 U.S. banking entities may exit the UCITS market and lose competitiveness, 1756 the growth of mutual fund formation in foreign
countries could be limited, 1757 and market liquidity in foreign jurisdictions could be impaired. 1758

Some commenters supported excluding any foreign public fund that is organized or formed under non-U.S. law, authorized for public sale in the jurisdiction in which it is organized or formed, and regulated as a public investment company in that


### 5950 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1759 See ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb.
2012); BNY Mellon et al.

1760 See UBS; ICI Global; ICI (Feb. 2012); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); T. Rowe
Price; HSBC Life; Union Asset; EFAMA; BVI; EBF; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; IMA; Ass’n. of
Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Katten (on behalf
of Int’l Clients); Credit Suisse (Williams).

1761 See T. Rowe Price; Credit Suisse (Williams); SSgA (Feb. 2012); BNY Mellon et al.

1762 See T. Rowe Price.

1763 See final rule § 75.10(c)(1).

1764 Although the discussion of this condition generally refers to U.S. banking entities for ease of reading, the condition also applies to foreign affiliates of a U.S. banking entity. See final rule § 75.10(c)(1)(ii) (applying this limitation ‘‘[w]ith respect to a banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State and any issuer for which such banking entity acts as sponsor’’). 1765 See final rule § 75.10(c)(1)(iii). jurisdiction. 1759 In light of the proposal’s broad definition of covered
fund, some commenters recommended explicitly excluding non-U.S. regulated

funds based on characteristics to distinguish the foreign funds that

should be treated as covered funds. 1760

Several commenters recommended excluding non-U.S. funds based upon whether the funds are subject to a regulatory framework comparable to that which is imposed on SEC-registered
funds; 1761 one commenter specifically identified European UCITS, Canadian
mutual funds, Australian unit trusts, and Japanese investment trusts as examples of regulated funds to be

excluded. 1762

To address these concerns, the final rule generally excludes from the definition of covered fund any issuer that is organized or established outside of the United States and the ownership

interests of which are authorized to be

offered and sold to retail investors in the issuer’s home jurisdiction and are sold predominantly through one or more public offerings outside of the United

States. 1763 Foreign funds that meet these requirements will not be covered funds, except that an additional condition applies to U.S. banking entities 1764 with respect to the foreign public funds they sponsor. The foreign public fund exclusion is only available to a U.S. banking entity with respect to a foreign fund sponsored by the U.S. banking entity if, in addition to the requirements discussed above, the fund’s ownership interests are sold predominantly to persons other than the sponsoring banking entity, affiliates of the issuer and the sponsoring banking entity, and employees and directors of such

entities.

For purposes of this exclusion, the Agencies note that the reference to retail
investors, while not defined, should be

construed to refer to members of the general public who do not possess the level of sophistication and investment experience typically found among institutional investors, professional investors or high net worth investors who may be permitted to invest in complex investments or private placements in various jurisdictions.

Retail investors would therefore be expected to be entitled to the full protection of securities laws in the home jurisdiction of the fund, and the Agencies would expect a fund authorized to sell ownership interests to such retail investors to be of a type that is more similar to a U.S. registered investment company rather than to a

U.S. covered fund.

In order to help maintain this

distinction and to avoid circumstances

that could result in an evasion of section 13 and the final rule, the ownership

interests of the fund must be sold predominantly in one or more public offerings outside of the United States to qualify for the exclusion. Given this restriction, a U.S. banking entity therefore could not rely on this exclusion to set up a foreign public fund for the purpose of selling a significant amount of ownership interests in the fund through one or more offerings conducted on an unregistered basis (whether in a foreign jurisdiction or in the United States). The Agencies generally expect that an offering is made predominantly outside of the United States if 85 percent or more of the fund’s

interests are sold to investors that are

not residents of the United States.

The requirements that a foreign public

fund both be authorized for sale to retail investors and sold predominantly in public offerings outside of the United States are based in part on the Agencies’ view that foreign funds that meet these requirements generally will be sufficiently similar to U.S. registered investment companies such that it is appropriate to exclude these foreign

funds from the covered fund definition. A foreign fund authorized for sale to retail investors that is also publicly offered may, for example, provide greater information than funds that are sold through private offerings like funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). Such foreign funds also may be subject
to various restrictions, as deemed appropriate by foreign regulators in light of local conditions and practices, that exceed those applicable to privately offered funds. Foreign regulators may apply these or other enhanced restrictions or other requirements to

funds that are offered on a broad basis to the general public for the protection of investors in those jurisdictions. A foreign fund that purports to publicly offer its shares but in fact offers
them on a more limited basis, however, may be less likely to resemble a registered investment company in these and other respects. In order to limit the foreign public fund exclusion to funds that publicly offer their shares on a sufficiently broad basis, the final rule defines the term ‘‘public offering’’ for purposes of this exclusion to mean a ‘‘distribution’’ (as defined in § 75.4(a)(3) of subpart B) of securities in any jurisdiction outside the United States to investors, including retail investors, provided that (i) the distribution complies with all applicable requirements in the jurisdiction in which such distribution is being made; (ii) the distribution does not restrict availability to investors having a

minimum level of net worth or net investment assets; and (iii) the issuer
has filed or submitted, with the appropriate regulatory authority in such jurisdiction, offering disclosure documents that are publicly

available. 1765

Under the final rule, therefore, a foreign fund’s distribution would not be a public offering for purposes of the foreign public fund exclusion if the distribution imposes investor restrictions based on a required

minimum level of net worth or net

investment assets. This would not be affected by any suitability requirements that may be imposed under applicable
local law. In addition, the final rule requires that, in connection with a public offering by a foreign public fund, the offering disclosure documents must be ‘‘publicly available.’’ This requirement will provide assurance regarding the transparency for such an offering and will generally be satisfied

where the documents are made accessible to all persons in such jurisdiction. Disclosure documents may be made publicly available in a variety of means, such as through a public filing with a regulatory agency or through a Web site that provides broad accessibility to persons in such jurisdiction.

In addition and as discussed above, the final rule also places an additional condition on a U.S. banking entity’s ability to rely on the foreign public fund exclusion with respect to the foreign public funds it sponsors. For a U.S. banking entity to rely on the foreign public fund exclusion with respect to a foreign public fund it sponsors, the ownership interests in the fund must be sold predominantly to persons other than the sponsoring U.S. banking entity


### 5951 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1766 See final rule § 75.20(e). 1767 See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(2)(iv); Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68913.

1768 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012), JPMC; Goldman (Covered Funds), NAIB et

al. ; GE (Feb. 2012); BoA; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered Funds); ABA (Keating); Ass’n.
of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); Rep. Himes; BOK.

1769 See 15 U.S.C. 80a-3(a)(1)(A) & (C). and certain persons connected to that banking entity. Consistent with the Agencies’ view concerning whether a foreign public fund has been sold predominantly outside of the United States, the Agencies generally expect that a foreign public fund will satisfy this additional condition if 85 percent

or more of the fund’s interests are sold to persons other than the sponsoring U.S. banking entity and certain persons connected to that banking entity.

This additional condition reflects the Agencies’ view that the foreign public fund exclusion is designed to treat foreign public funds consistently with

similar U.S. funds and to limit the extraterritorial application of section 13 of the BHC Act, including by permitting U.S. banking entities and their foreign affiliates to carry on traditional asset management businesses outside of the

United States. The exclusion is not intended to permit a U.S. banking entity to establish a foreign fund for the purpose of investing in the fund as a means of avoiding the restrictions imposed by section 13. Permitting a U.S. banking entity to invest in a foreign public fund under this exclusion only when that fund is sold predominantly to persons other than the sponsoring U.S. banking entity and certain persons connected to that banking entity permits U.S. banking entities to continue their asset management businesses outside of the United States while also limiting the opportunity for evasion of section 13 as

discussed below.

This additional condition only applies to U.S. banking entities with respect to the foreign public funds they sponsor because the Agencies believe that a foreign public fund sponsored by a U.S. banking entity may present heightened risks of evasion. Absent the additional condition, a U.S. banking entity could establish a foreign public fund for the purpose of itself investing substantially in that fund and, through the fund, making investments that the banking entity could not make directly under section 13. The Agencies believe it is less likely that a U.S. banking entity effectively could evade section 13 by investing in third-party foreign public funds that the banking entity does not sponsor. In those cases it is less likely that the U.S. banking entity would be

able to control the investments of the fund, and the fund thus likely would be a less effective means for the banking entity to engage in proprietary trading through the fund. The Agencies therefore have declined to apply this additional condition with respect to any foreign public fund in which a U.S. banking entity invests but does not act

as sponsor. The Agencies note that the foreign public fund exclusion is not intended to permit a banking entity to sponsor a foreign fund for the purpose of selling ownership interests to any banking entity (affiliated or unaffiliated) that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State (or to a limited group of such banking entities). The Agencies intend to monitor banking entities’ investments in foreign public funds to ensure that banking entities do not use the exclusion for foreign public

funds in a manner that functions as an evasion of section 13 in this or any other way. The Agencies expect that one area of focus for such monitoring would be significant investments in a foreign public fund, including a fund that is unaffiliated with any banking entity located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, where such investments represent a substantial percentage of the ownership

interests in such fund.

In order to conduct this monitoring more effectively, the Agencies also are adopting certain documentation requirements concerning U.S. banking entities’ investments in foreign public
funds, as discussed in more detail below

in Part VI.C.1 of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**. Under the final rule, a U.S. banking entity with more than $10

billion in total consolidated assets will be required to document its investments in foreign public funds, broken out by each foreign public fund and each foreign jurisdiction in which any foreign public fund is organized, if the U.S. banking entity and its affiliates’ ownership interests in foreign public
funds exceed $50 million at the end of

two or more consecutive calendar quarters. This requirement thus is tailored to apply only to U.S. banking

entities above a certain size that also have substantial investments in foreign public funds. 1766 The Agencies believe this approach appropriately balances the Agencies’ evasion concerns and the

burdens that documentation requirements impose.

For all of the reasons discussed above, the Agencies believe that the final rule’s approach to foreign public funds is

consistent with the final rule’s exclusion of registered or otherwise exempt (without reliance on the exemptions in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7))

funds in the United States. It also limits the extraterritorial application of section

13 of the BHC Act and reduces the potential economic and other burdens commenters argued would result for banking entities. The Agencies believe that this exclusion represents an appropriate balancing of considerations that should not significantly increase the risks to the U.S. financial system that section 13 was designed to limit.

2. Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries

Under the proposed rule, a banking entity would have been permitted to invest in or sponsor a wholly-owned subsidiary that relies on the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act to avoid being an investment company under that Act if the subsidiary was carried on the balance sheet of its parent and was engaged principally in performing bona fide liquidity management activities. 1767 Commenters argued that, instead of providing a permitted activity exemption for banking entities to invest in or sponsor certain wholly-ownedsubsidiaries as proposed, all whollyowned subsidiaries should be excluded

from the definition of covered fundunder the final rule because whollyowned subsidiaries are typically used for organizational convenience and generally do not have the characteristics, risks, or purpose of a hedge fund or private equity fund,

which involves unaffiliated investors owning interests in the structure for the purpose of sharing in the profits and

losses from investment activities. 1768 Commenters explained that publicly traded companies often establish wholly-owned intermediate companies for the purpose of holding securities of operating entities or other corporate vehicles necessary to the business of the entity. Because these intermediate companies invest entirely (or substantially) in the securities of other entities, these intermediate companies may be investment companies for purposes of the Investment Company Act but for the exclusion provided by section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 1769

Commenters contended that requiring banking entities to divest their interests in wholly-owned subsidiaries and cease certain intercompany transactions

would have a material adverse effect on the safety, soundness, efficiency and stability of the U.S. and global financial systems, which could in turn have a

material adverse effect on the wider


### 5952 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1770 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

1771 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BoA; Rep. Himes.

1772 See, e.g., Goldman (Covered Funds); BoA.

1773 See Rep. Himes; Fin. Services Roundtable (June 14, 2011); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BOK; Chamber (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); GE (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered Funds);
Goldman (Covered Funds); Ass’n. of Institutional
Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; NAIB et al.

1774 See Wells Fargo (Covered Funds); Credit
Suisse (Williams).

1775 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

1776 Although not a condition of the exclusion, banking entities may use wholly-owned subsidiaries to engage in bona fide liquidity management. As discussed below, however, a wholly-owned subsidiary is itself a banking entity, and thus is subject to all of the requirements that apply to banking entities, including the requirements applicable to a banking entity’s liquidity management activities under § 75.3(d)(3).

1777 See final rule § 75.10(c)(2). 1778 Cf. Section 2(a)(43) of the Investment Company Act (defining a ‘‘wholly-owned subsidiary’’ of a person to mean ‘‘a company 95 per centum or more of the outstanding voting securities of which are owned by such person, or by a company which, within the meaning of this paragraph, is a wholly-owned subsidiary of such person’’).

1779 The Agencies also note that depositors for asset-backed securities offerings are important to the process of securitization. See, e.g., ASF (July 2012) (noting that a depositor, as used in a securitization structure, is an entity that generally acts only as a conduit to transfer the loans from the originating bank to the issuing entity for the purpose of facilitating a securitization transaction and engages in no discretionary investment or
securities issuance activities). See also, Rule 191
under the Securities Act of 1933 (17 CFR 230.191) (depositor as issuer for registered asset-backed securities offerings). Commenters raised a question about the treatment of depositors under the Investment Company Act, and therefore, whether they would technically fall within the definition of

covered fund. See ASF (July 2012); GE (Aug. 2012). For purposes of the covered fund prohibitions, the Agencies note that depositors may fall within the wholly-owned subsidiary exclusion from the

covered fund definition.

1780 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(1) (defining banking entity to include any affiliate or subsidiary of a banking entity). economy in terms of reduced credit, increased unemployment and reduced

output. 1770 Commenters also argued that an exclusion for wholly-owned subsidiaries is necessary in order to avoid a conflict with other important requirements in the Dodd-Frank Act. For example, commenters alleged that including wholly-owned subsidiaries

within the definition of covered fund for purposes of section 13 would create a conflict with the requirement that a banking entity that is a bank holding company serve as a source of strength to its subsidiaries because the prohibition in section 13(f) on transactions between a banking entity and covered funds owned or sponsored by the banking entity would effectively prohibit the banking entity from providing financial resources to wholly-owned intermediate holding companies and their

subsidiaries. 1771 Other commenters argued that banking entities would bear extensive compliance costs and operational burdens and likely would be restricted from structuring themselves effectively. 1772

Commenters proposed several

alternatives to address these concerns.
For instance, commenters recommendedthat the final rule exclude all whollyowned subsidiaries from the definition

of covered fund. 1773 Commenters also urged that the final rule include ownership interests held by employees of a banking entity with any ownership interests held directly by the banking entity for purposes of qualifying for any exclusion granted by the rule for wholly-owned subsidiaries. 1774 Another

commenter recommended the exclusion of subsidiaries, wholly owned or not, that engage in bona fide liquidity

management. 1775

In light of these comments and consistent with the purposes of section

13 and the terms of the Dodd-Frank Act
as discussed in more detail above, the Agencies have revised the final rule to exclude wholly-owned subsidiaries
from the definition of covered fund, including those not engaged in liquidity

management. 1776 A wholly-owned subsidiary, as defined in the final rule, is an entity, all of the outstanding ownership interests of which are owned directly or indirectly by the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof), except that (i) up to five percent of the entity’s ownership interests may be owned by directors, employees, and certain former directors and employees of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof); and (ii) within the five percent ownership interests described in clause (i), up to 0.5 percent of the entity’s outstanding ownership interests may be held by a third party if the ownership interest is held by the third party for the purpose of establishing corporate separateness or addressing bankruptcy, insolvency, or

similar concerns. 1777

Although the final rule includes ownership interests held by certain former directors and employees for purposes of qualifying for the exclusion, the exclusion requires that an interest held by a former (or current) director or employee must actually be held by that person (or by the banking entity) and must have been acquired while employed by or in the service of the banking entity. For example, if a former employee subsequently transfers his/her interest to a third party (other than to immediate family members of the employee or through intestacy of the employee), then the ownership interest would no longer be held by the banking entity or persons whose ownership interests may be aggregated with interests held by the banking entity forpurposes of the exclusion for whollyowned subsidiaries under the final rule.

The final rule also permits up to 0.5 percent of the ownership interest of a wholly-owned subsidiary to be held by a third party if the interest is held by the third party for the purpose of establishing corporate separateness or addressing bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar concerns, and the ownership interest is included when calculating the five percent cap on employee and director ownership. The Agencies understand that it is often important, or in certain circumstances required, under the laws of various jurisdictions for a parent company to establish corporate separation of a subsidiary through the

issuance of a small amount of ownership interest to a third party.

The Agencies believe that permitting limited employee and director ownership of a vehicle and accommodating the foreign law requirements discussed above is

consistent with a vehicle’s treatment as a wholly-owned subsidiary. Under the final rule, the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) will control the vehicle because it must, as principal, own at

least 95% of the vehicle. 1778 These conditions are designed to exclude from

the covered fund definition vehicles that are formed for corporate and organizational convenience, as
discussed above, and that thus do not engage in the investment activities prohibited by section 13. The exclusion also should reduce the disruption to the operations of banking entities that

commenters asserted would result from the proposed rule. 1779

Importantly, the Agencies note that a wholly-owned subsidiary of a banking entity—although excluded from the

definition of covered fund—still would itself be a banking entity, and therefore remain subject to the prohibitions and other provisions of section 13 of the

BHC Act and the final rule. 1780 Accordingly, a wholly-owned subsidiary of a banking entity would remain subject to the restrictions of section 13 and the final rule (including the ban on proprietary trading) and may not engage in activity in violation of the prohibitions of section 13 and the final

rule.

3. Joint Ventures

The proposed rule would have permitted a banking entity to invest in or manage a joint venture between the banking entity and any other person,


### 5953 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1781 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68913.

1782 See,, e.g., ABA (Keating); Chamber (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); Goldman (Covered Funds); NAIB
et al.; Rep Himes; Sen. Bennet; see also 156 Cong Rec. H5226 (daily ed. June 30, 2010) (statement of Rep. Himes).

1783 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); NAIB et al.; GE (Aug. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered
Funds); Credit Suisse (Williams); Goldman
(Covered Funds).

1784 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

1785 See Goldman (Covered Funds). 1786 See ABA (Keating); SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012).

1787 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Covered Funds); ABA (Keating);
Chamber (Feb. 2012).

1788 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Covered Funds); ABA (Keating);
GE (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012).

1789 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); Credit Suisse (Williams).

1790 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb. 2012).

1791 See Goldman (Covered Funds).

1792 See ABA (Keating); Credit Suisse (Williams);

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA

et al. (Mar. 2012); see also GE (Feb. 2012); NAIB

et al.

1793 See Goldman (Covered Funds). 1794 See final rule § 75.10(c)(3).

1795 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H). provided that the joint venture was an operating company and did not engage in any activity or any investment not permitted under the proposed rule. As noted in the proposal, many joint ventures rely on the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 1781 Joint

ventures are a common form of business, especially for firms seeking to

enter new lines of business or new markets, or seeking to share complementary business expertise.

Commenters supported this aspect of the proposal and argued that joint

ventures do not share the same characteristics as a hedge fund or private equity fund. However, they expressed concern that joint ventures were defined too narrowly under the proposal because the exclusion was limited to joint ventures that were operating companies. 1782 Some

commenters criticized the lack of guidance regarding the meaning of operating company. 1783 One commenter proposed defining operating company as any company engaged in activities that are permissible for a financial holding company under sections 3 or 4 of the BHC Act, other than a company engaged exclusively in investing in securities of other companies for resale or other disposition. 1784

Another commenter argued that joint

ventures are often used to share risk from non-performing loans, credit card
receivables, consumer loans,

commercial real estate loans or

automobile loans. 1785 According to this commenter, these joint ventures, while not generally viewed as operating companies, promote safety and soundness by allowing a banking entity to limit the size of its exposure to permissible investments or to more efficiently transfer the risk of existing assets to a small number of partners. Commenters stated that banking entitiesoften employ similar types of nonoperating company joint ventures to engage in merchant banking activities or other permissible banking activities, and that the final rule should not prevent a banking entity from sharing the risk of a portfolio company investment with third parties. 1786 A number of commenters argued that treating joint

ventures as covered funds would create

the same inconsistencies with other provisions and principles embodied inthe Dodd-Frank Act noted for whollyowned subsidiaries, were they to be

treated as covered funds. 1787 Several commenters argued that the proposed exemption, as drafted, was unworkable because it did not appear to provide an exception to the intercompany

limitations on transactions under section 13(f), which prohibits transactions between a banking entity

and a related covered fund. 1788

Commenters proposed several

alternatives to address these issues.

Several commenters recommended that the final rule eliminate the operating company condition under the proposed exemption. 1789 Other commenters recommended excluding joint ventures that have an unspecified but limited number of partners (such as five or fewer joint venture partners). 1790 One commenter recommended excluding all ‘‘controlled joint ventures’’ but did not provide an explanation of how to define

that term. 1791 Another commenter suggested defining a joint venture in one of the following ways: (1) Any company

with a limited number of co-venturers that is managed pursuant to a shareholders’ agreement, as opposed to managed by a general partner; 1792 or (2) a joint venture in which: (a) There are

a limited number of unaffiliated partners; (b) the parties operate the venture on a joint basis or in proportion to their relative ownership, including pursuant to a shareholders’ agreement; (c) material decisions are made by one party (for example, a general partner); and (d) the joint venture does not engage in any activity or investment not permitted under section 13, other than

activities or investments incidental to its permissible business. 1793

In response to commenter concerns, the final rule excludes joint ventures from the definition of covered fund with some modifications from the proposal to more clearly identify entities that are excluded. Under the final rule, a joint

venture is excluded from the definition of covered fund if the joint venture is between the banking entity or any of its

affiliates and no more than 10
unaffiliated co-venturers, is in the business of engaging in activities that are permissible for the banking entity other than investing in securities for resale or other disposition, and is not, and does not hold itself out as being, an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in

securities. 1794 Banking entities,
therefore, will continue to be able to share the risk and cost of financing their banking activities through these types of entities which, as noted by commenters as discussed above, may allow banking entities to more efficiently manage the risk of their operations.

The Agencies have specified a limit on the number of joint venture partners at the request of many commenters that suggested such a limit be added (though typically without suggesting the specific number of partners). The Agencies believe that a limit of 10 partners allows flexibility in structuring larger business ventures without involving such a large number of partners as to suggest the venture is in reality a hedge fund or private equity fund established for investment purposes. The Agencies will monitor joint ventures—and other excluded entities—to ensure that they are not used by banking entities to evade the provisions of section 13.

The final rule’s requirement that a joint venture not be an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in securities prevents a banking entity from relying on this exclusion to evade section 13 of the BHC Act by owning or sponsoring what is or will become a

covered fund. Consistent with this restriction and to prevent evasion of section 13, a banking entity may not use a joint venture to engage in merchant banking activities because that involves acquiring or retaining shares, assets, or ownership interests for the purpose of ultimate resale or disposition of the

investment. 1795

As with wholly-owned subsidiaries, if a banking entity owns 25 percent or more of the voting securities of the joint venture or otherwise controls an entity


### 5954 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1796 Cf. Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68897.

1797 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68913; SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

1798 See, e.g., JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); Sen. Bennet; Sen. Carper et al. 1799 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; GE (Feb. 2012).

1800 See final rule § 75.10(c)(4).

1801 The proposed rule contained an exemption for investments in acquisition vehicles, provided that the ‘‘the sole purpose and effect of such entity is to effectuate a transaction involving the acquisition or merger of one entity with or into the covered banking entity or one of its affiliates.’’ See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(2)(ii). The final rule excludes an acquisition vehicle, which is defined as an issuer that is ‘‘[f]ormed solely for the purpose of engaging in a bona fide merger or acquisition transaction’’ and that ‘‘exists only for such period as necessary to effectuate the transaction.’’ See final
rule § 75.10(c)(4). 1802 As explained above, commenters also argued that a foreign pension plan should not be considered a banking entity if the plan is sponsored by a banking entity or is established for the benefit of employees of the banking entity. If deemed a banking entity, the pension plan could become subject to the limits on section 13 on investing in

covered funds. See Allen & Overy (on behalf of
Canadian Banks); Arnold & Porter; Credit Suisse
(Williams). The final rule addresses these

comments with the exclusions described above.

1803 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (on behalf of
Canadian Banks).

1804 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Arnold & Porter; UBS; Hong Kong Inv.

Funds Ass’n.

1805 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Arnold & Porter; UBS; Hong Kong Inv.
Funds Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Williams).

1806 See Arnold & Porter; UBS; Hong Kong Inv.
Funds Ass’n.; Credit Suisse (Williams). that qualifies for the joint venture exclusion, the joint venture would then itself be a banking entity and would remain subject to the restrictions of section 13 and the final rule (including the ban on proprietary trading).

The Agencies note that the statute defines banking entity to include not only insured depository institutions and bank holding companies, but also their affiliates. In the context of a company that owns an insured depository institution but is not a bank holding company or savings and loan holding company, the insured depository institution’s affiliates may engage in commercial activities impermissible for banks and bank holding companies.
However, section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule do not authorize a banking entity to engage in otherwise impermissible activities. Because of this, the scope of activities in which a joint venture may engage under the final rule will depend on the status and identity of its co-venturers. For instance, a joint venture between a bank holding company and unaffiliated companies may not engage in commercial activities impermissible for a bank holding

company.

4. Acquisition Vehicles

Similar to wholly-owned subsidiaries and joint ventures, the proposed rule would have permitted a banking entity to invest in or sponsor an acquisition vehicle provided that the sole purpose and effect of the acquisition vehicle was to effectuate a transaction involving the acquisition or merger of an entity with or into the banking entity or one of its affiliates. As noted in the proposal, banking entities often form corporate vehicles for the purpose of accomplishing a corporate merger or asset acquisition. 1796 Because of the way they are structured, acquisition vehicles may rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 1797

Commenters supported the exclusion of acquisition vehicles from the restrictions governing covered funds, and argued that acquisition vehicles do

not share the same characteristics as a hedge fund or private equity fund. 1798 However, similar to concerns articulated above with respect to wholly-owned subsidiaries and joint ventures, commenters argued that the proposed
rule, as drafted, left uncertain how other provisions of section 13 would apply to

these vehicles. 1799

In light of the comments, the final

rule has been modified to exclude acquisition vehicles from the definition of covered fund, rather than provide a permitted activity exemption for banking entities to invest in or sponsor the vehicles, so long as the vehicle is formed solely for the purpose of engaging in a bona fide merger or acquisition transaction and the vehicle exists only for such period as necessary

to effectuate the transaction. 1800 The

final rule thus reflects modifications from the exemption for acquisition vehicles in the proposal, which was available for acquisition vehicles where the sole purpose and effect of the entity was to effectuate a transaction involving the acquisition or merger of one entity with or into the banking entity. 1801 The Agencies modified the conditions in the
final rule, as discussed above, to more clearly reflect the limited activities in which an excluded acquisition vehicle may engage and to exclude acquisition

vehicles from the definition of covered fund, rather than only permit banking entities to invest in or sponsor them pursuant to an exemption.

The Agencies also note that an acquisition vehicle that survives a transaction would likely be excluded

from the definition of covered fund under the separate exclusion for either joint ventures or wholly-owned

subsidiaries described above. An acquisition vehicle that is controlled by a banking entity would be a banking entity itself and would be subject to the

restrictions of section 13 and the final rule that apply to a banking entity.

5. Foreign Pension or Retirement Funds

Under the proposed rule, a foreign pension plan that relied on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act to avoid being an investment company (or that was a commodity pool), would have been a covered fund. Commenters argued that including pension funds within the

definition of covered fund would produce many unexpected results for pension plans as well as plan participants. 1802

Commenters generally argued that foreign pension or retirement funds are established by a foreign company or foreign sovereign for the purpose of providing a specific group of foreign persons with income during retirement or when they reach a certain age or meet certain predetermined criteria and are typically eligible for preferential tax
treatment, and are not formed for the same purposes as hedge funds or private equity funds. 1803 Commenters argued

that the definition of covered fund should not include certain foreign pension or retirement funds, including managed investment arrangements and wrap platforms, such as so-called ‘‘superannuation funds,’’ that are managed by foreign banks as part of providing retirement or pension schemes to foreign citizens pursuant to foreign law and are generally not

available for sale to U.S. citizens. Commenters asserted that many foreign banking entities act as sponsor to and organize and offer foreign pension funds abroad as part of a foreign sovereign program to provide retirement, pension,

or similar benefits to its citizens or

workforce. 1804 These commenters contended that a foreign pension plan might itself rely on the exclusion in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) in order to avoid being an investment company if it is offered to citizens of the foreign sovereign present in the United

States. 1805

Several commenters argued that foreign pension and retirement plans

should be excluded from the definition

of covered fund on the same basis as U.S. pension and retirement funds that are ERISA-qualified funds that rely on

the exclusion from the definition of investment company provided under section 3(c)(11) of the Investment Company Act. 1806 Commenters alleged that without an exclusion for foreign


### 5955 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1807 See final rule § 75.10(c)(5).

1808 Additionally and as discussed above, the prohibitions of section 13 and the final rule do not apply to an ownership interest that is acquired or retained by a banking entity through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity that is

established and administered in accordance with the law of the United States or a foreign sovereign, if the ownership interest is held or controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity as trustee for the benefit of persons who are or were employees of the banking entity. 1809 See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(1).

1810 See In re The Prudential Ins. Co. of Am., 41
S.E.C. 335, 345 (1963), aff’d, The Prudential Ins. Co.
of Am. v. SEC, 326 F.2d 383 (3d Cir.), cert. denied,
377 U.S. 953 (1964).

1811 See ACLI (Jan. 2012); Nationwide; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); see also

STANY. 1812 See ACLI (Jan. 2012); Nationwide; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); see also

STANY.

1813 See final rule § 75.10(c)(6). pension or retirement funds, section 13

of the BHC Act would have an extraterritorial effect on pension or

retirement benefits abroad that would be severe and beyond what was contemplated by section 13 of the BHC

Act.

In light of comments received on the proposal, the final rule excludes from the definition of covered fund a plan, fund, or program providing pension, retirement, or similar benefits that is: (i) Organized and administered outside of the United States; (ii) a broad-based plan for employees or citizens that is subject to regulation as a pension, retirement, or similar plan under the laws of the jurisdiction in which the plan, fund, or program is organized and administered; and (iii) established for

the benefit of citizens or residents of one or more foreign sovereign or any political subdivision thereof. 1807 This is similar to the treatment provided to U.S. pension funds by virtue of the exclusion

from the definition of investment company under the Investment Company Act for certain broad-based employee benefit plans provided by section 3(c)(11) of that Act. The

exclusion from the covered fund definition for foreign plans would be

available for bona fide plans established for the benefit of employees or citizens

outside the U.S. even if some of the

beneficiaries of the fund reside in the U.S. or subsequently become U.S.

residents.

The Agencies believe this exclusion is appropriate in order to facilitate parallel treatment of domestic and foreign pension and retirement funds to the extent possible and to assist in ensuring

that section 13 of the BHC Act does not apply to foreign pension, retirement, or similar benefits programs. 1808

6. Insurance Company Separate

Accounts

Under the proposed rule, insurance company separate accounts would have

been covered funds to the extent that the separate accounts relied on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). Such reliance would generally occur in circumstances where policies funded by the separate account are distributed in an unregistered securities offering solely to qualified purchasers or on a limited basis to

accredited investors. While the proposed rule did not generally exclude insurance company separate accounts from the definition of covered fund, the proposed rule did provide a limited exemption for investing in or acting as sponsor to separate accounts that were used for the purpose of allowing a banking entity to purchase bank owned life insurance (‘‘BOLI’’), subject to

certain restrictions. 1809

Various state or foreign laws allow regulated insurance companies to create separate accounts that are generally not separate legal entities but represent a segregated pool of assets on the balance sheet of the insurance company that support a specific policy claim on the insurance company. These accounts have assets and obligations that are separate from the general account of the insurance company. Insurance companies often utilize these separate accounts to allow policyholders of variable annuity and variable life insurance to allocate premium amounts for the purpose of engaging in various investment strategies that are tailored to the requirements of the individual policyholder. The policyholder, and not the insurance company, primarily

benefits from the results of investments in the separate account. These separate accounts are generally investment companies for purposes of the Investment Company Act, unless an

exclusion from that definition is applicable, 1810 and, as noted above, may rely on the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act.

While most commenters supported the proposal’s recognition that interests in BOLI separate accounts should be permitted, commenters generally argued that the final rule should also provide

a broader exclusion from the definition

of covered fund for all insurance

company separate accounts. Commenters argued that covering separate accounts could lead to unintended consequences and was inconsistent with the statutory recognition that the business of

insurance should continue to be

accommodated. 1811 These commenters argued that covering separate accounts

within the definition of covered fund would disrupt a substantial portion of customer-driven insurance or retirement planning activity and pose a burden on insurance companies and holders of insurance policies funded by separate accounts, a result commenters alleged Congress did not intend. 1812

In response to commenter concerns and in order to more appropriately

accommodate the business of insurance in a regulated insurance company, the

final rule excludes an insurance company separate account from the

definition of covered fund under certain circumstances. To prevent this exclusion from being used to evade the

restrictions on investments and sponsorship of covered funds by a banking entity, the final rule provides that no banking entity other than the insurance company that establishes the separate account may participate in the account’s profits and losses. 1813 In this manner, the final rule appropriately

accommodates the business of insurance by permitting an insurance company that is a banking entity to continue to provide its customers with a variety of insurance products through separate

account structures in accordance with applicable insurance laws while protecting against the use of separate accounts as a means by which banking entities might take a proprietary or

beneficial interest in an account that engages in prohibited proprietary trading and thereby evade the requirements of section 13 of the BHC

Act. The exclusion of insurance company separate accounts from the

definition of covered fund therefore is designed to reduce the potential burden of the final rule on insurance companies and holders of insurance policies funded by separate accounts while also continuing to prohibit banking entities from taking ownership interests in, and sponsoring or having certain relationships with, entities that engage in investment and trading activities prohibited by section 13.

7. Bank Owned Life Insurance Separate

Accounts

As explained above, bank owned life insurance (‘‘BOLI’’) is generally offered through a separate account held by an insurance company. In recognition of the fact that banking entities have for many years invested in life insurance policies that covered key employees, in accordance with supervisory policies established by the Federal banking agencies, the proposal contained a provision that would permit banking


### 5956 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1814 See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(1).

1815 See ACLI (Jan. 2012); Mass. Mutual; Jones of
Northwestern; AALU; BBVA; BoA; Chris Barnard; Clark Consulting (Feb. 7, 2012); Clark Consulting (Feb. 13, 2012); Gagnon of GW Financial.

1816 See Occupy.

1817 See final rule § 75.10(c)(7).

1818 This requirement is not intended to preclude a banking entity from purchasing a life insurance policy from an affiliated insurance company.

1819 See, e.g., Bank Owned Life Insurance, Interagency Statement on the Purchase and Risk Management of Life Insurance (Dec. 7, 2004). 1820 See proposed rule § 75.2(q).

1821 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public

Citizen.

1822 See Public Citizen. This commenter argued

that the loan definition should be limited to the plain meaning of the term ‘‘loan’’ and noted that a loan is not a security. Id.

1823 See Occupy (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5895 (daily ed. July 15, 2010)).

1824 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams);
GE (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Covered Funds); ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC; LSTA (Feb.
2012); RBC; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). One individual commenter supported the proposed definition of loan. See Alfred Brock. For example, one commenter requested that definition of ‘‘loan’’ be revised to include ‘‘(i) any loan, lease (including any lease residual), extension [of] credit, or secured or unsecured receivables, (ii) any note, bond or security collateralized and payable from pools of loans, leases (including Lease residuals), extensions
of credit or secured or unsecured receivables, and (iii) any contractual rights arising from, or security interests or liens, assets, property guarantees, insurance policies, letters of credit, or supporting obligations underlying or relating to any of the foregoing.’’ See RBC. Another commenter requested

that the definition of ‘‘loan’’ be revised to include ‘‘any type of credit extension (including bonds,other [banking entity-eligible] debt securities, assetbacked securities [as defined in their letter], variable funding notes and securities lending agreements, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar extensions of credit) that a banking entity could hold or deal

in.’’ See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1825 See JPMC.

1826 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); JPMC (arguing that such notes operate
in economic substance as loans); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1827 See ASF (Feb. 2012). This commenter asserted that a note purchase facility is negotiated by the asset-backed commercial paper conduit and allows the asset-backed commercial paper conduit to purchase asset-backed securities issued by an intermediate special purpose vehicle and backed by loans or asset-backed securities backed by loans. Id.

1828 See ASF (Feb. 2012).

1829 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams);
JPMC.

1830 See ASF (Feb. 2012). This commenter argued that certain municipal securities may be ABS, including revenue bonds that involve the issuance

of senior and subordinate bonds. Id.

1831 See Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1832 See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). This

commenter contended that because securitization transactions have been viewed by the Agencies and courts as ‘legally transparent’ (i.e., as simply another way for banking entities to buy and sell the loans or other assets underlying such securities), auto lease securitizations supported by a beneficial interest in a titling trust should be treated as securitizations of the underlying auto leases and

should fall within the loan securitization exemption. This commenter also argued that if the definition of ‘‘loan’’ is not expanded to include securities, then banking entities could not act as sponsors for auto lease securitizations (including resecuritizations) supported by a beneficial interest in a titling trust.

1833 See Credit Suisse (Williams); Goldman
(Covered Funds); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). entities to invest in and sponsor BOLI

separate accounts. 1814

Many commenters supported the exemption in the proposal for BOLI separate accounts, arguing that permitting this kind of activity was appropriate and consistent with safety

and soundness as well as financial stability. 1815 Conversely, one commenter objected to the proposed rule’s exemption for investments in BOLI separate accounts, contending that such an exemption did not promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities or the financial stability

of the United States. 1816

After considering comments received on the proposal, the final rule excludes BOLI separate accounts from the

definition of covered fund but maintains

the substance of the conditions from the proposal designed to ensure that BOLI

investments are not conducted in a

manner that raises the concerns that section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address. In particular, in order for a separate account to qualify for the BOLI

exclusion from the definition of covered fund, the final rule requires that the separate account be used solely for the purpose of allowing one or more banking entities (which by definition includes their affiliates) to purchase a life insurance policy for which such banking entity(ies) is a beneficiary. 1817 Additionally, if the banking entity is relying on this exclusion, the banking entity that purchases the insurance policy (i) must not control the investment decisions regarding the underlying assets or holdings of the

separate account, 1818 and (ii) must participate in the profits and losses of the separate account in compliance with applicable supervisory guidance regarding BOLI. 1819

When made in the normal course, investments by banking entities in BOLI separate accounts do not involve the types of speculative risks section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address. Rather, these accounts permit the banking entity to effectively hedge and cover costs of providing benefits to employees through insurance policies related to key employees. Moreover, applying the prohibitions of section 13 to investments in these accounts would eliminate an investment that helps banking entities to efficiently reduce their costs of providing employee benefits, and therefore potentially introduce a burden to banking entities that would not further the statutory purpose of section 13. The Agencies expect this exclusion to be used by banking entities in a manner consistent with safety and soundness.

8. Exclusion for Loan Securitizations

and Definition of Loan

a. Definition of Loan

The proposal defined the term ‘‘loan’’ for purposes of the restrictions on proprietary trading and the covered funds provisions and, as discussed in more detail below, provided an exemption for loan securitizations in two separate sections of the proposed rule. As proposed, loan was defined as ‘‘any loan, lease, extension of credit, or

secured or unsecured receivable.’’ 1820 The definition of loan in the proposed rule was expansive, and included a broad array of loans and similar credit transactions, but did not include any asset-backed security issued in

connection with a loan securitization or otherwise backed by loans.

Some commenters requested that the Agencies narrow the proposed

definition of ‘‘loan.’’ 1821 One of these

commenters was concerned that the proposed definition could apply to any banking activity and argued that the definition of loan for purposes of the

final rule should not include

securities. 1822 Another commenter, citing a statement made by Senator Merkley, asserted that Congress did not

intend the rule of construction for the

sale and securitization of loans in section 13(g)(2) to include ‘‘loans that

become financial instruments traded to capture the change in their market

value.’’ 1823

Other commenters requested that the Agencies expand the proposed definition of ‘‘loan’’ to capture many

traditional extensions of credit that the proposal would otherwise exclude. 1824 Examples of traditional credit extensions that commenters requested be specifically included within the

definition of ‘‘loan’’ included loan participations, 1825 variable funding
notes or certificates, 1826 note purchase
facilities, 1827 certain forms of revolving
credit lines, 1828 corporate bonds, 1829 municipal securities, 1830 securities lending agreements and reverse repurchase agreements, 1831 auto lease

securitizations, 1832 and any other type of credit extension that banking entities traditionally have been permitted to issue under their lending authority. 1833

The definition of ‘‘loan’’ in the final rule applies both in the context of the


### 5957 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1834 See final rule § 75.2(s).

1835 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(4).

1836 See 15 U.S.C. 77b(a)(1) and 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(10); Reves v. Ernst & Young, 494 U.S. 56 (1990) ; Trust Company of Louisiana v. N.N.P. Inc.,
104 F.3d 1478 (5th Cir. 1997); Pollack v. Laidlaw Holdings, 27 F.3d 808 (2d Cir. 1994); but see Marine Bank v. Weaver, 455 U.S. 551 (1982); Banco Espanol de Credito v. Security Pacific National Bank, 973 F.2d 51 (2d Cir. 1992); Bass v. Janney Montgomery Scott, Inc., 210 F.3d 577 (6th Cir.
2000); Piaubert v. Sefrioui, 2000 WL 194140 (9th
Cir. 2000). 1837 Id.

1838 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(2).

1839 See proposed rule § 75.13(d); Joint Proposal,

76 FR at 68912. 1840 Id.

1841 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68931.

1842 See, e.g., Public Citizen. This commenter argued that any exemption should prevent evasion, should ensure that each exempted securitization reduces risk and should be designed to only serve

client needs. A different commenter recommendeda safe harbor available only to a particular prespecified, transparent and standardized securitization structure, where Agencies would need to justify why the specified structure protects

Continued proprietary trading restrictions as well as in determining the scope of the

exclusion of loan securitizations and asset-backed commercial paper conduits

from the definition of covered fund. The final rule modifies the proposed definition and defines ‘‘loan’’ as ‘‘any
loan, lease, extension of credit, or

secured or unsecured receivable that is not a security or derivative.’’ 1834 The

definition of loan in the final rule specifically excludes loans that are securities or derivatives because trading in these instruments is expressly

included in the statute’s definition of proprietary trading. 1835 In addition, the Agencies believe these instruments, if

not excluded from the definition of
loan, could be used to circumvent the restrictions on proprietary trading.

The definition of loan in the final rule

excludes loans that are securities or derivatives, including securities or

derivatives of or based on such

instruments. The definition of ‘‘loan’’ does not specify the type, nature or

structure of loans included within the definition, other than by excluding
securities and derivatives. In addition,

the definition of loan does not limit the scope of parties that may be lenders or borrowers for purposes of the definition. The Agencies note that the parties’

characterization of an instrument as a loan is not dispositive of its treatment

under the Federal securities laws or Federal laws applicable to derivatives.

The determination of whether a loan is a security or a derivative for purposes of

the loan definition is based on the

Federal securities laws and the Commodity Exchange Act. Whether a

loan is a ‘‘note’’ or ‘‘evidence of indebtedness’’ and therefore a security

under the Federal securities laws will depend on the particular facts and circumstances, including the economic

terms of the loan. 1836 For example, loans that are structured to provide payments or returns based on, or tied to, the performance of an asset, index or commodity or provide synthetic exposure to the credit of an underlying borrower or an underlying security or index may be securities or derivatives depending on their terms and the
circumstances of their creation, use, and distribution. 1837 Regardless of whether a party characterizes the instrument as a
loan, these kinds of instruments, which may be called ‘‘structured loans,’’ must

be evaluated based on the standards associated with evaluating derivatives and securities in order to prevent

evasion of the restrictions on proprietary trading and ownership

interests in covered funds.

b. Loan Securitizations

An exemption for loan securitizations was contained in two separate sections of the proposed rule. The first, in section 75.13(a), was proposed as part of ‘‘other permitted covered fund activities
and investments.’’ The second, in § 75.14(d), was proposed as part of

‘‘covered fund activities determined to be permissible.’’ These proposed provisions would have acted in concert to permit a banking entity to acquire and retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, a loan securitization regardless of the relationship that the banking entity had with the securitization. The Agencies have

evaluated all comments received on

securitizations. These sections of the proposed rule were intended to implement the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act which provides that nothing in

section 13 of the BHC Act shall be construed to limit or restrict the ability of a banking entity or nonbank financial company supervised by the Board to sell

or securitize loans in a manner that is otherwise permitted by law. 1838 The language of the proposed exemption for

loan securitizations would have permitted a banking entity to acquire and retain an ownership interest in a

covered fund that is an issuer of assetbacked securities, the assets or holdings of which were solely comprised of: (i) Loans (as defined); (ii) rights or assets directly arising from those loans supporting the asset-backed securities; and (iii) interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that (A) materially relate to the terms of such loans or rights or assets and (B) are used for hedging purposes with respect to the

securitization structure. 1839 The proposed rule in § 75.13(d) was further augmented by the proposed rule in § 75.14(a)(2) so that a banking entity would be permitted to purchase loan securitizations and engage in the sale

and securitization of loans. This was accomplished through the authorization in proposed section 75.14(a)(2) of a banking entity’s acquisition or retention of an ownership interest in such securitization vehicles that the banking entity did not organize and offer, or for which it did not act as sponsor, provided that the assets or holdings of such vehicles were solely comprised of the instruments or obligations identified in the proposed exemption.

The proposed rules would have allowed a banking entity to engage in the sale and securitization of loans by acquiring and retaining an ownership

interest in certain securitization vehicles (which could be a covered fund for purposes of the proposed rules) that the banking entity organized and offered, or acted as sponsor to, without being subject to the ownership and sponsor limitations contained in the proposed rule. 1840 As noted in the proposing release, the Agencies recognized that by defining ‘‘covered fund’’ broadly, and, in particular, by reference to sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, securitization vehicles may be affected by the restrictions and requirements of the proposed rule. The Agencies attempted to mitigate the potential adverse impact on the securitization market by excluding loan securitizations from the restrictions on sponsoring or acquiring and retaining ownership
interests in covered funds, consistent

with the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act. 1841 As a result, under the proposal, loan

securitizations would not be limited or restricted because banking entities

would be able to find investors or buyers for their loans or loan securitizations. The proposing release included several requests for comment on the proposed loan securitization exemption and the application of the covered fund prohibitions to

securitizations.

Some commenters supported a narrow exemption for loan

securitizations and in some cases suggested that the proposed exemption

could be narrowed even further. For example, one commenter argued that the definition of ‘‘loan’’ for purposes of the exemption could include any extension of credit and any banking activity. 1842 Also, in response to the


### 5958 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

against the systemic risks associated with

securitization. See AFR (Nov. 2012).

1843 See Request for Comment No. 231 in the Proposing Release (noting that many issuers of

asset-backed securities have features and structures that resemble some of the features of hedge funds and private equity funds (e.g., CDOs are managed by an investment adviser that has the discretion to choose investments, including investments in securities) and requesting comment on how to prevent hedge funds or private equity funds from structuring around an exemption for asset-backed securities from the covered fund prohibitions).

1844 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy;

Public Citizen. But see Credit Suisse (Williams) (arguing it would be difficult to use the typical structure and operation of securitizations to avoid the prohibition on proprietary trading because the structures are not set up to engage in the kind of proprietary trading about which Congress was
concerned).

1845 See AFME et al. ; Ass’n. of German Banks; Cleary Glottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb.
2012); IIB/EBF; RBC; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb.
2012).

1846 See, e.g., Credit Suisse (Williams).

1847 See Credit Suisse (Williams); JPMC. These commenters cited the sponsoring of asset-backed commercial paper conduits as an example of permissible bank securitization activity.

1848 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Credit Suisse (Williams); JPMC. 1849 See GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); ICI (Feb.
2012).

1850 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams) (including cash that did not arise directly from the underlying loans); JPMC; LSTA (Feb. 2012); LSTA (July 2012); RBC; SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1851 See Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams).

1852 See JPMC (requesting high quality, highly liquid investments, including Treasury securities and highly rated commercial paper); LSTA (Feb. 2012); LSTA (July 2012) (requesting short-term highly liquid investments such as obligations backed by the full faith and credit of the United States, deposits insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, various obligations of U.S. financial institutions and investments in money
market funds); ASF (Feb. 2012); Commercial Real Estate Fin. Council; RBC (requesting short-term, high quality investments); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group) (requesting short-term eligible investments); Credit Suisse (Williams) (requesting government guaranteed securities, money market funds and other highly credit-worthy and liquid investments); Cleary Gottlieb (requesting money-market interests; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012) (requesting associated investments which are customarily employed in securitization
transactions). One commenter further noted that such investments are required by securitization

documents. See Commercial Real Estate Fin.

Council.

1853 RBC. This commenter argued that the loan securitization exemptions as proposed would not permit ‘‘traditional securitizations and

securitizations with the characteristics of traditional securitizations’’ and ‘‘would effectively eliminate a substantial portion of the very securitization activities carried on by banks that the [loan securitization exemptions] are designed to
preserve.’’

1854 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb. 2012); JPMC; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb.
2012). 1855 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; LSTA (Feb. 2012). LSTA (Feb. 2012) specifically requested that entities issuing collateralized loan obligations that are primarily backed by loans or loan participations also be permitted to hold a limited amount of corporate credit obligations. This commenter provided recommendations about such limitations—if the amount of such corporate credit obligations exceeded 10 percent, a CLO would not be able to purchase any assets other than senior, secured syndicated loans and temporary
investments (as defined in the letter). If the amount of such assets exceeded 30 percent, the entity should not be able to purchase any assets other than

loans.

1856 See AFME et al. ; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Credit Suisse (Williams); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; LSTA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1857 See ASF (Feb. 2012). Permissible synthetic exposure would include ‘‘credit default swaps, total return swaps or other agreements referencing corporate loans or corporate bonds pursuant to which the issuer is the seller of credit protection or otherwise ‘long’ the credit exposure of the reference corporate loan or bond, and receives a yield derived from the yield on the reference corporate loan or

bond.’’

1858 See AFME et al. ; ASF (July 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); Capital Group; Goldman (Covered Funds);
LSTA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012). proposing release, 1843 some commenters suggested that any exemption for securitizations should seek to prevent evasion of the covered fund prohibitions by issuers with ‘‘hedge-fund or private equity fund-like characteristics’’ or issuers with ‘‘hidden proprietary trading operations.’’ 1844

On the other hand, many commenters believed that the proposed exemption from the covered fund prohibitions for loan securitizations should be expanded to cover securitizations generally and not just loan securitizations. These commenters provided various arguments for their request to exempt all

securitizations from the covered fund prohibitions, including that the regulation of securitizations was

addressed in other areas of the DoddFrank Act, 1845 that securitization is essentially a lending activity, 1846 and that securitizations have ‘‘long been recognized as permissible activities for banking entities.’’ 1847

Commenters recommending a broader

exclusion for securitizations also provided a wide variety of specific suggestions or concerns. Some commenters suggested that permissible

assets for a loan securitization include assets other than loans acquired in the course of collecting a debt previously contracted, restructuring a loan, during a loan work out or during the disposition of a loan or other similar

situation. 1848 Commenters noted that, for example, rules 2a–7 and 3a–7 under the Investment Company Act define eligible assets for a securitization as not only including financial assets but also ‘‘any rights or other assets designed to assure the servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to security

holders.’’ 1849 Commenters requested that various additional rights or assets be added to the list of permissible assets held by a loan securitization such as
cash and cash accounts, 1850 cash equivalents, 1851 and various other high quality short term investments, liquidity agreements or credit enhancements, certain beneficial interests in titling

trusts used in lease securitizations or

lease residuals. 1852 One commenter suggested that a loan securitization be permitted to include ‘‘any contractual rights arising from or supporting obligations underlying or relating to the

loans.’’ 1853

Others requested that loan securitizations also be permitted to hold repurchase agreements or unlimited
amounts of various forms of securities,including municipal securities, assetbacked securities, credit-linked notes,trust certificates and ‘‘equity likerights.’’ 1854 Some commenters requested that loan securitizations be permitted to hold a limited amount of certain rights such as securities. 1855 Commenters also had suggestions about the types of derivatives that an exempted securitization vehicle be permitted to hold. 1856 For example, one industry association requested that the loan securitization exemption include securitizations where up to 10 percent

of the assets are held in the form of synthetic risk exposure that references

‘‘loans that could otherwise be held directly’’ under the proposal in order to

achieve risk diversification. 1857 This

commenter stated its belief that the rule of construction requires that synthetic exposures be permitted because they are used in certain types of loan

securitizations.

In addition to requests that specific types of underlying assets be permitted

under the loan securitization exemption, the Agencies also received comments about specific types of asset

classes or structures. Some commenters suggested certain asset classes or

structures should be an excluded

securitization from the covered fund prohibitions including insurance-linked
securities, collateralized loanobligations, tender option bonds, assetbacked commercial paper conduits (ABCP conduits), resecuritizations of asset-backed securities, and corporate debt re-packagings. 1858 In some cases, commenters believed that the Agencies should use their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act to exempt these types of vehicles. Some

commenters identified other vehicles

such as credit funds and issuers of covered bonds that they believed should

be excluded from the covered fund


### 5959 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1859 See Goldman (Covered Funds) (requesting
exclusion for credit funds). AFME et al. (requesting exclusion for covered bonds); FSA (Apr. 2012) (requesting exclusion for covered bonds); UKRCBC (requesting exclusion for covered bonds).

1860 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). These commenters argued that there should be increased capital charges in line with the complexity of a securitization and using the ‘‘high risk asset limitations on permitted activities to bar any securitization by a bank from using complex structures, re-securitization techniques, synthetic features, or other elements that may increase risk or make a risk analysis less reliable.’’

1861 See AFME et al. ; SIFMA (May 2012) (arguing that because of the narrowness of the proposed exemption and because it would not exempt securitizations from prohibitions on covered transactions imposed by section 13(f), the rule as proposed ‘‘will effectively prevent banking entitiesfrom sponsoring and owning a large variety of assetbacked securities, in contravention of the rule of
construction.’’)

1862 See AFME et al. ; ASF (Feb. 2012); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012). 1863 See Occupy; Public Citizen. Occupy contended that the structured security issued in a multi-step securitization can hide underlying risks under layers of structured complexity. See Occupy. Public Citizen argued that prohibiting such activity

would ensure that securitizations do not become proprietary trading vehicles for banking entities that are effectively off-balance sheet. See Public Citizen. See infra Part VI.B.1.c.8.b.iv. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

.

1864 A depositor, as used in a securitization structure, is an entity that generally acts only as a conduit to transfer the loans from the originating bank to the issuing entity for the purpose of facilitating a securitization transaction and engages in no discretionary investment or securities

issuance activities. See ASF (July 2012); GE (Aug. 2012). For purposes of this rule, the Agencies believe the wholly owned subsidiary exclusion is available for depositors. See supra note 1779.

1865 15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(79). This definition was added by Section 941 of the Dodd-Frank Act. 1866 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8). Consistent with the proposal, certain securitizations, regardless of asset composition, would not be considered

covered funds because the securitization issuer is deemed not to be an investment company under Investment Company Act exclusions other than section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. For example, this would include issuers that meet the requirements of section 3(c)(5) or rule 3a–7 of the Investment Company Act, and the assetbacked securities of such issuers may be offered in transactions registered under the Securities Act.

1867 As discussed below, the Agencies are adopting an exclusion from the definition of covered funds for the pools of assets that are involved in the covered bond financings. Although the cover pools must satisfy the same criteria as the excluded loan securitizations, a separate exclusion

is needed because the securities involved in the

covered bond issuance are not asset-backed

securities.

1868 See, e.g., Credit Suisse (Williams). prohibitions. 1859 On the other hand, the Agencies also received comment letters that argued that certain securitizations should not be exempted from the covered fund prohibitions, including resecuritizations, CDO-squared, and

CDO-cubed securitizations because of concern about their complexity and lack of reliable performance data or ability to

value those securities. 1860

Because a loan securitization could
still be a covered fund, several commenters expressed concern that the proposed loan securitization exemption, as drafted, did not exempt loan securitizations from the prohibitions of section 13(f) of the BHC Act. As a result, one commenter noted that the proposed loan securitization exemptions would

not have their intended result of excluding loan securitizations from the BHC Act restrictions applicable to

covered funds. 1861

Certain securitization transactions may involve the issuance of an intermediate asset-backed security that supports the asset-backed securities that
are issued to investors, such as in auto

lease securitizations and ABCP conduits. Commenters suggested that the Agencies should look through

intermediate securitizations to the assetsthat support the intermediate assetbacked security to determine if those assets would satisfy the definition of ‘‘loan’’ for purposes of the loan securitization exemption. If those assets are loans, these commenters suggested

that the entire securitization transaction
should be deemed a loan securitization,even if the assets supporting the assetbacked securities issued to investors are

not loans. 1862 However, some commenters argued that each step in a multi-step securitization should be viewed separately to ensure compliance with the specific restrictions in the proposal because otherwise a multi-step

securitization could include impermissible assets. 1863 Some commenters also raised question about whether depositors would fall within the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ under the Investment Company Act and, therefore, may fall within the proposed

definition of covered fund. 1864

After considering carefully the

comments received on sections of the proposed rule, the Agencies have determined to adopt a single section in the final provision relating to loan

securitizations that would exclude loan

securitizations that meet certain criteria

contained in the rule from the definition of covered fund. The rule, as adopted,

takes into account comments received on each of the conditions specified in

the two loan securitization sections of the proposed provisions and has adopted those conditions with some clarifying changes from the proposed language. In addition, in response to comments, as discussed more fully below, the Agencies are adopting

additional exclusions from the

definition of covered fund for certain types of vehicles if they are backed by the same types of assets as the assets that are permitted to be held in the loan

securitization exclusion. These

additional exclusions are tailored to vehicles that are very similar to loan securitizations but have particular
structural issues, which are described in

more detail below.

In light of the comments received on the proposal, the final rule was revised

to exclude from the definition ofcovered fund an issuing entity of assetbacked securities, as defined in Section 3(a)(79) of the Exchange Act, 1865 if the underlying assets or holdings are comprised solely of: (A) loans, (B) any rights or other assets (i) designed to assure the servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to security holders or (ii) related or incidental to purchasing or otherwise acquiring, and holding the loans, (C) certain interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives, and (D) certain special units of beneficial

interests and collateral certificates (together, ‘‘loan securitizations’’). 1866 In addition, as discussed below, the Agencies are adopting specific

exclusions for certain vehicles that issue

short term asset-backed securities and for pools of assets that are part of covered bond transactions which pools

also meet the conditions delineated

above. 1867

Although commenters argued that various types of assets should be

included within the definition of loan or otherwise permitted to be held under
the loan securitization exclusion, the

loan securitization exclusion in the final rule has not been expanded to be a

broad exclusion for all securitization vehicles. Although one commenter suggested that any securitization is essentially a lending activity, 1868 the Agencies believe such an expansion of

the exclusion would not be consistent

with the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, which specifically refers to the ‘‘sale and securitization of loans.’’ The Agencies

believe that a broad definition of loan and therefore a broad exemption for

transactions that are structured as securitizations of pooled financial assets

could undermine the restrictions Congress intended to impose on banking
entities’ covered fund activities, which could enable market participants to use securitization structures to engage in

activities that otherwise are constrained for covered funds. The Agencies believe the purpose underlying section 13 is not to expand the scope of assets in an excluded loan securitization beyond

loans as defined in the final rule and the other assets that the Agencies are specifically permitting in a loan

securitization.


### 5960 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1869 Commenters’ concerns regarding credit funds

are discussed below in Part VI.B.1.d.6. of this

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

. 1870 As discussed below, the Agencies are excluding those loan securitizations that hold only
loans (and certain other assets identified in the final
rule), consistent with the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act.

1871 The Agencies note that the loan securitization and other securitization exclusions apply only to
the definition of covered fund, and therefore the covered fund-related provisions of the rule, and not to its prohibition on proprietary trading. The Agencies recognize that trading in loans is not subject to the proprietary trading restrictions. 1872 See proposed rule § 75.2(q).

1873 See Occupy (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5895 (daily ed. July 15, 2010)).

1874 See § 75.2(r).

1875 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(4).

1876 Under the final provision, the issuing entity for the SUBIs and collateral certificate may rely on

the loan securitization exclusion because of the separate provisions allowing such a holding. While not expanding the permitted

assets under the loan securitization exclusion, the Agencies have made modifications in response to

commenters to ensure that the provisions of the final rule appropriately accommodate the need, in administering a loan securitization transaction on an ongoing basis, to hold

various assets other than the loans that support the asset-backed securities. Moreover, the Agencies do not believe that the assets permitted under the loan

securitization need to be narrowed further to prevent evasion and hidden proprietary trading as requested by

certain commenters because the Agencies believe that the potential for evasion has been adequately addressed through modifications to the definition of loan and more specific limitations on the types of securities and derivatives permitted in an excluded loan securitization. The Agencies have revised the scope of the loan

securitization exclusion to accommodate existing market practice for securitizations as discussed by commenters while limiting the availability of the exclusion for these particular types of securitization

transactions to issuers of asset-backed securities supported by loans.

The Agencies are not adopting specific exclusions for other securitization vehicles identified by commenters, including insurance-linked
securities, collateralized loanobligations, and corporate debt repackagings. 1869 The Agencies believe that providing such exclusions would

not be consistent with the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, which specifically refers to

the ‘‘sale and securitization of loans.’’ These other types of securitization vehicles referenced by commenters are used to securitize exposures to

instruments which are not included in the definition of loan as adopted by the final rule. Moreover, the Agencies note in response to commenters that

resecuritizations of asset-backedsecurities and CDO-squared and CDOcubed securitizations could be used as a means of evading the prohibition on the investment in the ownership

interests of covered funds.

As with the proposed rules, the Agencies are excluding certain loan

securitizations from the definition of

covered fund and therefore the prohibitions applicable to banking

entities’ involvement in covered funds in order to implement Congressional intent expressed in the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the

BHC Act. 1870 The Agencies believe that,
as reflected in the rule of construction, the continued ability of banking entities to participate in loan securitizations is important to enable banks of all sizes to be able to continue to provide financing to loan borrowers at competitive prices. Loan securitizations provide an important avenue for banking entities to obtain investor financing for existing loans, which allows such banks greater capacity to continuously provide financing and lending to their customers. The Agencies also believe

that loan securitizations that meet the conditions of the rule as adopted do not raise the same types of concerns as other types of securitization vehicles that

could be used to circumvent the restrictions on proprietary trading and prohibitions in section 13(f) of the BHC

Act.

Under the rule as adopted, loan

securitizations that meet the conditions of the rule as adopted are excluded from
the definition of covered fund and, consequently, banking entities are not restricted as to their ownership of such entities or their ongoing relationships with such entities by the final rule. As the Agencies stated in the proposal, permitting banking entities to acquire or retain an ownership interest in these

loan securitizations will allow for a deeper and richer pool of potential participants and a more liquid market
for the sale of such securitizations,

which in turn should result in the continued availability of funding to
individuals and small businesses, as well as provide an efficient allocation of capital and sharing of risk. The Agencies believe that excluding these

loan securitizations from the definition

of covered fund is consistent with the terms and the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act, including the rule of construction regarding loan

securitizations. 1871

i. Loans

The first condition of the loan

securitization exclusion from the

definition of covered fund is that the underlying assets or holdings are comprised of loans. In the proposal, ‘‘loan’’ was a defined term for purposes of the restrictions on proprietary trading and the covered funds provisions. As proposed, a loan was defined as a loan,
lease, extension of credit, or secured or

unsecured receivable. 1872 The definition of loan in the proposed rule was expansive, and included a broad array
of loans and similar credit transactions, but did not include any asset-backed security that is issued in connection

with a loan securitization or otherwise backed by loans.

As discussed above under ‘‘Definition of Loan,’’ the Agencies received comments regarding the loan definition

in the securitization context. In particular, one commenter, citing a statement made by Senator Merkley, argued that Congress did not intend the loan securitization exemption to include

‘‘loans that become financial instruments traded to capture the change in their market value.’’ 1873

The Agencies, after considering carefully the comments received, have adopted a definition of loan that is revised from the proposed definition. The final rule defines ‘‘loan’’ as ‘‘any
loan, lease, extension of credit, or

secured or unsecured receivable that is not a security or derivative.’’ 1874 The

definition of loan in the final rule specifically excludes loans that are securities or derivatives because trading in these instruments is expressly

included in the statute’s definition of proprietary trading. 1875 In addition, the Agencies believe these instruments, if

not excluded from the definition of
loan, could be used to circumvent the restrictions on proprietary trading. Further, for purposes of the loan
securitization exclusion, the loan

securitization must own the loan directly; a synthetic exposure to a loan, such as through holding a derivative, such as a credit default swap, will not satisfy the conditions for the loan

securitization exclusion. 1876 As such, a

securitization that owns a tranche of

another loan securitization is not itself
a loan securitization, even if the ownership of such tranche by a banking entity would otherwise be permissible

under the final rule.

As discussed above under ‘‘Definition
of Loan,’’ the definition of loan in the final rule has not been expanded as requested by some commenters but has


### 5961 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1877 The determination of whether an instrument

falls outside the definition of loan because it is a security or a derivative is based on the Federal securities laws and the Commodity Exchange Act.
Whether a loan, lease, extension of credit, or

secured or unsecured receivable is a note or

evidence of indebtedness that is defined as a security under the Federal securities laws will depend on the particular facts and circumstances, including the economic terms of the transaction. See supra note 1836 and accompanying text.

1878 See proposed rule § 75.13(d).

1879 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); AFME et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary
Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); Commercial Real Estate Fin. Council; GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012);
ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; JPMC;
LSTA (Feb. 2012); LSTA (July 2012); RBC; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Vanguard.

1880 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank
Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Credit

Suisse (Williams).

1881 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank
Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Credit

Suisse (Williams); Commercial Real Estate Fin.
Council; JPMC; LSTA (Feb. 2012); LSTA (July

2012); RBC; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).
Commenters requested inclusion of the following
examples of cash equivalents: government
guaranteed securities, money market funds, and
‘‘other highly credit-worthy and liquid
investments’’ (Credit Suisse (Williams)); and high
quality, highly liquid investments, including
Treasury securities and highly rated commercial
paper (JPMC). In addition, LSTA (Feb. 2012)
requested inclusion of the following: (i) short-term
highly liquid investments; (ii) direct obligations of,
and obligations fully guaranteed as to full and
timely payment by, the United States (or by any
agency thereof to the extent such obligations are
backed by the full faith and credit of the United
States); (iii) demand deposits, time deposits or
certificates of deposit that are fully insured by the
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation; (iv)
corporate, non-extendable commercial paper; (v)
notes that are payable on demand or bankers’
acceptances issued by regulated U.S. financial
institutions; (vi) investments in money market
funds or other regulated investment companies;
time deposits having maturities of not more than 90
days; (vii) repurchase obligations with respect to
direct obligations and guaranteed obligations of the
U.S. entered into with a regulated U.S. financial

institution; and (viii) other investments with a
maturity one year or less, with the requirement that

each of the investments listed have, at the time of

the securitization’s investment or contractual
commitment to invest therein, a rating of the
highest required investment category.

1882 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank
Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); JPMC;

RBC; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1883 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank
Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); JPMC;

RBC; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). For
example, SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012)
requested inclusion of third party credit
enhancements such as guarantees and letters of
credit. Commenters requested inclusion of the
following examples of credit enhancements: (i)
external credit support of borrower obligations
under such loans, including a credit support
facilities, third party or parent guarantee, insurance
policy, letter of credit or other contractual
commitment to make payments or perform other
obligations of the borrower under the loans (ASF
(Feb. 2012)); and (ii) property guarantees, insurance
policies, letters of credit, or supporting obligations
underlying or relating to any of the loans (RBC). 1884 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); AFME et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); ICI (Feb. 2012); JPMC; RBC; SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). Commenters requested inclusion of the following examples of asset-backed securities: (i) SUBI certificates (beneficial interests in titling trusts typically used in lease securitizations) (AFME
et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012)); (ii) ownership interests and bonds issued by CLOs (JPMC); a broad array of receivables that support asset-backed commercial paper (ICI (Feb. 2012)); certain notes, certificates or other instruments backed by loans or financial assets that are negotiated by the purchasing asset-backed commercial paper conduit (ASF (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012)); municipal securities that are technically ABS, including

revenue bonds that involve the issuance of senior
and subordinate bonds (ASF (Feb. 2012)); ownership interests in credit funds (as defined in
their letter) (SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012)); any note, bond or security collateralized and payable from pools of loans, leases (including lease
residuals), extensions of credit or secured or
unsecured receivables (RBC); asset-backed securities issued by intermediate vehicles in a securitization collateralized predominantly by loans
and financial assets, and other similar instruments
(Credit Suisse (Williams)); and asset-backed securities backed by loans or receivables that are originated by or owned by the sponsor of such securitization or which are issued by an entity that is organized under the direction of the same sponsor as the issuer of the covered fund (ASF (Feb.
2012)).

1885 See ICI (Feb. 2012); Vanguard.

1886 See Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1887 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1888 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

1889 See ASF (Feb. 2012); GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); RBC.

1890 See GE (Aug. 2012).

1891 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Credit Suisse (Williams); Japanese Bankers
Ass’n.; LSTA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). Commenters requested inclusion of the following examples of derivatives: (i) credit derivatives (without explanation) as a means of diversifying the portfolio (Japanese Bankers Association); (ii) synthetic securities that reference corporate credits or other debt (Credit Suisse
(Covered Fund)); (iii) credit instruments or other obligations that the banking entity could originate or invest or deal in directly, including tranched or untranched credit linked notes exposed to the credit risk of such reference assets through a credit default swap or other credit derivative entered into by the related ABS Issuer (SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012)); (iv) any derivatives structured as part of the securitization of loans (without explanation) (Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group)); (v) hedge agreements (Credit Suisse (Williams)); and (vi) any derivative, including a credit default swap, as and to the extent a banking entity could use such derivative in managing its own investment portfolio (SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012)). been clarified in some respects in response to comments. The final rule explicitly excludes securities or

derivatives. 1877 In addition, the

definition of loan has not been modified to include repurchase agreements or reverse repurchase agreements regardless of the character of the underlying asset. The Agencies are concerned that parties, under the guise of a ‘‘loan’’ might instead create instruments that provide the same exposures to securities and derivatives that otherwise are prohibited by section 13 and might attempt to use the loan securitization exclusion to acquire ownership interests in covered funds holding those types of instruments, counter to the terms and the purpose of

section 13 of the BHC Act. As the Agencies have noted previously, the rules relating to covered funds and to proprietary trading are not intended to interfere with traditional lending practices or with securitizations of loans generated as a result of such activities. Although the Agencies have revised the definition of loan in response to

commenters’ concerns as discussed above, the Agencies are not adopting a separate definition of loan for securitization transactions as requested by commenters. The Agencies believe that the definition of loan adopted in the final rule appropriately encompasses the financial instruments that result from lending money to

customers.

ii. Contractual Rights or Assets

Under the proposed loan
securitization definition, a covered fund

that is an issuer of asset-backed securities would have been permitted to hold contractual rights or assets directly arising from those loans supporting the

asset-backed securities. 1878 The proposal did not identify or describe such contractual rights or assets.

Commenters requested that the Agencies expand the list of contractualrights and assets that an issuer of assetbacked securities would be permitted to hold under the proposed loan securitization exemption. 1879 Examples of the additional rights and assets requested by commenters include cash
and cash accounts; 1880 cash equivalents; 1881 liquidity agreements, including asset purchase agreements, program support facilities and support

commitments; 1882 credit

enhancements: 1883 asset-backed securities; 1884 municipal securities; 1885 repurchase agreements; 1886 creditlinked notes; 1887 trust certificates; 1888 lease residuals; 1889 debt securities; 1890

and derivatives. 1891 As an alternative, commenters requested that an issuer of asset-backed securities be permitted to hold under the proposed loan securitization exemption certain of such additional rights and/or assets up to a threshold, such as a specified


### 5962 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1892 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb. 2012); GE (Aug. 2012); LSTA (Feb. 2012); LSTA (July 2012).

1893 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(i)(B). The use of the term ‘‘servicing assets’’ is not meant to imply that servicing assets are limited to those contractual rights or assets related to the servicer and the performance of the servicer’s obligations.

1894 For example, under the final rule, mortgage insurance policies supporting the mortgages in a loan securitization are servicing assets permissible for purposes of § 75.10(c)(8)(i)(B). However, a separate securitization of the payments on those mortgage insurance policies would not qualify for

the loan securitization exclusion.

1895 The Agencies believe that for purposes of the
final rule, in the context of securitization, such

related or incidental assets in a loan securitization should support or further, and therefore, be secondary to the loans held by the securitization

vehicle. 1896 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(iii).

1897 If either the loans supporting the loan

securitization or the asset-backed securities issued by the loan securitization are denominated in a foreign currency, for purposes of the exclusion a loan securitization would be permitted to hold foreign currency, cash equivalents denominated in foreign currency and foreign exchange derivatives that comply with § 75.10(c)(8)(iv).

1898 Servicing assets should not introduce significant additional risks to the transaction, including foreign currency risk or maturity risk. For instance, funds on deposit in an account that is swept on a monthly basis should not be invested in securities that mature in 90 days.

1899 Commenters expressed concerns about the

use of securitization vehicles for evasion. See, e.g.,

AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen. 1900 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68912.

1901 Id.

1902 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012) (requesting that an excluded loan securitization be permitted to hold up to 10% of its assets in the form of synthetic risk exposure to loans); Credit Suisse (Williams); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; LSTA (Feb. 2012) (for
CLOs); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). percentage of the assets of such covered

fund. 1892

In response to comments, the final

rule modifies the loan securitization exclusion from the proposal to identify the types of contractual rights or assets directly arising from those loans supporting the asset-backed securities that a loan securitization relying on such exclusion may hold. Under the
final rule, a loan securitization which is eligible for the loan securitization exclusion may hold contractual rights or assets (i) designed to assure the servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to security holders or (ii) related or incidental to purchasing or otherwise acquiring, and holding the loans (‘‘servicing assets’’). 1893 The servicing assets are permissible in an

excluded loan securitization transaction only to the extent that they arise from

the structure of the loan securitization or from the loans supporting a loan securitization. If such servicing assets are sold and securitized in a separate transaction, they will not qualify as permissible holdings for the loan

securitization exclusion. 1894

In adopting this approach, the Agencies considered commenters’

concerns and determined to revise the

condition to be more consistent with the definition and treatment of servicing

assets in other asset-backed securitization regulations, such as the exemption from the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ under rule 3a–7 promulgated under the Investment Company Act. 1895

Although the Agencies have revised the proposal in response to commenters’ concerns, the final rule does not permit a loan securitization to hold as servicing

assets a number of instruments specifically requested by commenters whether in their entirety or as a percentage of the pool. Under the final rule, servicing assets do not include

securities or derivatives other than as specified in the rule. Under the final rule, a loan securitization which is eligible for the loan securitization exclusion may hold

securities if those securities fall into one of three categories. 1896 First, such loan securitizations may hold securities that are cash equivalents. For purposes of
the exclusion for loan securitizations, the Agencies interpret ‘‘cash equivalents’’ to mean high quality, highly liquid short term investments whose maturity corresponds to the securitization’s expected or potential need for funds and whose currency corresponds to either the underlying

loans or the asset-backed securities. 1897 Depending on the specific funding needs of a particular securitization, ‘‘cash equivalents’’ might include deposits insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, certificates of deposit issued by a regulated U.S. financial institution, obligations backed by the full faith and credit of the United States, investments in registered money
market funds, and commercial

paper. 1898 Second, such loan securitizations may hold securities received in lieu of debts previously contracted with respect to the loans supporting the asset-backed securities. Finally, such loan securitizations may hold securities that qualify as SUBIs or collateral certificates subject to the provisions set forth in the rule for such

intermediate asset-backed securities.

The Agencies have specifically limited the types of securities held as eligible assets in a loan securitization that may be excluded from the

definition of covered fund under the
final rule, even in limited amounts, in order to assure that the types of securities are cash equivalents or

otherwise related to the loan securitization and to prevent the possible misuse of the loan

securitization exclusion to circumvent the restrictions on proprietary trading,

investments in covered funds and prohibitions in section 13(f) of the BHC

Act. 1899 The Agencies believe that types

of securities other than those specifically included in the final rule
could be misused in such manner, because without limitations on the types

of securities in which an excluded loan securitization may invest, a banking entity could structure an excluded loan securitization with provisions to engage in activities that are outside the scope of the definition of loan as adopted and also to engage in impermissible proprietary trading. Further, the Agencies do not believe that the use of thresholds with respect to such other types of securities as an alternative is appropriate because similarly, such a

securitization would then involve a
securitization of non-loan assets, outside the scope of what the Agencies

believe the rule of construction was intended to cover. By placing restrictions on the securities permitted to be held by an excluded loan securitization, the potential for evasion

is reduced. Loan securitizations are intended, as contemplated by the rule of construction, to permit banks to continue to engage in securitizations of loans. Including all types of securities within the scope of permitted assets in

an excluded loan securitization would expand the exclusion beyond the scope

of the definition of loan in the final rule that is intended to implement the rule

of construction.

iii. Derivatives

Under the proposed loan securitization definition, an exempted loan securitization would be permitted to hold interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that materially relate to theterms of any loans supporting the assetbacked securities and any contractual rights or assets directly arising from such loans so long as such derivatives are used for hedging purposes with respect to the securitization

structure. 1900 The Agencies indicated in the proposing release that the proposed

loan securitization definition would not allow an exempted loan securitization to use credit default swaps. 1901

Commenters criticized the proposed

limitations on the use of derivatives included in the proposed loan

securitization definition. 1902 In particular, one commenter indicated

that the use of credit derivatives such as credit default swaps is important in loan securitizations to provide diversification


### 5963 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1903 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n. This commenter indicated that credit derivatives are important in securitizations to provide diversification when the

desired mix of assets cannot be achieved.

1904 See ASF (Feb. 2012). This commenter argued that for some loan securitizations, investors may seek a broader pool of credit exposures than the

bank has available or can obtain to securitize in

order to achieve risk diversification.

1905 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

One of these commenters stated that the credit default exclusion was appropriate because ‘‘synthetic securitizations and resecuritizations were a key contributor to financial contagion during

the crisis.’’ See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). Another commenter argued that the loan securitization definition should not permit the use of derivatives.

See Occupy. This commenter argued that covered funds should only be permitted to engage in hedging activity in accordance with the proposed exemption for hedging activity. This commenter also argued that the inclusion of derivatives in the

loan securitization definition exceeded the Agencies’ statutory authority. Id. Two senators indicated that ‘‘complex securitizations’’ including those with ‘‘synthetic features’’ and ‘‘embedded derivatives’’ should not be allowed to rely on the

exclusion for loan securitizations. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

1906 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(iv). 1907 Under the final rule, the Agencies expect that a loan securitization relying on the loan

securitization exclusion would not have a significant amount of interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives with respect to risks arising from contractual rights or other assets.

1908 For example, a $100 million securitization cannot be hedged using an interest rate hedge with

a notional amount of $200 million.

1909 The derivatives permitted in a securitization that may rely on the loan securitization exclusion would permit a securitization to hedge the risk resulting from differences between the income received by the issuing entity and the amounts due

under the terms of the asset-backed securities. For example, fixed rate loans could support floating rate
asset-backed securities; loans with an interest rate determined by reference to the Prime Rate could support asset-backed securities with an interest ratedetermined by reference to LIBOR; or Eurodenominated loans could support U.S. Dollardenominated asset-backed securities. 1910 Loan securitizations excluded from the covered fund definition may only hold certain directly related derivatives as specified in
§ 75.11(c)(8)(iv) and as discussed in this Part. of assets. 1903 Another commenter noted the use of such instruments to manage risks with respect to corporate loan and debt books by accessing capital from a broad group of capital markets investors and facilitates making markets. 1904 In contrast, two commenters generally supported the limitations on the use of derivatives under the proposed loan

securitization definition and indicated that excluding credit default swaps from

the loan securitization definition was appropriate. 1905

With respect to the use of derivatives, the Agencies are adopting the loan securitization exclusion substantially as proposed with certain modifications to reflect a restructuring of this provision in order to more closely align the permissible uses of derivatives under

the loan securitization exclusion with
the loans, the asset-backed securities, or the contractual rights and other assets that a loan securitization relying on the loan securitization exclusion may hold. As adopted, for a loan securitization to be eligible for the loan securitization exclusion, the loan securitization may hold only interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that meet the following requirements: (i) the written terms of the derivatives directly relate to

either the loans or the asset-backed

securities that such loan securitization may hold under the other provisions of
the loan securitization exclusion; and (ii) the derivatives reduce interest rate and/or foreign exchange risk with respect to risks related to either such
loans, the asset-backed securities or the contractual rights or other assets that a loan securitization may hold. 1906

The first requirement that the written terms of the derivatives ‘‘directly relate’’ to either the loans or the asset-based

securities themselves is intended to quantitatively and qualitatively limit the use of derivatives permitted under the

loan securitization exclusion. 1907 The Agencies would expect that neither the total notional amount of directly related

interest rate derivatives nor the total notional amount of directly related foreign exchange derivatives would exceed the greater of either the outstanding principal balance of the loans supporting the asset-backed securities or the outstanding principal

balance of the asset-backed

securities. 1908 Moreover, under the loan securitization exclusion, the type of derivatives must be related to the types of risks associated with the underlying assets and may not be derivatives designed to supplement income based on general economic scenarios, income management or unrelated risks.

The second requirement that

derivatives reduce the interest rate and/ or foreign exchange risks related to either such loans, contractual rights or
other assets, or such asset-backed securities is intended to permit the use of derivatives to hedge interest rate and/ or foreign exchange risks that result

from a mismatch between the loans and

the asset-backed securities. 1909

The Agencies believe that the statutory rule of construction should be implemented in a manner that does not

limit or restrict the sale and securitization of loans. The Agencies

further believe that the sale and securitization of credit exposures other
than ‘‘loans’’ as defined in the rule, such as through securities or derivatives,

could be abused. The derivatives that may be held in a loan securitization for purposes of the exclusion may not be used for speculative purposes. Consistent with the proposal, the loan securitization exclusion does not permit a loan securitization relying on such exclusion to hold credit default swaps or other types of derivatives whether or not they are related either to the underlying loans or the asset-backed

securities. 1910 Under the final rule, a synthetic securitization in which the asset-backed securities are supported by
cash flow from derivatives, such as credit default swaps and total return swaps, would not be permitted to rely

on the loan securitization exclusion

because such derivatives are excluded

from the final rule’s definition of loan specifically, as a derivative. Similarly, a

loan securitization that relies on the

loan securitization exclusion would not be permitted to hold a credit default swap or total return swap that references a loan that is held by the loan

securitization. Under the final rule as adopted, an excluded loan

securitization would not be able to hold

derivatives that would relate to risks to counterparties or issuers of the underlying assets referenced by these derivatives because the operation of derivatives, such as these, that expand potential exposures beyond the loans
and other assets, would not in the Agencies’ view be consistent with the

limited exclusion contained in the rule of construction under section 13(g)(2) of
the BHC Act, and could be used to

circumvent the restrictions on proprietary trading and prohibitions in section 13(f) of the BHC Act. The Agencies believe that the use of derivatives by an issuing entity for

asset-backed securities that is excluded

from the definition of covered fund

under the loan securitization exclusion should be narrowly tailored to hedging

activities that reduce the interest rate and/or foreign exchange risks directly

related to the asset-backed securities or the loans supporting the asset-backed

securities because the use of derivatives for purposes other than reducing interest rate risk and foreign exchange

risks would introduce credit risk without necessarily relating to or involving a reduction of interest rate risk or foreign exchange risk.

On the other hand, while the Agencies are not expanding the types of permitted derivatives to be held in a loan securitization, the Agencies in the final rule are not restricting the use of

all derivatives under the loan securitization exclusion as requested by certain commenters. The Agencies

believe that a loan securitization that is

excluded from the definition of covered fund should be allowed to engage in

activities that reduce interest rate and


### 5964 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1911 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public

Citizen.

1912 See Occupy. This commenter argued that covered funds should only be permitted to engage in hedging activity in accordance with the proposed exemption for hedging activity.

1913 For example, a banking entity may hold an ownership interest in a covered fund in order to hedge employee compensation risks. Because securitizations do not have employees, such a hedging exemption would not be applicable to a

securitization structure.

1914 See Occupy. 1915 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Aug. 2012); PNC; RBC;
SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1916 See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1917 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012). UK RMBS master

trusts also use a master trust structure. See AFME et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb.
2012).

1918 See Occupy.

1919 The use of SUBIs, for example, allows the sponsor to avoid administrative expenses in retitling the physical property underlying the

leases. 1920 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(v).

1921 The provision will allow for the existing practice of a master trust to hold a collateral certificate issued by a legacy master trust.

1922 This would include a collateral certificate issued by a legacy master trust that meets the requirements of the loan securitization exclusion. foreign exchange risk because the hedging of such risks is consistent with the prudent risk management of interest rate and currency risk in a loan portfolio while at the same time avoiding the potential for additional risk arising from other types of derivatives. 1911 The Agencies do not believe that the exemption for hedging activity applicable to market making and underwriting under the final rule is the appropriate measure for permitted

derivatives in a loan securitization that

would be excluded from definition of

covered fund 1912 because the hedging exemptions for market making and underwriting are not tailored to the hedging requirements of a securitization

transaction. 1913 The Agencies also do not believe that they lack the statutory authority to permit a loan securitization relying on the loan securitization
exclusion to use derivatives, as suggested by one commenter, 1914 because the Agencies believe that the permitted derivatives relate directly to loans that are permitted and have limited the quality and quantity of

derivatives that an excluded loan securitization is permitted to hold directly to the reduction of risks that

result from the loans and the loan

securitization.

While loan securitizations that

include non-loan assets are not

excluded from the definition of covered fund, banking entities are not prohibited from owning interests or sponsoring

these covered funds under the final rule.
Under the final rule, these
securitizations would be covered funds, and banking entities engaged with these covered funds would be subject to the limitations on ownership interests and relationships with these covered funds imposed by section 13 of the BHC Act.

iv. SUBIs and Collateral Certificates

Commenters also argued that, under the proposed exemption for loan
securitizations, securitizations that arebacked by certain intermediate assetbacked securities would not satisfy the conditions for the exemption and therefore would be subject to the covered fund prohibitions. 1915 For example, commenters noted that, in a securitization of leases with respect to equipment where a titling trust is used to hold ownership of the equipment, a titling trust will typically own the equipment and the right to payment on the leases, and then will issue a security
or other instrument, often referred to as a special unit of beneficial interest (SUBI), that represents an ownership interest in the titling trust to the

securitization issuer. 1916 As another example, certain securitizations frequently use a master trust structure allowing the trust to issue more than one series of asset-backed security collectively backed by a common revolving pool of assets. In such a structure, a master trust may hold assets (such as loans) and issue a collateral certificate supported by those assets to an issuing trust that issues asset-backed

securities to investors. The assets held by the master trust are typically a pool of revolving accounts that may be paid in full each month (e.g., credit cardreceivables) or a revolving pool of shortterm loans that are replaced with new loans as they mature (e.g., floor plan loans). 1917 One commenter opposed the inclusion of securitizations backed by
intermediate asset-backed securities, arguing that each step should be viewed separately to ensure compliance to prevent the inclusion of impermissible assets such as prohibited

derivatives. 1918

In response to comments, the Agencies are modifying the proposal to provide that a securitization backed by

certain intermediate asset-backed securities will qualify for the loan securitization exclusion. The Agencies recognize that securitization structures that use these types of intermediate asset-backed securities are essentially
loan securitization transactions, because

the intermediate asset-backed securities in the asset pool are created solely for the purpose of facilitating a

securitization 1919 and once created, are issued directly into a securitization vehicle rather than to any third party

investor. Under the final rule, a loan

securitization that is excluded from the definition of covered fund may include SUBIs or collateral certificates, provided

that four conditions are met. 1920 First, the special purpose vehicle issuing the

SUBI or collateral certificate itself must

meet the conditions of the loan securitization exclusion, as adopted in

the final rule. 1921 Under this provision, for example, the special purpose vehicle, in addition to the issuing entity, may hold an interest rate or foreign exchange derivative or other assets only if the derivative or asset is permitted to

be held in accordance with the requirements for derivatives in respect

of the loan securitization exclusion.
Second, the SUBI or collateral certificate must be used for the sole purpose of transferring economic risks and benefits of the loans (and other permissible assets) 1922 to the issuing entity for the securitization and may not directly or indirectly transfer any interest in any other economic or financial exposures.
Third, the SUBI or collateral certificate must be created solely to satisfy legal requirements or otherwise facilitate the structuring of the loan securitization. Fourth, the special purpose vehicle issuing the SUBI or collateral certificate and the issuing entity for the excluded

loan securitization transaction must be

established under the direction of the same entity that initiated the loan securitization transaction. The Agencies

believe that the fourth condition will

ensure that the resecuritizations of asset-backed securities purchased in the secondary market, which the Agencies

do not believe would constitute a loan
securitization, will not be able to use these special provisions tailored only for transactions utilizing SUBIs and

collateral certificates in order to fall

within the loan securitization exclusion.

The Agencies believe that these conditions provide that only securitizations backed by SUBIs and collateral certificates involving loans— and not other types of securities or other types of assets—will be able to use the

loan securitization exclusion. These

conditions are intended to assure that for purposes of the loan securitization exclusion that only SUBI and collateral certificates that essentially represent the underlying loans are included

consistent with the terms and the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act, while also not adversely affecting


### 5965 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1923 See, e.g., rule 190 under the Securities Act. See also, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012) (noting that certain

rules under the Securities Act and staff interpretations have carved out SUBIs and collateral

certificates from certain disclosure and other requirements).

1924 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(ii).

1925 The Agencies discuss earlier in this Part the permissible assets an excluded loan securitization may hold and the Agencies’ belief that excluding

loan securitizations as defined in the final rule is consistent with the terms and the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act, including the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2). See, e.g., supra note 1871 and accompanying and following text. 1926 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8)(iv); see also 7 U.S.C. 27(a)–(b).

1927 See the discussion above in Part VI.B.1.c.8 of

this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

.

1928 For a discussion of commodity forward contracts, see Further Definition of ‘‘Swap,’’ ‘‘Security-Based Swap,’’ and ‘‘Security-Based Swap Agreement’’; Mixed Swaps; Security-Based Swap Agreement Recordkeeping, 77 FR 48208 (Aug. 13, 2012) (Release Nos. 33–9338 and 34–67453, July 18,
2012).

1929 See proposed rule § 75.13(d).

1930 Structured investment vehicles (‘‘SIVs’’) and securities arbitrage ABCP programs both purchase
securities (rather than receivables and loans). SIVs typically lack liquidity facilities covering all of these liabilities issued by the SIV, while securities arbitrage ABCP programs typically have such liquidity coverage, though the terms are more limited than those of the ABCP conduits eligible for the exclusion pursuant to the final rule.

1931 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68899.

1932 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); BoA; Capital Group; Eaton Vance; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; PNC; RBC.

1933 See, e.g., ICI (Feb. 2012); PNC et al.; SIFMA (May 2012).

1934 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(J).

1935 See ICI (Feb. 2012).

1936 See PNC.

1937 See Barclays.

1938 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(2).

1939 See ICI (Feb. 2012).

1940 See Credit Suisse (Williams). securitization of ‘‘loans’’ as defined in

the final rule. 1923 The Agencies believethat the limitation of the types of assetbacked securities permitted in an excluded loan securitization (only
SUBIs and collateral certificates) and the restrictions placed on those SUBIs

and collateral certificates that are permitted in an excluded loan

securitization will avoid loan securitizations that contain other types of assets from being excluded from the

definition of covered fund.

v. Impermissible Assets

As discussed above, commenters on the loan securitization proposals argued that various types of assets should be

included within the definition of loan or otherwise permitted to be held by the

loan securitization that would be entitled to rely on the proposed exemptions.

After considering comments, the Agencies have determined to retain the narrower scope of the permitted assets in a loan securitization that is eligible

for the loan securitization exclusion. The Agencies have revised the language regarding loan securitizations from the proposal to specify certain types of assets or holdings that a loan

securitization would not be able to hold if it were eligible to rely on the

exclusion from the definition of covered

fund for loan securitizations. 1924 The Agencies recognize that securitization structures vary significantly and, accordingly, the loan securitization exclusion as adopted in the final rule accommodates a wider range of securitization practices. The Agencies believe that these limitations provide that only securitizations backed by
loans—and not securities, derivatives or other types of assets—will be able to use

the loan securitization exclusion

consistent with the terms and the purpose of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 1925 The Agencies believe that the limitation of the types of assets permitted in an excluded loan

securitization will avoid loan securitizations that contain other types of assets from being excluded from the

definition of covered fund.

Under the final rule, in order to be

excluded from the definition of covered fund, a loan securitization may not hold (i) a security, including an asset-backed security, or an interest in an equity or debt security (unless specifically permitted, such as with respect to a

SUBI or collateral certificate as described above), (ii) a derivative other than an interest rate or foreign exchange derivative that meets the requirements
described above, 1926 or (iii) a commodity forward contract. 1927 The Agencies have determined that a loan securitization relying on the loan securitization exclusion may not include a commodity forward contract because a commodity forward contract

is not a loan. 1928

9. Asset-Backed Commercial Paper

Conduits

Under the proposed rule, certain securitization vehicles, including ABCP
conduits, would not have been covered by the loan securitization exclusion and,
therefore, would have been deemed to

be a covered fund. 1929 ABCP is a type of liability that is typically issued by a special purpose vehicle (commonly referred to as a ‘‘conduit’’) sponsored by a financial institution or other entity.

The short term asset-backed securities issued by the conduit are supported by a managed pool of assets, which may change over the life of the entity. Depending on the type of ABCP
conduit, the securitized assets ultimately supporting the short term asset-backed securities may consist of a wide range of assets including
automobile loans, commercial loans,
trade receivables, credit card
receivables, student loans, and other

loans in addition to asset-backed securities supported by such assets. The term of ABCP typically is short, and the liabilities are ‘‘rolled’’ (i.e., replaced or refinanced) at regular intervals. Thus,ABCP conduits generally fund longerterm assets with shorter-term

liabilities. 1930 In this regard, in the proposing release, the Agencies requested comment on the proposed

rule’s definition of ‘‘covered fund’’ with respect to asset-backed securities and/or

securitization vehicles 1931 and received numerous comments requesting a variety of exemptions for ABCP

conduits. 1932

A number of commenters requested

that the final rule exclude ABCP

conduits from the definition of covered

fund 1933 or that the Agencies use their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) of the

BHC Act 1934 to similar effect. 1935 One commenter argued that ABCP conduits

do not have the characteristics of a private equity fund or hedge fund, 1936 even though they typically rely on the exemptions set forth in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. Another commenter argued that the proposed rule’s definition of coveredfund would negatively impact assetbacked securitizations (including ABCP conduits), and suggested that the Agencies define covered funds, in part, as those that both (i) rely on section
3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act and (ii) have the traditional characteristics of private equity funds or hedge funds. 1937

Another commenter stated that the rule

of construction set forth in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act 1938 is a clear

indication that section 13 of the BHC Act was not intended to apply to

securitization vehicles such as ABCP

conduits. 1939 Another commenter stated that the lending that occurs through ABCP conduits is the type of activity that Congress and the Executive Branch have urged banks to expand in order to support economic growth and job

creation, 1940 while another commenter stated that ABCP conduits provide low cost, reliable financing for registered investment companies, which poses little risk to the safety and soundness of banks because Federal law requires registered investment companies to


### 5966 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1941 See Eaton Vance.

1942 See RBC; ASF (Feb. 2012).

1943 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

1944 Id.

1945 See ICI (Feb. 2012). This commenter emphasized the importance of the ABCP conduit market to money market funds, noting that as of November 2011, taxable money market funds held

$126 billion of the $348.1 billion of securities issued by ABCP conduits outstanding, which represented approximately 5.4% of taxable money

market funds’ total assets. Another commenter noted that approximately $66.7 billion of
automobile loans and leases, $52.1 billion of student loans, $22.3 billion of credit card charges, $49.4 billion of loans to commercial borrowers and $50.7 billion of trade receivables were financed by
the U.S. ABCP conduit market as of October 31, 2011, and that the total outstanding amount of securities sold by ABCP conduits in the U.S. market was $344.5 billion as of January 18, 2012. See ASF (Feb. 2012).

1946 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); PNC; SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

1947 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Capital Group (alleging that ABCP does not pose the risks that the rule is
meant to combat); GE (Feb. 2012). One commenter proposed an exemption for ABCP conduits that included a requirement of 100% liquidity support from a regulated, affiliated entity, and such liquidity support may be conditional or

unconditional. See RBC.

1948 See Credit Suisse (Williams) (alleging that ABCP conduits acquire ownership of loans indirectly through the purchase of variable funding
notes, trust certificates, asset-backed securities, repurchase agreements and other instruments that may be considered securities, all of which economically are consistent with providing funding
or extensions of credit to customers); ICI (Feb. 2012) (requesting that the definition of loan include the broad array of receivables that back ABCP).

1949 See AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization)
(Feb. 2012).

1950 See ASF (Feb. 2012) (requesting that ABCP conduits be permitted to own asset-backed securities purchased on the secondary market only if the aggregate principal amount of such securities does not exceed 5% of the aggregate principal or face amount of all assets held by the ABCP conduit in order to diversify their asset base and avoid the negative consequences of divestiture of such assets); RBC (requesting that loan securitizations be permitted to hold cash equivalents and assets, other than loans, which, by their terms, convert to cash within a finite period of time so long as such assets comprise no more than 10% of their total assets
based on book value).

1951 See ASF (Feb. 2012) (arguing that the loans, receivables, leases, or other assets purchased by the ABCP conduit might have fit the definition of loan in the proposed rules but for the proposal’s express

assertion that the definition of loan does not include any asset-backed security that is issued in

connection with a loan securitization or otherwise backed by loans). See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at
68865; GE (Feb. 2012); RBC.

1952 See PNC.

1953 See Public Citizen.

1954 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f); see also § 75.16 of the proposed rule.

1955 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Credit Suisse (Williams); Fidelity; IIB/ EBF; JPMC; PNC; RBC; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb.
2012).

1956 See ICI (Feb. 2012); Fidelity.

1957 See JPMC.

1958 See ASF (Mar. 2012).

1959 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1960 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Fidelity.

1961 See ASF (Mar. 2012).

1962 See final rule § 75.10(c)(9)(i). The rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act provides that nothing in section 13 of the

BHC Act shall be construed to limit or restrict the ability of a banking entity or nonbank financial company supervised by the Board to sell or

securitize loans in a manner that is otherwise maintain prescribed asset coverage in connection with borrowings. 1941

Two commenters contended that,

while certain issuers of asset-backed securities may rely on section 3(c)(5) of the Investment Company Act or rule 3a–
7 thereunder, and, therefore, not be brought under the proposed rule’s
definition of covered fund, ABCP conduits typically cannot rely on this

section or rule either because to do so would be too restrictive (in the case of section 3(c)(5)) or because they cannot meet the rule’s requirements. 1942

One commenter, employing ABCP conduits as an example, stated that failing to exempt securitization vehicles from the covered fund prohibitions would preclude banking entities from engaging in activities that have long been recognized as permissible activities for banking entities and that are vital to the normal functioning of the
securitization markets, and will have a significant and negative impact on the securitization markets and on the ability of banking entities and other companies to provide credit to their customers. 1943

This commenter further stated that

ABCP conduits are an efficient and attractive way for banking entities to

lend their own credit-worthiness to expand the pool of possible lenders willing to finance key economic activity while maintaining a low cost of funding
for consumers, and because of the liquidity support provided by the sponsoring banking entity, the sponsoring banking entity to the ABCP conduit has full exposure to the assets acquired by or securing the amounts lent by the ABCP conduit and the banking entity subjects those assets and the obligors to the same analysis as it would engage in if the bank were lending directly against those assets. 1944

Another commenter stated that the provision of credit to companies to finance receivables through ABCP

conduits is an area of traditional banking activity that should be distinguished from the type of high-risk,

conflict-ridden financial activities that Congress sought to restrict under section

13 of the BHC Act. 1945 To this end, commenters proposed

several means to exclude ABCP conduits from the proposed rule’s restrictions and requirements, including an expansion of the loan securitization exemption to treat two-step securitization transactions as a single
loan securitization, 1946 a separate exclusion for ABCP conduits, 1947 an expansion of the definition of loan, 1948 or as part of a broad exclusion for all

issuers of asset-backed securities. 1949 In order to allow ABCP conduits to qualify
as loan securitizations, commenters suggested that the loan securitization exclusion should permit a limited amount of securities purchased in the secondary market. 1950 Commenters also proposed changes to the permissible assets such as allowing a loan securitization to hold liquidity and support commitments, asset-backed

securities and certain financial assets in addition to loans that by their terms convert to cash within a finite period of

time. 1951 Another commenter argued that the loan securitization exemption should allow banking entities to sponsor, control, and invest in ABCP

conduits that facilitate the securitization

of customer loans and receivables. 1952 In contrast, one commenter supported

the restriction of the loan securitization exemption to the plain meaning of what

constitutes a loan and advocated that the Agencies not include ABCP conduits under the exemption. 1953

In addition to the effect the proposed

rule’s definition of covered fund would
have on ABCP conduits, commenters also noted that section 13(f) of the BHC

Act 1954 would prohibit certain transactions between a banking entity sponsor and a covered fund

securitization. 1955 Two commenters requested a specific exemption from § 75.16 of the proposed rule for ABCP conduits based on the interpretation that the proposed rule subjects covered funds exempted under the loan securitization exemption or other exemptions to § 75.16. 1956 Commenters argued that without liquidity and credit support, ABCP conduits are not
viable, 1957 cannot effectively

operate, 1958 could not function, 1959 or would not be marketable. 1960 One commenter argued that prohibiting a banking entity from providing liquidity

facilities to ABCP conduits is tantamount to requiring the banking entity to wind down the operation of

such ABCP conduits. 1961

In response to the comments received and in light of the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, the Agencies have determined in

the final rule to exclude from the

definition of covered fund an ABCPconduit that is a ‘‘qualifying assetbacked commercial paper conduit’’ as

defined in the final rule is excluded

from the definition of covered fund. 1962


### 5967 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

permitted by law. As noted above and explained below, a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper

conduit under the final rule is an ABCP conduit that holds only (i) loans or other assets that wouldbe permissible in a loan securitization and (ii) assetbacked securities that are supported solely by assets permissible for a loan securitization and are acquired by the conduit as part of an initial issuance directly from the issuer or directly from an underwriter engaged in the distribution of the

securities.

1963 See final rule § 75.10(c)(8).

1964 See final rule § 75.10(c)(9)(i)(B).

1965 See final rule § 75.10(c)(9)(ii) and (iii).

1966 See 12 U.S.C. 1813.

1967 See 12 U.S.C. 1841.

1968 See 12 U.S.C. 1467a.

1969 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(k).

1970 See 12 CFR 211.21.

1971 See final rule § 75.10(c)(9)(iii). Under the final rule, a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit is an ABCP conduit that holds only (i)

loans or other assets that would be permissible in a loan securitization 1963 and (ii) asset-backed securities that are supported solely by assets permissible

for a loan securitization and are acquired by the conduit as part of an initial issuance directly from the issuer or directly from an underwriter engaged

in the distribution of the securities. 1964 In addition, a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit must issue only asset-backed securities, comprising

of a residual and securities with a term of 397 days or less and in addition, a ‘‘regulated liquidity provider,’’ as defined in the final rule, must provide a legally binding commitment to provide full and unconditional liquidity coverage with respect to all the outstanding short term asset-backedsecurities issued by the qualifying assetbacked commercial paper conduit in the event that funds are required to redeem the maturing securities. 1965

Under the final rule, a regulated liquidity provider is (i) a depository

institution as defined in section 3 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act; 1966 (ii) a bank holding company or a subsidiary
thereof; 1967 (iii) a savings and loan holding company, 1968 provided all or substantially all of the holding company’s activities are permissible for a financial holding company, 1969 or a subsidiary thereof; (iv) a foreign bank whose home country supervisor as

defined in section 211.21 of the Federal Reserve Board’s Regulation K 1970 has adopted capital standards consistent with the Capital Accord of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, as amended, and that is subject to such standards, or a subsidiary thereof; or (v) a sovereign nation. 1971 In order for a sovereign nation to qualify as a regulated liquidity provider, the liquidity provided must be unconditionally guaranteed by the sovereign, which would include its departments and ministries, including

the central bank.

In this regard, under the final rule, the

exclusion from the definition of covered fund in respect of ABCP conduits is only available to an issuer of short-term asset-backed securities supported by

loans and certain asset-backed securities supported by loans that were issued or initially sold to the ABCP conduit, and

the short term asset-backed securities issued by the ABCP conduit are supported by a liquidity facility that provides 100 percent liquidity coverage from a regulated liquidity provider. The
exclusion, therefore, is not available to ABCP conduits that lack 100 percent liquidity coverage. The liquidity coverage may be provided in the form of a lending facility, an asset purchase agreement, a repurchase agreement, or similar arrangement and 100 percent liquidity coverage means that, in the event the qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit is unable forany reason to repay maturing assetbacked securities issued by the issuing entity, the total amount for which the regulated liquidity provider may be obligated is equal to 100 percent of the

amount of asset-backed securities outstanding plus accrued and unpaid
interest. In addition, amounts due pursuant to the required liquidity coverage may not be subject to the credit performance of the asset-backedsecurities held by the qualifying assetbacked commercial paper conduit or reduced by the amount of credit support provided to the qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit. Under the final rule, liquidity coverage that only funds an amount determined by reference to the amount of performing
loans, receivables, or asset-backed securities will not be permitted to satisfy the liquidity requirement for a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit.

As discussed above, the final rule defines a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit as having certain elements. First, a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit must issue only a residual interest and

short-term asset-backed securities. This requirement distinguishes ABCP

conduits from covered funds that issue partnership interests and mitigates the potential that a qualifying ABCP

conduit would be used for evasion of the covered fund prohibitions. The Agencies chose a maximum term of 397 days for these securities because this time frame corresponds to the maximum maturity of securities allowed to be purchased by money market funds under Rule 2a-7 of the Investment Company Act.

Second, the asset-backed securities issued by the ABCP conduit must be supported only by loans and certain

asset-backed securities that meet the requirements of the loan securitization exclusion. By placing restrictions on the assets permitted to be held by an
excluded loan securitization, the potential for evasion of the covered fund prohibitions is reduced. The exclusion for qualifying ABCP conduits is intended, as contemplated by the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, to permit banks to continue to engage in securitizations of loans. Including all types of securities and other assets within the scope of permitted assets in a qualifying ABCP
conduit, as with loan securitizations, would expand the exclusion beyond the scope of the definition of loan in the final rule that is intended to implement

the rule of construction.

Third, the asset-backed securities supporting a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit must be purchased as part of the initial issuance

of such asset-backed securities. Assetbacked securities purchased by an ABCP conduit in the secondary market will not be permitted because such a purchase would not be part of an initial issuance and the banking entity that established and manages the ABCP conduit would not have participated in the negotiation of the terms of such

asset-backed securities. Without a more direct connection between the banking entity and the ABCP conduit, the purchase of such asset-backed securities in the secondary market would resemble

investments in securities.

Fourth, under the final rule, the ABCP

conduit exclusion will not be available to ABCP conduits that lack 100 percent liquidity coverage. The Agencies believe that the 100 percent liquidity coverage requirement distinguishes the conduits eligible for the exemption, which

sometimes hold and securitize a customer’s loans through an intervening special-purpose vehicle instead of holding the loans directly, and are supported by a 100 percent liquidity guarantee, from other types of conduits with partial liquidity guarantees (such as structured investment vehicles) that have sometimes been operated by banking entities for the purpose of financing portfolios of securities acquired or retained as part of their

activities in the securities markets.

The Agencies recognize that ABCP conduits that do not satisfy the elements of the ABCP conduit exclusion may be

covered funds and therefore would be subject to section 13(f) of the BHC


### 5968 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1972 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f); see also § 75.16 of the proposed rule.

1973 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012). 1974 See Credit Suisse (Williams) (employing ABCP conduits as an example); ASF (Feb. 2012)(describing the constriction of the market for assetbacked securities if banking entities are restricted from owning debt classes of new asset backed
securities).

1975 See RBC; ASF (Feb. 2012).

1976 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); UKRCBC; FSA (Apr. 2012); ASF (Feb.
2012).

1977 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); FSA (Apr.
2012); UKRCBC. 1978 See UKRCBC. For example, a commenter indicated that in the European Union, Article 52(4) of the EU UCITS Directive sets out the defining
characteristics of covered bonds, and this directive is implemented by specific legislative frameworks.

1979 See UKRCBC; FSA (Apr. 2012). One commenter argued that there are two main models used for covered bond structures in Europe—the integrated model (where the collateral pool continues to be owned directly by the bank issuer and is segregated by special legislation) and the structured model (where the pool is transferred to a special purpose vehicle and is segregated by operation of legal principles). See UKRCBC.

1980 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1981 See FSA (Apr. 2012).

1982 See UKRCBC.

1983 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group). Act. 1972 As a result of section 13(f) of the BHC Act, which prohibits certain transactions between banking entities

and a covered fund securitization that the banking entity sponsors or for which it provides investment management services, the banking entity would be prohibited from providing liquidity support for the ABCP conduit.

Similarly, while some commenters requested that the loan securitization exclusion permit the holding of a limited amount of securities purchased in the secondary market, the final rule does not provide for this in the context of ABCP conduits. The Agencies believe that the limitations on the types of securities that a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit may invest in are needed to avoid the possibility that a banking entity could use a qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduit

to securitize non-loan assets or to engage in proprietary trading of such securities prohibited under the final

rule. Thus this limitation reduces the potential for evasion of the covered fund provisions of section 13 of the BHC Act. In developing the exclusion from the definition of covered fund for qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduits in the final rule, the Agencies

considered the factors set forth in sections 13(g)(2) and 13(h)(2) of the BHC

Act. The final rule includes conditions designed to ensure that an ABCP conduit established and managed by a banking entity serves as a means of facilitating that banking entity’s loan securitization activity rather than financing that banking entity’s capital

market investments. The final ruledistinguishes between qualifying assetbacked commercial paper conduits and

other ABCP conduits in order to adhere

to the tenets of section 13 of the BHC Act while accommodating the market practices discussed by the commenters by facilitating reasonable access to credit by consumers and businesses through the issuance of ABCP backed by

consumer and business receivables. As discussed above, the Agencies understand that some existing ABCP conduits may need to be restructured to conform to the requirements of the

ABCP conduit exclusion.

To the extent that the definition of
covered fund, the loan securitization

exclusion and the ABCP conduit

exclusion do not eliminate the applicability of the final rule provisions to certain covered funds, there may be adverse effects on the provision of capital to customers, 1973 to securitization markets, 1974 and to the creation of new securitization products to meet investor demands that Congress may not have contemplated. 1975 However, financial institutions that are not banking entities and therefore are not subject to the restrictions on ownership can continue to engage in activities relating to securitization, including those securitizations that fall

under the definition of covered fund. Furthermore, new securitizations may be structured so as to qualify for the

loan securitization exclusion or other

exclusions under the final rule. For these reasons, the impact on

securitizations that are not excluded under the final rule may be mitigated.

The Agencies believe that the final

rule excludes from the definition of covered fund typical structures used in

the most common loan securitizations representing a significant majority of the
current securitization market, such as residential mortgages, commercial mortgages, student loans, credit card
receivables, auto loans, auto leases and equipment leases. Additionally, the Agencies believe that esoteric asset classes supported by loans may also be able to rely on the loan securitization
exclusion, such as time share loans,

container leases and servicer advances.

10. Covered Bonds

Several commenters called for

covered bond structures to be excluded

from the definition of covered fund. 1976 They indicated that the proposed rule may interfere with and restrict non-U.S. banks’ ability to establish or issue covered bonds. As described by several
commenters, covered bonds are full recourse debt instruments typically issued by a non-U.S. entity that are fullysecured or ‘‘covered’’ by a pool of highquality collateral (e.g., residential or commercial mortgage loans or public sector loans). 1977 Certain of these covered bond structures utilize a special purpose vehicle (‘‘SPV’’) that holds a collateral pool. As such, under the proposed rule, an SPV could be a

covered fund that relies on the exclusion in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. According to one commenter, the majority of covered bonds are issued under specific legislative frameworks which define permitted characteristics for covered bond issuances, including the kinds and quality of collateral that may be included in cover pools, the specific legal framework for issuance of covered bonds, and the procedures for

resolution in the event that the issuer

becomes insolvent. 1978 Some commenters expressed concern about the possibility that certain covered bond

structures could fall within the definition of covered fund, as proposed. In particular, commenters expressed

concern about covered bond structures in the United Kingdom that also would be relevant in principle with respect to

covered bond structures used in other European Union (‘‘EU’’) jurisdictions (e.g., the Netherlands and Italy) and certain non-EU jurisdictions (e.g., Canada, Australia, and New Zealand). 1979 Another commenter indicated that covered bonds issued by

certain French entities that hold a revolving pool of loans may be impacted by the proposed rule. 1980

Certain commenters argued that in

order to achieve the intended economic effect of providing recourse to both the bank issuing covered bonds and to the collateral pool, the issuing bank may enter into a number of agreements with

the SPV that holds the collateral. This

includes transactions where the bank takes on credit exposure to the SPV (e.g., through derivatives and securities lending, provision of loans, and/or

investments in securities of the SPV). 1981 The issuing bank typically also provides asset and liability management services to the SPV and may also repurchase certain assets from

the SPV. 1982 Commenters also contended that under certain legislative
frameworks, the SPV issues the covered
bonds and holds the collateral, and a sponsoring bank lends money to the

SPV. 1983 According to commenters, the


### 5969 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1984 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); UKRCBC; FSA (Apr. 2012).

1985 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); UKRCBC; FSA (Apr. 2012); ASF (Feb.
2012); AFME et al. For a discussion of possible
economic effects, see FSA (Feb. 2012); UKRCBC; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

1986 See ASF (Feb. 2012); AFME et al.; UKRCBC.

1987 See UKRCBC.

1988 See, e.g., AFME et al.

1989 See final rule § 75.10(c)(10). 1990 See final rule § 75.10(c)(10)(ii)(A).

1991 See final rule § 75.10(c)(10)(ii)(B). As discussed above in the section describing the wholly-owned subsidiary exclusion from the definition of covered fund, the Agencies are permitting 0.5 of a wholly-owned subsidiary to be owned by an unaffiliated party for the purpose of establishing corporate separateness or addressing bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar concerns. 1992 See supra note 1985 and accompanying text.

1993 Id.

1994 The Agencies note that section 13(d)(1)(E) of the BHC Act incorrectly provides that the term ‘‘small business investment company’’ is defined in
section 102 of the SBA, while the definition is in
fact contained in section 103(3) of the SBA as

codified at 15 U.S.C. 662. The statute includes the correct citation to 15 U.S.C. 662. The Agencies are correcting this technical error in the final rule by updating the reference to section 102 to section
103(3). broad definition of covered fund in the proposed rule could capture an SPV that
holds the collateral, so transactions between an SPV and the issuing bank or sponsor bank may be prohibited. 1984 These commenters argued that including covered bond structures in

the definition of covered fund is inconsistent with the legislative intent of the rule, would have a negative and disproportionate effect on foreign banks, markets and economies and would give rise to potential conflicts with such foreign legislative frameworks. 1985

According to certain commenters, SPVs whose sole function is as part of an offering of covered bonds should be

excluded from the definition of covered

fund in the final rule. These commenters provided that the proposed

rule was not clear on whether these SPVs, which effectively function as
collateral devices for the covered bond,

would be excluded from the definition

of covered fund. 1986 One commenter indicated that the key concern was primarily due to the wide definition of covered fund in the proposed rule. 1987

Other commenters indicated that the final rule should not apply to covered bond transactions because they are not traditionally recognized or regulated as
asset-backed securities transactions, and they are not the type of transactions that

the rule was intended to address. 1988

As a result of comments received on
covered bond vehicles, the final rule specifically excludes from the definition

of covered fund certain entities that own or hold a dynamic or fixed pool of assets that covers the payment obligations of covered bonds. In order to qualify for the exclusion, the assets or holdings in the cover pool must satisfy the

conditions in the loan securitization exclusion, except for the requirementthat the securities they issue are assetbacked securities (the ‘‘permitted cover pool’’). 1989 The Agencies believe this approach is consistent with the rule of

construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act. The rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act specifically refers to the ‘‘sale

and securitization of loans’’ and the Agencies would not want a banking entity to use an excluded cover pool to engage in proprietary trading of such securities prohibited under the final rule. The Agencies believe this restriction reduces the potential for

evasion of the final rule.

By placing restrictions on the assets permitted to be held by a cover pool, the potential for evasion of the covered fund prohibitions is reduced. The exclusion for cover pools is intended, as contemplated by the rule of construction in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, to permit banking entities to continue to engage in lending activities and the financing those lending activities. Including all types of

securities and other assets within the scope of permitted assets in a cover pools would expand the exclusion beyond the scope of the definition of

loan in the final rule that is intended to implement the rule of construction. Additionally, because the exclusion for cover pools is only available to foreign banking organizations, allowing such cover pools to hold securities would provide unequal treatment of covered bonds as compared to a loan securitization sponsored by a U.S. banking entity.

Under the definition of covered bond in the final rule, the debt obligation may be issued directly by a foreign banking organization or by an entity that owns a permitted cover pool. In both cases, the payment obligations of the debt obligation must be fully and unconditionally guaranteed. If the debt obligation is issued by a foreign banking organization, such debt obligation will

be a ‘‘covered bond’’ under the final rule if the payment obligations are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by an entity that owns a permitted cover pool. 1990 If the debt obligation is issued by an entity that owns a permitted cover pool, such debt obligation will be a ‘‘covered bond’’ under the final rule if (i) the payment obligations are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by a foreign banking organization and (ii) the issuer of the debt obligation is a wholly-owned subsidiary (as defined) by such foreign banking organization. 1991 Thus, under
the final rule, a covered bond structure in which an entity holds the cover pool and issues securities that are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by a foreign banking organization may also be able to rely on the loan securitization exclusion if it meets all of the requirements of that

exclusion.

The Agencies recognize that many covered bond programs may involve foreign covered bond programs (and their related cover pools) that are permitted by their respective laws to own residential mortgage-backed

securities and other non-loan assets. As
a result, the exclusion for covered bonds in the final rule may not be available to many of the existing cover pools that support outstanding covered bonds. The Agencies recognize that this approach may not exclude all foreign covered bond programs. Although certain commenters argued that including

covered bond structures in the

definition of covered fund is inconsistent with the legislative intent
of the rule, 1992 the Agencies believe that the exclusion for qualifying covered bonds, including the limitations on the types of securities that a loan
securitization can hold, is consistent

with the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act and appropriate for the reasons discussed directly above and under ‘‘Definition of Loan.’’ The Agencies also recognize that commenters argued that including

covered bonds as covered funds could have a negative and disproportionate effect on foreign banks, markets and economies and would give rise to potential conflicts with such foreign legislative frameworks. 1993 The Agencies note that, although they do not know the composition of the cover pools, the Agencies believe that foreign banking organizations should be able to look at the composition of their cover pools to evaluate how to meet the requirements of the exclusion — and thus to avoid or mitigate the adverse

effects commenters asserted would occur—as they determine appropriate.

11. Certain Permissible Public Welfare

and Similar Funds

Section 13(d)(1)(E) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to make and retain: (i) Investments in one or more small business investment companies (‘‘SBICs’’), as defined in section 103(3)

of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (SBA) (15 U.S.C. 662) 1994; (ii)


### 5970 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1995 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(E).

1996 The proposal implemented a proposed determination by the Agencies under 13(d)(1)(J) ‘‘that a banking entity may not only invest in such entities as provided under section 13(d)(1)(E) of the BHC Act, but also may sponsor an entity described in that paragraph and that such activity, since it generally would facilitate investment in small businesses and support the public welfare, would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States.’’ Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68908

n.292.

1997 See proposed rule § 75.13(a).

1998 See Novogradac (LIHTC); Novogradac (NMTC); Novogradac (RETC); PNC; Raymond James; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012);

SBIA.

1999 See AHIC; Novogradac (LIHTC); Novogradac (NMTC); Novogradac (RETC); SBIA; Union Bank; U.S. Bancorp. 2000 See ABA (Keating); Lone Star; Novogradac (LIHTC); Novogradac (NMTC); Novogradac (RETC); SVB; U.S. Bancorp.

2001 See NCHSA; SBIA; Novogradac (LIHTC); Novogradac (NMTC); Novogradac (RETC).

2002 See SBIA; see also SEC Rule 3c-2.

2003 See ABA (Keating); PNC.

2004 See USAA.

2005 See JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012).

2006 See final rule § 75.10(c)(11). This provision would cover any issuer that engages in the business of making tax credit investments (e.g., Low Income Housing Tax Credit, New Markets Tax Credit, Renewable Energy Tax Credit, Rural Business Investment Company) that are either designed to promote the public welfare of the type permitted under 12 U.S.C. 24 (Eleventh) or are qualified rehabilitation expenditures with respect to a qualified rehabilitated building or certified historic structure, as provided for under § 75.10(c)(11).

2007 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(1).

2008 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter; BoA; Goldman
(Covered Funds); ICI (Feb. 2012); Putnam; TCW; Vanguard. According to these commenters, a registered investment company may use security or commodity futures, swaps, or other commodity
interests in various ways to manage its investment portfolio and be swept into the broad definition of ‘‘commodity pool’’ contained in the Commodity Exchange Act. investments that are designed primarily to promote the public welfare, of the type permitted under paragraph (11) of

section 5136 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24); and (iii) investments that are qualified rehabilitation expenditures with respect to a qualified rehabilitated building or
certified historic structure, as such

terms are defined in section 47 of the

Internal Revenue Code of 1986 or a

similar State historic tax credit

program. 1995 The proposed rule permitted banking entities to invest in and act as sponsor 1996 to these entities, but did not explicitly exclude them

from the definition of covered fund. 1997

Commenters generally supported the proposed exemption for investments in and sponsorship of funds designed to promote the public welfare, SBICs, and other tax credit funds given the valuable funding and assistance these investments provide in facilitating community and economic priorities and the role these investments play in the ability of banking entities, especially community and regional banks, to achieve their financial and Community Reinvestment Act (‘‘CRA’’) goals.
However, commenters raised some issues with respect to the proposed exemption and sought clarification on its application to specific

investments. 1998 Of primary concern to commenters was the impact of the prohibition in section 13(f) of the BHC Act on the ability of a banking entity sponsoring a tax credit fund or its affiliate to guarantee certain obligations of the fund in order to provide

assurance to investors that the investment has been properly structured

to enable the investor to receive the tax

benefits on which the investment are

sold. 1999 Some commenters noted that

failure to address this issue in the final rule would damage a large segment of this market and therefore urged the Agencies to exempt these investments from the application of section 13(f) or,
in the alternative, from the definition of

covered fund. 2000

In addition, commenters requested clarification that specific types of public
welfare, SBIC, and other tax credit investments would be eligible for the exemption, including Low Income Housing Tax Credits, Renewable Energy
Tax Credits, New Markets Tax Credits,

and Rural Business Investment Companies. 2001 One commenter requested that applicants for an SBIC license that have received permission

from the Small Business Administration to file a formal SBIC license application

be viewed the same as an SBIC. 2002 Other commenters sought coverage of

investments in non-SBIC funds thatprovide capital to small and middlemarket companies, 2003 investments in any state administered tax credit

program, 2004 and investments outside the United States that are of the type permitted under paragraph (11) of

section 5136 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24). 2005

In light of the comments received, the

final rule excludes from the definition

of covered fund an issuer that is an SBIC (or that has received from the Small

Business Administration notice to proceed to qualify for a license as an
SBIC, which notice or license has not been revoked) or the business of which is to make investments that are: (i) Designed primarily to promote the public welfare, of the type permitted under paragraph (11) of section 5136 of

the Revised Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24), including the welfare of

low- and moderate-income communities or families (such as providing housing, services, or jobs); or (ii) qualified rehabilitation expenditures with respect to a qualified rehabilitated building or
certified historic structure, as such

terms are defined in section 47 of the

Internal Revenue Code of 1986 or a

similar State historic tax credit

program. 2006 By excluding SBICs and other public

interest funds from the definition of covered fund—rather than provide a permitted activity exemption as proposed—the Agencies addressed commenters’ concerns regarding the burdens imposed by section 13(f). The Agencies believe that excluding these

investments from the definition of covered fund addresses the issues many commenters raised with respect to the application of section 13(f) of the BHC Act, and gives effect to the statutory exemption of these investments in a way that appropriately facilitates national community and economic development objectives. The Agencies believe that permitting a banking entity to sponsor and invest in these types of public interest entities will result in banking entities being able to provide valuable expertise and services to these entities and to provide funding and

assistance to small businesses and lowand moderate-income communities. The Agencies believe that providing the exclusion will also allow banking entities to continue to provide capital to community-improving projects and in some instances promote capital

formation.

12. Registered Investment Companies

and Excluded Entities

The proposed rule did not specifically include registered investment companies (including mutual funds) or business development companies

within the definition of covered

fund. 2007 As explained above, the statute references funds that rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. Registered investment companies and business development companies do not rely on either section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act and are instead registered or regulated in

accordance with the Investment Company Act.

Many commenters argued that registered investment companies and business development companies would

be treated as covered funds under the proposed definition if commodity pools

are treated as covered funds. 2008 A few commenters argued that the final ruleshould specifically provide that all SECVerDate Mar<15>2010 23:00 Jan 30, 2014 Jkt 232001 PO 00000 Frm 00164 Fmt 4701 Sfmt 4700 E:\FR\FM\31JAR3.SGM 31JAR3emcdonald on DSK67QTVN1PROD with RULES3

### 5971 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2009 See Arnold & Porter; Goldman (Covered
Funds); see also SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); ABA (Keating); BoA; ICI (Feb. 2012); JPMC (requesting clarification that registered investment companies are not banking entities); TCW.

2010 See ICI (Feb. 2012); TCW.

2011 See final rule § 75.10(c)(12). 2012 See final rule §§ 75.10(c)(12)(i); 10(c)(12)(iii);
75.20(e).

2013 The Agencies also note that banking entities
with more than $10 billion in total consolidated assets as reported on December 31 of the previous two calendar years must maintain records that include, among other things, documentation of the exclusions or exemptions other than sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 relied on by each fund sponsored by the banking entity in determining that such fund is not a

covered fund. See final rule § 75.20(e).

2014 See also FSOC study. 2015 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb. 2012).

2016 See final rule § 75.10(c)(14).

2017 As discussed above, the Agencies also may determine jointly that an entity excluded from the
definition of covered fund under § 75.10(c) is in fact a covered fund, and consequently banking entities’

investments in and transactions with such fund would be subject to limitations and/or divestiture. The Agencies intend to utilize this authority to monitor for and address, as appropriate, instances

of evasion. See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(2).

2018 A joint determination specified under § 75.10(c)(14) may take a variety of forms. registered funds are excluded from the definition of covered fund (and the definition of banking entity) to avoid any uncertainty about whether section 13 applies to these types of funds. 2009

Commenters also requested that the

final rule exclude from the definition of

covered fund entities formed to establish registered investment companies during the seeding period.
These commenters contended that, during the early stages of forming and seeding a registered investment company, an entity relying on section 3(c)(1) or (3)(c)(7) may be created to facilitate the development of a track record for the registered investment company so that it may be marketed to

unaffiliated investors. 2010

Section 13’s definition of private equity fund and hedge fund by reference to section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act appears to reflect Congress’ concerns about banking entities’ exposure to and relationships with investment funds that explicitly are excluded from SEC regulation as investment companies. The Agencies do not believe it would be appropriate to treat as a covered fund registered investment companies and business development companies, which are regulated by the SEC as investment companies. The Agencies believe that the proposed rule’s inclusion of commodity pools would have resulted in some registered investment companies and business development companies being covered funds, a result the Agencies did not intend. The Agencies, in addition to narrowing the commodity pools that

will be included as covered funds as
discussed above, have also modified the final rule to exclude SEC-registered investment companies and business development companies from the

definition of covered fund. 2011

The Agencies also recognize that an entity that becomes a registered investment company or business development company might, during its seeding period, rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). The Agencies have determined to exclude these seeding vehicles from

the covered fund definition for the same reasons the Agencies determined to exclude entities that are operating as registered investment companies or business development companies as

discussed above. In order to prevent banking entities from purporting to use this exclusion for vehicles that the banking entity does not reasonably expect to become a registered investment company or business development company, the exclusion is available only with respect to a vehicle that the banking entity operates (i) pursuant to a written plan, developed in accordance with the banking entity’s compliance program, that reflects the banking entity’s

determination that the vehicle will become a registered investment company or business development company within the time period provided by the final rule for seeding a covered fund; (ii) consistently with the leverage requirements under the Investment Company Act of 1940 that are applicable to registered investment companies and SEC-regulated business development companies. 2012 A banking entity that seeds a covered fund for any purpose other than to register it as an investment company or establish a business development company must comply with the requirements of section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act and § 75.11

of the final rule as described above. The Agencies will monitor this seeding activity for attempts to use this exclusion to evade the requirements governing the ownership of and relationships with covered funds under

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final

rule. 2013

13. Other Excluded Entities

Section 13(h)(2) permits the Agencies

to include similar funds within the
definition of covered fund, but the proposal did not contain a process for excluding from the definition of covered fund other entities that do not engage in the investment activities contemplated by section 13. Many commenters argued that the breadth of entities that may be required to rely on the exclusions in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act could result in

additional unidentified entities becoming subject to the definition of

covered fund. 2014 In order to ensure that the final rule effectively addresses the full scope of entities that may inadvertently be included within the
definition of covered fund, a number of commenters urged that the final rule

include a mechanism to exclude other

entities from the term ‘‘covered fund’’ by rule or order if the Agencies

determine such an exclusion is appropriate. 2015

As evidenced by the extensive comments discussed above identifying the many types of corporate structures and other vehicles (not just investment funds) that rely on sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) but do not engage in investment activities of the type contemplated by section 13, the scope of an overly broad definition of covered fund may impose significant burdens on banking entities that are in conflict with the purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act. In response

to commenters’ concerns and to address the potential that the final rule’s definition of covered fund might encompass entities that do not engage in the investment activities contemplated by section 13, the final rule includes a provision that provides that the Agencies may jointly determine to

exclude an issuer from the definition of

covered fund if the exclusion is consistent with the purposes of section

13 of the BHC Act. 2016

As noted above, the statute permits the Agencies to act by rule to modify the definition of covered fund. After issuing the proposed rule and receiving comment on it, the final rule provides that the Agencies may act jointly to provide an exclusion. 2017 The Agencies are working to establish a process within which to evaluate requests for exclusions and expect to provide additional guidance on this matter as the Agencies gain experience with the

final rule. 2018 As a result, the definition

of covered fund would remain unified

and consistent. The final rule also provides that a determination by the Agencies to exclude an entity from the

definition of covered fund will be promptly made public in order to ensure that both banking entities and the public may understand what entities

are and are not included within the

definition of covered fund.


### 5972 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2019 See, e.g., PNC; SVB; SIFMA (Securitization)
(Feb. 2012); AFME et al.; BoA. See also, e.g., Credit
Suisse (Williams). 2020 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Credit Suisse (Williams).

2021 12 USC 5461 et seq.

2022 See id. 2023 Section 3(b)(1) of the Investment Company

Act excludes from the definition of investment company ‘‘[a]ny issuer primarily engaged, directly or through a wholly-owned subsidiary or
subsidiaries, in a business or businesses other than that of investing, reinvesting, owning, holding, or trading in securities.’’

2024 See 12 U.S.C. 1562(6); 12 CFR Part 234.

2025 See RMA; State Street (Feb. 2012); see also

BNY Mellon et al.

2026 See RMA; State Street (Feb. 2012).

2027 See RMA; BNY Mellon et al. (citing Comptroller’s Handbook: Custody Services (Jan.
2002)).

2028 See RMA. d. Entities Not Specifically Excluded

From the Definition of Covered Fund

In addition to the entities identified

above which are excluded from the

definition of covered fund under the final rule, commenters argued that a

number of other entities such as
financial market utilities, venture capital funds, credit funds, cash management vehicles or cash collateral pools may also be an investment company but for the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act and requested that these entities expressly

be excluded from the final rule’s

definition of covered fund. The Agencies have considered carefully the

comments received on each of these entities but, for the reasons explained below, have declined to provide a separate exclusion for them from the

definition of covered fund at this time.
As discussed below, some of these

entities are not covered funds for various reasons or may, with relatively
little cost, conform to the terms of an exclusion or exemption from the

definition of covered fund. As noted
above, to the extent that one of these entities qualifies for one or more of the

other exclusions from the definition of covered fund, that entity would not be a covered fund under the final rule. Any entity that would be a covered fund would still be able to rely on the conformance period in order to come into compliance with the requirements

of section 13 and the final rule.

A number of commenters requested that certain existing covered funds be

either excluded from the definition of covered fund or grandfathered and not be subject to the limitations of section

13 of the BHC Act. 2019 The Agencies
note, however, that section 13 specifically addresses a banking entity’s preexisting investments in covered funds by providing a conformance period, which banking entities may use to bring their activities and investments into compliance with the requirements

of section 13 and the final rule. To the

extent that section 13 could be interpreted to permit the Agencies to take a different approach, despite addressing banking entities’ preexisting covered fund investments directly, the Agencies believe it would be inconsistent with the purposes of section 13 to permit banking entities to continue to hold ownership interests in covered funds beyond the conformance period provided by the statute. Section 13’s prohibition on banking entities’ investments in and relationships with covered funds and the requirement that banking entities divest or conform these investments appear to reflect the statutory purpose that banking entities be limited in their ability to continue to be exposed to these investments outside of the statutorily-provided conformance period. The Agencies believe that permitting banking entities to hold ownership interests indefinitely beyond the conformance period provided by the statute appears inconsistent with this

purpose.

1. Financial Market Utilities

Several commenters contended that financial market utilities (‘‘FMUs’’) could be covered funds because they might rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7)

for an exclusion from the definition of investment company under the Investment Company Act and may not qualify for an alternative exemption. 2020 These commenters argued that banking entities have long been investors in domestic and foreign FMUs, such as securities clearing agencies, derivatives clearing organizations, securities exchanges, derivatives boards of trade and alternative trading systems. These commenters expressed concern that, unless FMUs are expressly excluded
from the definition of covered fund, banking entities could be prohibited from entering into any new covered

transactions with related FMUs and would be required to divest their investments in FMUs, thereby disrupting the operations of those FMUs and financial markets generally.

After carefully considering commenters’ concerns, the Agencies

believe that FMUs are not investment vehicles of the type section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address, but rather entities that generally engage in other activities, including acting as central counterparties that reduce counterparty risk in clearing and settlement activities. Congress recognized, in the Payment, Clearing, and Settlement Supervision Act of 2010 (title VIII of the Dodd-Frank Act), 2021 that properly designed, operated, and supervised financial market utilities as defined in that Act mitigate systemic risk and promote financial stability. 2022

However, the Agencies have not provided an exclusion from the covered

fund definition for FMUs because these kinds of entities do not generally appear to rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, and therefore do not appear to need an exclusion. For example, section 3(b)(1) of the Investment Company Act excludes from the definition of investment company—

and thus from the definition of a covered fund—entities primarily engaged in a business other than that of an investment company. 2023 If an FMU is primarily engaged in a business other

than those that would make it an investment company, for example, if the FMU is primarily engaged in transferring, clearing, or settling payments, securities, or other financial transactions among or between financial

institutions, 2024 the FMU could rely on

the exclusion to the definition of investment company provided by section 3(b)(1) and would not need to rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) and, as
such, would not be a covered fund.

2. Cash Collateral Pools

Some commenters expressed concern that cash collateral pools, which are part of securities lending programs, could be

included in the definition of covered

fund. 2025 According to these commenters, banking entities, including bank custodians acting as lending agent for customer’s securities lending activities, typically manage these pools

as fiduciaries for their customers. 2026 These commenters argued that collateral pools are part of a banks’ traditional custody and advisory services and have been an integral part of any lendingagent’s role (whether custodial or noncustodial) for years. 2027

Cash collateral pools are typically formed when, as part of a securities lending program, a customer of a bank

authorizes the bank to take securities

from the customer’s account and lend them in the open market. The agent

bank then lends those securities and

receives collateral in return from the borrower; a securities lending customer of a bank typically elects to have cash collateral provided by a borrower pooled by the agent bank with other cash collateral provided to other

clients. 2028 These investment pools may exist in the form of trusts, partnerships, limited liability companies, or separate


### 5973 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2029 See RMA.

2030 See RMA.

2031 See State Street; RMA. Commenters also argued that as part of offering pooled cash collateral management, agent banks have traditionally provided short-term extensions of credit and

contractual income and settlement services to lending clients and cash collateral pools to facilitate

trade settlement and related cash collateral

investment activities. See RMA. One commenter further argued that if banks are required to ‘‘outsource’’ cash collateral pools and/or the related short-term credit services provided to the pools, ‘‘participation in securities lending programs would only be cost effective for the largest lending clients’’ and, as a result, ‘‘many small and intermediate securities lending clients would be denied the incremental revenue securities lending can provide’’; ‘‘securities lending programs could lose significant diversification in lending clients, lendable assets, borrowers and agent banks’’; and,
as a result of lost revenues, ‘‘the actual costs of [ ] custodial or other services provided to clients that no longer participate in lending would increase.’’

Id.

2032 See RMA.

2033 See RMA.

2034 See RMA. 2035 For instance, the Agencies understand that a banking entity may set up a cash collateral pool in

reliance on the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(3) of the Investment Company Act, or may be able to structure these pools as SEC-registered money market funds operated in accordance with rule 2a–7 under the Investment Company Act. 2036 See PNC.

2037 See PNC.

2038 See ABA (Keating); PNC.

2039 See ABA (Keating); PNC.

2040 See PNC; ABA (Keating). These commenters argued that most REIT preferred securities contain a conditional exchange provision that allows the primary regulator to direct that the preferred securities be automatically exchanged for preferred shares of the bank or parent BHC upon occurrence of a conditional exchange event. Because this arrangement involves the purchase of securities issued by an affiliate or the purchase of assets, it would be prohibited under section 13(f) of the BHC Act if the pass-through REIT were a covered fund. accounts maintained by more than one party and these structures may rely on sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act to avoid being an investment company. 2029 While their ownership interest may be nominal in amount, the agent banks may hold a general partnership, limited liability company membership or trustee interest in the cash collateral pool. 2030 As part of these arrangements, custodian banks routinely offer borrower default

indemnifications to the securities lender in a securities lending transactions.

Commenters raised concerns that these indemnification agreements could

be considered a covered transaction prohibited by section 13(f) of the BHC

Act. 2031 Since some cash collateral pools are established outside of the United States, commenters requested that the final rule permit banking

entities to have interests in andrelationships with both U.S. and nonU.S. cash collateral pools. 2032 These commenters suggested that cash collateral pools be excluded from the
definition of covered fund or, in the alternative, that the Agencies make clear that cash collateral pools managed by agent banks qualify for the exemption in § 75.11 of the proposed rule for organizing and offering a covered fund and that the prime brokerage exemption from the restrictions of section 13(f) would permit the indemnification and income or settlement services agent banks typically provide to the pools. 2033 These commenters also suggested that the Agencies use their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) to provide an exemption for banking entities to

continue to have interests in and provide services to these types of pools. 2034 After carefully considering comments received, the final rule does not provide a specific exclusion from the definition

of covered fund for cash collateral pools. The Agencies have determined to provide specific exclusions for entities

that do not function as investment
funds, consistent with the intent of section 13’s restrictions, or in response to other unique considerations (e.g., to provide consistent treatment for certain foreign and domestic pension plans). These considerations do not support a separate exclusion for cash collateral pools.

The Agencies note, however, that some cash collateral pools may not be covered funds because they rely on an

exclusion from the definition of investment company other than those contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 2035 Banking entities may determine to register cash collateral pools with the SEC as investment companies or to operate them as separate accounts to exclude the pools from the covered fund definition or, if the pools remain covered funds, to organize and offer them in compliance with the requirements of § 75.11 of the final rule.

In response to comments received on the proposal, the Agencies note that the provision of a borrower default indemnification by a banking entity to a lending client in connection with securities lending transactions involving

a covered fund is not a covered transaction subject to 13(f) or a guarantee of the performance or obligations of a covered fund prohibited
under § 75.11 of the final rule. Those restrictions apply to transactions with the covered fund or guarantees of the covered fund’s performance. Borrower default indemnifications are provided to the bank’s securities lending customer, not to the cash collateral pool.

3. Pass-Through REITS

Some banking entities may issue real estate investment trust (‘‘REIT’’) preferred securities to the public directly from a subsidiary that qualifies for the exclusion in section 3(c)(5) or section 3(c)(6) of the Investment Company Act. These entities would not

be considered a ‘‘covered fund’’ because they may rely on an exclusion from the definition of an investment company

other than the exclusion in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 2036 However, in order to

meet the demands of customers and avoid undesirable tax consequences, some banking entities structure theirREIT offerings by using a passive, passthrough statutory trust between the banking entity and the REIT to issue REIT preferred securities to the public. 2037 Because the pass-through trust holds the preferred securities of the underlying REIT (which would itself not be a covered fund), as well as provides administrative and ministerial functions for the REIT (including passing through dividends from the underlying REIT), the pass-through trust may not itself rely on the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(5) or 3(c)(6) and, thus, typically relies on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7). 2038

Some commenters urged the Agencies to provide an exclusion for pass-through

REITS from the definition of covered

fund. 2039 These commenters argued that because the pass-through trust exists as a corporate convenience as part of issuing REIT preferred securities to the banking entity and its customers, it is not the type of entity that the covered fund prohibition in section 13 of the

BHC Act was intended to address. Thesecommenters also argued that passthrough REITs enable banking entities to offer preferable tax treatment to holders of the REIT preferred securities and that if pass-through REITs were included as
covered funds, because of the

limitations on covered transactions contained in section 13(f), the minority interests in the preferred securities issued by the REIT would no longer be able to be included in a banking entity’s tier 1 capital, thereby negatively impacting the safety and soundness of the banking entity. 2040

The Agencies are not providing a specific exclusion from the definition of covered fund for pass-through REITs because the Agencies are concerned that such an exclusion could enable banking

entities to structure non-loansecuritization transactions using a passthrough entity in a manner inconsistent

with the final rule’s treatment of similar

vehicles that invest in securities.


### 5974 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2041 The Agencies recognize that banking entities may have relied on pass-through REIT structures to issue preferred securities in the past and prohibiting such transactions may pose inefficiencies. Furthermore, it may not be possible to unwind or conform past issuances without significant effort by the banking entity and negotiation with the holders of the preferred
securities. As noted above, in these circumstances, section 13 provides a conformance period which banking entities may take advantage of in order to bring their activities and investments into compliance with the requirements of section 13 and

the final rule.

2042 See, e.g., Ashurst; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Cadwalader (Municipal Securities); Vanguard; ICI (Feb. 2012); ASF (Feb. 2012); Fidelity; Wells Fargo
(Covered Funds). Commenters also noted that tender option bond programs as currently structured may not meet the requirements of section 3(a)(5) of the Investment Company Act or rule 3a– 7 thereunder, or any other exclusion or exemption under the Investment Company Act. See Ashurst;
RBC; ASF (Feb. 2012). 2043 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); BDA (Feb. 2012); Eaton Vance; Fidelity; ICI (Feb. 2012); RBC; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (May 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Vanguard.

2044 See Ashurst; ASF (Feb. 2012).

2045 See ASF (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 13, 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012).

See also Cadwalader (Municipal Securities) (alleging that the legislative history of section 13 of the BHC Act suggests that the exemption relating to municipal securities should not be construed to apply only to the section of the rule pertaining to the proprietary trading prohibitions); BDA (Feb. 2012) (arguing that any fund or trust the assets of which are entirely invested in any of the obligations that are excluded from the proprietary trading prohibitions should also be excluded from the
definition of covered fund).

2046 See, e.g., Ashurst; Cadwalader (Municipal Securities); Eaton Vance; Nuveen Asset Mgmt.; SIFMA (Municipal Securities) (Feb. 13, 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Vanguard; Wells Fargo (Covered Funds); Citigroup (Jan. 2012).

2047 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Jan. 2012); Vanguard; Wells Fargo (Covered Funds); Cadwalader (Municipal
Securities); Ashurst. 2048 See Cadwalader (Municipal Securities); ICI
(Feb. 2012); Ashurst; ASF (Feb. 2012).

2049 See Cadwalader (Municipal Securities).

2050 See RBC.

2051 See ICI (Feb. 2012).

2052 See ASF (Feb. 2012).

2053 See RBC.

2054 See Ashurst.

2055 See, e.g., RBC; ASF (Mar. 2012); ASF (Feb.
2012).

2056 The Agencies received a variety of requests requesting specific treatment of tender option bond

transactions. See, e.g., supra notes 2050–2055. As discussed above, the Agencies believe that, in light of the comments received, tender option bond

vehicles do not fall within the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act and, as a result, the final rule does not provide such

treatment.

2057 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(2). Furthermore, banking entities have alternative manners in which they may issue or hold REIT preferred securities, including through REITs directly, which

do not raise the same concerns about

evasion. 2041

4. Municipal Securities Tender Option

Bond Transactions

The Agencies received a number of comments addressing how the final rule should treat municipal securities tender option bond vehicles. A number of commenters argued that issuers of municipal securities tender option

bonds would fall under the definition of covered fund in the proposed rule because these issuers typically rely on

the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. 2042 According to commenters, a typical tender option bond transaction consists of the depositof a single issue of highly-rated, longterm municipal bonds in a trust and the issuance by the trust of two classes of securities: a floating rate, puttable security (the ‘‘floaters’’), and an inverse floating rate security (the ‘‘residual’’) with no tranching involved. According
to commenters, the holders of the floaters have the right, generally on a daily or weekly basis, to put the floaters for purchase at par. The put right is supported by a liquidity facility delivered by a highly-rated provider (in many cases, the banking entity sponsoring the trust) and allows the

floaters to be treated as a short-term security. The floaters are in large part purchased and held by money market mutual funds. The residual is held by a longer-term investor (in many cases the banking entity sponsoring the trust, or an insurance company, mutual fund, or hedge fund). According to commenters,

the residual investors take all of the

market and structural risk related to the tender option bonds structure, with the investors in floaters taking only limited, well-defined insolvency and default risks associated with the underlying municipal bonds generally equivalent to the risks associated with investing in the municipal bonds directly. According
to commenters, the structure of tender option bond transactions is governed by certain provisions of the Internal Revenue Code in order to preserve the tax-exempt treatment of the underlying municipal securities.

Many commenters requested a specific exclusion for municipal tender option bond vehicles from the definition

of a covered fund. 2043 These commenters argued that, without an

exclusion from the definition of covered fund, banking entities would be prohibited from owning or sponsoring tender option bonds and from providing credit enhancement, liquidity support, remarketing, and other services required in connection with a tender option bond

program. 2044 Commenters argued that tender option bond vehicles should be
excluded because section 13(d)(1)(A) of the BHC Act already allows banking entities to own and dispose of municipal securities directly, 2045 tender option bonds are economically similar to repurchase agreements, which are expressly excluded from the proprietary trading restrictions of the proposed rule, and, because they are safe and low risk are similar to the types of transactions that the proposed rule would have exempted. 2046 Commenters also argued that tender option bonds are different from other covered funds that rely on

the exclusion contained in section
3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act 2047 and play an important role in the municipal bond markets. 2048 Commenters requested that the Agencies use their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act to exclude tender option bonds because they argued that tender option bonds promote the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States by providing for a deeper, richer pool of potential investors, a larger and more liquid market for municipal securities that results in lower borrowing costs for municipalities and other issuers of municipal securities, and greater efficiency and risk diversification. 2049 Commenters also suggested a number of other ways to exclude tender option bonds, including defining ownership interest to exclude any interest in a tender option bond transaction; 2050 defining banking entity to exclude tender option bond issuers; 2051 expanding the loan securitization exclusion to include tender option bond

issuers; 2052 and revising the definition of sponsor to exclude sponsors of tender option bond vehicles. 2053 One commenter urged the Commission to consider amending the exemption under

rule 3a–7 under the Investment Company Act or providing formal guidance regarding the status of tender option bond programs. 2054 In addition, some commenters requested an exclusion for tender option bond transactions from the provisions of section 13(f) of the BHC Act. 2055

After carefully considering the
comments received, the final rule does not provide a specific exclusion from

the definition of covered fund or from the prohibitions and requirements of the final rule for tender option bond

vehicles. 2056 The Agencies have determined to provide specific exclusions for entities that they believe

fall within the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, which expressly relates to the sale
and securitization of loans, 2057 do not


### 5975 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2058 For these same reasons, and based on the definitions of sponsor and banking entity in section 13, the Agencies have not modified those definitions in the final rule to exclude sponsors of tender options bonds and tender bond issuers, respectively, as some commenters requested. See

supra notes 2051 and 2053 and accompanying text.

2059 Commenters also argued that to the extent tender option bond programs are not excluded from
the definition of covered fund, the definition of ownership interest should exclude any interest in a tender option bond program (see RBC) or that where a third party owns the residual, the banking entity should not be treated as having an ownership
interest, even when it owns a small interest for tax purposes or becomes the owner through liquidity or remarketing agreements (see Cadwalader (Municipal Securities)). The definition of ownership interest in the final rule focuses on the
attributes of the interest, as discussed below, and not the particular type of covered fund involved. The Agencies are not providing separate definitions of or exclusions from the ownership interest definition based on the type of vehicle or financing

involved. See infra note 2103 and preceding and following text. Banking entities will need to evaluate whether the interests they may acquire are ownership interests as defined under the final rule. 2060 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f).

2061 As discussed above, while commenters requested treatment of municipal tender option
bond vehicles that would cause section 13(f) of the BHC Act not to apply to them, the final rule does

not exclude these vehicles from the definition of covered fund or the prohibitions relating to covered
funds. As a result, section 13(f) of the BHC Act will apply to a banking entity that is sponsoring a tender option bond vehicle.

2062 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Nuveen Asset Mgmt.

2063 See Ashurst.

2064 See Eaton Vance. 2065 See SVB; NVCA; Rep. Eshoo; Sen. Boxer; Rep. Goodlatte; Rep. Schweikert; Rep. Speier; Rep. Honda; Rep. Lofgren; Rep. Peters et al.

2066 See, e.g., NVCA; SVB; Scale.

2067 See, e.g., SVB; Scale; Sen. Boxer; SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012) (citing a colloquy between Sen. Dodd and Sen. Boxer supporting an exemption for venture capital funds (156 Cong. Rec. H5226 (daily ed., June 30, 2010)).

2068 See River Cities; Scale. See also Sofinnova; Canaan (Young); Canaan (Ahrens); Canaan (Kamra); Mohr Davidow; ATV; BlueRun; Westly; Charles River; Flybridge; SVB.

2069 See, e.g., SVB. function as investment funds, consistent

with the intent of section 13’s restrictions, or in response to other unique considerations. The Agencies do

not believe that these considerations support a separate exclusion for tender option bond vehicles, which have municipal securities as underlying

assets and not loans.

The Agencies recognize commenters’

concerns about the treatment of tender option bonds under the final rule, as
discussed above. However, as there is no corresponding rule of construction in

section 13 of the BHC Act for financial
instruments other than loans, the Agencies do not believe that the resecuritization of municipal debt

instruments should be treated differently than the resecuritization of

other debt instruments. 2058 Notwithstanding the statutory treatment of municipal securities for purposes of the proprietary trading restrictions, the Agencies also do not believe that tender option bond vehicles fall within the rule

of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act, because, in light of commenters’ descriptions of these vehicles, tender option bond

vehicles are more in the nature of other types of bond repackaging

securitizations and other non-excluded

securitization vehicles. 2059 The final rule, however, does not prevent a banking entity from owning or otherwise participating in a tender option bond vehicle; it requires that

these activities be conducted in the

same manner as with other covered

funds.

In this regard, under the final rule, a banking entity would need to evaluate whether a tender option bond vehicle is

a covered fund as defined in the final rule. If a tender option bond vehicle is

a covered fund and an exclusion from
that definition is not available, then banking entities sponsoring such a vehicle will be subject to the prohibitions in § 75.14 of the final rule and the provisions of section 13(f) of the

BHC Act. 2060

As tender option bond vehicles are

considered issuers of asset-backed securities subject to the risk retention requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act, banking entities may look to the provisions of the final rule governing the limits applicable to banking entities’ interests in and relationships with those funds. Under
the final rule, as in the statute, a banking entity that conducts the
activities described in section 13(f) of the BHC Act is subject to the restrictions on transactions with a tender option bond vehicle, including guaranteeing or insuring the performance of the tender option bond vehicle, contained in
section 13(f) of the BHC Act. As a result, a banking entity is not permitted to provide credit enhancement, liquidity support, and other similar services if it serves in a capacity covered by section 13(f) with the tender option bond

program. 2061 An unaffiliated third party may provide such services if it does not have a relationship with the tender option bond vehicle that triggers application of section 13(f). The extent

to which the final rule causes a disruption to the securitization of, and market for, municipal tender option bonds may also affect the economic burden and effects on the municipal bond market and its participants, including money market mutual

funds 2062 and issuers of municipal securities. The Agencies recognize that a potential economic burden may be an increase in financing costs to municipalities as a result of a decrease in demand for the types of municipal securities customarily included in municipal tender option bond

vehicles 2063 and therefore potential effects on the depth and liquidity of the market for certain types of municipal

securities. 2064 5. Venture Capital Funds

Some private equity funds that make investments in early-stage start-up companies or other companies with significant growth potential (‘‘venture capital funds’’) would be investment companies but for the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act. Venture capital funds would therefore qualify as a covered fund under the proposal. The proposal specifically requested comment on whether venture capital

funds should be excluded from the

definition of ‘‘covered fund.’’

Some commenters argued that venture capital funds should be treated differently than other covered funds and

excluded from the definition. These commenters argued that, unlike conventional hedge funds and private equity funds, venture capital funds do not possess high leverage and do not engage in risky trading activities of the type section 13 of the BHC Act was designed to address. 2065 These

commenters contended that investments and relationships by banking entities in venture capital funds would be consistent with safety and soundness; provide important funding and expertise and other services to start-up companies; and provide positive benefits to employment, GDP, growth,

and innovation. 2066 These commenters argued that restricting banking entities’ ability to invest in or sponsor venture capital funds would have a negative impact on companies and the U.S. economy generally. 2067 Some

commenters asserted that bank investments in venture capital funds are important to the success of venture capital, 2068 with some citing a consulting firm’s data indicating that approximately 7 percent of all venture capital is provided by banks. 2069 One commenter argued, therefore, that ‘‘preventing banks from investing in venture thus could depress U.S. GDP by roughly 1.5% (or $215 billion annually) and eliminate nearly 1% of all U.S. private sector employment over the long term,’’ and the funding gap that would

result if banks could not invest in venture capital funds would not be met


### 5976 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2070 See SVB.

2071 See, e.g., SVB (arguing that the definition of ‘‘venture capital fund’’ in section 203(l)–1 of the

Investment Advisers Act and the SEC’s Form PF reporting requirements for investment advisers to private funds would be instructive for defining an exclusion for venture capital funds for purposes of
section 13 of the BHC Act).

2072 See Occupy.

2073 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2074 See S. Rep. No. 111–176, at 71–3 (2010) (‘‘S. Rep. No. 111–176’’); H. Rep. No. 111–517, at 866 (2010) (‘‘H. Rep. No. 111–517’’). H. Rep. No. 111– 517 contains the conference report accompanying

the version of H.R. 4173 that was debated in

conference. See S. Rep. No. 111–176, at 74 (‘‘The Committee believes that venture capital funds, a subset of private investment funds specializing in long-term equity investment in small or start-up businesses, do not present the same risks as the large private funds whose advisers are required to register with the SEC under this title.’’). Compare Restoring American Financial Stability Act of 2010, S. 3217, 111th Cong. Sec. 408 (2010) (as passed by
the Senate) with The Wall Street Reform and
Consumer Protection Act of 2009, H.R. 4173, 111th Cong. (2009) (as passed by the House) (‘‘H.R. 4173’’)
and Dodd-Frank Act (2010).

2075 But see Rep. Honda. 2076 These funds all typically offer their shares on an unregistered basis in reliance on section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act of 1933 or Regulation D thereunder (17 CFR 230.500 through 230.508). 2077 As noted above, some commenters quantified the importance of banking entities to the provision of venture capital by providing information indicating that approximately 7 percent of all venture capital is provided by banks. See, e.g., SVB (citing ‘‘The Venture Capital Industry: A Preqin Special Report,’’ published by Preqin, Ltd. (Oct.
2010)). The 7% estimate commenters identified

includes information on investors based in North America, Europe, and Asia; thus, although potentially indicative of the extent of venture capital investing by banking entities in venture capital funds, the estimate does not specifically address the proportion of investment by banking entities in venture capital funds that are covered
funds, as those terms are defined in the final rule.

2078 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H); 12 CFR 225.170

et seq.

2079 See 15 U.S.C. 80a–54. Companies that have elected to be treated as a business development company are subject to limits under the Investment Company Act, including: (i) Limits on how much debt the business development company may incur; (ii) prohibitions on certain affiliated transactions; (iii) regulation and examination by the SEC; and (iv) registration and filing requirements. by other market participants if bank investments in venture capital were

restricted. 2070 Several commenters recommended that venture capital funds be excluded if they: (i) Do not fundamentally engage in proprietary trading; (ii) do not use leverage to increase investment returns; and (iii) typically invest in high-growth start-up companies as compared to more mature publicly traded companies. 2071

Conversely, one commenter alleged that there was no credible way to exclude venture capital funds without providing a means to circumvent the requirements of section 13 and the final

rule. 2072 Another commenter argued that venture capital funds do in fact engage in risky activities and that, instead of making investments in venture capital funds, banking entities may directly extend credit to start-up companies in a safe and sound

manner. 2073

The final rule does not provide an exclusion for venture capital funds. The Agencies believe that the statutory language of section 13 does not support providing an exclusion for venture capital funds from the definition of covered fund. Congress explicitly recognized and treated venture capital funds as a subset of private equity funds in various parts of the Dodd-Frank Act

and accorded distinct treatment for venture capital fund advisers by exempting them from registration requirements under the Investment

Advisers Act. 2074 This indicates that Congress knew how to distinguish venture capital funds from other types of private equity funds when it desired

to do so. 2075 No such distinction appears in section 13 of the BHC Act. Because Congress chose to distinguish between private equity and venture capital in one part of the Dodd-Frank Act, but chose not to do so for purposes of section 13, the Agencies believe it is appropriate to follow this Congressional

determination.

In addition to the language of the statute, it appears to the Agencies that the activities and risk profiles for banking entities regarding sponsorship of, and investment in, venture capital funds and private equity funds are not readily distinguishable. Many key structural and operational characteristics of venture capital funds are substantially similar to those of hedge funds and private equity funds, thereby making it difficult to define venture capital funds in a manner that would not provide banking entities with an opportunity to evade the restrictions

of section 13 of the BHC Act.

For instance, in addition to relying on the same exemptions under the

Securities Act, 2076 venture capital funds, private equity funds and hedge funds all rely on the exclusion in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) from the definition of investment company under the Investment Company Act. Moreover, like private equity funds, venture capital funds pool funds from multiple

investors and invest those funds in interests of portfolio companies for the purpose of profiting from the resale of
those interests. Indeed, funds that are called ‘‘venture capital funds’’ may invest in the very same entities and to

the same extent as do funds that call themselves private equity funds. Venture capital funds, like private equity funds, also typically charge incentive compensation to fund investors based on the price appreciation achieved on the investments held by the fund and provide a return of principal plus gains at specific times during the limited life of the fund. Not including venture capital funds in the definition of
covered fund, therefore, could allow banking entities, either directly or indirectly, to engage in the type of activities section 13 was designed to

address.

While the final rule does not provide a separate exclusion for venture capital

funds from the definition of covered fund, the Agencies recognize that certain venture capital investments by banking entities provide capital and funding to nascent or early-stage companies and small businesses and also may provide these companies expertise and other services. 2077 Other provisions of the final rule or the statute may facilitate, or at least not impede, other forms of investing that may provide the same or similar benefits. For example, in addition to permitting a banking entity to organize and offer a covered fund in section 13(d)(1)(G),

section 13 of the BHC Act does not prohibit a banking entity, to the extent otherwise permitted under applicable law, from making a venture capital-style investment in a company or business so long as that investment is not through or in a covered fund, such as through a direct investment made pursuant to merchant banking authority 2078 or through business development companies which are not covered funds and, like venture capital funds, often invest in small, early-stage companies. 2079

Thus, to the extent that banking entities are required to reduce their investments in venture capital funds, certain of these investments may be redirected to the types of entities in which venture capital funds invest through alternative means. To the extent that banking entities may reduce their investments in venture capital funds that are covered funds, the potential funding gap for venture capital funds may also be offset, in whole or in part, by investments from firms that are not banking entities and thus not subject to

section 13’s restrictions.

6. Credit Funds

Several commenters requested that the final rule explicitly exclude from the

definition of covered fund entities that are generally formed as partnerships with third-party capital and invest in

loans or make loans or otherwise extend the type of credit that banks are


### 5977 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2080 See, e.g., Goldman (Covered Funds); ABA (Keating); Credit Suisse (Williams); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Chamber (Feb. 2012).

2081 See ABA (Keating); Goldman (Covered
Funds).

2082 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2083 See Goldman (Covered Funds).

2084 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also. ABA (Keating); Chamber (Feb.
2012). 2085 See, e.g., ABA (Keating), Credit Suisse
(Williams), Arnold & Porter (as it relates to commodity pools). Section 2(a)(13) of the Investment Company Act generally defines an ESC as ‘‘any investment company or similar issuer all of the outstanding securities of which (other than short-term paper) are beneficially owned’’ by employees and certain related persons (e.g., employees’ immediate family members).

2086 Section 6(b) of the Investment Company Act provides, in part, that ‘‘[u]pon application by any employees’ security company, the Commission shall by order exempt such company from the provisions of this title and of the rules and regulations hereunder, if and to the extent that such exemption is consistent with the protection of

investors.’’

2087 See Credit Suisse (Williams). 2088 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(3).

2089 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68897. authorized to undertake on their own
balance sheet (‘‘credit funds’’). 2080 Two

commenters contended that the language of section 13(g)(2) indicates that Congress did not intend section 13 of the BHC Act to limit a banking entity’s ability to extend credit. 2081 They argued that lending is a fundamental banking activity, whether accomplished through direct loans or through a fund structure. These commenters argued that credit funds functioned like syndicated loans that enable borrowers to secure credit during periods of market distress and reduce

the concentration of risk for both individual banking entities and the banking system as a whole.

Commenters suggested different approaches for excluding credit funds

from the definition of covered fund. One commenter recommended excluding an entity that would otherwise be a covered fund if more than 50 percent of

its assets consist of loans. 2082 Another commenter proposed defining a credit fund as an entity that met a number of criteria designed to ensure the entity only held loans or otherwise engaged in prudent lending activity. 2083 Another commenter requested that the Agencies use their authority under section 13(d)(1)(J) to permit a banking entity to sponsor, invest in, or enter into covered

transactions with related credit funds

that are covered funds. 2084

The Agencies, however, are unable effectively to distinguish credit funds from other types of private equity funds or hedge funds in a manner that would give effect to the language and purpose

of section 13 and not raise concerns about banking entities being able to evade the requirements of section 13. Moreover, the Agencies also believe that the final rule largely addresses commenters’ concerns in other ways because some credit funds may be able to rely on another exclusion from the

definition of covered fund in the final rule such as the exclusion for joint
ventures or the exclusion, discussed
above, for loan securitizations. To the extent that a credit fund may rely on

another exclusion from the definition of
covered fund, it would not be a covered

fund under section 13 of the BHC Act. 7. Employee Securities Companies

Several commenters argued that employee securities companies (‘‘ESCs’’) should be explicitly excluded

from the definition of covered fund. 2085 One commenter alleged that, though many ESCs could qualify for the exemption in section 6(b) of the Investment Company Act, they often opt to rely on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7)

instead due to the fact that the section 6(b) exemption is available only upon application to the SEC. 2086 According to
this commenter, the limitations contained in section 13 on employee investments and intercompany

transactions with covered funds would severely limit the ability of a banking entity to design competitive employee compensation arrangements. 2087 This commenter also argued that an exclusion should be provided for any

investment vehicle that satisfies the

definition of an ESC under section 2(a)(13) of the Investment Company Act.

After considering carefully the comments received on the proposed rule, the final rule does not provide a specific exclusion for ESCs because the Agencies believe that these vehicles may avoid being a covered fund by either complying with the conditions of

another exclusion from the definition of covered fund or seeking and receiving an exemption available under section 6(b) of the Investment Company Act. As such, the Agencies believe a banking entity has a reasonable alternative to design competitive employee compensation arrangements. The Agencies recognize that preparing an application under section 6(b) of the Investment Company Act or modifying

an ESC’s activities to meet the terms of

another exclusion from the covered
fund definition is not without costs, but have determined to provide specific

exclusions for entities that do not
function as investment funds, consistent with the purpose of section 13, or in response to other unique considerations (e.g., to provide consistent treatment for certain foreign and domestic pension plans). These considerations do not support a separate exclusion for ESCs.

The Agencies also note that nonqualified plans are not exempt from the Investment Company Act under 3(c)(11) and thus would be covered funds if they are operating in reliance on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the InvestmentCompany Act. Some of these nonqualified plans may be formed as employees’ securities companies, however, and could qualify for an exemption under section 6(b) of the Investment Company Act for employees’ securities companies as discussed

above.

e. Definition of ‘‘Ownership Interest’’

The proposed rule defined ‘‘ownership interest’’ in a covered fund to mean any equity, partnership, or other similar interest (including, without limitation, a share, equity security, warrant, option, general partnership interest, limited partnership interest, membership interest, trust certificate, or other similar instrument) in a covered fund, whether voting or nonvoting, as well as any derivative of

such an interest. 2088 This definition

focused on the attributes of the interest and whether it provided a banking entity with economic exposure to the profits and losses of the covered fund, rather than its form. The proposal thus

would also have included a debt security or other interest in a covered fund as an ownership interest if it exhibited substantially the same characteristics as an equity or other ownership interest (e.g., provides the holder with voting rights, the right or ability to share in the covered fund’s profits or losses, or the ability, directly or pursuant to a contract or synthetic
interest, to earn a return based on the performance of the fund’s underlying holdings or investments). 2089 As described further below, the proposed rule excluded carried interest (termed ‘‘restricted profit interest’’ in the final rule) from the definition of ownership

interest.

Many commenters argued that the proposed definition of ownership interest was too broad and urged excluding one or more types of interests

from the definition. A number of commenters raised concerns regarding the difficulty of applying the ownership

interest definition to securitization structures and questioned whether the definition of ownership interest might apply to a debt security issued by, or a
debt interest in, a covered fund that has some characteristics similar to an equity


### 5978 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2090 See AFME et al.; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); ASF (Feb. 2012); BoA; Cadwalader (Municipal
Securities); Credit Suisse (Williams); Deutsche Bank (Repackaging Transactions); Occupy; RBC; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); TCW. For example, securitization structures generally provide that either the most senior or the most junior tranche notes have controlling voting rights. One commenter argued that under the proposed ownership interest definition, a banking entity could be deemed to have an ownership interest in an entity it does not own or sponsor simply due to its obtaining voting rights. See ASF (Feb. 2012). As a further example, one commenter alleged that securitization structures generally are not viewed as providing economic exposure to the profits and losses of the issuer in the same manner as equity interests in hedge funds and private equity funds. This commenter argued that the ownership interest definition should include only those interests that permit the banking entity to share without limit in the profits and losses or that earn a return that is based on the performance of the underlying assets.

See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

2091 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2092 See AFME et al.; ASF (Feb. 2012); BoA; Cadwalader (Municipal Securities); RBC; SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012). These commenters argued that the ownership interest definition should not include tender option bond programs

and other debt asset-backed securities. Two of these commenters argued that debt asset-backed securities should not be viewed as ownership interests because: (i) they are not typically viewed as having economic exposure to profits and losses of an ABS Issuer; (ii) they have a limited life, periodic fixed or fluctuating cumulative payments, and are senior to equity of the issuer should the issuer fail; (iii) they do not have perpetual life with broad voting rights, appreciation in the market
value of the issuer and non-cumulative dividends,

and subordination to the claims of debt holders if the issuer fails; and (iv) their limited voting rights (such as the rights to replace a servicer or manager) and such rights are protective in nature and similar to voting rights that accompany securities traditionally classified by the Agencies as debt securities (including securities formally structured as equity). See AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). One of these commenters argued that the ownership interest definition should be limited to those interests that share in the profits or losses of the relevant entity on an unlimited basis or that otherwise earn a return that is specifically based upon the performance of the underlying assets

because the senior tranche in an asset-based securities transaction often has substantial voting rights and banking entities should not be penalized for requiring or otherwise obtaining voting rights that protect their interests. This commenter also expressed the view that banking entities should not be restricted from owning debt classes of new assetbacked securities because ‘‘doing so would substantially constrict the market for asset-backed

securities.’’ See ASF (Feb. 2012).

2093 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); Occupy. One of these commenters argued that any general statement about what instruments would be considered an ‘‘ownership interest’’ for purposes of securitization structures would be problematic and easy to evade because transaction documents underlying securitization

structures are not standardized. This commenter suggested as an alternative using a safe harbor for standardized, pre-specified securitization

structures. See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012). Another of these commenters argued that ‘‘it is difficult to

characterize holders of ABS securities in most securitization structures as having ‘ownership interests’ in any common understanding of the term’’ and the concept of ownership interest is a ‘‘poor fit for the securitization market, underscoring the benefits of excluding securitization issuers from the definition of covered fund entirely.’’ See Credit
Suisse (Williams).

2094 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2095 See Credit Suisse (Williams) (arguing that such arrangements are a fundamental part of a bank’s lending activities).

2096 See final rule § 75.10(d)(6). The concept of a restricted profit share was referred to as ‘‘carried interest’’ in the proposed rule, a term that is often used as a generic reference to performance-based allocations or compensation. The Agencies have instead used the term ‘‘restricted profit interest’’ in the final rule to avoid any confusion that could result from using a term that is also used in other contexts. The final rule focuses only on whether a profit interest is excluded from the definition of ownership interest under section 13, and the final rule does not address in any way the treatment of such profit interests under other laws, including

under Federal income tax law. 2097 Each of these factors are designed to clarify the interests identified in the proposed definition of ownership interest as noted above. or other ownership interest. 2090 One commenter argued that the ownership

interest definition should not include debt instruments with equity features unless the Agencies determine with respect to a particular debt instrument, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, that the equity features are so pervasive that the debt instrument is the functional equivalent of an equity interest or partnership interest and was structured to evade the prohibitions and restrictions in the proposal. 2091 Several commenters argued that the Agencies should explicitly exclude certain debt instruments with equity features from the ownership interest definition. 2092 Finally, certain commenters argued that, because the application of the ownership interest definition to

securitization structures was problematic, alternative regulatory treatment was appropriate. 2093

One commenter expressed concern over the proposal’s inclusion of ‘‘derivatives’’ of ownership interests in the definition of ownership interest and

recommended certain derivative interests of ownership interests in hedge funds and private equity funds not be

included within the definition of ownership interest. 2094 This commenter also recommended that the Agencies expressly exclude from the definition of ownership interest lending arrangements with a covered fund that contain protective covenants linking the interest rate on the loan to the profits of the borrowing fund. 2095

As discussed in detail below, the Agencies are adopting the definition of ‘‘ownership interest’’ largely as proposed but clarifying the scope of that definition, including with respect to the

inclusion of interests that are linked to profits and losses of a covered fund and the exclusion for a restricted profit

interest in a covered fund. 2096 The definition is centered on equity interests, partnership interests, membership interests, trust certificates, and similar interests, and would not generally cover typical extensions of credit the terms of which provide for payment of stated principal and interest calculated at a fixed rate or at a floating

rate based on an index or interbank rate. However, as under the proposal, to the extent that a debt security or other

interest in a covered fund exhibits specified characteristics that are similar to those of equity or other ownership interests (e.g., provides the holder with the ability to participate in the election or removal of a party with investment discretion, the right or ability to share in the covered fund’s profits or losses, or the ability, directly or pursuant to a contract or synthetic interest, to earn a return based on the performance of the fund’s underlying holdings or investments), the instrument would be an ownership interest under the final

rule.

In response to commenters and in order to provide clarity about the types

of interests that would be considered within the scope of ownership interest, the Agencies have revised the definition of ‘‘ownership interest’’ to define the term more clearly. The Agencies are not explicitly excluding or including debt
securities, instruments or interests with equity features as requested by some commenters, but are instead identifying certain specific characteristics that would cause a particular interest, regardless of the name or legal form of
that interest, to be included within the definition of ownership interest. The Agencies believe that this elaboration on the characteristics of an ownership interest will enable parties, including securitization structures, to more easily analyze whether their interest is an ownership interest, regardless of the type of legal entity or the name of the particular interest.

As adopted, the final rule provides that an ownership interest would be any interest in or security issued by a covered fund that exhibits any of the following features or characteristics on a current, future, or contingent

basis: 2097

• has the right to participate in the selection or removal of a general partner, managing member, member of
the board of directors or trustees, investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity trading advisor of the covered fund. For purposes of the rule, this would not include the rights of a creditor to exercise remedies upon

the occurrence of an event of default or


### 5979 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2098 This characteristic exists for both multi-class and single-class covered funds. In the context of an entity that issues shares, this right could cover, for example, common shares, as well as preferred shares the dividend payments of which are determined by reference to the performance of the

covered fund.

2099 The reference to ‘‘all or a portion of excess spread’’ is meant to include within the definition of ownership interest the right to receive any excess spread which remains after the excess spread is used to pay expenses, maintain credit enhancement

such as overcollateralization or is otherwise

reduced.

2100 This characteristic does not refer to any reduction in the stated claim to principal or interest

of a holder of an interest that occurs either as a

result of a bona fide subsequent renegotiation of the terms of an interest or as a result of a bankruptcy, insolvency, or similar proceeding.

2101 This provision is not intended to encompass

derivative transactions entered into in connection with typical prime brokerage activities of banking entities. However, the activities of banking entities are subject to the anti-evasion provisions. 2102 See supra note 2090. 2103 See supra note 2092. similar rights arising due to an
acceleration event;

• has the right under the terms of the
interest to receive a share of the income, gains or profits of the covered fund. This would apply regardless of whether the right is pro rata with other owners
or holders of interests; 2098

• has the right to receive the underlying assets of the covered fund,

after all other interests have been redeemed and/or paid in full (commonly known as the ‘‘residual’’ in securitizations). For purposes of the rule, this would not include the rights of a creditor to exercise remedies upon

the occurrence of an event of default or similar rights arising due to an
acceleration event;

• has the right to receive all or a portion of excess spread (the positive difference, if any, between the aggregate interest payments received from the underlying assets of the covered fund and the aggregate interest paid to the holders of other outstanding interests); 2099

• provides that the amounts payable by the covered fund with respect to the
interest could, under the terms of the
interest, be reduced based on losses arising from the underlying assets of the
covered fund, such as allocation of losses, write-downs or charge-offs of the outstanding principal balance, or

reductions in the amount of interest due and payable on the interest; 2100

• receives income on a pass-through
basis from the covered fund, or has a rate of return that is determined by reference to the performance of the underlying assets of the covered

fund. 2101 This provision would not

include an interest that is entitled to

receive dividend amounts calculated at a fixed or at a floating rate based on an index or interbank rate such as LIBOR;

or

• any synthetic right to have, receive or be allocated any of the rights above. This provision would not permit banking entities to obtain synthetic or derivative exposure to any of the

characteristics identified above in order to avoid being considered to have an ownership interest in the covered fund.

This definition of ‘‘ownership

interest’’ is intended to address commenters’ concerns regarding the applicability of the ownership interest definition to different types of interests. The Agencies believe defining ‘‘ownership interest’’ in this way will allow existing as well as potential
holders of interests in covered funds, including securitizations, to effectively determine whether they have an ownership interest. As an example, this definition would include preferred stock, as well as a lending arrangement

with a covered fund in which the interest or other payments are calculated by reference to the profits of the fund. As a contrasting example, the Agencies believe that a loan that provides for a step-up in interest rate margin when a covered fund has fallen below or breached a NAV trigger or other negotiated covenant would not generally be an ownership interest. Banking entities will be expected to evaluate the specific terms of their interests to determine whether any of the specified characteristics exist. In this manner, the Agencies believe that the definition of ownership interest in

the final rule is clearer than under the proposal and thus should be less burdensome for banking entities in their determination of whether certain rights

would cause an interest to be an ownership interest for purposes of compliance with the rule.

As indicated above, many

commenters on securitizations under the proposed rule made arguments regarding the difficulty of applying the proposal’s definition of ownership

interest to securitization structures, contending that the definition should

not include debt instruments with equity features, or that the final rule should provide a safe harbor underwhich the use of a standardized, prespecified securitization structure would not give rise to an ownership

interest. 2102 The Agencies are not adopting a separate definition of ownership interest for securitization transactions, providing for differing
treatment of financial instruments, or providing a safe harbor as requested by

some commenters. The revised definition of ownership interest will apply regardless of the type of legal entity or the name or legal form of the particular interest. The determination of whether an interest is an ownership interest under the final rule will depend

on the features and characteristics of the particular interest, including the rights the particular interest provides its holder, including not only voting rights but also the right to receive a share of the income, gains, or profits of a covered fund, the right to receive a residual, the right to receive excess spread, and any synthetic or derivative that would provide similar rights. While some commenters argued that securities

issued in asset-backed securities transactions and by tender option bond

issuers should not be viewed as ownership interests due to the nature of the securities issued or the possible lack of exposure to profits and losses, 2103 the Agencies do not believe that the type of covered fund involved or the type of security issued is an appropriate basis for determining whether there is an ownership interest for purposes of the

restrictions contained in section 13(a)(1)(B) of the BHC Act. The Agencies believe that making

distinctions in the definition of ownership interest based on the type of entity or the type of security, in which many of the same rights exist as for other types of ownership interests,

would not be consistent with the statutory restrictions on ownership. Similarly, while some commenters argued that including a safe harbor for

standardized securitization structures would be more effective in identifying an ownership interest in securitizations, the Agencies believe that the type of interest and the rights associated with the interest are more appropriate to

determine whether an interest is an ownership interest and is necessary to avoid potential evasion of the ownership restrictions contained in

section 13 of the BHC Act.

The Agencies understand that the definition of ownership interest in the final rule may include interests in a covered fund that might not be considered an ownership interest or equity interest in other contexts. For instance, it may include loans with an interest rate determined by reference to the performance of a covered fund or

senior debt interests issued in a

securitization. While the definition of ownership interest may affect the ability of a banking entity to hold such interests, whether existing or in the future, the Agencies believe that the definition of ownership interest as


### 5980 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2104 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(3)(ii). 2105 See, e.g., Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2106 See Public Citizens; see also Occupy.

2107 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2108 See Occupy; Public Citizens; AFR et al. (Feb.
2012).

2109 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); TCW; Credit Suisse (Williams); SVB.

2110 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2111 See TCW.

2112 See Credit Suisse (Williams). 2113 See TCW.

2114 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2115 Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68899. adopted in the final rule is more effective in preventing possible evasion of section 13 by capturing interests that may be characterized as debt but confer benefits of ownership, including voting rights and/or the ability to participate in profits or losses of the covered fund.

The definition of ownership interest in the final rule, like the proposed rule,

includes derivatives of the interests

described above. Derivatives of ownership interests provide holders with economic exposure to the profits

and losses of the covered fund or an ability to earn a return based on the performance of the fund’s underlying holdings or investments in a manner substantially similar to an ownership interest. The Agencies believe the final rule’s approach appropriately addresses the statutory purpose to limit a banking entity’s economic exposure to covered funds, irrespective of the legal form, name, or issuer of that ownership

interest.

As noted above, the proposed definition of ownership interest did not include carried interest (termed ‘‘restricted profit interest’’ in the final rule). The proposal recognized that many banking entities that serve as investment adviser or provide other services to a covered fund are routinely compensated for services they provide to the fund through receipt of carried interest. As a result, the proposed rule provided that an ownership interest with respect to a covered fund did not include an interest held by a banking entity (or an affiliate, subsidiary or employee thereof) in a covered fund for which the banking entity (or an affiliate, subsidiary or employee thereof) served as investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity trading advisor, so long as certain enumerated

conditions were met. 2104

The enumerated conditions contained in the proposal were designed to narrow the scope of the exclusion of carried

interest from the definition of ‘‘ownership interest’’ so as to distinguish between an investor’s economic risks and a service provider’s performance-based compensation. This was designed to limit the ability of a banking entity to structure carried

interest in a manner that would evade

section 13’s restriction on the amount of ownership interests a banking entity may have as an investment in a covered

fund.

Commenters disagreed over whether the definition of ownership interest

should exclude carried interest. For
instance, some commenters did not support excluding carried interest from the definition of ownership interest, arguing that such an exclusion was too permissive and inconsistent with the
statute because, for instance, carried interest derives its value in part by tracking gains on price movements of investments by the fund. 2105 One commenter argued that, despite the fact that carried interest is typically provided as compensation for services provided to a fund, carried interest is a

form of investment and therefore should be included as an ownership

interest. 2106 Another commenter argued that permitting banking entities to hold

an unrestricted amount of carried

interest could create an indirect and undesirable link between prohibited proprietary trading and covered fund

activities. 2107 These commenters also argued that treating carried interest as compensation for providing services

would be inconsistent with the manner

in which carried interest is treated for

tax purposes. 2108

Other commenters, however, supported excluding carried interest from the definition of an ownership interest and argued the exclusion was consistent with the words and purpose

of section 13. 2109 One commenter argued that carried interest is readily distinguished from an investment in a

covered fund because carried interest normally does not expose a banking entity to a covered fund’s losses (other

than in limited instances such as when a ‘‘clawback’’ provision is triggered). 2110 Another commenter argued that permitting a banking entity to receive carried interest without being subject to the requirements of section 13 regarding ownership interests better aligns the interest of the investment manager with

that of the fund and its investors. 2111 Another commenter supported expanding the definition of carried

interest to include an interest received by a banking entity in return for qualifying services (e.g., lending, placement, distribution, or equity financing) provided to the investment manager of the fund, but not directly provided to the fund itself. 2112

The proposal established four criteria

that must be met in order for carried

interest to be excluded from the definition of ownership interest. First, the proposal required that carried interest have the sole purpose and effect of permitting the banking entity or an employee thereof to share in the covered fund’s profits as performance compensation for services provided to

the fund. While most commenters did not object to this criterion, one commenter argued that the wording of this approach would appear to prohibit an employee of the banking entity from retaining a carried interest after the employee has changed employment. 2113 This commenter argued that the

determination of the carried interest’s purpose should be made only at the time the interest is granted, thereby enabling an employee to retain the

carried interest if and when the employee no longer provides investment management, investment advisory, or similar services to the fund or is no longer employed at the banking entity.

Second, the proposal required that
carried interest, once allocated, be distributed to the banking entity promptly after it is earned or, if not so distributed, not share in the subsequent profits and losses of the covered fund. One commenter urged the Agencies to allow the ‘‘reserve’’ portion of carried interest that for tax purposes is allocated to the investment manager or
investment adviser, but invested alongside the fund and not formally allocated or distributed by the fund, also to qualify for the exclusion as carried

interest. 2114 This commenter also suggested that this criterion should not affect the common European structure in which allocated carried interest may share in the subsequent losses, but not the profits, of the fund.

Third, under the proposal a banking entity (including its affiliates or employees) was not permitted to provide funds to the covered fund in connection with receiving a carried interest. The proposal specifically requested comment on whether the exemption for carried interest, including this requirement, was consistent with

the current tax treatment and requirements of carried interest

arrangements. 2115 Commenters urged the Agencies to relax or amend this criterion so that banking entities, including their affiliates and employees, whether directly or indirectly through a fund vehicle, would be permitted to make minimal capital contributions to the fund (typically less than 1 percent) in connection with the receipt of carried

interest to the extent that such contributions provide the basis for


### 5981 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2116 See TCW; SIFMA (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Credit Suisse (Williams).

2117 See ASF (Feb. 2012); see also Credit Suisse
(Williams); SVB.

2118 See TCW.

2119 See supra note 2096 and accompanying text. 2120 See final rule § 75.10(d)(6)(ii). treating the interest as carried interest for tax purposes. 2116 However, these commenters supported the proposal’s requirement that any amount contributed by a banking entity in connection with receiving a carried interest should be aggregated with the banking entity’s ownership interests for purposes of the 3 percent investment

limits.

Fourth, the proposal provided that carried interest may not be transferable by the banking entity (or the affiliate, subsidiary or employee thereof) except to another affiliate or subsidiary of the banking entity. Commenters generally urged removing the proposal’s limitations on transferability and argued, among other things, that this criterion could prevent a banking entity (or its affiliate or employee) from transferring the carried interest in connection with selling or otherwise transferring the provision of advisory or other services that gave rise to the

carried interest. 2117 Similarly, one commenter argued that the final rule should not require carried interest to be re-characterized as an ownership interest if it is transferred among employees, family members of employees or to estate planning vehicles upon an employee’s death. 2118

After considering carefully comments received on the proposal, the Agencies

have determined to retain in the final

rule the exclusion from the definition of ‘‘ownership interest’’ for a restricted profit interest (termed ‘‘carried interest’’ in the proposed rule 2119) largely as provided in the proposed rule. The final rule, like the proposal, recognizes that banking entities that serve as investment adviser or provide other services to a covered fund are routinely compensated for such services through receipt of a restricted profit interest. The final rule, also like the proposal, generally excludes restricted profit interest from the definition of ownership interest subject to conditions designed to distinguish restricted profit interest, which serves as a form of compensation,

from an investment in the fund prohibited (or limited) by section 13. As explained in detail below, the definition of restricted profit interest in the final

rule has been modified from the proposal in several aspects to respond to

commenters’ concerns and to more effectively capture the types of compensation that is often granted in exchange for services provided to a fund. However, like the proposal, the

final rule continues to contain a number of requirements designed to ensure that restricted profit interest functions as compensation for providing certain

services to a covered fund and does not permit a banking entity to evade the

investment limitations or other requirements of section 13.

Under the final rule, restricted profit

interest is defined to include an interest held by an entity (or employee or former employee thereof) that serves as investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or other service provider so long as: (i) The sole purpose and effect of the interest is to allow the entity (or an employee or former employee thereof) to share in the profits of the covered fund as performance compensation for the investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other services provided to the covered fund by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof), provided that the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) may be obligated

under the terms of such interest to return profits previously received; (ii) all such profit, once allocated, is distributed to the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) promptly after being earned or, if not so distributed, is retained by the covered fund for the sole purpose of establishing a reserve amount to satisfy contractual obligations with respect to subsequent losses of the

covered fund and such undistributed profit of the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) does not share in subsequent investment gains of the covered fund; (iii) any amounts invested in the covered fund, including any amounts paid by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) in connection with obtaining the restricted profit interest, are within the investment limitations of § 75.12; and (iv) the interest is not transferable by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) except to an affiliate thereof (or an employee of the banking entity or affiliate), to immediate family members, or through the intestacy of the employee or former employee, or in connection with a sale of the business that gave rise to the restricted profit interest by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) to an unaffiliated party that provides investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other services to the

fund. 2120 The final rule, like the proposal, permits any entity (or the affiliate or employee thereof) to receive or hold restricted profit interest if the entity (or the affiliate or employee thereof) serves as investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or other service provider to the covered fund. For example, an entity that provides services to the covered fund in a capacity as sub-adviser or placement agent would be eligible to receive or hold restricted profit interest.

As requested by commenters, the first
condition in the final rule, in contrast to the proposal, permits an employee or former employee to retain a restricted profit interest after a change in employment status so long as the restricted profit interest was originally received as compensation for qualifying services provided to the covered fund.

Also in response to issues raised by
commenters, the second condition in

the final rule has been modified to permit so-called ‘‘clawback’’ features whereby restricted profit interest that has been provided to an investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or similar service provider may be taken back if certain subsequent events occur, such as if the fund fails to achieve a specified preferred rate of return or if liabilities or subsequent losses are incurred by the
fund. Under these circumstances, the Agencies believe it is appropriate to

allow the allocated but undistributed profits to be clawed back from the service provider’s performance compensation, and the final rule has been amended to allow this practice.
The final rule makes clear, however, that the undistributed profits may only

be held in the fund in connection with such a clawback arrangement. Undistributed profits that remain in the covered fund after they have been

allocated without connection to such an arrangement would be deemed to be an

investment in the fund and would be an ownership interest under the final rule. Importantly, the final rule also retains the limitation in the proposal that undistributed profit may not share in subsequent investment gains of the covered fund. This limitation (together

with the limited circumstances under which the undistributed profit may be retained in the fund) appears necessary in order to distinguish restricted profit
interest, which functions as performance compensation and is not
intended to be a form of investment, from an ownership interest, which is designed to be an investment. The Agencies believe that this approach achieves an appropriate balance between accommodating receipt of restricted profit interest, including such


### 5982 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2121 The Agencies believe that this addresses a commenter’s concern regarding the ‘‘reserve’’ portion of carried interest discussed above; however such amounts may not share in subsequent investment gains of the covered fund for the reasons

also discussed above. 2122 See proposed rule § 75.2(t); 17 CFR 230.901—

230.905.

2123 See, e.g., Occupy. 2124 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012) (citing 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley)).

2125 See, e.g., Union Asset; EFAMA; BVI; AFME
et al.; IIB/EBF; Credit Suisse (Williams); Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; PEGCC; UBS; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); AFG.

2126 See PEGCC; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ICI (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2127 See IIB/EBF; Credit Suisse (Williams); ICI
(Feb. 2012); ICI Global; PEGCC.

2128 See IIB/EBF; ICI Global; Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2129 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); IIB/EBF; PEGCC; Union Asset.

2130 See, e.g., MFA; TCW. amounts held in ‘‘reserve,’’ 2121 and limiting the ability of a banking entity

to evade the investment limitations of section 13. The Agencies expect to review restricted profit interests to ensure banking entities do not use the exclusion for restricted profit interest in

a manner that functions as an evasion of

section 13.

As noted above, the Agencies understand that entities that provide investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory or other services to a covered fund may, in connection with receiving restricted profit interest, be required to hold a small amount of ownership interests in a fund to provide the basis for desired tax treatment of restricted profit interest. Accordingly, the third condition of the final rule allows an entity that provides qualifying services to a fund to
contribute funds to, and have an ownership interest in, the fund in connection with receiving restricted profit interest. As under the proposal,

the amount of the contribution must be

counted toward the investment limits under section 13(d)(4) and § 75.12 of the

final rule. This would include attribution to the banking entity of sums invested by employees in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest. Thus, the final rule permits a banking entity that provides investment management, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services to have both an ownership interest in, and receive restricted profit interest from, the covered fund, so long as the aggregate of the sums invested in all ownership interests acquired or retained by the banking entity (including a general partnership interest), either in connection with receiving the restricted profit interest or as an investment, are

within the investment limitations in section 13(d)(4) and § 75.12 of the final rule. The Agencies believe this more appropriately implements the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act by permitting banking entities to continue to provide customer-driven investment management services through organizing and offering covered funds, while also abiding by the

investment limitations of section 13.

In response to comments, the fourth condition of the final rule permits the transfer of a restricted profit interest in

connection with a sale to an unaffiliated party that provides investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other services to the fund. In response to comments, the final rule also permits the transfer of a restricted profit interest to immediate family members of the banking entity’s employees or former employees that provide investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other
services to the covered fund, or in

connection with the death of such employee. Also in response to comments, the final rule permits the transfer of a restricted profit interest to an affiliate or employee that provides investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory,

or other services to the covered fund.
However, the final rule, like the proposed rule, would treat a restricted profit interest as an ownership interest if the restricted profit interest is otherwise transferable. This remaining restriction recognizes that a freely transferable restricted profit interest has

the same economic benefits as an ownership interest and is essential to differentiating a restricted profit interest from an ownership interest.

f. Definition of ‘‘Resident of the United

States’’

Section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act provides that a foreign banking entity may acquire or retain an ownership interest in or act as sponsor to a covered fund, but only if that activity is conducted according to the requirements of the statute, including that no ownership interest in the

covered fund is offered for sale or sold

to a ‘‘resident of the United States.’’ The

statute does not define this term.

Under the proposed rule, the term

‘‘resident of the United States’’ was used in the context of the exemptions for covered trading and covered fund activities. As proposed, the definition of

resident of the United States was
similar, but not identical, to the SEC’s definition of U.S. person in Regulation S, which governs offerings of securities

outside of the United States. 2122 The Agencies proposed this approach in order to promote consistency and understanding among market participants that have experience with the concept from the SEC’s Regulation

S. Some commenters supported the proposed definition of resident of the

United States. 2123 One commenter suggested that the proposed rule defined resident of the United States too broadly and inappropriately precluded investments in U.S. funds by foreign banking entities. 2124

Other commenters generally argued that the final rule should adopt the definition of ‘‘U.S. person’’ under the SEC’s Regulation S without the modifications in the proposed rule. 2125 According to many commenters, market participants are familiar with and rely upon the body of law interpreting U.S. Person under Regulation S. 2126 They argued that, to the extent that the

definitions of ‘‘resident of the United

States’’ under section 13 and ‘‘U.S. person’’ under Regulation S differ, this would create unnecessary uncertainty and increase compliance burdens associated with monitoring multiple

definitions. 2127 Other commenters urged the Agencies not to depart from the treatment of international parties and organizations (e.g., the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank) under the SEC’s Regulation S. 2128

Many commenters contended that,

because the definition of resident of the United States in the proposal was generally broader than the definition of U.S. person under Regulation S, many additional types of persons, entities and

investors would be deemed residents of the United States for purposes of the foreign activity exemptions. Commenters argued that this would limit the potential for foreign banking entities to effectively use those statutorily provided exemptions. A few commenters noted that using a definition in the foreign fund exemption

that differs from the definition in Regulation S loses the advantage of using a term that is already understood by market participants and that avoids confusion and limits compliance

costs. 2129

Other commenters suggested that defining resident of the United States as proposed presented problems for investment funds managed by U.S.
investment advisers, even those without

U.S. investors. 2130 Some commenters argued that, under the proposed


### 5983 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2131 See AFG; BVI. See also MFA; TCW. Similarly, these commenters argued that although treated as a non-U.S. person under Regulation S, a non-U.S. fund organized as a trust in accordance

with local law with a limited number of U.S.

investors would have been a resident of the United States. Under the proposal, this foreign fund could not invest in another foreign covered fund seeking to rely on the exemption for covered fund activities or investments that occur solely outside of the

United States.

2132 See IIB/EBF; Credit Suisse (Williams); UBS;
JPMC.

2133 See 156 Cong. Reg. S.5894–5895 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley).

2134 Offers and Sales, Securities Act Release No. 6863 (Apr. 24, 1990) 55 FR 18306 (May 2, 1990). 2135 See final rule § 75.10(d)(8).

2136 See infra Part VI.B.4.b.3.

2137 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(h)(5).

2138 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(a)(1).

2139 See proposed rule 75.10(b)(5).

2140 A number of comments received regarding the definition of sponsor relate to securitization

structures and are addressed below. There also were a few comments urging that insurance companies not be considered to sponsor their separate

accounts. See Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Nationwide. The Agencies believe these concerns should be addressed by the exclusion of separate accounts from the definition
of covered fund, as discussed in Part VI.B.1.c.6. of

this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

. 2141 See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); BNY Mellon et al.;
Credit Suisse (Williams).

2142 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(6); see also 29 U.S.C. 1103(a)(1).

2143 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter; Ass’n. of Global
Custodians; BNY Mellon et al.; SIFMA et al.
(Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb.
2012); see also Fin. Services Roundtable (June 14, 2011) (recommending the definition of directed trustee under the Board’s Regulation R be used,

which defines directed trustee to mean ‘‘a trustee

that does not exercise investment discretion with respect to the account’’). definition, a foreign fund managed by a

U.S. investment adviser or sub-adviser that is not otherwise subject to section 13 might be deemed a resident of the United States, thereby disqualifying the fund from relying on the foreign funds exemption, a result inconsistent with the purpose of section 13 and the statutory exemption in section 13(d)(1)(I). 2131

Commenters also argued that the proposed definition raised issues for compensation plans of international organizations that are subject to section

13 of the BHC Act. Several commenters argued that U.S. employees of a foreign banking entity should not be considered residents of the United States if they

invest in a non-U.S. covered fund

pursuant to a bona fide employee investment, retirement or compensation

program. 2132 The Agencies have carefully considered the comments

received on the definition of resident of
the United States, and have determined to modify the final rule as discussed

below. The term ‘‘resident of the United

States’’ is not defined in the statute and is used by the statute to clarify when foreign activity or investment of a foreign banking entity qualifies for the foreign funds exemption in section 13(d)(1)(I). The purpose of this exemption is to enable foreign banking entities to continue to engage in foreign

funds activities and investments that do

not have a sufficient nexus to the United States so as to present risk to U.S.

investors or the U.S. financial

system. 2133 The purpose of Regulation S is to provide a safe harbor from the registration provisions under the Securities Act for offerings that take place outside of the United States. 2134

The Agencies believe that, because the covered funds provisions of the final rule involve sponsoring covered funds and offering and selling securities issued by funds (as compared to counterparty transactional relationships), the securities law framework reflected in Regulation S would most effectively achieve the purpose of the foreign funds exemption. As noted by commenters and discussed above, market participants are familiar with and rely upon the body of law interpreting U.S. Person under Regulation S, and differing definitions under section 13 and Regulation S could create uncertainty and increase compliance burdens associated with monitoring multiple definitions. The Agencies therefore have defined the

term ‘‘resident of the United States’’ in the final rule to mean a ‘‘U.S. person’’ as defined in Regulation S. 2135

In addition, as explained in detail

below in Part VI.B.4.b.3. of this

**SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**, the final rule provides that an ownership interest

is offered for sale or sold to a resident

of the United States if it is sold in an offering that ‘‘targets’’ residents of the

United States. 2136 As explained in more detail in that section, this approach is consistent with Regulation S.

g. Definition of ‘‘Sponsor’’

Section 13(h)(5) of the BHC Act defines ‘‘sponsor’’ to mean: (i) serving as a general partner, managing member, or trustee of a covered fund; (ii) in any manner selecting or controlling (or to have employees, officers, or directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the directors, trustees, or management of a covered fund; or (iii) sharing with a covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, the

same name or a variation of the same

name. 2137 Sponsor is a key definition because it defines, in part, the scope of activities to which the prohibition in section 13(a)(1) applies. 2138

Under the proposal, the term sponsor would have been defined largely as in

the statute. 2139 Nearly all commenters who addressed the definition of sponsor argued that the definition was too broad and suggested various ways to narrow or

limit the definition. 2140 Commenters generally expressed concerns that a sponsor to a covered fund became subject to the restrictions of section 13(f), limiting the relationships of the banking entity with the covered fund. Commenters argued this would prevent banking entities from providing many customary services to covered funds. 2141

The proposal excluded from the

definition of ‘‘trustee’’ as used in the term sponsor a trustee that does not

exercise investment discretion with respect to a covered fund, including a
directed trustee, as that term is used in section 403(a)(1) of the Employee’s Retirement Income Security Act (‘‘ERISA’’) (29 U.S.C. 1103(a)(1)). 2142 On the other hand, the proposal provided that any banking entity that directs a directed trustee, or that possesses authority and discretion to manage and

control the assets of a covered fund for

which a directed trustee serves as
trustee, would be considered a trustee of

the covered fund.

Commenters generally supported the exception for directed trustees in the proposed rule but argued that the exception was too narrow because it only referred to directed trustees under section 403(a)(1) of the ERISA and did

not include other similar custodial or administrative arrangements that may not meet those requirements or be subject to ERISA. 2143 These commenters argued that banking entities that serve

as trustees or custodians of covered funds may provide a limited range of

ministerial services or exercise limited fiduciary duties that, while not subject to ERISA or beyond those permitted for
a directed trustee under ERISA,

nevertheless do not involve the exercise

of investment discretion or control over the operations of the covered fund in the same manner as a general partner or managing member. Some of these commenters advocated defining ‘‘directed trustee’’ more expansively to include any situation in which a banking entity serves solely in a directed, fiduciary, or administrative role where a third-party and not the banking entity exercises investment

discretion.

In particular, some commenters also argued that a trustee should not be viewed as having investment discretion,

and therefore should not be treated as a sponsor, if it possesses only the authority to terminate an investment adviser to a covered fund and to appoint

another unaffiliated investment adviser


### 5984 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2144 See BNY Mellon et al. (providing proposed rule text or suggesting in the alternative clarification regarding the phrase ‘‘exercise investment discretion’’ in the final rule preamble);
Ass’n. of Global Custodians; ICI Global; State Street
(Feb. 2012).

2145 See Ass’n. of Global Custodians; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); AFG;
AFTI; BNY Mellon et al.; EFAMA; IMA; State Street (Feb. 2012).

2146 See Arnold & Porter. To the extent that a

client trust account would not be an investment company but for the exclusion contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act,

such as the exclusion for common trust funds under
section 3(c)(3) of that Act, it would not be a covered fund regardless of whether a banking entity acts as

trustee.

2147 See BNY Mellon et al.

2148 See EFAMA; F&C; IRSG; Union Asset. 2149 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012) (recommending the Agencies adopt independence guidelines similar to the FDIC’s guidelines for determining whether audit committee members of insured depository institutions are ‘‘independent’’ of management); Credit Suisse (Williams).

2150 See Credit Suisse (Williams) (arguing that such an approach would be consistent with the existing BHC Act concept of control with respect to
funds).

2151 A number of comments were also received regarding the restriction on name sharing that is one of the requirements of section 13(d)(1)(G) and § 75.11 of the proposed rule. These comments are

discussed in Part VI.B.2.a.5. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

.

2152 See Credit Suisse (Williams); see also ABA (Keating); BlackRock; Goldman (Covered Funds);

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); TCW (proposing similarly to limit the name-sharing restriction to the insured depository institution in
context of section 13(d)(1)(G)). 2153 See Goldman (Covered Funds).

2154 See Credit Suisse (Williams); see also
Goldman (Covered Funds).

2155 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2156 See final rule § 75.10(d)(9). Some commenters asserted that custodians and service providers should not treated as sponsors under the final rule. The Agencies note, however, that a banking entity is not a sponsor under the final rule unless it serves in one or more of the capacities specified in the definition; controls or makes up the fund’s board of directors or management as described in the final
rule; or shares the same name or a variation of the

same name with the fund as described in the final in order to fulfill a demonstrable legal or contractual obligation of the trustee, or the formal but unexercised power to

make investment decisions for a covered

fund in circumstances where one or

more unaffiliated investment advisers have been appointed to manage fund assets. Some commenters argued in favor of excluding trustees serving under non-U.S. trust arrangements pursuant to which they may have legal or contractual authority to, but in fact
do not, exercise investment discretion (i.e., the entity has the formal authority to appoint an investment adviser to a trust but does so only in extraordinary circumstances such as appointing a successor investment adviser). 2144

A few commenters requested confirmation that a banking entity acting as a custodian should not be considered a sponsor of a covered

fund. 2145 One commenter argued that

traditional client trust accounts for which a bank serves as discretionary trustee should not, by implication,

themselves become ‘‘covered funds’’ that are ‘‘sponsored’’ by the bank. 2146

One commenter argued that any person performing similar functions to a directed trustee (such as a fund management company established under Irish law), regardless of its formal title or position, also should be excluded if the person does not exercise

investment discretion. 2147 Some commenters argued more generally for

an exclusion from the definition of trustee (and therefore from the definition of sponsor) for entities that act as service providers (such as custodians, trustees, or administrators) to non-U.S. regulated funds, arguing that European laws already impose significant obligations on entities serving in these roles. 2148

Under both section 13 of the BHC Act and the proposal, the definition of sponsor also included the ability to select or control (or to have employees, officers, directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the directors, trustees or management of a covered fund. Some commenters argued that an entity should not be treated as a sponsor

of a covered fund when it selects a majority of the initial directors, trustees or management of a covered fund that are independent of the banking entity, so long as the banking entity may not remove or replace the directors, trustees, or management and directors are subsequently either chosen by others or self-perpetuating. 2149 One of these commenters argued similarly that a banking entity should not be deemed to sponsor a covered fund if it selects an independent general partner, managing
member or trustee of a new fund, so long as the general partner, managing member or trustee may not be terminated and replaced by the banking entity. 2150 Commenters argued that initial selection of these parties was inherently part of, and necessary to
allow, the formation of a covered fund and would not provide a banking entity with ongoing control over the fund to a degree that the banking entity should be considered to be a sponsor.

The statute and proposed rule also defined the term sponsor to include an entity that shares, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, the same name or a variation
of the same name, with a covered fund. One commenter argued in favor of a narrower interpretation of this statutory provision. 2151 This commenter argued that a covered fund should be permitted to share the name of the asset manager

that advises the fund without the asset manager becoming a sponsor so long as the asset manager does not share the

same name as an affiliated insured depository institution or the ultimate parent of an affiliated insured depository institution. 2152 Another commenter argued that the proposal would put U.S. banking entities at a competitive disadvantage relative to non-banking entities and foreign

banks. 2153 These commenters argued that the costs of rebranding covered funds or an asset manager would far outweigh any potential benefit in terms of reducing the risk that a banking entity may be pressured to ‘‘bail out’’ a

covered fund with a name similar to its investment manager. 2154 One commenter also requested clarification that the name sharing prohibition does not apply in the context of offering documents that carry the names of the manager, sponsor, distributor, as well as

the name of the fund itself. 2155 This
commenter also advocated that, because of the costs associated with changing a fund name, the Agencies give specific guidance regarding how similar a name may be so as not to be a ‘‘variation of the same name’’ for purposes of the definition of sponsor and the activities permitted under section 13(d)(1)(G) and § 75.11 of the rule.

The Agencies have carefully considered comments received in light

of the terms of the statute. Section 13(h)(5) of the BHC Act specifically defines the term ‘‘sponsor’’ for purposes of section 13. The Agencies recognize that the broad definition of sponsor in

the statute will result in some of the
effects commenters identified, as

discussed above.

The final rule generally retains the definition of ‘‘sponsor’’ in the statute and the proposed rule, although with

certain modifications and clarifications to respond to comments received regarding the exclusion for ‘‘directed trustees.’’ As in the proposed rule, the definition of sponsor in the final rule covers an entity that (i) serves as general partner, managing member, or trustee of
a covered fund, or that serves as a commodity pool operator of a covered fund as defined in § 75.10(b)(1)(ii) of the final rule, (ii) in any manner selects or controls (or has employees, officers, or directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the directors, trustees, or management of a covered fund, or (iii)
shares with a covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, the same name or a

variation of the same name. 2156


### 5985 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

rule. See, e.g., supra note 2156 and accompanying

text. See also infra note 2160.

2157 See supra note 2149 and accompanying text.

2158 Similarly, a banking entity may share the

same name or a variation of the same name with a covered fund so long as the banking entity does not organize and offer the covered fund in
accordance with section 13(d)(1)(G) and § 75.11.

2159 See, e.g., supra notes 2143–2144 and accompanying text. See also supra note 2156. 2160 See final rule § 75.10(d)(10). With respect to the concept of a ‘‘directed trustee’’ under foreign law, commenters generally requested changes only if non-U.S. mutual fund equivalents were not

excluded from the definition of covered fund. As discussed above, the final rule explicitly excludes foreign public funds from the definition of covered
fund, which should address these commenters

concerns. See final rule § 75.10(c)(1). 2161 See supra notes 2151–2155 and accompanying text.

2162 See infra note 2164.

2163 See supra note 2153 and accompanying text.

2164 For example, one commenter argued that it would need to rebrand approximately 500 established funds under the rule proposal if the

final rule was not modified to exclude established and regulated funds in foreign jurisdictions. See Goldman (Covered Funds).

2165 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered Funds). One of these commenters argued that servicers will not have the right to control the decision-making and operational functions of the

issuer. See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

Another commenter stated that servicers do not have the authority to select assets or make

investment decisions on behalf of investors. See

PNC.

2166 See ASF (Feb. 2012). While commenters urged the Agencies to provide an exemption from the definition of sponsor for a banking entity that selects the initial directors, trustees, or management of a fund, 2157

the final rule has not been modified in

this manner because the initial selection of the directors, trustees or management

of a fund is an action characteristic of a sponsor and is essential to the creation of a covered fund. The Agencies note,
however, that the statute and the final rule allow banking entities to sponsor covered funds, including selecting the
initial board of directors, trustees and management, so long as the banking entity observes certain requirements and conforms any initial investment in the

covered fund to the limits in the statute and regulation during the relevant conformance period as discussed in Part

VI.B.3.b. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

. 2158 Moreover, a banking entity that does not continue to select or control a majority of the board of

directors would not be considered to be a sponsor under this part of the

definition once that role or control

terminates. In the case of a covered fund that will have a self-perpetuating board of directors or a board selected by the
fund’s shareholders, this would not be

considered to have occurred until the

board has held its first re-selection of

directors or first shareholder vote on directors without selection or control by the banking entity.

As explained below, the Agencies
believe that, in context, the term trustee in the definition of the term sponsor

refers to a trustee with investment
discretion. Consistent with this view, commenters urged the Agencies to exclude from the definition of sponsor certain trustees and parties commenters asserted acted in a similar capacity, as

discussed above. 2159 The final rule

therefore has been modified to exclude from the definition of trustee: (i) a

trustee that does not exercise investment discretion with respect to a covered fund, including a trustee that is subject to the direction of an unaffiliated named fiduciary who is not a trustee pursuant to section 403(a)(1) of the Employee’s Retirement Income Security Act (29 U.S.C. 1103(a)(1)); or (ii) a trustee that is subject to fiduciary standards imposed under foreign law that are substantially equivalent to those described in paragraph (i). 2160 Under
the final rule, a trustee would be

excluded if the trustee does not have any investment discretion, but is required to ensure that the underlying assets are appropriately segregated for the benefit of the trust. Similarly, a

trustee would be excluded if the trustee

has no investment discretion but is authorized to replace an investment adviser with an unaffiliated party when the investment adviser resigns. Withrespect to an issuing entity of assetbacked securities and as explained
below, a directed trustee excluded from the definition of sponsor would include a person that conducts their actions solely in accordance with directions prepared by an unaffiliated party.

The Agencies believe that this exclusion is appropriate because the relevant prong of the definition of sponsor (i.e., serving as general partner, managing member, or trustee) specifies entities that have the ongoing ability to
exercise control over a fund; directed

trustees excluded from definition of sponsor in the final rule do not appear to have this ability and thus do not appear to be the type of entity that this prong of the definition of sponsor was intended to capture. If a trustee were

itself to assume the role of investment adviser, or have the ability to exercise investment discretion with respect to
the covered fund, the trustee would not qualify for this exclusion. The final rule

does not include within the definition of sponsor custodians or administrators of covered funds unless they otherwise meet the definitional qualifications set

forth in section 13 and the final rule.

The definition of sponsor will

continue to cover entities that share the

same name or variation of the same name of a covered fund for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, consistent with the definition of sponsor in section 13(h)(5). The Agencies recognize that some commenters urged the Agencies to modify this aspect of the definition of sponsor, and that the name-sharing prohibition included in the definition of sponsor (and in the conditions for the organize and offer exemption) will require some banking entities to rebrand their covered funds, which may prove expensive and will limit the extent to which banking entities may continue to benefit from brand equity they have developed. 2161 The costs a banking entity would incur to rebrand its covered funds would depend on the cost to rebrand the banking entity’s current funds, as well as the banking entity’s ability to attract new investor capital to its current and future covered funds. The total burden per banking entity, therefore, would depend on the brand equity as well as the number of

covered funds that share a similar

name. 2162 One commenter argued that, as a result, banking entities subject to section 13 may be at a competitive disadvantage to other firms that are not subject to these or similar

restrictions. 2163 The Agencies believe

that the final rule addresses some commenters’ concerns to an extent by adopting a more tailored definition of covered, including a focused definition of foreign funds that will be covered funds and an exclusion for foreign public funds. 2164 In addition, to the extent that a banking entity would otherwise come under pressure for reputational reasons to directly or indirectly assist a covered fund under distress that bears the banking entity’s name, the name-sharing prohibition could reduce the risk to the banking entity this assistance could pose.

1. Definition of Sponsor With Respect to

Securitizations

Commenters on the definition of sponsor in the context of securitization vehicles generally argued that the proposed definition of sponsor was too broad and requested clarification that various roles that banking entities might

serve within a securitization structure

would be excluded from the definition of sponsor, including servicers; 2165 backup servicers and master

servicers; 2166 collateral agents and


### 5986 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2167 Id.

2168 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012).

2169 Id.

2170 See Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo
(Covered Funds). One of these commentators argued that placement agents and underwriters will not have the right to control the decision-making and operational functions of the issuer. See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

2171 See Cleary Gottlieb (‘‘party that structures the
asset-backed securities’’); SIFMA (Securitization)
(Feb. 2012).

2172 See Credit Suisse (Williams); Wells Fargo
(Covered Funds).

2173 See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012) (arguing that Regulation AB sponsors will not have the right to control the decision-making and operational functions of the issuer after they deposit
the assets).

2174 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2175 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Covered
Funds).

2176 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

2177 See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012).

2178 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2179 See Occupy.

2180 See ASF (Feb. 2012); Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2181 See ASF (Feb. 2012) (arguing that service providers, including trustees, custodians, collateral agents, servicers, master servicers, backup servicers, securities administrators, remarketing agents and collateral administrators, should not be considered the sponsor or investment manager of a fund under section 13 of the BHC Act because they have roles that are principally ministerial in nature and do not generally involve investment discretion or management and control activities); PNC (arguing that a banking entity should not be deemed a sponsor simply by serving as underwriter, distributor, placement agent, originator, depositor, investment adviser, servicer, administrative agent, securitizer or similar role because these parties do not have the authority to select assets or make
investment decisions on behalf of investors).

2182 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); ASF (Feb. 2012); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). One commenter argued that the limited discretion that a servicer, trustee or custodian may

have to either invest funds within certain parameters, liquidate assets following a default on the asset or the securitization default, or mitigate losses subject to a servicing standard, should not be considered a sponsor because these entities do not exercise the level of management and control exercised by the general partner or managing member of a hedge fund or private equity fund. Another commenter argued that to the extent that any of these parties exercises discretion, such
discretion (A) involves decisions made after another party defaults (e.g., post-event of default collateral sale), (B) prescribed by the transaction documents
(e.g., choosing among a limited number of eligible investments) and (C) governed by standards of care
(e.g., the servicing standards). See ASF (Feb. 2012). Another commenter requested clarification that the

exclusion of trustees that do not exercise

investment discretion would also cover trustees that
(A) direct investment of amounts in accordance with the applicable transaction documents, (B) act as servicer pending the appointment of a successor or (C) liquidate collateral. See SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). One commenter argued that the definition of sponsor should not include an investment manager unless the investment manager (A) serves in one of the capacities designated in the definition of sponsor and can be replaced at the discretion of one or more entities serving in such capacity or with or without cause by the security holders or (B) has the ‘‘discretion to acquire or dispose of assets in the securitization for the primary purpose of recognizing gains or decreasing losses resulting from market value changes.’’ Id.

2183 See Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); TCW (arguing that the investment manager is typically unaffiliated with the general partner or equivalent of such fund, does not control the board of directors, is not responsible for the operations or books and records of the fund and generally does not perform any other significant function for the fund, such as acting as transfer agent). 2184 As discussed above, commenters argued that that various roles that banking entities might serve

within a securitization structure should be excluded from the definition of sponsor. See supra notes 2165–2175 and accompanying text.

2185 The Agencies also note that, while the entities commenters identified may not fall into the definition of sponsor, the ability of a banking entity to acquire and retain an interest in a securitization that is a covered fund will depend on whether it conducts its activity in a manner permitted under one of the exemptions contained in section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, such as the exemption for organizing and offering a covered fund. administrators; 2167 custodians; 2168 indenture trustees; 2169 underwriters, distributors, placement agents; 2170 arrangers, structuring agents; 2171 originators, depositors, securitizers; 2172 ‘‘sponsors’’ under the SEC’s Regulation

AB; 2173 administrative agents; 2174 and

securities administrators and remarketing agents. 2175 Commenters argued that these parties should not be included in the definition of sponsor because such parties have clearly defined and extremely limited authority
and discretion, 2176 do not have the right to control the decision-making and operational functions of the issuer, 2177

and would not have ‘‘control’’ under BHC Act control precedent. 2178 Conversely, one commentator supported defining sponsor under the proposed rule to include the Regulation AB sponsor, the servicer and the investment

manager. 2179 Commenters also made arguments regarding the potential

detrimental effects to securitization and credit markets if banking entities are prohibited from acting as sponsors of

securitizations. 2180

Commenters disagreed as to whether or not a sponsor under the final rule should include a party with any
investment discretion, some investment discretion or complete investment discretion. Some commenters argued that certain parties should not be considered a sponsor because they were

not an investment advisor or did not

have investment discretion. 2181 Other commenters argued that an entity should not be considered a sponsor even though it has limited investment
discretion, 2182 while others argued that investment advisers and parties with

investment discretion should not be

included in the definition of

sponsor. 2183

After considering comments received and the language and purpose of section 13, the Agencies have determined not to adopt a separate definition of sponsor

for issuers of covered funds that are issuers of an asset-backed security. As

described above and consistent with the statute, the definition of sponsor only includes parties that: (i) Serve as a general partner, managing member, or trustee (other than a directed trustee) of a covered fund; (ii) have the right to select or control a majority of the directors, trustees, or management of a covered fund; or (iii) share with a covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, the

same name or a variation of the same name. If the parties that commenters

described do not serve in those capacities for a covered fund, do not have those rights with respect to a

covered fund or do not share a name with a covered fund, such parties would not be a sponsor for purposes of the final rule, and, therefore, they would not be subject to the restrictions applicable to the sponsor of a covered fund, including the restrictions contained in section 13(f). 2184

Additionally, the Agencies believe

that the exclusion of loan securitizations

from the definition of covered fund under the final rule addresses many of

the commenters’ concerns about the sponsor definition because this exclusion limits the types of

securitizations that are covered funds and subject to the final rule. Similarly,

the exclusion of certain ABCP conduits

from the definition of covered fund will

mean that the restrictions under section13(f) will not apply to qualifying assetbacked commercial paper conduits.

As with any other covered fund under the final rule, the term sponsor would include a trustee that has the right to exercise any investment discretion for

the securitization. For issuers of assetbacked securities, this would generally

not include a trustee that executes decision-making, including investment of funds prior to the occurrence of an event of default, solely according to the provisions of a written contract or at the

written direction of an unaffiliated party. In addition, under the rule as adopted a trustee with investment discretion may avoid characterization as a sponsor if it irrevocably delegates all

of its investment discretion to another unaffiliated party with respect to the covered fund. The Agencies believe that these considerations regarding when a trustee is a sponsor responds to commenters’ concerns regarding the

roles of trustees in securitizations. 2185


### 5987 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2186 156 Cong. Rec. S5889 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Hagan) (arguing that section 13 permits a banking entity to engage in a certain level of traditional asset management business).

2187 See final rule § 75.11; proposed rule § 75.11.

2188 See proposed rule §§ 75.11(a)—(h).

2189 While section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act does not explicitly mention ‘‘commodity trading advisory services,’’ the Agencies proposed to treat commodity trading advisory services in the same way as investment advisory services because the proposed rule would have included commodity pools within the definition of ‘‘covered fund.’’ One commenter argued that a covered banking entity should not be permitted to qualify for the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(G) based on providing commodity trading advisory services. See Occupy. The Agencies believe that commodity trading advisors provide services to commodity pools that are similar to the services an investment adviser provides to a hedge fund or private equity fund. Because certain commodity pools are
included within the definition of covered fund, banking entities may organize and offer these commodity pools as a means of providing these

services to customers. 2190 See proposed rule § 75.11(a)–(h).

2191 See, e.g., Arnold & Porter.

2192 See Arnold & Porter; F&C. 2193 See, e.g., EFAMA; ICI Global; JPMC. 2. Section 75.11: Activities Permitted in Connection With Organizing and Offering a Covered Fund

Section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to make investments in and sponsor covered

funds within certain limits in connection with organizing and offering

the covered fund. 2186 Section 75.11 of the final rule implements this statutory exemption, and includes several changes from the proposed rule in response to concerns raised by

commenters as described in detail

below. 2187

a. Scope of Exemption

Section 75.11 of the proposed rule

described the conditions that must be met in order to qualify for the exemption provided by section 13(d)(1)(G) for covered fund activities

conducted in connection with organizing and offering a covered

fund. 2188 These conditions generally mirrored section 13(d)(1)(G) of the statute, and included: (i) The banking entity must provide bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory

services; 2189 (ii) the covered fund must be organized and offered only in connection with the provision of bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services and only to persons

that are customers of such services of the banking entity; (iii) the banking entity may not acquire or retain an ownership interest in the covered fund except in accordance with the

limitations on amounts and value of those interests as permitted under subpart C of the proposed rule; (iv) the banking entity must comply with the restrictions governing relationships with covered funds under § 75.16 of the proposed rule; (v) the banking entity may not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such covered fund invests; (vi) the covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, may not share the same name

or a variation of the same name with the banking entity (or an affiliate or subsidiary thereof), and may not use the word ‘‘bank’’ in its name; (vii) no director or employee of the banking entity may take or retain an ownership interest in the covered fund, except for any director or employee of the banking entity who is directly engaged in providing investment advisory or other services to the covered fund; (viii) the banking entity must clearly and conspicuously disclose, in writing, to any prospective and actual investor in the covered fund (such as through disclosure in the covered fund’s offering documents) the enumerated disclosures contained in § 75.11(h) of the proposed rule; and (ix) the banking entity must comply with any additional rules of the appropriate Agency or Agencies, designed to ensure that losses in such covered fund are borne solely by investors in the covered fund and not by the banking entity. 2190

Commenters raised concern that the proposed rule could be read to extend the prohibition on covered fund activities beyond the scope intended by

the statute. 2191 Because the proposed exemption was applicable to banking entities engaged in ‘‘organizing and offering’’ a covered fund, commenters were concerned that the proposed rule might be interpreted to prohibit a banking entity from engaging in activities that are part of organizing and offering a covered fund but that are not prohibited under the covered fund prohibition. In this regard, commenters contended that the activity of ‘‘organizing and offering’’ a covered fund would include serving as
investment adviser, distributor, broker, and other activities not prohibited by

section 13 of the BHC Act and not involving the acquisition or retention of an ownership interest in or sponsorship

of a covered fund as those terms are

defined in section 13. 2192

The Agencies have modified the final
rule to address this concern, which reflects a reading of the proposal not intended by the Agencies. Section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act by its terms provides an exemption from section 13(a) of the BHC Act, which prohibits a banking entity from acquiring or retaining an equity, partnership or other ownership interest in or sponsoring a

covered fund. To the extent that an activity is not prohibited by section 13(a), no exemption to that statutory prohibition is needed to conduct that activity. However, it is common for prohibited and non-prohibited activities to be conducted together in connection with offering and organizing a covered fund. For example, an entity that provides investment advisory services to a covered fund (an activity not itself prohibited by section 13(a)(1)(B) of the BHC Act) often acquires an ownership

interest in a covered fund and/or appoints a majority of management of the covered fund (which is included in the definition of sponsor under the statute), both of which are covered by the statutory prohibition in section 13(a)(1)(B). In that case, the banking entity may engage in the prohibited activity as part of organizing and offering a covered fund only if the prohibited activity is conducted in accordance with the requirements in the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(G) or some other exemption.

The final rule reflects this view in that it permits a banking entity to invest in or sponsor a covered fund in connection with organizing and offering the fund, which may involve activities that are not prohibited by section 13. Under the final rule, a banking entity that serves as

an investment adviser to a covered fund (including a sub-adviser), for example, may permissibly invest in the covered fund to the extent the banking entity complies with the requirements of section 13(d)(1)(G) of the Act. An entity that serves only as investment adviser, without making any investment or conducting any activity covered by the prohibition in section 13(a), would not be covered by the prohibition in section 13(a) and thus would not need to rely on section 13(d)(1)(G) and § 75.11 of the

final rule to conduct that investment advisory activity.

As described in more detail below, a number of commenters expressed concern about applying the requirements of section 13(d)(1)(G) and

the final rule outside of the United States, including with respect to foreign public funds organized and offered by foreign banking entities, particularly in situations where requirements in foreign jurisdictions may conflict with the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and implementing regulations. 2193


### 5988 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2194 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(iii).

2195 See final rule § 75.10(c)(1).

2196 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(i); proposed rule
§ 75.11(a).

2197 See 156 Cong. Rec. at S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley). 2198 See Ass’n of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012);
JPMC.

2199 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); AFR

et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen.

2200 See Sens. Merkley & Levin.

2201 See final rule § 75.11(a)(1)–(2). See Part

VI.B.2.b. below for a discussion of these requirements in the context of a banking entity that organizes and offers a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities. 2202 See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(4), (c)(8), (K), 12
CFR 225.28(b)(5) and (6), 12 CFR 225.86, 12 CFR 225.125 (with respect to a bank holding company);
12 U.S.C. 24(Seventh), 92a, 12 CFR Part 9 (with respect to a national bank); 12 U.S.C. Part 362 (with respect to a state non-member bank). The Agencies believe that many of the concerns raised with respect to applying section 13(d)(1)(G) and the proposed

rule outside the United States have been addressed through the revised definition

of covered fund described above and revisions to the exemption provided for activities conducted solely outside the United States. In particular, the revised

definition of covered fund makes clear that a foreign fund offered outside the United States is only a covered fund under specified circumstances with respect to a banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized or established under the laws of the United States or of any State. 2194 Furthermore, foreign public funds are

excluded from the definition of covered

fund in the final rule. 2195 Consequently, a foreign banking entity may invest in or organize and offer a variety of funds

outside of the United States without becoming subject to the requirements of section 13(d)(1)(G) and § 75.11 of the final rule, such as the name-sharing

restriction or limitations on director and employee investments.

1. Fiduciary Services

In order to qualify for the exemption for activities related to organizing and offering a covered fund, section 13(d)(1)(G) generally requires that a banking entity provide bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services, that the covered fund be organized and offered in connection with providing these services, and that the banking entity providing those services offer the covered fund only to persons that are

customers of those services of the banking entity. 2196 These requirements were largely mirrored in the proposed rule. Requiring a customer relationship in connection with organizing and offering a covered fund helps to ensure that a banking entity is engaging in the covered fund activity for others and not on the banking entity’s own behalf. 2197

As noted in the proposal, section 13(d)(1)(G)(ii) of the BHC Act does not explicitly require that the customer relationship be pre-existing. Accordingly, the Agencies explained in the proposal that the customer relationship may be established through or in connection with the banking entity’s organization and offering of a covered fund, so long as that fund is a manifestation of the provision by the banking entity of bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services to the customer. This application of the customer requirement is consistent with

the manner in which these services are provided by banking entities. The proposed rule also required that a banking entity relying on the authority contained in § 75.11 adopt a credible plan or similar documentation outlining how the banking entity intended to provide advisory or similar services to its customers through organizing and offering such fund.

Several commenters indicated support for this customer requirement and, in particular, the Agencies’ view that the customer relationship need not be a preexisting one. 2198 A few

commenters contended that the statute required that a banking entity have a pre-existing customer relationship, and may not solicit investors outside of its existing asset management

customers. 2199 One of these commenters argued that this would place banking entities at a competitive disadvantage compared to investment advisers that are not banking entities (and thus not subject to the requirements of section 13 and the final rule), but argued that this is a necessary result of section 13. 2200

The final rule adopts the language largely as proposed, and the Agencies

continue to believe that the customer relationship required under section 13(d)(1)(G) and the final rule may be established through or in connection with the banking entity’s organization and offering of a covered fund, so long

as that fund is a manifestation of the provision by the banking entity of bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services to the customer. 2201 The final rule requires that a covered fund be organized and offered pursuant to a written plan or similar documentation outlining how the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) intends to provide advisory or similar services to its customers through organizing and offering the fund. As part of this requirement, the plan must

be credible and indicate that the banking entity has conducted reasonable analysis to show that the fund is organized and offered for the purpose of providing bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services to customers of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) and not to evade the

restrictions of section 13 of the BHC

Act.

The language of the final rule also adopts the statutory requirements (and modifications related to commodity pools as discussed above) that the banking entity provide bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services, and that the covered fund be organized and offered only in connection with the provision of those services. Banking entities provide a wide range of customer-oriented services which may qualify as bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services. 2202 Historically, banking entities have used covered funds as a method of providing

these services to customers in a manner

that is both cost efficient for the

customer and allows customers to

benefit from access to advice and services that might not otherwise be available to them. These benefits apply to long-established customers as well asindividuals or entities that have no preexisting relationship with the banking entity but choose to obtain the benefit of trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services through participation in the covered

fund. Covered funds also allow customers to gauge the historical record of the banking entity in providing these services by reviewing the funds’ past performance.

The statute does not require that acovered fund be offered only to preexisting customers of the banking entity, and the Agencies believe that imposing such a requirement would not improve the quality of the trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory service, enhance the safety and soundness of the banking entity, or reduce the risks to the customers or the banking entity. In each case, the banking entity provides trust, fiduciary or advisory services to a

covered fund for the benefit of the banking entity’s customers, and the statute recognizes that organizing and offering a covered fund is a legitimate method for providing that service. In addition, the banking entity must abide by all the statutory and prudential


### 5989 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2203 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(iii).

2204 See proposed rule and final rule § 75.12.

2205 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(iv); proposed rule
§ 75.11(d).

2206 See Part VI.B.5. below. The comments
received on section 13(f) and § 75.16 of the proposed rule are described below. 2207 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(v); proposed rule
§ 75.11(e).

2208 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley).

2209 See Occupy.

2210 See RMA. 2211 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vi); proposed rule
§ 75.11(f).

2212 Similar restrictions on a fund sharing the
same name, or variation of the same name, with an insured depository institution or company that controls an insured depository institution or having
the word ‘‘bank’’ in its name, have been used previously in order to prevent customer confusion regarding the relationship between such companies

and a fund. See, e.g., Bank of Ireland, 82 Fed. Res.
Bull. 1129 (1996).

2213 See ABA (Keating); Ass’n of Institutional
Investors (Feb. 2012); Blackrock; EFAMA; SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); TCW; Katten (on
behalf of Int’l Clients); Union Asset.

2214 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Ass’n of
Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Blackrock; see also SVB; Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); UBS. requirements imposed by section 13 and the entity’s supervisors on the provision of those services. The Agencies do not believe that a pre-existing customer relationship requirement would be meaningful because it could easily be satisfied by a prospective customer seeking to invest in a covered fund by first establishing an account with a banking entity or purchasing another product (e.g., a brokerage account or shares of a mutual fund).

2. Compliance With Investment

Limitations

Section 13(d)(1)(G)(iii) of the BHC Act limits the ability of a banking entity that organizes and offers a covered fund to acquire or retain an ownership interest

in that covered fund as an

investment. 2203 Both the proposed rule and the final rule implement this provision by requiring that a banking entity limit its investments in a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers as provided in § 75.12. 2204

Comments received on investment limitations in the proposed rule, and

modifications made to the final rule implementing these limitations, are

described in Part VI.B.3. below.

3. Compliance With Section 13(f) of the

BHC Act

Section 75.11(d) of the proposed rule required that the banking entity comply with the limitations on relationships with covered funds imposed by section 13(f) of the BHC Act. 2205 The final rule adopts this requirement and provides that the banking entity (and its affiliates) must comply with the requirements of § 75.14. Section 13(f) of the BHC Act prohibits certain transactions or relationships that would be covered by
section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act, and provides that any permitted transaction is subject to section 23B of
the Federal Reserve Act, in each instance as if such banking entity were

a member bank and such covered fund

were an affiliate thereof. 2206 These limitations apply in several contexts,
and are contained in § 75.14 of the final
rule, discussed in detail below in Part

VI.B.5.

4. No Guarantees or Insurance of Fund

Performance

Section 75.11(e) of the proposed rule prohibited a banking entity that organizes and offers a covered fund from, directly or indirectly, guaranteeing, assuming or otherwise insuring the obligations or performance of the covered fund or any covered fund

in which such covered fund invests. 2207 This prong implemented section 13(d)(1)(G)(iv) of the BHC Act and was intended to prevent a banking entity from engaging in bailouts of a covered fund in which the banking entity has an

interest. 2208

There were only a few comments received on this aspect of the proposal. One commenter supported the restriction on guarantees as effective

and consistent with the statute. 2209

One commenter argued that the final rule should not prohibit borrower default indemnification services (i.e., the guarantee of collateral sufficiency upon a securities borrower’s default) provided to lending clients by agent

banks in connection with securities lending transactions involving a covered

fund. 2210 This commenter argued that

borrower default indemnification services guarantee only the deficit

between the mark to market value of

cash collateral received and the amount of any borrower default, and are

therefore different from and more limited than the type of general investment performance or obligation guarantee that section 13 was designed

to prevent.

The Agencies believe that the statute does not permit either full or partial guarantees of the obligations of a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers. Accordingly, the final rule, like the proposed rule, continues to mirror the statutory

restriction on direct or indirect guarantees of the obligations or performance of a covered fund by a banking entity in connection with reliance on the exemption provided in section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act. However, in response to comments received on the proposal, the Agencies note that the provision of a borrower default indemnification by a banking entity to a lending client in connection with securities lending transactions involving a covered fund is not prohibited. This type of indemnification is not a guarantee of the performance or obligations of a covered fund because it represents a guarantee to the customer or borrower of the obligation of the counterparty to perform and not a guarantee of the performance or underlying obligations of the covered fund. The requirement of the final rule that a banking entity and its affiliates not guarantee the obligations or performance of a covered fund that it organizes and offers therefore does not prohibit a banking entity from providing

borrower default indemnifications to

customers.

5. Limitation on Name Sharing With a

Covered Fund

Section 75.11(f) of the proposed rule prohibited the covered fund from sharing the same name or a variation of the same name with the banking entity that relies on the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act. 2211 The proposed rule also prohibited the covered fund from using the word

‘‘bank’’ in its name. 2212

The name-sharing restriction was one of the most commented upon aspects of
§ 75.11. A number of commenters on this section expressed the view that the name-sharing restriction in section 13(d)(1)(G)(vi) of the BHC Act and the proposed rule was too strict. In particular, a number of commenters argued that the name-sharing restriction should allow an asset manager to share its name with a sponsored covered fund so long as the covered fund does not

share the name of the insured depository institution or its affiliated holding company or use the word

‘‘bank.’’ 2213

Commenters argued that the namesharing restriction as proposed would impose significant business and branding burdens on the industry without providing incremental benefit to the public. 2214 These commenters argued that it would be unduly burdensome and costly for funds currently affiliated with banking entities or managers that are themselves banking entities to change the name of their affiliated funds and that many of these funds have developed a reputation in the marketplace based on the current name of the fund and/or fund manager.


### 5990 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2215 See Ass’n of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2216 See Ass’n of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); T.

Rowe Price; TCW.

2217 See TCW; Union Asset.

2218 See T. Rowe Price.

2219 See, e.g., UBS.

2220 See Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA; JPMC;
Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); Union Asset; IAA;
ICI Global; UBS; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012) (citing Directive 2004/39/EC of the European
Parliament and Council). 2221 See BVI; EFAMA; JPMC; UBS; Union Asset;
ICI Global; IAA.

2222 See UBS; Union Asset; ICI Global.

2223 See, e.g., AFG; ICI Global; JPMC.

2224 See Arnold & Porter (citing SEC Division of Investment Management, Letter to Registrants (May
13, 1993); Memorandum to SEC Chairman Breeden from Division of Investment Management (May 6, 1993); FDIC, Board, OCC, OTS, Interagency Statement on Retail Sales of Non-Deposit
Investment Products (Feb. 14, 1994)).

2225 See Occupy the SEC at 165.

2226 See id.

2227 See final rule § 75.11(f).

2228 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vi) and (h)(1). 2229 For example, one commenter alleged that it would need to rebrand approximately 500

established funds if the final rule was not modified to exclude established and regulated funds in foreign jurisdictions. See Goldman (Covered
Funds).

2230 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(ii) and (c)(1).

2231 See Part VI.B.1.g. Some of these commenters argued that the name-sharing restriction would place asset managers and funds affiliated with banking entities at a competitive disadvantage to other asset managers and funds. 2215

A few commenters argued that the rationale for the name-sharing restriction (i.e., to discourage bailing out funds) was already addressed under other restrictions of section 13(d)(1)(G) and the proposed rule that prohibit a banking entity from, directly or indirectly, guaranteeing, assuming or otherwise insuring the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such covered fund invested and that require

disclosure that investments in the covered fund are not insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. 2216 These commentersquestioned the necessity for the namesharing restriction when a prohibition on bailing out funds is already in place

and where there is disclosure that

investors bear the risk of loss in the

fund. Some of these commenters contended it was unlikely that investors

in a covered fund with an SECregistered investment adviser that has a

name unrelated to the name of an insured depository institution would be

misled to believe that the fund would be backed in any way by a related insured depository institution or the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. 2217 One of these commenters argued that the name-sharing restriction should not apply to organizations where insured depository institutions represent a de

minimis component of the organization’s operations. 2218

Other commenters recommended that the name-sharing restriction not be applied to covered funds that rely on the exemption for covered fund

activities and investments that occur solely outside of the United States. 2219 A few commenters expressed concern that the name-sharing restriction could be incompatible with regulatory requirements in certain foreign jurisdictions that a covered fund’s name

must indicate the fund’s connection with the fund sponsor. 2220 One commenter argued that it is common practice in Germany to disclose the designation of the sponsoring investment manager in the fund name in order to provide transparency to
investors, while a few commenters contended that European jurisdictions, including the U.K., require an

authorized fund to have a name representative of the authorized investment manager to avoid misleading

fund investors. 2221 Commenters also argued that the name-sharing restriction

was inconsistent with the laws of Ireland and Hong Kong. 2222 Certain commenters argued that the impact of the name-sharing restriction would be particularly unfair to non-U.S. retail funds like European UCITS if such

funds are not allowed to use the name

of the bank while U.S. mutual funds would not be subject to the same

restriction. 2223

By contrast, some commenters supported the name-sharing restriction. For example, one commenter indicated

that the use of the word ‘‘bank’’ or a

shared name in the fund’s name was already strongly discouraged by prior guidance. 2224 Another commenter supported the name-sharing restriction but argued it did not go far enough because it did not apply to funds that a banking entity was permissibly allowed to sponsor and invest in under other provisions of section 13. 2225 According
to this commenter, covered funds permitted under other exemptions

should not be allowed to share the same name with the banking entity. 2226

After carefully considering comments and the express terms of the statute, the final rule includes the name-sharing restriction as proposed. 2227 The namesharing restriction is imposed by the statute and prohibits a banking entity from sharing the same name or variation

of the same name with a covered fund. The statute also defines the scope of the prohibition by defining the term ‘‘banking entity’’ to generally include any affiliate or subsidiary of an insured depository institution or any company that controls an insured depository

institution. 2228 However, the Agencies believe that many of the concerns raised by commenters with respect to this provision should be addressed through

the revised definition of covered fund in
the final rule, and modifications to the exemption for covered fund activities and investments that occur solely

outside of the United States. 2229 For example, as discussed in greater detail above in Part VI.B.1.c.1., foreign public

funds sold outside the United States are

excluded from the definition of covered

fund. 2230 In addition, pursuant to the

definition of covered fund in the final rule, a foreign fund only becomes a covered fund with respect to a U.S. banking entity (including a foreign affiliate of that U.S. banking entity) that acts as sponsor to, or has an ownership
interest in, the fund. Moreover, numerous funds operate successfully

with names that differ from the name of the fund sponsor or adviser.

The Agencies recognize, however, that the statutory name-sharing restriction may affect some entities that

will be covered funds and that cannot rely on another permitted activity exemption under section 13(d)(1) and the final rule. The name-sharing restriction may result in certain costs and other economic burdens for banking
entities that advise these funds, as discussed in greater detail in Part VI.B.1.g. above. 2231 However, as the Agencies also note above, to the extent that the restriction results in a banking entity not otherwise coming under pressure for reputational reasons to directly or indirectly assist a covered

fund under distress that shares the banking entity’s name, the name-sharing prohibition could reduce the risk to the banking entity that this assistance might pose. The Agencies also expect that the conformance period, both for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act generally and for funds that are illiquid funds, should be sufficient to allow covered funds to take the stepsnecessary to comply with the namesharing restriction in the statute and

final rule.

6. Limitation on Ownership by Directors and Employees

Section 75.11(g) of the proposed rule implemented section 13(d)(1)(G)(vii) of the BHC Act. That statutory provision prohibits any director or employee of


### 5991 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2232 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vii); proposed rule § 75.11(g).

2233 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley).

2234 See Occupy.

2235 See Arnold & Porter.

2236 See Arnold & Porter; BOK, Credit Suisse (Williams); Fin. Services Roundtable (Jun. 14,
2011); PEGCC; T. Rowe Price.

2237 See Credit Suisse (Williams). 2238 See T. Rowe Price.

2239 See Credit Suisse (Williams); Fin. Services Roundtable (Jun. 14, 2011).

2240 See Credit Suisse (Williams); Fin. Services Roundtable (Jun. 14, 2011).

2241 See BOK (citing proposed rule at § 75.17);

Arnold & Porter.

2242 See SVB.

2243 See EFAMA; BVI; IAA; ICI Global; JPMC;

Union Asset.

2244 See Annex II para. 1(m). Directive 2011/61/ EU of the European Parliament and the Council of 8 June 2011 on Alternative Investment Fund
Managers.

2245 See EFAMA; Union Asset. 2246 See final rule § 75.11(g).

2247 See final rule §§ 75.10(c)(1) and 75.10(c)(5).

2248 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vii). the banking entity from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in the covered fund, except for any director or employee of the banking entity who is directly engaged in providing investment advisory or other services to

the covered fund. 2232 This allows an individual employed by a banking entity, who also acts as fund manager or adviser (for example), to acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund that aligns the manager or

adviser’s incentives with those of the banking entity’s customers. 2233

One commenter argued that only employees or directors who provide investment advisory services should be

allowed to make an investment in the

fund and that the rule should not allow employees or directors who provide other, unspecified services to invest in

a fund. 2234 This commenter argued thatthe proposed rule would allow nonadviser banking entity employees who

have no need to maintain ‘‘skin in the game’’ to earn profit on the fund’s performance. According to another commenter, fiduciary clients of banking organizations often are less interested in whether the fund manager or other service providers have money in the

fund than whether the client’s own account manager, and those individuals above him/her who are responsible for
investment decisions, have allocated his or her own assets in the same way and into the same general asset classes and funds as the client’s fiduciary account is being allocated. 2235

The more prevalent view among commenters was that the proposed rule should be revised and expanded to permit investments in a sponsored fund by a broader group of banking entity directors, officers, and employees, directly or indirectly through employee benefit programs or trust and fiduciary accounts, regardless of whether the individual provides services to the

covered fund. 2236 Some commenters argued that narrowly limiting permissible director and employee investments could put asset managers affiliated with an insured depository institution at a competitive disadvantage relative to managers that

are not affiliated with an insured depository institution, 2237 as well as make it more difficult for banking entities to offer their U.S. and non-U.S. employees similar choices in retirement plans. 2238

Two commenters urged that the supervisors of a fund’s portfolio managers or investment advisers should be permitted to invest. 2239 These commenters also argued that individuals who provide support services to the fund, including administrative, oversight and risk management, legal compliance, regulatory, product structuring, deal sourcing and origination, deal evaluation and diligence, investor relations, sales and marketing, tax, accounting, valuation and other operational support services, should be permitted to invest in the fund. These commenters also requested confirmation that any director, including an individual serving on the board or

investment committee of a fund or its manager, should be permitted to

invest. 2240 Another commenter argued that employees and directors should be permitted to make their own individual investment decisions independently without regard to whether they provide

services to the covered fund. 2241 One

commenter contended that a grandfathering approach is necessary to address situations where a pre-existing covered fund already has investments from directors and employees who do not directly provide services to the fund because the fund may be unable to force

those individuals out of the fund. 2242

A number of commenters argued that, if defined too narrowly, this restriction may conflict with the laws of other jurisdictions that require advisers and/ or their directors and employees to invest in the funds they manage. 2243 For example, several commenters argued that this requirement will directly conflict with the European Alternative Investment Fund Managers

Directive. 2244 Two commenters contended that certain jurisdictions, including the Netherlands, require directors and other personnel of fund managers to hold fund units or shares of funds managed by the fund manager as part of their pensions. 2245 The final rule retains the requirement limiting the ownership of a covered fund by directors and employees of a banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) relying on the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act. 2246 This limitation is imposed by statute on banking entities that rely on this exemption. If a director or employee does not provide services to the fund, they may not invest in that fund. As in
the statute, the final rule allows employees who provide services to the fund other than investment advisory

services to invest in the fund. Under the final rule, directors or employees who provide investment advice or investment management services to the fund may invest in that fund. Similarly, directors or employees who provide services that enable the provision of

investment advice or investment management, such as oversight and risk management, deal origination, due diligence, administrative or other support services, may also invest in the fund. In response to comments, the final

rule has been modified to make clear that a former director or employee may

retain an interest in a covered fund if the director or employee acquired the interest while serving as a director or employee of the banking entity and providing investment advisory or other

services to the covered fund.

The Agencies believe that many of the concerns raised by commenters regarding the effects of this limitation on foreign funds are addressed through the scope of foreign funds that will be
covered funds, and revisions to the exemption provided for covered fund

activities and investments that occur solely outside of the United States.
Moreover, the final rule excludes foreign public funds and broad-based foreign pension funds from the definition of covered fund and they are thus not subject to the restrictions of

section 13 or the final rule. 2247

Section 13 clearly contemplates investments by certain employees and directors of the banking entity. 2248 However, the Agencies continue to believe that certain director or employee investments in a covered fund may provide an opportunity for a banking entity to evade the limitations regarding the amount or value of ownership interests a banking entity may acquire or

retain in a covered fund or funds contained in section 13(d)(4) of the BHC

Act and the final rule. In order to
address this concern, the final rule attributes an ownership interest in a


### 5992 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2249 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(viii); proposed rule
§ 75.11(h).

2250 To the extent that any additional rules are

issued to ensure that losses in a covered fund are borne solely by the investors in the covered fund and not by the banking entity, a banking entity would be required to comply with those as well in order to satisfy the requirements of section
13(d)(1)(G)(viii) of the BHC Act.

2251 See, e.g., Occupy. 2252 See Arnold & Porter.

2253 See Occupy.

2254 See Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients).

2255 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(iii).

2256 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(viii). 2257 The relevant agencies issued a proposed rule to implement the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act, as required under section 941 of the

Dodd-Frank Act. See Credit Risk Retention, 76 FR 24090 (Apr. 29, 2011). Those agencies recently issued a re-proposal of the risk-retention requirements. See Credit Risk Retention, 78 FR 57928 (Sept. 20, 2013).

2258 See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(2)(iii).

2259 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Alfred

Brock.

2260 See, e.g., AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; BoA. covered fund acquired or retained by a director or employee to a banking entity for purposes of the investment limits in section 13(d)(4) under certain

circumstances. This attribution is

discussed in detail below in Part

VI.B.3.f.

7. Disclosure Requirements

Section 75.11(h) of the proposed rule required that, in connection with organizing and offering a covered fund, the banking entity clearly and conspicuously disclose, in writing, to prospective and actual investors in the covered fund that any losses in the covered fund will be borne solely by investors in the covered fund and not by the banking entity and its affiliates or subsidiaries; and that the banking entity’s and its affiliates’ or subsidiaries’

losses in the covered fund will be

limited to losses attributable to the ownership interests in the covered fund held by the banking entity and its

affiliates or subsidiaries in their capacity as investors in the covered fund. In addition, the proposed rule required that a banking entity disclose, in writing: (i) that each investor should read the fund offering documents before investing in the covered fund; (ii) that the ownership interests in the covered fund are not insured by the FDIC, and are not deposits, obligations of, or endorsed or guaranteed in any way, by any banking entity (unless that happens to be the case); and (iii) the role of the banking entity and its affiliates, subsidiaries, and employees in sponsoring or providing any services to the covered fund. The proposed rule also required banking entities to comply with any additional rules of the appropriate Agency designed to ensure that losses in any covered fund are borne solely by the investors in the covered fund and not by the banking entity. 2249 In proposing the rule, the Agencies indicated that a banking entity may satisfy these disclosure requirements by making the required

disclosures in the covered fund’s offering documents. 2250

A few commenters supported the disclosure requirement as effective and

consistent with the statute. 2251 One

commenter stated that the disclosures required in section 13(d)(1)(G)(viii) of the Act and the proposed rule are

consistent with disclosures in the banking agencies’ February 1994 ‘‘Interagency Statement on Retail Sales of Non-deposit Investment Products’’ and other FINRA and SEC guidance. 2252 One commenter suggested that the rule include a requirement that the disclosures be issued in plain English. 2253

Another commenter argued that the Agencies should revise the disclosure requirements under the proposal so that offering materials of non-U.S. funds provided to non-U.S. investors outside

the United States need not include the specified disclosures nor refer to the FDIC or other specific U.S. agencies. 2254 This commenter argued that a non-U.S. person investing in a non-U.S. fund offered or sponsored by a non-U.S. banking entity has no expectation that

the fund or its interests would be insured by the FDIC. The Agencies

believe this concern is addressed through the revised definition of covered fund, which generally provides that a foreign fund offered outside of the United States will only be a covered fund with respect to a U.S. banking entity (including a foreign affiliate of the U.S. banking entity) that acts as sponsor
to, or invests in, the fund. 2255

The final rule adopts the proposed disclosure requirements substantially as proposed. As explained above, these disclosures are largely required by the

statute. 2256 The proposed requirement to disclose that ownership interests in a covered fund are not insured by the FDIC, and are not deposits, obligations of, or endorsed or guaranteed in any way, by any banking entity (unless that happens to be the case) is not expressly required by the statute. However, section 13(d)(1)(G)(iii) permits the Agencies to impose additional rules designed to ensure that losses in a covered fund are borne solely by investors in the fund and not by a banking entity. The Agencies believe that requiring a banking entity to make this disclosure as part of organizing and offering a covered fund furthers this purpose by removing the potential for misperception that a covered fund sponsored by a banking entity (which by

definition must be affiliated with a depository institution insured by the FDIC) is guaranteed by that insured
institution or the FDIC. Moreover, as noted above, this disclosure is already commonly provided by banking entities.

b. Organizing and Offering an Issuing Entity of Asset-Backed Securities

To the extent that an issuing entity of

asset-backed securities is a covered
fund, the investment limitations contained in section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act also would limit the ability of a banking entity to acquire or retain an

investment in that issuer. Section 941 of

the Dodd-Frank Act added a new section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11) which requires a banking entity to retain and maintain a

certain minimum interest in certain

asset-backed securities. 2257 In order to give effect to this separate requirement under the Dodd-Frank Act, § 75.14(a)(2) of the proposed rule permitted a banking entity that is a ‘‘securitizer’’ or ‘‘originator’’ under the provisions of that Act to acquire or retain an ownership

interest in an issuer of asset-backed securities, in an amount (or value of economic interest) required to comply with the minimum requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act and any implementing regulations issued

thereunder. 2258 The proposal also permitted a banking entity to act as sponsor to the securitization.

Commenters expressed a variety of

views on the treatment of interests in

securitizations held under risk retention pursuant to the proposed rule. Some commenters argued that the proposal was effective as written and represented a reasonable way to reconcile the two

sections of the Dodd-Frank Act consistent with the risk-reducing objective of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 2259 Other commenters also supported the proposal’s recognition that banking entities may be required to

hold a certain amount of risk in a

securitization that would also be a covered fund, but argued that the proposed exemption was too

narrow. 2260

After carefully considering the comments received on the proposal, as well as the language and purpose of
section 13 of the BHC Act, the final rule provides an exemption that permits a banking entity to organize and offer a


### 5993 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2261 See final rule § 75.11(b).

2262 As used in this **SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION**

, the term ‘‘securitization’’ means a transaction or

series of transactions that result in the issuance of

asset-backed securities.

2263 See final rule § 75.11(b) (providing the requirements for a banking entity that is organizing and offering a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities by reference to the requirements of § 75.11(a), as discussed above).

2264 As explained in detail below in Part VI.B.3. addressing the limitations on investments in covered funds by a banking entity, the final rule permits a banking entity to acquire and retain ownership interests in a covered fund in order to comply with section 15G of the Exchange Act (15
U.S.C.78o–11) in an amount that does not exceed the amount required to comply with the banking entity’s chosen method of compliance under section 15G and the implementing regulations issued

thereunder. covered fund that is an issuing entity of

asset-backed securities. 2261 The Agencies have determined to provide this exemption in order to address the unique circumstances and ownership structures presented by

securitizations. 2262 Under the final rule, a banking entity may permissibly organize and offer a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities so long as the banking entity (and its affiliates) comply with all of the requirements of § 75.11(a)(3) through (a)(8). 2263 As discussed above, the requirements of § 75.11(a)(3) through 75.11(a)(8) are that: (i) The banking entity and its affiliates do not acquire or retain an ownership interest in the covered fund except as permitted under
§ 75.12 of the final rule; 2264 (ii) the banking entity and its affiliates comply with the requirements of § 75.14 of the final rule; (iii) the banking entity and its affiliates do not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such covered fund invests; (iv) the covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, does not share the same name

or variation of the same name with the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof)

and does not use the word ‘‘bank’’ in its name; (v) no director or employee of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) takes or retains an ownership interest in the covered fund except under the

limited circumstances noted in the final rule; and (vi) the banking entity complies with the disclosure requirements regarding covered funds in

the final rule.

The Agencies believe that the requirements of the exemption for organizing and offering a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities, which are in most aspects consistent with the exemption for organizing and offering a covered fund in section 13(d)(1)(G), provide limitations on a banking entity’s securitization activities involving

covered funds that are consistent with the limitations imposed with respect to organizing and offering a covered fundthat is not an issuing entity of assetbacked securities. For instance, a banking entity may not share the same

name as a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities and is prohibited from guaranteeing or otherwise ‘‘bailing out’’ a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities, including being required to comply with section 13(f) of the BHC Act regarding covered transactions with
the covered fund. Furthermore, like a banking entity’s investment in any
covered fund, the final rule limits the ability of a banking entity to invest in a covered fund that is an issuing entity

of asset-backed securities unless it meets the requirements of § 75.12.

Unlike many other covered funds, the Agencies understand that banking entities might not act in a fiduciary capacity when they organize and offer a

covered fund that is a securitization vehicle. For instance, as part of organizing and offering a securitization vehicle, one or more parties may typically organize and initiate the securitization by selling or transferring assets, either directly or indirectly, to an issuing entity of asset-backed securities. An entity that provides these services typically does so as a service to provide investors and the entity’s customers with the ability to invest in the assets in a manner and to a degree that they may

otherwise be unable to do. In order to identify certain activities that would be included as organizing and offering a securitization, the final rule provides that organizing and offering an issuing entity of asset-backed securities means acting as the securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act, for the issuer, or acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in the issuer in compliance with the implementing regulations issued

under section 15G of that Act.

The final rule reflects, as discussed above, that one or more parties that organize and offer an issuing entity of asset-backed securities may not provide any of the services identified in § 75.11(a)(1). In this case the banking entity is not required to comply with § 75.11(a)(1) or (a)(2). Section 75.11(b) of the final rule is designed to address
situations where, as discussed above, a banking entity does not act in a fiduciary capacity when it organizes and

offers a covered fund that is a securitization vehicle. With respect to any securitization vehicle that retains a collateral manager for investment advice regarding the assets of the securitization vehicle, such a collateral manager would be required to comply with all of the provisions of § 75.11(a) to acquire and retain an ownership interest in such

securitization vehicle.

The final rule therefore both identifies

certain activities that would be included as organizing and offering a

securitization and modifies the requirements of § 75.11 to reflect

differences between securitizations and other types of covered funds, as discussed above. The Agencies believe,
therefore, that the final rule appropriately addresses the type of activity that is usually associated with organizing and offering a securitization and also comports with the manner in which Congress chose to define the type of parties engaged in activities that merit special attention related to issuing

entities of asset-backed securities in another part of the Dodd-Frank Act.

The Agencies have determined to provide this exemption by using their authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) of the

BHC Act and believe that this exemption promotes and protects the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States. Many companies and other

entities utilize securitization transactions to efficiently manage, allocate and distribute risks throughout

the markets in a manner consistent with meeting the demands of their investors. Companies also utilize securitizations in order to help provide liquidity to certain asset classes or portions of the market that, absent this liquidity, may experience decreased liquidity and increased costs of funding. For instance, if banking entities were not permitted to organize and offer a securitization, the Agencies believe this would result in increased costs of funding or credit for many businesses of all sizes that are engaged in activities that section 13 of the BHC Act was not designed to address. Additionally, this exemption enables banking entities to acquire and retain ownership interests in a covered fund to comply with section 15G of the Exchange Act, which requires certain parties to a securitization transaction to

retain a minimum amount of risk in a securitization, a requirement not applicable to covered funds that are not securitizations. The Agencies therefore have determined that this exemption will promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States by facilitating the benefits securitizations can provide as discussed above, and also by enabling banking


### 5994 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2265 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(B).

2266 See Cleary Gottlieb et al.; JPMC; Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2267 See BoA; Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse
(Williams); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked
Products); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012). Other commenters argued that application of Section 13(f) of the BHC Act would prohibit the underwriting and market making by a banking entity of the securities of a covered fund that such banking entity sponsors, organizes and offers or provides investment management advice or services because Section 13(f) of the BHC Act prohibits the purchase of securities by a banking entity from such

a covered fund. See, e.g., ASF (Feb. 2012); Cleary
Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012); FSA (Feb. 2012).

2268 See JPMC; Cleary Gottlieb. 2269 See final rule § 75.11(c).

2270 A discussion of the implementation of section 13(d)(1)(D) and (F) with regard to the final

rule’s limitations on covered fund investments and activities is provided in the section that relates to permitted covered fund interests and activities by a regulated insurance company and § 75.13(c) of the

final rule. entities to comply with section 15G of the Exchange Act.

The Agencies believe it would not be consistent with the safety and soundness of banking entities or the financial stability of the United States to prevent banking entities from acquiring or retaining ownership interests in securitizations as part of the permitted activity of organizing and offering securitizations or from meeting any applicable requirements related to securitizations, including those imposed under section 15G of the Exchange Act. The Agencies note that the exemption for organizing and offering a securitization does not relieve banking entities of any requirements that they may be subject to with respect to their investments in or relationships with a securitization, such as any applicable requirements regarding conflicts of interest relating to certain

securitizations under section 27B of the

Securities Act of 1933.

c. Underwriting and Market Making for

a Covered Fund

Section 13(d)(1)(B) permits a banking entity to purchase and sell securities

and other instruments described in 13(h)(4) in connection with certain underwriting or market making-related

activities. 2265 The proposal did not discuss how this exemption applied in the context of underwriting or market making of ownership interests in

covered funds.

Commenters argued that the scope of the permitted activities under sections 13(d)(1)(B), (D) and (F), which respectively set out permitted activitiesof underwriting and market makingrelated activities, activities on behalf of customers, and activities by a regulated insurance company, apply to all of the activities prohibited under section 13(a),

whether those activities would involve proprietary trading or ownership of or acting as a sponsor to covered funds. 2266 Commenters argued that the statutory exemption for underwriting and market making-related activities is applicable to both proprietary trading and covered
fund activities, and recommended that the final rule allow banking entities to hold ownership interests and other

securities of covered funds for the purpose of underwriting and engaging in market making-related activities. 2267 Commenters noted that many structured finance vehicles rely on sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act, and argued that, without a market making exemption for securities of covered funds, banking entities would be unable to engage in customer-driven underwriting and market making activity with respect to securities issued by entities such as collateralized loan obligation issuers and non-U.S. exchange-traded funds. 2268

After careful review of the comments in light of the statutory provisions, the final rule has been modified to provide a covered fund specific provision for underwriting and market making-related activities of ownership interests in covered funds. These underwriting and market making activities are within the scope of permitted activities under the final rule so long as:

• The banking entity conducts the

activities in accordance with the requirements of § 75.4(a) or § 75.4(b), respectively;

• With respect to any banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) that: acts as a sponsor, investment adviser or commodity trading advisor to a particular covered fund or otherwise acquires and retains an ownership

interest in such covered fund in reliance on § 75.11(a); acquires and retains an ownership interest in such covered fund
and is either a securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act, or is acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in such covered fund in compliance with

section 15G of that Act and the implementing regulations issued thereunder each as permitted by § 75.11(b); or, directly or indirectly, guarantees, assumes, or otherwise insures the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered
fund in which such fund invests, then in each such case any ownership interests acquired or retained by the banking entity and its affiliates in connection with underwriting and market making related activities for that particular covered fund are included in the calculation of ownership interests permitted to be held by the banking entity and its affiliates under the limitations of § 75.12(a)(2)(ii) and § 75.12(d); and • With respect to any banking entity, the aggregate value of all ownership interests of the banking entity and its affiliates in all covered funds acquired and retained under § 75.11, including all covered funds in which the banking entity holds an ownership interest in connection with underwriting and market making related activities under § 75.11(c), are included in the calculation of all ownership interests under § 75.12(a)(2)(iii) and § 75.12(d). 2269

The Agencies believe that providing a separate provision relating to permitted underwriting and market making-related activities for ownership interests in covered funds is supported by section 13(d)(1)(B) of the BHC Act. 2270 The exemption for underwriting and market making-related activities under section 13(d)(1)(B), by its terms, is a statutorily permitted activity and exemption from the prohibitions in section 13(a), whether on proprietary trading or on covered fund activities. Applying the statutory exemption in this manner accommodates the capital raising

activities of covered funds and other

issuers in accordance with the underwriting and market making provisions under the statute.

The final rule provides that a banking entity must include any ownership interests that it acquires or retains in connection with underwriting and market making-related activities for a particular covered fund for purposes of the per-fund limitation under § 75.12(a)(2)(ii) if the banking entity: (i) Acts as a sponsor, investment adviser or commodity trading advisor to the covered fund; (ii) otherwise acquires and retains an ownership interest in the covered fund as permitted under § 75.11(a); (iii) acquires and retains an ownership interest in the covered fund
and is either a securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act, or is acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in the covered fund in compliance with

section 15G of that Act and the implementing regulations issued thereunder each as permitted by § 75.11(b); or (iv) directly or indirectly guarantees, assumes, or otherwise insures the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered

fund in which such fund invests. This is designed to prevent any unintended


### 5995 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2271 See final rule § 75.11(c)(3).

2272 See Cleary Gottlieb; Credit Suisse (Williams). 2273 See final rule § 75.11(c)(1).

2274 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4); proposed rule § 75.12. 2275 See proposed rule §§ 75.12(a)(1)(i);
75.12(a)(2)(i)(A) and (B); 75.12(b).

2276 See id. at §§ 75.12(a)(1)(ii); 75.12(a)(2)(ii);
75.12(c).

2277 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); T. Rowe Price; Credit Suisse (Williams); Allen & Overy (on behalf of
Canadian Banks);TCW. expansion of ownership of covered funds by banking entities that are subject to the per fund limitations under

§ 75.12.

These banking entities will have a limited ability to engage in underwriting or market making-related activities for a covered fund for which the banking entity’s investments are subject to the per-fund limitations in § 75.12 as discussed above. Such a banking entity will have more flexibility to underwrite and make a market in the ownership

interests of such a covered fund in connection with organizing and offering the covered fund during the fund’s seeding period, since during the seeding period a banking entity may own in excess of three percent of the covered fund, subject to the other requirements

in § 75.12.

The final rule also provides that all banking entities that engage in underwriting and market-making related activities in covered funds are required to include the aggregate value of all ownership interests of the banking entity in all covered funds acquired and retained under § 75.11, including in connection with underwriting and market making-related activities under § 75.11(c), in the calculation of the aggregate covered fund ownership

interest limitations under § 75.12(a)(2)(iii) (and make the

associated deduction from tier one capital for purposes of calculating compliance with applicable regulatory capital requirements). 2271

Some commenters asked that the Agencies permit banking entities to engage in market making and underwriting in non-sponsored covered

fund interests. 2272 The final rule permits a banking entity that does not hold an ownership interest in the covered fund in reliance on §§ 75.11(a) or 75.11(b) of the final rule, is not a sponsor of the
covered fund, is not an investment adviser or commodity trading advisor to the covered fund, and does not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such fund invests to rely on the market-making and underwriting exemption in § 75.11(c) provided that the banking entity meets all of the requirements of that exemption. These conditions include the aggregate funds limitation and the capital deduction contained in § 75.12 after including all ownership interest held by the banking entity and its affiliates under § 75.11, including ownership interests acquired or retained under the exemption for underwriting and market making-related activities in § 75.11(c). In accordance with section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, the Agencies

have determined that these restrictions on reliance on the market-making and underwriting exemption provided by section 13(d)(1)(B) are appropriate to address the purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act, which is aimed at assuring that banking entities do not bail-out a

covered fund and maintain sufficient capital against the risks of ownership of covered funds. The Agencies note, however, that the guarantee restriction is not intended to prevent a banking entity from entering into arrangements

with a covered fund that are not entered into for the purpose of guaranteeing the obligations or performance of the covered fund. For example, this restriction is not intended to prohibit a banking entity from entering into or providing liquidity facilities or letters of
credit for covered funds; however, it would apply to arrangements such as a put of the ownership interest in the covered fund to the banking entity. The

determination of whether an arrangement would fall within this guarantee restriction would depend on

the facts and circumstances.

The Agencies emphasize that any banking entity that engages in underwriting or market making-related activities in covered funds must comply with all of the conditions applicable to such activity as set forth in section §§ 75.4(a) and 75.4(b). 2273 Thus, holdings of a single covered fund would be subject to limitations on risk as well as length of holding period, among other applicable limitations and requirements. These requirements are designed specifically to address a banking entity’s underwriting and market making-related activities and to prohibit holding exposures in excess of reasonably expected near term demand of clients, customers and counterparties.

3. Section 75.12: Permitted Investment

in a Covered Fund

a. Proposed Rule

Section 75.12 of the proposed rule implemented section 13(d)(4) of the

BHC Act and described the limited circumstances under which a banking entity may acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund that the banking entity (which includes its subsidiaries and affiliates) organizes

and offers. 2274 Section 13(d)(4)(A) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to acquire and retain an ownership interest in a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers for the purpose of: (i) Establishing the fund and providing the fund with sufficient initial equity for investment to permit
the fund to attract unaffiliated investors; or (ii) making a de minimis investment in the fund, subject to several limitations. Section 13(d)(4)(B) of the BHC Act requires that investments by a banking entity in a covered fund must, not later than one year after the date of
establishment of the fund, be reduced to

an amount that is not more than three percent of the total outstanding ownership interests of the fund. Consistent with the statute, § 75.12 of the proposal provided that, after expiration of the seeding period, a banking entity’s investment in a single covered fund may not represent more than three percent of the total outstanding ownership interests in the covered fund (the ‘‘per-fund limitation’’). 2275 In addition, as provided in the statute, the proposal provided that the total amount invested by a banking entity in all covered funds may not exceed three percent of the tier 1 capital of the banking entity (the ‘‘aggregate funds limitation’’). 2276

b. Duration of Seeding Period for New

Covered Funds

Commenters argued that it is essential to serving their customers efficiently that a banking entity be permitted to acquire and retain an ownership interest in a covered fund that it organizes and

offers as a de minimis investment or for the purpose of establishing the fund. A

number of commenters contended that a banking entity typically invests a limited amount of its own capital in a fund (‘‘seed capital’’) as part of organizing the fund to produce investment performance as a record of the fund’s investment strategy (‘‘track record’’). 2277 Once a track record for the fund is established, the banking entity

markets the fund to unaffiliated

investors.

Commenters argued that the one-year seeding period provided in the proposed rule would be too short to establish a track record for many types of covered funds. Commenters argued

that the duration of the track record investors typically demand before investing in a new fund depends on a number of factors (e.g., the type of fund,


### 5996 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2278 See et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); see also Ass’n of Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); Bank of Montreal et al. (Jan. 2012); Allen & Overy
(on behalf of Canadian Banks); Credit Suisse (Williams); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; SSgA (Feb.
2012); T. Rowe Price; Union Asset. One commenter argued that this limitation would constrain portfolio composition of a covered fund due to an inability of a fund to raise sufficient capital to make larger investments. See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2279 See AFG; Union Asset.

2280 See SIFMA (Mar. 2012); see also Credit
Suisse (Williams).

2281 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2282 See Occupy; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.
2012); see also 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley).

2283 See, e.g., Public Citizen. 2284 See final rule § 75.12(a)(1).

2285 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4).

2286 See id. at 1851(d)(4)(C). 2287 See SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA: Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n;

AFG; Union Asset.

2288 Importantly, the statute recognizes that a banking entity may need more than the automatic one-year seeding period to build a track record and/
or market its interests to unaffiliated investors; therefore, a banking entity may apply for an extension of the seeding period as provided in
75.12(e) of the final rule as discussed below in Part

VI.B.3.h. investment strategy, and potential investors). According to commenters, an inability to demonstrate a track record over multiple years may reduce the allocation of capital by investors who are unable to gain an understanding of the investment strategy, risk profile, and potential performance of the fund. 2278

Commenters provided alternative suggestions regarding how to define the start of the seeding period for purposes of applying the statutory exception for investments during the seeding period. For example, two commenters recommended that the Agencies treat a private equity fund as being established on the date on which the fund begins its asset-acquisition phase and is closed to new investors, and a hedge fund as

established on the date on which the fund has reached its target amount of funding and begins investing according

to the fund’s stated investment objectives. 2279 Another commenter suggested that the permitted seedingperiod begin on the date on which thirdparty investors are first admitted to the

fund. 2280

Several commenters expressed concern that the per-fund limitation could be subject to evasion unless the Agencies require that the seeding period begin at the time funds are first invested by the banking entity in the fund. 2281 Some of these commenters suggested the Agencies impose a dollar cap of $10 million on the seed capital that a banking entity may provide to a newly organized covered fund in addition to the statutory limits based on the amount

of the fund’s shares and the amount of the banking entity’s tier 1 capital. 2282 These commenters argued that an explicit quantitative limit better accounted for the size of some banking
entities, which otherwise made the potential amount of capital placed in covered funds quite large. 2283

The Agencies have considered carefully the comments on the proposal

and have made several modifications to the final rule to more clearly explain how the limitations apply during the seeding period. The final rule continues to provide that a banking entity may

invest in a covered fund that it organizes and offers either in connection with establishing the fund,

or as a de minimis investment. 2284 Importantly, the statute does not permit a banking entity to invest in a covered fund unless the banking entity organizes or offers the covered fund or qualifies for another exemption. As explained more fully in the discussion of § 75.11 above, a wide variety of activities are encompassed in organizing and offering
a covered fund. Under the statute, which generally prohibits investments in covered funds, a banking entity may

invest in a covered fund under the exemptions provided in section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act, including section 13(d)(1)(G) and the provisions of section 13(d)(4), only if the banking entity engages in one or more of these permitted activities with regard to that covered fund and complies with all applicable limitations under the final rule regarding investments in a covered

fund.

As noted above, the statute allows a banking entity to acquire and hold all of the ownership interests in a covered fund for the purpose of establishing the fund and providing the fund with sufficient initial equity for investment to permit the fund to attract unaffiliated

investors. 2285 However, the statute also imposes a limit on the duration of an

investment made in connection with seeding a covered fund. At the end of that period, the investment must

conform to the limits on de minimis investments set by the statute. In keeping with the terms of the statute, the final rule, like the proposal, allowsbanking entities a seeding period of oneyear for all covered funds. The statute

also allows the Board to extend that period, upon an application by a banking entity, for two additional years

if the Board finds an extension to be consistent with safety and soundness and in the public interest. 2286 As explained below, the final rule, like the proposal, incorporates this process and

sets forth the factors the Board will consider when determining whether to allow an extended seeding period. The Board and the Agencies will monitor these extension requests to ensure that banking entities do not seek extensions for the purpose of evading the

restrictions on covered funds or to engage in prohibited proprietary trading.

As noted above, the proposal did not specify ‘‘date of establishment,’’ and commenters suggested a variety of dates

that could serve as the date of establishment for purposes of determining the duration of the seeding period and the per-fund limitations on ownership interests in a covered

fund. 2287 After considering comments received on the proposal, the Agencies

have modified the final rule to include

a definition of ‘‘date of establishment’’ for a covered fund. In general, the date

of establishment is the date on which an investment adviser or similar party begins to make investments that execute an investment or trading strategy for the covered fund. The Agencies perceive the act of making investments to execute an investment or trading strategy as demonstrating that the fund has begun its existence and is no longer simply a plan or proposal. In order to account for the unique circumstances and manner
in which securitizations are established, for a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities, the

date of establishment under the final

rule is the date on which the assets are initially transferred into the issuing entity of the asset-backed securities. This is the date that the entity is formed and the securities are generally sold around this time. The Agencies believe this is the appropriate time for the date

of establishment for securitizations

because this is the date that the

securitization risks are transferred to the

owners of the securitization vehicle.
Once the assets have been transferred,

the securitization has been established and securities of the issuer may typically be priced in support of organizing and offering the issuer. Setting a later time, such as when the fund becomes fully subscribed or the assets have been fully assembled, could permit a banking entity to engage in prohibited proprietary trading under the guise of waiting for investors that may

never materialize. 2288

The statute also requires a banking entity to actively seek unaffiliated investors to reduce or dilute the entity’s ownership interest to the amount permitted under the statute. This requirement is included in the final


### 5997 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2289 See proposed rule § 75.12(b)(2).

2290 See proposed rule § 75.12(b)(4).

2291 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68904.

2292 See ABA (Keating); BoA; Arnold & Porter;
BOK; Scale; SVB.

2293 See ABA (Keating) (alleging that this is similar to the SEC’s approach to the definition of venture capital fund for the purposes of being exempt from investment advisor registration).

2294 The relevant agencies issued a proposed rule to implement the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act, as required under section 941 of the

Dodd-Frank Act. See Credit Risk Retention, 76 FR 24090 (Apr. 29, 2011). Those agencies recently issued a re-proposal of the risk-retention requirements. See Credit Risk Retention, 78 FR 57928 (Sept. 20, 2013). 2295 See proposed rule § 75.14(a)(2)(iii).

2296 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Alfred

Brock.

2297 See, e.g., AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; BoA.

2298 See AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; BoA.

2299 See BoA.

2300 See AFME et al.; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb.
2012); BoA. rule, and underscores the nature of

covered fund activities under section 13(d)(1)(G) as a method to provide investment advisory, trust and fiduciary

services to customers rather than allow the banking entity to engage in prohibited proprietary trading. To effectuate the requirements of the statute, under the final rule, banking entities that organize and offer a covered fund must develop and document a plan for offering shares in the covered fund to other investors and conforming the banking entity’s investments to the de

minimis limits to help monitor and ensure compliance with this requirement.

While certain commenters requested that the final rule include a quantitative

dollar limit on the amount of funds a banking entity may use to organize and offer a covered fund, the Agencies have

declined to add this limitation in the final rule. This type of limit is not required by statute. Moreover, the Agencies believe that imposing a strict dollar limit may not adequately permit banking entities to employ trading or investment strategies that will attract unaffiliated investors, thereby precluding banking entities from meeting the demands of customers contrary to the purpose of section 13.

c. Limitations on Investments in a Single Covered Fund (‘‘Per-Fund Limitation’’)

Section 13(d)(4)(B) imposes limits on the amount of ownership interest a banking entity may have in any single covered fund at the end of the one year period (subject to limited extension)

after the date of establishment of the fund (the ‘‘seeding period’’). In recognition of the fact that a covered fund may have multiple classes or types of ownership interests with different characteristics or values, the proposal required that a banking entity apply the

limits to both the total value of and total amount of the banking entity’s ownership interest in a covered fund.

The proposed rule required a banking entity to calculate the per-fund limitation using two methods. First, a banking entity was required to calculate the value of its investments and capital contributions made with respect to any ownership interest in a single covered fund as a percentage of the value of all investments and capital contributions made by all persons in that covered fund. Second, a banking entity was required to determine the total number of ownership interests held by the banking entity in a single covered fund as a percentage of the total number of ownership interests held by all persons in that covered fund. 2289 Both calculations were required to be done without regard to committed funds not yet called for investment. The proposed rule also required the banking entity to

calculate the value and amount of its ownership interest in each covered fund in the same manner and according to the same standards utilized by the covered fund for determining the aggregate value of the fund’s assets and ownership interests. 2290 These calculations were designed to ensure that the banking entity’s investment in

a covered fund could not result in more than three percent of the losses of the covered fund being allocated to the banking entity’s investment. 2291

Commenters did not generally object to calculating the per-fund limitation

based on both number and value of ownership interests. Several commenters urged the Agencies to allow a banking entity to value its investment

in a covered fund based on the acquisition cost of the investment,
instead of fair market value, notwithstanding the manner in which

the covered fund accounts for or values

investments for its shareholders generally. 2292 One commenter suggested that the Agencies allow a banking entity to choose between acquisition cost and fair value so long as the chosen valuation method is applied consistently to both the numerator anddenominator when calculating the perfund limitation. 2293

To the extent that an issuer of an asset-backed security is a covered fund,

the investment limitations contained in section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act also would limit the ability of a banking entity to acquire or retain an investment

in that issuer. Section 941 of the DoddFrank Act added a new section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o-11) which requires certain parties to a securitization transaction, including banking entities, to retain and maintain

a certain minimum interest in certain

issuers or asset-backed securities. 2294 In order to give effect to this separate requirement under the Dodd-Frank Act, § 75.14(a)(2) of the proposed rule permitted a banking entity that is a ‘‘securitizer’’ or ‘‘originator’’ under that provisions of the Act to acquire or retain an ownership interest in an issuer of asset-backed securities, in an amount (or value of economic interest) required to comply with the minimum requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act and any implementing regulations issued thereunder. 2295 The proposal also permitted a banking entity to act as sponsor to the securitization.

Commenters expressed a variety of

views on the treatment of interests in

securitizations held under risk retention pursuant to the proposed rule. Some commenters argued that the proposal was effective as written and represented a reasonable way to reconcile the two

sections of the Dodd-Frank Act consistent with the risk-reducing objective of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 2296 Other commenters also supported the proposal’s recognition that banking entities may be required to

hold a certain amount of risk in a

securitization that would also be a covered fund, but argued that the proposed exemption was too

narrow. 2297 Some commenters argued that the exemption should be broadened to permit a banking entity to hold in excess of the minimum amount required under section 15G of the Exchange Act instead of allowing only the minimum amount required by that section. 2298 One commenter requested that the final rule permit a banking entity to hold an

amount of risk in a securitization that is

commensurate with what investors

demand rather than the minimum required by section 15G. 2299 Some commenters argued that banking entities may be subject to similar generally applicable requirements to hold risk in securitizations under foreign law, such as Article 122a of the Capital Requirements Directive issued by the European Union, and that the final rule should permit banking entities to comply with these foreign legal requirements. 2300

Conversely, a few commenters objected to the proposed rule’s exemption for risk-retention as unclear and argued that if the exemption was


### 5998 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2301 See Occupy.

2302 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). 2303 As discussed above in Part VI.B.2.c., the perfund limitation does not apply to ownership interests held by a banking entity that acts as

market maker or underwriter in accordance with § 75.11(c) of the final rule, so long as the banking entity does not also organize and offer, or act as sponsor, investment adviser or commodity trading advisor to, the fund, or, with respect to ownership interests in issuing entities of asset-backed
securities, is not a securitizer who continues to own ownership interests or is not an entity that holds ownership interests in compliance with Section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations adopted thereunder; however, the banking entity that is acting as market maker or underwriter that is not subject to the per-fund limitation must still comply with the other requirements set forth in §§ 75.4(a) and 75.4(b), respectively, and any other applicable requirements
set out in § 75.11(c).

2304 The Agencies note that if a banking entity acts as investment adviser or commodity trading

advisor to a covered fund and shares the same name
or variation of the same name with the fund, then that banking entity would be a sponsor and therefore subject to the limitations of section 13(f). 2305 In the context of securitizations, the final rule similarly provides that the valuation methodology

used to calculate the fair market value of the ownership interests must be the same for both the ownership interests held by a banking entity and the ownership interests held by all other investors

in the covered fund in the same manner and according to the same standards.

2306 See Part VI.B.1.e.

2307 For example, a depository institution or bank holding company should use the same methodology as used in the Report of Condition and Income (Call Report) for depository institutions and the Consolidated Financial Statements for Holding Companies (FR Y–9C) for bank holding companies, respectively. retained, the Agencies should provide that any amounts held by a banking entity in a securitization that exceed the minimum required to satisfy section 15G of the Exchange Act should count towards the aggregate funds limitation of the banking entity. 2301 One commenter argued that the final rule should impose higher capital charges for

interests held in these securitizations

due to concerns that securitizations involve heightened risks due to the complexity of their ownership

structure. 2302

The Agencies have carefully

considered the comments received and are adopting the calculation requirements for the per-fund limitation as proposed with several modifications, including modifications designed to address the unique characteristics and ownership structure of securitizations. The final rule, like the proposal, requires that a banking entity calculate its per-fund investment limit in covered funds that are not issuing entities of

asset-backed securities based on both the value of its investments and capital

contributions in and to each covered fund and the total number of ownership

interests it has in each covered fund. A banking entity’s investment (including investments by its affiliates) may not exceed either three percent of the value of the covered fund or three percent of the number of ownership interests in

the covered fund at the end of the seeding period. The Agencies continue to believe that requiring the per-fund

limitation to be calculated based on

these two measures best effectuates the terms and purpose of the per-fund limitation in the statute. Together, these measures ensure that a banking entity’s exposure to and ownership of each

covered fund is limited. Each measure alone could provide a distorted view of the banking entity’s ownership interest and could be more easily manipulated, for example by issuing ownership interests with high value or special governance provisions. As discussed in
more detail below, the final rule contains a separate method for calculating the value of investments in issuing entities of asset-backed

securities due to the fact that these entities do not have a single class of security and thus, the valuation of the ownership interests cannot be made on a per interest or single class basis.

The per-fund limitation on ownership interests must be measured against the total ownership interests of the covered
fund, as defined in § 75.10 of the final

rule and as discussed above in Part VI.B.1.e. In determining the amount of ownership interests held by the banking entity and its affiliates, the banking entity must include an ownership interest permitted under §§ 75.4 and

75.11 of the final rule. 2303 Additionally, any banking entity that acts as

underwriter or market-maker for ownership interests of a covered fund must do so in compliance with the limitations of §§ 75.4(a) and 75.4(b) of the final rule, including the limits on the amount, types, and risk of the underwriting position or market-maker inventory as well as in compliance with the per-fund limitation, as applicable, and the aggregate funds limitations and capital deduction in the final rule. The Agencies expect to monitor these activities to ensure that a banking entity does not engage in underwriting or market making-related activity in a

manner that is inconsistent with the

limitations of the statute and the final

rule. 2304

The final rule requires that the value of the ownership interests and contributions made by a banking entity in each covered fund (that is not an issuing entity of an asset-backed security) be the fair market value of the interest or contribution. The Agencies

have determined to use fair market

value as the measurement of value for the per-fund value limitation in order to ensure comparability with the

investments made in the covered fund by others and limit the potential that the valuation measure can be manipulated (for example by altering the percentage of gains and losses that are associated with a particular ownership interest). A banking entity should determine fair market value for purposes of the final rule, including the calculation of both the per-fund and aggregate funds
limitations, in a manner that is consistent with its determination of the

fair market value of its assets for financial statement purposes and that

fair market value would be determined

in a manner consistent with the valuations reported by the relevant covered fund unless the banking entity determines otherwise for purposes of its

financial statements and documents the reason for any disparity. If fair market
value cannot be determined, then the

value shall be the historical cost basis of all investments and capital contributions made by the banking entity to the covered fund. The final rule also requires that, once a valuation method is chosen, the banking entity

calculate the value of its investments

and the investments of all others in thecovered fund for purposes of the perfund limitation in the same manner and according to the same standards. 2305 This approach is intended to ensurethat, for purposes of calculating the perfund limitation, a banking entity does

not calculate its investment in a covered

fund in a manner more favorable to the banking entity than the method used by the covered fund for valuing the investments made by others. Under the final rule and as explained in more detail below, any ownership interest acquired or retained by an employee or director of the banking entity is attributed to the banking entity for purposes of the per-fund limitation if the banking entity financed the purchase of the ownership interest. Additionally, any amount contributed or paid by a banking entity or its employee to obtain an ownership interest in connection with obtaining the restricted profit interest must be included in calculating compliance with the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations (See Part VI.B.1.e. above). 2306

In determining the per-fund limitation for purposes of § 75.12 of the final rule, the banking entity should use the same methodology for valuing its investments and capital contributions as the banking entity uses to prepare its financial statements and regulatory reports. 2307 In particular, the fair market value of a


### 5999 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2308 See Occupy. banking entity’s investments and any capital contributions made to a covered fund should be the same for purposes of § 75.12 of the final rule as reported on the banking entity’s financial statements and regulatory reports. Similarly, if fair

market value of all investments in and capital contributions cannot be determined for purposes of § 75.12 of the final rule, then the banking entity should use the same methodology to

calculate the historical cost basis of the investments and any capital contributions as the banking entity uses to prepare its financial statements and regulatory reports. The Agencies will review carefully the methodology that a banking entity uses to calculate the value of its investments in and capital

contributions made to covered funds as part of the process to monitor compliance with the final rule.

The Agencies expect that for the majority of covered funds, the party that organizes and offers the fund or

otherwise exercises control over the fund will provide a standard methodology for valuing interests in the fund. However, the Agencies
understand that for some covered funds, including issuing entities of asset backed securities, there may be multiple parties that organize and offer the fund that each utilize a different methodology or standard for calculating the value of ownership interests of the fund. Going forward, the Agencies expect that in these circumstances the parties that organize and offer the covered fund will work together or select a responsible party to determine a single standard by which all ownership interests in the

covered fund will be valued.

One commenter suggested the Agencies count both invested funds and committed funds not yet called for investment towards the per-fund

limitation. 2308 This commenter argued that a banking entity has alreadycontractually allocated committed-yetuncalled funds to the covered fund and that depositors face a risk of loss for

such funds if the covered fund fails.

The final rule, like the proposal, does not count committed-yet-uncalled funds towards the per-fund limitation; instead, it counts funds once they are invested. This approach reflects the fact that these funds may never be called while at the same time ensuring that the banking entity must comply with the per-fund

limitation once the funds are called. The Agencies note that a banking entity is prohibited from guaranteeing or bailing out a covered fund that the banking entity or one of its affiliates organizes and offers by the terms of the statute and the final rule and, accordingly, would not be permitted to provide

committed funds to a covered fund in a

manner inconsistent with the

limitations in the statute and final rule.

After carefully considering the comments received on the proposal, as well as the language and purpose of
section 13 of the BHC Act, the final rule provides that, for purposes of applying the per-fund limitation to an investment in a covered fund that is an issuing entity of an asset-backed security, the ownership interest held by the banking entity and its affiliates generally may not exceed three percent of the fair market value of the ownership interests

of the fund as measured in accordance with § 75.12(b)(3), unless a greater percentage is retained by the banking entity and its affiliates in compliance with the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations issued thereunder, in which case the investment by the banking entity and its affiliates in the covered fund may not exceed the amount, number, or value of ownership interests of the fund required under section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations issued thereunder. A banking entity may rely on any of the options available to it in order to meet the requirements of section 15G, but for purposes of section
13 of the BHC Act and this rule, the amount held by the banking entity may not exceed the amount required under the chosen option. Under the final rule, if a banking entity’s investment in a covered fund is held pursuant to the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act, the banking entity must

calculate the amount and value of its ownership interest for purposes of the per-fund limitation as of the date and according to the same valuation methodology applicable pursuant to the requirements of that section and the implementing regulations issued

thereunder.

While the amount retained in compliance with section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations issued thereunder may permit a banking entity to own more than three percent of the ownership

interests in a securitization that is a covered fund, this approach is appropriate to reconcile the competing policies of section 13 of the BHC Act and section 15G of the Exchange Act which requires that a securitizer of

certain securitizations retain a minimum of five percent of the risk of the securitization. Congress enacted these two apparently conflicting provisions in the same Act, and the Agencies believe the more specific section regarding risk retention in securitizations was intended to prevail over the more general restriction on ownership of covered funds (which applies to a broader range of entities). The Agencies believe that the risk limitation goals of section 13 of the BHC Act are met by satisfying the minimum requirement of an applicable option under section 15G of the Exchange Act

as the maximum initial investment limit, and applying the other limitations discussed in this section governing aggregate investment in covered funds and capital deductions.

As under the proposal, if a banking entity does not have a minimum risk retention requirement, that banking entity would remain subject to the limitations of section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act and § 75.12 on the amount of ownership interests it may hold in an issuing entity of asset-backed securities. A banking entity may not combine the amounts under these provisions to acquire or retain ownership interests in

a securitization that exceed the aggregate permissible amounts.

Some commenters requested that the Agencies coordinate implementation of any exemption for risk-retention requirements under section 13 of the

BHC Act with the issuance of rules implementing section 15G of the Exchange Act. The Agencies note that rules implementing section 15G have been proposed but not yet finalized, but the Agencies will review the interaction between the rules promulgated under

section 13 of the BHC Act and section 15G of the Exchange Act once the rules

under section 15G are finalized. Regardless of any action that may be taken regarding rules implementing section 15G, the final rule permits banking entities to own ownership interests in and sponsor covered funds

as discussed above.

Some commenters also requested that the final rule provide an exemption to permit banking entities to comply with any risk retention requirement imposed under foreign law that is similar to section 15G of the Exchange Act. The Agencies are not revising the rule to permit banking entities to own ownership interests required to be retained pursuant to risk retention-type requirements under foreign law. The Agencies are providing the exemption for the required ownership arising from the risk retention provisions under section 15G of the Exchange Act in order to reconcile the requirements under the Dodd-Frank Act applicable to ownership of securitization interests; however, the Agencies do not believe at

this time that such reconciliation is appropriate with respect to foreign law


### 6000 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2309 See proposed rule § 75.12(b); Joint Proposal,

76 FR at 68904.

2310 See, e.g., ABA (Keating); Credit Suisse (Williams); JPMC. 2311 See final rule § 75.12(b)(2)(i) and (ii). Forcovered funds that are an issuing entity of assetbacked securities, recalculation of the banking entity’s permitted ownership for purposes of the per-fund limitation is not required unless the

covered fund sells additional securities.

2312 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4)(B)(ii)(I). 2313 In addition, although some commenters requested that banking entities be able to hold more than the minimum required by section 15G, the Agencies are not revising the per fund limitation in that manner. One of the purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act is to reduce banking entities’ exposure
to risks from investments in covered funds, and the Agencies believe at this time that permitting banking entities to retain risk exposure to the covered fund in excess of the minimum required to be retained would contradict the purposes of

section 13 of the BHC Act. risk retention-type requirements and those requirements should not prevail over the purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act to reduce banking entities’ exposure to risks from investments in

covered funds.

The Agencies also note that the

definition of covered fund has been modified to exclude certain foreign public funds and also any foreign fund that is not owned or sponsored by a U.S. banking entity. Moreover, the final rule permits foreign banking entities to engage in covered fund activities and investments that occur solely outside of the United States without regard to the

investment limitations of section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act and § 75.12 of the final rule, which may include retaining risk in a securitization to the extent required under foreign law. In these manners, the final rule permits foreign banking entities to comply with requirements under foreign law that govern their securitization activities or
investments abroad. However, as noted above, section 13 of the BHC Act applies to the global operations of U.S. banking entities and, as such, U.S. banking entities’ investments in foreign

securitizations that are covered funds would remain subject to the investment limitations of section 13(d)(4) and
§ 75.12 of the final rule.

The proposed rule provided that a banking entity must comply with both measures of the per-fund limitation at all times. The preamble to the proposal explained that the Agencies expected a banking entity to calculate its per-fund limitation no less frequently than the frequency with which the fund performs

such calculation or issues or redeems interests, and in no case less frequently than quarterly. 2309

Several commenters requested that the Agencies modify the frequency of this calculation and monitoring requirement to a standard quarterly

basis. 2310 These commenters argued that, although some covered funds may provide daily liquidation and redemption rights to investors, monitoring the per-fund limitation on a continuous basis would be costly and burdensome and would not provide a significant offsetting benefit.

The Agencies continue to believe that for covered funds other than issuing

entities of asset-backed securities the per-fund limitations apply to

investments in covered funds at all times following the end of the seeding period. However, to relieve burden and costs, while also setting a minimum recordkeeping standard, the final rule has been modified to require that a banking entity calculate the amount and value of its ownership interests in covered funds other than issuing

entities of asset-backed securities quarterly. 2311 The Agencies believe that this change will assist in reducing unnecessary costs and burdens inconnection with calculating the perfund limitation, particularly for smaller banking entities, and will also facilitate consistency with the calculation for the aggregate funds limitation (which is also determined on a quarterly basis). Nevertheless, should a banking entity

become aware that it has exceeded the per-fund limitation for a given fund at any time, the Agencies expect the banking entity to take steps to ensure that the banking entity complies promptly with the per-fund

limitation. 2312

The Agencies have also modified the timing and methodology of the per-fund limitation as it applies to securitizations to address the unique circumstances and ownership structure presented by securitizations, which typically wind down over time. Unlike many other
covered funds, securitizations do not generally experience increases in the

amount of investors or value of ownership interests during the life of the securitization; rather, they generally experience only a contraction of the

investor base and reduction in the total outstanding value of ownership interests on an aggregate basis, and may

do so at different rates under the terms of the transaction agreements, meaning that the percentage of ownership represented by a particular ownership interest may increase as the fund amortizes but without the banking entity adding any funds. The manner in which securitizations are organized and
offered, as well as the amortization of securitizations, differs from many other
covered funds; section 15G of the Exchange Act also requires that certain parties to securitization transactions, which may include banking entities,

retain a minimum amount of risk in a securitization, a requirement not applicable to covered funds that are not securitizations. Therefore, for purposesof calculating a banking entity’s perfund limitation with respect to asecuritization, the calculation of the perfund limitation shall be based on whether section 15G applies and the implementing regulations are effective. In the case of an ownership interest in an issuing entity of an asset-backed security that is subject to section 15G of the Exchange Act and for which effective implementing regulations havebeen issued, the calculation of the perfund limitation shall be made as of the date and pursuant to the methodology applicable pursuant to the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations issued.

For securitizations executed after the effective date of the final rule and prior to the adoption and implementation of the rules promulgated under section 15G of the Exchange Act and for

securitizations for which a fair valuation calculation is not required by the implementing rules promulgated under section 15G of the Exchange Act, the per

fund limitation is calculated as of the date on which the assets are initially transferred into the issuing entity of the

asset-backed securities or such earlier

date on which the transferred assets have been valued for purposes of

transfer to the covered fund. 2313 This

calculation for issuers of asset backed securities is only required to be performed once on the date noted above, and thereafter only upon the date on which the price of additional

securities of the covered fund to be sold to third parties is determined.

As noted above, the per-fund limitations for ownership interests in issuing entities of asset-backed securities are calculated based only on the value of the ownership interest in relation to the value of all ownership interests in the issuing entity of the asset-backed security and are not calculated on a class by class, or tranche by tranche basis. For purposes of the valuation, the aggregate value of all the assets that are transferred to the issuing entity of the asset-backed securities, and any assets otherwise held by the issuing entity, are determined based on the valuation methodology used for determining the value of the assets for financial statement purposes. This

valuation will be the value of the ownership interests in the issuing entity for purposes of the calculation. A banking entity will need to determine


### 6001 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2314 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4)(B)(ii)(II).

2315 See ABA (Abernathy). 2316 See, e.g., ABA (Abernathy).

2317 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

2318 See Public Citizen.

2319 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2320 See ABA(Keating); BoA; Arnold & Porter;
BOK; Scale; SVB.

2321 See Occupy.

2322 See ABA (Keating).

2323 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy. its percentage ownership in the issuing entity based on the its contributions to the entity in relation to the contributions of all parties and after taking into account the value of any residual interest in the issuing entity. In addition, for purposes of the final rule,

the asset valuation is as of the date of establishment (the date of the assettransfer to the issuing entity of the assetbacked securities).

d. Limitation on Aggregate Permitted

Investments in All Covered funds (‘‘Aggregate Funds Limitation’’)

In addition to the per-fund limitation, section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act provides that the aggregate of a banking entity’s investments in all covered funds may not exceed three percent of the tier 1 capital of the banking entity (referred to above as the ‘‘aggregate funds limitation’’). 2314 To implement this limitation, the proposed rule required a banking entity to determine the aggregate value of the banking entity’s investments in covered funds by calculating the sum of the value of each
investment in a covered fund, as

determined in accordance with applicable accounting standards. This

amount was then measured as a percentage of the tier 1 capital of the banking entity for purposes of determining compliance with the aggregate funds limitation. For purposes of applying the limit, a banking entity that is subject to regulatory capital requirements was required under the proposed rule to measure tier 1 capital in accordance with those regulatory capital requirements; a banking entity that is not a subsidiary of a reporting banking entity and that is not itself required to report capital in accordance with the risk-based capital rules of a Federal banking agency was required by the proposed rule to calculate its tier 1 capital based on the total amount of shareholders’ equity of the top-tier entity as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter, as determined under applicable accounting standards.

Commenters expressed a variety of views regarding the aggregate funds limitation. One commenter argued that basing the aggregate funds limitation on the size of tier 1 capital of a banking entity provides an advantage to the largest institutions with large absolute capital bases and disadvantages smaller banks that are well capitalized but have a smaller absolute capital base. 2315 This commenter urged the Agencies to permit all banking entities to invest in
covered funds in an amount that is, in the aggregate, the greater of $1 billion (subject to prudential investment limitations and safety and soundness concerns), or three percent of tier 1 capital. 2316

In contrast, other commenters urged the Agencies to decrease the statutory limit in order to prevent the largest banking entities from investing amounts that, while within the statutory limit, could be very large in absolute

terms. 2317 One commenter argued that a loss of three percent of tier 1 capital

would be a material loss reflected in a change in stock price. 2318 Another commenter suggested the Agencies

consider whether the investment supports a large flow of management fees linked to market volatility or has significant embedded leverage. 2319

Some commenters argued that the

final rule should calculate the value of

covered fund investments based on acquisition cost instead of fair market

value. 2320 These commenters argued that using fair value to calculate the aggregate funds limitation penalizes banking entities for organizing and investing in successful funds and, conversely, would allow banking

entities to increase investments in unsuccessful funds (the value of which would decline relative to the capital of the banking entity).

In contrast, another commenter argued that valuation of a covered fundinvestment should include any mark-tomarket increase in a banking entity’s aggregate investments in order to keep pace with increases in the capital of the banking entity. 2321

Some commenters discussing the frequency of the calculation of the aggregate funds limitation supported determining the aggregate funds limitation on the last day of each calendar quarter as required in the proposal. 2322 Other commenters argued that the statute requires compliance at all times rather than periodic calculations of compliance. 2323

After consideration of the comments in light of the statutory provisions, the Agencies have adopted the requirements for calculating the aggregate funds limitation as proposed with several modifications as explained below. Under the final rule, the aggregate value is the sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in each covered fund (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(d)(6)(ii)), as

measured on a historical cost basis. This aggregate value is measured against the total applicable tier 1 capital for the banking entity as explained below.

For purposes of determining the aggregate funds limitation, the final rule requires that the value of investments made by a banking entity be calculated on a historical cost basis. This approach limits the aggregate amount of funds a banking entity may provide to covered funds as a percentage of the banking entity’s capital as required by statute. At the same time, this approach does not permit a banking entity to increase its exposure to covered funds in the event any investment in a particular covered

fund declines in value as a result of the fund’s investment activities. Permitting a banking entity to increase its aggregate

investments as covered funds lose value would permit the banking entity both to increase its exposure to covered funds at

the same time the covered funds it already owns are losing value and to effectively bail-out investors by providing additional capital to troubled

covered funds. Neither of these actions is consistent with the purposes of

section 13 of the BHC Act. Moreover and as explained below, because the final rule requires that the banking entity deduct from the entity’s capital the greater of historical cost (plus earnings) or fair market value of its
investments in covered funds, the deduction accounts for any profits resulting from investments in covered

funds.

Historical cost basis means, with respect to a banking entity’s ownership
interest in a covered fund, the sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity to a covered fund in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest)), less any amounts received as a redemption, sale or distribution of such ownership interest or restricted profit interest. Under the final rule, any reduction of the historical cost would not generally include gains or losses, fees, income, expenses or similar items. However, as noted above, the final rule also requires that a banking entity deduct any earnings from its tier 1 capital even if it values its ownership interests in a covered fund pursuant to historical cost.

The concern expressed by commenters that the aggregate funds


### 6002 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2324 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4)(B)(iii).

2325 Id. at 1851(d)(3).

2326 See Occupy. 2327 See Occupy.

2328 See ABA (Keating); BNY Mellon et al.; PNC;

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SVB.

2329 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2330 Id.

2331 See ABA (Keating).

2332 See ABA (Keating); see also letter from PNC.

2333 See Arnold & Porter; SVB. limitation should account for increases

in the fair market value of covered funds is addressed in other ways under the final rule. In particular, the final rule requires that for purposes of calculating compliance with regulatory capital requirements the banking entity deduct from the entity’s capital the greater of fair market value (or historical cost plus earnings) of its investment in each covered fund; thus, profits resulting

from investments in covered funds will not inflate the capital of the banking entity for regulatory compliance purposes. Moreover, as explained above, the per-fund limitation is generally
based on fair market value, which maintains the relative level of a banking entity’s investment in each covered

fund.

As noted above, the aggregate funds limitation applies to all investments by a banking entity in a covered fund that the banking entity or an affiliate thereof holds under §§ 75.4 and 75.11 of the

final rule. The limitation would also apply to investments by a banking entity made or held during the seeding period as part of organizing and offering a covered fund, including ownership interests held in order to satisfy the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act, as well as ownership interests held by a banking entity in the capacity of acting as underwriter or

market-maker.

As under the proposal, this

calculation must be made as of the last day of each calendar quarter, consistent with when tier 1 capital is reported by banking entities to the Agencies. Because compliance with the aggregate

funds limitations is calculated based on tier 1 capital, the Agencies believe it is more appropriate to require the calculation to be performed on the same schedule as tier 1 capital is reported. While the aggregate funds limitation must be calculated on a quarterly basis, the Agencies expect banking entities to

monitor investments in covered funds regularly and remain in compliance

with the limitations on covered fund investments throughout the quarter. The Agencies intend, through their respective supervisory processes, to

monitor covered fund investment activity to ensure that a banking entity is not attempting to evade the requirements of section 13.

The Agencies recognize that banks with large absolute capital bases will be able to place a greater amount of capital in covered funds compared to banks with small absolute capital bases. However, the amount of risk exposure to a covered fund, despite their different investment strategies, will be relatively similar across banking entities, which is consistent with the language and risklimiting purpose of section 13.

e. Capital Treatment of an Investment in

a Covered Fund

Section 13(d)(4)(B)(iii) of the BHC Act provides that, for purposes of determining compliance with applicable capital standards under section 13(d)(3) of that Act, the aggregate amount of outstanding investments by a banking entity under section 13(d)(4), including retained earnings, must be deducted from the assets and tangible equity of the banking entity, and the amount of

the deduction must increase commensurate with the leverage of the

covered fund. 2324 Section 13(d)(3) authorizes the Agencies, by rule, to impose additional capital requirements and quantitative limitations, including diversification requirements on any of the activities permitted under section 13 of the BHC Act if the Agencies determine that such additional capital and quantitative limitations are appropriate to protect the safety and soundness of banking entities engaged

in such activities. 2325

The proposed rule implemented the capital deduction provided for under section 13(d)(4)(B)(iii) of the BHC Act by requiring a banking entity to deduct the aggregate fair value of its investments in covered funds, including any attributed profits, from tier 1 capital. As in the statute, the proposed rule applied the capital deduction to ownership interests in covered funds held as an investment by a banking entity pursuant to the provisions of section 13(d)(4) of the BHC Act, and not to ownership interests acquired under other permitted authorities, such as a risk-mitigating hedge under section 13 of the BHC Act. The proposed rule required the deduction to be calculated

consistent with the method for calculating other deductions under the applicable risk-based capital rules. The proposed rule did not otherwise adopt additional capital requirements and quantitative limitations under section 13(d)(3) of the BHC Act.

Some commenters supported the proposed dollar-for-dollar deduction from tier 1 capital of a banking entity’s aggregate investments in covered funds

and asserted it is consistent with the

statute. 2326 One of these commenters urged the Agencies to rely on their authority under section 13(d)(3) of the BHC Act to apply the capital deduction to other permitted ownership interests in covered funds to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity. 2327 In contrast, other commenters urged the Agencies to eliminate the capital

deduction for investments in covered funds and questioned the Agencies’ statutory authority to impose the capital

deduction. 2328 These commenters argued that the statute does not authorize or require the Agencies to require banking entities to deduct their

investments in covered funds for purposes of calculating capital pursuant to the applicable capital rules. According to these commenters, section 13 only requires deductions for purposes of determining compliance with applicable capital standards under section 13 and argued the Agencies did not make the necessary safety and soundness findings under section 13(d)(3) to impose additional capital requirements on any activities permitted
under section 13(d)(1). 2329 One commenter urged the Agencies to make any capital adjustment as part of the banking agencies’ broader efforts to implement the Basel III capital

framework. 2330 Another commenter urged the Agencies to apply the capital deduction only for purposes of determining a banking entity’s compliance with the aggregate funds limitation and not for other regulatory capital purposes. 2331 This commenter also argued that a capital deduction is normally not required for assets

reflected on a bank’s consolidated balance sheet, and that the Agencies should not require a deduction for a

covered fund investment that is not consolidated with the banking entity for financial reporting purposes under

GAAP. 2332 Some commenters urged the Agencies to apply the capital deduction only to a banking entity’s investment in a covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers and not to ownership interests otherwise permitted

to be held under section 13 of the BHC

Act. 2333

Several commenters addressed the manner for valuing an investment subject to the deduction. One commenter urged the Agencies to permit a banking entity to calculate the deduction based on the acquisition cost,
instead of the fair market value, of the banking entity’s ownership interest in


### 6003 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2334 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2335 Id.

2336 See IIB/EBF.

2337 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4)(B)(iii).

2338 See 78 FR 62018, 62072 (Oct. 11, 2013)
(Board/OCC/FDIC Basel III Final Rule); 78 FR 55340, 55391 (Sept. 10, 2013) (FDIC Basel III
interim final rule). 2339 See 12 CFR part 208, subpart D and appendixes A, B, E, and F; 12 CFR part 217 (to be codified), and 12 CFR part 225, appendixes A, D,
E, and G; see also 12 CFR 240.15c3–1 (net capital requirements for brokers or dealers). the covered fund. 2334 This commenter emphasized that valuing the investment at fair market value would penalize a banking entity if the covered fund performs well by reducing the amount of capital available for additional

covered fund investments but reduce the capital charge against troubled investments. One commenter argued that the Agencies did not perform an appropriate cost-benefit analysis of the deduction in the proposed rules. 2335

Other commenters sought clarification on how the capital deduction would apply to a foreign banking organization. Several commenters argued that the capital deduction should not apply to a foreign banking entity that calculates its tier 1 capital under the standards of its home country. 2336 These commenters argued that imposing a capital deduction requirement on foreign banks would not be consistent with pastpractices on the application of U.S. riskbased capital requirements to foreign banking organizations.

The Agencies have carefully considered the comments in light of the statutory provisions requiring a capital deduction. The statute requires that the aggregate amount of outstanding investments by a banking entity, including retained earnings, be deducted from the assets and tangible equity of the banking entity. 2337 This requirement is independent of the minimum regulatory capital requirements in the final capital rule published by the Federal Banking agencies in 2013 (‘‘regulatory capital rule’’). 2338

The Federal Banking agencies recognize that the regulatory capital rule imposes risk weights and deductions that do not correspond to the deduction for covered fund investments imposed by section 13 of the BHC Act. The Federal Banking agencies intend to

review the interaction between the requirements of this rule and the requirements of the regulatory capital rule and expect to propose steps to

reconcile the two rules.

At the same time, the Agencies

believe that the dollar-for-dollar

deduction of the fair market value of a banking entity’s investment in a covered fund is appropriate to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity, as provided in section 13(d) of the BHC Act. This approach ensures that a banking entity can withstand the failure of a covered fund without causing the banking entity to breach the minimum regulatory capital requirements. Consistent with the language and purpose of section 13 of the BHC Act, this deduction will help provide that a banking entity has sufficient capital to absorb losses that may occur from

covered fund investments without endangering the safety and soundness of the banking entity or the financial stability of the United States.

Accordingly, under the final rule, a banking entity must, for purposes of determining compliance with applicable regulatory capital requirements, deduct the greater of (i) the sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(b)(6)(ii)), on a historical cost basis, including earnings or (ii) the fair market value of the sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(b)(6)(ii)), if the banking entity accounts for the profits (or losses) of the

fund investment in its financial

statements. 2339 This deduction must be made whenever the banking entity calculates its tier 1 capital, either quarterly or at such other time at which the appropriate Federal banking agency may request such a calculation. Requiring a banking entity to deduct the greater of historical cost or fair market

value of all covered fund investments made by a banking entity from the entity’s tier 1 capital should result in an appropriate deduction that is consistent with the manner in which the banking entity accounts for its covered fund investments. For instance, if a banking entity accounts for its investments in covered funds using fair market value, then any changes in the fair market value of the banking entity’s investment in a covered fund should similarly be reflected in the banking entity’s tier 1 capital. Thus, this deduction should not unduly penalize banking entities for making successful investments or allow more investments in troubled covered

funds.

The final rule does not require a foreign banking entity that makes a

covered fund investment in the United States, either directly or through a branch or agency, to deduct the aggregate value of the investment from the foreign bank’s tier 1 capital calculated under applicable home country standards. However, any U.S. subsidiary of a foreign banking entity that is required to calculate tier 1 capital under U.S. risk based capital regulations must deduct the aggregate value of investment held through that subsidiary from its tier 1 capital.

While some commenters requested that additional capital charges be imposed on banking entity’s interests in securitizations, the Agencies have

declined to do so at this time. Under the final rule, the banking entity must

deduct the value of its investment in a

securitization that is a covered fund from its tier 1 capital for purposes of determining compliance with the applicable regulatory capital requirements. This requirement already requires the banking entity to adjust its capital for the possibility of losses on

the full amount of its investment. The Agencies do not believe that it is appropriate to impose additional capital charges on these securitizations because

it would act as a disincentive to retain

risk in securitizations for which the banking entity acts as issuer or sponsor,

a result that would contradict the purpose of section 15G of the Exchange Act. Additionally and as noted in the proposal, permitting a banking entity to

retain the minimum level of economic

interest and risk in a securitization will incent banking entities to engage in more careful and prudent underwriting

and evaluation of the risks andobligations that may accompany assetbacked securitizations, which would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States.

The Agencies have also declined to impose additional quantitative

limitations or diversification requirements on covered fund investments at this time. The Agencies believe that the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations, as well as the capital deduction required by the rule, acting together with the other limitations on
covered fund activities, establish an appropriate framework for ensuring that

the covered fund investments and activities of banking entities are

conducted in a manner that is safe and

sound and consistent with financial stability. The Agencies will continue to

monitor these activities and investments


### 6004 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2340 See ABA (Keating); Arnold & Porter; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb.
2012).

2341 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); BlackRock; Arnold & Porter.

2342 See ABA (Keating); Arnold & Porter.

2343 See BoA; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012). These commenters arguedthat banking entities traditionally utilize a fund-offunds structure to offer customers the opportunity to invest indirectly in a portfolio of other funds (including some funds sponsored and managed by one or more third parties) and that these structures provide customers with certain risk-mitigating benefits and allow customers to gain exposure to a diverse portfolio without having to satisfy the minimum investment requirements of each fund directly. They also argued that parallel and feeder entities are established for a variety of client-driven reasons, including to accommodate tax needs of

clients and that these entities should be viewed as a single investment program in which the master fund holds and manages investments in portfolio assets and the feeder fund typically makes no

investments other than in the master fund.

2344 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); BoA; Arnold & Porter; SSgA (Feb. 2012).

2345 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2346 See Occupy. 2347 The Agencies note that other provisions of the BHC Act and Savings and Loan Holding Company Act would prohibit a banking entity that is a bank holding company or savings and loan holding company from acquiring 5 percent or more of a covered fund that is itself a bank holding company or a savings and loan holding company, respectively, without regulatory approval. See 12 U.S.C. 1842(a); 12 U.S.C. 1467a(e).

2348 See, e.g., First Union Letter.

2349 Id. See final rule § 75.12(b)(1)(ii). to determine whether other limitations are appropriate over time.

f. Attribution of Ownership Interests to a Banking Entity

The proposed rule attributed an ownership interest to a banking entity based on whether or not the banking entity held the interest through a controlled entity. The proposed rule required that any ownership interest held by any entity that is controlled, directly or indirectly, by a banking entity be included in the amount and value of the banking entity’s permitted investments in a single covered fund. The proposed rule required that the pro

rata share of any ownership interest held by any covered fund that is not controlled by the banking entity, but in which the banking entity owns, controls, or holds with the power to vote more than 5 percent of the voting
shares, be included in the amount and value of the banking entity’s permitted investments in a single covered fund.

Many commenters expressed concerns regarding the proposed attribution requirements. 2340 These commenters argued that the proposed

pro rata attribution requirements are not required or permitted by the statute,

have unintended and inconsistent consequences for covered fund investments, impose heavy compliance costs on banking entities, and would impede the ability of funds sponsoredby banking entities to invest in thirdparty funds for the benefit of clients. Some commenters argued that the costs and complexity of determining whether a banking entity ‘‘controls’’ another banking entity under the BHC Act and the Board’s precedent are high and urged the Agencies to adopt a simpler

test. 2341 For example, some commenters urged that shares of a company be attributed to a banking entity only when the banking entity maintains ownership of 25 percent or more of voting shares of the company. 2342

Several commenters maintained that applying the attribution requirements to fund-of-funds structures and parallel or

master-feeder structures would be

unworkable. 2343 Commenters contended that the proposed attribution rules could result in a banking entity calculating the per-fund limitation in a way that exceeds the banking entity’s actual loss exposure if the attribution rule for controlled investments is interpreted to require that 100 percent of all investments made by controlled entities be attributed to the banking entity. 2344

In addition, several commenters argued that the pro rata attribution ofinvestments held through noncontrolled structures is not consistent with the Board’s rules and practices for purposes of the activity and investment

limits in other sections of the BHC Act.

Commenters also maintained that this

pro rata attribution for non-controlled entities would be impracticable because a banking entity has only a limited ability to monitor, direct, or restrain

investments of a covered fund that it

does not control. 2345

Conversely, one commenter supported the pro rata attribution requirement in the proposal. This commenter argued that this requirement reduced opportunities for evasion through subsidiaries, affiliates or related

entities. 2346

The final rule has been modified in light of the comments. Under the final rule, a banking entity must account for

an investment in a covered fund for purposes of the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations only if the investment is made by the banking entity or another entity controlled by the banking entity. Accordingly, the final rule does not generally require that a banking entity

include the pro rata share of any ownership interest held by any entity that is not controlled by the banking entity, and thus reduces the potential compliance costs of the final rule. The Agencies believe that this concept of

attribution is more consistent with how the Board has historically applied the concept of ‘‘control’’ under the BHC Act for purposes of determining whether a company subject to that Act is engaged in an activity or whether to attribute an investment to that company. Furthermore, because a banking entity does not control a non-affiliate and typically has less access to information about the holdings of a non-affiliate, this change is unlikely to present opportunity for circumvention of the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations. The Agencies will monitor these limitations for practices that appear to be attempts to circumvent

them. 2347

Whether a banking entity controls another entity under the BHC Act may vary depending on the type of entity in question. As noted above in Part VI.B.1.b.3., the Board’s regulations and orders have long recognized that the concept of control is different for funds than for operating companies. 2348 In contrast to the proposal, the final rule incorporates these different concepts of control in part by providing that, for purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule, a registered investment company, SEC-regulated business development company, and a foreign public fund as described in § 75.10(c)(1) of the final rule will not be

considered to be an affiliate of the banking entity if the banking entity owns, controls, or holds with the power to vote less than 25 percent of the voting shares of the company or fund, and provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory,
administrative, and other services to the company or fund only in a manner that complies with other limitations under applicable regulation, order, or other authority. 2349

In response to commenter concerns regarding the workability of the proposed rule, the final rule has been modified to address how ownership

interests would be attributed to a banking entity when those interests are

held in a fund-of-funds or multi-tiered fund structures. For instance, banking entities may use a variety of structures to satisfy operational needs or meet the

investment needs of customers of their trust, fiduciary, investment advisory or commodity trading advisory services.

First, except as explained for purposes of calculating a bankingentity’s permitted investment in multitier fund structures, the final rule does not generally attribute to a banking entity ownership interests held by a covered fund so long as the banking


### 6005 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2350 See final rule § 75.12(b)(1)(iii).

2351 See final rule § 75.12(b)(34). 2352 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vii); final rule § 75.11(g).

2353 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68902.

2354 See Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012).

2355 See Occupy.

2356 See Arnold & Porter. 2357 See final rule § 75.12(b)(1)(iv).

2358 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f)(1).

2359 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(G)(vii). entity’s investment in the covered fund meets the per-fund limitation in the

final rule. 2350 Absent unusual circumstances or structures, a banking entity would not control a covered fund in which the banking entity has an ownership interest that conforms to the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations
contained in the final rule. Thus, the interests held by that covered fund would not be attributed to the banking entity for the reasons discussed above.

The final rule also explains how the investment limitations apply to investments of a banking entity in multi-tier fund structures. The Agencies

believe that master-feeder fund structures typically constitute a single investment program in which the master fund holds and manages investments and the feeder funds typically make no

investments other than in the master

fund and exist as a convenience for customers of the trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services of the banking entity. Similarly, trust, fiduciary, or advisory customers of a banking entity may desire to obtain diversified exposure to a variety of funds or investments through investing in a fund-of-funds structure that the banking entity organizes and offers.

In order to meet the demands of these customers, the final rule provides that if the principal investment strategy of a covered fund (the ‘‘feeder fund’’) is to invest substantially all of its assets in another single covered fund (the ‘‘master fund’’), then for purposes of the per-fund limitation the banking entity’s permitted investment shall be measured only at the master fund. However, in order to appropriately capture the banking entity’s amount of investment in the master fund, a banking entity must include in this calculation any investment held by the banking entity in the master fund, as well as the banking entity’s pro-rata share of any ownership

interest of the master fund that is held through the feeder fund. 2351

Similarly, regarding fund-of-funds structures, the final rule provides that if a banking entity organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to § 75.11 for the purpose of investing in other covered funds (a ‘‘fund of funds’’) and that fund

of funds itself invests in another covered fund that the banking entity organizes and offers, then the banking entity’s permitted investment in that other covered fund shall include any investment held by the banking entity in that other fund, as well as the banking entity’s pro-rata share of any ownership interest of the other fund that is held through the fund of funds. The banking entity’s investment in the fund of funds

must also meet the investment limitations contained in § 75.12. In these manners, the final rule permit a banking entity to meet the demands of customers of their trust, fiduciary, or advisory services while also limiting the ability of a banking entity to be exposed

to more than the amount of risk of a covered fund contemplated by section

13.

As described above in the discussion of organizing and offering a covered fund, other provisions of section 13 contemplate investments by employees and directors of the banking entity that provide qualifying services to a covered

fund. 2352 The Agencies recognized in the proposal that employee and director investments in a covered fund may provide an opportunity for a banking entity to evade the limitations regarding the amount or value of ownership interests a banking entity may acquire in

a covered fund. 2353 In order to address this concern, the proposal attributed an ownership interest in a covered fund acquired or retained by a director or employee to the person’s employing banking entity if the banking entity either extends credit for the purposes of allowing the director or employee to acquire the ownership interest, guaranteed the director or employee’s purchase, or guarantees the director or employee against loss on the

investment.

One commenter supported the way the proposal addressed evasion concerns by attributing an ownership interest in a covered fund acquired or retained by a director or employee to a banking entity. 2354 A different commenter urged the Agencies to attribute any employee investments in a covered fund to the banking entity itself, regardless of the source of funds. 2355 Another commenter argued that the statute prohibits a banking entity from guaranteeing an investment by an employee or director. 2356

After considering the comments and the language of the statute, the Agencies

have determined to retain the requirement that all director or employee investments in a covered fund be attributed to the banking entity for purposes of the per-fund limitation and the aggregate funds limitation whenever the banking entity provides the employee or director funding for the purpose of acquiring the ownership interest. Specifically, under the final rule, an investment by a director or employee of a banking entity who acquires an ownership interest in his or her personal capacity in a covered fund sponsored by the banking entity will be attributed to the banking entity if the banking entity, directly or indirectly, extends financing for the purpose of enabling the director or employee to acquire the ownership interest in the fund and the financing is used to acquire such ownership interest in the

covered fund. 2357 It is also important to note that the statute prohibits a banking entity from guaranteeing the obligations or performance of a covered fund in
which it acts as investment adviser, investment manager or sponsor, or organizes and offers. 2358

As discussed above in the definition of ownership interest, the final rule also attributes to the banking entity any amounts contributed by an employee or

director when made in order to receive a restricted profit interest, whether or not funded or guaranteed by the banking entity. This approach ensures that all funding provided by the banking entity—whether directly or through its employees or directors—and all exposures of the banking entity— whether directly or through a guarantee provided to or on behalf of an employee or director—is counted against the limits on exposure contained in the
statute and final rule. At the same time, this approach recognizes that employees and directors may use their own resources, not protected by the banking entity, to invest in a covered fund. Employees of investment advisers in particular often invest their own resources in covered funds they advise, both by choice and as a method to align their personal financial interests with

those of other investors in the covered fund. So long as these investments are truly with personal resources, and are not funded by the banking entity, these personal investments would not expose the banking entity to loss and would not be attributed by the final rule to the banking entity. This approach is also
consistent with the terms of the statute, which expressly contemplates investments by directors or employees of a banking entity in their individual capacity. 2359

The Agencies intend to monitor investments by directors and employees of a banking entity to ensure that employee ownership interests are not


### 6006 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2360 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H); 12 CFR 225.170 et seq. See ABA (Keating); BoA; BOK; SIFMA et al.
(Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SVB.

2361 See ABA (Keating).

2362 See BOK; SVB; ABA (Keating); BoA; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012). 2363 See BOK.

2364 See Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin
(Feb. 2012). used to circumvent the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations in section 13. Among the factors the Agencies will consider, in addition to financing and guarantee arrangements, are whether the benefits of the acquisition and retention,
such as dividends, inure to the benefit of the director or employee and not the banking entity; the voting or control of the ownership interests is subject to the direction of, or otherwise controlled by, the banking entity; and the employee or director, rather than the banking entity, determines whether the employee or

director should make the investment.

The proposed rule contained a provision intended to curb potential evasion of the per-fund limitation and aggregate limitation through parallel investments by banking entities that were not otherwise subject to section 13 of the BHC Act. Specifically, the proposed rule provided that, to the extent that a banking entity is contractually obligated to invest in, or is found to be acting in concert through knowing participation in a joint activity or parallel action toward a common goal of investing in, one or more investments with a covered fund that is organized and offered by the banking entity (whether or not pursuant to an express agreement), such investment must be included in the calculation of a banking entity’s per-fund limitation.

Several commenters objected to this requirement and argued that it was not

consistent with the statute. These commenters argued that section 13 of the BHC Act restricts a banking entity’s
investments in covered funds, and not direct investments by a banking entity in individual companies under other
authorities, such as the merchant banking investment authority in section 4(k)(4)(H) of the BHC Act. 2360 Some commenters argued that prohibiting or limiting direct investments could cause a conflict between a banking entity’s fiduciary duty to its clients to manage

their covered fund investments and the banking entity’s duty to its shareholders to pursue legitimate merchant banking

investments. 2361 Some commenters urged the Agencies not to attribute any parallel co-investment alongside a covered fund to a banking entity unless there is a pattern of evasion, and some requested that there be prior notice and an opportunity for a hearing to determine whether such a pattern has

occurred. 2362 Another commenter recommended the Agencies provide a safe harbor for situations where a bank trustee is acting on behalf of

customers. 2363

In contrast, other commenters

contended that the risks of direct
investments, such as those made under merchant banking authority, are similar to those of many investments in covered funds. These commenters urged the Agencies to restrict direct investments in the underlying holdings or assets of

a covered fund in the same manner as

direct investments in covered funds. 2364

After carefully considering the comments and the language of the statute, the Agencies have determined not to adopt the proposed prohibition on parallel investments in the final rule. As illustrated by commenters, banking entities rely on a number of investment

authorities and structures to meet the

needs of their clients and make investments under a variety of

authorities that are not coordinated with investments made by covered funds owned or advised by the banking entity. The Agencies believe that many investments made by banking entities are made for the purpose of serving the legitimate needs of customers and shareholders, and not for the purpose of circumventing the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations in section

13.

Nevertheless, the Agencies continue to believe that the potential for evasion of these limitations may be present where a banking entity coordinates its

direct investment decisions with the

investments of covered funds that it owns or sponsors. For instance, the Agencies understand that it is relatively common for the sponsor of a covered fund in connection with a privately negotiated investment to offer investors co-investment opportunities when the general partner or investment manager

for the covered fund determines that the

covered fund does not have sufficient capital available to make the entire investment in the target portfolio company or determines that it would

not be suitable for the covered fund to

take the entire available investment. In such circumstances, a banking entity that sponsors the covered fund should not itself make any additional side by

side co-investment with the covered fund in a privately negotiated

investment unless the value of such coinvestment is less than 3% of the value of the total amount co-invested by other
investors in such investment. Further, ifthe co-investment is made through a coinvestment vehicle that is itself a covered fund (a ‘‘co-investment fund’’), the sum of the banking entity’sownership interests in the coinvestment fund and the related covered

fund should not exceed 3% of the sum of the ownership interests held by all

investors in the co-investment fund and related covered fund. Finally, the Agencies note that if a banking entity makes investments side by side in substantially the same positions as the
covered fund, then the value of such

investments shall be included for purposes of determining the value of the banking entity’s investment in the

covered fund.

g. Calculation of Tier 1 Capital

The proposal explained that tier 1 capital is a banking law concept that, in
the United States, is calculated and reported by certain depository institutions and bank holding companies in order to determine their compliance with regulatory capital standards. Accordingly, the proposed rule clarified that for purposes of the aggregate funds limitation in § 75.12, a banking entity that is a bank, a bank holding company, a company that controls an insured depository institution that reports tier 1 capital, or uninsured trust company that reports tier 1 capital (each a ‘‘reporting banking entity’’) needed to use the reporting banking entity’s tier 1 capital as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter that has ended, as reported to the relevant Federal banking agency.

The proposal also recognizes that not all entities subject to section 13 of the BHC Act calculate and report tier 1 capital. In order to provide a measure of equality related to the aggregate funds

limitation contained in section 13(d)(4)(B)(ii)(II) of the BHC Act and § 75.12(c) of the proposed rule, the proposed rule clarified how the aggregate funds limitation should be

calculated for entities that are not required to calculate and report tier 1 capital in order to determine compliance with regulatory capital standards. Under the proposed rule, with respect to any banking entity that is not affiliated with a reporting banking entity and not itself required to reportcapital in accordance with the riskbased capital rules of a Federal banking agency, the banking entity’s tier 1 capital for purposes of the aggregate

funds limitation was the total amount of shareholders’ equity of the top-tier entity within such organization as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter that has ended, as determined under applicable accounting


### 6007 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2365 See proposed rule § 75.12(c)(2)(ii)(B)(2).

2366 See proposed rule § 75.12(c)(2)(ii)(A).

2367 See proposed rule § 75.12(c)(1)(B(2)(ii)(B)(1).

2368 See Occupy. 2369 See Credit Suisse (Williams); IIB/EBF.

2370 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

2371 See Enhanced Prudential Standards and Early Remediation Requirements for Foreign Banking Organizations and Foreign Nonbank Financial Companies, 77 FR 76628, 76637 (Dec. 28, 2012). 2372 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); TCW; Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2373 See, e.g., Occupy; Sens. Merkley & Levin
(Feb. 2012). standards. 2365 For a banking entity that was not itself required to report tier 1 capital but was a subsidiary of a reporting banking entity that is a depository institution (e.g., a subsidiary of a national bank), the aggregate funds

limitation was the amount of tier 1 capital reported by such depository

institution. 2366 For a banking entity that was not itself required to report tier 1 capital but was a subsidiary of a reporting banking entity that is not a depository institution (e.g., a nonbank subsidiary of a bank holding company), the aggregate funds limitation was the amount of tier 1 capital reported by the top-tier affiliate of such banking entity that holds and reports tier 1 capital under the proposal. 2367

Commenters did not generally object to the proposed approach for determining the applicable tier 1 capital for banking entities. One commenter advocated calculating the aggregate

funds limitation based on the tier 1 capital of the banking entity making the

covered fund investment instead of the tier 1 capital of the consolidated banking entity. 2368 In addition, the commenter urged the Agencies to require banking entities to divest any portions of the investment that exceeds 3 percent of that entity’s tier 1 capital.

The final rule provides that any banking entity that is required to calculate and report tier 1 capital (a ‘‘reporting banking entity’’) must calculate the aggregate funds limitation using the tier 1 capital amount reported by the entity as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter as reported to the relevant Federal banking agency. A non-depository institution subsidiary of a reporting banking entity may rely on the consolidated tier 1 capital of the reporting banking entity for purposes of calculating compliance with the aggregate funds limitation. In the case of a depository institution that is itself a reporting banking entity and that is also a subsidiary or affiliate of a reporting banking entity, the aggregate of all investments in covered funds held by the depository institution (including the investments by its subsidiaries) may not exceed three percent of either the tier 1 capital of the depository institution or of the top-tier reporting banking entity that controls such depository institution. The final rule also provides that any banking entity that is not itself required to report tier 1 capital but is a subsidiary of a reporting banking entity that is a depository institution (e.g., a subsidiary of a national bank) may compute compliance with the aggregate funds limitations using the amount of tier 1 capital reported by such depository

institution.

Several commenters argued that foreign banking organizations should be permitted to use the consolidated tier 1 capital at the top-tier foreign banking organization level, as calculated under applicable home country capital standards, to calculate compliance with the aggregate funds limitation. 2369 One commenter noted that the tier 1 capital of a banking entity may fluctuate based on specific conditions relevant only to the banking entity, and urged the Agencies to consider an alternative measure of capital, although this commenter did not suggest any

alternative. 2370

After considering the comments received and that purpose and language
of section 13 of the BHC Act, the Agencies have determined that for foreign banking organizations, the aggregate funds limitation would be based on the consolidated tier 1 capital of the foreign banking organization, as calculated under applicable home country standards. However, a U.S. bank holding company or U.S. savings and loan holding company that is controlled by a foreign banking entity must separately meet the per-fund and aggregate funds limitations for each and all (respectively) covered fund investments made by the U.S. holding company, based on the tier 1 capital of the U.S. bank holding company or U.S. savings and loan holding company. The Federal banking agencies may revisit this approach in light of the manner in which the Board implements the enhanced prudential standards and early remediation requirements for foreign banking organizations and foreign nonbank financial companies, including the proposed U.S. intermediate holding company requirements under that rule. 2371

h. Extension of Time To Divest Ownership Interest in a Single Fund

The proposed rule provided that the Board may, upon application by a banking entity, extend the period of time that a banking entity may have to conform an investment to the 3 percent per-fund limitation. As in the statute, the proposed rule permitted the Board to grant up to an additional two years

if the Board finds that an extension would be consistent with safety and

soundness and not detrimental to the public interest. The proposal required a banking entity to submit an application
for extension to the Board, and set forth

the factors that the Board would consider in reviewing an application for extension, including a requirement that the Board consult with the primary Federal supervisory agency for the banking entity prior to acting on an application.

Some commenters argued that the

final rule should be modified to extend automatically the one-year statutory period for complying with the per-fund limitation by an additional two years without application or approval on a case-by-case basis and to apply the extended conformance period to the aggregate funds limitations. 2372 Some of these commenters suggested that Congress explicitly recognized the need for a banking entity to have a sufficient seeding period following establishment of a fund, and that funds often require more than one year to attract enough

unaffiliated investors to enable the sponsoring banking entity to reduce its ownership interests in the fund to the level required by section 13(d)(4).

Other commenters argued that the amount of a banking entity’s own capital involved in seeding a fund is typically ‘‘small’’ and suggested that, in order to prevent banking entities from engaging in prohibited proprietary trading through a fund, the Board should condition the ability of a banking entity to qualify for an extension of the one-year statutory period on several requirements, including a requirement that the banking entity not have provided more than $10 million in seed capital as part of establishing the covered fund. 2373

The Agencies have carefully

considered comments received on the proposal and have determined instead to adopt the process and standards governing requests for extensions of time to divest an ownership interest in a single covered fund largely as proposed. The Agencies believe that this approach is consistent with the process

and standards set out under the statute.

As under the proposal, the final rule requires any banking entity that seeks an extension of the conformance period provided for the per-funds limitation to submit a written request to the Board. Any such request must be submitted to the Board at least 90 days prior to the


### 6008 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2374 See ABA (Keating).

2375 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(4)(C).

2376 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(C).

2377 See proposed rule § 75.13(b)(1)(i)(A) and (B).

2378 These requirements were substantially similar to the requirements for the risk-mitigating hedging exemption for trading activities contained in proposed § 75.5. In addition, proposed § 75.13(b) also required that: (i) The hedge represent a substantially similar offsetting exposure to the same covered fund and in the same amount of ownership interest in that covered fund arising out of the transaction to accommodate a specific customer request or directly connected to the banking entity’s compensation arrangement with an employee; and (ii) the banking entity document, at the time the transaction is executed, the hedging rationale for all hedging transactions involving an ownership

interest in a covered fund.

2379 See BoA; Credit Suisse (Williams); Deutsche
Bank (Fund-Linked Products); ISDA (Feb. 2012);

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2380 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Public Citizen; Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2381 See BoA.

2382 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); BoA; Credit Suisse
(Williams); Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked Products);
ISDA (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012).

2383 See, e.g., BoA; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012); Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked
Products). expiration of the applicable time period and provide the reasons why the banking entity believes the extension should be granted. In addition, the request must explain the banking entity’s plan for reducing the permitted investment in a covered fund through redemption, sale, dilution or other methods to the limits imposed by the

final rule. To allow the Board to assess the factors provided in the statute, the final rule provides that any extension request by a banking entity must address: (i) Whether the investment would result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies; (ii) the contractual terms governing the banking entity’s interest in the covered fund; (iii) the total exposure of the covered banking entity

to the investment and the risks that disposing of, or maintaining, the investment in the covered fund may pose to the banking entity and the financial stability of the United States; (iv) the cost to the banking entity of divesting or disposing of the investment within the applicable period; (v)

whether the investment or the

divestiture or conformance of the

investment would involve or result in a

material conflict of interest between the banking entity and unaffiliated parties, including clients, customers or counterparties to which it owes a duty; (vi) the banking entity’s prior efforts to reduce through redemption, sale, dilution, or other methods its ownership interests in the covered fund, including activities related to the marketing of interests in such covered fund; (vii) market conditions; and (viii) any other

factor that the Board believes appropriate. In contrast to the proposal, the final rule does not require

information on whether the extension would pose a threat to safety and soundness of the covered banking entity or to financial stability of the United States. The categories of information in

final rule have been modified in order

to eliminate redundancies.

The final rule continues to permit the Board to impose conditions on granting any extension granted if the Board determines conditions are necessary or appropriate to protect the safety and soundness of banking entities or the financial stability of the United States,

address material conflicts of interest or otherwise unsound practices, or to otherwise further the purposes of

section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule. In cases where the banking entity is primarily supervised by another Agency, the Board will consult with such Agency both in connection with its review of the application and, if applicable, prior to imposing conditions in connection with the approval of any request by the banking entity for an extension of the conformance period. While some commenters requested that the Board modify the final rule to permit a banking entity to have covered

fund investments in excess of the aggregate funds limitation, 2374 the final rule does not contain such a provision. As noted in the release for the proposed rule, the statutory grant of authority to provide extensions of time to comply

with the investment limits refers specifically and only to the period for conforming a seeding investment to the per-fund limitation. 2375

As noted in the proposed rule, the Agencies recognize the potential for

evasion of the restrictions contained in section 13 of the BHC Act through misuse of requests for extension of the seeding period for covered funds. Therefore, the Board and the Agencies will monitor requests for extensions of the seeding period for activity in

covered funds that is inconsistent with the requirements of section 13 of the

BHC Act.

4. Section 75.13: Other Permitted

Covered Fund Activities

a. Permitted Risk-Mitigating Hedging

Activities

Section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Actprovides an exemption for certain riskmitigating hedging activities. 2376 In the
context of covered fund activities, the proposed rule implemented this authority narrowly and permitted a banking entity to acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund as a risk-mitigating hedge only in two situations: (i) When acting as intermediary on behalf of a customer that is not itself a banking entity to facilitate exposure by the customer to the profits and losses of the covered fund; and (ii) with respect to a compensation arrangement with an employee of the banking entity that directly provides investment advisory or

other services to that fund. 2377 The proposed rule imposed specific requirements on a banking entity seeking to rely on this exemption. 2378 The Agencies received a range ofcomments on the proposed riskmitigating hedging exemption for ownership interests in covered funds. Some commenters objected to the limited applicability of the statutory risk-mitigating hedging exemption in the covered funds context and urged the Agencies to allow ownership interests in covered funds to be used in any appropriate risk-mitigating hedging. 2379 In contrast, other commenters urged the Agencies to delete one or both of the risk-mitigating hedging exemptions as the commenters argued they were

inconsistent with the statute or otherwise inappropriate. 2380 Commenters also argued that a separate risk-mitigating hedging exemption for covered funds is unnecessary becausethe statute provides a single riskmitigating hedging exemption. 2381

Some commenters argued that the proposed rule would impede banking entities from offering covered-fund linked products to customers, including hedging these products, and would, in particular, impair the ability of banking entities to hedge the risks of fund-linked derivatives with fund-linked swaps or

shares of covered funds referenced in fund-linked products. 2382 These commenters argued this limitation would increase risks at banking entities and was inconsistent with the purpose of the risk-mitigating hedging exemption. Commenters also proposedmodifying the proposal to permit riskmitigating hedging activities that facilitate a customer’s exposure to profits and/or losses of the covered fund, to permit portfolio or dynamic hedging strategies involving covered
fund interests, and to eliminate the proposed condition that a customer would not itself be a banking entity. 2383 Some commenters also urged theAgencies to grandfather existing riskmitigating hedging activities with respect to any covered-fund linked products that comply with the hedging


### 6009 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2384 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); BoA.

2385 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2386 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2387 See Arnold & Porter.

2388 See BOK.

2389 See Occupy.

2390 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

2391 See Occupy.

2392 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(2). 2393 See ISDA (Feb. 2012); BoA; Credit Suisse
(Williams); Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked Products);

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2394 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Credit Suisse (Williams). 2395 See final rule § 75.13(a)(2). requirements for proprietary trading under § 75.5 of the proposed rule. 2384

In contrast, other commenters objected to the exemption for hedging covered fund-linked products sold to

customers. These commenters asserted that this activity would authorize

investment in covered funds in a manner that would not be subject to the three percent per-fund limitation; 2385 or would be inconsistent with the statutory requirement that a banking entity actively seek additional investors for a

fund. 2386

Some commenters urged the Agencies to expand the hedging exemption to allow banking entities to invest in covered funds in order to hedge obligations relating to deferred compensation plans for employees who do not directly provide services to the covered fund for which the hedge

relates. 2387 Another commenter argued that banking entities should be permitted to hedge compensation

investment accounts for executive

officers who are not involved in the management of the investment

accounts. 2388 In contrast, other commenters objected to the hedging exemption for compensation arrangements, arguing that it may increase risk to banking entities, 2389 is

unnecessary, 2390 or may provide banking entities with an opportunity to

evade the limitations on the amount of ownership interests they may have as an

investment in a covered fund. 2391

After review of the comments, the Agencies believe at this time that permitting only limited risk-mitigating hedging activities involving ownership

interests in covered funds is consistent

with the safe and sound conduct of banking entities, and that increased use of ownership interests in covered funds could result in exposure to higher

risks. 2392

In particular, the Agencies have determined that transactions by a banking entity to act as principal in providing exposure to the profits and
losses of a covered fund for a customer, even if hedged by the entity with ownership interests of the covered fund, is a high risk strategy that could threaten the safety and soundness of the banking entity. These transactions expose the banking entity to the risk that the customer will fail to perform, thereby effectively exposing the banking entity to the risks of the covered fund.
Furthermore, a customer’s failure to perform may be concurrent with a
decline in value of the covered fund, which could expose the banking entity to additional losses. Accordingly, the Agencies believe that these transactions pose a significant potential to expose banking entities to the same or similar

economic risks that section 13 of the BHC Act sought to eliminate, and have not adopted the proposed exemption for using ownership interests in covered funds to hedge these types of

transactions in the final rule.

As argued by some commenters, modifying the proposal to eliminate the exemption for permitting banking entities to acquire covered fund

interests in connection with customer facilitation may impact banking entities ability to hedge the risks of fund-linkedderivatives through the use of fundlinked swaps or shares of covered funds referenced by fund-linked products. 2393 Some commenters on the proposal argued that innovation of financial products may potentially be reduced if the final rule does not permit this type of activity related to fund-linked products. 2394 The Agencies recognize that U.S. banking entities may no longer be able to participate in offering certain customer facilitation products relating
to covered funds, but believe it is consistent with the purposes of section

13 to restrict these activities.

The final rule maintains the proposed exemption for hedging employee compensation arrangements with several changes. To ensure that exempt hedging activities are designed to reduce one or more specific risks, as required by section 13(d)(1)(C) of the BHC Act, the proposed rule required that permitted hedging activity be designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity in connection with and related to its obligations or liabilities. The final rule permits a banking entity to acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund provided that the ownership interest is designed to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks to the banking entity in connection with a compensation arrangement with an employee who directly provides investment advisory or other services to
the covered fund. Under the final rule, a banking entity may not use as a hedge ownership interests of a covered fund for which the employee does not provide services. The requirement under the final rule that the hedging activity be designed to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks to the banking entity is consistent with the requirement in § 75.5 of the final
rule, as discussed above in Part VI.A.4. The final rule permits a banking entity to hedge its exposures to price and other risks based on fund performance that arise from restricted profit interest and other performance based compensation arrangements with its investment

managers.

Section 13(a)(2) of the final rule describes the criteria a banking entitymust meet in order to rely on the riskmitigating hedging exemption for covered funds. These requirements, which are based on the requirements for the risk-mitigating hedging exemption for trading activities under § 75.5 of the

final rule and which are discussed in
detail above in Part VI.A.4, have been modified from the proposal to reflect the more limited scope of this section. 2395 In particular, the final rule permits abanking entity to engage in riskmitigating hedging activities involving ownership interests in a covered fund only if the banking entity has established and implements, maintains and enforces an internal compliance program that is reasonably designed to ensure the covered banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of the hedging exemption, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures and internal controls and ongoing monitoring and authorization procedures, and has acquired or retained the ownership

interest in accordance with these written policies, procedures and
internal controls. Furthermore, the acquisition or retention of an ownership interest must demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate, at the inception of the hedge, one or more specific, identifiable risks arising in connection with the compensation arrangement with an employee that directly provides investment advisory or

other services to the covered fund. The acquisition or retention also may not, at the inception of the hedge, result in any significant new or additional risk that is not itself hedged contemporaneously in accordance with the hedging exemption, and the hedge must be subject to continuing review, monitoring and management by the banking entity.


### 6010 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2396 See final rule § 75.13(a)(2)(iii).

2397 Section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity to acquire or retain an ownership interest in, or have certain relationships with, a covered fund notwithstanding the restrictions on investments in, and relationships with, a covered fund, if: (i) Such activity or investment is conducted by a banking entity pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act; (ii) the activity occurs solely outside of the United States; (iii) no ownership interest in such fund is

offered for sale or sold to a resident of the United States; and (iv) the banking entity is not directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the United States or of

one or more States. See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(I).

2398 This section’s discussion of the concept ‘‘solely outside of the United States’’ is provided solely for purposes of the final rule’s implementation of section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act, and does not affect a banking entity’s obligation to comply with additional or different requirements under applicable securities, banking,

or other laws.

2399 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (‘‘Subparagraphs (H) and (I) recognize rules of international regulatory comity by permitting foreign banks, regulated and backed by foreign taxpayers, in the course of operating outside of the United States to engage in activities permitted under relevant foreign law. However, these subparagraphs are not intended to permit a U.S. banking entity to avoid the restrictions on proprietary trading simply by setting up an offshore subsidiary or reincorporating offshore, and regulators should enforce them accordingly. In addition, the subparagraphs seek to maintain a level playing field by prohibiting a foreign bank from improperly offering its hedge fund and private equity fund services to U.S. persons when such offering could not be made in
the United States.’’).

2400 See, e.g., IIB/EBF; SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012); see also Occupy.

2401 See Ass’n. of German Banks; BVI; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); EFAMA; F&C;
HSBC; IIB/EBF; ICSA; PEGCC; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Union Asset; Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; EBF;
Credit Suisse (Williams); Cadwalader (on behalf of
Thai Banks).

2402 See IIB/EBF; EBF; Allen & Overy (on behalf
of Canadian Banks); Credit Suisse (Williams);
Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients). 2403 See Credit Suisse (Williams); PEGCC; see also

Commissioner Barnier.

2404 See e.g., Norinchukin; Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Barclays; EBF; Ass’n. of German
Banks; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Chamber (Feb. 2012).

2405 See BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; Norinchukin; IIF; Allen & Overy (on behalf of
Canadian Banks); ICFR; BoA. As discussed below in Part VI.C.1, other parts of the final rule address commenters’ concerns regarding the compliance burden on foreign banking entities.

2406 See AFG; Ass’n. of German Banks; BVI; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; IIB/EBF; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.; Norinchukin; Union Asset. As discussed in greater detail below in Part VI.C.1, activities and investments of a foreign bank that are conducted under the foreign funds exemption are generally not subject to the specific requirements of § 75.20 and Appendices A and B. The U.S. operations of foreign banking entities are expected to have policies and procedures in place to ensure that they conduct activities under this part in full compliance with this part.

2407 See Australian Bankers Ass’n.; AFMA; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); British Bankers’ Ass’n.; F&C; French Banking Fed’n.; IIB/ EBF; Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Katten (on behalf of
Int’l Clients); Union Asset. See also infra Part

VI.B.5.

2408 See BVI; Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA;
IIB/EBF; PEGCC; Union Asset. See supra Part II for a discussion regarding the conformance period. The final rule also permits a banking entity to engage in risk-mitigating hedging activities in connection with a compensation arrangement, subject to the conditions noted above, only if the compensation arrangement relates solely to the covered fund in which the banking entity or any affiliate thereof has acquired an ownership interest and the losses on such ownership interest are offset by corresponding decreases in the amounts payable in connection with the related employee compensation

arrangement. 2396

b. Permitted Covered Fund Activities

and Investments Outside of the United

States

Section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act 2397 permits foreign banking entities to acquire or retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, covered funds, so long as those activities and investments occur solely outside the

United States and certain other conditions are met (the ‘‘foreign fund exemption’’). 2398 As described in the proposal, the purpose of this statutory exemption appears to be to limit the extraterritorial application of the statutory restrictions on covered fund
activities and investments, while preserving national treatment and competitive equality among U.S. and foreign banking entities within the

United States. 2399 The statute does not explicitly define what is meant by ‘‘solely outside of the United States.’’

The proposed rule allowed foreign banking entities that met certain qualifications to engage in covered fund activities, including owning, organizing and offering, and sponsoring funds outside the United States. The proposed rule defined both the type of foreign banking entity that is eligible for the exemption and when an activity or investment would occur ‘‘solely outside of the United States.’’ The proposed rule allowed a qualifying foreign banking entity to acquire or retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, a covered fund under the exemption only if no subsidiary, affiliate or employee of the banking entity that’s incorporated or physically located in the United States engaged in offering or selling the covered fund. The proposed rule also implemented the statutory requirement that prohibited an ownership interest in the covered fund from being offered for

sale or sold to a resident of the United

States.

Commenters generally expressed support for an exemption to allow foreign banking entities to conduct foreign covered fund activities and

make investments outside the United

States. 2400 A number of commenters also expressed concerns that the proposed foreign fund exemption was

too narrow and would not be effective in permitting foreign banking entities to engage in covered fund activities and

investments outside of the United States. For instance, many commenters argued that several of the proposal’s restrictions on the exemption were not required by statute and were inconsistent with congressional intent to limit the extraterritorial impact of

section 13 of the BHC Act. 2401 These commenters argued that the foreign funds exemption should focus on whether a prohibited activity, such as sponsoring or investing in a covered fund, involves principal risk taken or held by the foreign banking entity that poses risk to U.S. banking entities or the financial stability of the United

States. 2402 Commenters also argued that a broader exemption would better recognize the regulation and supervision of the home country supervisor of the foreign banking entity

and of its covered fund activities. 2403

Some commenters contended that the proposal represented an improper extraterritorial application of U.S. law

that could be found to violate international treaty obligations of the
United States, such as those under the North American Free Trade Agreement, and might result in retaliation by foreign

countries in their treatment of U.S. banking entities abroad. 2404 Commenters also alleged that the proposal would impose significant compliance costs on the foreign operations of foreign banking entities conducting activity pursuant to this exemption. 2405 These commenters argued that foreign banking entities relying on the foreign fund exemption should not be subject to the compliance program requirements contained inAppendix C with respect to their nonU.S. operations. 2406

Several commenters argued that the restrictions of section 13(f), which limits transactions between a banking entity
and certain covered funds, would not apply to activities and investments made in reliance on the foreign fund exemption. 2407 Some commenters argued that the Agencies should grandfather all existing foreign covered funds and argued that failure to provide relief for existing relationships could cause substantial disruption to foreign covered funds and significantly harm investors in existing funds without producing a clear offsetting benefit. 2408


### 6011 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2409 For instance, many commenters raised concerns regarding the treatment of foreign public funds such as UCITS. As discussed in greater detail
above in Part VI.B.1, the definition of covered fund

under the final rule has been modified from the proposal and tailored to include only the types of foreign funds that the Agencies believe are intended
to be the focus of the statute (e.g., certain foreign funds that are established by U.S. banking entities). Foreign public funds are also excluded from the

definition of covered fund under the final rule. The modifications in the final rule in part address commenters’ request that foreign funds be grandfathered. To the extent that an entity qualifies

for one or more of the exclusions from the definition of covered fund, that entity would not be a covered fund under the final rule. Moreover, any entity that would be a covered fund would still be able to rely on the conformance period in order to come into compliance with the requirements of

section 13 and the final rule.

2410 The final rule clarifies the eligibility requirements for banking entities seeking to rely on the foreign fund exemption. Section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act and § 75.13(c)(1)(i) of the proposal require that a banking entity seeking to rely on the foreign fund exemption not be directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized

under the laws of the United States or of one or more states. For clarification purposes, in addition to the eligibility requirement in Section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act and the proposal, the final rule also expressly requires that the banking entity not itself be organized under the laws of the United States.

2411 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(I).

2412 Section 75.13(b)(2) only addresses when a

transaction will be considered to have been conducted pursuant to section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act. Although the statute also references section
4(c)(13) of the BHC Act, the Board has to date applied the general authority contained in that section solely to the foreign activities of U.S. banking organizations which, by the express terms
of section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act, are unable to rely on the foreign funds exemption.

2413 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(9).

2414 See 12 CFR 211.20 et seq. 2415 Some commenters argued that the Board’s Regulation K contains a number of limitations that may not be appropriate to include as part of the requirements of the foreign fund exemption. For example, subpart B of the Board’s Regulation K includes various approval requirements and

interstate office location restrictions. See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); HSBC Life. The final rule does not retain the proposal’s requirement that the activity be conducted in compliance with all of subpart B of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.20 through 211.30). However, the foreign fund exemption in section
13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act and the final rule operates as an exemption and is not a separate grant of authority to engage in an otherwise impermissible activity. To the extent a banking entity is a foreign banking organization, it remains subject to the Board’s Regulation K and must, as a separate matter, comply with any and all applicable rules and requirements of that regulation.

2416 See 12 CFR 211.23(a), (c), and (e). The proposed rule only referenced the qualifying test under section 211.23(a) of the Board’s Regulation K; however, because there are two other methods by which a foreign banking organization may meet the requirements to be considered a qualified foreign banking organization, the final rule incorporates a reference to those provisions as well.

2417 This modification to the definition of foreign banking organization from the proposed definition is necessary because, under the International Banking Act and the Board’s Regulation K, depository institutions that are located in, or organized under the laws of a commonwealth, territory, or possession of the United States, are foreign banking organizations. However, for purposes of the Federal securities laws and certain banking statutes, such as section 2(c)(1) of the BHC
Act and section 3 of the FDI Act, these same entities

are defined to be and treated as domestic entities.
For instance, these entities act as domestic brokerdealers under U.S. securities laws and their deposits are insured by the FDIC. Because one of the purposes of section 13 is to protect insured depository institutions and the U.S. financial system from the perceived risks of proprietary trading and covered fund activities, the Agencies

believe that these entities should be considered to be located within the United States for purposes of

section 13. The final rule includes within the definition of State any State, the District of
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin
Islands, and the Commonwealth of the Northern

Mariana Islands. In response to comments received on the proposal, the final rule contains a

number of modifications to more effectively implement the foreign fund exemption in light of the language and purpose of the statute. Importantly, as explained in the section defining covered funds, the Agencies also believe

that the more circumscribed definition of covered fund, including the exclusion for foreign public funds, should alleviate many of the concerns raised and potential burdens identified by commenters with respect to the funds activities of foreign banking entities. 2409

1. Foreign Banking Entities Eligible for the Exemption

The statutory language of section 13(d)(1)(I) provides that, in order to be eligible for the foreign funds exemption, the banking entity must not be directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws

of the United States or of one or more States. Consistent with this statutory language, the proposed rule limited the scope of the exemption to banking entities that are organized under foreign law and, as applicable, controlled only by entities organized under foreign law.

The Agencies did not receive substantive comment on this aspect of the proposal related to the foreign fund exemption, though some commenters offered suggestions to clarify various parts of the wording of the scope of the definition of banking entities that may qualify for the exemption. The final rule makes only minor, technical changes to more fully carry out the purposes of the

statute.

Consistent with the statutory language and purpose of section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act, the final rule provides that the exemption is available only if the banking entity is not organized

under 2410 or directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the United

States or of one or more States. As noted above, section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act specifically provides that its exemption is available only to a banking entity that is not ‘‘directly or indirectly’’ controlled by a banking entity that is organized

under the laws of the United States or

of one or more States. 2411 Because of this express statutory requirement, a foreign subsidiary controlled, directly or indirectly, by a banking entity organized

under the laws of the United States or one of its States, and a foreign branch office of a banking entity organized

under the laws of the United States or one of the States, may not take advantage of this exemption.

Like the proposal, the final rule incorporates the statutory requirement that the banking entity conduct its sponsorship or investment activities pursuant to sections 4(c)(9) or 4(c)(13) of

the BHC Act. The final rule retains the tests in the proposed rule for determining when a banking entity would meet that requirement. The final rule also provides qualifying criteria for both a banking entity that is a qualifying foreign banking organization under the Board’s Regulation K and a banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization for purposes of Regulation

K. 2412

Section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act applies to any company organized under the laws of a foreign country the greater part

of whose business is conducted outside the United States, if the Board by regulation or order determines that the exemption would not be substantially at variance with the purposes of the BHC Act and would be in the public

interest. 2413 The Board has implemented section 4(c)(9) as part of subpart B of the Board’s Regulation

K, 2414 which specifies a number of conditions and requirements that a foreign banking organization must meet in order to act pursuant to that authority. 2415 The qualifying conditions and requirements include, for example, that the foreign banking organization

demonstrate that more than half of its worldwide business is banking and that more than half of its banking business

is outside the United States. 2416 Under the final rule a banking entity that is a qualifying foreign banking organization for purposes of the Board’s Regulation K, other than a foreign bank as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the International Banking Act of 1978 that is organized under the laws of any commonwealth, territory, or possession of the United States, will qualify for the foreign fund exemption. 2417

Section 13 of the BHC Act also applies to foreign companies that control a U.S. insured depository institution but that are not subject to the


### 6012 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2418 This clarification would be applicable solely
in the context of section 13(d)(1) of the BHC Act. The application of section 4(c)(9) to foreign companies in other contexts is likely to involve different legal and policy issues and may therefore merit different approaches.

2419 For clarification purposes, the final rule has been modified from the proposal to provide that the requirements for this provision must be met on a fully-consolidated basis.

2420 See final rule § 75.13(b)(2)(ii)(B). For purposes of determining whether, on a fully consolidated basis, it meets the requirements under § 75.13(b)(2)(ii)(B), a foreign banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization should base its calculation on the consolidated global assets, revenues, and income of the top-tier affiliate within the foreign banking entity’s structure.

2421 See 12 U.S.C. 1843(c)(9); 12 CFR 211.23(a),
(c), and (e); final rule § 75.13(b)(2)(ii)(B). 2422 See Credit Suisse (Williams); IIB/EBF; Katten
(on behalf of Int’l Clients).

2423 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Ass’n. of German Banks; Credit Suisse
(Williams); IIB/EBF; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Union Asset.

2424 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); Ass’n. of German Banks; Credit Suisse
(Williams); IIB/EBF; Katten (on behalf of Int’l
Clients); TCW; Union Asset. 2425 See IIB/EBF; Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; TCW; Union
Asset; Credit Suisse (Williams); see also Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients) (recommending that, similar to the SEC’s Regulation S (17 CFR 230.901 through 230.905), the final rule provide that involvement of persons located in the United States in the

distribution of a non-U.S. covered fund’s securities to potential purchasers outside of the United States not affect the analysis of whether a non-U.S. banking entity’s investment or sponsorship occurs
outside the United States).

2426 See Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

2427 See BaFin/Deutsche Bundesbank; ICSA; IIB/ EBF; EBF; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Credit Suisse (Williams); George Osborne.

2428 See IIB/EBF.

2429 See IIB/EBF. BHC Act generally or to the Board’s Regulation K—for example, because the foreign company controls a savings

association or an FDIC-insured industrial loan company. Accordingly, the final rule also provides that a foreign banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization would be considered to be conducting activities ‘‘pursuant to section 4(c)(9)’’ for purposes of the foreign fund exemption 2418 if the entity, on a fullyconsolidated basis, 2419 meets at least two of three requirements that evaluate the extent to which the foreign banking entity’s business is conducted outside the United States, as measured by
assets, revenues, and income. 2420 This test largely mirrors the qualifying foreign banking organization test that is made applicable under section 4(c)(9) of the BHC Act and § 211.23(a), (c), or (e) of the Board’s Regulation K, except that the test does not require the foreign entity to demonstrate that more than half of its banking business is outside

the United States. 2421 This difference reflects the fact that foreign entities subject to section 13 of the BHC Act, but not the BHC Act generally, are likely to be, in many cases, predominantly commercial firms. A requirement that

such firms also demonstrate that more than half of their banking business is outside the United States would likely make the exemption unavailable to such firms and subject their global activities

to the restrictions on covered fund
activities and investments, a result that the Agencies do not believe was

intended.

2. Activities or Investments Solely

Outside of the United States

As noted above, the proposed rule adopted a transaction-based approach to implementing the foreign fund exemption and focused on the extent to which the foreign fund transactions occur within, or are carried out by personnel, subsidiaries or affiliates within, the United States. In particular, § 75.13(c)(3) of the proposed rule provided that a transaction or activity be considered to have occurred solely outside of the United States only if: (i) The transaction or activity is conducted by a banking entity that is not organized

under the laws of the United States or of one or more States; (ii) no subsidiary, affiliate, or employee of the banking entity that is involved in the offer or sale of an ownership interest in the covered fund is incorporated or physically located in the United States; and (iii) no ownership interest in such

covered fund is offered for sale or sold

to a resident of the United States.

Commenters suggested that, like the foreign trading exemption, the foreign fund exemption should focus on the location of activities that a banking entity engages in as principal. 2422 These commenters argued that the location of

sales activities of a fund should not determine whether a banking entity has sponsored or acquired an ownership interest in a covered fund solely outside

of the United States. Commenters also argued that foreign banking entities typically locate marketing and sales personnel for foreign funds in the

United States in order to serve customers, including those that are not
residents of the United States, and that the proposal would needlessly force all

covered fund sales activities to shift

outside of the United States. These commenters alleged that the restrictions under the proposal would cause foreign banking entities to relocate their personnel from the United States to overseas, diminishing U.S. jobs with no

concomitant benefit. 2423

Many commenters requested removal of the proposal’s prohibition on a U.S. subsidiary, affiliate, or employee of the foreign banking entity offering or selling fund interests in order to qualify for the foreign fund exemption. 2424 Commenters argued that this limitation

was not included in the statute and that the limited involvement of persons

located in the U.S. in the distribution of ownership interests in a foreign covered fund should not, by itself, disqualify the banking entity from relying on the foreign fund exemption so long as the fund is offered only outside the United States. 2425 These commenters argued that organizing and offering a fund is not a prohibited activity so long as it is not accompanied by ownership or sponsorship of the covered fund. One commenter urged that the final rule permit U.S. personnel of a foreign banking entity to engage in non-selling
activities related to a covered fund, including acting as investment advisor, establishing fund vehicles, conducting back-office functions such as day-to-day management and deal sourcing tax structuring, obtaining licenses, interfacing with regulators, and other

related activities that do not involve U.S. sales activity. 2426

Instead of the proposal’s transactionbased approach to implementing the foreign fund exemption, many commenters suggested the final rule adopt a risk-based approach. 2427 These commenters argued that a risk-based approach would prohibit or significantly limit the amount of

financial risk from such activities that

could be transferred to the United States by the foreign activity of foreign banking entities in line with the purpose of the

statue. 2428 Commenters also contended that foreign activities of most foreign banking entities are already subject to activities limitations, capital requirements, and other prudential requirements of their home-country supervisor(s). 2429

In response to commenters’ concerns and in order to more effectively implement both the statutory prohibition as well as the foreign fund exemption, the final rule has been modified to better reflect the purpose of the statute by ensuring that the principal risks of covered fund investments and sponsorship by foreign banking entities permitted under the foreign funds exemption occur and remain solely outside of the United States. One of the principal purposes of

section 13 is to limit the risks that

covered fund investments and activities pose to the safety and soundness of U.S. banking entities and the U.S. financial


### 6013 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2430 See final rule § 75.13(b)(4). 2431 See final rule § 75.13(b)(5). 2432 See final rule § 75.10(a)(2).

2433 See proposed rule § 75.13(c)(1)(iii).

2434 See 17 CFR 230.901–905.

2435 See IIB/EBF; EFAMA; ICI Global.

2436 See Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks);

Grosvenor; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2437 See Ass’n. of German Banks; BAROC;
Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Williams); IIB/EBF; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.;
Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); PEGCC. system. Another purpose of the foreign fund exemption was to limit the extraterritorial application of section 13 as it applies to foreign banking entities subject to section 13.

To accomplish these purposes in light of the structure and purpose of the statute and in response to commenters, the final rule adopts a risk-based approach rather than a transaction approach to the foreign fund exemption.

In order to ensure these risks remain solely outside of the United States, the

final rule also includes several conditions on the availability of the foreign fund exemption. Specifically, the final rule provides that an activity or investment occurs solely outside the United States for purposes of the foreign fund exemption only if:

• The banking entity acting as sponsor, or engaging as principal in the acquisition or retention of an ownership
interest in the covered fund, is not itself, and it not controlled directly or indirectly by, a banking entity that is

located in the United States or

established under the laws of the United States or of any State;

• The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes the decision to acquire or retain the ownership interest or act as sponsor to

the covered fund is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

• The investment or sponsorship, including any transaction arising from risk-mitigating hedging related to an ownership interest, is not accounted for as principal directly or indirectly on a consolidated basis by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State; and

• No financing for the banking entity’s ownership or sponsorship is provided, directly or indirectly, by any

branch or affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any

State. 2430

These requirements are designed to ensure that any foreign banking entity engaging in activity under the foreign fund exemption does so in a manner that ensures the risk and sponsorship of the activity or investment occurs and resides solely outside of the United

States.

The final rule has been modified from the proposal to specifically recognize that, for purposes of the foreign fund exemption, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank, is located in the United States; however, a foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not

considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operation of the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary. 2431 A subsidiary (wherever located) of a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank is also

considered itself to be located in the United States. This provision helps give effect to the statutory language limiting the foreign fund exemption to activities of foreign banking entities that occur ‘‘solely outside of the United States’’ by clarifying that the U.S. operations of foreign banking entities may not sponsor or acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund as principal based on this exemption.

Because so-called ‘‘back office’’ activities do not involve sponsoring or acquiring or retaining an ownership
interest in a covered fund, the final rule does not impose restrictions on U.S. personnel of a foreign banking entity engaging in these activities in

connection with one or more covered funds. This allows providing

administrative services or similar

functions to the covered fund as an incident to the activity conducted under the foreign fund exemption (such as clearing and settlement, maintaining and preserving records of the fund, furnishing statistical and research data, or providing clerical support for the fund).

The foreign fund exemption in the final rule also permits the U.S. personnel and operations of a foreign banking entity to act as investment

adviser to a covered fund in certain
circumstances. For instance, the U.S. personnel of a foreign banking entity may provide investment advice and

recommend investment selections to the manager or general partner of a covered fund so long as that investment advisory activity in the United States does not result in the U.S. personnel participating in the control of the covered fund or offering or selling an ownership interest to a resident of the United States. As explained above, the final rule also explicitly provides that acquiring or retaining an ownership interest does not include acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in a covered fund by a banking entity acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian, subject to certain conditions, or acting
on behalf of customers as a trustee, or in a similar fiduciary capacity for a
customer that is not a covered fund, so long as the activity is conducted for the account of the customer and the banking entity and its affiliates do not have or retain beneficial ownership of the ownership interest. 2432 The final rule would thus allow a foreign bank to engage in any of these capacities in the U.S. without the need to rely on the foreign fund exemption.

3. Offered for Sale or Sold to a Resident

of the United States

The proposed rule provided that no ownership interest in the covered fund

be offered for sale or sold to a resident of the United States, a requirement of

the statute. 2433 Numerous commenters

focused on the definition of ‘‘resident of the United States’’ in the proposed rule

and the manner in which the restriction on offers and sales to such persons would interrelate with Regulation S

under the Securities Act of 1933.
Commenters asserted that, since market participants have long conducted offerings of foreign funds in reliance on Regulation S 2434 in order to comply with U.S. securities law obligations, these same securities law principles should be applied to determine whether a person is a resident of the United States for purposes of section 13 and the

final rule to determine whether an offer

or sale is made to residents of the

United States. 2435

Certain commenters argued that because of the way the restriction in the statute and proposed rule was written,

it was unclear whether the restriction on offering for sale to a resident of the United States applied to the foreign banking entity or to any third party that

establishes a fund. 2436 Commenters argued the prohibition against offers or sales of ownership interests to residents of the United States should apply only

to offers and sales of covered funds organized and offered by the foreign banking entity but not to covered funds established by unaffiliated third parties. 2437 These commenters reasoned that a foreign banking entity should be permitted to make a passive investment in a covered fund sponsored and controlled by an unaffiliated third party that has U.S. investors as long as the foreign banking entity does not itself offer or sell ownership interest in the

covered fund to residents of the United


### 6014 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2438 See Grosvenor; IIB/EBF; Japanese Bankers
Ass’n.; Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb.2012); Norinchukin; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2439 See BAROC; Credit Suisse (Williams);
Grosvenor; IIB/EBF.

2440 See Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation;
Credit Suisse (Williams); PEGCC.

2441 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also Grosvenor; PEGCC.

2442 See AFG; BAROC; Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

2443 See 156 Cong. Rec. S5897 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley). 2444 See IIB/EBF; Katten (on behalf of Int’l
Clients); Union Asset.

2445 See IFIC; see also Allen & Overy (on behalf
of Canadian Banks).

2446 See Ass’n. of German Banks; Credit Suisse
(Williams); IIB/EBF; Katten (on behalf of Int’l
Clients).

2447 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2448 See BVI; EFAMA; Union Asset. 2449 See AFG; Union Asset; see also BVI; Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); Katten (on
behalf of Int’l Clients).

2450 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

2451 See final rule § 75.13(b)(1)(iii).

2452 See final rule § 75.13(b)(3).

2453 See Statement of the Commission Regarding
Use of Internet Web sites to Offer Securities, Solicit

Securities Transactions or Advertise Investment
Services Offshore, Securities Act Release No. 7516 (Mar. 23, 1998). Reliance on these principles only applies with respect to whether an ownership

interest in a covered fund is offered for sale or sold to a resident of the United States for purposes of States. 2438 Commenters contended that this interpretation would be consistent with section 13’s purpose to prevent foreign banks from using the foreign fund exemption to market and sell
covered funds to U.S. investors, while simultaneously limiting the extraterritorial impact of section 13. 2439 Commenters argued that the proposal’s foreign fund exemption would negatively impact U.S. asset managers unaffiliated with any banking entity because they would either be forced to exclude foreign banking entities from investing in their funds or would need

to ensure that no residents of the United States hold ownership interests in funds

offered to these entities. 2440 Commenters also contended that foreign banking entities, including sovereign wealth funds that own or control foreign banking organizations, invest tens of

billions of dollars in U.S. covered funds and that if these types of investments were not permitted under the foreign fund exemption an important source of foreign investment in the U.S. could be

eliminated. 2441

Commenters argued that an investment by a foreign banking entity in a third-party unaffiliated fund does not pose any risk to a U.S. banking entity or to the U.S. financial system. Moreover, commenters argued that a foreign banking entity that has invested in a fund sponsored and advised by a third party has no control over whether—and may have no knowledge—that the third party has

determined to offer or sell the fund to

U.S. residents. 2442

As noted above, one of the purposes

of section 13 is to limit the risk to banking entities and the financial system of the United States. Another purpose of the statute appears to be to permit foreign banking entities to engage in foreign activities without being subject to the restrictions of section 13 while also ensuring that these foreign entities do not receive a competitive advantage over U.S. banking entities with respect to offering and selling their covered fund services

in the United States. 2443 As such, the final rule does not prohibit a foreign banking entity from making an investment in or sponsoring a foreign fund. However, a foreign banking entity would not be permitted under the foreign fund exemption to invest in, or engage in the sponsorship of, a U.S. or foreign covered fund that offers ownership interests to residents in the United States unless it does so pursuant to and subject to the limitations of the permitted activity exemption for organizing and offering a covered fund, for example, which has the same effect for U.S. banking entities. The final rule ensures that the risk of the sponsoring and investing in non-U.S. covered funds by foreign banking entities remains

outside of the United States and that the foreign fund exemption does not advantage foreign banking entities relative to U.S. banking entities with respect to providing their covered fund services in the United States by prohibiting the offer or sale of ownership interests in related covered

funds to residents of the United States.

Commenters also argued that foreign investors in a foreign covered fund

should not be treated as residents of the United States for purposes of the final rule if, after purchasing their interest in the covered fund, they relocate to the

U.S., 2444 or travel to the U.S. on a temporary basis. 2445 Commenters also argued that non-U.S. investors in a fund offered by a foreign banking entity should not be prohibited from transferring their interests to residents of the United States in the secondary

market. 2446 One commenter alleged that, notwithstanding the reasonable efforts of foreign banking entities to prevent

residents of the United States from investing in their foreign covered funds, investors may find ways to circumvent

and invest in covered funds without knowledge or assistance from the foreign banking entity. 2447

Certain commenters argued that there was a substantial risk that foreign funds offered by foreign banking entities would not be able to rely on the exemption due to the presence of a

limited number of investors who are

residents of the United States. 2448 A few commenters suggested that the final rule should require that, for both related and unrelated covered funds, a banking entity need only have a reasonable belief that an ownership interest in a covered fund is not offered or sold to

residents of the United States in order to qualify for the foreign fund exemption. Commenters argued that only active targeting or marketing

towards a resident of the United States by the foreign banking entity should be prohibited by the final rule, and that the incidental presence of a limited number

of investors that are residents of the United States in a foreign covered fund offered by a foreign banking entity should not prohibit the foreign banking entity from relying on the foreign fund exemption. 2449 One commenter argued that, for certain complex fund structures (e.g., a structure with a master fund and multiple feeder funds that investors invest in or a parallel fund structure both managed by the same fund manager), eligibility for the foreign fund exemption should not be precluded for a fund with no ownership interests

offered for sale or sold to U.S. residents

even if a related covered fund is offered

to residents of the United States. 2450

After considering comments received on the proposal, the final rule retains the statutory requirement that no ownership interest in the covered fund

be offered for sale to a resident of the

United States. 2451 The final rule provides that an ownership interest in a

covered fund is offered for sale or sold

to a resident of the United States for purposes of the foreign fund exemption only if it is sold or has been sold pursuant to an offering that targets

residents of the United States. 2452

Absent circumstances otherwise indicating a nexus with residents of the United States, the sponsor of a foreign fund would not be viewed as targeting U.S. residents for purposes of the foreign fund exemption if it conducts an offering directed to residents of one or

more countries other than the United States; includes in the offering materials a prominent disclaimer that the securities are not being offered in the

United States or to residents of the
United States; and includes other reasonable procedures to restrict access to offering and subscription materials to persons that are not residents of the

United States. 2453 If ownership interests


### 6015 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

section 13 of the BHC Act. In addition, reliance would not be appropriate if a foreign fund engages in a private placement of ownership interests in the
United States in reliance on Section 4(a)(2) of the Securities Act of 1933 or Regulation D (17 CFR
230.501–230.506).

2454 An offer or sale is made in an ‘‘offshore transaction’’ under Regulation S if, among other
conditions, the transaction is executed in, on or through the facilities of a ‘‘designated offshore securities market’’ as described in Regulation S, which includes a number of foreign stock exchanges and markets and any others the SEC designates. See Securities Act rule 902(h).

2455 See Securities Act rule 902(k)(2). 2456 See final rule § 75.10(d)(8).

2457 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(F).

2458 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(D).

2459 See proposed rule §§ 75.6(b)(2)(iii); 75.6(c).

2460 See, e.g., Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); ACLI (Jan. 2012); Country Fin. et al.; Nationwide; NAMIC; Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012) (citing FSOC study at 71); HSBC Life; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Country Fin. et al.; Mutual of
Omaha; see also Rep. McCarthy et al.; Sen. Nelson; Sen. Hagan; Sens. Brown & Harkin. 2461 See, e.g., Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3,
2012); TIAA–CREF (Feb. 13, 2012); Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); USAA (citing FSOC study at 71); HSBC Life; ACLI; NAMIC;

Nationwide.

2462 See Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Nationwide; see also Rep. McCarthy et al.; Sens. Brown & Harkin.

2463 See, e.g., Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); USAA; HSBC Life; Country Fin. et al.; Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers); Nationwide (discussing the exemption for the general account of an insurance company); ACLI; Nationwide (discussing the exemption for separate accounts).

2464 See, e.g., Sutherland (on behalf of Comm. of Annuity Insurers). that are issued in a foreign offering are listed on a foreign exchange, secondary

market transactions could be undertaken by the banking entity

outside the United States in accordance with Regulation S under the foreign fund exemption. 2454 Foreign banking entities should use precautions not to send offering materials into the United

States or conduct discussions with persons located in the United States (other than to or with a person known to be a dealer or other professional fiduciary acting on behalf of a discretionary account or similar account for a person who is not a resident of the United States). 2455 In order to comply with the rule as adopted, sponsors of

covered funds established outside of the

United States must examine the facts and circumstances of their particular offerings and confirm that the offering does not target residents of the United

States.

With respect to the treatment of multitiered fund structures under the foreign fund exemption, the Agencies expect that activities related to certain complex fund structures should be integrated in

order to determine whether an ownership interest in a covered fund is

offered for sale to a resident of the United States. For example, a banking entity may not be able to rely on the foreign fund exemption to sponsor or invest in an initial covered fund (that is offered for sale only overseas and not to residents of the United States) that is itself organized or operated for the purpose of investing in another covered fund (that is sold pursuant to an offering that targets U.S. residents) and that is either organized and offered or is advised by that banking entity.

4. Definition of ‘‘Resident of the United

States’’

As discussed in greater detail above in Part VI.B.1, section 13(d)(1)(I) of the BHC Act provides that a foreign banking entity may acquire or retain an ownership interest in or act as sponsor to a covered fund, but only if that activity is conducted according to the requirements of the statute, including that no ownership interest in the

covered fund is offered for sale or sold

to a ‘‘resident of the United States.’’ As noted above in Part VI.B.1.f describing

the definition of ‘‘resident of the United
States,’’ the statute does not define this

term.

After carefully considering comments received, the Agencies have defined the

term ‘‘resident of the United States’’ in the final rule to mean a ‘‘U.S. person’’ as defined in the SEC’s Regulation S. 2456 The Agencies note, however, that it would not be permissible under the foreign fund exemption for a foreign banking entity to facilitate or participate

in the formation of a non-U.S. investment vehicle for a person or entity that is itself a U.S. person for the specific purpose of investing in a foreign fund. The Agencies believe that this type of activity would constitute an evasion of the requirements of section

13 of the BHC Act.

c. Permitted Covered Fund Interests and Activities by a Regulated Insurance Company

As discussed above, section 13(d)(1)(F) of the BHC Act permits a banking entity that is a regulated insurance company acting for its general
account, or an affiliate of an insurance company acting for the insurance company’s general account, to purchase or sell a financial instrument subject to

certain conditions. 2457 Section 13(d)(1)(D) of the Act permits a banking entity to purchase or sell a financial

instrument on behalf of customers. 2458 The proposal implemented these exemptions with respect to the proprietary trading activities of insurance companies by permitting a banking entity that is an insurance company to purchase or sell a financial instrument for the general account of the insurance company or for a separate account, in each case subject to certain

restrictions. 2459 The proposal did not apply these exemptions to covered fund

activities or investments.

A number of commenters argued that section 13 was designed to

accommodate the business of insurance by exempting both the proprietary trading and covered fund activities of insurance companies. 2460 These commenters argued that providing an exemption for covered fund activities and investments through both the general account and separate accounts of an insurance company was integral to
the business of insurance and that, absent an exemption from the covered fund provisions, insurance companies

would lack an effective means to diversify their holdings and obtain adequate rates of return in order to maintain affordable premiums for

customers. 2461

Some commenters argued that section 13 of the BHC Act specifically provides exemptions from both the covered fund prohibition of section 13(a)(1), and the prohibition on proprietary trading. 2462

Commenters contended that the exemptions in section 13(d)(1)(F) (referencing activity in general accounts of insurance companies) and 13(d)(1)(D) (referencing activities on behalf of customers) cross-reference the

instruments described in section 13(h)(4) and not activity described in section 13(h)(4). On this basis, commenters argued the statute exempts both proprietary trading in these

instruments described in section 13(h)(4) and investments in those instruments (including when those instruments are ownership interests in covered funds). 2463

Alternatively, commenters argued that the Agencies should use their authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act to provide an exemption for the covered

fund activities and investments of insurance companies. 2464 These commenters argued that exempting

covered funds activities and investments of insurance companies would promote and protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity and financial stability of the United States and provide certain benefits to the U.S. financial system by allowing insurance companies to access important asset classes (for better investment diversity and returns), provide more diverse product offerings to customers, better manage their investment risks through diversification and more closely matching the maturity of their assets


### 6016 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2465 See Fin. Services Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012);
TIAA–CREF (Feb. 13, 2012); USAA; HSBC Life; ACLI (Jan. 2012); NAMIC; Nationwide.

2466 See, e.g., Nationwide.

2467 See, e.g., ACLI (Jan. 2012); Fin. Services
Roundtable (Feb. 3, 2012); USAA; Chamber (Feb. 2012); Country Fin. et al.; Mutual of Omaha; NAMIC; Nationwide; Rep. McCarthy et al. See also 156 Cong. Reg. S. 5896 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (arguing that activities of insurance companies ‘‘are heavily regulated by State insurance regulators, and in most cases do not pose the same level of risk as other proprietary trading’’).

2468 Some commenters urged the Agencies to provide that an affiliate or subsidiary of an insurance company could purchase covered funds for the insurance company’s general account or a

separate account. See e.g., Fin. Services Roundtable
(Feb. 3, 2012); TIAA–CREF (Feb. 13, 2012). The Agencies note that the final rule provides (as does the statute) an exemption that permits an insurance company or its affiliate to acquire and retain an ownership interest in a covered fund solely for the insurance’s company general account (or one or more of its separate account); such an affiliate or subsidiary also may be a wholly-owned subsidiary,

as defined in the final rule.

2469 The final rule defines the terms ‘‘general account’’ and ‘‘separate account’’ largely as proposed, and includes the new defined term ‘‘insurance company,’’ defined as a company that is organized as an insurance company, primarily and predominantly engaged in writing insurance or reinsuring risks underwritten by insurance companies, subject to supervision as such by a state insurance regulator or a foreign insurance regulator, and not operated for the purpose of evading the provisions of section 13 of the BHC Act. Cf. section 2(a)(17) of the Investment Company Act (defining the term insurance company). 2470 See final rule § 75.13(c).

2471 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(d)(1)(D), (F).

2472 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(1)(F). See also 156 Cong. Reg. S. 5896 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (arguing that ‘‘section
13 of the BHC Act] was never meant to affect the ordinary business of insurance’’). 2473 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(1)(F). See also 156 Cong. Reg. S. 5896 (daily ed. July 15, 2010) (statement of Sen. Merkley) (arguing that ‘‘section
13 of the BHC Act] was never meant to affect the ordinary business of insurance’’).

2474 12 U.S.C. 371c. The Agencies note that this does not alter the applicability of section 23A of the FR Act and the Board’s Regulation W to covered transactions between insured depository

institutions and their affiliates.

2475 12 U.S.C. 371c–1.

2476 See proposed rule § 75.16. and liabilities, contribute liquidity to capital markets, and support economic growth through the provision of capital to entrepreneurs and businesses. 2465 Commenters also argued that an exemption for insurance companies from the covered fund prohibitions was necessary to permit insurance companies that are banking entities to effectively compete with insurance companies not affiliated with an insured depository institution. 2466 Commenters alleged that insurance companies are already subject to extensive regulation

under state insurance laws that specifically include provisions designed to diversify risk among investment categories, limit exposure to particular types of asset classes including covered fund investments, and protect the safety

and soundness of the insurance

company. 2467

After careful review of the comments in light of the statutory provisions, the final rule has been modified to permit an insurance company or its affiliate 2468 to acquire or retain an ownership interest in, or act as sponsor to, a covered fund for either the general account of the insurance company or

one or more separate accounts established by the insurance

company. 2469

These activities are only permitted under the final rule so long as: (1) The insurance company or its affiliate acquires and retains the ownership interest solely for the general account of the insurance company or for one or more separate accounts established by the insurance company; (2) the acquisition and retention of the ownership interest is conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which the insurance company is domiciled; and (3) the appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation with the Financial Stability Oversight Council

and the relevant insurance

commissioners of the States and relevant foreign jurisdictions, as appropriate, have not jointly
determined, after notice and comment, that a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described in § 75.13(c)(2) of the final rule is insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity, or the financial stability of the United

States. 2470

The Agencies believe that exempting

insurance activities and investments

from the covered fund restrictions is supported by the language of sections 13(d)(1)(D) and (F) of the BHC Act, 2471 and more fully carries out Congressional intent and the statutory purpose of appropriately accommodating the

business of insurance within an insurance company. 2472 Section 13(d)(1)(F) of the statute specifically exempts general accounts of insurance companies, and, as explained above in Part VI.A.7, separate accounts are managed and maintained on behalf of customers, an activity exempt under section 13(d)(1)(D) of the statute. By their terms, these are statutory exemptions from the prohibitions in section 13(a), which includes both the prohibition on proprietary trading and the prohibition on covered fund investments and sponsorship. Moreover, the statutory language of sections13(d)(1)(D) and 13(d)(1)(F), both crossreference the instruments described in section 13(h)(4) and not activity described in section 13(h)(4). These instruments are ‘‘any security, any derivative, any contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, any option on any such security, derivative or contract or any other security or financial instrument that [the Agencies determine by rule.]’’ This reference covers an ownership interest in a covered fund. The Agencies believe these exemptions as modified more fully carry out Congressional intent and the statutory purpose of appropriately accommodating the business of

insurance within an insurance

company. 2473 Insurance companies are already subject to a robust regulatory regime including limitations on their

investment activities.

5. Section 75.14: Limitations on Relationships With a Covered Fund

Section 13(f) of the BHC Act generally prohibits a banking entity that, directly or indirectly, serves as investment manager, investment adviser, or sponsor to a covered fund (or that organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act) from entering into a transaction with a

covered fund that would be a covered

transaction as defined in section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act (‘‘FR Act’’). 2474 The statute also provides an exemption for prime brokerage transactions between a banking entity and a covered fund in which a covered fund managed, sponsored, or advised by that banking entity has taken an ownership interest. Section 13(f) subjects any transaction permitted under section 13(f) of the BHC Act (including a permitted prime brokerage transaction) between the banking entity and covered fund to

section 23B of the FR Act. 2475 In general, section 23B of the FR Act requires that the transaction be on

market terms or on terms at least as favorable to the banking entity as a comparable transaction by the banking entity with an unaffiliated third party. Section 75.16 of the proposed rule implemented these provisions. 2476

a. Scope of Application

Section 13(f) of the BHC Act and the related provisions of the proposal were among the most commented upon aspects of the covered funds section. The majority of commenters argued that

the broad definition of ‘‘covered fund’’ under the proposal made the proposed implementation of section 13(f) unworkable and disruptive to existing market practices because it would


### 6017 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2477 See, e.g., Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group); BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse
(Williams); Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked Products);
GE (Feb. 2012); Goldman Sachs (Covered Funds);
ICI Global; ISDA (Feb. 2012); RMA; SIFMA et al.
(Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2478 See SunTrust; AHIC; SBIA.

2479 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2480 See final rule § 75.10(b). See supra Part

VI.B.1.

2481 See IIB/EBF; Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients); EBF; EFAMA; French Banking Fed’n.; Japanese Bankers Ass’n.

2482 See AIMA. 2483 See final rule § 75.10(b)(1)(ii) and (c)(1). See

supra Part VI.B.1.

2484 Section 75.11(b) of the final rule provides that for purposes of securitizations, organizing and offering includes acting as the securitizer. As discussed in greater detail above in Part VI.B.2.b, a banking entity that continues to hold interests in a securitization in reliance on this exemption must comply with certain requirements, including the requirements of § 75.14. Accordingly, § 75.14 of the final rule has also been modified from the proposal to prohibit a banking entity that continues to hold an ownership interest in accordance with § 75.11(b), and its affiliates, from entering into a covered transaction with a covered fund, subject to certain exceptions.

2485 See AFME et al.: ASF (Feb. 2012); Ashurst; BoA; Barclays; Cadwalader (Municipal Securities);
Credit Suisse (Williams); Commercial Real Estate
Fin. Council; Deutsche Bank (Fund-Linked Products); Fidelity; GE (Feb. 2012); Goldman Sachs
(Covered Funds); ICI (Feb. 2012); IIB/EBF; ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; PNC et al.; PNC; RBC; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA
(Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012).

These comments are addressed above in Part II regarding availability of the conformance period provisions of section 13 of the BHC Act.

2486 See Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients). 2487 The term ‘‘covered transaction’’ is defined in section 23A of the FR Act to mean, with respect to
an affiliate of a member bank: (i) A loan or extension of credit to the affiliate, including a purchase of assets subject to an agreement to repurchase; (ii) a purchase of or an investment in securities issued by the affiliate; (iii) a purchase of assets from the affiliate, except such purchase of real and personal property as may be specifically exempted by the Board by order or regulation; (iv) the acceptance of securities or other debt obligations issued by the affiliate as collateral security for a loan or extension of credit to any person or company; (v) the issuance of a guarantee, acceptance, or letter of credit, including an endorsement or standby letter of credit, on behalf
of an affiliate; (vi) a transaction with an affiliate that involves the borrowing or lending of securities, to

the extent that the transaction causes a member bank or subsidiary to have credit exposure to the
affiliate; or (vii) a derivative transaction, as defined in paragraph (3) of section 5200(b) of the Revised
Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 84(b)), with
an affiliate, to the extent that the transaction causes a member bank or a subsidiary to have credit exposure to the affiliate. See 12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7), as amended by section 608 of the Dodd-Frank Act.

2488 See 12 U.S.C. 371c(d); 12 CFR 223.42; ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional Investors (Feb.
2012); BoA; BNY Mellon et al.; Credit Suisse
(Williams); SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also Allen & Overy (on behalf of Foreign Bank Group).

2489 See ABA (Keating); Ass’n. of Institutional
Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; BNY Mellon et al.;

SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012). prohibit corporate funding transactions with ordinary corporate entities that do not engage in hedge fund or private equity activities. 2477 Commenters also argued that activities that the proposal appeared to permit as a permitted activity exemption (e.g., investments in public welfare funds) would be prohibited by the restrictions in 13(f) 2478 and that the Agencies should construe section 13(d)(1)(J) of the BHC Act as allowing them to permit banking

entities to enter into covered
transactions with a covered fund, if those activities would promote and protect the safety and soundness of banking entities and the financial stability of the United States. 2479 However, many of the comments

discussed above and some of the economic burdens noted by these commenters have been addressed by

revisions discussed above in Part VI.B.1

to the definition of covered fund. 2480 A

number of these and related comments are also addressed by portions of the final rule that provide that the prohibitions of section 13 do not apply to interests acquired, for example, as agent, broker, custodian, in satisfaction of a debt previously contracted, through a pension fund, or as trustee or fiduciary (all within the limits defined in the final rule).

Several commenters argued that applying the restrictions in section 13(f) to foreign activities of foreign banking

entities would be inconsistent with the presumption against extraterritorial application of U.S. law and principles of international comity, including deference to home-country regulation. 2481 For example, one commenter expressed concern that rules being developed around custody obligations in the European Union may require a prime broker or custodian to indirectly guarantee assets of a fund, which would directly conflict with the prohibition on guarantees in section 13(f) of the BHC Act. 2482 As explained
above, the final rule has been modified to more narrowly focus the scope of the definition of covered fund as it applies to foreign funds. 2483 These changes substantially address the issues raised by commenters regarding the applicability of section 13(f) of the BHC Act to foreign funds.

Commenters also raised a number of
other issues. For instance, some commenters argued that applying section 13(f) to securitization entities

would in some instances run counter to

the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) regarding the sale and

securitization of loans. 2484 These

commenters recommended that the finalrule, at a minimum, grandfather preexisting relationships between banking entities and existing securitization vehicles to reduce the potential effects of the final rule on agreements and positions entered into before the

enactment of the statute. 2485

One commenter argued that a banking entity that delegates its responsibility for acting as sponsor, investment manager, or investment adviser to an unaffiliated entity should no longer be subject to the restrictions of section 13(f). 2486 By its terms, section 13(f) of the BHC Act applies to a banking entity that, directly or indirectly, serves as investment manager, investment adviser, or sponsor to a covered fund (or that relies on section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act in connection with organizing and offering a covered fund). The Agencies believe that a banking entity that delegates its responsibility to act as sponsor, investment manager, or

investment adviser to an unaffiliated party would still be subject to the limitations of section 13(f) if the banking entity retains the ability to
select, remove, direct, or otherwise exert control over the sponsor, investment manager, or investment adviser designee. In addition, the unaffiliated party designated as sponsor, investment manager, or investment adviser would be subject to the restrictions of section 13(f) if the third party is a banking entity.

b. Transactions That Would Be a

‘‘Covered Transaction’’

Section 13(f) of the BHC Act prohibits

covered transactions as defined in

section 23A of the FR Act between a banking entity that serves as investment manager, investment advisor or sponsor

to a covered fund or that relies on the exemption in section 13(d)(1)(G) and a

covered fund. 2487 A number of

commenters contended that the

definition of ‘‘covered transaction’’ in section 13(f) of the BHC Act should incorporate the exemptions available

under section 23A and the Board’s Regulation W. 2488 These commenters alleged that the statute’s general reference to section 23A suggests that

the term ‘‘covered transaction’’ should be construed in light of section 23A as a whole, including the exemptions in subsection (d) of that Act and as implemented in the Board’s Regulation

W. 2489 These commenters also argued that the Board’s authority to interpret and issue rules pursuant to section 23A of the FR Act and section 5(b) of the BHC Act, the general rule-making authority contained in section 13(b) of the BHC Act, and the exemptive authority in section 13(d)(1)(J) all


### 6018 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2490 See BNY Mellon et al.; SIFMA et al. (Covered
Funds) (Feb. 2012); see also Credit Suisse
(Williams).

2491 See ABA (Keating); AFG; Ass’n. of
Institutional Investors (Feb. 2012); BoA; BNY

Mellon et al.; Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA; French Treasury et al.; JPMC; IMA; RMA; SIFMA

et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); State Street (Feb. 2012); SSgA (Feb. 2012); Vanguard.

2492 See BoA; Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2493 See Credit Suisse (Williams).

2494 See, e.g., Credit Suisse (Williams).

2495 See BoA; Credit Suisse (Williams); SIFMA et

al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012).

2496 See State Street (Feb. 2012); RMA.

2497 See BoA; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); see also Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients).

2498 See Occupy. 2499 See 12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7); see also 12 U.S.C. 371c–1(a)(2)(B) (including the sale of securities or other assets to an affiliate as a transaction subject
to section 23B).

2500 See 12 U.S.C. 371c(d). 2501 See proposed rule § 75.16(a)(2)(i).

2502 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012).

2503 The final rule modifies the proposal to clarify that a banking entity may acquire and retain an ownership interest in a covered fund by express reference to the permitted activities described in
§§ 75.11, 75.12 and 75.13. provide a basis for providing such exemptions. 2490

In particular, commenters argued that intraday extensions of credit; 2491 transactions fully secured by cash or U.S. government securities; 2492 purchases of liquid assets and

marketable securities from covered
funds; 2493 and riskless principal

transactions with covered funds all should be exempt from the restrictions in section 13(f) of the BHC Act. 2494 These commenters argued that providing an exemption for intraday extensions of credit in particular was necessary to allow a banking entity to continue to provide affiliated covered funds with standard custody, clearing,

and settlement services that include intra-day or overnight overdrafts necessary to facilitate securitiessettlement, contractual settlement, predetermined income, or similar custodyrelated transactions. Some commenters argued that transactions fully secured by cash or U.S. government securities do not expose banking entities to inappropriate risks, are permitted in
unlimited amounts under section 23A, and should not be entirely prohibited

under the rule. 2495 A few commenters argued that the proposal would prohibit securities lending transactions and argued that borrower default indemnifications by a banking entity in agency securities lending arrangements should not be prohibited under section 13(f). 2496 Some commenters argued that a banking entity should be allowed to accept the shares of a sponsored covered fund as collateral for a loan to any person or entity, in particular where the loan is not for the purpose of purchasing

interests in the covered fund. 2497

One commenter argued that no exceptions should be granted to the
definition of covered transaction, and financing of covered funds would relate to greater fund risk. 2498 In addition, that commenter contended that the Agencies should prohibit a sale of securities by a banking entity to a covered fund even though these transactions are not within

the definition of covered transaction for purposes of section 23A of the FR

Act. 2499

The final rule continues to apply the

same definition of covered transaction as the proposal. Section 13(f) refers to a
covered transaction, as defined in section 23A of the FR Act. Section 13(f) of the BHC Act does not incorporate or reference the exemptions contained in

section 23A of the FR Act or the Board’s Regulation W. Indeed, the exemptions

for these transactions are not included

in the definition of covered transactions in section 23A; the exemptions are

instead in a different subsection of section 23A and provide an exemption from only some (but not all) of the provisions of section 23A governing

covered transactions. 2500 Therefore, the final rule does not incorporate the exemptions in section 23A.

Similarly, the final rule incorporates the statutory restriction as written, which provides that a banking entity that serves in certain specified roles may not enter into a transaction with a

covered fund that would be a covered

transaction as defined in section 23A of the FR Act as if the banking entity were

a member bank and the covered fund

were an affiliate thereof. There are

certain occasions when the restrictions of section 23A apply to transactions that involve a third party other than an affiliate of a member bank. For example, section 23A would apply to an extension of credit by a member bank to

a customer where the extension of credit is secured by shares of an affiliate. The Agencies believe that these transactions between a banking entity and a third party that is not a covered fund are not covered by the terms of section 13(f), which (as discussed above) make specific reference to transactions by the banking entity with the covered fund. A contrary reading would prohibit securities margin lending, which Congress has specifically addressed (and permitted) in other statutes. There is no indication in the legislative history that Congress intended section 13(f) to prohibit margin lending that occurs in accordance with other specific statutes. Thus, section 13(f) does not prohibit a banking entity from extending credit to a customer secured by shares of a covered fund (as well as, perhaps, other securities) held in a margin account. However, the Agencies expect banking

entities not to structure transactions with third parties in an attempt to evade

the restrictions on transactions with covered funds, and the Agencies will use their supervisory authority to

monitor and restrict transactions that appear to be evasions of section 13(f).

c. Certain Transactions and Relationships Permitted

While section 13(f)(1) of the BHC Act generally prohibits a banking entity from entering into a transaction with a

related covered fund that would be a

covered transaction as defined under section 23A of the FR Act, other specific portions of the statute permit a banking entity to engage in certain transactions or relationships with such funds.

1. Permitted Investments and Ownerships Interests

The proposed rule permitted a banking entity to acquire or retain an ownership interest in a covered fund in accordance with the requirements of

section 13. 2501 This was consistent with the text of section 13(f), which by its terms is triggered by the presence of certain ownership interests. This view also resolved an apparent conflict between the text of section 13(f) and the reference in section 13(f) prohibiting

covered transactions under section 23A of the FR Act, which includes acquiring or retaining an interest in securities issued by an affiliate.

Several commenters supported this aspect of the proposal. 2502 There is no evidence that Congress intended section 13(f)(1) of the BHC Act to override the other provisions of section 13 with regard to the acquisition or retention of ownership interests specifically permitted by the section. Moreover, a contrary reading would make these more specific sections that permit covered transactions between a banking entity and a covered fund mere surplusage. Therefore, the final rule adopts this provision as proposed. 2503

2. Prime Brokerage Transactions

Section 13(f) provides an exception from the prohibition on covered transactions with a covered fund for any prime brokerage transaction with a

covered fund in which a covered fund managed, sponsored, or advised by a banking entity has taken an ownership interest (a ‘‘second-tier fund’’).
However, the statute does not define


### 6019 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2504 See proposed rule § 75.10(b)(4).

2505 See, e.g., Occupy; Public Citizen.

2506 See SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012).

2507 See RMA.

2508 See RMA. 2509 See Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients).

2510 See final rule § 75.10(d)(5). 2511 See RMA; Katten (on behalf of Int’l Clients);

EFAMA; see also Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.;

IMA; Union Asset.

2512 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

2513 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f)(3). prime brokerage transaction. The proposed rule defined prime brokerage transaction to include providing one or more products or services, such as custody, clearance, securities borrowing or lending services, trade execution, or financing, data, operational, and portfolio management support. 2504

A few commenters argued that the proposed definition of prime brokerage transaction was overly broad and should not permit securities lending or borrowing services. These commenters argued that securities lending and borrowing (and certain other services) could increase leverage by covered funds and the risk that a banking entity

would bailout these funds. 2505

Other commenters argued that the proposed definition of prime brokerage transaction was confusing because it included transactions (such as data or portfolio management support) that

were not ‘‘covered transactions’’ under

section 23A of the FR Act and thus not prohibited as an initial matter by section 13(f). These commenters argued that including otherwise permissible

transactions within the definition of prime brokerage transaction created uncertainty about the permissibility of

other transactions or services that are not expressly covered transactions

under section 23A of the FR Act and thus not prohibited under section 13(f). One commenter proposed defining prime brokerage transaction as any ‘‘covered transaction’’ entered into by a banking entity with a covered fund ‘‘for purposes of custody, clearance, securities borrowing or lending services,
trade execution and settlement, financing and related hedging,
intermediation, or a similar purpose.’’ 2506

A few commenters supported expanding the definition of prime brokerage transaction to include any

service or transaction ‘‘related to’’ a specific list of permissible transactions. For instance, one commenter argued that acting as agent in providing

contractual income and settlement services and intraday and overnight overdraft protection should expressly be included within the definition of prime brokerage transaction. 2507 This commenter also urged that borrower

default indemnification should be included as a prime brokerage

transaction to the extent it would be a covered transaction that is prohibited by section 13(f). 2508 Another commenter recommended that the definition of prime brokerage transaction expressly
include transactions in commodities, futures and foreign exchange, as well as
securities, and transactions effected through OTC derivatives, including,
without limitation, contracts fordifferences, various swaps and securitybased swaps, foreign exchange swaps and forwards and ‘‘FX prime brokerage’’. 2509

Based on review of the comments, the definition of prime brokerage

transaction has been modified in several ways. For purposes of the final rule, prime brokerage transaction is defined to mean any transaction that would be
a covered transaction, as defined in section 23A(b)(7) of the FR Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7)), that is provided in connection with custody, clearance and settlement, securities borrowing or lending services, trade execution, financing, or data, operational, and administrative support. The definition of prime brokerage transaction under the final rule generally recognizes the same relationships that were considered when defining prime brokerage transaction under the proposal, 2510

without certain of the modifications suggested by some commenters that are discussed above. The Agencies carefully

considered comments received on the definition of prime brokerage
transaction. As noted above, certain commenters requested that various types of transactions be included in or

omitted from the definition. The Agencies believe it appropriate to include within the definition of prime brokerage transaction those transactions that the Agencies believe generally constitute the typical type of prime brokerage transactions provided in the market. Including this list of relationships provides clarity and certainty for transactions that are commonly considered to be prime brokerage transactions.

The final rule incorporates within the definition of prime brokerage

transaction a reference to covered transactions under section 23A(b)(7) of the FR Act. This change aligns the final rules with section 13(f) of the BHC Act and is designed to eliminate confusion and provide certainty regarding both the breath of the prohibition on covered transactions in section 13(f) and the scope of the exception for prime brokerage transactions. Thus, a transaction or relationship that is not a covered transaction under section 13(f) of the BHC Act is not prohibited in the first instance (unless prohibited elsewhere in section 13). Within the category of transactions prohibited by section 13(f), transactions within the definition of prime brokerage transaction are permitted.

Some commenters argued that the Agencies should provide an exemption for prime brokerage transactions with a broader array of funds than the proposal permitted. For instance, some commenters argued that the Agencies should permit a banking entity to enter into a prime brokerage transaction with any covered fund or fund structure that the banking entity organizes and offers or for which it directly serves as investment manager, investment adviser, or sponsor, and should not limit the exception for prime brokerage transactions to only a second-tier

covered fund. 2511 Conversely, a few commenters argued that the prime brokerage exemption should only permit a banking entity to provide these services to a third-party fund in order to ensure that the provision of prime brokerage services does not give rise to

the same risks that section 13 was designed more generally to limit. 2512

The Agencies note that the statute by its terms does not restrict prime brokerage transactions generally. As noted above, section 13(f)(3)(A) of the BHC Act provides that a banking entity may enter into any prime brokerage

transaction with a second-tier fund. The statute by its terms permits a banking entity with a relationship to a covered fund described in section 13(f) to engage in prime brokerage transactions (that arecovered transactions) only with secondtier funds and does not extend to covered funds more generally. Neither

the statute nor the final rule limit covered transactions between a banking entity and a covered fund for which the banking entity does not serve as investment manager, investment adviser, or sponsor (as defined in section 13 of the BHC Act) or have an

interest in reliance on section 13(d)(1)(G) of the BHC Act. Under the statute, the exemption for prime brokerage transactions is available only so long as certain enumerated

conditions are satisfied. 2513 The conditions are that (i) the chief executive officer (or equivalent officer) of the banking entity certifies in writing annually that the banking entity does not, directly or indirectly, guarantee,
assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the


### 6020 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2514 See proposed rule § 75.16(a)(2)(ii); IIB/EBF;
Credit Suisse (Williams).

2515 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(f)(3)(A)(ii).

2516 12 U.S.C. 371c–1.

2517 See proposed rule § 75.16(b).

2518 12 U.S.C. 371c–1(a); 12 CFR 223.51. 2519 See final rule § 75.14(b). As discussed above, § 75.11(b) of the final rule provides that for purposes of securitizations, organizing and offering includes acting as the securitizer. A banking entity

that continues to own interests in a securitization in reliance on this exemption must comply, among other things, with the requirements of § 75.14. Accordingly, § 75.14(b) of the final rule has been modified to require that a banking entity that continues to hold an ownership interest in accordance with § 75.11(b) is subject to section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act, as if such banking entity

were a member bank and the covered fund were an

affiliate. 2520 See EBF; Ass’n. of German Banks.

2521 For Commission registrants that are swap dealers and to which this rule applies, it is noted that the compliance requirements of subpart D are included in the Commission’s regulations that are to be addressed as part of the chief compliance officer duties and requirements under CFTC regulation 3.3. covered fund or of any covered fund in
which such covered fund invests, and (ii) the Board has not determined that

such transaction is inconsistent with the safe and sound operation and condition of the banking entity. The proposed rule incorporated each of these provisions. The final rule provides that this certification be made to the appropriate Federal supervisor for the banking entity.

A few commenters argued that the proposal did not adequately address how the CEO attestation requirement in section 13(f) would apply to foreign banking organizations. They argued that a senior officer with authority for the U.S. operations of the foreign bank should be permitted to make the required attestation. 2514

The statute allows the attestation for purposes of the prime brokerage exception in section 13(f) of the BHC

Act to be from the chief executive officer or ‘‘equivalent officer.’’ 2515 In the case of the U.S. operations of foreign banking entities, the senior officer of the foreign banking entity’s U.S. operations

or the chief executive officer of the U.S. banking entity may provide the required

attestation.

d. Restrictions on Transactions With Any Permitted Covered Fund

Sections 13(f)(2) and 13(f)(3)(B) of the BHC Act apply section 23B of the FR

Act 2516 to certain transactions and investments between a banking entity and a covered fund as if such banking entity were a member bank and such

covered fund were an affiliate

thereof. 2517 Section 23B provides that

transactions between a member bank

and an affiliate must be on terms and under circumstances, including credit standards, that are substantially the

same or at least as favorable to the banking entity as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with or involving unaffiliated companies or, in the absence of comparable transactions,
on terms and under circumstances, including credit standards, that in good
faith would be offered to, or would apply to, non-affiliated companies. 2518

Mirroring the statute, the proposal applied this requirement to transactions between a banking entity that serves as investment manager, investment adviser, or sponsor to a covered fund and that fund and any other fund controlled by that fund. It also applied this condition to a permissible prime brokerage transaction in which a banking entity may engage under the proposal.

Commenters generally did not raise any issues regarding the proposal’s implementation of section 13(f)(2) and 13(f)(3)(B). The final rule generally implements these requirements in the same manner as the proposal. 2519

6. Section 75.15: Other Limitations on

Permitted Covered Fund Activities

Like § 75.8, § 75.17 of the proposed rule implemented section 13(d)(2) of the BHC Act, which places certain limitations on the permitted covered

fund activities and investments in which a banking entity may engage.
Consistent with the statute and § 75.8 of the proposed rule, § 75.17 provided that
no transaction, class of transactions, or activity was permissible under §§ 75.11 through 75.14 and § 75.16 of the proposed rule if the transaction, class of transactions, or activity would: (i)

Involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the banking entity
and its clients, customers, or counterparties; (ii) result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading strategy; or (iii) pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or the financial stability

of the United States.

Section 75.17 of the proposed rule
defined ‘‘material conflict of interest,’’ ‘‘high-risk assets,’’ and ‘‘high-risk trading strategies’’ for these purposes in

a fashion identical to the definitions of the same terms for purposes of § 75.8 of the proposed rule related to proprietary trading. In the final rule, other than the permitted activities to which §§ 75.7 and 75.15 apply, §§ 75.7 and 75.15 are

also identical. Comments received on
the definitions in these sections, as well as the treatment of these concepts under
the final rule, are described in detail in

Part VI.A.9 above.

The Agencies also note that some concerns identified by commenters regarding the rule’s extraterritorial application are addressed by

modifications in the final rule to the definition of a covered fund under § 75.10. As noted above, commenters requested that the Agencies clarify that the limitations in §§ 75.8 or 75.17 of the proposed rule apply only to a foreign banking entity’s U.S. activities and

affiliates. 2520 As discussed in greater
detail above in Part VI.B.1, the final rule has been modified to more narrowly focus the scope of the definition of covered fund as it applies to foreign

funds. Pursuant to the definition of a covered fund in § 75.10(b)(1), a foreign fund may be a covered fund with respect to the U.S. banking entity that sponsors the fund, but not be a covered fund with respect to a foreign bank that invests in the fund solely outside the United States. Foreign public funds, as defined in § 75.10(c)(1) of the final rule,

are also excluded from the definition of a covered fund. By excluding foreign public funds from the definition of covered fund and by narrowing the scope of the definition of a covered fund with respect to foreign funds, the Agencies have addressed some commenters’ concerns regarding the burdens imposed by proposed rule

§ 75.17.

C. Subpart D and Appendices A and B— Compliance Program, Reporting, and

Violations

Subpart D of the proposed rule implemented section 13(e)(1) of the BHC Act and required certain banking entities to develop and provide for the continued administration of a program reasonably designed to ensure and monitor compliance with the prohibitions and restrictions on

activities and investments set forth in section 13 and the proposed rule. 2521

As explained in detail below, in response to comments on the compliance program requirements and Appendix C (Minimum Standards for Programmatic Compliance) and to

conform to modifications to other sections of the proposed rule, the Agencies are adopting a variety of modifications to Subpart D of the proposed rule, which requires certain banking entities to develop and provide

for the continued administration of a program reasonably designed to ensure and monitor compliance with the prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading activities and


### 6021 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2522 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also Barclays; BlackRock; Chamber (Dec. 2011); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation;
Credit Suisse (Williams); FIA; Goldman (Covered
Funds); Investure; NYSE Euronext; RBC; STANY;
Wedbush; see also Northern Trust; Chamber (Feb.
2012).

2523 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012). 2524 See ABA (Abernathy); IIB/EBF; ICFR. While the Agencies recognize these issues, the Agencies

believe the final rule’s modifications to the proposal—for example, providing for simplified programs for smaller, less active banking entities and increasing the asset threshold that triggers enhanced compliance requirements—helps balance enforceability and consistency concerns with implementing a program that helps to ensure compliance consistent with section 13(e)(1) of the

BHC Act. See 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(1).

2525 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012); RBC; STANY; see also Barclays.

2526 See AFR (Nov. 2012); Occupy; Sens. Merkley
& Levin (Feb. 2012)

2527 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also M&T Bank;
Credit Suisse (Seidel); State Street (Feb. 2012); see also NYSE Euronext; Stephen Roach.

2528 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also ABA (Abernathy);

Paul Volcker.

2529 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012); see also SIFMA et

al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 2530 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

2531 See Occupy.

2532 See, e.g., Credit Suisse (Williams); GE (Feb.
2012); see also NAIB et al.; Chamber (Feb. 2012).

2533 See GE (Feb. 2012). Under the BHC Act, an entity would generally be considered an affiliate of a banking entity, and therefore a banking entity itself, if it controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with an insured depository institution. Pursuant to the BHC Act, a company controls another company if, for instance, the company directly or indirectly or acting through one or more other persons owns, controls, or has power to vote 25 per cent or more of any class of voting securities of the company. See 12 U.S.C. 1841(a)(2). The compliance program requirement applies to all banking entities in order to ensure their compliance with the final rule.

2534 See Part VI.B.4.c. covered fund activities and investments

set forth in section 13 of the BHC Act
and the final rule. As described above, this compliance program requirement forms a key part of the multi-faceted approach to implementing section 13 of
the BHC Act, and is intended to ensure that banking entities establish, maintain and enforce compliance procedures and controls to prevent violation or evasion of the prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading activities and

covered fund activities and investments.

The proposal adopted a tiered approach to implementing the compliance program mandate, requiring a banking entity engaged in proprietary trading activities or covered fund

activities and investments to establish a compliance program that contained specific elements and, if the banking entity’s activities were significant, meet

a number of more detailed minimum standards. If a banking entity did not engage in proprietary trading activities

and covered fund activities and investments, it was required to ensure that its existing compliance policies and procedures included measures that were designed to prevent the banking entity from becoming engaged in such activities and making such investments and to develop and provide for the required program under § 75.20(a) of the proposed rule prior to engaging in such activities or making such investments, but was not otherwise required to meet the requirements of subpart D of the proposed rule.

1. Section 75.20: Compliance Program

Mandate

a. Program Requirement

A number of commenters argued that the compliance program requirements of the proposal were overly specific, too prescriptive and complex to be workable, and not justified by the costs and benefits of having a compliance

program. 2522 For instance, one commenter expressed concern that the complexity of the proposed compliance regime would undermine compliance efforts because the requirements were overlapping, imprecise, and did not provide sufficient clarity to traders or banking entities as to what types or

levels of activities would be viewed as permissible trading. 2523 Some commenters argued that the compliance program would be challenging to enforce or administer with any consistency across different banking entities and jurisdictions. 2524 A few commenters objected to any attempt to identify every possible instance of prohibited proprietary trading in otherwise permitted activity. 2525 By contrast, some commenters supported the proposed compliance program as

effective and consistent with the statute but also suggested a number of ways that the proposal’s compliance program could be improved. 2526

A few commenters argued that the proposed compliance program shouldbe replaced with a more principlesbased framework that provides banking entities the discretion and flexibility to customize compliance programs tailored

to the structure and activities of their organizations. 2527 A few commenters argued that building on compliance regimes that already exist at banking entities, including risk limits, risk management systems, board-level governance protocols, and the level at which compliance is monitored, would reduce the costs and complexity of the proposal while also enabling a robust compliance mechanism for section

13. 2528

Another commenter suggested that the focus of the compliance program be on the key goal of reducing risk at banking entities by requiring each banking entity to establish a riskarchitecture that prescribes a customerfocused business model for market making-related activities including a comprehensive set of risk limits that focuses on servicing customers and ensuring safety and soundness. 2529 This commenter suggested the proposal’s compliance requirements be replaced by a simpler compliance framework that

could be harmonized with the broader systemic capital and risk management framework under the Basel accord. This commenter argued such a framework would increase transparency as well as reduce overall complexity and costs of regulation, and that information relevant to the compliance infrastructure, including customer orientation policies and procedures, target customer and product lists, trade
histories, and risk limit calibration methodology and analyses, should all be

made available to examiners. 2530 Another commenter urged that the compliance program could be generally improved by having a greater focus on the compensation incentives within the compliance program of banking

entities. 2531

A number of other commenters requested certain types of banking entities be specifically excluded from having to implement the requirements of the compliance program. For example, some commenters urged that the details required in proposed Appendix C apply only to those banking

entities and business lines within a banking group that have ‘‘significant’’ covered funds or trading activities and not apply to an affiliate of a banking entity that does not engage in the types of activities section 13 is designed to address (e.g., an industrial affiliate that manufactures machinery). 2532 One commenter argued that the final rule should not impose a compliance program requirement on a banking entity that owns 50 percent or less of another banking entity in order to ensure the compliance program did not discourage joint ventures or other arrangements where a banking entity

does not have actual control over an

affiliate. 2533 As discussed in Part
VI.B.4.c. above, 2534 other commenters argued that the reporting and recordkeeping and compliance requirements of the rule should not apply to permitted insurance company

investment activities because insurance companies are already subject to comprehensive regulation of the kinds


### 6022 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2535 See, e.g., ACLI (Jan. 2012); Country Fin. et al.;

NAMIC.

2536 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). As noted above, the compliance program requirement applies to all banking entities, including insurance companies that are considered banking entities, in order to ensure their compliance with the final rule.

2537 See ASF (Feb. 2012); AFME et al.; SIFMA (Securitization) (Feb. 2012); Commercial Real Estate

Fin. Council.

2538 See Occupy.

2539 See, e.g., Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; IIB/EBF;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; Norinchukin; Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); BAROC; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; HSBC; IIAC; IMA; Katten
(on behalf of Int’l Clients); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; RBC; Sumitomo Trust; see also AFME et al.; British Bankers’ Ass’n.; EBF; Commissioner Barnier; French Banking Fed’n.; UBS; Union Asset.

2540 See, e.g., AFME et al.; IIB/EBF; BaFin/
Deutsche Bundesbank; Credit Suisse (Williams);

HSBC.

2541 See Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012);

see also RBC. 2542 See IIB/EBF.

2543 See IIB/EBF.

2544 See Occupy.

2545 See Alfred Brock.

2546 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); PNC et al.;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); AFME
et al.; BoA; Barclays; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse
(Williams); T. Rowe Price; see also Citigroup (Feb.
2012); Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; IIB/EBF; Am. Express;
Arnold & Porter; BDA (Mar. 2012).

2547 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); PNC et al.;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); BoA; Barclays; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012);

SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); Credit Suisse (Seidel); see also BDA (Mar. 2012).

2548 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); AFME et al.; GE; Credit Suisse (Williams); Goldman (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; RBC; SVB.

2549 See Morgan Stanley. 2550 The Agencies believe these modifications, such as increasing the threshold that triggers enhanced compliance standards and allowing smaller banking entities to customize their compliance programs, help address concerns that the proposed requirement was too complex and

unworkable. See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2551 Some commenters argued that the requirement should build on banking entities’ existing compliance regimes. See Citigroup (Feb.
2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also ABA (Abernathy); Paul Volcker.

2552 See final rule § 75.20(f)(2).

2553 See final rule § 75.20(f)(1). In response to a
few commenters, the final rule, unlike § 75.20(d) of the proposed rule, no longer requires a banking entity include measures that are designed to prevent such entity from becoming engaged in covered trading activities or covered fund

investments and activities.

2554 Under the proposal, each banking entity was required to have a compliance program that
addressed the elements described in the rule, unless the banking entity did not engage in prohibited activities or investments, in which case it need only have existing policies and procedures requiring the banking entity to develop a compliance program and amounts of investments they can make under State or foreign insurance laws and regulations. 2535 However, another commenter suggested that insurance company affiliates of banking entities expressly be made subject to data collection and reporting requirements to prevent possible

evasion of the restrictions of section 13 and the final rule using their insurance

affiliates. 2536

A few commenters argued that requiring securitization vehicles to

establish even the minimal requirements set forth in § 75.20(d) would impose unnecessary costs and

burdens on these entities. 2537 By contrast, another commenter argued that, because of the perceived risks of
these entities, securitization vehicles related to a banking entity should be required to comply fully with the proposed rule regardless of how such compliance procedures are funded by the banking entity. 2538

Several commenters urged that foreign activities of foreign banking entities, which are already subject to their own prudential regulation under applicable home country regulation, be excluded from the compliance program and argued that to do otherwise would be an extraterritorial expansion of U.S.

law. 2539 These commenters contended that the compliance program requirements for foreign banking entities should, in any event, be narrowly circumscribed. 2540 One commenter proposed that the foreign activity of foreign banking entities be excluded from compliance, reporting and other obligations where the risk of the activity is outside of the United States because those risks do not pose a threat to U.S. taxpayers. 2541 Another commenter argued that only U.S. affiliates of foreign banking entities engaged in proprietary trading and covered fund activities as principal in the United States should be required to institute the compliance and reporting systems required in the proposal, and that all foreign affiliates only be required to have policies and procedures designed to prevent the banking entity from engaging in relevant trading and covered fund activities in

the United States. 2542 This commenter also expressed concern that the reporting and recordkeeping requirements could be interpreted to apply to an entire trading unit, even trading activities with no U.S. nexus, if any portion of a trading unit’s activities, even a single trade, would be required to rely on the market-making, hedging, underwriting or U.S. government security exemptions. 2543

Commenters also offered thoughts on the timeframe within which banking entities must establish a compliance program. One commenter urged that reporting begin immediately, 2544 while

another commenter contended that the effective date provided banking entities with sufficient time to implement the proposal’s compliance program. 2545 Other commenters, however, argued that banking entities should have additional time to establish compliance

programs. 2546 Some commenters argued banking entities should have one-year from the date of publication of the final rule to implement their compliance

programs, 2547 while others urged that banking entities have a two-year period to build compliance systems. 2548 One commenter suggested the Board amend its conformance rule to provide U.S. banking entities with an additional year for implementing the compliance requirements with respect to their foreign operations. 2549 After considering comments on the proposal, the final rule retains the compliance program requirement with a variety of modifications. In particular, the modifications are designed to make the compliance program requirements
clearer and more tailored to the size, complexity and type of activity conducted by each banking entity. 2550 The Agencies also believe that the revisions build on the limits, procedures and elements of risk management programs that many banking entities have already developed to monitor and control the risk of existing trading and

investment activities. 2551

The final rule builds on the proposed rule’s tiered approach by adjusting asset thresholds and by adding a new provision allowing a banking entity

with modest covered activities to customize its compliance program. Specifically, the final rule allows banking entities with total assets below $10 billion to fold compliance measures into their existing compliance program in a manner that addresses the types and amounts of activities the entity

conducts. 2552 The proposal did not contain such a provision. Similar to the proposal, the final rule requires that a banking entity that conducts no activity subject to section 13 of the BHC Act is not required to develop any compliance program until it begins conducting activities subject to section 13. 2553 The final rule further modifies the proposal by requiring that a banking entity with total assets greater than $10 billion but less than $50 billion is generally required to establish a compliance program suited to its activities which

includes the six elements described in

the final rule. 2554 Additionally, the final


### 6023 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

before engaging in such activities. Further, a banking entity that has trading assets and liabilities equal to or greater than $1 billion, or equal to 10% or more of total assets, would have been subject to additional standards under the proposed rule. See proposed rule § 75.20(a), (c), (d).

2555 Because the Agencies have determined not to retain proposed Appendix B in the final rule, proposed Appendix C is now Appendix B under the

final rule.

2556 See, e.g., Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; IIB/EBF;
Australian Bankers Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Banco de

Me

 ́xico; Norinchukin; Cadwalader (on behalf of Thai Banks); Cadwalader (on behalf of Singapore Banks); Allen & Overy (on behalf of Canadian Banks); BAROC; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Williams); EFAMA; Hong Kong Inv. Funds Ass’n.; HSBC; IIAC; IMA; Katten
(on behalf of Int’l Clients); Ass’n. of Banks in Malaysia; RBC; Sumitomo Trust; see also AFME et al.; British Bankers’ Ass’n.; EBF; Commissioner Barnier; French Banking Fed’n.; UBS; Union Asset. 2557 As discussed in Part II., the Board is extending the conformance period by one year. Extension of the conformance period will, among other things, provide banking entities with additional time to establish the required compliance program. The Agencies believe the extension of the conformance period, as well as the phased-in approach to implementing the enhanced compliance program in Appendix B, address certain commenters’ requests for additional time to establish a compliance program. See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); PNC et al.; Australian Bankers
Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); AFME et al.; BoA; Barclays; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); SIFMA et al. (Mar. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation; Credit Suisse (Williams); T.

Rowe Price; see also Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Socie  ́te

 ́

Ge

 ́ne

 ́rale; IIB/EBF; Am. Express; Arnold & Porter; BDA (Mar. 2012); Morgan Stanley.

2558 Commenters provided a wide range of feedback regarding the timeframe for establishing a compliance program, from requesting that reporting begin immediately to requesting two years from the date of publication of the final rule. See, e.g., Occupy; Alfred Brock; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading);

PNC et al.; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). The Agencies believe that the final rule’s approach appropriately balances the desire for effective regulation with requests for additional time to establish a compliance program. 2559 This requirement is substantially the same as the proposed written policies and procedures requirement. See proposed rule § 75.20(b)(1).

2560 This requirement is substantially the same as the proposed internal controls requirement. See proposed rule § 75.20(b)(2).

2561 The final rule modifies the proposed management framework requirement by adding that the management framework element must include appropriate management review of trading limits, strategies, hedging activities, incentive compensation, and other matters. See final rule
§ 75.20(b)(3). See also proposed rule § 75.20(b)(3). One commenter suggested that the compliance program requirement have a greater focus on compensation incentives. See Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

2562 The final rule modifies the proposed independent testing requirement by specifying that such testing must be done ‘‘periodically.’’ See final
rule § 75.20(b)(4). See also proposed rule § 75.20(b)(4). The meaning of ‘‘independent testing’’

is discussed in more detail below in Part VI.C.2.e.

The reference to ‘‘audit’’ does not mean that the independent testing must be performed by a designated auditor, whether internal or external. rule requires that the largest and most active banking entities, with total assets above $50 billion, or that are subject to the quantitative measurements requirement due to the size of their trading assets and liabilities, adopt an enhanced compliance program that

addresses the six elements described in the rule plus a number of more detailed requirements described in Appendix

B. 2555

In response to commenters’ concerns regarding compliance program burdens

in connection with covered fund
activities and investments, the final rule is further modified with respect to

thresholds for covered fund activities
and investments. As noted above, this

and the other modifications are designed to make the compliance program requirement clearer and more tailored to the size, complexity and type of activity conducted by each banking entity. The final rule, unlike the proposal, does not require a banking entity to adopt the enhanced compliance program if the banking entity, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, invests in the aggregate
more than $1 billion in covered funds or if they sponsor or advise covered funds, the average total assets of which are equal to or greater than $1 billion. Banking entities would look to the total
asset thresholds discussed above,

instead of the amount of covered fund
investments and activities, in determining whether they would be subject to the enhanced compliance program requirements. The Agencies have also modified the compliance program reporting obligations of foreign banking entities with respect to their covered trading and covered fund activities that are conducted pursuant to the exemptions contained in §§ 75.6(e) and 75.13(b). 2556

The final rule also responds to commenters’ concerns regarding the timeframe within which a banking entity must establish and implement the compliance program required for that entity under § 75.20. Under the final rule, each banking entity must establish the compliance program required for that entity under § 75.20 as soon as practicable and in no case later than the end of the conformance period. 2557 The Agencies expect that during this period a banking entity will develop and implement the compliance program requirements of the final rule as part of its good-faith efforts to fully conform its

activities and investments to the requirements of section 13 and the final rule. As explained below in the

discussion of the enhanced minimum standards for compliance programs under Appendix B, the final rule also requires larger and more active banking entities to report certain data regarding their trading activities. These requirements have been phased-in to provide banking entities an opportunity to develop the necessary systems to capture and report the relevant data. 2558 In addition, as explained below, the Agencies will consider, after a period to gain experience with the data, revisiting

these data collections to determine their usefulness in monitoring the risk and types of activities conducted by banking

entities.

b. Compliance Program Elements

Section 75.20 of the final rule specifies six elements that each compliance program required under that

section must at a minimum contain. With some minor modifications, these

are the same six elements that were included in the proposed rule. The changes reflect modifications made in requirements and limits in the other provisions of the rule and, in particular, acknowledge the importance of trading and hedging limits, appropriate setting, monitoring and management review of trading and hedging limits, strategies,
and activities and investments, incentive compensation and other

matters.

The six elements specified in § 75.20(b) are:

• Written policies and procedures reasonably designed to document, describe, monitor and limit trading

activities and covered fund activities and investments conducted by the banking entity to ensure that all

activities and investments that are subject to section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule comply with section 13 of the
BHC Act and the rule; 2559

• A system of internal controls reasonably designed to monitor compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule and to prevent the

occurrence of activities or investments that are prohibited by section 13 of the
BHC Act and the rule; 2560

• A management framework that clearly delineates responsibility and accountability for compliance with

section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule and includes appropriate management review of trading limits, strategies, hedging activities, investments, incentive compensation and other matters identified in the rule or by management as requiring attention; 2561

• Independent testing and audit of the effectiveness of the compliance program conducted periodically by qualified personnel of the banking entity or by a qualified outside

party; 2562

• Training for trading personnel and managers, as well as other appropriate personnel, to effectively implement and


### 6024 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2563 The final rule retains the proposed training requirement. See final rule § 75.20(b)(5). See also proposed rule § 75.20(b)(5).

2564 One of these commenters suggested the Agencies adopt a simpler compliance framework

that could be harmonized with the Basel accord.

See Citigroup (Feb. 2012). The Agencies believe the final framework described above helps address concerns about streamlining the compliance program requirement while meeting the statutory requirement to issue regulations ‘‘in order to insure compliance’’ with section 13. 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(1).

2565 One commenter stated that the proposed rule did not provide sufficient clarity as to what types or levels of activities would be permissible. See Citigroup (Feb. 2012). 2566 Some commenters requested a more principles-based framework that allows banking entities to customize compliance programs to the structure and activities of their organizations. See

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also M&T Bank; Credit
Suisse (Seidel); State Street (Feb. 2012); NYSE Euronext; Stephen Roach.

2567 See final rule § 75.20(e)(1). As discussed under § 75.10 regarding entities excluded from the definition of covered fund, the Agencies recognize

that the final rule’s definition of covered fund does not include certain pooled investment vehicles. The Agencies expect that the types of pooled investment vehicles sponsored by the financial services industry will continue to evolve, including in response to the final rule, and the Agencies will be monitoring this evolution to determine whether excluding these and other types of entities remains appropriate. The Agencies will also monitor use of the exclusions for attempts to evade the requirements of section 13 and intend to use their authority where appropriate to prevent evasions of the rule. The Agencies are adopting this additional documentation requirement to facilitate such
monitoring activities.

2568 See final rule § 75.20(e)(2). The Agencies are adopting this additional documentation requirement for the same reasons discussed above with respect to § 75.20(e)(1). 2569 See final rule § 75.20(e)(3). The rationale for this additional documentation requirement is provided under the discussion regarding registered investment companies and business development companies in § 75.10.

2570 See final rule § 75.20(e)(4). The rationale for this additional documentation requirement is provided under the discussion regarding foreign public funds in § 75.10. For purposes of this requirement, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is located in the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary. See final rule
§ 75.20(e)(5). enforce the compliance program; 2563

and

• Making and keeping records sufficient to demonstrate compliance

with section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule, which a banking entity must promptly provide to the relevant supervisory Agency upon request and retain for a period of no less than 5

years.

Under the final rule, these six elements must be part of the compliance program of each banking entity with total consolidated assets greater than $10 billion that engages in activities covered by section 13 of the BHC Act.

As discussed above, the Agencies have moved particular elements with respect to the required compliance program for the exemptions contained in § 75.4(a), § 75.4(b), and § 75.5 into the specific requirements of these exemptions. The Agencies believe this structure more effectively conveys that satisfying the requirements of these exemptions involves specific compliance measures or, with respect to underwriting and market making, a
customer-focused business model, as requested by some commenters. 2564

In addition to the generally required compliance program elements specified in § 75.20(b), a banking entity relying on any of these exemptions should employ the specific compliance tools specified

within the relevant section of this rule to facilitate compliance with the applicable exemption and should appropriately tailor the required compliance program elements to the individual trading activities and strategies of each trading desk on an ongoing basis. By specifying particular compliance program-related requirements in the exemptions, the Agencies have sought to provide additional guidance and clarity as to how a compliance program should be
structured, 2565 while at the same time providing the banking entity with

sufficient discretion to consider the type, size, scope and complexity of its

activities and business structure in designing a compliance program to meet the requirements set forth in § 75.20(b). 2566

For a banking entity with more than
$10 billion in total consolidated assets, the compliance program requires additional documentation with respect to funds. For example, the banking entity is required to maintain records

that include documentation of exclusions or exemptions other than sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 relied on by each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all subsidiaries and affiliate) in determining that such fund is not a

covered fund. 2567 The banking entity is also required to maintain, with respect to each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all subsidiaries and affiliates) for which the banking entity

relies on one or more of the exclusions provided by §§ 75.10(c)(1), 75.10(c)(5), 75.10(c)(8), 75.10(c)(9), or 75.10(c)(10) of subpart C, documentation supporting the banking entity’s determination that the fund is not a covered fund pursuant

to one or more of those exclusions. 2568 If the banking entity operates a seeding vehicle described in §§ 75.10(c)(12)(i) or 75.10(c)(12)(iii) of subpart C that will become a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company, the compliance program must also include a written plan documenting the banking entity’s determination that the seeding vehicle will become a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company; the period of time during which the vehicle will operate as a seeding vehicle; and the banking entity’s plan to market the vehicle to third-party investors and convert it into a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company within the time period specified in § 75.12(a)(2)(i)(B) of subpart C. 2569 Furthermore, for any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, if the aggregate amount of ownership interest in foreign public funds as described in § 75.10(c)(1) of subpart C owned by such banking entity (including ownership interests owned by any affiliate that is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State)
exceeds $50 million at the end of two or more consecutive calendar quarters, beginning with the next succeeding calendar quarter, such banking entity must include in its compliance program

documentation the value of the ownership interests owned by the banking entity (and such affiliates) in each foreign public fund and each jurisdiction in which any such foreign public fund is organized. Such

calculation must be done at the end of each calendar quarter and must continue until the banking entity’s aggregate amount of ownership interests in foreign public funds is below $50

million for two consecutive calendar

quarters. 2570

c. Simplified Programs for Less Active Banking Entities

The proposed rule provided that the six elements of the compliance program required by § 75.20 would apply to all banking entities engaged in covered trading activities or covered fund

activities and investments and that the

minimum detailed standards of Appendix C would apply to only those banking entities above specified thresholds. The application of detailed

minimum standards was intended to reflect the heightened compliance risks of significant covered trading and


### 6025 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2571 See, e.g., ICBA; ABA (Keating); Conf. of State Bank Supervisors; NAIB; Ryan Kamphuis;

Wisconsin Bankers Ass’n.

2572 See, e.g., ICBA; ABA (Keating).

2573 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Conf. of State Bank Supervisors; Ryan Kamphuis; SVB.

2574 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2575 See ICBA. 2576 Some commenters asked the Agencies to consider the burden of the compliance program requirement on smaller institutions and recommended that small banks be given the benefit of the doubt regarding compliance. See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Conf. of State Bank Supervisors; Ryan Kamphuis; SVB. The Agencies decline to follow the approach suggested by another commenter to allow banking entities with assets of $10 billion or less be permitted to engage in certain limited activities without having to establish a compliance program. See ICBA. The Agencies believe that requiring a banking entity engaged in covered trading or covered fund activity to establish a compliance program is a fundamental part of the multi-faceted approach to implementing section 13 of the BHC Act, which requires the Agencies to implement rules ‘‘to insure compliance with this section.’’ 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(1). Further, the Agencies

believe that the final rule’s modification of the proposal to allow banking entities with total assets under $10 billion to customize their compliance programs helps ease the burden of this requirement

on smaller institutions. 2577 See, e.g., Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012);

PNC et al.

2578 See ABA (Keating); M&T Bank; PNC et al.

2579 See PNC et al.; M&T Bank; see also ABA (Abernathy). significant covered fund activities and

investments.

The proposed rule provided that a banking entity with no covered activities or investments could satisfy the requirements of § 75.20 if its existing compliance policies and procedures

were amended to include measures that were designed to prevent the banking entity from becoming engaged in such activities or making such investments and required the banking entity to develop and provide for the required compliance program prior to engaging in covered activities or making covered

investments.

Several commenters expressed concern over the requirement in § 75.20(d) of the proposed rule that a banking entity that did not engage in any covered trading activities or covered

fund activities or investments must ensure that its existing compliance policies and procedures include measures designed to prevent the banking entity from becoming engaged in such activities and making such

investments. 2571 In particular, some commenters expressed concern that the proposal would have a burdensome impact on community banks and force community banks to hire specialists to amend their policies and procedures to ensure compliance with section 13 and the final regulations. These commenters argued that a banking entity should not be required to amend its compliance policies and procedures and set up a monitoring program if the banking entity does not engage in prohibited

activities. 2572

A few commenters argued that the Agencies should more carefully consider the burden of the compliance program on smaller institutions that engage in a modest level of permissible trading or covered fund activity. 2573

One commenter recommended that smaller banks be given the benefit of the doubt regarding compliance. 2574 For instance, one commenter recommended that banking entities with consolidated assets of $10 billion or less be permitted to engage in a limited amount of interest rate swaps and certain other traditional banking activities without being required to establish a compliance

program. 2575

The Agencies have considered carefully the comments received and, as
noted above, have modified the rule in order to limit the implementation, operational or other burdens or expenses associated with the compliance requirements for a banking entity that engages in no covered

activities or investments. The final rule permits banking entities that have no covered activities or investments (other than covered transactions in obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or an agency of the United States and municipal securities) to satisfy the compliance program requirements by establishing the required compliance program prior to becoming engaged in such activities or making such

investments. This eliminates the burden on banking entities that do not engage

in covered activities or investments.

Similarly, § 75.20(f)(2) of the final rule provides that a banking entity with total
consolidated assets of $10 billion or less

as measured on December 31 of the previous two years that does engage in covered activities and investments may satisfy the requirements of § 75.20 by including in its existing compliance policies and procedures references to the requirements of section 13 and subpart D as appropriate given the activities, size, scope and complexity of the banking entity. 2576 This could include appropriate references to the limits on trading activities permitted in reliance upon any of the exemptions contained in § 75.4(a), § 75.4(b) or

§ 75.5.

d. Threshold for Application of

Enhanced Minimum Standards

Under the proposed rule, banking entities with significant covered trading

activities or covered fund activities and investments were required to establish an enhanced compliance program in accordance with Appendix C, which contained detailed compliance program requirements. The proposed rule required a banking entity to implement the enhanced compliance program under Appendix C if the banking entity engaged in covered activities and
investments and either: (i) Has, on a consolidated basis, trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of
which (on a worldwide consolidated basis), as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, is equal to or greater than $1 billion or equals 10 percent or more of its total
assets; or (ii) has, on a consolidated basis, aggregate investments in covered funds the average value of which (on a
worldwide consolidated basis), as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, is equal to or greater than $1 billion, or sponsors

and advises one or more covered funds
the total assets of which are, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equal to or greater than $1 billion.

In general, commenters argued that the activities and investments subject to section 13 are conducted by only a small number of the nation’s largest financial firms and that the compliance program requirements should be tailored to target these firms. 2577 Some commenters urged the Agencies to raise substantially the proposed $1 billion threshold for trading assets and liabilities in § 75.20(c)(2) of the proposal to $10 billion or higher due to the high costs of implementing the enhanced compliance program. A few commenters argued that even if the threshold were raised to $10 billion, an overwhelming percentage of trading assets and liabilities in the banking industry (approximately 98 percent) would still remain subject to heightened compliance requirements included in Appendix C. 2578 Some of these

commenters recommended the threshold for trading assets for compliance should be increased to no less than $10 billion to mitigate the costs and impact on regional banking organizations that do not engage proprietary trading subject to the prohibition of section 13. These commenters argued that the compliance requirements of § 75.20(a)–(b) are sufficient to ensure that regional banking organizations have appropriate compliance programs. 2579 One commenter suggested the threshold for the enhanced compliance requirement
be increased to $50 billion in combined


### 6026 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2580 See State Street (Feb. 2012).

2581 See ABA (Keating).

2582 See PNC et al.

2583 See PNC et al.

2584 See Northern Trust.

2585 See Occupy.

2586 See ABA (Keating); PNC et al. 2587 See PNC et al.

2588 See ASF (Feb. 2012).

2589 See PNC et al.; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds)
(Feb. 2012). 2590 See proposed rule § 75.20(c)(2)(iii); final rule
§ 75.20(c)(3).

2591 Issues related to the threshold for reporting quantitative measurements are discussed in detail
in Part VI.C.3., below. trading assets and liabilities. 2580 One commenter also argued that banking entities required to establish enhanced compliance programs should no longer be required to do so if they fall below

the threshold. 2581

Commenters also offered a number of suggestions for modifying the activity that would be considered in meeting the thresholds for determining which compliance program requirements apply to a banking entity. Several commenters argued that certain types of trading

assets or fund investments should not be included for purposes of determining

whether the relevant dollar threshold triggering the enhanced compliance was met, particularly those that are not prohibited activities or investments. For instance, some commenters urged that trading in U.S. government obligations

should not count toward the calculation of whether a banking organization meets the trading threshold triggering Appendix C. 2582 These commenters also argued that other positions or

transactions that do not involve financial instruments and that may constitute trading assets and liabilities,
such as loans, should be excluded from the thresholds because exempt activities should not determine the type of compliance program a banking entity must implement. 2583 One commenter urged that foreign exchange swaps and

forwards be excluded from the

definition of a ‘‘derivative’’ and not be subject to compliance requirements as a

result. 2584 Conversely, one commenter urged that all assets and liabilities defined as trading assets for purposes of the Market Risk Capital Rule should be
included in the $1 billion standard for becoming subject to any reporting and recordkeeping requirements under the

final rule. 2585

A few commenters argued that the $1 billion threshold for establishing an enhanced compliance program should

not include the amount of investments
in, or assets of, funds that are SBICs or
similar funds that contain, SBICs or other investments specified under section 13(d)(1)(E) of the BHC Act, such as investments in and funds that qualify for low-income housing tax credits, or New Markets Tax Credits or that qualify

for Federal historic tax credits or similar

state programs. 2586 These commenters argued that each of these types of funds is expressly permitted by the statute and that including these investments and

funds in the dollar thresholds that trigger the programmatic compliance requirements of Appendix C would provide a disincentive to banking entities investing in or sponsoring these
funds, a result inconsistent with permitting these types of investments. Similarly, one commenter urged that investments by a banking entity in, and assets held by, loan securitizations not

be included in these thresholds because

these activities and investments are expressly excluded from coverage under

the rule of construction contained in section 13(g)(2) of the BHC Act regarding the securitization of loans. 2587 Another commenter urged that this
threshold not include investments in, or assets of, any securitization vehicle that

would be considered a covered fund because many smaller and regional banking entities that were not intended to be subject to Appendix C likely
would exceed the $1 billion threshold if

these assets are included. 2588 A few commenters also argued that, during the conformance period, investments in, and relationships with, a covered fund that a banking entity is required to

terminate or otherwise divest in order to comply with section 13 should not be included for purposes of calculating the compliance thresholds. 2589

After considering comments received on the proposal and in order to implement a compliance program requirement that is consistent with the purpose and language of the statute and

rule while at the same time appropriately calibrating the associated resource burden on banking entities, the final rule applies the enhanced

minimum standards contained in Appendix B to only those banking entities with the most significant covered trading activities or those that meet a specified threshold of total
consolidated assets. The final rule, unlike the proposal, does not require a banking entity to adopt the enhanced compliance program if the banking entity, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, invest in the aggregate
more than $1 billion in covered funds or if they sponsor or advise covered funds, the average total assets of which are equal to or greater than $1 billion. Banking entities would look to the total
consolidated asset thresholds, instead of

the amount of covered fund investments and activities, in determining whether they would be subject to the enhanced compliance program requirements. The Agencies believe that commenters’ concerns about whether certain types of

covered fund investments or activities (e.g., amounts or relationships held during the conformance period) are included for purposes of calculating the enhanced compliance thresholds are
addressed because under the final rule, the enhanced compliance thresholds are

based on total consolidated assets and

not the amount of covered fund

investments and activities. Similar to the proposed rule, which provided that a banking entity could be subject to the enhanced compliance program if the Agency deemed it appropriate, the final rule’s enhanced compliance program also could apply if the Agency notifies the banking entity in writing that it must satisfy the requirements. 2590

Section 75.20 provides that three categories of banking entities will be subject to the enhanced minimum standards contained in Appendix B. The first category is any banking entity that engages in proprietary trading and is required to report metrics regarding its trading activities to its primary Federal supervisory agency under the final

rule. 2591 This category includes a banking entity that has, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities that equal or exceed $50 billion based on the average gross sum of trading assets and liabilities (on a

worldwide consolidated basis and after excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or any agency of the United States) over the previous consecutive four quarters, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters. A foreign banking entity with U.S. operations is required to adopt an enhanced compliance program if its total trading

assets and liabilities across all its U.S. operations equal or exceed $50 billion (after excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the U.S. or any agency of the U.S.). While these banking entities will be required to begin to report and record quantitative measurements by June 30, 2014, they will not be required to implement an enhanced compliance program by this date. Instead, as discussed above, a banking entity must establish a compliance program as soon as practicable and in no event later than the end of the conformance period. As explained more fully in Part VI.C.3., this category expands over time to include


### 6027 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2592 Some commenters requested raising this

dollar threshold to at least $10 billion. See PNC et al.; PNC; ABA (Keating). One commenter suggested

the threshold be increased to $50 billion. See State Street (Feb. 2012).

2593 See PNC et al.; M&T Bank; see also ABA (Abernathy); ABA (Keating). The Agencies recognize that, at the $10 billion threshold, a significant percentage of the trading assets and liabilities in the banking industry will remain subject to the enhanced compliance program requirement. See PNC.

2594 See PNC et al. 2595 See, e.g., ABA (Keating) (suggesting the

threshold should not include the amount of
investments in or assets of SBICs, or those that qualify for low-income housing tax credits (LIHTC)
New Markets Tax Credits (NMTC), or Federal
historic tax credits (HTC)); PNC et al. (loans);

Northern Trust.

2596 Several commenters requested that foreign activities of foreign banking entities be excluded from the compliance program requirement. See,

e.g., Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; IIB/EBF; Australian Bankers
Ass’n. (Feb. 2012); Banco de Mexico; Norinchukin. One commenter stated the only U.S. affiliates of foreign banking entities should be required to institute the proposed reporting and compliance requirements. See IIB/EBF. 2597 See, e.g., SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

2598 This is generally consistent with the proposed rule’s compliance program requirement.

See proposed rule § 75.20(a) (requiring that the banking entity’s compliance program be appropriate for the size, scope and complexity of activities and business structure of the banking entity). any banking entity with trading assets and liabilities that equal or exceed $10 billion (as measured in the manner described above). For banking entities
below the $50 billion threshold that become subject to the quantitative measurements requirement through the phased-in approach, they will not become subject to the enhanced compliance program until the date they are required to comply with the quantitative measurements requirement. However, these banking entities will be required to have a compliance program that meets the requirements of § 75.20(b) by the end of the conformance period. Thus, banking entities with between $25 billion and $50 billion trading assets and liabilities (as described in § 75.20(d)) will be required to implement an enhanced compliance program under Appendix B by April 30, 2016. Similarly, banking entities with
between $10 billion and $25 billion trading assets and liabilities will be subject to the requirements of Appendix B by December 31, 2016.

After considering comments, the Agencies have increased the trading asset and liability thresholds triggering the enhanced compliance program requirements. The Agencies believe that banking entities with a significant amount of trading assets should have the most detailed programs for ensuring compliance with the trading and other requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule. Specifically,

consistent with the thresholds for reporting and recording quantitative
measurements, the threshold will initially be $50 billion trading assets
and liabilities and, over time, will be
reduced to $10 billion. 2592 As noted by
commenters, these thresholds will continue to capture a significant percentage of the total trading assets and liabilities in the banking system, but
will reduce the burdens to smaller, less complex banking entities. 2593 With respect to this first category, the Agencies determined, in response to

comments, 2594 that the threshold for proprietary trading should not include trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or any agency of the United States. This approach reduces

the burdens associated with the enhanced minimum compliance program on banking entities whose trading operations consist primarily of trading U.S. government or agency obligations, which are generally exempt from the proprietary trading prohibition under § 75.6(a)(1)(i). While some commenters argued that additional
assets or liabilities, such as

securitizations or investments in SBICs,

should be excluded from the
calculation, 2595 the Agencies believe that trading in other assets involves more complex trading activity and warrants being included in the threshold calculation for applying the enhanced compliance program requirement.

To balance the increased trading asset and liability threshold with the goal of requiring appropriate specificity and rigor for large and complex banking organizations’ compliance programs, the Agencies have determined to also require an enhanced compliance program for any banking entity that has reported total consolidated assets, as of the previous calendar year-end, of $50 billion or more. Banking entities with
total assets of $50 billion or more are among the most complex banking entities and have been found by Congress to pose sufficient risk to the financial stability of the United States to warrant being generally subject to enhanced prudential standards under

section 165 of the Dodd-Frank Act. With respect to foreign banking entities, this threshold is calculated by reference solely to the aggregate assets of the foreign banking entity’s U.S. operations, including its U.S. branches and agencies. This approach is consistent

with the statute’s focus on the risks posed by covered trading activities and

investments within the United States and also responds to commenters’ concerns regarding the level of burden placed on foreign banking entities with respect to their foreign operations. 2596

The third category includes any banking entity that is notified by its primary Federal supervisory Agency in writing that it must satisfy the requirements and other standards contained in Appendix B. By retaining the flexibility to impose enhanced compliance requirements on a given banking entity upon specific notice to the firm, the Agencies have the ability to apply additional standards to any banking entity with a mix, level, complexity or risk of activities that, in the judgment of the relevant supervisory Agency, indicates that the firm should appropriately have in place an enhanced compliance program.

Some commenters argued that the final rule should not require a banking entity to establish the type of detailed compliance regime dictated by Appendix C for both trading and

covered fund activities and investments simply because the banking entity engages in one but not the other activity. 2597

To comply with the applicable compliance program requirements under § 75.20 and Appendix B of the final rule, banking entities should appropriately take into account the type, size, scope and complexity of their

activities and business structure in determining the terms, scope and detail of the compliance program to be

instituted. 2598 For example, if all of a banking entity’s activities subject to the

rule involve covered fund activities or investments, it would be expected that the banking entity would have an appropriate compliance program governing those activities (including an enhanced compliance program if applicable) and it would not be expected that the banking entity would construct the same detailed compliance program under the proprietary trading provision of the rule. Similarly, if a banking entity engages only in activities that are subject to the proprietary trading provisions of the rule and does not engage in any covered fund
activities or investments, it would not be expected that the banking entity would implement the same detailed compliance program under the covered funds section as would be required for its proprietary trading activities. In each of these situations, the banking entity would be expected to put in place

sufficient controls to ensure that an appropriate compliance program is established before the banking entity commences a new covered activity. The


### 6028 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2599 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68963. Agencies believe that this treatment is consistent with the statutory language regarding internal controls and recordkeeping to ensure compliance

with section 13 and also reduces unnecessary costs and burdens associated with requiring banking entities to implement compliance requirements that are not appropriate to the size, scope and risk of their relevant

activities.

2. Appendix B: Enhanced Minimum Standards for Compliance Programs

The proposed rule contained an appendix (Appendix C) which specified a variety of minimum standards applicable to the compliance program of a banking entity with significant covered trading activities or covered

fund activities and investments. The Agencies proposed to include these minimum standards as part of the regulation itself, rather than as accompanying guidance, reflecting the compliance program’s importance within the general implementation

framework for the rule.

As explained above, the Agencies

continue to believe that the inclusion of specified minimum standards for the compliance program within the regulation itself rather than as accompanying guidance serves to reinforce the importance of the compliance program in the implementation framework for section 13 of the BHC Act. As explained above, the Agencies believe that large banking entities and banking entities engaged in significant trading activities should
establish, maintain and enforce an enhanced compliance program. The requirements for an enhanced compliance program have been consolidated in Appendix B of the final

rule.

Similar to the proposed rule, section I of Appendix B provides that the enhanced compliance program must:

• Be reasonably designed to identify, document, monitor and report the covered trading and covered fund

activities and investments of the banking entity; identify, monitor and promptly address the risks of these

covered activities and investments and potential areas of noncompliance; and prevent activities or investments prohibited by, or that do not comply
with, section 13 of the BHC Act and the
rule;

• Establish and enforce appropriate

limits on the covered activities and investments of the banking entity, including limits on the size, scope, complexity, and risks of the individual

activities or investments consistent with the requirements of section 13 of the
BHC Act and the rule;

• Subject the effectiveness of the compliance program to periodic independent review and testing, and ensure that the entity’s internal audit, corporate compliance and internal

control functions involved in review and testing are effective and independent;

• Make senior management, and others as appropriate, accountable for the effective implementation of the compliance program, and ensure that the board of directors and CEO (or equivalent) of the banking entity review the effectiveness of the compliance program; and

• Facilitate supervision and examination by the Agencies of the banking entity’s covered trading and

covered fund activities and investments.

The proposed rule included several definitions within the appendix. In the
final rule, all definitions have been

moved to other sections of the rule or into Appendix A (governing metrics). Any banking entity subject to the

enhanced minimum standards contained in Appendix B may incorporate existing policies, procedures and internal controls into the compliance program required by Appendix B to the extent that such existing policies, procedures and internal controls assist in satisfying the requirements of Appendix B.

Section II of Appendix B contains two parts: One that sets forth the enhanced minimum compliance program standards applicable to covered trading activities of a banking entity and one that sets forth the corresponding enhanced minimum compliance program standards with respect to

covered fund activities and investments. As noted above, if all of a banking entity’s activities subject to the final rule involve only covered trading activities (or only covered fund activities and investments), it would be expected that the banking entity would have an appropriate compliance program governing those activities (including an enhanced compliance program if applicable) and it would not be expected that the banking entity

would construct the same detailed compliance program under the covered funds (or proprietary trading) provisions
of the rule. As discussed below, the Agencies have determined not to include the provisions regarding enterprise-wide compliance programs.

a. Proprietary Trading Activities

Like the proposed compliance appendix, section II.a of Appendix B requires a banking entity subject to the enhanced minimum standards contained in Appendix B to establish, maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes written policies and procedures that are appropriate for the types, size, and complexity of, and risks associated with, its permitted trading activities. 2599 This portion of Appendix B requires a banking entity to devote adequate resources and use knowledgeable personnel in conducting, supervising and managing its covered trading activities, and to promote consistency, independence and rigor in implementing its risk controls and compliance efforts. The compliance program must be updated with a frequency sufficient to account for changes in the activities of the banking entity, results of independent testing of the program, identification of weaknesses in the program and changes in legal, regulatory or other requirements.

Similar to the proposed rule, section II.a of Appendix B requires a banking entity subject to the Appendix to: (i) Have written policies and procedures governing each trading desk that include a description of certain information specific to each trading desk that will delineate its processes, mission and strategy, risks, limits, types of clients, customers and counterparties and its compensation arrangements; (ii) include a comprehensive description of the risk management program for the trading activity of the banking entity, as well as a description of the governance, approval, reporting, escalation, review and other processes that the banking entity will use to reasonably ensure that trading activity is conducted in compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart B; (iii) implement and

enforce limits and internal controls for each trading desk that are reasonably designed to ensure that trading activity

is conducted in conformance with section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart B and with the banking entity’s policies and procedures, and establish and enforce risk limits appropriate for the activity of each trading desk; and (iv) for any hedging activities that are conducted in reliance on the exemption contained in § 75.5, establish, maintain and enforce policies and procedures regarding the use of risk-mitigating hedging instruments and strategies that describe the positions, techniques and strategies that each trading desk may use, the manner in which the banking entity will determine that the risks generated by each trading desk have been properly and effectively hedged, the level of the organization at which


### 6029 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2600 This is consistent with proposed Appendix C, except that the term ‘‘trading unit’’ from the proposal has been replaced with the term ‘‘trading

desk.’’ See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68965. 2601 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68965. 2602 See AFME et al.; IIB/EBF; BaFin/Deutsche
Bundesbank; Credit Suisse (Seidel); HSBC. hedging activity and management will occur, the management in which such hedging strategies will be monitored and the personnel responsible for such monitoring, the risk management processes used to control unhedged or residual risks, and a description of the process for developing, documenting, testing, approving and reviewing all hedging positions, techniques and strategies permitted for each trading desk and for the banking entity in
reliance on § 75.5.

To the extent that any of the standards contained in Appendix B may be appropriately met by policies and procedures, internal controls and other requirements that are common to more than one trading desk, a banking entity may satisfy the requirements for the

enhanced minimum standards of the compliance program by implementing such common requirements with respect to any such desks as to which they are appropriately applicable. 2600 To the extent the required elements of the compliance program apply differently to different trading desks that conduct trading in the same financial instruments, a banking entity must document the differences and adopt policies and procedures and implement internal controls specific to each of the different trading desks. Overall, the policies and procedures should provide the Agencies with a clear, comprehensive picture of a banking entity’s covered trading activities that can be effectively reviewed.

Appendix B also requires that the banking entity perform robust analysis and quantitative measurement of its covered trading activities that is reasonably designed to ensure that the trading activity of each trading desk is consistent with the banking entity’s compliance program; monitor and assist in the identification of potential and actual prohibited proprietary trading activity; and prevent the occurrence of prohibited proprietary trading. In particular, the banking entity must incorporate into its compliance program any quantitative measure reported by the banking entity pursuant to Appendix A where applicable, and include at a minimum: (i) Internal controls and written policies and procedures reasonably designed to ensure the accuracy and integrity of the quantitative measures employed; (ii) ongoing timely monitoring and review of calculated quantitative measurements; (iii) the establishment of thresholds and trading measures for each trading desk and heightened review of any trading activity that is
inconsistent with those thresholds; and (iv) review, investigation and escalation with respect to matters that suggest a reasonable likelihood that a trading desk has violated any part of section 13 of the

BHC Act or the rule. 2601

Where a banking entity is subject to the reporting requirements of Appendix A, any additional quantitative measurements developed and implemented by the banking entity under the compliance program requirement are not required to be routinely submitted to the relevant Agency as provided in Appendix A, but are subject to the recordkeeping requirements set forth in subpart D, including the requirement to promptly produce such records to the relevant Agency upon request. Where a banking entity is not subject to the requirements of Appendix A, that banking entity would likewise not be required by this rule to routinely submit these additional quantitative measurements to the relevant Agency, but would be subject to the recordkeeping requirements set forth in subpart D, including the requirement to promptly produce such records to the relevant Agency upon

request.

In addition to the other requirements that are specific to proprietary trading, the banking entity’s compliance program must identify the activities of each trading desk that will be conducted in reliance on the exemptions contained in §§ 75.4 through 75.6, including an explanation of (i) how and where in the organization such activity occurs, and (ii) which exemption is being relied on and how the activity meets the specific requirements of such exemption. For trading activities that rely on an exemption contained in §§ 75.4 through 75.6, the banking entity’s compliance program should include an explanation of how, and its policies, procedures and
internal controls that demonstrate that, such trading activities satisfy such exemption and any other requirements

of section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule that are applicable to such activities. A foreign banking entity that engages in proprietary trading in reliance on the exemption contained in § 75.6(e) will be expected to provide information regarding the compliance program implemented to ensure compliance with the requirements of that section, including compliance by the U.S. operations of the foreign banking firm, but will only be expected to provide trading information regarding activity conducted within the United States (absent an indication of activity conducted or designed to evade the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act of the final rule). 2602

In addition, the compliance program must describe the process for ensuring that liquidity management activities are

conducted in conformance with the limits and policies contained in § 75.3(d)(3). This includes processes for ensuring that liquidity management

activities are not conducted for the purpose of prohibited proprietary trading.

The banking entity’s compliance program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively monitor and identify for further analysis any proprietary trading activity that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart B and to prevent violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart B. The standards set forth in subpart D direct the banking entity to include requirements in its compliance program for documenting remediation efforts, assessing the extent

to which modification of the compliance program is warranted and providing prompt notification to appropriate management and the board

of directors of material weakness or significant deficiencies in the implementation of the compliance

program.

b. Covered Fund Activities or

Investments

Section II.b of Appendix B requires a banking entity subject to the enhanced

minimum standards contained in Appendix B to establish, maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes written policies and procedures that are appropriate for the types, size, complexity and risks of the

covered fund and related activities conducted and investments made, by the banking entity.

The enhanced compliance program requirements for covered funds and investments focus on: (i) Ensuring that the compliance program provides a process for identifying all covered funds that the banking entity sponsors, organizes or offers, and covered funds in which the banking entity invests; (ii) ensuring that the compliance program provides a method for identifying all funds and pools that the banking entity sponsors or has an interest in and the type of exemption from the Investment Company Act or Commodity Exchange Act (whether or not the fund relies on section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of the


### 6030 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2603 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2604 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2605 See Occupy.

2606 See Occupy.

2607 See Occupy. 2608 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(2)(B)(i).

2609 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA;

SIFMA Funds et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation.

2610 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(b)(2)(B).

2611 Accordingly, the SEC’s and the CFTC’s final rules, unlike the applicable proposals, do not incorporate by reference the rules and interpretations of the Federal banking agencies with respect to covered fund activities or investments.

See SEC proposed rule § 255.10(a)(2), Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68942–68943, and CFTC Proposal, 77 FR at 8421–8423.

2612 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68966. Investment Company Act or section 4.7 of the regulations under the Commodity Exchange Act), and the amount of ownership interest the banking entity has in those funds or pools; (iii) identifying, documenting, and mapping where any covered fund activities are permitted to be conducted within the banking entity; and (iv) including an explanation of compliance; (v) describing sponsorship activities related to covered funds; and (vi) establishing, maintaining and enforcing internal controls that are reasonably designed to

ensure that its covered fund activities or investments comply with the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart C, and (vii) monitoring of the banking entity’s investments in and transactions with any covered

funds.

In addition, the banking entity’s compliance program must document the banking entity’s plan for seeking unaffiliated investors to ensure that any investment by the banking entity in a

covered fund conforms to the limits

contained in the final rule or that the covered fund is registered in compliance with the securities laws within the conformance period provided in the final rule. Similarly, the compliance program must ensure that the banking entity complies with any limits on transactions or relationships

with the covered fund contained in the final rule, including in situations in which the banking entity is designated as a sponsor, investment manager, investment adviser or commodity trading adviser by another banking entity.

The banking entity’s compliance program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively monitor and identify for further analysis any covered fund activity that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and subpart C. The standards set forth in subpart D require the banking entity to include requirements in its compliance program for documenting remediation efforts, assessing the extent to which modification of the compliance program is warranted and providing prompt notification to appropriate management

and the board of directors of material weakness or significant deficiencies in the design or implementation of the compliance program.

c. Enterprise-Wide Programs

Appendix C in the proposed rule contained a provision that permitted a banking entity to establish a compliance program on an enterprise-wide basis. Some commenters argued that a less specific and more flexible compliance regime would be essential to make the enterprise-wide compliance structures contemplated in Appendix C effective because requiring individualized policies and procedures for each

business line would diminish the benefits of enterprise-wide compliance and prevent consistency of these policies and procedures within the banking entity. 2603 One of these commenters recommended the Agencies provide greater options for developing a compliance program and not limit a banking entity to a choice between a single enterprise-wide program or a separate program for each subsidiary engaged in activities covered by the proposed rule. 2604

In contrast, one commenter argued that any enterprise-wide compliance program would only be effective if combined with additional programs at the trading unit or subsidiary level to train all employees at a banking entity. 2605 This commenter argued that each trading unit is different and suggested that it would be more efficient to mandate enterprise-wide default internal controls, but provide each individual trading unit the flexibility to tailor these requirements to its own specific business. 2606 This commenter also urged that Appendix C’s elements III (internal controls), IV (responsibility and accountability) and VII (recordkeeping) should not be imposed solely at the enterprise-wide level. 2607

After considering carefully the comments on the proposal, the Agencies

have removed the reference to an enterprise-wide compliance program
from the final rule; however, the Agencies acknowledge that a banking entity may establish a compliance program on an enterprise-wide basis, as long as the program satisfies the requirements of § 75.20 and, where applicable, Appendix B. A banking entity may employ common policies and procedures that are established at the enterprise-wide level or at a

business-unit level to the extent that such policies and procedures are appropriately applicable to more than one trading desk or activity, as long as the required elements of Appendix B and all of the other applicable compliance-related provisions of the rule are incorporated in the compliance program and effectively administered across trading desks and banking

entities within the consolidated enterprise or designated business. If abanking entity establishes an enterprisewide program, like a non-enterprise wide program, that program will be subject to supervisory review and examination by any Agency vested with rule writing authority under section 13 of the BHC Act with respect to the compliance program and the activities or investments of each banking entity for which the Agency has such authority. 2608 The banking organization would be expected to provide each appropriate Agency with access to all records related to the enterprise-wide compliance program pertaining to any banking entity that is supervised by the Agency vested with such rule writing authority.

For similar reasons, the Agencies have determined not to adopt some commenters’ requests that a single agency be responsible for determining compliance with section 13. 2609 At this time the Agencies do not believe such an approach would be consistent with the statute, which requires each Agency to adopt a rule for the types of banking entities under its jurisdiction, 2610 or effective given the different authorities and expertise of each Agency. The Agencies expect to continue to coordinate their supervisory efforts

related to section 13 of the BHC Act and to share information as appropriate in order to effectively implement the requirements of that section and the

final rule. 2611

d. Responsibility and Accountability

Section III of Appendix B includes the

enhanced minimum standards for responsibility and accountability. Section III contains many of the provisions contained in the proposed rule relating to responsibility and accountability, with certain

modifications. 2612 Section III requires a banking entity to establish, maintain and enforce both a governance and management framework to manage its business and employees with a view to preventing violations of section 13 of

the BHC Act and the rule. The standards in Section III focus on four key
constituencies—the board of directors,


### 6031 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2613 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2614 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading); see also Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2615 See Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen; Ralph Saul (Oct. 2011); John Reed; see also BEC et al. (Oct.
2011); Matthew Richardson.

2616 See Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012). 2617 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012);

see also Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2618 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68967. 2619 One commenter suggested that any compliance testing under the final rule be monitored by the Agencies and initially tested by internal audit personnel of the banking entity who are subject to a specific licensing and registration process for section 13 of the BHC Act and supplemented by an annual independent external

review. See Occupy; see also proposed rule § 75.20(b)(4). The Agencies believe it would be unnecessarily burdensome to require particular licensing and registration processes for internal auditors that are specific to section 13 of the BHC

Act.

2620 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68967. the CEO, senior management, and business line managers. Certain of the standards contained in the proposed rule relating to business management are separately covered by specific requirements contained in sections II.a and II.b of Appendix B. Section III

makes it clear that the board of directors, or similar corporate body, and the CEO and senior management are responsible for creating an appropriate ‘‘tone at the top’’ by setting an appropriate culture of compliance and establishing clear policies regarding the management of the firm’s trading

activities and its fund activities and investments. Senior management must be made responsible for communicating and reinforcing the culture of compliance established by it and the
board of directors, for the actual implementation and enforcement of the approved compliance program, and for taking corrective action where appropriate.

In response to a question in the preamble to the proposed rule regarding

whether the chief executive officer or similar officer of a banking entity should be required to provide a certification regarding the compliance program requirements, a few commenters urged that the final rule should not require that the board of directors or CEO of a banking entity review or certify the effectiveness of the compliance program. 2613 These commenters argued that existing processes developed by large, complex banking entities for board of director reporting and governance processes ensure that compliance programs work appropriately, and argued that these protocols would establish appropriate management and board of directors’ oversight of the section 13 compliance

program. 2614 By contrast, several commenters advocated requiring CEO attestation regarding compliance with

section 13. 2615 One commenter suggested that the rule require an annual assessment by management of

the effectiveness of internal controls and policies and require a public accounting firm to attest to the accuracy of those

annual assessments. 2616

After considering comments received on the proposal, the Agencies have determined to include a requirement in the final rule that a banking entity’s CEO annually attest in writing to the appropriate Agency for the banking entity that the banking entity has in place processes to establish, maintain, enforce, review, test and modify the compliance program established pursuant to Appendix B and § 75.20 of the rule in a manner reasonably designed to achieve compliance with

section 13 of the BHC Act and this rule. Although some commenters stated that existing protocols of certain banking entities would establish appropriate oversight of the rule’s compliance

program, 2617 the Agencies believe this requirement will better help to ensure that a strong governance framework is implemented with respect to compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act, and that it more directly underscores the importance of CEO engagement in the governance and management framework supporting compliance with the rule. In the case of the U.S. operations of a foreign banking entity, including a U.S. branch or agency of a foreign banking entity, the attestation may be provided for the entire U.S. operations of the foreign banking entity by the senior management officer of the U.S. operations of the foreign banking entity

who is located in the United States.

e. Independent Testing

Section IV of the Appendix B

includes the enhanced minimum standards for independent testing, which are substantially similar to the proposed independent testing

standards. 2618 A banking entity subject to Appendix B must ensure that independent testing regarding the effectiveness of the banking entity’s compliance program is conducted by a qualified independent party, such as the banking entity’s internal audit department, compliance personnel or risk managers independent of the trading desk or other organizational unit being tested, outside auditors, consultants, or other qualified independent parties. If a banking entity uses internal personnel to conduct the independent testing, the Agencies would expect that the banking entity ensure that the personnel responsible for the testing are separate from the unit and functions being tested (e.g., the personnel do not report to a person who is directly responsible for the unit or involved in the functions being tested) and have knowledge of the requirements of section 13 and its implementing rules. Although an external audit is not required to meet the independent testing requirement, the Agencies would expect that, when external auditors are engaged to review compliance by a banking entity with laws and regulations, the banking entity would give appropriate consideration to the need to review the compliance program required under this rule.

While one commenter suggested the final rule prescribe the precise manner in which a banking entity must conduct its compliance testing, 2619 the Agencies believe such a requirement is unnecessary because the standards in

the final rule will ensure that independent testing of the effectiveness of a banking entity’s compliance program is objective and robust. The independent testing must examine both the banking entity’s compliance program and its actual compliance with the rule. This testing must include not only testing of the overall adequacy and effectiveness of the compliance program and compliance efforts, but also the

effectiveness of each element of the compliance program and the banking entity’s compliance with each provision of the rule. This requirement is intended to ensure that a banking entity continually reviews and assesses, in an objective manner, the strength of its compliance efforts and promptly identifies and remedies any weaknesses or matters requiring attention within the compliance framework.

f. Training

Like the proposed compliance appendix, Section V of Appendix B

includes the enhanced minimum standards for training. 2620 It requires that a banking entity provide adequate training to its trading personnel and managers, as well as other appropriate personnel, in order to effectively implement and enforce the compliance program. In particular, personnel engaged in covered trading activities

and investments should be educated with respect to applicable prohibitions and restrictions, exemptions, and compliance program elements to an extent sufficient to permit them to make informed, day-to-day decisions that


### 6032 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2621 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68967.

2622 One commenter specifically urged that records for any type of compliance program be required to be kept on all hedges, rather than only those placed at a different level or trading unit as under the proposal, and that the retention period for all compliance records be changed from 5 years to 6 years in line with the statute of limitations on
civil suits for fraud, contracts and collection of debt

in accounts in New York State. See Occupy. 2623 Section 13(e)(1) of the BHC Act requires the Agencies to issue regulations regarding internal controls and recordkeeping to ensure compliance

with section 13. See 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(1). Section 75.20 and Appendix C of the proposed rule also implemented section 13(e)(1) of the BHC Act.

2624 See Part III.D. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

.

2625 See proposed rule § 75.7.

2626 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.8 (explaining why Appendix B was removed from the final rule).

2627 See proposed rule § 75.7(a). support the banking entity’s compliance

with section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule. In particular, any personnel with discretionary authority to trade, in any amount, should be appropriately trained regarding the differentiation of prohibited proprietary trading and permitted trading activities and given detailed guidance regarding what types of trading activities are prohibited. Similarly, personnel providing investment management or advisory services, or acting as general partner, managing member, or trustee of a covered fund, should be appropriately trained regarding what covered fund activities and investments are permitted and prohibited.

g. Recordkeeping

Section VI of Appendix B contains the

enhanced minimum standards for recordkeeping which are consistent with the proposed recordkeeping

standards. 2621 Generally, a banking entity must create records sufficient to demonstrate compliance and support the operation and effectiveness of its compliance program (i.e., records demonstrating the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of
section 13 of the BHC Act and the rule, any scrutiny or investigation by compliance personnel or risk managers, and any remedies taken in the event of a violation or non-compliance), and

retain these records for no less than five years in a form that allows the banking entity to promptly produce these records to any relevant Agency upon request. Records created and retained under the compliance program must include trading records of the trading units, including trades and positions of

each such unit. Records created and

retained under the enhanced compliance program must also include documentation of any exemption in the final rule relied on by the banking entity to invest in or sponsor a covered fund.

While one commenter requested that the period for retaining records be extended from 5 years to 6 years, the final rule does not make this change. 2622 The Agencies believe that 5 years is an appropriate minimum period for requiring retention of records to demonstrate compliance with the final rule. The final rule allows the Agencies to require a banking entity to retain records for a longer period if appropriate.

3. Section 75.20(d) and Appendix A: Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements Applicable to Trading

Activities

Section 75.7 of the proposed rule, which the Agencies proposed to implement in part section 13(e)(1) of the

BHC Act, 2623 required certain banking entities to comply with the reporting and recordkeeping requirements specified in Appendix A of the proposed rule. In addition, § 75.7 required banking entities to comply with the recordkeeping requirements in § 75.20 of the proposed rule, related to the banking entity’s compliance

program, 2624 as well as any other reporting or recordkeeping requirements that the relevant Agency may impose to evaluate the banking entity’s compliance with the proposed rule. 2625

Proposed Appendix A required a banking entity with significant trading activities to furnish periodic reports to the relevant Agency regarding various quantitative measurements of its trading

activities and create and retain records documenting the preparation and content of these reports. The measurements varied depending on the scope, type, and size of trading activities. In addition, proposed Appendix B contained a detailed commentary regarding the characteristics of permitted market making-related activities and how such activities may be distinguished from trading activities that, even if conducted in the context of a banking entity’s market-making operations, would constitute prohibited proprietary trading. 2626 Under the proposal, a banking entity was required to comply with proposed Appendix A’s reporting and recordkeeping requirements only if it had, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of which (on a worldwide consolidated basis) was, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equal to or greater than $1

billion. 2627 The Agencies did not propose to extend the reporting and recordkeeping requirements to banking entities with smaller amounts of trading activity, as it appeared that the more limited benefits of applying these requirements to such banking entities, whose trading activities are typically small, less complex, and easier to supervise, would not justify the burden associated with complying with the reporting and recordkeeping requirements.

a. Approach to Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements Under the Proposal

The proposal explained that the reporting and recordkeeping requirements of § 75.7 and Appendix A of the proposed rule were an important part of the proposed rule’s multi-faceted approach to implementing the prohibition on proprietary trading. These requirements were intended, in particular, to address some of the difficulties associated with (i)identifying permitted market makingrelated activities and distinguishing such activities from prohibited proprietary trading, and (ii) identifying certain trading activities resulting in material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. To do so, the proposed rule required certain banking entities to calculate and report detailed quantitative measurements of their trading activity, by trading unit.

These measurements were meant to help banking entities and the Agencies in assessing whether such trading activity is consistent with permitted trading activities in scope, type and profile. The quantitative measurements required to be reported under the proposed rule were generally designed to reflect, and to provide meaningful information regarding, certain characteristics of trading activities that appear to be particularly useful in differentiating permitted market making-related activities from prohibited proprietary trading. For example, the proposed quantitative

measurements measured the size and type of revenues generated, and the types of risks taken, by a trading unit. Each of these measurements appeared to be useful in assessing whether a trading unit was (i) engaged in permitted market making-related activity or (ii) materially exposed to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. Similarly, the proposed quantitative measurements

also measured how much revenue was generated per such unit of risk, the volatility of a trading unit’s profitability, and the extent to which a trading unit

trades with customers. Each of those characteristics appeared to be useful in assessing whether a trading unit is


### 6033 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2628 Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68883. 2629 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(c)(2); Joint Proposal, 76

FR at 68883.engaged in permitted market makingrelated activity.

However, as noted in the proposal, the Agencies recognize that no single quantitative measurement or

combination of measurements can accurately identify prohibited proprietary trading without further analysis of the context, facts, and circumstances of the trading activity. In addition, certain quantitative measurements may be useful for assessing one type of trading activity, but not helpful in assessing another type of trading activity. As a result, the Agencies proposed to use a variety of quantitative measurements to help identify transactions or activities that warrant more in-depth analysis or

review.

To be effective, this approach requires identification of useful quantitative measurements as well as judgment regarding the type of measurement results that suggest a further review of the trading unit’s activity is warranted. The Agencies proposed to take a heuristic approach to implementation in this area that recognized that quantitative measurements can only be usefully identified and employed after a process of substantial public comment, practical experience, and revision. In particular, the Agencies noted that, although a variety of quantitative measurements have traditionally been used by market participants and others to manage the risks associated with trading activities, these quantitative tools have not been developed, nor have they previously been utilized, for the explicit purpose of identifying trading activity that warrants additional scrutiny in differentiating prohibited proprietary trading from permitted market making-related activities. 2628

Consistent with this heuristic approach, the proposed rule included a large number of potential quantitative measurements on which public comment was sought, many of which overlap to some degree in terms of their informational value. The proposal explained that not all of these quantitative measurements may ultimately be adopted in the final rule, depending on their relative strengths,
weaknesses, costs, and benefits. The Agencies noted that some of the proposed quantitative measurements may not be relevant to all types of trading activities or may provide only
limited benefits, relative to cost, when applied to certain types of trading
activities. In addition, certain quantitative measurements may be difficult or impracticable to calculate for a specific covered trading activity due to
differences between asset classes,
market structure, or other factors. The Agencies therefore requested comment on a large number of issues related to the relevance, practicability, costs, and benefits of the quantitative measurements proposed. The Agencies also sought comment on whether the quantitative measurements described in the proposal were appropriate to use to help assess compliance with section 13

of the BHC Act.

In addition to the proposed quantitative measurements, the proposal explained that a banking entity may itself develop and implement other quantitative measurements in order to effectively monitor its covered trading activities for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and the proposed rule
and to establish, maintain, and enforce an effective compliance program, as required by § 75.20 of the proposed rule and Appendix C. The Agencies noted that the proposed quantitative measurements in Appendix A were intended to assist banking entities and Agencies in monitoring compliance with the proprietary trading restrictions and would not necessarily provide all the data necessary for the banking entity to establish an effective compliance program. The Agencies also recognized that appropriate and effective quantitative measurements may differ based on the profile of the banking entity’s businesses in general and, more specifically, of the particular trading unit, including types of instruments traded, trading activities and strategies, and history and experience (e.g., whether the trading desk is an
established, successful market maker or a new entrant to a competitive market). In all cases, banking entities needed to ensure that they have robust measures in place to identify and monitor the risks taken in their trading activities, to

ensure the activities are within risk tolerances established by the banking entity, and to monitor for compliance with the proprietary trading restrictions in the proposed rule.

To the extent that data regarding
measurements, as set forth in the proposed rule, are collected, the Agencies proposed to utilize the conformance period provided in section 13 of the BHC Act to carefully review that data, further study the design and utility of these measurements, and if necessary, propose changes to the reporting requirements as the Agencies

believe are needed to ensure that these

measurements are as effective as possible. 2629 This heuristic, gradual approach to implementing reporting requirements for quantitative

measurements was intended to ensure that the requirements are formulated in a manner that maximizes their utility for identifying trading activity that warrants additional scrutiny in assessing compliance with the prohibition on proprietary trading, while limiting the risk that the use of quantitative measurements could inadvertentlycurtail permissible market makingrelated activities that provide an important service to market participants and the capital markets at large.

In addition, the Agencies requested

comment on the use of numerical thresholds for certain quantitative measurements that, if reported by a banking entity, would require the banking entity to review its trading activities for compliance and summarize that review to the relevant Agency. The Agencies did not propose specific numerical thresholds in the proposal because substantial public comment and analysis would be beneficial prior to formulating and proposing specific
numerical thresholds. Instead, the Agencies intended to carefully consider public comments provided on this issue and to separately determine whether it would be appropriate to propose, subsequent to finalizing the current proposal, such numerical thresholds.

Part III of proposed Appendix A defined the scope of the reporting requirements. The proposed rule adopted a tiered approach that required banking entities with the most extensive trading activities to report the largest number of quantitative measurements, while banking entities with smaller trading activities had fewer or no reporting requirements. This tiered approach was intended to reflect the heightened compliance risks of banking entities with extensive trading activities and limit the regulatory burden imposed on banking entities with relatively small or no trading activities, which appear to pose significantly less compliance risk.

Under the proposal, any banking entity that had, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of which (on a worldwide consolidated basis), as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equals or exceeds $5 billion would be required the banking entity to furnish quantitative measurements for all trading units of the banking entity engaged in trading activity subject to §§ 75.4, 75.5, or 75.6(a) of the proposed


### 6034 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2630 See proposed rule Appendix A.III.A. These seventeen quantitative measurements are discussed

further below.

2631 See proposed rule Appendix A.III.A. These five quantitative measurements are: (i) Comprehensive Profit and Loss; (ii) Comprehensive
Profit and Loss Attribution; (iii) VaR and Stress
VaR; (iv) Risk Factor Sensitivities; and (v) Risk and

Position Limits. Each of these and other quantitative measurements discussed in proposed Appendix A are discussed in detail below. 2632 See proposed rule Appendix A.III.A. These eight quantitative measurements are: (i) Comprehensive Profit and Loss; (ii) Comprehensive
Profit and Loss Attribution; (iii) Portfolio Profit and Loss; (iv) Fee Income and Expense; (v) Spread Profit and Loss; (vi) VaR; (vii) Volatility of Comprehensive Profit and Loss and Volatility of Portfolio Profit and Loss; and (viii) Comprehensive Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio and Portfolio Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio.

2633 See, e.g., Paul Volcker; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Invesco; Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. 2634 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2635 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2636 See Occupy.

2637 See Barclays; see also BoA; Invesco; ISDA (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2638 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); NYSE Euronext; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); UBS; Western Asset Mgmt.; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Northern Trust.

2639 See John Reed; Public Citizen.

2640 See Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Stephen Roach.

2641 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Stephen Roach.

2642 See UBS.

2643 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Northern Trust;

see also UBS.

2644 See Comm. on Capital Markets Regulation. rule (i.e., permitted underwriting andmarket making-related activity, riskmitigated hedging, and trading in certain government obligations). The scope of data to be furnished depended on the activity in which the trading unit was engaged. First, for the trading units of such a banking entity that are engaged in market making-related activity pursuant to § 75.4(b) of the proposed rule, proposed Appendix A required that a banking entity furnish seventeen quantitative

measurements. 2630 Second, all trading units of such a banking entity engaged in trading activity subject to §§ 75.4(a), 75.5, or 75.6(a) of the proposed rule were required to report five quantitative measurements designed to measure the general risk and profitability of the trading unit. 2631 The Agencies expected that each of these general types of

measurements would be useful in assessing the extent to which any permitted trading activity involves exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. These requirements would apply to all type of trading units engaged in underwriting and market making-related activity, risk-mitigated hedging, and trading in certain government obligations. These additional measurements applicable only to trading units engaged in market making-related activities were designed to help evaluate the extent to which the quantitative profile of a trading unit’s activities is consistent with permissible market making-related activities.

Under the proposal, any banking entity that had, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of which (on a worldwide consolidated basis), as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equals or exceeds $1 billion but is less than $5 billion would be required to provide quantitative measurements to be furnished for trading units that engaged in market making-related activity subject to § 75.4(b) of the proposed rule. Trading units of such banking entities that engaged in market making-related activities needed to report eight quantitative measurements designed to help evaluate the extent to which the quantitative profile of a trading unit’s activities is consistent with permissible market making-related

activities. 2632 The proposal applied a

smaller number of measurements to a smaller universe of trading units for this class of banking entities because they are likely to pose lesser compliance risk and fewer supervisory and examination challenges. The Agencies noted in the proposal that a less burdensome reporting regime, coupled with other elements of the proposal (e.g., the compliance program requirement), was likely to be equally as effective in ensuring compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and the proposed rule for banking entities with smaller trading operations.

Section III.B of proposed Appendix A specified the frequency of required calculation and reporting of quantitative measurements. Under the proposed rule, each required quantitative

measurement needed to be calculated for each trading day. Required quantitative measurements were required to be reported to the relevant Agency on a monthly basis, within 30 days of the end of the relevant calendar month, or on such other reporting schedule as the relevant Agency may require. Section III.C of proposed Appendix A required a banking entity to create and retain records documenting the preparation and content of any quantitative measurement furnished by the banking entity, as well as such information as is necessary to permit the relevant Agency to verify the accuracy of such measurements, for a period of 5 years. This included records for each trade and position.

b. General Comments on the Proposed

Metrics

A number of commenters were supportive of metrics. A few commenters argued that the metrics could reveal prohibited proprietary trading activity and be an appropriate and valuable tool in analyzing positions. 2633 One commenter argued that metrics are the single most valuable tool available to the Agencies for distinguishing between prohibited and permitted activities and recommended the compliance program be structured around metrics. 2634 Another commenter

stated that the identification of metrics is one of the strengths of the proposed rule and offered great promise for successful implementation of the

rule. 2635 One commenter expressed support for the metrics and argued that

there would be substantial evasion of the rule without reporting of these

measurements. 2636 Some commenters proposed a presumption of compliance so long as trading activity is conducted

in a manner consistent with tailored quantitative metrics and related specific thresholds as coordinated and agreed with the relevant Agency. 2637 A few of commenters suggested that metrics not be used as a bright-line trigger and recommended flexibility in the application of metrics for assessing market-making activities. 2638 Two commenters supported metrics as part of a bright lines approach. 2639

A number of commenters felt that some metrics might be more relevant than others, depending upon the particular asset class, activity, particular market, and unique characteristics of each banking entity. 2640 These commenters advocated an approach where banking entities and examiners

would determine over time the usefulness and relevance of particular

metrics. 2641 One commenter expressed support for the 5 metrics required for trading in U.S. government obligations. 2642 A number of

commenters recommended that metrics

be tailored to different asset classes and
markets, to avoid the drawbacks of a one-size-fits-all approach. 2643 One commenter argued that application of metrics to market-making activities at different firms may produce very different results, all of which might reflect legitimate market-making. 2644

Commenters also indicated that not all metrics are meaningful and calculable


### 6035 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2645 See Morgan Stanley; see also ISDA (Feb.
2012).

2646 See ABA (Keating); Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); ISDA (Feb. 2012); UBS; Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Wellington.

2647 See Oliver Wyman (Feb. 2012).

2648 See BoA (expressing concern about the need for new systems to distinguish bid-ask spreads from price appreciation); UBS; Wellington.

2649 See BoA; Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

2650 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; UBS; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale (arguing that many calculation questions need to be resolved before banking entities can create necessary systems to measure metrics).

2651 See Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Western Asset Mgmt.; Public Citizen. For example, one commenter cited a study finding that 14 out of 17 of the proposed metrics are either in wide use today or are possible to implement fairly easily using data already collected for internal risk management and profit and loss purposes. See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012) (citing John Lester and Dylan Walsh, ‘‘The Volcker Rule Ban On Prop Trading: A Step Closer to Reality, Point of View,’’ Oliver Wyman Company (Oct.
2011)).

2652 See Paul Volcker. 2653 See, e.g., UBS.

2654 See BoA; UBS; Wellington.

2655 See AFR (Nov. 2012); see also Occupy; Public

Citizen.

2656 See Occupy; AFR (Nov. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2657 See Occupy.

2658 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012).

2659 See ISDA (Feb. 2012) (citing Mason v. Florida

Bar, 208 F.3d 952, 958–59 (11th Cir. 2000)).

2660 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); see also Occupy; Public Citizen.

2661 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); see also Public Citizen; John Reed.

2662 See ICBA; Occupy.

2663 See Occupy (suggesting all banking entities that engage in trading be required to provide VaR
Exceedance, Risk Factor Sensitivities and Risk and
Position Limits). 2664 See PNC et al.; M&T Bank; see also ABA (Abernathy).

2665 See ABA (Keating); M&T Bank; PNC et al.

2666 See State Street (Feb. 2012).

2667 See PNC et al.

2668 See PNC et al.

2669 See Northern Trust.

2670 See Occupy at 60. for all trading units and some would be unnecessarily burdensome. 2645

Other commenters did not support the

use of metrics. These commenters argued that metrics reporting was one aspect of the complexity of the proposal that increased the cost and difficulty of distinguishing market-making from prohibited proprietary trading. 2646 One commenter argued that banking entities may avoid legitimate market making activities that would produce ‘‘worse’’

metrics results. 2647

Several commenters expressed

concern that the costs exceeded the benefits of the required quantitative metrics in the proposal. In particular, commenters argued that the 17 metrics in the proposal calculated at each trading unit was excessive, would generate an unmanageable amount of data, would yield numerous false positives, and would require the construction and programming of highly sophisticated systems that are not currently employed. 2648 A few commenters suggested that a more

limited set of metrics would reduce compliance complexity. 2649 Some commenters noted that many of these metrics have not been historically reported by banking entities and some of the metrics would require substantial

resources and investment infrastructure to produce some of the metrics without a clear functional purpose. 2650 According to other commenters, however, banking entities currently use all or nearly all of the proposed

metrics. 2651 One commenter urged that it would be good to make metrics consistent with the banking entities’ internal reporting and control

systems. 2652 Some commenters argued it was critical for the Agencies to get the metrics right, 2653 while others indicated it was unclear how the Agencies could analyze such information to draw useful

conclusions. 2654

Some commenters expressed concern

that metrics were vulnerable to manipulation and arbitrage. 2655 These commenters generally felt that the quantitative measurements were only appropriate for certain liquid and transparent trading activities but not meaningful for illiquid markets, including opaque securities and

derivatives. 2656 These commenters also argued that the vast majority of proprietary trading would not be differentiable through analysis of the

data. 2657 Other commenters expressed

concern that the use of metrics not replace regulatory review of actual specific trading positions held by banking entities. 2658 One commenter argued that in relying on metrics to be elaborated upon and discussed in the examination process, the proposed rule

did not meet the fundamental fair notice goal of regulation. 2659

A few commenters also recommended creation of a central data repository or data sharing protocol that would promote consistency and accountability in oversight and regulation and suggested the Office of Financial Research (‘‘OFR’’) be given access to this data so that it can provide centralized analysis and monitoring to identify any trends that give rise to systemic risk. 2660 These commenters generally supported compliance benefits that would result from increased public disclosure of banking entities’ trading and funds activities, including all of their trading positions, their valuation models, and their compliance metrics. 2661

Some commenters expressed support for the reporting thresholds contained in Appendix A. 2662 One commenter suggested that all banking entities that engage in any trading (regardless of threshold) report certain metrics. 2663 Other commenters supported metrics reporting, but recommended the threshold for trading assets and
liabilities be increased from $1 billion to $10 billion to mitigate any cost and burden impact on smaller banking

entities. 2664 These commenters pointed

out that even if the minimum dollar
threshold were raised to $10 billion, an overwhelming percentage of trading assets and liabilities in the banking industry (approximately 98 percent) would still remain subject to heightened compliance requirements including Appendix A. 2665 One commenter suggested the threshold be raised to $50 billion in combined trading assets and

liabilities. 2666

Commenters also offered a number of suggestions for modifying the activity that would be considered in meeting the thresholds for determining which reporting requirements apply to a banking entity. Several commenters argued that certain types of trading

assets or fund investments should not be included for purposes of determining

whether the relevant dollar threshold for compliance was met, particularly those that are not prohibited activities

or investments. For instance, some commenters urged that trading in U.S. government obligations should not

count toward the calculation of whether a banking organization meets the trading threshold triggering metrics reporting. 2667 These commenters also argued that other positions or

transactions that do not involve financial instruments and that may constitute trading assets and liabilities,
such as loans, should be excluded from the thresholds because exempt activities should not determine the type of compliance program a banking entity must implement. 2668 One commenter urged that foreign exchange swaps and

forwards be excluded from the

definition of a ‘‘derivative’’ and not be subject to compliance requirements as a

result. 2669 Conversely, one commenter urged that all assets and liabilities defined as trading assets for purposes of the Market Risk Capital Rule should be
included in the $1 billion standard for becoming subject to any reporting and record-keeping requirements under the

final rule. 2670

A number of commenters argued that monthly reporting was too frequent because of the complexity of the process that surrounds generation of regulatory


### 6036 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2671 See JPMC; see also Stephen Roach.

2672 See Occupy.

2673 See BoA; Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; Morgan Stanley;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); UBS; Stephen Roach.

2674 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); JPMC; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2675 See BoA.

2676 See Morgan Stanley; see also SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2677 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2678 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). 2679 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2680 See GE (Feb. 2012).

2681 See Occupy.

2682 See, e.g., BoA; Goldman (Prop. Trading);
JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley; RBC.

2683 See JPMC; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA. See also

Sen. Gillibrand.

2684 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA.

2685 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2686 See Sens. Merkley & Levin (Feb. 2012); Occupy. 2687 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Alfred Brock.

2688 See Wellington; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); CalPERS; John Reed.

2689 See Occupy.

2690 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2691 See Wellington; CalPERS; John Reed.

2692 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Barclays. reports and suggested that the frequency of reporting should be quarterly. 2671 One commenter supported the reporting frequency as extremely effective and said it should not be reduced in any

way. 2672

A number of comments were received on the implementation timeframe for metrics reporting. Several commenters urged allowing banking entities the use of the full conformance period for creating the systems and processes to capture and report the quantitative

metrics. 2673 Some commenters suggested that metrics should not be required to be reported until one year after adoption of final regulations. 2674 A different commenter suggested that the Agencies provide a one-year period during which they determine which metrics will be employed for different asset classes and an additional one-year period during which such metrics could

be reviewed so metrics would be a required component of a banking entity’s compliance program no sooner than 2 years after issuance of the final

rule. 2675 Another commenter suggested that banking entities and regulators use the first year of the conformance period

to consult with one another and

determine the usefulness and relevance

of individual metrics for different
activities, asset classes, and markets and the second year of the conformance period to test the metrics systems to validate the accuracy and relevance of metrics that are agreed upon the first

year. 2676 One commenter suggested a subset of metrics be rolled out gradually across trading units before implementing the full suite of metrics that are ultimately adopted or metrics could be rolled out one trading unit at

a time. 2677 Another commenter said the Agencies should identify key metrics that are clearly workable across all ranges of trading activity and most likely to provide useful data and require those metrics be implemented first and require other metrics to be phased in

over time in consultation with the banking entity’s primary Federal regulator. 2678 One commenter supported the heuristic approach of the proposal and suggested the Agencies should draw on resources and comment from the public and the industry in continuing the process of developing and building

out metrics. 2679

Another commenter requested that the final rule specify how trading assets and liabilities should be reported for savings and loan holding companies. 2680 This commenter requested clarification that positions held for hedging or liquidity management purposes should not count as trading assets or liabilities for the $5 billion threshold in Appendix A. Another commenter expressed concern that derivatives valuation may value derivatives substantially lower than their notional exposure and thereby make high reporting thresholds not meaningful or reflective of inherent

risk. 2681

Many commenters expressed concern that the smallest trading unit level was too low a level for collecting metrics data and suggested the final rule provide a higher reporting level. 2682

These commenters stated that calculating at too low of a level would be more likely to generate false positives 2683 and would be burdensome, particularly for firms with large trading operations. 2684 In addition, some

commenters indicated that it would be problematic if the definition of ‘‘trading unit’’ is applied at a legal entity level and cannot be applied across multiple legal entities within the same affiliate

group. 2685 By contrast, two commenters supported the collection of metrics at the trading desk level and appropriate levels above the trading desk. 2686 One of these commenters expressed concern

that the rule allowed for an inappropriately large trading desk unit that could combine significantly unrelated trading desks, which would impede detection of proprietary trading and supported measurements at multiple levels of organization to

combat evasion concerns.

In response to questions in the proposal about whether the Agencies

should establish numerical thresholds for some or all of the proposed quantitative measurements, a number of commenters expressed opposition to establishing numerical thresholds for purposes of the rule, 2687 while others

stated that thresholds should be

established over time. 2688 In opposition of thresholds, one commenter expressed

concern that numerical thresholds could be easily abused and evaded and may need to be constantly revised and updated as financial markets evolve. 2689 In addition, another commenter stated

that numerical thresholds should not be imposed because metric levels will differ by asset class and type of activity. 2690 A few commenters suggested that numerical thresholds, based on the specific asset class or market, would be useful to provide clarity or consistency about the types of activity that are permitted under the

rule. 2691 Two commenters expressed support for banking entities establishing
numerical thresholds, in consultation with the relevant regulator, for different trading units based on differences

between markets and asset classes. 2692

c. Approach of the Final Rule

As explained below, the Agencies

have reduced the number of metrics that banking entities must report under Appendix A from the 17 metrics in the proposal to 7 metrics in the final rule.

The final rule also increases the level of activity that is required to trigger mandatory reporting of metrics data and phases in the reporting requirement

over time.

Under the final rule, a banking entity engaged in significant trading activity as defined by § 75.20 must furnish the following quantitative measurements for each of its trading desks engaged in covered trading activity calculated in accordance with Appendix A:

• Risk and Position Limits and Usage;

• Risk Factor Sensitivities;

• Value-at-Risk and Stress VaR;

• Comprehensive Profit and Loss
Attribution;

• Inventory Turnover;

• Inventory Aging; and

• Customer Facing Trade Ratio. In response to comments, the final

rule raises the threshold for metrics reporting from the proposal to capture only firms that engage in significant trading activity, identified at specified aggregate trading asset and liability thresholds, and delays the dates for reporting metrics through a phased-in


### 6037 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2693 As noted above, a number of commenters suggested setting a higher threshold than the proposed $1 billion and $5 billion trading asset and liability thresholds because even thresholds of $10 billion to $50 billion would capture a significant percentage of the total trading assets and liabilities in the banking system. See ABA (Keating); M&T
Bank; PNC et al.; State Street (Feb. 2012). The Agencies believe that the phase-in approach to the metrics requirement established in the final rule should generally address commenters’ concerns about the implementation timeframe by providing time for analysis, development of systems (if needed), and implementation of the quantitative measurements requirement. See, e.g., BoA; Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); UBS; Stephen Roach; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading). The Agencies are establishing a phase-in approach, rather than requiring all banking entities above the $10 billion threshold to report metrics within the
same timeframe, to strike a balance between the benefits of receiving data to help monitor compliance with the rule against the need for time

to assess the effectiveness and usefulness of the quantitative measurements in practice and for some firms to develop additional systems for purposes of this requirement. 2694 Consistent with certain commenters’ requests, the final rule generally requires less frequent reporting than was proposed. However, the Agencies continue to believe that monthly reporting is appropriate for the largest banking entities above the $50 billion threshold. More frequent reporting for these firms is appropriate to allow for more effective supervision of their large-scale trading operations. See JPMC; Stephen Roach.

2695 See final rule § 75.20(d)(3). The final rule includes a shorter period of time for reporting quantitative measurements after the end of the relevant period than was proposed for the largest banking entities. Like the monthly reporting requirement for these firms, this is intended toallow for more effective supervision of their largescale trading operations. 2696 See final rule § 75.3(e)(13); see also supra

Parts VI.A.2.c.1.c.ii. and VI.A.3.c.1.c.i.

2697 See Wellington; CalPERS; John Reed. approach based on the size of trading

assets and liabilities. 2693 Banking

entities that meet the relevant thresholds must collect and report metrics for all trading desks engaged in covered trading activity beginning on the dates established in § 75.20 of the final rule. Specifically, the Agencies have delayed the reporting of metrics until June 30, 2014 for the largest banking entities that, together with their affiliates and subsidiaries, have trading assets and liabilities the average gross sum of which equal or exceed $50

billion on a worldwide consolidated basis over the previous four calendar quarters (excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or any agency of the United States). Banking
entities with less than $50 billion and greater than or equal to $25 billion in trading assets and liabilities and banking entities with less than $25 billion and greater than or equal to $10 billion in trading assets and liabilities would also be required to report these metrics beginning on April 30, 2016, and December 31, 2016, respectively. The Agencies believe that these delayed dates for reporting metrics should allow firms adequate time to develop systems to calculate and report the quantitative metrics. The Agencies will review the

data collected and revise this collection requirement as appropriate based on a review of the data collected prior to September 30, 2015.

Under the final rule, a banking entity required to report metrics must calculate any applicable quantitative measurement for each trading day. Each banking entity required to report must report each applicable quantitative measurement to its primary supervisory Agency on the reporting schedule
established in § 75.20 unless otherwise requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity. The largest banking entities with $50 billion or greater in trading assets and liabilities must report the metrics on a monthly basis. Other banking entities required to report metrics must do so on a quarterly

basis. 2694 All quantitative measurements for any calendar month must be reported no later than 10 days after the end of the calendar month required by § 75.20, unless another time is requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity except for a preliminary period when reporting will be required no later than 30 days after the end of the calendar month. Banking entities subject to quarterly reporting will be required to report quantitative measurements within 30 days of the end of the quarter, unless another time is requested by the primary supervisory Agency for the entity in writing. 2695

The Agencies believe that together the reduced number of metrics, the higher thresholds for reporting metrics, delayed reporting dates, and modified reporting frequency reduce the costs and burden from the proposal while allowing collection of data to permit better monitoring of compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act. The Agencies also believe that the delayed dates for reporting quantitative metrics will provide banking entities with the time to develop systems to calculate and report these metrics. The Agencies are not applying these reporting and recordkeeping requirements to banking entities with smaller amounts of trading activity, as it appears that the more limited benefits of applying these requirements to banking entities with lower levels of trading activities, which represent entities that are typically small, less complex, and easier to supervise, would not justify the burden associated with complying with the reporting and recordkeeping requirements of Appendix A. The final rule defines ‘‘trading desk’’ to replace the concept of ‘‘trading unit’’ in the proposal. 2696 Under the final rule, trading desk means the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that buys or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof. The Agencies believe that applying quantitative measurements to a level that aggregates a variety of distinct trading activities may obscure or

‘‘smooth’’ differences between distinct lines of business, asset categories and risk management processes in a way that renders the measurement relatively

uninformative because it does not adequately reflect the specific characteristics of the trading activities being conducted.

While the Agencies recognize that applying quantitative measurements at the trading desk level may result in

some ‘‘noise’’ in the data and false positives, the Agencies believe it is necessary to apply the quantitative measurements at the trading desk level to enhance consistency with other provisions of the final rule. For example, because the requirements of the market-making exemption apply at the trading desk level of organization, the Agencies believe quantitative

measurements used to monitor a banking entity’s market making-related
activities should also calculated, reported, and recorded at the trading desk level. In response to commenters’ concerns that trading desk level measurements are more likely to generate false positives, the Agencies emphasize that quantitative

measurements will not be used as a dispositive tool for determining compliance and, rather, will be used to monitor patterns and identify activity that may warrant further review.

Like the proposal, the final rule does not include specific numerical thresholds. Commenters did not suggest specific thresholds for particular metrics or provide data and analysis that would support particular thresholds. 2697 Given the range of financial instruments and trading activity covered by the final rule, as well as potential differences among banking entities’ organizational structures, trading strategies, and level of presence in a particular market, the Agencies are concerned that numerical thresholds for specific metrics would

not account for these differences and could inappropriately constrain


### 6038 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2698 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2699 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Barclays. See

also final rule Appendix B. 2700 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Invesco; JPMC; Occupy; Public Citizen;

see also BNY Mellon et al. (suggesting the use of VaR measures for foreign exchange trading activity).

2701 See, e.g., Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Invesco; Public Citizen.

2702 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2703 See Prof. Duffie. 2704 See Occupy.

2705 See Occupy.

2706 See JPMC; State Street (Feb. 2012); see also
BoA; CH/ABASA. For instance, one of these commenters stated that the proposed reliance on

VaR and Stress VaR to demonstrate bona fide hedging is misleading for ALM activities due to the typical accounting asymmetry in ALM where, for example, managed liabilities such as deposits are not mark-to-market but the corresponding hedge may be. See State Street (Feb. 2012).

2707 See Public Citizen.

2708 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen. legitimate activity. 2698 Further,

mandated thresholds for the metrics would not recognize the impact changing market conditions may have on a given trading desk’s quantitative

measurements. Consistent with two commenters’ suggested approach, banking entities will be required to

establish their own numerical thresholds for quantitative

measurements under the enhanced compliance program requirement in Appendix B. 2699

d. Proposed Quantitative Measurements and Comments on Specific Metrics

Section IV of proposed Appendix A
described, in detail, the individual quantitative measurements that must be

furnished. These measurements were grouped into the following five broad categories, each of which is described in

more detail below:

• Risk-management measurements

— VaR, Stress VaR, VaR Exceedance, Risk
Factor Sensitivities, and Risk and

Position Limits;

• Source-of-revenue measurements

— Comprehensive Profit and Loss,
Portfolio Profit and Loss, Fee Income and Expense, Spread Profit and Loss, and Comprehensive Profit and Loss
Attribution;

• Revenues-relative-to-risk

measurements—Volatility of Comprehensive Profit and Loss, Volatility of Portfolio Profit and Loss, Comprehensive Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio, Portfolio Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio, Unprofitable Trading Days based on Comprehensive Profit and Loss, Unprofitable Trading Days based on Portfolio Profit and Loss,
Skewness of Portfolio Profit and Loss,

and Kurtosis of Portfolio Profit and

Loss;

• Customer-facing activity

measurements—Inventory Turnover, Inventory Aging, and Customer-facing
Trade Ratio; and

• Payment of fees, commissions, and spreads measurements—Pay-to-Receive Spread Ratio.

The Agencies proposed these quantitative measurements because, taken together, these measurements appeared useful for understanding the context in which trading activities occur and identifying activities that may warrant additional scrutiny to

determine whether these activities involve prohibited proprietary trading because the trading activity either is inconsistent with permitted market making-related activities or presents a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies. As described below, different quantitative measurements were proposed to identify different aspects and characteristics of trading activity for the purpose of helping to identify prohibited proprietary trading, and the Agencies stated in the proposal that they expected that the quantitative

measurements would be most useful for this purpose when implemented and reviewed collectively, rather than in isolation. The Agencies stated in the proposal that they believed that, in the aggregate, many banking entities already collect and review many of these measurements as part of their risk management activities, and stated that they expected that many of the quantitative measurements proposed would be readily computed and monitored at the multiple levels of organization included in proposed Appendix A’s definition of ‘‘trading unit,’’ to which they would apply.

Under the proposal, the first set of quantitative measurements related to risk management, and included VaR,
Stress VaR, VaR Exceedance, Risk
Factor Sensitivities, and Risk and Position Limits. Commenters generally supported the use of risk-management metrics as the most important measure of compliance, indicating that these metrics could potentially provide useful supervisory information. 2700

In general, commenters supported the

use of the VaR metric. 2701 One of these commenters argued that VaR was not particularly indicative of proprietary trading, but could be helpful to reveal a trading unit’s overall size and risk profile. 2702 Another commenter indicated that significant, abrupt or inconsistent changes to VaR may need to be absorbed by market makers who absorb large demand and supply shocks

into their inventories. 2703 This

commenter contended that the six largest bank holding companies had proprietary trading losses that frequently exceeded their VaR estimates and the design and supervision of such

risk measures should be revisited.

One commenter argued that the

definition of VaR was not made clear in the proposal and was missing some important information regarding methodology as VaR methodologies tend to vary among banking entities. 2704

This commenter recommended the development of a standard methodology by the OFR including a central repository for historical calculation data for each asset for the purpose of ensuring standard calculation across the industry. This commenter also expressed concern that VaR calculations are heavily reliant on the quality of input data and stated that many markets are unable to provide sufficient

information such that VaR calculations are meaningful, including markets for illiquid products for which accurate historical price and market information is sparse and could severely under represent true potential losses under

VaR calculations. 2705

A few commenters expressed concern about the applicability of VaR when applied to ALM activities. 2706 These commenters argued that risk management metrics such as VaR would not help to distinguish ALM and valid risk mitigating hedging activities from prohibited proprietary trading. For
instance, one of these commenters stated that the proposed reliance on VaR

and Stress VaR to demonstrate bona fide hedging is misleading for ALM activities due to the typical accounting asymmetry in ALM where, for example, managed liabilities such as deposits are

not marked to market but the corresponding hedge may be.

One commenter argued that the use of stress VaR would be important to guard against excessive risk taking. 2707 A few commenters suggested that additional guidance be provided for Stress VaR including linking it to the broader stress testing regime and based on extreme

conditions that are not based on historic precedent. 2708 These commenters also argued that a one-day holding period assumption is inadequate, especially for less liquid asset classes, and

recommended that stress be measured over a longer period. One commenter argued that Stress VaR should be removed from the list of required metrics as it is not in regular use for day-to-day risk management and provides little relevant information about the intent or proportionality


### 6039 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2709 See JPMC.

2710 See ABA (Keating); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); UBS.

2711 See Occupy.

2712 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012).

2713 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2714 See Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Occupy.

2715 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2716 See Occupy.

2717 See Occupy.

2718 See Occupy. 2719 See, e.g., Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2720 See Barclays.

2721 See Occupy.

2722 See, e.g., AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Barclays; Citigroup (Feb. 2012); Prof. Duffie; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Invesco; JPMC; Occupy; Public Citizen;

see also Northern Trust; State Street (Feb. 2012).

2723 See ABA (Keating); Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); UBS.

2724 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68887. 2725 The Agencies believe this clarification responds to one commenter’s question regarding how risk and position limits will be used and assessed for purposes of the rule. See Occupy.

2726 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68887. between risk assumed and client

demands. 2709

A number of commenters requested

that VaR Exceedance be removed from

the list of metrics. These commenters argued that the primary function of VaR Exceedance is to analyze the quality of a VaR model and that VaR backtesting is already reported to regulators as part of the supervisory process. These commenters argued that VaR Exceedance does not reveal trading

intent or actual risk taken. 2710 One commenter argued that VaR Exceedance may be useful to the Agencies as an indicator of the quality of the VaR measure relative to the profit and loss of the trading unit but that a more rigorous back-testing process would serve as a better analytical tool than VaR Exceedance to evaluate the quality of

the VaR model result and should be

included as an additional metric. 2711One commenter suggested that riskbased metrics should measure risk as a function of capital. 2712 Another

commenter warned that risk metrics could be significantly higher during times of market stress and volatility than during normal times. 2713

A few commenters expressed support
for risk factor sensitivities as useful, supervisory information. 2714 One of these commenters suggested that risk

factor sensitivities could orient regulators to a trading unit’s overall size and risk profile, 2715 while another

commenter stated that risk factor

sensitivities would be the most useful tool for identifying the accumulation of

market risk in different areas of a banking entity. 2716 One commenter suggested that several risk factor sensitivity snapshots be taken throughout the day with an average value reported at the end of day. 2717

This commenter also recommended that trading strategies that rely heavily on models to calculate risk exposures (e.g., correlation trading portfolios), should trigger additional disclosures in risk factor sensitivity reporting. 2718

Commenters also supported risk and position limits as providing useful, supervisory information. Several

commenters indicated that these limits could be helpful to orient regulators to a trading unit’s overall size and risk profile. 2719 Another commenter expressed the view risk and position limits are the most comprehensive measures of risk taking and incorporate
VaR, Stress VaR, and Risk Factor

Sensitivities. 2720 A different commenter argued it was unclear how position limits are in fact a quantitative metric and not a description of a banking entity’s internal risk policies. 2721

After carefully considering the
comments received, the final rule retains the risk-management metrics

other than VaR Exceedance. The collection of information regarding Risk
and Position Limits, VaR, Stress VaR,

and Risk Factor Sensitivities is consistent with the aim of providing a means of characterizing the overall risk profile of the trading activities of each trading desk and evaluating the extent to which the quantitative profile of a trading desk’s activities is consistent with permissible activities. Moreover, a

number of commenters indicated that the risk management measures would be effective at achieving these goals. 2722 The risk management measure that was
not retained in the final rule, VaR Exceedance, was considered, in light of the comments, as not offering significant

additional information on the overall risk profile and activities of the trading

desk relative to the burden associated with computing, auditing and reporting it on an ongoing basis. 2723

The risk-management measurements included in the final rule are widely used by banking entities to measure and manage trading risks and activities. 2724 VaR, Stress VaR, and Risk FactorSensitivities provide internal, modelbased assessments of overall risk, stated in terms of large but plausible losses that may occur or changes in revenue that would be expected to result from movements in underlying risk factors. The provided description and calculation guidance for each of these

measures is consistent with both current market practice and regulatory capital requirements for banks. The final rule does not provide a prescriptive

definition of each of these

measurements as these measures must be flexible enough to be tailored to the specific trading activities of each trading desk. Supervisory guidance and comparisons of these measures across similarly situated trading desks at a given entity as well as across entities will be used to ensure that the provided

measurements conform to the description and calculation guidance provided in Appendix A. Risk and Position Limits and Usage provide an explicit assessment of management’s expectation of how much risk isrequired to perform permitted marketmaking, underwriting and hedging activities. The final rule requires that the usage of each risk and position limit be reported so that the risk taking by each trading desk can be monitored and assessed on an ongoing basis. 2725

With the exception of Stress VaR,

each of these measurements are routinely used to manage and control risk taking activities, and are also used by some banking entities for purposes of calculating regulatory capital and allocating capital internally. 2726 In thecontext of permitted market makingrelated activities, these risk management measures are useful in assessing

whether the actual risk taken is consistent with the level of principal risk that a banking entity must retain in

order to service the near-term demands of customers. Significant, abrupt or inconsistent changes to key risk management measures, such as VaR, that are inconsistent with prior experience, the experience of similarly situated trading desks and management’s stated expectations for such measures may indicate impermissible proprietary trading, and may warrant further review. In addition, indicators of unanticipated or unusual
levels of risk taken, such as breaches of internal Risk and Position Limits, may suggest behavior that is inconsistent with appropriate levels of risk and may warrant further scrutiny. The limits required under § 75.4(b)(2)(iii) and § 75.5(b)(1)(i) must meet the applicable requirements under § 75.4(b)(2)(iii) and § 75.5(b)(1)(i) and also must include appropriate metrics for the trading desk limits including, at a minimum, the

‘‘Risk Factor Sensitivities’’ and ‘‘Valueat-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics except to the extent any of the

‘‘Risk Factor Sensitivities’’ or ‘‘Value-atRisk and Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics are demonstrably ineffective for measuring and monitoring the risks of a


### 6040 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2727 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Occupy; see also Barclays.

2728 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.7.b.

2729 See SIFMA (May 2012).

2730 See AFR (Nov. 2012).

2731 See Occupy.

2732 See Barclays.

2733 See Public Citizen. 2734 See NYSE Euronext.

2735 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Occupy.

2736 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2737 See Occupy.

2738 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Occupy.

2739 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). This commenter urged that fee income and expense should be considered together with Spread P&L arguing that these two both measures of customer revenues and, in practice, may function as

substitutes for each other.

2740 See Occupy.

2741 See Northern Trust.

2742 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC;

UBS.

2743 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2744 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); see also Paul Volcker (supporting a metric considering the extent to which earnings are generated by pricing spreads rather than changes in price). 2745 See JPMC; UBS; see also SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2746 See ABA et al.; BoA; Barclays; Credit Suisse (Seidel); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Northern Trust;

SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); see also AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy.

2747 See Barclays; Occupy.

2748 See BOK; Goldman (Prop. Trading); SIFMA et

al. (Prop Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2749 See SIFMA et al. (Prop Trading) (Feb. 2012). trading desk based on the types of positions traded by, and risk exposures
of, that desk.

Under the proposal, the second set of quantitative measurements related to
the source of revenues, and included Comprehensive Profit and Loss,
Portfolio Profit and Loss, Fee Income, Spread Profit and Loss, and Comprehensive Profit and Loss

Attribution. A few commenters expressed support for Comprehensive

Profit and Loss as a reasonable

contextual metric and contended that the metric could inform the analysis of whether market-making revenues are

from customer transactions. 2727

As described above, a number of commenters expressed concern about a focus on revenues as part of evaluating market-making. 2728 For instance, one commenter argued that the rule should not require, even in guidance, that market making-related permitted activities be ‘‘designed to generate
revenues from fees, commissions, bidasks spreads or other income,’’ arguing that this prejudges appropriate results for revenue metrics and implies that a bona fide market maker is not permitted

to benefit from revenues from market

movements. 2729 One commenterexpressed concern that the source-ofrevenue metrics are subject to manipulation as these metrics depend on correctly classifying revenue into market bid-ask spreads as opposed to

other sources of revenue. 2730 One

commenter stated that this metric should serve as a secondary indication of risk levels because it could be subject to manipulation. 2731 Another

commenter recommended use of the sub-metric in Comprehensive P&L

Attribution. 2732 A different commenter recommended the adoption of clearer metrics to distinguish customer revenues from revenues from price

movements. 2733 One commenter indicated that after-the-fact application of quantitative measurements such as Comprehensive Profit and Loss may

cause firms to reconsider their commitment to market making and
recommended that, to the extent this metric is used, it should be applied flexibly in light of market conditions prevailing during the relevant time period, and as one of many factors relevant to an overall assessment of bona fide market making. 2734

A few commenters supported

Portfolio Profit and Loss as a reasonable

contextual metric to inform whether revenues from market-making

transactions are from customer

transactions. 2735 However, one of these commenters argued that this metric would not necessarily be indicative of prohibited proprietary trading and profits may reflect bona fide market making-related, underwriting, and hedging activities. 2736 Another commenter argued that this metric should serve as a secondary indication of risk levels and may be subject to manipulation. 2737

Some commenters felt that Fee Income and Expense was a useful

metric. 2738 One of these commenters argued this metric has the potential to help distinguish permitted activities from prohibited proprietary trading. 2739

Another commenter felt this metric would be useful in liquid markets that

trade with the convention of fees and
commissions but less useful, but still
indicative, in other markets that use

inter-dealer brokers to conduct clientrelated activities. 2740 One commenter argued that it would be impracticable to produce Fee Income and Expense data for foreign exchange trading, which is predominantly based on bid/offer spread. 2741

A few commenters thought that Spread P&L could be useful. 2742 One of these commenters argued that Spread P&L has the potential to help distinguish permitted activities from prohibited proprietary trading. 2743 This commenter suggested that the final rule remove the proposal’s revenue requirement as part of market-making and instead rely on revenue metrics such as Spread P&L. 2744 This commenter argued, however, that it will not always be clear how to best calculate Spread P&L and it would be critical for the Agencies to be flexible and work with banking entities to determine the appropriate proxies for spreads on an asset-class-by-asset class and trading desk-by-trading-desk basis.

One commenter contended that the proposed implementation in the proposal was more difficult than necessary and suggested End of Day Spread Proxy is sufficient. Another commenter suggested expanding the flexibility offered in choosing a bid-offer source to calculate Spread P&L. 2745

However, the majority of commenters recommended removal of Spread P&L as

a metric. 2746 These commenters argued that a meaningful measure for Spread

P&L cannot be calculated in the absence of a continuous bid-ask spread, making this metric misleading especially for illiquid positions and shallow markets.

A few commenters generally expressed support for the inclusion of Comprehensive Profit and Loss

Attribution. 2747 One of these

commenters stated that this metric was the most comprehensive metric for measuring sources of revenue and
included other metrics as sub-metrics, such as Comprehensive Profit and Loss,
Portfolio Profit and Loss, and Fee Income and Expense. Another

commenter contended the mention of ‘‘customer spreads’’ and ‘‘bid-ask spreads’’ was unclear and that both of

these terms should be removed from the calculation guidance. Other commenters argued that the benefits of this metric do not justify the costs of generating a report of Comprehensive P&L Attribution on a daily basis. 2748 One commenter urged the Agencies to

ensure that each institution be permitted to calculate this metric in a way that reflects the institution’s unique

characteristics. 2749

After carefully considering the
comments received, the final rule maintains only a modified version of Comprehensive P&L Attribution metric and does not retain the proposed Comprehensive Profit and Loss,
Portfolio Profit and Loss, Fee Income, or Spread Profit and Loss metrics. The final rule also requires volatility of comprehensive profit and loss to be reported. As pointed out by a number of


### 6041 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2750 See Barclays.

2751 See JPMC; UBS; SIFMA et al. (Prop Trading) (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating); BoA; Barclays; Credit
Suisse (Seidel).

2752 See BoA.

2753 See supra Part VI.A.3.c.7.c. 2754 See, e.g., Goldman (Prop. Trading); Volcker; John S. Reed; see also AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Sen. Merkley; Occupy; Public Citizen.

2755 See Occupy; Public Citizen; Sen. Merkley.

2756 See Goldman (Prop. Trading) (also suggesting

that New Trades P&L be substituted for Portfolio P&L in Comprehensive Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio and Portfolio Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio and Unprofitable Trading Days based on Comprehensive Profit and Loss and Unprofitable Trading Days based on Portfolio Profit and Loss).

2757 See Barclays.

2758 See NYSE Euronext. 2759 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2760 See Occupy.

2761 See Barclays.

2762 See Barclays.

2763 See Goldman (Prop. Trading). commenters, Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution provides a holistic attribution of each trading desk’s profit

and loss and contains much of the information content that is provided by many of the other metrics, such as Fee Income and Expense. 2750 Accordingly, the use of Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution in the final rule greatly simplifies the metric reporting requirement and reduces burden while retaining much of the information and analysis that was provided in the full set

of five metrics that were contained in the proposal. In addition, in response to

commenters’ concerns about the burdens of separately identifying specific revenue sources (e.g., revenues from bid-ask spreads, revenues from price appreciation), the Agencies have modified the focus of the proposed

source of revenue metrics to focus on when revenues are generated, rather than the specific sources of revenue. 2751 This approach should also help address

one commenter’s concern about the need for new, sophisticated systems to differentiate bid-ask spreads from price appreciation. 2752 The utility of this modified approach is discussed in more

detail in the discussion of the marketmaking exemption. 2753 Finally, the Comprehensive Profit and Loss

Attribution metric will ensure that all components of a trading desk’s profit

and loss are measured in a consistent and comprehensive fashion so that each individual component can be reliably compared against other components of a trading desk’s profit and loss without being considered in isolation or taken

out of context.

This measurement is intended to capture the extent, scope, and type of profits and losses generated by trading activities and provide important context for understanding how revenue is generated by trading activities. Because permitted market making-related activities seek to generate profits by providing customers with

intermediation and related services while managing, and to the extent practicable minimizing, the risks associated with any asset or risk inventory required to meet customer
demands, these revenue measurements would appear to provide helpful information to banking entities and the Agencies regarding whether actual

revenues are consistent with these expectations. Under the proposal, the third set of

measurements related to realized risks
and revenue relative to realized risks, and includes Volatility of Profit and Loss, Comprehensive Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio and Portfolio Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio, Unprofitable Trading Days based on Comprehensive Profit and Loss and Unprofitable Trading Days based on Portfolio Profit
and Loss, and Skewness of Portfolio

Profit and Loss and Kurtosis of Portfolio

Profit and Loss.

A few commenters indicated support for these metrics as appropriate,

contextual metrics. 2754 These

commenters indicated that these metrics may serve to highlight areas requiring further investigation, since high P&L volatility may indicate a deviation from

traditional client related activities and that a well-structured trading operation should be able to obtain relatively high ratios of revenue-to-risk (as measured by various metrics), low volatility, and relatively high turnover. 2755 One

commenter recommended that New

Trades P&L be substituted for Portfolio P&L for purposes of computing Volatility of P&L because New Trades P&L captures customer revenues more completely and is therefore more useful for distinguishing market making from proprietary trading. 2756 Another

commenter indicated that Skewness of

Portfolio Profit and Loss and Kurtosis of Portfolio Profit and Loss incorporates (and therefore obviates the need for a separate calculation of) the metric Volatility of Portfolio Profit and

Loss. 2757

One commenter urged that after-thefact application of Comprehensive Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio may cause

firms to reconsider their commitment to market making and argued that this metric should be applied flexibly in light of market conditions prevailing during the relevant time period and as one of many factors relevant to an

assessment of overall bona fide market making. 2758 One commenter supported monitoring Portfolio Profit and Loss to Volatility Ratio and argued that the Agencies should establish a clear pattern of profit and loss results of individual trading units through iterative application of the metrics. 2759

One commenter expressed support for Unprofitable Trading Days based on Comprehensive Profit and Loss and Unprofitable Trading Days based on Portfolio Profit and Loss indicating that these metrics may serve to highlight areas requiring further investigation, since a significant number of unprofitable trading days may indicate

a deviation from traditional clientrelated activities. 2760 Another commenter suggested that these metrics be removed as they would result in market makers being less likely to take client-facing positions due to reluctance to incur unprofitable trading days that could indicate the presence of impermissible activity despite the utility of such trades in providing liquidity to customers. 2761

One commenter requested including

Skewness of Portfolio Profit and Loss

and Kurtosis of Portfolio Profit and Loss

in the metrics set as the mostcomprehensive metric in the revenuerelative-to-risk category making other metrics unnecessary in this area. 2762 Another commenter argued that this metric would produce inconsistent results within and across trading units and would generally not support any meaningful conclusions regarding the permissibility or risk of trading

activities. 2763

After carefully considering the
comments received, the final rule does not include any of the proposed

revenue-relative-to-risk measurements. Each of these measures provides information that may generally be useful for characterizing the overall risk profile of the trading activities of each trading unit and evaluating the extent to which the quantitative profile of a trading

unit’s activities is consistent with permissible trading activities. The broad
information content of these measures, however, can largely be reproduced

from transformations of information that will be provided in the Comprehensive
Profit and Loss Attribution and, as noted above, volatility of comprehensive profit and loss must be reported. Analogs to the other metrics

such as Skewness of Portfolio Profit and

Loss and Kurtosis of Portfolio Profit and Loss can be computed similarly from information that will be provided in the Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution. Accordingly, the

information contained in these metrics


### 6042 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2764 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); Barclays; John Reed; JPMC; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2765 See Barclays.

2766 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2767 See, e.g., Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; John Reed.

2768 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; SIFMA

et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Morgan Stanley.

2769 See Japanese Bankers Ass’n; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley. 2770 See Barclays; see also Invesco.

2771 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2772 See Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2773 See Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale.

2774 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); see also

Invesco.

2775 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading) ; JPMC; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); UBS.

2776 See Occupy. 2777 See Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2778 See SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2779 See SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); see also Goldman (Prop Trading).

2780 See Barclays; Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Oliver Wyman (Dec. 2011); SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb.
2012).

2781 See Barclays; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2782 See Goldman (Prop. Trading); JPMC; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). is retained in the final rule while the burden associated with computing, auditing and reporting these additional metrics on an ongoing basis has been

eliminated.

Under the proposal, the fourth set of quantitative measurements related to customer-facing activity measurements. These metrics include Inventory Risk Turnover, Inventory Aging, and Customer-facing Trade Ratio.

A few commenters supported the proposal’s Inventory Risk Turnover metric though some of these commenters suggested modifications to

the metric. 2764 One commenter argued

that this metric could indicate whether a given trading unit holds risk and inventory consistently with the asset class in which such trading unit deals, the types of trading activity in which the trading unit engages, and the scale and scope of the client activity that such trading unit serves. 2765 Another commenter argued that the final rule should explicitly state that a trading unit’s inventory management practices will be evaluated using this metric. 2766 Some commenters expressed the view that this metric might be useful in the case of liquid positions but not in the case of illiquid or difficult-to-hedge products, which naturally have lower risk turnover. Others noted support for this metric tailored on an asset-by-asset

basis. 2767

A few commenters requested that the final rule clarify that this metric will not be required to be calculated for every possible Risk Factor Sensitivity measurement for the applicable portfolio and that a banking entity and its regulator should determine one or two core risk factors per asset classes with respect to which this metric that

will be calculated to strike a reasonable

balance between costs of calculations

and benefits of this metric. 2768 Other commenters argued the Inventory Risk

Turnover Metric was difficult to
measure, burdensome, and would create uncertainty for derivatives counterparties. 2769

A few commenters supported the Inventory Aging metric. One commenter argued it should be included in the metrics set to indicate whether a given trading desk holds risk and inventory consistently within the asset class in which such trading desk deals, the type of trading activity in which the trading unit engages, and the scale and scope of the client activity that such trading desk

serves. 2770 This commenter suggested tailoring the metric based on the market for a particular asset class and market conditions because aging levels may be higher in less liquid markets. A number of commenters argued that application of the Inventory Aging metric is only appropriate for cash products and should not be used for trading units engaged in transactions in financial

instruments such as derivatives. 2771 Another commenter argued that the Inventory Aging metric is generally not
useful for derivatives, and for nonderivatives it provides essentially similar information to Inventory Risk

Turnover. 2772 One commenter requested additional guidance on how to calculate

this metric. 2773

A few commenters indicated that the Customer-Facing Trade Ratio could be helpful in distinguishing prohibited proprietary trading from market making

and would be more effective than the proposal’s negative presumption against interdealer trading to evaluate the amount of interdealer trading that is consistent with market making-related or hedging activity in a particular

business. 2774 Some commenters suggested that the metric could be improved and argued that the number of

transactions executed over a calculation period does not provide an adequate measure for the level of customer-facing trading because it does not reflect the

size of transactions or the amount of risk. These commenters suggestedreplacing the metric with a more risksensitive metric or defining the ratio so that it measures notional principal risk

associated with customer transactions and is appropriately tailored to the

relevant asset class or market. 2775

A number of commenters raised

concerns about the definition of customer for purposes of this metric. One commenter argued that a failure to

define ‘‘customer’’ to differentiate

between customers and non-customers

would render this metric meaningless. 2776 Another commenter contended that the metric would be appropriate as long as banking entities have the flexibility to determine who is

a customer. 2777 One commenter argued that using a definition of ‘‘customer’’

that is different between the market making-related activity and the reported metric could make legitimate market making-related activity with customers appear to be prohibited proprietary trading. 2778 This commenter argued that other dealers and other registered market participants should be recognized as customers of the banking entity. A few commenters contended

that this metric would be burdensome if it required a banking entity to tag

individual trades as customer or noncustomer. 2779 A few commenters argued that interdealer trading should be allowed as part of market making and argued this metric would not provide a useful measure of customer-facing activity. 2780 Some commenters also expressed concern about the implications of such a metric for hedging activity, which may involve relatively less customer-facing activity. 2781

After carefully considering the
comments received, the final rule retains all three of the customer-facing activity measurements from the proposal, though each measure has been

modified. A number of commenters raised issues regarding the complexities associated with computing the Inventory Risk Turnover metric. In particular, as noted above, some commenters argued that computing the metric for every reported risk factor sensitivity would be burdensome and

would not be informative. 2782 The inventory metric required in the final rule, Inventory Turnover, is applied at

the transaction level and not at the risk factor sensitivity level. Accordingly, for a given trading desk and calculation period, e.g., 30 days, there is only one value of the Inventory Turnover metric

rather than one value for each risk factor sensitivity that is managed and reported by the trading desk. In this sense, the turnover metric required in the final

rule is similar to more traditional and common measures of inventory turnover. Moreover, the required turnover metric is simpler and less costly to track and record while still


### 6043 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2783 The Agencies believe that this should address commenters’ uncertainty with respect to how the Inventory Risk Turnover metric would work for

derivatives. See Japanese Bankers Ass’n; SIFMA (Asset Mgmt.) (Feb. 2012); Morgan Stanley.

2784 See Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Morgan Stanley; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012). 2785 See SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012).

2786 See NYSE Euronext.

2787 See UBS. 2788 See CH/ABASA; Goldman (Prop. Trading); Japanese Bankers Ass’n; Occupy; SIFMA (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading).

2789 See Morgan Stanley.

2790 See Morgan Stanley.

2791 See Prof. Duffie; Occupy.

2792 See Occupy. providing banking entities and Agencies with meaningful information regarding

the extent to which the size and volume of trading activities are directed at servicing the demands of customers. In addition, the description of Inventory Turnover in the final rule provides explicit guidance on how to apply the metric to derivative positions. 2783

Inventory Aging provides banking entities and Agencies with meaningful information regarding the extent to which the size and volume of trading activities are directed at servicing the

demands of customers. In the case of Inventory Aging, the proposal required that the aging schedule be organized according to a specific set of age ranges (i.e., 0–30 days, 30–60 days, 60–90 days, 90–180 days, 180–360 days, and more than 360 days). This requirement has not been adopted in the final rule in order to provide greater flexibility and to recognize that specific age ranges that may be relevant for one asset class may

be less relevant for another asset class.
Also, to address commenters’ uncertainty about how this metric would apply to derivatives, the final rule’s description of the Inventory Aging metric provides guidance on how to apply the metric to derivative positions. 2784

The Customer Facing Trade Ratio provides directionally useful information regarding the extent to which trading transactions are

conducted with customers. In the case of the Customer Facing Trade Ratio, the proposal required that customer trades

be measured on a trade count basis. The final rule requires that the Customer Facing Trade Ratio be computed in two ways. As in the proposal, the metric must be computed by measuring trades on a trade count basis. Additionally, as suggested by some commenters, the final rule requires that the metric be computed by measuring trades on a

notional value basis. The value based approach is required to reflect the fact noted by some commenters, that a trade count based measure may not accurately represent the amount of customer facing activity if customer trade sizes systematically differ from the sizes of
non-customer trades. In addition, the term ‘‘customer’’ for purposes of the Customer-Facing Trade Ratio is defined
in the same manner as the terms client, customer, and counterparty used for purposes of the market-making exemption. This will ensure that the information provided by this metric is useful for purposes of monitoring compliance with the market-making exemption. 2785

The fifth set of quantitative measurements relates to the payment of fees, commissions, and spreads, and includes the Pay-to-Receive Spread

Ratio. This measurement was intended to measure the extent to which trading activities generate revenues for providing intermediation services, rather than generate expenses paid to

other intermediaries for such services. Because market making-related activities ultimately focus on servicing customer demands, they typically generate substantially more fees, spreads and other sources of customer revenue than must be paid to other intermediaries to support customer transactions. Proprietary trading activities, however, that generate almost no customer facing revenue will typically pay a significant amount of fees, spreads and commissions in the execution of trading strategies that are expected to benefit from short-term price movements. Accordingly, the Agencies expected that the proposed Pay-to-Receive Spread Ratio

measurement would be useful in assessing whether permitted market making-related activities are primarily generating, rather than paying, fees, spreads and other transactional revenues or expenses. A level of fees, commissions, and spreads paid that is inconsistent with prior experience, the experience of similarly situated trading desks and management’s stated expectations for such measures could indicate impermissible proprietary trading.

One commenter expressed concernthat after-the-fact application of the Payto-Receive Spread Ratio could cause

firms to reconsider their commitment to market making. This commenter suggested that if this measure is used, it be applied flexibly, in light of market conditions prevailing during the relevant time period, and as one of many factors relevant to an overall

assessment of bona fide market making. 2786 Another commenter suggested expanding the flexibility offered in choosing a bid-offer source tothe entire process of calculating Pay-toReceive Spread Ratio. 2787 A number of commenters argued for removing this

metric because its calculation incorporates the Spread P&L metric. 2788 Some of these commenters argued that the metric requires a trade-by-trade analysis which would be expensive to compute and would not provide any

additional information that is not

available from other metrics. One commenter alleged that this metric was not calculable by any methodology. 2789

The Pay-to-Receive Spread Ratio has

not been retained in the final rule. As noted by some commenters, the broad

information content of this metric will largely be captured in the Comprehensive Profit and Loss
Attribution measurement. In addition, the Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution will place such factors thatare related to the proposed Pay-toReceive Spread Ratio in context with

other factors that determine total profitability. Accordingly, factors relating to the payment of fees, commissions and spreads will not be

considered in isolation but will be viewed in a context that is appropriate to the entirety of the trading desk’s activities. Finally, using the information contained in the Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution to holistically assess the range of factors that determine overall profitability, rather than requiring a large number of separate and distinct measurements, will reduce the resulting compliance burden while ensuring an integrated and holistic approach to assessing the activities of each trading desk.

Commenters also suggested a number

of additional metrics be added to the

final rule that were not contained in the proposal. One commenter, who

advocated for an alternative framework for market making supported by
structural and transactional metrics, suggested that structural metrics could include the ratio of salespeople to

traders and the level of resources devoted to client research and trading

content. 2790 Two commenters supported the use of a counterparty risk exposure measure, not only to the risk of counterparty default but also to potential gains and losses to major counterparties for each of a list of systemically important scenarios. 2791 One of these commenters suggested that entity-wide inflation risk assessments be produced on a daily basis. 2792 This commenter also argued that an important metric that is missing is a Liquidity Gap Risk metric that estimates


### 6044 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2793 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012).

2794 See AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); see also Public

Citizen. 2795 See Credit Suisse (Seidel); Morgan Stanley; UBS; Wells Fargo (Prop. Trading); Socie  ́te

 ́ Ge  ́ne

 ́rale; Occupy; Paul Volcker; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Western Asset Mgmt.; Public Citizen. 2796 The Agencies believe this review, along with the fact that quantitative measurements will not be used as a dispositive tool for determining compliance and the removal of many of the proposed metrics, should help address commenters’ concerns that some of the proposed quantitative

measurements will not be as relevant for certain
asset classes, markets, and activities. See Morgan Stanley; SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading); Stephen

Roach.

2797 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(2).

2798 Id. the price change that occurs following a sudden disruption in liquidity for a product, arguing that there needs to be an industry-wide effort to more accurately measure and account for the significant effect that liquidity and changes in its prevailing level have on

the valuation of each asset.

One commenter argued that the metrics regime was well-designed for market-making but lacking in other areas like hedging. This commenter

recommended the addition of additionalmetrics more applicable to other nonmarket making activities like a net profit metric for hedging. 2793 Two commenters argued that quantitative measurement for underwriting was not included in the proposal and stated that in a bona fide underwriting, unsold balances should be relatively small so a marker for potential non-bona fide underwriting should be recognized if VaR (unhedged and uncovered) of the unsold balance that is allocated to a banking entity is large relative to the expected revenue measured by the pro rata underwriting spread. 2794

After carefully considering the
comments received, these and other proposed metrics have not been included as part of the final rule. One major concern raised by a range of commenters was the degree of complexity and burden that would be required by the metrics reporting regime. In light of these comments, the

final rule includes a number of quantitative measurements that are expected to provide a means of characterizing the overall risk profile of the trading activities of each trading desk and evaluating the extent to which the quantitative profile of a trading

desk’s activities is consistent with permissible trading activities in a cost

effective and efficient manner while being appropriate for a range of different trading activities. Moreover, while many commenters suggested a number of different alternative metrics, many of

these alternatives are consistent with the broad themes, risk management, sources of revenues, customer facing activity, that inform the quantitative

measurements that are retained in the final rule. Finally, banking entities will be expected to develop their own metrics, as appropriate, to further inform and improve their own monitoring and understanding of their trading activities. Many of the alternative metrics that were suggested by commenters, especially those that relate to a specific market or type of instrument, may be used by banking entities as they develop their own quantitative measurements.

For each individual quantitative
measurement in the final rule, Appendix A describes the measurement, provides general guidance regarding

how the measurement should be calculated and specifies the period over

which each calculation should be made. The proposed quantitative measurements attempt to incorporate, wherever possible, measurements already used by banking entities to manage risks associated with their trading activities. Of the measurements proposed, the Agencies expect that a large majority of measurements proposed are either (i) already routinely calculated by banking entities or (ii) based solely on underlying data that are already routinely calculated by banking entities. However, calculating these measurements according to the specifications described in Appendix A and at the trading desk level mandated by the final rule may require banking entities to implement new processes to calculate and furnish the required

data. 2795

The extent of the burden associated with calculating and reporting quantitative measurements will likely vary depending on the particular

measurements and differences in the sophistication of management information systems at different banking entities. As noted, the proposal tailored

these data collections to the size and type of activity conducted by each banking entity in an effort to minimize the burden in particular on firms that engage in few or no trading activities subject to the proposed rule.

The Agencies have also attempted to provide, to the extent possible, a standardized description and general method of calculating each quantitative measurement that, while taking into account the potential variation among trading practices and asset classes, would facilitate reporting of sufficiently

uniform information across different banking entities so as to permit horizontal reviews and comparisons of the quantitative profile of trading desks

across firms.

The Agencies expect to evaluate the data collected during the compliance period both for its usefulness as a barometer of impermissible trading activity and excessive risk-taking and

for its costs. This evaluation will consider, among other things, whether all of the quantitative measurements are
useful for all asset classes and markets, as well as for all the trading activities subject to the metrics requirement, or if further tailoring is warranted. 2796 The Agencies propose to revisit the metrics
and determine, based on a review of the data collected by September 30, 2015, whether to modify, retain or replace the metrics. To allow firms to develop systems to calculate and report these metrics, the Agencies have delayed all reporting of the metrics until July 2014, phased in the reporting requirements over a multi-year period, and reduced the category of banking entities that must report the metrics to a smaller number of firms that engage in significant trading activity. These steps,

combined with the reduction in the number of metrics required to be reported, are designed to reduce the cost and burden associated with compiling and reporting the metrics while retaining the usefulness of this data collection in helping to ensure that trading activities are conducted in compliance with section 13 of the BHC

Act and the final rule and in a manner
that monitors, assesses and controls the

risks associated with these activities.

4. Section 75.21: Termination of
Activities or Investments; Authorities

for Violations

Section 75.21 implements section 13(e)(2) of the BHC Act, which authorizes an Agency to order a banking entity subject to its jurisdiction to

terminate activities or investments that

violate or function as an evasion of

section 13 of the Act. 2797 Section 13(e)(2) further provides that this paragraph shall not be construed to limit the inherent authority of any Federal agency or State regulatory authority to further restrict any

investments or activities under otherwise applicable provisions of

law. 2798

The proposed rule implemented section 13(e)(2) in two parts. First, § 75.21(a) of the proposal required any banking entity that engages in an activity or makes an investment in

violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or the proposed rule, or in a manner that

functions as an evasion of the


### 6045 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2799 See proposed rule § 75.21(a). The proposal noted that the Agencies included § 75.21(a), in addition to the provisions of § 75.21(b) of the proposed rule, to clarify that the requirement to terminate an activity or, as relevant, dispose of an investment would be triggered when a banking entity discovers the violation or evasion, regardless of whether an Agency order has been issued.

2800 See proposed rule § 75.21(b).

2801 See Sen. Merkley; Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Public Citizen.

2802 See, e.g., BEC et al. (Jan. 2012); John Reed;
Better Markets (Feb. 2012); AFR et al. (Feb. 2012); Occupy; Sen. Merkley; Public Citizen.

2803 See, e.g., Form Letter Type A; Form Letter Type B; Sarah McKee; David R. Wilkes; Ben Leet; Karen Michaelis; Barry Rein; Allan Richardson; Ronald Gedrim; Susan Pashkoff; Joan Budd; Frances Vreman; Lisa Kazmier; Michael Wenger; Dyanne DiRosario; Alexander Clayton; James Ofsink; Richard Leining (arguing that violators should face penalties such as seizure and discharge of the board
and executives); Lee Smith; see also Occupy; Public

Citizen.

2804 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012) (contending that penalties should include specific administrative penalties, including monetary penalties, bars, cease and desist orders, strengthened penalties for recurring violations, and sanctioning of employees involved in the violation and public reporting of such sanctions); AFR et al. (arguing that section 8 of the BHC Act provides civil penalties for violations by a company or individual and criminal penalties for willful violations of the BHC Act). See also Occupy (requesting the Agencies provide penalties that are specific to this rule in addition to the general framework for criminal and civil penalties in section 8 of the BHC Act).

2805 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012); Occupy; AFR

et al. (Feb. 2012).

2806 See John Reed; Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

See also BEC et al. (Jan. 2012) (arguing that CEOs and CFOs should be held fully responsible for any violations of the rule by any employees above the clerical level); Occupy (recommending that traders relying on an exemption in the proposed rule be held personally liable for any losses on trading positions).

2807 See Occupy.

2808 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(g)(3).

2809 See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 1818(i) (authorizing imposition of civil money penalties up to the maximum daily amount of $1,000,000 for, among other things, knowing violations of law or regulation).

2810 See 12 U.S.C. 1813(u) (defining ‘‘institutionaffiliated party’’). 2811 See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 164 (authorizing imposition of civil money penalties for, among other things, submitting false or misleading reports
or information to the OCC); 18 U.S.C. 1005 (authorizing imposition of fines of not more than $1,000,000 or imprisonment not more than 30 years, or both, for, among other things, making a false entry in the books, reports or statements of a bank with intent to injure, defraud or deceive).

2812 See Better Markets (Feb. 2012).

2813 See Sen. Merkley; Public Citizen; Better
Markets (Feb. 2012); Profs. Admati & Pfleiderer.

2814 See Regulatory Capital Rules: Regulatory Capital, Implementation of Basel III, Capital Adequacy, Transition Provisions, Prompt Corrective Action, Standardized Approach for Risk-weighted Assets, Market Discipline and Disclosure Requirements, Advanced Approaches Risk-Based Capital Rule, and Market Risk Capital Rule; Final Rule, 78 FR 62017 (Friday, October 11, 2013). requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or the proposed rule, including through an abuse of any activity or investment permitted under subparts B
or C, or otherwise violates the restrictions and requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or the proposed rule, to terminate the activity and, as relevant, dispose of the investment. 2799 Second, § 75.21(b) of the proposal provided that if, after due notice and an opportunity for hearing, the respective Agency finds reasonable cause to believe that any banking entity has engaged in an activity or made an investment described in paragraph (a), the Agency may, by order, direct the entity to restrict, limit, or terminate the activity and, as relevant, dispose of the

investment. 2800

Several commenters urged the Agencies to strengthen the authorities provided for under § 75.21, 2801 with some commenters expressing concern that the proposed rule does not establish

sufficient enforcement mechanisms and penalties for violations of the rule’s requirements. 2802 Some commenters suggested the Agencies add language in § 75.21 authorizing the imposition of automatic and significant financial penalties—as significant as the potential gains from illegal proprietary trading— on traders, supervisors, executives, and firms for violating section 13 of the BHC

Act and the final rule. 2803 These commenters suggested the Agencies incorporate reference to the Board’s authority under section 8 of the BHC
Act into the rule, 2804 and others encouraged the Agencies to rely on their inherent authority to impose automatic penalties and fines. 2805 A few
commenters stated that traders, management, and banking entities should be held responsible for

violations under certain

circumstances. 2806 Finally, another

commenter recommended that officers and directors of a banking entity be removed from office, be prohibited from being affiliated with a banking entity, and be subject to salary clawbacks for

violations of section 13 of the BHC Act

and the final rule. 2807

The Agencies note that the authorities provided for in § 75.21 are not exclusive. The Agencies have a number of enforcement tools at their disposal to carry out their obligations to ensure compliance with section 13 of the BHC
Act and the final rule, and need not reference them expressly in § 75.21 in order to exercise them. Specifically, the Agencies may rely on their inherent authorities under otherwise applicable provisions of banking, securities, and commodities laws to bring enforcement actions against banking entities, their
officers and directors, and other institution-affiliated parties for

violations of law. 2808 For example, a banking entity that violates section 13 of the BHC Act and the final rule may be subject to criminal and civil penalties under section 8 of the BHC Act. Banking entities may also be subject to formal

enforcement actions under section 8 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (FDIA), such as cease and desist orders or civil money penalty actions, 2809 or safety and soundness orders under section 39 of the FDIA which may be enforceable through assessment of civil money penalties and through the Federal court system. In addition,
officers, directors, and other institutionaffiliated parties 2810 may be subject to civil money penalties, prohibition or removal actions, and personal cease and

desist orders under section 8 of the
FDIA. Submission of late, false, or misleading reports, including false statements on compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act or the final rule, may also result in actions under applicable securities, commodities, banking, and criminal laws, including imposition of civil money and criminal penalties. 2811 Therefore, the final rule is consistent with the proposal and does not mention

other enforcement actions available to

address violations of section 13 of the

BHC Act and this final rule.

Section 13 of the BHC Act and the

final rule do not limit the reach or applicability of the antifraud and other provisions of the Federal laws to banking entities, including, for example, section 17(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or section 10(b) and 15(c) of the Exchange Act and the rules promulgated

thereunder.

One commenter also suggested that the Agencies use their authority under section 13(d)(3) of the BHC Act to impose additional capital requirements and quantitative limitations on banking entities for repeat violations of the prohibition on proprietary trading. 2812 The Agencies believe they can rely on

other inherent enforcement authorities to address repeat violations. The Agencies note that several other commenters also requested the Agencies to exercise their authority under section 13(d)(3). 2813 The Agencies do not believe that it is appropriate to exercise their authority under this section at this time, primarily because the capital treatment of banking entities’ trading activities is currently being addressed through the Agencies’ risk-based capital rulemakings. 2814 Additionally, the Agencies believe Congress intended section 13(d)(3) to serve the prudential purposes of bolstering the safety and soundness of individual banking

entities and the wider U.S. financial system. To the extent commenters


### 6046 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2815 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); JPMC; Barclays; Goldman (Prop. Trading); BoA; ABA (Keating); Comm. on Capital Market Regulation; BEC et al.; ISDA (Apr. 2012).

2816 See Barclays (arguing that ideally the umbrella Federal regulator of the enterprise should take this role); Goldman (Prop. Trading).

2817 See BoA; BEC et al.

2818 See Comm. on Capital Market Regulation.

2819 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA (recommending that the Board be responsible for resolving potentially conflicting supervisory recommendations or matters requiring attention arising from examinations as well); ISDA (Apr.
2012). See also ABA (Keating) (arguing that the Agencies should defer to the Board’s sole authority to interpret provisions of Volcker that intersect with other statutory provisions subject to the Board’s jurisdictional authority, such as Super 23A); JPMC (contending that the Agencies should adopt and seek comment on a protocol for supervision and enforcement that will ensure a given banking entity will face one set of rules and different banking
entities will face the same set of rules). The Agencies decline to adopt the commenter’s suggested approach of deferring to the Board’s sole interpretive authority with respect to the provisions of the final rule. The Agencies believe at this time that such an approach would be neither appropriate nor effective given the different authorities and expertise of each Agency. See Part VI.C (discussing the Agencies’ decision not to adopt some commenters’ requests that a single agency be responsible for determining compliance with
section 13).

2820 See SIFMA et al. (Prop. Trading) (Feb. 2012); BoA (stating that the Agencies should issue one set of exam findings under these circumstances); ISDA (Apr. 2012).

2821 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(c)(2).

2822 See 12 U.S.C. 1851(e)(2) (requiring ‘‘due notice and opportunity for hearing’’).

2823 See 12 U.S.C. 1844 (establishing jurisdictional boundaries for regulation of bank holding companies); see also 12 U.S.C. 1828a (antievasion statute empowering OCC, FDIC, and the Board to impose restrictions on relationships or

transactions between banks and their subsidiaries
and affiliates). 2824 44 U.S.C. 3501 et seq.

2825 See 76 FR 68846, 68936, Nov. 7, 2011 (joint
release of the Board, OCC, FDIC, and the SEC), and
77 FR 8332, 8420, Feb. 14, 2012.

2826 76 FR at 68936. suggested section 13(d)(3) be employed for a punitive purpose, the Agencies do not believe the provision was designed to serve such a purpose nor do the Agencies believe that would be an appropriate use of the provision. Thus, the Agencies believe section 13(d)(3) is more appropriately employed for the prudential purposes of bolstering the safety and soundness of individual banking entities and the wider financial stability of the U.S. financial system.

Commenters also urged the Agencies to clearly delineate in the final rule the jurisdictional authority of each of the Agencies to enforce compliance with

section 13 of the BHC Act and the implementing final rule. A number of commenters recommended approaches to coordinating examinations and enforcement among the Agencies, as well as to providing interpretive guidance. 2815 For example, some

commenters observed that more than one Agency would have jurisdiction over a given banking entity, and recommended that supervision and

enforcement of the final rule for all entities within a banking enterprise remain completely with one Agency. 2816 Further, some commenters recommended that a single Agency be appointed to provide interpretations, supervision, and enforcement of section

13 and the rules thereunder for all banking entities. 2817 Similarly, one commenter suggested that the Board be given initial authority to supervise the implementation of the rule because it is the primary enforcer of the BHC Act and the single regulator that can currently look across a banking group’s entire global businesses, regardless of legal entity. This commenter stated that the

Board could then determine whether an activity should be delegated to one of the other Agencies for further

examination or enforcement. 2818 In addition, with respect to interpretive authority, some commenters indicated that the Board should be given sole interpretive authority of the statute and

the rules thereunder. 2819 Other commenters urged the Agencies to supervise and enforce the rule on a

coordinated basis so as to minimize duplicative enforcement efforts, reduce costs, and promote certainty. 2820

Section 13(e)(2) mandates that each Agency enforce compliance of section 13 with respect to a banking entity ‘‘under the respective [A]gency’s jurisdiction.’’ 2821 This section provides the Agencies with the authority to order a banking entity to terminate activities

or investments that violate or function

as an evasion of section 13 of the BHC

Act. 2822 Decisions about whether to

issue such orders could be made after examinations or otherwise. Nothing in the final rule limits an Agency’s inherent authority to conduct examinations or otherwise inspect banking entities to ensure compliance

with the final rule. Section 75.1 of each Agency’s proposed rule described the specific types of banking entities to which that Agency’s rule applies. The Agencies acknowledge commenters’ concerns about overlapping jurisdictional authority. The Agencies recognize that, on occasion, a banking entity may be subject to jurisdiction by more than one Agency. As is customary, the Agencies plan to coordinate their

examination and enforcement proceedings under section 13, to the extent possible and practicable, so as to limit duplicative actions and undue costs and burdens for banking

entities. 2823

The Agencies are adopting § 75.21 substantially as proposed. Accordingly, § 75.21(a) of the final rule provides that any banking entity that engages in an activity or makes an investment in

violation of section 13 of the BHC Act

or the final rule or acts in a manner that

functions as an evasion of the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or the final rule, including through an abuse of any activity or investment permitted or expressly excluded by the
terms of the final rule, or otherwise

violates the restrictions and requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or the final rule, shall, upon discovery, promptly terminate the activity and, as relevant, dispose of the investment. This provision allows the Agencies to enforce the rule’s prohibitions against proprietary trading and sponsoring or owning interests in covered funds regardless of how banking entities classify their actions, while also providing banking entities the freedom to legitimately engage in those banking activities which are outside the scope of the statute.

VII. Administrative Law Matters

A. Paperwork Reduction Act Analysis

The Paperwork Reduction Act (‘‘PRA’’) provides that a Federal agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a

collection of information unless it displays a currently valid control number issued by the Office of Management and Budget (‘‘OMB’’). 2824 This final rulemaking contains several

collections of information for which the three Federal banking agencies—the Board, the OCC, and FDIC—sought control numbers at the time they proposed the same substantive requirements that the Commission later proposed. 2825

To avoid double accounting of

information collections for which control numbers were sought, the Commission did not propose and is not finalizing an information collection request for this rulemaking. Rather, as indicated in its proposed rulemaking, the Board provided that it would submit

its information collection to OMB once its final rule is published, and that the

submission would include burden for Federal Reserve-supervised institutions,
as well as burden for OCC-, FDIC-, SEC-, and CFTC-supervised institutions under a holding company. 2826 The
Board, OCC, and FDIC, as well as the SEC, are expected to adopt equivalent final rulemakings on or about the same date as the CFTC adopts its final rule.
The Board, OCC, and FDIC included in


### 6047 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2827 See 13 CFR 121.201; see also 13 CFR 121.103(a)(6) (noting factors that the Small Business Administration considers in determining whether an entity qualifies as a small business, including receipts, employees, and other measures of its domestic and foreign affiliates).

2828 See Joint Proposal, 76 FR at 68938–68939.

2829 See BoA; SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb. 2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012); ABA (Keating).

2830 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012). 2831 See Part VI.B.1. of this **SUPPLEMENTARY**

**INFORMATION**

**.** the Supplementary Information of their final rulemakings an overview of their PRA analyses including burden cost estimates, with further analyses to be provided in the supporting statements required to be submitted to OMB according to their regulations implementing the PRA.

In particular, section 619 of the DoddFrank Act provides that the banking agencies, the SEC, and the Commission engage in ‘‘coordinated rulemaking,’’

which includes all entities for which the Commission ‘‘is the primary financial regulatory agency, as defined in section

2’’ of the Dodd-Frank Act. Section 2 defines ‘‘primary financial regulatory agency’’ as a Federal banking agency with respect to certain depository institutions except as provided in other

subsections of section 2. In subsection (12)(C), the Commission is designated as the primary financial regulatory agency for, among other things, ‘‘any . . . swap dealer . . . registered with the
[Commission] . . ..’’ Section 4s(c)(1) of the CEA, as adopted in section 731 of the Dodd-Frank Act, provides that ‘‘any person that is required to be registered as a swap dealer shall register with the Commission regardless of whether the person is also a depository institution.’’

Accordingly, banking entities, including domestic depository institutions and branches and agencies of foreign banks subject to supervision by OCC or the Board, have registered with the Commission. It is presently not known how many additionally may register. To ensure that the Commission has access to fulfill its statutory obligations and not unduly burden its registrants with duplicative information collection requirements, and pursuant to its proposed rulemaking, the Commission will request, pursuant to 44
U.S.C. 3509, that the director of the OMB designate the banking agencies as the respective collection agencies for PRA purposes for all banking entities for which the Commission is the primary financial regulatory agency with respect to this rulemaking.

B. Regulatory Flexibility Act Analysis

In general, section 4 of the Regulatory Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. 604) (RFA) requires an agency to prepare a final regulatory flexibility analysis (FRFA) for a final rule unless the agency certifies that the rule will not, if promulgated, have a significant economic impact on

a substantial number of small entities (defined as of July 22, 2013, to include banking entities with total assets of $500 million or less (‘‘small banking entities’’). 2827 Pursuant to section 605(b) of the RFA, a FRFA is not required if an agency certifies that the final rule will not have a significant economic impact

on a substantial number of small entities. The Agencies have considered the potential economic impact of the final rule on small banking entities in accordance with the RFA. The Agencies

believe that the final rule will not have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small banking

entities for the reasons described below.

The Agencies previously considered the impact of the proposed rule for purposes of the RFA and concluded that the proposed rule would not appear to have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small banking entities. In support of this conclusion, the proposed rule, among other things,

noted that the thresholds for the metrics reporting requirements under § 75.7 and Appendix A and for the enhanced and core compliance program requirements under § 75.20 and Appendix C of the proposed rule would not capture small banking entities. 2828

The Agencies received several comments on the impact of the proposed rule on small entities. Commenters argued that the Agencies incorrectly concluded that the proposed rule would not have a significant economic impact on a substantial

number of small entities. 2829 Commenters asserted that the proposed rule would have a significant economic impact on numerous small non-banking entities by restricting their access to a variety of products and services, including covered fund-linked products for investment and hedging purposes and underwriting and market-making

related services. 2830

The Agencies have carefully

considered these comments in developing a final rule. To minimize burden on small banking entities, section 75.20(f)(1) of the final rule provides that a banking entity that does not engage in covered trading activities (other than trading in U.S. government or agency obligations, obligations of specified government sponsored entities, and state and municipal obligations) or covered fund activities and investments need only establish a compliance program prior to becoming engaged in such activities or making
such investments. In addition, to minimize the burden on small banking entities, a banking entity with total
consolidated assets of $10 billion or less that engages in covered trading

activities and/or covered fund activities may satisfy the requirements of the final rule by including in its existing compliance policies and procedures appropriate references to the requirements of section 13 and the final rule and adjustments as appropriate given the activities, size, scope and complexity of the banking entity. Only those banking entities with total assets of greater than $10 billion will need to adopt more detailed or enhanced compliance requirements under the final rule. (For purposes of the enhanced compliance program in Appendix B of the final rule, the threshold for banking entities is total
consolidated assets of $50 billion or more.) Accordingly, the compliance requirements under the final rule do not have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small banking

entities.

Likewise, the final rule raises the threshold for metrics reporting from the proposed rule to capture only firms that engage in significant trading activities. Specifically, the metrics reporting requirements under § 75.20 and Appendix A of the final rule apply only to banking entities with average trading
assets and liabilities on a consolidated, worldwide basis for the preceding year equal to or greater than $10 billion. Accordingly, the metrics reporting requirements under the final rule do not impact small banking entities.

Moreover, the Agencies have revised

the definition of covered fund in the final rule to address many of the concerns raised by commenters regarding the unintended consequences of the proposed definition. 2831 The

definition of covered fund under the

final rule contains a number of exclusions for entities that may rely on

exclusions from the Investment Company Act of 1940 contained in section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act but that are not engaged in investment activities of the type contemplated by

section 13 of the BHC Act. These include, for example, exclusions for wholly owned subsidiaries, joint ventures, acquisition vehicles, insurance company separate accounts, registered investments companies, and public welfare investment funds. The Agencies believe that these changes will


### 6048 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

2832 See SIFMA et al. (Covered Funds) (Feb.
2012); Chamber (Feb. 2012).

2833 See e.g., In Mid-Tex Electric Cooperative v.
FERC, 773 F.2d 327 (D.C. Cir. 1985); United

Distribution Cos. v. FERC, 88 F.3d 1105, 1170 (D.C.
Cir. 1996); Cement Kiln Recycling Coalition v. EPA, 255 F.3d 855 (D.C. Cir. 2001). Commenters relied on Aeronautical Repair Station Association v.
Federal Aviation Administration, 494 F.3d 161 (DC Cir 2007) to argue that the Agencies must consider

the indirect economic effects of the final rule on small non-banking entities. This case is inapposite, however, because there the agency’s own rulemaking release expressly stated that the rule imposed responsibilities directly on certain small business contractors. The court reaffirmed its prior holdings that the RFA limits its application to small entities ‘‘which will be subject to the proposed regulation—that is, those small entities to which the proposed rule will apply.’’ Id. at 176 (emphasis and internal quotations omitted). further minimize the burden for small banking entities such as those that may use wholly owned subsidiaries for organizational convenience or make public welfare investments to achieve their financial and Community Reinvestment Act goals.

Finally, in response to commenters’ assertion that the proposed rule would have had a significant economic impact on numerous small non-banking entities by restricting their access to a variety of products and services, 2832 the Agencies note that the RFA does not require the Agencies to consider the impact of the final rule, including its indirect
economic effects, on small entities that are not subject to the requirements of

the final rule. 2833

For the reasons stated above, the OCC, FDIC, SEC, and CFTC certify, for the banking entities subject to each such Agency’s jurisdiction, that the final rule will not result in a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. In light of the foregoing, the Board does not believe, for the banking entities subject to the Board’s jurisdiction, that the final rule would have a significant economic impact on

a substantial number of small entities.

List of Subjects in 17 CFR Part 75

Banks, Banking, Compensation,
Credit, Derivatives, Federal branches and agencies, Federal savings

associations, Government securities, Hedge funds, Insurance, Investments, National banks, Penalties, Proprietary trading, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Risk, Risk retention, Securities, Swap dealers, Trusts and
trustees, Volcker rule.

For the reasons discussed in the preamble, the Commodity Futures Trading Commission adds part 75 to 17 CFR Chapter I to read as follows: **PART 75—PROPRIETARY TRADING**

**AND CERTAIN INTERESTS IN AND**

**RELATIONSHIPS WITH COVERED**

**FUNDS**

**Subpart A—Authority and Definitions**

Sec. 75.1 Authority, purpose, scope, and relationship to other authorities.

75.2 Definitions.

**Subpart B—Proprietary Trading**

75.3 Prohibition on proprietary trading. 75.4 Permitted underwriting and market making-related activities. 75.5 Permitted risk-mitigating hedging

activities. 75.6 Other permitted proprietary trading

activities. 75.7 Limitations on permitted proprietary trading activities.
75.8–75.9 [Reserved]

**Subpart C—Covered Fund Activities and**

**Investments**

75.10 Prohibition on acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in and having certain relationships with a covered

fund. 75.11 Permitted organizing and offering, underwriting, and market making with respect to a covered fund.

75.12 Permitted investment in a covered

fund. 75.13 Other permitted covered fund

activities and investments. 75.14 Limitations on relationships with a

covered fund. 75.15 Other limitations on permitted

covered fund activities.
75.16–75.19 [Reserved]

**Subpart D—Compliance Program Requirement; Violations** 

75.20 Program for compliance; reporting.

75.21 Termination of activities or investments; penalties for violations. Appendix A to Part 75—Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for Covered Trading Activities Appendix B to Part 75—Enhanced Minimum Standards for Compliance Programs

Authority: 12 U.S.C. 1851.

**Subpart A—Authority and Definitions**

**§ 75.1 Authority, purpose, scope, and relationship to other authorities.** 

(a) Authority. This part is issued by

the Commission under section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1851).

(b) Purpose. Section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act establishes prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading by, and investments in or relationships with covered funds by, certain banking entities. This part implements section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act by defining terms
used in the statute and related terms, establishing prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading and investments in or relationships with covered funds, and further explaining the statute’s requirements.

(c) Scope. This part implements section 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act with respect to banking

entities for which the CFTC is the primary financial regulatory agency, asdefined in section 2(12) of the DoddFrank Act.

(d) Relationship to other authorities. Except as otherwise provided under
section 13 of the BHC Act, and notwithstanding any other provision of law, the prohibitions and restrictions

under section 13 of the BHC Act shall apply to the activities of an applicable banking entity, even if such activities are authorized for the applicable banking entity under other applicable provisions of law.

**§ 75.2 Definitions.**

Unless otherwise specified, for purposes of this part:

(a) Affiliate has the same meaning as in section 2(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(k)).

(b) Bank holding company has the same meaning as in section 2 of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841).

(c) Banking entity. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this

section, banking entity means:

(i) Any insured depository institution; (ii) Any company that controls an insured depository institution;

(iii) Any company that is treated as a bank holding company for purposes of section 8 of the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3106); and

(iv) Any affiliate or subsidiary of any entity described in paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section.

(2) Banking entity does not include: (i) A covered fund that is not itself a banking entity under paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section;

(ii) A portfolio company held under the authority contained in section 4(k)(4)(H) or (I) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)(4)(H), (I)), or any portfolio concern, as defined under 13 CFR 107.50, that is controlled by a small business investment company, as defined in section 103(3) of the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 662), so long as the portfolio company or portfolio concern is not itself a banking entity under paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section; or

(iii) The FDIC acting in its corporate capacity or as conservator or receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act

or Title II of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street

Reform and Consumer Protection Act.

(d) Board means the Board of

Governors of the Federal Reserve System.


### 6049 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(e) CFTC or Commission means the Commodity Futures Trading

Commission.

(f) Dealer has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(5) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(5)).

(g) Depository institution has the same meaning as in section 3(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)).

(h) Derivative. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (h)(2) of this section,

derivative means:

(i) Any swap, as that term is defined in section 1a(47) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)), or security-based swap, as that term is defined in section 3(a)(68) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(68));

(ii) Any purchase or sale of a commodity, that is not an excluded commodity, for deferred shipment or delivery that is intended to be physically settled;

(iii) Any foreign exchange forward (as that term is defined in section 1a(24) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(24)) or foreign exchange swap (as that term is defined in section 1a(25) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(25));

(iv) Any agreement, contract, or transaction in foreign currency described in section 2(c)(2)(C)(i) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(C)(i));

(v) Any agreement, contract, or transaction in a commodity other than foreign currency described in section 2(c)(2)(D)(i) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 2(c)(2)(D)(i)); and

(vi) Any transaction authorized under section 19 of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 23(a) or (b));

(2) A derivative does not include: (i) Any consumer, commercial, or other agreement, contract, or transaction

that the CFTC and SEC have further defined by joint regulation, interpretation, guidance, or other action as not within the definition of swap, as that term is defined in section 1a(47) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(47)), or security-based swap, as that term is defined in section 3(a)(68) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(68)); or

(ii) Any identified banking product, as defined in section 402(b) of the Legal Certainty for Bank Products Act of 2000 (7 U.S.C. 27(b)), that is subject to section 403(a) of that Act (7 U.S.C. 27a(a)).

(i) Employee includes a member of the immediate family of the employee.

(j) Exchange Act means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78a et

seq.).

(k) Excluded commodity has the same meaning as in section 1a(19) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(19)).

(l) FDIC means the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation.

(m) Federal banking agencies means the Board, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, and the FDIC.

(n) Foreign banking organization has the same meaning as in section 211.21(o) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.21(o)), but does not include a foreign bank, as defined in section 1(b)(7) of the International Banking Act of 1978 (12 U.S.C. 3101(7)), that is organized under the laws of the
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam,
American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, or the Commonwealth of

the Northern Mariana Islands.

(o) Foreign insurance regulator means the insurance commissioner, or a similar official or agency, of any country

other than the United States that is engaged in the supervision of insurance companies under foreign insurance law.

(p) General account means all of the assets of an insurance company except those allocated to one or more separate

accounts.

(q) Insurance company means a company that is organized as an insurance company, primarily and predominantly engaged in writing insurance or reinsuring risks underwritten by insurance companies, subject to supervision as such by a state insurance regulator or a foreign insurance regulator, and not operated for the purpose of evading the provisions of section 13 of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1851).

(r) Insured depository institution has the same meaning as in section 3(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c)), but does not include an insured depository institution that is described in section 2(c)(2)(D) of the BHC Act (12 U.S.C. 1841(c)(2)(D)).

(s) Loan means any loan, lease,
extension of credit, or secured or

unsecured receivable that is not a security or derivative.

(t) Primary financial regulatory

agency has the same meaning as in section 2(12) of the Dodd-Frank Wall

Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (12 U.S.C. 5301(12)).

(u) Purchase includes any contract to buy, purchase, or otherwise acquire. For security futures products, purchase includes any contract, agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to a commodity future, purchase includes any contract, agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to a derivative, purchase
includes the execution, termination (prior to its scheduled maturity date), assignment, exchange, or similar transfer or conveyance of, or extinguishing of rights or obligations under, a derivative, as the context may require.

(v) Qualifying foreign banking organization means a foreign banking organization that qualifies as such under § 211.23(a), (c) or (e) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c), or (e)).

(w) SEC means the Securities and Exchange Commission.

(x) Sale and sell each include any contract to sell or otherwise dispose of. For security futures products, such terms include any contract, agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to a commodity future, such terms include any contract, agreement, or transaction for future delivery. With respect to a derivative, such terms
include the execution, termination (prior to its scheduled maturity date), assignment, exchange, or similar transfer or conveyance of, or extinguishing of rights or obligations under, a derivative, as the context may require.

(y) Security has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(10) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(10)).

(z) Security-based swap dealer has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(71) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(71)).

(aa) Security future has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(55) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(55)).

(bb) Separate account means an account established and maintained by an insurance company in connection

with one or more insurance contracts to hold assets that are legally segregated from the insurance company’s other assets, under which income, gains, and
losses, whether or not realized, from
assets allocated to such account, are, in accordance with the applicable contract, credited to or charged against such account without regard to other income, gains, or losses of the insurance

company.

(cc) State means any State, the District
of Columbia, the Commonwealth of

Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United States Virgin Islands, and the

Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana

Islands.

(dd) Subsidiary has the same meaning as in section 2(d) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(d)).

(ee) State insurance regulator means the insurance commissioner, or a similar official or agency, of a State that is engaged in the supervision of insurance companies under State

insurance law.


### 6050 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(ff) Swap dealer has the same meaning as in section 1(a)(49) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(49)).

**Subpart B—Proprietary Trading**

**§ 75.3 Prohibition on proprietary trading.**

(a) Prohibition. Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a banking entity may not engage in proprietary trading. Proprietary trading means engaging as principal for the trading account of the banking entity in any purchase or sale of one or more

financial instruments.

(b) Definition of trading account. (1) Trading account means any account that is used by a banking entity to:

(i) Purchase or sell one or more financial instruments principally for the purpose of:

(A) Short-term resale; (B) Benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements;

(C) Realizing short-term arbitrage profits; or

(D) Hedging one or more positions resulting from the purchases or sales of

financial instruments described in paragraphs (b)(1)(i)(A), (B), or (C) of this

section;

(ii) Purchase or sell one or more

financial instruments that are both market risk capital rule covered positions and trading positions (or hedges of other market risk capital rule covered positions), if the banking entity, or any affiliate of the banking entity, is an insured depository institution, bank holding company, or savings and loanholding company, and calculates riskbased capital ratios under the market risk capital rule; or

(iii) Purchase or sell one or more financial instruments for any purpose, if the banking entity:

(A) Is licensed or registered, or is required to be licensed or registered, to engage in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer, to the extent the instrument is purchased

or sold in connection with the activities that require the banking entity to be licensed or registered as such; or

(B) Is engaged in the business of a dealer, swap dealer, or security-based swap dealer outside of the United
States, to the extent the instrument is purchased or sold in connection with

the activities of such business.

(2) Rebuttable presumption for certain purchases and sales. The purchase (or sale) of a financial instrument by a banking entity shall be presumed to be for the trading account of the banking entity under paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section if the banking entity holds the financial instrument for fewer than sixty days or substantially transfers the risk of the financial instrument within sixty days of the purchase (or sale), unless the banking entity can demonstrate, based
on all relevant facts and circumstances, that the banking entity did not purchase (or sell) the financial instrument principally for any of the purposes described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this

section.

(c) Financial instrument —(1)

Financial instrument means:

(i) A security, including an option on a security;

(ii) A derivative, including an option
on a derivative; or

(iii) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery, or option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery.

(2) A financial instrument does not

include:

(i) A loan; (ii) A commodity that is not: (A) An excluded commodity (other than foreign exchange or currency);

(B) A derivative; (C) A contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery; or

(D) An option on a contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery; or

(iii) Foreign exchange or currency. (d) Proprietary trading does not

include: —(1) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity that arises under a repurchase or reverse repurchase agreement pursuant to which the banking entity has simultaneously agreed, in writing, to both purchase and sell a stated asset, at stated prices, and

on stated dates or on demand with the

same counterparty;

(2) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity that arises under a transaction in which the banking entity lends or borrows a security temporarily to or from another party pursuant to a written securities lending agreement under

which the lender retains the economic interests of an owner of such security, and has the right to terminate the

transaction and to recall the loaned security on terms agreed by the parties;

(3) Any purchase or sale of a security by a banking entity for the purpose of liquidity management in accordance with a documented liquidity management plan of the banking entity

that:

(i) Specifically contemplates and authorizes the particular securities to be used for liquidity management purposes, the amount, types, and risks

of these securities that are consistent with liquidity management, and the liquidity circumstances in which the particular securities may or must be
used; (ii) Requires that any purchase or sale of securities contemplated and authorized by the plan be principally for the purpose of managing the liquidity of the banking entity, and not for the purpose of short-term resale, benefitting from actual or expected short-term price movements, realizing short-term arbitrage profits, or hedging a position taken for such short-term purposes;

(iii) Requires that any securities purchased or sold for liquidity management purposes be highly liquid
and limited to securities the market,
credit, and other risks of which the banking entity does not reasonably expect to give rise to appreciable profits or losses as a result of short-term price

movements;

(iv) Limits any securities purchased or sold for liquidity management purposes, together with any other instruments purchased or sold for such purposes, to

an amount that is consistent with the banking entity’s near-term funding needs, including deviations from normal operations of the banking entity or any affiliate thereof, as estimated and documented pursuant to methods specified in the plan;

(v) Includes written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis, and independent testing to ensure that the purchase and sale of securities that are not permitted under § 75.6(a) or (b) are for the purpose of liquidity management and in accordance with the liquidity management plan described in paragraph (d)(3) of this section; and

(vi) Is consistent with the Commission’s supervisory requirements, guidance, and expectations regarding liquidity

management;

(4) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity that is a derivatives clearing organization or a clearing agency in connection with clearing financial

instruments;

(5) Any excluded clearing activities by a banking entity that is a member of a clearing agency, a member of a derivatives clearing organization, or a member of a designated financial market utility;

(6) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity, so long as:

(i) The purchase (or sale) satisfies an existing delivery obligation of the banking entity or its customers, including to prevent or close out a
failure to deliver, in connection with delivery, clearing, or settlement activity;

or(ii) The purchase (or sale) satisfies an obligation of the banking entity in connection with a judicial,


### 6051 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

administrative, self-regulatory organization, or arbitration proceeding;

(7) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity that is acting solely as agent,
broker, or custodian;

(8) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity that is

established and administered in

accordance with the law of the United States or a foreign sovereign, if the purchase or sale is made directly or indirectly by the banking entity as trustee for the benefit of persons who are or were employees of the banking entity; or

(9) Any purchase or sale of one or more financial instruments by a banking entity in the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests the financial instrument as soon as practicable, and in no event may the banking entity retain such instrument for longer than such period permitted by the Commission.

(e) Definition of other terms related to proprietary trading. For purposes of this subpart:

(1) Anonymous means that each party to a purchase or sale is unaware of the identity of the other party(ies) to the purchase or sale.

(2) Clearing agency has the same meaning as in section 3(a)(23) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(23)).

(3) Commodity has the same meaning as in section 1a(9) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(9)), except that a commodity does not include any security;

(4) Contract of sale of a commodity for future delivery means a contract of sale (as that term is defined in section 1a(13) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(13)) for future delivery (as that term is defined in section 1a(27) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(27))).

(5) Derivatives clearing organization

means:

(i) A derivatives clearing organization registered under section 5b of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 7a– 1);

(ii) A derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to CFTC regulation, is exempt from the registration requirements under section 5b of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 7a– 1); or

(iii) A foreign derivatives clearing organization that, pursuant to CFTC regulation, is permitted to clear for a foreign board of trade that is registered

with the CFTC. (6) Exchange, unless the context otherwise requires, means any designated contract market, swap execution facility, or foreign board of trade registered with the CFTC, or, for purposes of securities or security-based swaps, an exchange, as defined under section 3(a)(1) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(1)), or security-based swap execution facility, as defined under section 3(a)(77) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(77)).

(7) Excluded clearing activities means: (i) With respect to customer

transactions cleared on a derivatives clearing organization, a clearing agency, or a designated financial market utility, any purchase or sale necessary to correct trading errors made by or on behalf of a customer provided that such purchase or sale is conducted in
accordance with, for transactions cleared on a derivatives clearing organization, the Commodity Exchange Act, CFTC regulations, and the rules or procedures of the derivatives clearing organization, or, for transactions cleared on a clearing agency, the rules or procedures of the clearing agency, or, for transactions cleared on a designated financial market utility that is neither a derivatives clearing organization nor a clearing agency, the rules or procedures of the designated financial market utility;

(ii) Any purchase or sale in

connection with and related to the management of a default or threatened

imminent default of a customer provided that such purchase or sale is
conducted in accordance with, for

transactions cleared on a derivatives clearing organization, the Commodity Exchange Act, CFTC regulations, and the rules or procedures of the derivatives clearing organization, or, for transactions cleared on a clearing agency, the rules or procedures of the clearing agency, or, for transactions cleared on a designated financial market utility that is neither a derivatives clearing organization nor a clearing agency, the rules or procedures of the designated financial market utility;

(iii) Any purchase or sale in

connection with and related to the management of a default or threatened

imminent default of a member of a clearing agency, a member of a derivatives clearing organization, or a member of a designated financial market utility;

(iv) Any purchase or sale in

connection with and related to the management of the default or threatened default of a clearing agency, a derivatives clearing organization, or a designated financial market utility; and (v) Any purchase or sale that is required by the rules or procedures of a clearing agency, a derivatives clearing organization, or a designated financial market utility to mitigate the risk to the clearing agency, derivatives clearing organization, or designated financial market utility that would result from the clearing by a member of security-based swaps that reference the member or an

affiliate of the member.

(8) Designated financial market utility has the same meaning as in section 803(4) of the Dodd-Frank Act (12 U.S.C. 5462(4)).

(9) Issuer has the same meaning as in section 2(a)(4) of the Securities Act of 1933 (15 U.S.C. 77b(a)(4)).

(10) Market risk capital rule covered position and trading position means a financial instrument that is both a covered position and a trading position, as those terms are respectively defined:

(i) In the case of a banking entity that is a bank holding company, savings and loan holding company, or insured depository institution, under the market risk capital rule that is applicable to the banking entity; and

(ii) In the case of a banking entity that is affiliated with a bank holding company or savings and loan holding company, other than a banking entity to which a market risk capital rule is applicable, under the market risk capital rule that is applicable to the affiliated bank holding company or savings and loan holding company.

(11) Market risk capital rule means the market risk capital rule that is contained in subpart F of 12 CFR part 3, 12 CFR parts 208 and 225, or 12 CFR part 324, as applicable.

(12) Municipal security means a security that is a direct obligation of or issued by, or an obligation guaranteed as to principal or interest by, a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any agency or instrumentality of a State or any political subdivision thereof, or any municipal corporate instrumentality of one or more States or political

subdivisions thereof.

(13) Trading desk means the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that purchases or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or an

affiliate thereof.

**§ 75.4 Permitted underwriting and market making-related activities.** 

(a) Underwriting activities—(1) Permitted underwriting activities. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to a banking entity’s underwriting activities conducted in accordance with paragraph (a) of this

section.


### 6052 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(2) Requirements. The underwriting activities of a banking entity are permitted under paragraph (a)(1) of this section only if:

(i) The banking entity is acting as an

underwriter for a distribution of securities and the trading desk’s underwriting position is related to such
distribution;

(ii) The amount and type of the securities in the trading desk’s underwriting position are designed not to exceed the reasonably expected near
term demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, and reasonable efforts

are made to sell or otherwise reduce the underwriting position within a reasonable period, taking into account the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant type of security;

(iii) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains, and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis and independent testing identifying and addressing:

(A) The products, instruments or exposures each trading desk may purchase, sell, or manage as part of its underwriting activities;

(B) Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s underwriting activities, including the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, on the:

( 1 ) Amount, types, and risk of its underwriting position;

(2) Level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its underwriting position; and

(3) Period of time a security may be
held;

(C) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits; and

(D) Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading desk’s limit(s), demonstrable analysis of the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to a trading desk’s limit(s), and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval;

(iv) The compensation arrangements of persons performing the activities described in paragraph (a) of this section are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading; and

(v) The banking entity is licensed or registered to engage in the activity described in paragraph (a) of this section in accordance with applicable

law.

(3) Definition of distribution. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section,

a distribution of securities means:

(i) An offering of securities, whether or not subject to registration under the
Securities Act of 1933, that is distinguished from ordinary trading transactions by the presence of special selling efforts and selling methods; or

(ii) An offering of securities made pursuant to an effective registration

statement under the Securities Act of

1933.

(4) Definition of underwriter. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section,

underwriter means:

(i) A person who has agreed with an issuer or selling security holder to:

(A) Purchase securities from the issuer or selling security holder for
distribution;

(B) Engage in a distribution of

securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security holder; or

(C) Manage a distribution of securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security holder; or

(ii) A person who has agreed to participate or is participating in a

distribution of such securities for or on behalf of the issuer or selling security

holder.

(5) Definition of selling security

holder. For purposes of paragraph (a) of
this section, selling security holder means any person, other than an issuer,

on whose behalf a distribution is made.

(6) Definition of underwriting position. For purposes of paragraph (a)
of this section, underwriting position means the long or short positions in one or more securities held by a banking entity or its affiliate, and managed by a particular trading desk, in connection with a particular distribution of securities for which such banking entity or affiliate is acting as an underwriter.

(7) Definition of client, customer, and

counterparty. For purposes of paragraph (a) of this section, the terms client,

customer, and counterparty, on a collective or individual basis, refer to market participants that may transact with the banking entity in connection with a particular distribution for which the banking entity is acting as

underwriter.

(b) Market making-related activities

— (1) Permitted market making-related

activities. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to a banking entity’s market making-related activities

conducted in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.

(2) Requirements. The market makingrelated activities of a banking entity are permitted under paragraph (b)(1) of this section only if:

(i) The trading desk that establishes and manages the financial exposure routinely stands ready to purchase and sell one or more types of financial

instruments related to its financial exposure and is willing and available to quote, purchase and sell, or otherwise enter into long and short positions in those types of financial instruments for its own account, in commercially reasonable amounts and throughout market cycles on a basis appropriate for the liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial

instruments;

(ii) The amount, types, and risks of the financial instruments in the trading desk’s market-maker inventory are designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near term
demands of clients, customers, or counterparties, based on:

(A) The liquidity, maturity, and depth of the market for the relevant types of financial instrument(s); and

(B) Demonstrable analysis of
historical customer demand, current inventory of financial instruments, and market and other factors regarding the amount, types, and risks, of or

associated with financial instruments in which the trading desk makes a market, including through block trades;

(iii) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains, and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, including reasonably designed written policies and procedures, internal controls, analysis and independent testing identifying and addressing:

(A) The financial instruments each trading desk stands ready to purchase and sell in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section;

(B) The actions the trading desk will take to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate promptly the risks of its financial exposure consistent with the limits required under paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section; the products, instruments, and exposures each trading desk may use for risk management purposes; the techniques and strategies each trading desk may use to manage the risks of its market making-related activities and inventory; and the process, strategies, and personnel responsible for ensuring that the actions taken by the trading desk to mitigate these risks are and
continue to be effective;


### 6053 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(C) Limits for each trading desk, based on the nature and amount of the trading desk’s market making-related activities, that address the factors prescribed by paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, on:

( 1 ) The amount, types, and risks of its market-maker inventory;

(2) The amount, types, and risks of the products, instruments, and exposures the trading desk may use for risk

management purposes;

(3) The level of exposures to relevant risk factors arising from its financial exposure; and

(4) The period of time a financial instrument may be held;

(D) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring and analysis of each trading desk’s compliance with its limits; and

(E) Authorization procedures, including escalation procedures that require review and approval of any trade that would exceed a trading desk’s limit(s), demonstrable analysis that the basis for any temporary or permanent increase to a trading desk’s limit(s) is consistent with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, and independent review of such demonstrable analysis and approval;

(iv) To the extent that any limit identified pursuant to paragraph (b)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is exceeded, the trading desk takes action to bring the trading desk into compliance with the limits as promptly as possible after the
limit is exceeded;

(v) The compensation arrangements of persons performing the activities described in paragraph (b) of this section are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading; and

(vi) The banking entity is licensed or registered to engage in activity described in paragraph (b) of this section in accordance with applicable

law.

(3) Definition of client, customer, and

counterparty. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, the terms client,

customer, and counterparty, on a collective or individual basis refer to market participants that make use of the banking entity’s market making-related services by obtaining such services, responding to quotations, or entering into a continuing relationship with respect to such services, provided that:

(i) A trading desk or other organizational unit of another banking entity is not a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk if that other entity has trading assets and
liabilities of $50 billion or more as

measured in accordance with § 75.20(d)(1), unless:

(A) The trading desk documents how and why a particular trading desk or other organizational unit of the entity
should be treated as a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk for purposes of paragraph (b)(2) of this

section; or

(B) The purchase or sale by the trading desk is conducted anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants.

(ii) [Reserved]
(4) Definition of financial exposure. For purposes of paragraph (b) of this

section, financial exposure means the aggregate risks of one or more financial instruments and any associated loans, commodities, or foreign exchange or currency, held by a banking entity or its affiliate and managed by a particular trading desk as part of the trading desk’s market making-related activities.

(5) Definition of market-maker inventory. For the purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, market-maker inventory means all of the positions in

the financial instruments for which the trading desk stands ready to make a market in accordance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section that are managed by the trading desk, including the trading desk’s open positions or exposures arising from open

transactions.

**§ 75.5 Permitted risk-mitigating hedging**

**activities.**

(a) Permitted risk-mitigating hedging

activities. The prohibition contained in§ 75.3(a) does not apply to the riskmitigating hedging activities of a banking entity in connection with and related to individual or aggregated positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity and designed to reduce the specific risks to the banking entity in connection with and related to such positions, contracts, or other holdings.

(b) Requirements. The risk-mitigating hedging activities of a banking entity are permitted under paragraph (a) of this section only if:

(1) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of this section, including:

(i) Reasonably designed written policies and procedures regarding the positions, techniques and strategies that may be used for hedging, including documentation indicating what positions, contracts or other holdings a particular trading desk may use in its risk-mitigating hedging activities, as well as position and aging limits with respect to such positions, contracts or other holdings;

(ii) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring, management, and authorization procedures, including relevant escalation procedures; and

(iii) The conduct of analysis, including correlation analysis, and independent testing designed to ensure that the positions, techniques and strategies that may be used for hedging may reasonably be expected to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risk(s) being hedged, and such correlation analysis demonstrates that the hedging activity demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates the specific, identifiable risk(s) being hedged;

(2) The risk-mitigating hedging activity:

(i) Is conducted in accordance with the written policies, procedures, and internal controls required under this

section;

(ii) At the inception of the hedging activity, including, without limitation, any adjustments to the hedging activity, is designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates one or more specific, identifiable risks, including market risk, counterparty or other credit risk, currency or foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, commodity price risk, basis risk, or similar risks, arising in

connection with and related to identified positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity, based upon the facts and circumstances of the identified underlying and hedging positions, contracts or other holdings and the risks and liquidity thereof;

(iii) Does not give rise, at the inception of the hedge, to any significant new or additional risk that is not itself hedged contemporaneously in
accordance with this section;

(iv) Is subject to continuing review, monitoring and management by the banking entity that:

(A) Is consistent with the written hedging policies and procedures required under paragraph (b)(1) of this

section;

(B) Is designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates the specific, identifiable risksthat develop over time from the riskmitigating hedging activities undertaken under this section and the underlying positions, contracts, and other holdings of the banking entity, based upon the

facts and circumstances of the underlying and hedging positions, contracts and other holdings of the


### 6054 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

banking entity and the risks and liquidity thereof; and

(C) Requires ongoing recalibration of the hedging activity by the banking entity to ensure that the hedging activity satisfies the requirements set out in paragraph (b)(2) of this section and is not prohibited proprietary trading; and

(3) The compensation arrangements of persons performing risk-mitigating hedging activities are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading.

(c) Documentation requirement. (1) A banking entity must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section with respect to any purchase or sale of financial

instruments made in reliance on this section for risk-mitigating hedging purposes that is:

(i) Not established by the specific trading desk establishing or responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings the risks of which the hedging activity is designed to reduce;

(ii) Established by the specific trading desk establishing or responsible for the underlying positions, contracts, or other holdings the risks of which the purchases or sales are designed to reduce, but that is effected through a financial instrument, exposure, technique, or strategy that is not specifically identified in the trading desk’s written policies and procedures established under paragraph (b)(1) of this section or under § 75.4(b)(2)(iii)(B) as a product, instrument, exposure, technique, or strategy such trading desk may use for hedging; or

(iii) Established to hedge aggregated positions across two or more trading

desks.

(2) In connection with any purchase or sale identified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, a banking entity must, at a minimum, and contemporaneously with the purchase or sale, document:

(i) The specific, identifiable risk(s) of the identified positions, contracts, or other holdings of the banking entity that the purchase or sale is designed to
reduce;

(ii) The specific risk-mitigating strategy that the purchase or sale is designed to fulfill; and

(iii) The trading desk or other business unit that is establishing and responsible for the hedge.

(3) A banking entity must create and

retain records sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section for a period that is no less than five years in a form that allows the banking entity to promptly produce such records to the Commission on request, or such longer period as required under other law or this part.

**§ 75.6 Other permitted proprietary trading**

**activities.**

(a) Permitted trading in domestic government obligations. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale by a banking entity

of a financial instrument that is:

(1) An obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, the United States;

(2) An obligation, participation, or
other instrument of, or issued or guaranteed by, an agency of the United
States, the Government National Mortgage Association, the Federal National Mortgage Association, the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, a Federal Home Loan Bank, the Federal Agricultural Mortgage Corporation or a Farm Credit System institution chartered under and subject to the provisions of the Farm Credit Act of 1971 (12 U.S.C. 2001 et seq.);

(3) An obligation of any State or any political subdivision thereof, including any municipal security; or

(4) An obligation of the FDIC, or any entity formed by or on behalf of the FDIC for purpose of facilitating the disposal of assets acquired or held by the FDIC in its corporate capacity or as

conservator or receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II

of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform

and Consumer Protection Act.

(b) Permitted trading in foreign government obligations—(1) Affiliates of foreign banking entities in the United

States. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase

or sale of a financial instrument that is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, a foreign sovereign (including any

multinational central bank of which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political subdivision of such foreign sovereign, by a banking entity, so long as:

(i) The banking entity is organized under or is directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of a foreign sovereign and is not directly or indirectly controlled by a top-tier banking entity that is organized under
the laws of the United States;

(ii) The financial instrument is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, the foreign sovereign under the laws of which the foreign banking entity referred to in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section is organized (including any

multinational central bank of which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political subdivision of that foreign sovereign; and (iii) The purchase or sale as principal is not made by an insured depository

institution.

(2) Foreign affiliates of a U.S. banking entity. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase

or sale of a financial instrument that is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, a foreign sovereign (including any

multinational central bank of which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political subdivision of that foreign sovereign, by a foreign entity that is owned or controlled by a banking entity organized or established under the laws of the United States or any State, so long as:

(i) The foreign entity is a foreign bank, as defined in § 211.2(j) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.2(j)), or is regulated by the foreign sovereign as a
securities dealer;

(ii) The financial instrument is an obligation of, or issued or guaranteed by, the foreign sovereign under the laws of which the foreign entity is organized (including any multinational central bank of which the foreign sovereign is a member), or any agency or political subdivision of that foreign sovereign;

and

(iii) The financial instrument is owned by the foreign entity and is not financed by an affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State.

(c) Permitted trading on behalf of

customers—(1) Fiduciary transactions. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity acting as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity, so long as:

(i) The transaction is conducted for
the account of, or on behalf of, a
customer; and

(ii) The banking entity does not have or retain beneficial ownership of the

financial instruments.

(2) Riskless principal transactions. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity acting as riskless principal in a transaction in which the banking entity, after receiving an order to purchase (or sell) a financial instrument from a customer, purchases (or sells) the

financial instrument for its own account to offset a contemporaneous sale to (or purchase from) the customer.

(d) Permitted trading by a regulated insurance company. The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity that is an insurance company or an affiliate of an insurance company if:


### 6055 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(1) The insurance company or its affiliate purchases or sells the financial instruments solely for:

(i) The general account of the insurance company; or

(ii) A separate account established by the insurance company;

(2) The purchase or sale is conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled; and

(3) The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation with the Financial Stability Oversight Council

and the relevant insurance commissioners of the States and foreign jurisdictions, as appropriate, have not jointly determined, after notice and comment, that a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section is insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the covered banking entity, or the financial stability

of the United States.

(e) Permitted trading activities of foreign banking entities. (1) The prohibition contained in § 75.3(a) does not apply to the purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity if:

(i) The banking entity is not organized or directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under the laws of the United States or of any

State;

(ii) The purchase or sale by the banking entity is made pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of
the BHC Act; and

(iii) The purchase or sale meets the requirements of paragraph (e)(3) of this

section.

(2) A purchase or sale of financial instruments by a banking entity is made pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act for purposes of paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section only if:

(i) The purchase or sale is conducted in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section; and

(ii)(A) With respect to a banking entity that is a foreign banking organization, the banking entity meets the qualifying foreign banking organization requirements of § 211.23(a), (c) or (e) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c) or (e)), as applicable; or

(B) With respect to a banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization, the banking entity is not organized under the laws of the United States or of any State and the banking entity, on a fully-consolidated basis, meets at least two of the following requirements:

( 1 ) Total assets of the banking entity

held outside of the United States exceed total assets of the banking entity held in
the United States;

(2) Total revenues derived from the business of the banking entity outside of

the United States exceed total revenues

derived from the business of the banking entity in the United States; or

(3) Total net income derived from the business of the banking entity outside of

the United States exceeds total net

income derived from the business of the banking entity in the United States.

(3) A purchase or sale by a banking entity is permitted for purposes of paragraph (e) of this section only if:

(i) The banking entity engaging as principal in the purchase or sale (including any personnel of the banking entity or its affiliate that arrange, negotiate or execute such purchase or sale) is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(ii) The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes the decision to purchase or sell as principal

is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(iii) The purchase or sale, includingany transaction arising from riskmitigating hedging related to the instruments purchased or sold, is not accounted for as principal directly or on a consolidated basis by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(iv) No financing for the banking entity’s purchases or sales is provided, directly or indirectly, by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State; and

(v) The purchase or sale is not conducted with or through any U.S. entity, other than:

(A) A purchase or sale with the foreign operations of a U.S. entity if no personnel of such U.S. entity that are

located in the United States are involved in the arrangement, negotiation, or execution of such purchase or sale;

(B) A purchase or sale with an unaffiliated market intermediary acting as principal, provided the purchase or sale is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as a central

counterparty; or

(C) A purchase or sale through an unaffiliated market intermediary acting as agent, provided the purchase or sale is conducted anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility and is promptly cleared and settled through a clearing agency or derivatives clearing organization acting as a central

counterparty,

(4) For purposes of paragraph (e) of this section, a U.S. entity is any entity that is, or is controlled by, or is acting on behalf of, or at the direction of, any other entity that is, located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State.

(5) For purposes of paragraph (e) of this section, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is

considered to be located in the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary.

(6) For purposes of paragraph (e) of
this section, unaffiliated market intermediary means an unaffiliated entity, acting as an intermediary, that is:

(i) A broker or dealer registered with

the SEC under section 15 of the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation
as such;

(ii) A swap dealer registered with the

CFTC under section 4s of the Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such;

(iii) A security-based swap dealer registered with the SEC under section 15F of the Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation
as such; or

(iv) A futures commission merchant registered with the CFTC under section 4f of the Commodity Exchange Act or exempt from registration or excluded from regulation as such.

**§ 75.7 Limitations on permitted proprietary trading activities.** 

(a) No transaction, class of transactions, or activity may be deemed permissible under §§ 75.4 through 75.6
if the transaction, class of transactions, or activity would:

(1) Involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties;

(2) Result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading

strategy; or

(3) Pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or to the financial stability of the United

States.

(b) Definition of material conflict of

interest. (1) For purposes of this section,

a material conflict of interest between a


### 6056 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties exists if the banking entity engages in any
transaction, class of transactions, or activity that would involve or result in the banking entity’s interests being materially adverse to the interests of its client, customer, or counterparty with respect to such transaction, class of transactions, or activity, and the banking entity has not taken at least one of the actions in paragraph (b)(2) of this

section.

(2) Prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, the banking entity:

(i) Timely and effective disclosure. (A) Has made clear, timely, and effective
disclosure of the conflict of interest, together with other necessary
information, in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient to permit a
reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully
understand the conflict of interest; and

(B) Such disclosure is made in a manner that provides the client, customer, or counterparty the opportunity to negate, or substantially mitigate, any materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or counterparty created by the conflict of interest; or

(ii) Information barriers. Has established, maintained, and enforced

information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and procedures, such as physical separation of personnel, or functions, or limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking into consideration the nature of the banking entity’s business, to prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a materially
adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. A banking entity may not rely on such information barriers if, in the case of any specific transaction, class or type of transactions or activity, the banking entity knows or should reasonably know that, notwithstanding the banking entity’s establishment of
information barriers, the conflict of interest may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a client,

customer, or counterparty.

(c) Definition of high-risk asset and high-risk trading strategy. For purposes

of this section:

(1) High-risk asset means an asset or group of related assets that would, if held by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United

States.

(2) High-risk trading strategy means a trading strategy that would, if engaged in by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United

States.

**§§ 75.8–75.9 [Reserved]**

**Subpart C—Covered Fund Activities**

**and Investments**

**§ 75.10 Prohibition on acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in and**  **having certain relationships with a covered**

**fund.**

(a) Prohibition. (1) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a banking entity may not, as principal, directly or indirectly, acquire or retain any ownership interest in or sponsor a

covered fund.

(2) Paragraph (a)(1) of this section does not include acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in a covered fund by a banking entity:

(i) Acting solely as agent, broker, or custodian, so long as;

(A) The activity is conducted for the
account of, or on behalf of, a customer;

and

(B) The banking entity and its

affiliates do not have or retain beneficial ownership of such ownership interest;

(ii) Through a deferred compensation, stock-bonus, profit-sharing, or pension plan of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) that is established and

administered in accordance with the law of the United States or a foreign sovereign, if the ownership interest is held or controlled directly or indirectly by the banking entity as trustee for the benefit of persons who are or were employees of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof);

(iii) In the ordinary course of collecting a debt previously contracted in good faith, provided that the banking entity divests the ownership interest as soon as practicable, and in no event may the banking entity retain such ownership interest for longer than such period permitted by the Commission; or

(iv) On behalf of customers as trustee or in a similar fiduciary capacity for a
customer that is not a covered fund, so long as:

(A) The activity is conducted for the
account of, or on behalf of, the
customer; and

(B) The banking entity and its

affiliates do not have or retain beneficial ownership of such ownership interest.

(b) Definition of covered fund. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of
this section, covered fund means:

(i) An issuer that would be an investment company, as defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.), but for section 3(c)(1) or 3(c)(7) of that Act (15 U.S.C. 80a–3(c)(1) or (7));

(ii) Any commodity pool under section 1a(10) of the Commodity Exchange Act (7 U.S.C. 1a(10)) for

which:

(A) The commodity pool operator has claimed an exemption under § 4.7 of this chapter; or

(B) ( 1 ) A commodity pool operator is registered with the CFTC as a commodity pool operator in connection with the operation of the commodity pool;

(2) Substantially all participation units of the commodity pool are owned by qualified eligible persons under § 4.7(a)(2) and (3) of this chapter; and

(3) Participation units of the commodity pool have not been publicly offered to persons who are not qualified eligible persons under § 4.7(a)(2) and (3) of this chapter; or

(iii) For any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, an entity that:

(A) Is organized or established outside the United States and the ownership

interests of which are offered and sold solely outside the United States;

(B) Is, or holds itself out as being, an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in
securities; and

(C) ( 1 ) Has as its sponsor that banking entity (or an affiliate thereof); or

(2) Has issued an ownership interest that is owned directly or indirectly by that banking entity (or an affiliate thereof).

(2) An issuer shall not be deemed to be a covered fund under paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section if, were the issuer subject to U.S. securities laws, the issuer could rely on an exclusion or exemption from the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15

U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.) other than the exclusions contained in section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of that Act.

(3) For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is located in the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary.

(c) Notwithstanding paragraph (b) of this section, unless the appropriate Federal banking agencies, the SEC, and


### 6057 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

the CFTC jointly determine otherwise, a

covered fund does not include:

(1) Foreign public funds. (i) Subject to paragraphs (c)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this
section, an issuer that:

(A) Is organized or established outside
of the United States;

(B) Is authorized to offer and sell ownership interests to retail investors in the issuer’s home jurisdiction; and

(C) Sells ownership interests predominantly through one or more public offerings outside of the United

States.

(ii) With respect to a banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State and any issuer for which such banking entity acts as sponsor, the sponsoring banking entity may not rely on the exemption in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for such issuer unless ownership

interests in the issuer are sold predominantly to persons other than:

(A) Such sponsoring banking entity; (B) Such issuer; (C) Affiliates of such sponsoring banking entity or such issuer; and

(D) Directors and employees of such

entities.

(iii) For purposes of paragraph (c)(1)(i)(C) of this section, the term public offering means a distribution (as defined in § 75.4(a)(3)) of securities in any jurisdiction outside the United States to investors, including retail investors, provided that:

(A) The distribution complies with all applicable requirements in the jurisdiction in which such distribution is being made;

(B) The distribution does not restrict availability to investors having a

minimum level of net worth or net
investment assets; and

(C) The issuer has filed or submitted, with the appropriate regulatory authority in such jurisdiction, offering disclosure documents that are publicly

available.

(2) Wholly-owned subsidiaries. An entity, all of the outstanding ownership interests of which are owned directly or indirectly by the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof), except that:

(i) Up to five percent of the entity’s outstanding ownership interests, less any amounts outstanding under paragraph (c)(2)(ii) of this section, may be held by employees or directors of the banking entity or such affiliate (including former employees or directors if their ownership interest was acquired while employed by or in the service of the banking entity); and

(ii) Up to 0.5 percent of the entity’s outstanding ownership interests may be held by a third party if the ownership interest is acquired or retained by the third party for the purpose of establishing corporate separateness or addressing bankruptcy, insolvency, or

similar concerns.

(3) Joint ventures. A joint venture between a banking entity or any of its

affiliates and one or more unaffiliated

persons, provided that the joint venture:

(i) Is comprised of no more than 10
unaffiliated co-venturers;

(ii) Is in the business of engaging in activities that are permissible for the banking entity or affiliate, other than investing in securities for resale or other disposition; and

(iii) Is not, and does not hold itself out as being, an entity or arrangement that raises money from investors primarily for the purpose of investing in securities for resale or other disposition or otherwise trading in securities.

(4) Acquisition vehicles. An issuer: (i) Formed solely for the purpose of engaging in a bona fide merger or acquisition transaction; and

(ii) That exists only for such period as necessary to effectuate the transaction.

(5) Foreign pension or retirement funds. A plan, fund, or program providing pension, retirement, or

similar benefits that is:

(i) Organized and administered
outside the United States;

(ii) A broad-based plan for employees or citizens that is subject to regulation as a pension, retirement, or similar plan under the laws of the jurisdiction in which the plan, fund, or program is organized and administered; and

(iii) Established for the benefit of

citizens or residents of one or more foreign sovereigns or any political

subdivision thereof.

(6) Insurance company separate

accounts. A separate account, provided that no banking entity other than the insurance company participates in the account’s profits and losses.

(7) Bank owned life insurance. A separate account that is used solely for the purpose of allowing one or more banking entities to purchase a life insurance policy for which the banking entity or entities is beneficiary, provided that no banking entity that purchases the policy:

(i) Controls the investment decisions regarding the underlying assets or holdings of the separate account; or

(ii) Participates in the profits and losses of the separate account other than in compliance with applicable supervisory guidance regarding bank

owned life insurance.

(8) Loan securitizations—(i) Scope. An issuing entity for asset-backed

securities that satisfies all the conditions of paragraph (c)(8) of this section and the assets or holdings of which are comprised solely of:

(A) Loans as defined in § 75.2(s); (B) Rights or other assets designed to assure the servicing or timely distribution of proceeds to holders of such securities and rights or other assets

that are related or incidental to purchasing or otherwise acquiring and holding the loans, provided that each asset meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iii) of this section;

(C) Interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iv) of this section;

and

(D) Special units of beneficial interest

and collateral certificates that meet the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(v) of

this section.

(ii) Impermissible assets. For purposes of paragraph (c)(8) of this section, the assets or holdings of the issuing entity shall not include any of the following:

(A) A security, including an assetbacked security, or an interest in an equity or debt security other than as permitted in paragraph (c)(8)(iii) of this

section;

(B) A derivative, other than a derivative that meets the requirements of paragraph (c)(8)(iv) of this section; or

(C) A commodity forward contract. (iii) Permitted securities. Notwithstanding paragraph (c)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, the issuing entity may

hold securities if those securities are:

(A) Cash equivalents for purposes of the rights and assets in paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) of this section; or

(B) Securities received in lieu of debts previously contracted with respect to the loans supporting the asset-backed

securities.

(iv) Derivatives. The holdings of derivatives by the issuing entity shall be limited to interest rate or foreign exchange derivatives that satisfy all of the following conditions:

(A) The written terms of the derivative directly relate to the loans,
the asset-backed securities, or the contractual rights of other assets described in paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) of
this section; and

(B) The derivatives reduce the interest rate and/or foreign exchange risks
related to the loans, the asset-backed securities, or the contractual rights or other assets described in paragraph (c)(8)(i)(B) of this section.

(v) Special units of beneficial interest and collateral certificates. The assets or holdings of the issuing entity may

include collateral certificates and special units of beneficial interest issued by a special purpose vehicle, provided that:


### 6058 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(A) The special purpose vehicle that issues the special unit of beneficial

interest or collateral certificate meets the requirements in paragraph (c)(8) of
this section;

(B) The special unit of beneficial

interest or collateral certificate is used for the sole purpose of transferring to the issuing entity for the loan

securitization the economic risks and

benefits of the assets that are permissible for loan securitizations under paragraph (c)(8) of this section and does not directly or indirectly transfer any interest in any other economic or financial exposure;

(C) The special unit of beneficial

interest or collateral certificate is created solely to satisfy legal requirements or otherwise facilitate the structuring of the loan securitization;

and

(D) The special purpose vehicle that issues the special unit of beneficial

interest or collateral certificate and the issuing entity are established under the direction of the same entity that

initiated the loan securitization.

(9) Qualifying asset-backed commercial paper conduits. (i) An issuing entity for asset-backed commercial paper that satisfies all of the following requirements:

(A) The asset-backed commercial paper conduit holds only:

( 1 ) Loans and other assets permissible

for a loan securitization under paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this section; and

(2) Asset-backed securities supported solely by assets that are permissible for loan securitizations under paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this section and acquired by the asset-backed commercial paper conduit as part of an initial issuance either directly from the issuing entity of the asset-backed securities or directly

from an underwriter in the distribution
of the asset-backed securities;

(B) The asset-backed commercial paper conduit issues only asset-backed securities, comprised of a residual interest and securities with a legal maturity of 397 days or less; and

(C) A regulated liquidity provider has entered into a legally binding commitment to provide full and unconditional liquidity coverage withrespect to all of the outstanding assetbacked securities issued by the assetbacked commercial paper conduit (other than any residual interest) in the event that funds are required to redeem maturing asset-backed securities.

(ii) For purposes of this paragraph (c)(9) of this section, a regulated liquidity provider means:

(A) A depository institution, as defined in section 3(c) of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act (12 U.S.C. 1813(c));

(B) A bank holding company, as defined in section 2(a) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1841(a)), or a subsidiary thereof;

(C) A savings and loan holding company, as defined in section 10a of the Home Owners’ Loan Act (12 U.S.C. 1467a), provided all or substantially all of the holding company’s activities are permissible for a financial holding company under section 4(k) of the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (12 U.S.C. 1843(k)), or a subsidiary thereof;

(D) A foreign bank whose home country supervisor, as defined in § 211.21(q) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.21(q)), has adopted capital standards consistent with the Capital

Accord for the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, as amended, and that is subject to such standards, or a subsidiary thereof; or

(E) The United States or a foreign sovereign.

(10) Qualifying covered bonds—(i) Scope. An entity owning or holding a dynamic or fixed pool of loans or other assets as provided in paragraph (c)(8) of

this section for the benefit of the holders of covered bonds, provided that the assets in the pool are comprised solely

of assets that meet the conditions in paragraph (c)(8)(i) of this section.

(ii) Covered bond. For purposes of paragraph (c)(10) of this section, a

covered bond means:

(A) A debt obligation issued by an entity that meets the definition of foreign banking organization, the payment obligations of which are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by an entity that meets the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(10)(i) of this section; or

(B) A debt obligation of an entity that

meets the conditions set forth in paragraph (c)(10)(i) of this section, provided that the payment obligations are fully and unconditionally guaranteed by an entity that meets the definition of foreign bankingorganization and the entity is a whollyowned subsidiary, as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, of such foreign banking organization.

(11) SBICs and public welfare investment funds. An issuer:

(i) That is a small business investment company, as defined in section 103(3) of

the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 (15 U.S.C. 662), or that has

received from the Small Business Administration notice to proceed to qualify for a license as a small business investment company, which notice or
license has not been revoked; or

(ii) The business of which is to make

investments that are: (A) Designed primarily to promote the public welfare, of the type permitted under paragraph (11) of section 5136 of

the Revised Statutes of the United States (12 U.S.C. 24), including the welfare of

low- and moderate-income communities or families (such as providing housing, services, or jobs); or

(B) Qualified rehabilitation expenditures with respect to a qualified rehabilitated building or certified
historic structure, as such terms are

defined in section 47 of the Internal

Revenue Code of 1986 or a similar State historic tax credit program.

(12) Registered investment companies

and excluded entities. An issuer:

(i) That is registered as an investment company under section 8 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a–8), or that is formed and operated pursuant to a written plan to become a registered investment company as described in § 75.20(e)(3) and that complies with the requirements

of section 18 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a– 18);

(ii) That may rely on an exclusion or exemption from the definition of ‘‘investment company’’ under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15

U.S.C. 80a–1 et seq.) other than the exclusions contained in section 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of that Act; or

(iii) That has elected to be regulated as a business development company pursuant to section 54(a) of that Act (15 U.S.C. 80a–53) and has not withdrawn
its election, or that is formed and operated pursuant to a written plan to become a business development company as described in § 75.20(e)(3) and that complies with the requirements

of section 61 of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a– 60).

(13) Issuers in conjunction with the FDIC’s receivership or conservatorship operations. An issuer that is an entity formed by or on behalf of the FDIC for the purpose of facilitating the disposal of assets acquired in the FDIC’s capacity

as conservator or receiver under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act or Title II

of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform

and Consumer Protection Act.

(14) Other excluded issuers. (i) Any issuer that the appropriate Federal banking agencies, the SEC, and the CFTC jointly determine the exclusion of which is consistent with the purposes of

section 13 of the BHC Act.

(ii) A determination made under paragraph (c)(14)(i) of this section will be promptly made public.

(d) Definition of other terms related to covered funds. For purposes of this subpart:


### 6059 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(1) Applicable accounting standards means U.S. generally accepted accounting principles, or such other accounting standards applicable to a banking entity that the Commission determines are appropriate and that the banking entity uses in the ordinary course of its business in preparing its

consolidated financial statements.

(2) Asset-backed security has the meaning specified in section 3(a)(79) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78c(a)(79)).

(3) Director has the same meaning as provided in § 215.2(d)(1) of the Board’s Regulation O (12 CFR 215.2(d)(1)).

(4) Issuer has the same meaning as in section 2(a)(22) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 (15 U.S.C. 80a– 2(a)(22)).

(5) Issuing entity means with respect to asset-backed securities the special purpose vehicle that owns or holds the pool assets underlying asset-backed

securities and in whose name the assetbacked securities supported or serviced by the pool assets are issued.

(6) Ownership interest —(i) Ownership

interest means any equity, partnership,

or other similar interest. An ‘‘other

similar interest’’ means an interest that:

(A) Has the right to participate in the selection or removal of a general partner, managing member, member of
the board of directors or trustees, investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity trading advisor of the covered fund (excluding the rights of a creditor to exercise remedies upon the occurrence of an event of default or an acceleration event);

(B) Has the right under the terms of

the interest to receive a share of the income, gains or profits of the covered
fund;

(C) Has the right to receive the underlying assets of the covered fund

after all other interests have been redeemed and/or paid in full (excluding the rights of a creditor to exercise remedies upon the occurrence of an

event of default or an acceleration event);

(D) Has the right to receive all or a portion of excess spread (the positive difference, if any, between the aggregate interest payments received from the underlying assets of the covered fund and the aggregate interest paid to the holders of other outstanding interests);

(E) Provides under the terms of the interest that the amounts payable by the covered fund with respect to the interest could be reduced based on losses arising from the underlying assets of the
covered fund, such as allocation of losses, write-downs or charge-offs of the outstanding principal balance, or

reductions in the amount of interest due and payable on the interest; (F) Receives income on a pass-through
basis from the covered fund, or has a rate of return that is determined by reference to the performance of the underlying assets of the covered fund;

or(G) Any synthetic right to have, receive, or be allocated any of the rights in paragraphs (d)(6)(i)(A) through (d)(6)(i)(F) of this section.

(ii) Ownership interest does not

include restricted profit interest, which is an interest held by an entity (or an employee or former employee thereof) in a covered fund for which the entity (or employee thereof) serves as investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or other service provider so long as:

(A) The sole purpose and effect of the interest is to allow the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) to share in the profits of the covered fund as performance compensation for the investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other services provided to the covered fund by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof), provided that the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) may be obligated

under the terms of such interest to return profits previously received;

(B) All such profit, once allocated, is distributed to the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) promptly after being earned or, if not so distributed, is retained by the covered fund for the sole purpose of establishing a reserve amount to satisfy contractual obligations with respect to subsequent losses of the

covered fund and such undistributed profit of the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) does not share in the subsequent investment gains of
the covered fund;

(C) Any amounts invested in the covered fund, including any amounts paid by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) in connection with obtaining the restricted profit
interest, are within the limits of § 75.12;

and

(D) The interest is not transferable by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) except to an affiliate thereof (or an employee of the banking entity or affiliate), to immediate family members, or through the intestacy, of the employee or former employee, or in

connection with a sale of the business that gave rise to the restricted profit interest by the entity (or employee or former employee thereof) to an unaffiliated party that provides investment management, investment advisory, commodity trading advisory,

or other services to the fund. (7) Prime brokerage transaction means any transaction that would be a covered
transaction, as defined in section 23A(b)(7) of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7)), that is provided in connection with custody, clearance and settlement, securities borrowing or lending services, trade execution, financing, or data, operational, and administrative support.

(8) Resident of the United States means a person that is a ‘‘U.S. person’’ as defined in rule 902(k) of the SEC’s Regulation S (17 CFR 230.902(k)).

(9) Sponsor means, with respect to a

covered fund:

(i) To serve as a general partner, managing member, or trustee of a
covered fund, or to serve as a commodity pool operator with respect to a covered fund as defined in (b)(1)(ii)
of this section;

(ii) In any manner to select or to control (or to have employees, officers, or directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the directors, trustees, or management of a covered fund; or

(iii) To share with a covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other purposes, the same name or a

variation of the same name.

(10) Trustee. (i) For purposes of paragraph (d)(9) of this section and
§ 75.11, a trustee does not include:

(A) A trustee that does not exercise investment discretion with respect to a covered fund, including a trustee that is subject to the direction of an unaffiliated named fiduciary who is not a trustee pursuant to section 403(a)(1) of the Employee’s Retirement Income Security Act (29 U.S.C. 1103(a)(1)); or

(B) A trustee that is subject to fiduciary standards imposed under foreign law that are substantially equivalent to those described in paragraph (d)(10)(i)(A) of this section;

(ii) Any entity that directs a person described in paragraph (d)(10)(i) of this section, or that possesses authority and discretion to manage and control the

investment decisions of a covered fund for which such person serves as trustee,

shall be considered to be a trustee of

such covered fund.

**§ 75.11 Permitted organizing and offering, underwriting, and market making with**  **respect to a covered fund.**

(a) Organizing and offering a covered fund in general. Notwithstanding § 75.10(a), a banking entity is not prohibited from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund in connection with, directly or indirectly, organizing and offering a covered fund, including serving as a general partner, managing member, trustee, or


### 6060 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

commodity pool operator of the covered fund and in any manner selecting or controlling (or having employees, officers, directors, or agents who constitute) a majority of the directors, trustees, or management of the covered fund, including any necessary expenses for the foregoing, only if:

(1) The banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) provides bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services;

(2) The covered fund is organized and offered only in connection with the provision of bona fide trust, fiduciary, investment advisory, or commodity trading advisory services and only to persons that are customers of such services of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof), pursuant to a written plan or similar documentation outlining how the banking entity or such affiliate intends to provide advisory or similar services to its customers through organizing and offering such fund;

(3) The banking entity and its affiliates do not acquire or retain an ownership interest in the covered fund except as permitted under § 75.12;

(4) The banking entity and its affiliates comply with the requirements
of § 75.14;

(5) The banking entity and its affiliates do not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in
which such covered fund invests;

(6) The covered fund, for corporate, marketing, promotional, or other

purposes:

(i) Does not share the same name or

a variation of the same name with the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof);

and

(ii) Does not use the word ‘‘bank’’ in

its name;

(7) No director or employee of the banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) takes or retains an ownership interest in the covered fund, except for any director or employee of the banking entity or such affiliate who is directly engaged in providing investment advisory, commodity trading advisory,

or other services to the covered fund at the time the director or employee takes the ownership interest; and

(8) The banking entity: (i) Clearly and conspicuously discloses, in writing, to any prospective

and actual investor in the covered fund (such as through disclosure in the covered fund’s offering documents):

(A) That ‘‘any losses in [such covered fund] will be borne solely by investors in [the covered fund] and not by [the banking entity] or its affiliates; therefore, [the banking entity’s] losses in [such covered fund] will be limited to losses attributable to the ownership interests in the covered fund held by [the banking entity] and any affiliate in its capacity as investor in the [covered fund] or as beneficiary of a restricted profit interest held by [the banking entity] or any affiliate’’;

(B) That such investor should read the fund offering documents before investing in the covered fund;

(C) That the ‘‘ownership interests in the covered fund are not insured by the FDIC, and are not deposits, obligations of, or endorsed or guaranteed in any way, by any banking entity’’ (unless that happens to be the case); and

(D) The role of the banking entity and its affiliates and employees in sponsoring or providing any services to
the covered fund; and

(ii) Complies with any additional rules of the appropriate Federal banking agencies, the SEC, or the CFTC, as provided in section 13(b)(2) of the BHC Act, designed to ensure that losses in such covered fund are borne solely by investors in the covered fund and not by the covered banking entity and its

affiliates.

(b) Organizing and offering an issuing entity of asset-backed securities. (1) Notwithstanding § 75.10(a), a banking entity is not prohibited from acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in, or acting as sponsor to, a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities in connection with, directly or indirectly, organizing and offering that issuing entity, so long as the banking entity and its affiliates comply with all of the requirements of paragraphs (a)(3) through (a)(8) of this

section.

(2) For purposes of paragraph (b) of this section, organizing and offering a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities means acting as
the securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11(a)(3)) of the issuing entity, or acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in the issuing entity as required by section 15G of that Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11) and the implementing regulations issued

thereunder.

(c) Underwriting and market making in ownership interests of a covered fund. The prohibition contained in § 75.10(a) does not apply to a banking entity’s underwriting activities or market making-related activities involving a covered fund so long as:

(1) Those activities are conducted in accordance with the requirements of § 75.4(a) or (b), respectively;

(2) With respect to any banking entity (or any affiliate thereof) that acts as a sponsor, investment adviser or commodity trading advisor to a particular covered fund or otherwise acquires and retains an ownership

interest in such covered fund in reliance on paragraph (a) of this section; acquires and retains an ownership interest in

such covered fund and is either a
securitizer, as that term is used in section 15G(a)(3) of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11(a)(3)), or is acquiring and retaining an ownership interest in such covered fund in compliance with section 15G of that Act (15 U.S.C. 78o– 11) and the implementing regulations issued thereunder each as permitted by paragraph (b) of this section; or, directly or indirectly, guarantees, assumes, or otherwise insures the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such fund invests, then in each such case any ownership interests acquired or retained by the banking entity and its affiliates in connection with underwriting and market making related activities for that particular covered fund are included in the calculation of ownership interests permitted to be held by the banking entity and its affiliates under the limitations of § 75.12(a)(2)(ii) and (d);

and

(3) With respect to any banking entity, the aggregate value of all ownership interests of the banking entity and its affiliates in all covered funds acquired and retained under § 75.11, including all covered funds in which the banking entity holds an ownership interest in connection with underwriting and market making related activities permitted under paragraph (c) of this
section, are included in the calculation of all ownership interests under § 75.12(a)(2)(iii) and (d).

**§ 75.12 Permitted investment in a covered**

**fund.**

(a) Authority and limitations on permitted investments in covered funds. (1) Notwithstanding the prohibition contained in § 75.10(a), a banking entity may acquire and retain an ownership

interest in a covered fund that the banking entity or an affiliate thereof organizes and offers pursuant to § 75.11, for the purposes of:

(i) Establishment. Establishing the fund and providing the fund with sufficient initial equity for investment to permit the fund to attract unaffiliated investors, subject to the limits contained in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (a)(2)(iii) of
this section; or

(ii) De minimis investment. Making and retaining an investment in the covered fund subject to the limits contained in paragraphs (a)(2)(ii) and (a)(2)(iii) of this section.


### 6061 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(2) Investment limits—(i) Seeding period. With respect to an investment in any covered fund made or held pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, the banking entity and its

affiliates:

(A) Must actively seek unaffiliated investors to reduce, through redemption, sale, dilution, or other methods, the aggregate amount of all ownership interests of the banking entity in the covered fund to the amount permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(B) of
this section; and

(B) Must, no later than 1 year after the date of establishment of the fund (or such longer period as may be provided by the Board pursuant to paragraph (e) of this section), conform its ownership

interest in the covered fund to the limits in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section;

(ii) Per-fund limits. (A) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, an investment by a banking entity and its affiliates in any covered fund made or held pursuant to paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section may not exceed 3 percent of the total number or value of the outstanding ownership

interests of the fund.

(B) An investment by a banking entity

and its affiliates in a covered fund that is an issuing entity of asset-backed securities may not exceed 3 percent of

the total fair market value of the ownership interests of the fund measured in accordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, unless a greater percentage is retained by the banking entity and its affiliates in compliance with the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11) and the implementing regulations
issued thereunder, in which case the investment by the banking entity and its affiliates in the covered fund may not
exceed the amount, number, or value of ownership interests of the fund required under section 15G of the Exchange Act and the implementing regulations

issued thereunder.

(iii) Aggregate limit. The aggregate value of all ownership interests of the banking entity and its affiliates in all covered funds acquired or retained under this section may not exceed 3 percent of the tier 1 capital of the banking entity, as provided under paragraph (c) of this section, and shall be calculated as of the last day of each calendar quarter.

(iv) Date of establishment. For purposes of this section, the date of

establishment of a covered fund shall

be:

(A) In general. The date on which the investment adviser or similar entity to the covered fund begins making investments pursuant to the written investment strategy for the fund;

(B) Issuing entities of asset-backed

securities. In the case of an issuing entity of asset-backed securities, the date on which the assets are initially transferred into the issuing entity of

asset-backed securities.

(b) Rules of construction—(1) Attribution of ownership interests to a covered banking entity. (i) For purposes of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, the amount and value of a banking entity’s permitted investment in any single covered fund shall include any ownership interest held under § 75.12 directly by the banking entity, including any affiliate of the banking entity.

(ii) Treatment of registered investment companies, SEC-regulated business development companies and foreign public funds. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, a registered investment company, SEC-regulated business development companies or foreign public fund as described in § 75.10(c)(1) will not be considered to be an affiliate of the banking entity so long as the banking entity:

(A) Does not own, control, or hold with the power to vote 25 percent or more of the voting shares of the company or fund; and

(B) Provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory,
administrative, and other services to the company or fund in compliance with the limitations under applicable regulation, order, or other authority.

(iii) Covered funds. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, a

covered fund will not be considered to be an affiliate of a banking entity so long

as the covered fund is held in compliance with the requirements of this subpart.

(iv) Treatment of employee and director investments financed by the banking entity. For purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, an investment by a director or employee of a banking entity who acquires an ownership interest in his or her personal capacity in a covered fund sponsored by the banking entity will be attributed to the banking entity if the banking entity, directly or indirectly, extends financing for the purpose of enabling the director or employee to acquire the ownership interest in the fund and the financing is used to acquire such ownership interest in the

covered fund.

(2) Calculation of permitted ownership interests in a single covered fund. Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) or (4) of this section, for purposes of determining whether an investment in a single covered fund complies with the restrictions on ownership interests under paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(B) and (ii)(A)

of this section:

(i) The aggregate number of the outstanding ownership interests held by the banking entity shall be the total number of ownership interests held under this section by the banking entity in a covered fund divided by the total number of ownership interests held by
all entities in that covered fund, as of the last day of each calendar quarter (both measured without regard to committed funds not yet called for investment);

(ii) The aggregate value of the outstanding ownership interests held by the banking entity shall be the aggregate

fair market value of all investments in and capital contributions made to the covered fund by the banking entity, divided by the value of all investments in and capital contributions made to that covered fund by all entities, as of the last day of each calendar quarter (all measured without regard to committed funds not yet called for investment). If
fair market value cannot be determined,

then the value shall be the historical

cost basis of all investments in and contributions made by the banking entity to the covered fund;

(iii) For purposes of the calculation under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section, once a valuation methodology is chosen, the banking entity must calculate the

value of its investment and the

investments of all others in the covered fund in the same manner and according

to the same standards.

(3) Issuing entities of asset-backed

securities. In the case of an ownershipinterest in an issuing entity of assetbacked securities, for purposes of determining whether an investment in a single covered fund complies with the restrictions on ownership interests under paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(B) and (a)(2)(ii)(B) of this section:

(i) For securitizations subject to the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11), the

calculations shall be made as of the date and according to the valuation methodology applicable pursuant to the requirements of section 15G of the Exchange Act (15 U.S.C. 78o–11) and the implementing regulations issued
thereunder; or

(ii) For securitization transactions completed prior to the compliance date of such implementing regulations (or as to which such implementing regulations do not apply), the calculations shall be

made as of the date of establishment as defined in paragraph (a)(2)(iv)(B) of this

section or such earlier date on which

the transferred assets have been valued for purposes of transfer to the covered


### 6062 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

fund, and thereafter only upon the date

on which additional securities of the issuing entity of asset-backed securities are priced for purposes of the sales of ownership interests to unaffiliated

investors.

(iii) For securitization transactions completed prior to the compliance date of such implementing regulations (or as to which such implementing regulations do not apply), the aggregate value of the outstanding ownership interests in the

covered fund shall be the fair market

value of the assets transferred to the issuing entity of the securitization and any other assets otherwise held by the issuing entity at such time, determined

in a manner that is consistent with its

determination of the fair market value of

those assets for financial statement

purposes.

(iv) For purposes of the calculation under paragraph (b)(3)(iii) of this section, the valuation methodology used

to calculate the fair market value of the ownership interests must be the same for both the ownership interests held by a banking entity and the ownership interests held by all others in the

covered fund in the same manner and according to the same standards.

(4) Multi-tier fund investments—(i) Master-feeder fund investments. If the principal investment strategy of a covered fund (the ‘‘feeder fund’’) is to invest substantially all of its assets in another single covered fund (the ‘‘master fund’’), then for purposes of the investment limitations in paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(B) and (a)(2)(ii) of this section, the banking entity’s permitted

investment in such funds shall be measured only by reference to the value of the master fund. The banking entity’s permitted investment in the master fund shall include any investment by the banking entity in the master fund, as well as the banking entity’s pro-rata share of any ownership interest of the master fund that is held through the
feeder fund; and

(ii) Fund-of-funds investments. If a banking entity organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to § 75.11 for the purpose of investing in other covered funds (a ‘‘fund of funds’’) and that fund

of funds itself invests in another covered fund that the banking entity is permitted to own, then the banking entity’s permitted investment in that other fund shall include any investment by the banking entity in that other fund, as well as the banking entity’s pro-rata share of any ownership interest of the fund that is held through the fund of funds. The investment of the banking entity may not represent more than 3 percent of the amount or value of any single covered fund. (c) Aggregate permitted investments in all covered funds. (1) For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section, the aggregate value of all ownership interests held by a banking entity shall be the sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest in covered funds (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(d)(6)(ii)), on

a historical cost basis.

(2) Calculation of tier 1 capital. For purposes of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this

section:

(i) Entities that are required to hold and report tier 1 capital. If a banking entity is required to calculate and report tier 1 capital, the banking entity’s tier 1 capital shall be equal to the amount of tier 1 capital of the banking entity as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter, as reported to its primary financial regulatory agency; and

(ii) If a banking entity is not required to calculate and report tier 1 capital, the banking entity’s tier 1 capital shall be determined to be equal to:

(A) In the case of a banking entity that is controlled, directly or indirectly, by a depository institution that calculates and reports tier 1 capital, be equal to the amount of tier 1 capital reported by such controlling depository institution in the manner described in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section;

(B) In the case of a banking entity that is not controlled, directly or indirectly, by a depository institution that calculates and reports tier 1 capital:

( 1 ) Bank holding company

subsidiaries. If the banking entity is a subsidiary of a bank holding company or company that is treated as a bank holding company, be equal to the amount of tier 1 capital reported by the top-tier affiliate of such covered banking entity that calculates and reports tier 1 capital in the manner described in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section; and

(2) Other holding companies and any subsidiary or affiliate thereof. If the banking entity is not a subsidiary of a bank holding company or a company that is treated as a bank holding company, be equal to the total amount of shareholders’ equity of the top-tier affiliate within such organization as of the last day of the most recent calendar quarter that has ended, as determined under applicable accounting standards.

(iii) Treatment of foreign banking

entities—(A) Foreign banking entities. Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)(iii)(B) of this section, with respect to a banking entity that is not itself, and is not controlled directly or indirectly by, a banking entity that is located or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, the tier 1 capital of the banking entity shall be the consolidated tier 1 capital of the entity as calculated under applicable home country standards.

(B) U.S. affiliates of foreign banking

entities. With respect to a banking entity that is located or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State and is controlled by a foreign banking entity identified under paragraph (c)(2)(iii)(A) of this section, the banking entity’s tier 1 capital shall be as calculated under paragraphs (c)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section.

(d) Capital treatment for a permitted investment in a covered fund. For purposes of calculating compliance with the applicable regulatory capital requirements, a banking entity shall deduct from the banking entity’s tier 1 capital (as determined under paragraph (c)(2) of this section) the greater of:

(1) The sum of all amounts paid or contributed by the banking entity in connection with acquiring or retaining an ownership interest (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(d)(6)(ii)), on a historical cost basis, plus any earnings received; and

(2) The fair market value of the banking entity’s ownership interests in

the covered fund as determined under paragraph (b)(2)(ii) or (3) of this section (together with any amounts paid by the entity (or employee thereof) in connection with obtaining a restricted profit interest under § 75.10(d)(6)(ii)), if the banking entity accounts for the profits (or losses) of the fund investment

in its financial statements.

(e) Extension of time to divest an ownership interest. (1) Upon application by a banking entity, the Board may extend the period under paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section for up to 2 additional years if the Board finds that

an extension would be consistent with safety and soundness and not detrimental to the public interest. An application for extension must:

(i) Be submitted to the Board at least 90 days prior to the expiration of the applicable time period;

(ii) Provide the reasons for application, including information that addresses the factors in paragraph (e)(2)
of this section; and

(iii) Explain the banking entity’s plan for reducing the permitted investment in a covered fund through redemption,
sale, dilution or other methods as required in paragraph (a)(2) of this

section.


### 6063 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(2) Factors governing Board

determinations. In reviewing any application under paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the Board may consider all

the facts and circumstances related to the permitted investment in a covered fund, including:

(i) Whether the investment would result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies;

(ii) The contractual terms governing the banking entity’s interest in the
covered fund;

(iii) The date on which the covered fund is expected to have attracted

sufficient investments from investors unaffiliated with the banking entity to enable the banking entity to comply with the limitations in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section;

(iv) The total exposure of the covered banking entity to the investment and the risks that disposing of, or maintaining, the investment in the covered fund may pose to the banking entity and the financial stability of the United States;

(v) The cost to the banking entity of divesting or disposing of the investment within the applicable period;

(vi) Whether the investment or the

divestiture or conformance of the

investment would involve or result in a

material conflict of interest between the banking entity and unaffiliated parties, including clients, customers or counterparties to which it owes a duty;

(vii) The banking entity’s prior efforts to reduce through redemption, sale, dilution, or other methods its ownership interests in the covered fund, including activities related to the marketing of
interests in such covered fund;

(viii) Market conditions; and (ix) Any other factor that the Board believes appropriate.

(3) Authority to impose restrictions on activities or investment during any extension period. The Board may impose such conditions on any extension approved under paragraph (e)(1) of this section as the Board determines are necessary or appropriate to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity or the financial stability of the United States, address

material conflicts of interest or other unsound banking practices, or otherwise further the purposes of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part.

(4) Consultation. In the case of a banking entity that is primarily regulated by another Federal banking agency, the SEC, or the CFTC, the Board will consult with such agency prior to acting on an application by the banking entity for an extension under paragraph (e)(1) of this section. **§ 75.13 Other permitted covered fund**

**activities and investments.**

(a) Permitted risk-mitigating hedging

activities. (1) The prohibition contained in § 75.10(a) does not apply with respect to an ownership interest in a covered fund acquired or retained by a banking entity that is designed to demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate the specific, identifiable risks to the banking entity in connection with a compensation arrangement with an employee of the banking entity or an affiliate thereof that directly provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory or other services to the covered

fund.

(2) Requirements. The risk-mitigating hedging activities of a banking entity are permitted under paragraph (a) of this section only if:

(i) The banking entity has established and implements, maintains and enforces an internal compliance program required by subpart D of this part that is reasonably designed to ensure the banking entity’s compliance with the requirements of this section, including:

(A) Reasonably designed written policies and procedures; and

(B) Internal controls and ongoing monitoring, management, and authorization procedures, including relevant escalation procedures; and

(ii) The acquisition or retention of the ownership interest:

(A) Is made in accordance with the written policies, procedures and internal controls required under this

section;

(B) At the inception of the hedge, is designed to reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate and demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates one or more specific, identifiable risks arising in connection with the compensation arrangement with the employee that directly provides investment advisory, commodity trading advisory, or other
services to the covered fund;

(C) Does not give rise, at the inception of the hedge, to any significant new or additional risk that is not itself hedged contemporaneously in accordance with
this section; and

(D) Is subject to continuing review, monitoring and management by the banking entity.

(iii) The compensation arrangement relates solely to the covered fund in which the banking entity or any affiliate has acquired an ownership interest pursuant to this paragraph and such compensation arrangement provides that any losses incurred by the banking entity on such ownership interest will be offset by corresponding decreases in amounts payable under such compensation arrangement.

(b) Certain permitted covered fund activities and investments outside of the

United States. (1) The prohibition contained in § 75.10(a) does not apply to the acquisition or retention of any ownership interest in, or the sponsorship of, a covered fund by a banking entity only if:

(i) The banking entity is not organized or directly or indirectly controlled by a banking entity that is organized under

the laws of the United States or of one

or more States;

(ii) The activity or investment by the banking entity is pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act;

(iii) No ownership interest in the

covered fund is offered for sale or sold
to a resident of the United States; and

(iv) The activity or investment occurs solely outside of the United States.

(2) An activity or investment by the banking entity is pursuant to paragraph (9) or (13) of section 4(c) of the BHC Act for purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section only if:

(i) The activity or investment is

conducted in accordance with the requirements of this section; and

(ii)(A) With respect to a banking entity that is a foreign banking organization, the banking entity meets the qualifying foreign banking organization requirements of § 211.23(a), (c) or (e) of the Board’s Regulation K (12 CFR 211.23(a), (c) or (e)), as applicable; or

(B) With respect to a banking entity that is not a foreign banking organization, the banking entity is not organized under the laws of the United

States or of one or more States and the banking entity, on a fully-consolidated basis, meets at least two of the following requirements:

( 1 ) Total assets of the banking entity

held outside of the United States exceed total assets of the banking entity held in
the United States;

(2) Total revenues derived from the business of the banking entity outside of

the United States exceed total revenues

derived from the business of the banking entity in the United States; or

(3) Total net income derived from the business of the banking entity outside of

the United States exceeds total net

income derived from the business of the banking entity in the United States.

(3) An ownership interest in a covered

fund is not offered for sale or sold to a

resident of the United States for purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section only if it is sold or has been sold pursuant to an offering that does not target residents of the United States.


### 6064 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

(4) An activity or investment occurs solely outside of the United States for purposes of paragraph (b)(1)(iv) of this section only if:

(i) The banking entity acting as sponsor, or engaging as principal in the acquisition or retention of an ownership
interest in the covered fund, is not itself, and is not controlled directly or indirectly by, a banking entity that is

located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(ii) The banking entity (including relevant personnel) that makes the decision to acquire or retain the ownership interest or act as sponsor to

the covered fund is not located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State;

(iii) The investment or sponsorship, including any transaction arising from risk-mitigating hedging related to an ownership interest, is not accounted for as principal directly or indirectly on a consolidated basis by any branch or

affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State; and

(iv) No financing for the banking entity’s ownership or sponsorship is provided, directly or indirectly, by any

branch or affiliate that is located in the United States or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State.

(5) For purposes of this section, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign bank, or any subsidiary thereof,
is located in the United States; however, a foreign bank of which that branch, agency, or subsidiary is a part is not

considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operation of the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary.

(c) Permitted covered fund interests and activities by a regulated insurance

company. The prohibition contained in § 75.10(a) does not apply to the acquisition or retention by an insurance company, or an affiliate thereof, of any ownership interest in, or the sponsorship of, a covered fund only if:

(1) The insurance company or its affiliate acquires and retains the ownership interest solely for the general account of the insurance company or for

one or more separate accounts established by the insurance company;

(2) The acquisition and retention of the ownership interest is conducted in compliance with, and subject to, the insurance company investment laws, regulations, and written guidance of the State or jurisdiction in which such insurance company is domiciled; and

(3) The appropriate Federal banking agencies, after consultation with the Financial Stability Oversight Council

and the relevant insurance commissioners of the States and foreign jurisdictions, as appropriate, have not jointly determined, after notice and comment, that a particular law, regulation, or written guidance described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section is insufficient to protect the safety and soundness of the banking entity, or the financial stability of the

United States.

**§ 75.14 Limitations on relationships with a**

**covered fund.**

(a) Relationships with a covered fund. (1) Except as provided for in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, no banking entity that serves, directly or indirectly, as the investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or sponsor to a covered fund, that organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to § 75.11, or that continues to hold an ownership interest in accordance with § 75.11(b), and no affiliate of such entity, may enter into a
transaction with the covered fund, or with any other covered fund that is controlled by such covered fund, that

would be a covered transaction as

defined in section 23A of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c(b)(7)), as if such banking entity and the affiliate

thereof were a member bank and the

covered fund were an affiliate thereof.

(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, a banking entity may:

(i) Acquire and retain any ownership

interest in a covered fund in accordance with the requirements of §§ 75.11,
75.12, or 75.13; and

(ii) Enter into any prime brokerage transaction with any covered fund in which a covered fund managed, sponsored, or advised by such banking entity (or an affiliate thereof) has taken an ownership interest, if:

(A) The banking entity is in compliance with each of the limitations set forth in § 75.11 with respect to a covered fund organized and offered by such banking entity (or an affiliate thereof);

(B) The chief executive officer (or equivalent officer) of the banking entity certifies in writing annually to the Commission (with a duty to update the

certification if the information in the certification materially changes) that the banking entity does not, directly or indirectly, guarantee, assume, or otherwise insure the obligations or performance of the covered fund or of any covered fund in which such
covered fund invests; and

(C) The Board has not determined that

such transaction is inconsistent with the safe and sound operation and condition of the banking entity. (b) Restrictions on transactions with covered funds. A banking entity that serves, directly or indirectly, as the investment manager, investment adviser, commodity trading advisor, or sponsor to a covered fund, or that organizes and offers a covered fund pursuant to § 75.11, or that continues to hold an ownership interest in accordance with § 75.11(b), shall be subject to section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c–1), as if such banking entity were a member

bank and such covered fund were an

affiliate thereof.

(c) Restrictions on prime brokerage

transactions. A prime brokerage transaction permitted under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section shall be subject

to section 23B of the Federal Reserve Act (12 U.S.C. 371c–1) as if the counterparty were an affiliate of the banking entity.

**§ 75.15 Other limitations on permitted**

**covered fund activities.**

(a) No transaction, class of transactions, or activity may be deemed permissible under §§ 75.11 through
75.13 if the transaction, class of transactions, or activity would:

(1) Involve or result in a material conflict of interest between the banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties;

(2) Result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure by the banking entity to a high-risk asset or a high-risk trading

strategy; or

(3) Pose a threat to the safety and soundness of the banking entity or to the financial stability of the United

States.

(b) Definition of material conflict of

interest. (1) For purposes of this section,

a material conflict of interest between a banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties exists if the banking entity engages in any
transaction, class of transactions, or activity that would involve or result in the banking entity’s interests being materially adverse to the interests of its client, customer, or counterparty with respect to such transaction, class of transactions, or activity, and the banking entity has not taken at least one of the actions in paragraph (b)(2) of this

section.

(2) Prior to effecting the specific transaction or class or type of transactions, or engaging in the specific activity, the banking entity:

(i) Timely and effective disclosure. (A) Has made clear, timely, and effective
disclosure of the conflict of interest, together with other necessary
information, in reasonable detail and in a manner sufficient to permit a


### 6065 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

reasonable client, customer, or counterparty to meaningfully
understand the conflict of interest; and

(B) Such disclosure is made in a manner that provides the client, customer, or counterparty the opportunity to negate, or substantially mitigate, any materially adverse effect on the client, customer, or counterparty created by the conflict of interest; or

(ii) Information barriers. Has established, maintained, and enforced

information barriers that are memorialized in written policies and procedures, such as physical separation of personnel, or functions, or limitations on types of activity, that are reasonably designed, taking into consideration the nature of the banking entity’s business, to prevent the conflict of interest from involving or resulting in a materially
adverse effect on a client, customer, or counterparty. A banking entity may not rely on such information barriers if, in the case of any specific transaction, class or type of transactions or activity, the banking entity knows or should reasonably know that, notwithstanding the banking entity’s establishment of
information barriers, the conflict of interest may involve or result in a materially adverse effect on a client,

customer, or counterparty.

(c) Definition of high-risk asset and high-risk trading strategy. For purposes

of this section:

(1) High-risk asset means an asset or group of related assets that would, if held by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United

States.

(2) High-risk trading strategy means a trading strategy that would, if engaged in by a banking entity, significantly increase the likelihood that the banking entity would incur a substantial financial loss or would pose a threat to the financial stability of the United

States.

**§§ 75.16–75.19 [Reserved]**

**Subpart D—Compliance Program Requirement; Violations** 

**§ 75.20 Program for compliance; reporting.**

(a) Program requirement. Each banking entity shall develop and provide for the continued administration of a compliance program reasonably designed to ensure and monitor compliance with the prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading and covered fund

activities and investments set forth in section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. The terms, scope and detail of the compliance program shall be appropriate for the types, size, scope and complexity of activities and business structure of the banking entity.

(b) Contents of compliance program. Except as provided in paragraph (f) of this section, the compliance program required by paragraph (a) of this section,
at a minimum, shall include:

(1) Written policies and procedures reasonably designed to document, describe, monitor and limit trading activities subject to subpart B of this part (including those permitted under §§ 75.3 to 75.6), including setting, monitoring and managing required
limits set out in §§ 75.4 and 75.5, and activities and investments with respect to a covered fund subject to subpart C of this part (including those permitted under §§ 75.11 through 75.14) conducted by the banking entity to

ensure that all activities and investments conducted by the banking entity that are subject to section 13 of the BHC Act and this part comply with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;

(2) A system of internal controls reasonably designed to monitor compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and to prevent the

occurrence of activities or investments that are prohibited by section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;

(3) A management framework that clearly delineates responsibility and accountability for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and includes appropriate management review of trading limits, strategies, hedging activities, investments, incentive compensation and other matters identified in this part or by management as requiring attention;

(4) Independent testing and audit of the effectiveness of the compliance program conducted periodically by qualified personnel of the banking entity or by a qualified outside party;

(5) Training for trading personnel and managers, as well as other appropriate personnel, to effectively implement and enforce the compliance program; and

(6) Records sufficient to demonstrate compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, which a banking entity must promptly provide to the Commission upon request and retain for a period of no less than 5 years or such longer period as required by the

Commission.

(c) Additional standards. In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, the compliance program of a banking entity must satisfy the requirements and other standards contained in Appendix B of this part, if: (1) The banking entity engages in proprietary trading permitted under subpart B of this part and is required to comply with the reporting requirements of paragraph (d) of this section;

(2) The banking entity has reported

total consolidated assets as of the previous calendar year end of $50
billion or more or, in the case of a foreign banking entity, has total U.S. assets as of the previous calendar year end of $50 billion or more (including all
subsidiaries, affiliates, branches and agencies of the foreign banking entity operating, located or organized in the United States); or

(3) The Commission notifies the banking entity in writing that it must satisfy the requirements and other standards contained in Appendix B of this part.

(d) Reporting requirements under Appendix A of this Part. (1) A banking entity engaged in proprietary trading activity permitted under subpart B of this part shall comply with the reporting requirements described in Appendix A of this part, if:

(i) The banking entity (other than a foreign banking entity as provided in paragraph (d)(1)(ii) of this section) has, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, trading assets and liabilities (excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or any agency of the United States) the average gross sum of which (on a worldwide consolidated basis) over the previous consecutive four quarters, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equals or

exceeds the threshold established in paragraph (d)(2) of this section;

(ii) In the case of a foreign banking entity, the average gross sum of the trading assets and liabilities of the combined U.S. operations of the foreign banking entity (including all
subsidiaries, affiliates, branches and agencies of the foreign banking entity operating, located or organized in the United States and excluding trading assets and liabilities involving obligations of or guaranteed by the United States or any agency of the United States) over the previous consecutive four quarters, as measured as of the last day of each of the four prior calendar quarters, equals or

exceeds the threshold established in paragraph (d)(2) of this section; or

(iii) The Commission notifies the banking entity in writing that it must satisfy the reporting requirements contained in Appendix A of this part.

(2) The threshold for reporting under paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be $50 billion beginning on June 30, 2014;


### 6066 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

$25 billion beginning on April 30, 2016; and $10 billion beginning on December

31, 2016.

(3) Frequency of reporting. Unless the Commission notifies the banking entity in writing that it must report on a different basis, a banking entity with $50 billion or more in trading assets and liabilities (as calculated in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section) shall report the information required by Appendix A of this part for each calendar month within 30 days of the
end of the relevant calendar month; beginning with information for the month of January 2015, such information shall be reported within 10 days of the end of each calendar month. Any other banking entity subject to Appendix A of this part shall report the information required by Appendix A of this part for each calendar quarter within 30 days of the end of that calendar quarter unless the Commission notifies the banking entity in writing that it must report on a different basis.

(e) Additional documentation for covered funds. Any banking entity that
has more than $10 billion in total consolidated assets as reported on December 31 of the previous two calendar years shall maintain records

that include:

(1) Documentation of the exclusions or exemptions other than sections 3(c)(1) and 3(c)(7) of the Investment Company Act of 1940 relied on by each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all subsidiaries and affiliates) in determining that such fund is not a
covered fund;

(2) For each fund sponsored by the banking entity (including all subsidiaries and affiliates) for which the banking entity relies on one or more of

the exclusions from the definition of covered fund provided by § 75.10(c)(1), (5), (8), (9), or (10), documentation supporting the banking entity’s

determination that the fund is not a covered fund pursuant to one or more
of those exclusions;

(3) For each seeding vehicle described in § 75.10(c)(12)(i) or (iii) that will become a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company, a written plan documenting the banking entity’s determination that the seeding vehicle will become a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company; the period of time during which the vehicle will operate as a seeding vehicle; and the banking entity’s plan to market the vehicle to third-party investors and convert it into a registered investment company or SEC-regulated business development company within the time period specified in § 75.12(a)(2)(i)(B);

(4) For any banking entity that is, or is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is, located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State, if the aggregate amount of ownership interests in foreign public funds that are described in § 75.10(c)(1) owned by such banking entity (including ownership interests owned by any affiliate that is controlled directly or indirectly by a banking entity that is located in or organized under the laws of the United States or of any State)
exceeds $50 million at the end of two or more consecutive calendar quarters, beginning with the next succeeding calendar quarter, documentation of the value of the ownership interests owned by the banking entity (and such affiliates) in each foreign public fund and each jurisdiction in which any such foreign public fund is organized,

calculated as of the end of each calendar quarter, which documentation must continue until the banking entity’s aggregate amount of ownership interests in foreign public funds is below $50

million for two consecutive calendar quarters; and

(5) For purposes of paragraph (e)(4) of this section, a U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity is
located in the United States; however, the foreign bank that operates or controls that branch, agency, or subsidiary is not considered to be located in the United States solely by virtue of operating or controlling the U.S. branch, agency, or subsidiary.

(f) Simplified programs for less active banking entities—(1) Banking entities

with no covered activities. A banking entity that does not engage in activities or investments pursuant to subpart B or subpart C of this part (other than trading activities permitted pursuant to § 75.6(a)) may satisfy the requirements of this section by establishing the required compliance program prior to becoming engaged in such activities or making such investments (other than trading activities permitted pursuant to § 75.6(a)).

(2) Banking entities with modest

activities. A banking entity with total
consolidated assets of $10 billion or less as reported on December 31 of the previous two calendar years that engages in activities or investments pursuant to subpart B or subpart C of this part (other than trading activities permitted under § 75.6(a)) may satisfy the requirements of this section by including in its existing compliance policies and procedures appropriate references to the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and adjustments as appropriate given the activities, size, scope and complexity of the banking entity.

**§ 75.21 Termination of activities or investments; penalties for violations.** 

(a) Any banking entity that engages in an activity or makes an investment in

violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, or acts in a manner that

functions as an evasion of the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, including through an abuse of any activity or investment permitted under subparts B or C of this part, or otherwise violates the restrictions and requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, shall, upon discovery, promptly terminate the activity and, as relevant, dispose of the

investment.

(b) Whenever the Commission finds reasonable cause to believe any banking entity has engaged in an activity or

made an investment in violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, or engaged in any activity or made any

investment that functions as an evasion of the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, the Commission may take any action permitted by law to enforce compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including directing the banking entity to restrict, limit, or terminate any or all activities under this part and dispose of any

investment.

Appendix A to Part 75—Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements for Covered Trading Activities

I. Purpose

a. This appendix sets forth reporting and recordkeeping requirements that certain banking entities must satisfy in connection with the restrictions on proprietary trading set forth in subpart B of this part (‘‘proprietary trading restrictions’’). Pursuant to § 75.20(d), this appendix generally applies to a banking entity that, together with its affiliates and subsidiaries, has significant trading assets and liabilities. These entities are required to (i) furnish periodic reports to the Commission regarding a variety of quantitative measurements of their covered trading activities, which vary depending on the scope and size of covered trading activities, and (ii) create and maintain records documenting the preparation and content of these reports. The requirements of this appendix must be incorporated into the banking entity’s internal compliance program under § 75.20 and Appendix B of this part.

b. The purpose of this appendix is to assist banking entities and the Commission in:

(i) Better understanding and evaluating the scope, type, and profile of the banking entity’s covered trading activities;

(ii) Monitoring the banking entity’s covered trading activities;

(iii) Identifying covered trading activities

that warrant further review or examination


### 6067 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

by the banking entity to verify compliance with the proprietary trading restrictions;

(iv) Evaluating whether the covered trading activities of trading desks engaged in market making-related activities subject to § 75.4(b) are consistent with the requirements governing permitted market making-related

activities;

(v) Evaluating whether the covered trading activities of trading desks that are engaged in permitted trading activity subject to § 75.4, 75.5, or 75.6(a) and (b) (i.e., underwriting andmarket making-related related activity, riskmitigating hedging, or trading in certain government obligations) are consistent with the requirement that such activity not result, directly or indirectly, in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies;

(vi) Identifying the profile of particular covered trading activities of the banking entity, and the individual trading desks of the banking entity, to help establish the appropriate frequency and scope of examination by the Commission of such
activities; and

(vii) Assessing and addressing the risks associated with the banking entity’s covered trading activities.

c. The quantitative measurements that must be furnished pursuant to this appendix

are not intended to serve as a dispositive tool for the identification of permissible or impermissible activities.

d. In order to allow banking entities and the Agencies to evaluate the effectiveness of these metrics, banking entities must collect and report these metrics for all trading desks beginning on the dates established in § 75.20. The Agencies will review the data collected and revise this collection requirement as appropriate based on a review of the data collected prior to September 30, 2015.

e. In addition to the quantitative measurements required in this appendix, a banking entity may need to develop and implement other quantitative measurements in order to effectively monitor its covered trading activities for compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and to have an effective compliance program, as required by § 75.20 and Appendix B of this part. The effectiveness of particular quantitative measurements may differ based on the profile of the banking entity’s businesses in general and, more specifically, of the particular trading desk, including types of instruments traded, trading activities and strategies, and history and experience (e.g., whether the trading desk is an established, successful

market maker or a new entrant to a competitive market). In all cases, banking entities must ensure that they have robust measures in place to identify and monitor the risks taken in their trading activities, to

ensure that the activities are within risk tolerances established by the banking entity, and to monitor and examine for compliance with the proprietary trading restrictions in this part.

f. On an ongoing basis, banking entities must carefully monitor, review, and evaluate all furnished quantitative measurements, as well as any others that they choose to utilize in order to maintain compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. All measurement results that indicate a heightened risk of impermissible proprietarytrading, including with respect to otherwisepermitted activities under §§ 75.4 through
75.6(a) and (b), or that result in a material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies, must be escalated within the banking entity for review, further analysis, explanation to the Commission, and remediation, where appropriate. The quantitative measurements discussed in this appendix should be helpful to banking entities in identifying and managing the risks related to their covered trading activities.

II. Definitions

The terms used in this appendix have the same meanings as set forth in §§ 75.2 and 75.3. In addition, for purposes of this appendix, the following definitions apply:

Calculation period means the period of time for which a particular quantitative

measurement must be calculated.

Comprehensive profit and loss means the net profit or loss of a trading desk’s material sources of trading revenue over a specific period of time, including, for example, any

increase or decrease in the market value of a trading desk’s holdings, dividend income, and interest income and expense.

Covered trading activity means trading conducted by a trading desk under § 75.4, 75.5, or 75.6(a) or (b). A banking entity may include trading under § 75.3(d) or 75.6(c), (d)
or (e).

Measurement frequency means the frequency with which a particular quantitative metric must be calculated and

recorded.

Trading desk means the smallest discrete unit of organization of a banking entity that purchases or sells financial instruments for the trading account of the banking entity or

an affiliate thereof.

III. Reporting and Recordkeeping of
Quantitative Measurements

a. Scope of Required Reporting

General scope. Each banking entity made subject to this part by § 75.20 must furnish the following quantitative measurements for each trading desk of the banking entity, calculated in accordance with this appendix:

• Risk and Position Limits and Usage;

• Risk Factor Sensitivities;

• Value-at-Risk and Stress VaR;

• Comprehensive Profit and Loss
Attribution;

• Inventory Turnover;

• Inventory Aging; and

• Customer Facing Trade Ratio

b. Frequency of Required Calculation and Reporting

A banking entity must calculate any applicable quantitative measurement for each trading day. A banking entity must report each applicable quantitative measurement to the Commission on the reporting schedule
established in § 75.20 unless otherwise requested by the Commission. All quantitative measurements for any calendar month must be reported within the time period required by § 75.20. c. Recordkeeping

A banking entity must, for any quantitative

measurement furnished to the Commission pursuant to this appendix and § 75.20(d), create and maintain records documenting the preparation and content of these reports, as well as such information as is necessary to permit the Commission to verify the accuracy of such reports, for a period of 5 years from the end of the calendar year for which the

measurement was taken.

IV. Quantitative Measurements

a. Risk-Management Measurements

1. Risk and Position Limits and Usage

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Risk and Position Limits are the

constraints that define the amount of risk that a trading desk is permitted to take at a point in time, as defined by the banking entity for a specific trading desk. Usage represents the portion of the trading desk’s limits that are accounted for by the current activity of the desk. Risk and position limits and their usage are key risk management tools used to control and monitor risk taking and include,
but are not limited, to the limits set out in
§§ 75.4 and 75.5. A number of the metrics that are described below, including ‘‘Risk

Factor Sensitivities’’ and ‘‘Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk,’’ relate to a trading desk’s risk and position limits and are useful in evaluating and setting these limits in the broader context of the trading desk’s overall activities, particularly for the market making activities under § 75.4(b) and hedging activity under § 75.5. Accordingly, the limits required
under §§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii) and 75.5(b)(1)(i) must meet the applicable requirements under
§§ 75.4(b)(2)(iii) and 75.5(b)(1)(i) and also must include appropriate metrics for the trading desk limits including, at a minimum,

the ‘‘Risk Factor Sensitivities’’ and ‘‘Value-atRisk and Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics except to the extent any of the ‘‘Risk Factor

Sensitivities’’ or ‘‘Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk’’ metrics are demonstrably ineffective for measuring and monitoring the risks of a trading desk based on the types of positions traded by, and risk exposures of,

that desk.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: Risk and Position Limits must be reported in the format used by the banking entity for the purposes of risk management of each trading

desk. Risk and Position Limits are often expressed in terms of risk measures, such as VaR and Risk Factor Sensitivities, but may also be expressed in terms of other observable criteria, such as net open positions. When criteria other than VaR or

Risk Factor Sensitivities are used to define
the Risk and Position Limits, both the value

of the Risk and Position Limits and the value

of the variables used to assess whether these limits have been reached must be reported.

iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

2. Risk Factor Sensitivities

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Risk Factor Sensitivities are changes in a trading desk’s Comprehensive Profit and Loss that are expected to occur in the event of a change in one or more


### 6068 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

underlying variables that are significant sources of the trading desk’s profitability and

risk.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: A banking entity must report the Risk Factor Sensitivities that are monitored and managed as part of the trading desk’s overall risk management policy. The underlying data and methods used to compute a trading desk’s Risk Factor Sensitivities will depend on the specific function of the trading desk and the internal risk management models employed. The number and type of Risk Factor Sensitivities that are monitored and managed by a trading desk, and furnished to the Commission, will depend on the explicit risks assumed by the trading desk. In general, however, reported Risk Factor Sensitivities must be sufficiently granular to account for a preponderance of the expected price variation in the trading desk’s holdings.

A. Trading desks must take into account any relevant factors in calculating Risk Factor Sensitivities, including, for example, the following with respect to particular asset

classes:

• Commodity derivative positions: risk factors with respect to the related commodities set out in § 20.2 of this chapter, the maturity of the positions, volatility and/ or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), and the maturity profile of the positions;

• Credit positions: risk factors with respect to credit spreads that are sufficiently granular to account for specific credit sectors and market segments, the maturity profile of the positions, and risk factors with respect to
interest rates of all relevant maturities;

• Credit-related derivative positions: risk factor sensitivities, for example credit spreads, shifts (parallel and non-parallel) in credit spreads—volatility, and/or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), and the maturity profile of the positions;

• Equity derivative positions: risk factor sensitivities such as equity positions, volatility, and/or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), and the maturity profile of the positions;

• Equity positions: risk factors for equity prices and risk factors that differentiate between important equity market sectors and segments, such as a small capitalization equities and international equities;

• Foreign exchange derivative positions: risk factors with respect to major currency pairs and maturities, exposure to interest rates at relevant maturities, volatility, and/or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), as well as the maturity profile of the positions; and

• Interest rate positions, including interest rate derivative positions: risk factors with respect to major interest rate categories and maturities and volatility and/or correlation sensitivities (expressed in a manner that demonstrates any significant non-linearities), and shifts (parallel and non-parallel) in the interest rate curve, as well as the maturity profile of the positions.

B. The methods used by a banking entity

to calculate sensitivities to a common factor shared by multiple trading desks, such as an equity price factor, must be applied consistently across its trading desks so that the sensitivities can be compared from one trading desk to another.

iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

3. Value-at-Risk and Stress Value-at-Risk

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Value-at-Risk (‘‘VaR’’) is the commonly used percentile measurement of

the risk of future financial loss in the value of a given set of aggregated positions over a specified period of time, based on current market conditions. For purposes of this appendix, Stress Value-at-Risk (‘‘Stress VaR’’) is the percentile measurement of the risk of future financial loss in the value of a given set of aggregated positions over a specified period of time, based on market conditions during a period of significant financial stress.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: Banking entities must compute and report VaR and Stress VaR by employing generally accepted

standards and methods of calculation. VaR should reflect a loss in a trading desk that is expected to be exceeded less than one percent of the time over a one-day period. For those banking entities that are subject to regulatory capital requirements imposed by a Federal banking agency, VaR and Stress VaR must be computed and reported in a manner that is consistent with such regulatory capital requirements. In cases where a trading desk

does not have a standalone VaR or Stress VaR calculation but is part of a larger aggregation of positions for which a VaR or Stress VaR calculation is performed, a VaR or Stress VaR calculation that includes only the trading desk’s holdings must be performed consistent

with the VaR or Stress VaR model and methodology used for the larger aggregation of positions.

iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

b. Source-of-Revenue Measurements

1. Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Comprehensive Profit and Loss Attribution is an analysis that attributes the daily fluctuation in the value of a trading desk’s positions to various sources. First, the daily profit and loss of the aggregated positions is divided into three categories: (i) Profit and loss attributable to a trading desk’s existing positions that were also positions held by the trading desk as of the end of the prior day (‘‘existing positions’’); (ii) profit and loss attributable to new positions resulting from the current day’s trading activity (‘‘new positions’’); and (iii) residual profit and loss that cannot be specifically attributed to existing positions or new positions. The sum of (i), (ii), and (iii) must equal the trading desk’s comprehensive profit and loss at each point in time. In addition, profit and loss measurements must calculate volatility of comprehensive profit and loss (i.e., the standard deviation of the trading desk’s one-day profit and loss, in dollar terms) for the reporting period for at least a 30-, 60- and 90-day lag period, from the end of the reporting period, and any other period that the banking entity deems necessary to meet the requirements of the rule. A. The comprehensive profit and loss associated with existing positions must reflect changes in the value of these positions on the applicable day. The comprehensive profit and loss from existing positions must be further attributed, as applicable, to changes in (i) the specific Risk Factors and other factors that are monitored and managed as part of the trading desk’s overall risk management policies and procedures; and (ii) any other applicable elements, such as cash flows, carry, changes in reserves, and the
correction, cancellation, or exercise of a

trade.

B. The comprehensive profit and loss attributed to new positions must reflect commissions and fee income or expense and market gains or losses associated with transactions executed on the applicable day. New positions include purchases and sales of

financial instruments and other assets/ liabilities and negotiated amendments to existing positions. The comprehensive profit and loss from new positions may be reported in the aggregate and does not need to be further attributed to specific sources.

C. The portion of comprehensive profit and loss that cannot be specifically attributed to

known sources must be allocated to a residual category identified as an unexplained portion of the comprehensive profit and loss. Significant unexplained profit and loss must be escalated for further investigation and analysis.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: The specific categories used by a trading desk in the attribution analysis and amount of detail for the analysis should be tailored to the type and amount of trading activities undertaken by the trading desk. The new position attribution must be computed by calculating the difference between the prices at which instruments were bought and/or sold and the prices at which those instruments are marked to market at the close of business on that day multiplied by the notional or principal amount of each purchase or sale. Any fees, commissions, or other payments received (paid) that are associated with transactions executed on that day must be added (subtracted) from such difference. These factors must be measured consistently over time to facilitate historical comparisons.

iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

c. Customer-Facing Activity Measurements

1. Inventory Turnover

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Inventory Turnover is a ratio that measures the turnover of a trading desk’s inventory. The numerator of the ratio is the

absolute value of all transactions over the reporting period. The denominator of the ratio is the value of the trading desk’s inventory at the beginning of the reporting period.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: For purposes of this appendix, for derivatives, other than options and interest rate derivatives, value means gross notional value, for options, value means delta adjusted notional value, and for interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year bond equivalent value.

iii. Calculation Period: 30 days, 60 days, and 90 days.


### 6069 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

2. Inventory Aging

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, Inventory Aging generally describes a schedule of the trading desk’s aggregate assets and liabilities and the

amount of time that those assets and liabilities have been held. Inventory Aging should measure the age profile of the trading

desk’s assets and liabilities.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: In general, Inventory Aging must be computed using a trading desk’s trading activity data and must identify the value of a trading desk’s aggregate assets and liabilities. Inventory Aging must include two schedules, an asset-aging schedule and a liability-aging

schedule. Each schedule must record the

value of assets or liabilities held over all holding periods. For derivatives, other than options, and interest rate derivatives, value means gross notional value, for options, value means delta adjusted notional value
and, for interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year bond equivalent value.

iii. Calculation Period: One trading day.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

3. Customer-Facing Trade Ratio—Trade

Count Based and Value Based

i. Description: For purposes of this appendix, the Customer-Facing Trade Ratio is a ratio comparing (i) the transactions involving a counterparty that is a customer of the trading desk to (ii) the transactions involving a counterparty that is not a customer of the trading desk. A trade count based ratio must be computed that records the number of transactions involving a counterparty that is a customer of the trading

desk and the number of transactions involving a counterparty that is not a customer of the trading desk. A value based ratio must be computed that records the value of transactions involving a counterparty that is a customer of the trading desk and the value of transactions involving a counterparty that is not a customer of the trading desk.

ii. General Calculation Guidance: For purposes of calculating the Customer-Facing Trade Ratio, a counterparty is considered to be a customer of the trading desk if the counterparty is a market participant that makes use of the banking entity’s market making-related services by obtaining such services, responding to quotations, or entering into a continuing relationship with respect to such services. However, a trading desk or other organizational unit of another banking entity would not be a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk if the other entity has trading assets and

liabilities of $50 billion or more as measured
in accordance with § 75.20(d)(1) unless the trading desk documents how and why a particular trading desk or other organizational unit of the entity should be treated as a client, customer, or counterparty of the trading desk. Transactions conducted anonymously on an exchange or similar trading facility that permits trading on behalf of a broad range of market participants would

be considered transactions with customers of the trading desk. For derivatives, other than options, and interest rate derivatives, value means gross notional value, for options, value means delta adjusted notional value,
and for interest rate derivatives, value means 10-year bond equivalent value.

iii. Calculation Period: 30 days, 60 days, and 90 days.

iv. Measurement Frequency: Daily.

Appendix B to Part 75—Enhanced Minimum Standards for Compliance Programs

I. Overview

Section 75.20(c) requires certain banking
entities to establish, maintain, and enforce an enhanced compliance program that includes the requirements and standards in this Appendix as well as the minimum written policies and procedures, internal controls, management framework, independent testing, training, and recordkeeping provisions outlined in § 75.20. This Appendix sets forth additional minimum standards with respect to the establishment, oversight, maintenance, and enforcement by these banking entities of an enhanced internal compliance program for ensuring and monitoring compliance with the prohibitions and restrictions on proprietary trading and covered fund activities and

investments set forth in section 13 of the BHC Act and this part.

a. This compliance program must: 1. Be reasonably designed to identify, document, monitor, and report the permitted trading and covered fund activities and investments of the banking entity; identify, monitor and promptly address the risks of

these covered activities and investments and potential areas of noncompliance; and prevent activities or investments prohibited by, or that do not comply with, section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;

2. Establish and enforce appropriate limits

on the covered activities and investments of the banking entity, including limits on the size, scope, complexity, and risks of the

individual activities or investments consistent with the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part;

3. Subject the effectiveness of the compliance program to periodic independent review and testing, and ensure that the entity’s internal audit, corporate compliance

and internal control functions involved in review and testing are effective and independent;

4. Make senior management, and others as appropriate, accountable for the effective implementation of the compliance program,

and ensure that the board of directors and chief executive officer (or equivalent) of the banking entity review the effectiveness of the compliance program; and

5. Facilitate supervision and examination by the Agencies of the banking entity’s permitted trading and covered fund activities

and investments.

II. Enhanced Compliance Program

a. Proprietary Trading Activities

A banking entity must establish, maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes written policies and procedures that are appropriate for the types, size, and complexity of, and risks associated with, its permitted trading activities. The compliance program may be tailored to the types of trading activities conducted by the banking entity, and must include a detailed description of controls established by the banking entity to reasonably ensure that its trading activities are conducted in accordance with the requirements and limitations applicable to those trading

activities under section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, and provide for appropriate revision of the compliance program before expansion of the trading activities of the banking entity. A banking entity must devote adequate resources and use knowledgeable personnel in conducting, supervising and managing its trading activities, and promote consistency, independence and rigor in implementing its risk controls and compliance efforts. The compliance program must be updated with a frequency sufficient to account for changes in the activities of the banking entity, results of independent testing of the program, identification of weaknesses in the program, and changes in legal, regulatory or other requirements.

1. Trading Desks: The banking entity must have written policies and procedures governing each trading desk that include a description of:

i. The process for identifying, authorizing and documenting financial instruments each trading desk may purchase or sell, withseparate documentation for market makingrelated activities conducted in reliance on § 75.4(b) and for hedging activity conducted
in reliance on § 75.5;

ii. A mapping for each trading desk to the
division, business line, or other organizational structure that is responsible for managing and overseeing the trading
desk’s activities;

iii. The mission (i.e., the type of trading activity, such as market-making, trading in sovereign debt, etc.) and strategy (i.e., methods for conducting authorized trading activities) of each trading desk;

iv. The activities that the trading desk is authorized to conduct, including (i) authorized instruments and products, and (ii) authorized hedging strategies, techniques and

instruments;

v. The types and amount of risks allocated by the banking entity to each trading desk to implement the mission and strategy of the trading desk, including an enumeration of material risks resulting from the activities in which the trading desk is authorized to engage (including but not limited to price risks, such as basis, volatility and correlation risks, as well as counterparty credit risk).

Risk assessments must take into account both the risks inherent in the trading activity and the strength and effectiveness of controls designed to mitigate those risks;

vi. How the risks allocated to each trading
desk will be measured;

vii. Why the allocated risks levels are appropriate to the activities authorized for the trading desk;

viii. The limits on the holding period of,
and the risk associated with, financial instruments under the responsibility of the trading desk;

ix. The process for setting new or revised limits, as well as escalation procedures for


### 6070 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

granting exceptions to any limits or to any policies or procedures governing the desk, the analysis that will be required to support revising limits or granting exceptions, and the process for independently reviewing and documenting those exceptions and the underlying analysis;

x. The process for identifying, documenting and approving new products, trading strategies, and hedging strategies;

xi. The types of clients, customers, and counterparties with whom the trading desk may trade; and

xii. The compensation arrangements, including incentive arrangements, for employees associated with the trading desk, which may not be designed to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading or excessive or imprudent risk-taking.

2. Description of risks and risk

management processes: The compliance program for the banking entity must include a comprehensive description of the risk management program for the trading activity of the banking entity. The compliance program must also include a description of the governance, approval, reporting, escalation, review and other processes the banking entity will use to reasonably ensure that trading activity is conducted in compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. Trading activity in similar financial instruments should be subject to similar governance, limits, testing, controls, and review, unless the banking entity specifically determines to establish different limits or processes and documents those differences. Descriptions must include, at a minimum, the following elements:

i. A description of the supervisory and risk management structure governing all trading activity, including a description of processes

for initial and senior-level review of new products and new strategies;

ii. A description of the process for developing, documenting, testing, approving and reviewing all models used for valuing, identifying and monitoring the risks of trading activity and related positions, including the process for periodic independent testing of the reliability and accuracy of those models;

iii. A description of the process for developing, documenting, testing, approving and reviewing the limits established for each trading desk;

iv. A description of the process by which a security may be purchased or sold pursuant to the liquidity management plan, including the process for authorizing and monitoring such activity to ensure compliance with the banking entity’s liquidity management plan and the restrictions on liquidity management activities in this part;

v. A description of the management review process, including escalation procedures, for approving any temporary exceptions or permanent adjustments to limits on the activities, positions, strategies, or risks associated with each trading desk; and

vi. The role of the audit, compliance, risk management and other relevant units for conducting independent testing of trading and hedging activities, techniques and strategies.

3. Authorized risks, instruments, and products. The banking entity must implement and enforce limits and internal controls for each trading desk that are reasonably designed to ensure that trading activity is conducted in conformance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and with the banking entity’s written policies and procedures. The banking entity must establish and enforce risk limits appropriate for the activity of each trading desk. These limits should be based on probabilistic and non-probabilistic measures of potential loss (e.g., Value-at-Risk and notional exposure, respectively), and measured under normal
and stress market conditions. At a minimum,
these internal controls must monitor,

establish and enforce limits on:

i. The financial instruments (including, at a minimum, by type and exposure) that the trading desk may trade;

ii. The types and levels of risks that may be taken by each trading desk; and

iii. The types of hedging instruments used, hedging strategies employed, and the amount of risk effectively hedged.

4. Hedging policies and procedures. The banking entity must establish, maintain, and enforce written policies and procedures regarding the use of risk-mitigating hedging instruments and strategies that, at a
minimum, describe:

i. The positions, techniques and strategies that each trading desk may use to hedge the risk of its positions;

ii. The manner in which the banking entity will identify the risks arising in connection

with and related to the individual or aggregated positions, contracts or other holdings of the banking entity that are to be hedged and determine that those risks have been properly and effectively hedged;

iii. The level of the organization at which hedging activity and management will occur;

iv. The manner in which hedging strategies will be monitored and the personnel responsible for such monitoring;

v. The risk management processes used to control unhedged or residual risks; and

vi. The process for developing, documenting, testing, approving and reviewing all hedging positions, techniques and strategies permitted for each trading desk and for the banking entity in reliance on

§ 75.5.

5. Analysis and quantitative

measurements. The banking entity must perform robust analysis and quantitative measurement of its trading activities that is reasonably designed to ensure that the trading activity of each trading desk is consistent with the banking entity’s compliance program; monitor and assist in the identification of potential and actual prohibited proprietary trading activity; and prevent the occurrence of prohibited proprietary trading. Analysis and models
used to determine, measure and limit risk must be rigorously tested and be reviewed by management responsible for trading activity to ensure that trading activities, limits, strategies, and hedging activities do not understate the risk and exposure to the banking entity or allow prohibited proprietary trading. This review shouldinclude periodic and independent backtesting and revision of activities, limits, strategies and hedging as appropriate to contain risk and ensure compliance. In addition to the quantitative measurements reported by any banking entity subject to Appendix A of this part, each banking entity must develop and implement, to the extent appropriate to facilitate compliance with this part, additional quantitative measurements specifically tailored to the particular risks, practices, and strategies of its trading desks. The banking entity’s analysis and quantitative measurements must incorporate the quantitative measurements reported by the banking entity pursuant to Appendix A of this part (if applicable) and include, at a minimum, the following:

i. Internal controls and written policies and procedures reasonably designed to ensure the accuracy and integrity of quantitative

measurements;

ii. Ongoing, timely monitoring and review of calculated quantitative measurements;

iii. The establishment of numerical thresholds and appropriate trading measures for each trading desk and heightened review of trading activity not consistent with those thresholds to ensure compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including analysis of the measurement results or other information, appropriate escalation procedures, and documentation related to the
review; and

iv. Immediate review and compliance investigation of the trading desk’s activities, escalation to senior management with oversight responsibilities for the applicable trading desk, timely notification to the Commission, appropriate remedial action (e.g., divesting of impermissible positions, cessation of impermissible activity, disciplinary actions), and documentation of the investigation findings and remedial action taken when quantitative
measurements or other information, considered together with the facts and circumstances, or findings of internal audit, independent testing or other review suggest a reasonable likelihood that the trading desk has violated any part of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part.

6. Other Compliance Matters. In addition to the requirements specified above, the banking entity’s compliance program must:

i. Identify activities of each trading desk

that will be conducted in reliance on exemptions contained in §§ 75.4 through 75.6, including an explanation of:

A. How and where in the organization the activity occurs; and

B. Which exemption is being relied on and how the activity meets the specific requirements for reliance on the applicable exemption;

ii. Include an explanation of the process for documenting, approving and reviewing actions taken pursuant to the liquidity management plan, where in the organization this activity occurs, the securities permissible for liquidity management, the process for ensuring that liquidity management activities are not conducted for the purpose of prohibited proprietary trading, and the process for ensuring that securities purchased as part of the liquidity management plan are highly liquid and conform to the requirements of this part;

iii. Describe how the banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or actual


### 6071 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

material exposure to high-risk assets or highrisk trading strategies presented by each trading desk that relies on the exemptions contained in §§ 75.3(d)(3) and 75.4 through 75.6, which must take into account potential or actual exposure to:

A. Assets whose values cannot be externally priced or, where valuation is reliant on pricing models, whose model inputs cannot be externally validated;

B. Assets whose changes in value cannot be adequately mitigated by effective hedging;

C. New products with rapid growth, including those that do not have a market history;

D. Assets or strategies that include significant embedded leverage;

E. Assets or strategies that have demonstrated significant historical volatility;

F. Assets or strategies for which the application of capital and liquidity standards would not adequately account for the risk;

and

G. Assets or strategies that result in large and significant concentrations to sectors, risk factors, or counterparties;

iv. Establish responsibility for compliance with the reporting and recordkeeping requirements of subpart B of this part and
§ 75.20; and

v. Establish policies for monitoring and prohibiting potential or actual material conflicts of interest between the banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties.

7. Remediation of violations. The banking entity’s compliance program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively monitor and identify for further analysis any trading activity that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and to prevent

actual violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. The compliance program must describe procedures for identifying and remedying violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, and must include, at a minimum, a requirement to promptly document, address and remedy any violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, and document all proposed and actual remediation efforts. The compliance program must include specific written policies and procedures that are reasonably designed to assess the extent to which any activity indicates that modification to the banking entity’s compliance program is warranted and to ensure that appropriate modifications are implemented. The written policies and procedures must provide for prompt notification to appropriate management, including senior management and the board of directors, of any material weakness or significant deficiencies in the design or implementation of the compliance program of the banking entity.

b. Covered Fund Activities or Investments

A banking entity must establish, maintain and enforce a compliance program that includes written policies and procedures that are appropriate for the types, size, complexity and risks of the covered fund and

related activities conducted and investments made, by the banking entity.

1. Identification of covered funds. The banking entity’s compliance program must provide a process, which must include appropriate management review and independent testing, for identifying and documenting covered funds that each unit within the banking entity’s organization sponsors or organizes and offers, and covered

funds in which each such unit invests. In addition to the documentation requirements for covered funds, as specified under
§ 75.20(e), the documentation must include information that identifies all pools that the banking entity sponsors or has an interest in and the type of exemption from the Commodity Exchange Act (whether or not the pool relies on § 4.7 of the regulations under the Commodity Exchange Act (§ 4.7 of this chapter)), and the amount of ownership interest the banking entity has in those pools.

2. Identification of covered fund activities

and investments. The banking entity’s compliance program must identify, document and map each unit within the organization that is permitted to acquire or hold an interest in any covered fund or sponsor any covered fund and map each unit
to the division, business line, or other organizational structure that will be responsible for managing and overseeing that

unit’s activities and investments.

3. Explanation of compliance. The banking entity’s compliance program must explain

how:

i. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or actual material conflicts of interest between the banking entity and its clients, customers, or counterparties related to its covered fund
activities and investments;

ii. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or actual transactions or activities that may threaten the safety and soundness of the banking entity related to its
covered fund activities and investments; and

iii. The banking entity monitors for and prohibits potential or actual material exposure to high-risk assets or high-risk trading strategies presented by its covered fund activities and investments, taking into account potential or actual exposure to:

A. Assets whose values cannot be externally priced or, where valuation is reliant on pricing models, whose model inputs cannot be externally validated;

B. Assets whose changes in values cannot be adequately mitigated by effective hedging;

C. New products with rapid growth, including those that do not have a market history;

D. Assets or strategies that include significant embedded leverage;

E. Assets or strategies that have demonstrated significant historical volatility;

F. Assets or strategies for which the application of capital and liquidity standards would not adequately account for the risk;

and

G. Assets or strategies that expose the banking entity to large and significant concentrations with respect to sectors, risk factors, or counterparties;

4. Description and documentation of covered fund activities and investments. For each organizational unit engaged in covered fund activities and investments, the banking entity’s compliance program must document: i. The covered fund activities and

investments that the unit is authorized to
conduct;

ii. The banking entity’s plan for actively seeking unaffiliated investors to ensure that any investment by the banking entity
conforms to the limits contained in § 75.12 or registered in compliance with the securities laws and thereby exempt from those limits within the time periods allotted in § 75.12;

and

iii. How it complies with the requirements of subpart C of this part.

5. Internal Controls. A banking entity must
establish, maintain, and enforce internal controls that are reasonably designed to

ensure that its covered fund activities or investments comply with the requirements of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and are appropriate given the limits on risk established by the banking entity. These written internal controls must be reasonably designed and established to effectively monitor and identify for further analysis any covered fund activity or investment that may indicate potential violations of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part. The internal controls must, at a minimum require:

i. Monitoring and limiting the banking entity’s individual and aggregate investments
in covered funds;

ii. Monitoring the amount and timing of seed capital investments for compliance with the limitations under subpart C of this part (including but not limited to the redemption, sale or disposition requirements of § 75.12),

and the effectiveness of efforts to seek unaffiliated investors to ensure compliance
with those limits;

iii. Calculating the individual and aggregate levels of ownership interests in one or more covered fund required by § 75.12;

iv. Attributing the appropriate instruments to the individual and aggregate ownership
interest calculations above;

v. Making disclosures to prospective and actual investors in any covered fund organized and offered or sponsored by the banking entity, as provided under
§ 75.11(a)(8);

vi. Monitoring for and preventing any relationship or transaction between the banking entity and a covered fund that is prohibited under § 75.14, including where the banking entity has been designated as the sponsor, investment manager, investment adviser, or commodity trading advisor to a covered fund by another banking entity; and

vii. Appropriate management review and supervision across legal entities of the banking entity to ensure that services and products provided by all affiliated entities comply with the limitation on services and products contained in § 75.14.

6. Remediation of violations. The banking entity’s compliance program must be reasonably designed and established to effectively monitor and identify for further analysis any covered fund activity or investment that may indicate potential

violations of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part and to prevent actual violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. The banking entity’s compliance program must describe procedures for identifying and remedying violations of section 13 of the


### 6072 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

BHC Act and this part, and must include, at a minimum, a requirement to promptly document, address and remedy any violation of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, including § 75.21, and document all proposed and actual remediation efforts. The compliance program must include specific written policies and procedures that are reasonably designed to assess the extent to which any activity or investment indicates that modification to the banking entity’s compliance program is warranted and to ensure that appropriate modifications are implemented. The written policies and procedures must provide for prompt notification to appropriate management, including senior management and the board of directors, of any material weakness or significant deficiencies in the design or implementation of the compliance program of the banking entity.

III. Responsibility and Accountability for the Compliance Program

a. A banking entity must establish, maintain, and enforce a governance and management framework to manage its business and employees with a view to preventing violations of section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. A banking entity must have an appropriate management framework reasonably designed to ensure that: Appropriate personnel are responsible and accountable for the effective implementation and enforcement of the compliance program; a clear reporting line with a chain of responsibility is delineated; and the compliance program is reviewed periodically by senior management. The board of directors (or equivalent governance body) and senior management should have the appropriate authority and access to personnel and information within the organizations as well as appropriate resources to conduct their oversight activities effectively.

1. Corporate governance. The banking entity must adopt a written compliance program approved by the board of directors, an appropriate committee of the board, or equivalent governance body, and senior

management.

2. Management procedures. The banking entity must establish, maintain, and enforce a governance framework that is reasonably designed to achieve compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, which, at a minimum, provides for:

i. The designation of appropriate senior management or committee of senior management with authority to carry out the management responsibilities of the banking entity for each trading desk and for each organizational unit engaged in covered fund

activities;

ii. Written procedures addressing the management of the activities of the banking entity that are reasonably designed to achieve compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including:

A. A description of the management system, including the titles, qualifications, and locations of managers and the specific responsibilities of each person with respect to the banking entity’s activities governed by section 13 of the BHC Act and this part; and

B. Procedures for determining compensation arrangements for traders engaged in underwriting or market makingrelated activities under § 75.4 or riskmitigating hedging activities under § 75.5 so that such compensation arrangements are designed not to reward or incentivize prohibited proprietary trading and appropriately balance risk and financial results in a manner that does not encourage employees to expose the banking entity to excessive or imprudent risk.

3. Business line managers. Managers with responsibility for one or more trading desks of the banking entity are accountable for the effective implementation and enforcement of the compliance program with respect to the applicable trading desk(s).

4. Board of directors, or similar corporate body, and senior management. The board of directors, or similar corporate body, and senior management are responsible for setting and communicating an appropriate culture of compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part and ensuring that appropriate policies regarding the management of trading activities and covered fund activities or investments are adopted to comply with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. The board of directors or similar corporate body (such as a designated committee of the board or an equivalent governance body) must ensure that senior management is fully capable, qualified, and properly motivated to manage compliance with this part in light of the organization’s business activities and the expectations of

the board of directors. The board of directors or similar corporate body must also ensure that senior management has established appropriate incentives and adequate resources to support compliance with this part, including the implementation of a compliance program meeting the requirements of this appendix into management goals and compensation structures across the banking entity.

5. Senior management. Senior management is responsible for implementing and enforcing the approved compliance program. Senior management must also ensure that

effective corrective action is taken when failures in compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part are identified. Senior management and control personnel charged with overseeing compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part should review the compliance program for the banking entity periodically and report to the board, or an appropriate committee thereof, on the effectiveness of the compliance program and compliance matters with a frequency appropriate to the size, scope, and risk profile of the banking entity’s trading

activities and covered fund activities or investments, which shall be at least annually.

6. CEO attestation. Based on a review by the CEO of the banking entity, the CEO of the banking entity must, annually, attest in writing to the Commission that the banking entity has in place processes to establish, maintain, enforce, review, test and modify the compliance program established under this appendix and § 75.20 in a manner reasonably designed to achieve compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part. In the case of a U.S. branch or agency of a foreign banking entity, the attestation may be provided for the entire U.S. operations of the foreign banking entity by the senior management officer of the United States operations of the foreign banking entity who

is located in the United States.

IV. Independent Testing

a. Independent testing must occur with a frequency appropriate to the size, scope, and risk profile of the banking entity’s trading
and covered fund activities or investments, which shall be at least annually. This independent testing must include an

evaluation of:

1. The overall adequacy and effectiveness of the banking entity’s compliance program, including an analysis of the extent to which the program contains all the required elements of this appendix;

2. The effectiveness of the banking entity’s internal controls, including an analysis and

documentation of instances in which such
internal controls have been breached, and

how such breaches were addressed and
resolved; and

3. The effectiveness of the banking entity’s management procedures.

b. A banking entity must ensure that independent testing regarding the effectiveness of the banking entity’s compliance program is conducted by a qualified independent party, such as the banking entity’s internal audit department, compliance personnel or risk managers independent of the organizational unit being
tested, outside auditors, consultants, or other qualified independent parties. A banking entity must promptly take appropriate action to remedy any significant deficiencies or material weaknesses in its compliance program and to terminate any violations of section 13 of the BHC Act or this part.

V. Training

Banking entities must provide adequate training to personnel and managers of the banking entity engaged in activities or investments governed by section 13 of the BHC Act or this part, as well as other appropriate supervisory, risk, independent testing, and audit personnel, in order to effectively implement and enforce the compliance program. This training should occur with a frequency appropriate to the size and the risk profile of the banking entity’s trading activities and covered fund

activities or investments.

VI. Recordkeeping

Banking entities must create and retain records sufficient to demonstrate compliance and support the operations and effectiveness of the compliance program. A banking entity must retain these records for a period that is no less than 5 years or such longer period as required by the Commission in a form that allows it to promptly produce such records to the Commission on request.

Issued in Washington, DC, on December 30, 2013, by the Commission.

Melissa D. Jurgens,

Secretary of the Commission.

Note: The following appendices will not appear in the Code of Federal Regulations.


### 6073 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

Appendices to Prohibitions and Restrictions on Proprietary Trading
and Certain Interests in, and Relationships With, Hedge Funds and Private Equity Funds—Commission Voting Summary and Statements of

Commissioners

Appendix 1—Commission Voting Summary

On this matter, Chairman Gensler and Commissioners Chilton and Wetjen voted in

the affirmative. Commissioner O’Malia voted in the negative.

Appendix 2—Statement of Chairman Gary Gensler

I support the final ‘‘Volcker Rule’’ before the Commission today. It achieves the important balance, as directed by Congress, of prohibiting banking entities from proprietary trading while at the same time allowing banking entities to engage in permitted activities, including market making and risk mitigating hedging.

Further, as directed by the Dodd-Frank

Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection
Act (Dodd-Frank Act), the final rule strikes an appropriate balance regarding banking entities investment in hedge funds and private equity funds. As Congress directed—

other than for de minimis investments— banking entities are prohibited from sponsoring, owning, and having certain relationships with hedge funds or private equity funds. The final rule focuses the prohibition on entities formed for investing or trading in securities or derivatives and that are typically offered to institutional investors and high-net-worth individuals. The final

definition was tailored to exclude entities that are offered more broadly to retail investors or have a more general corporate purpose, such as loan securitizations.

The Commodity Futures Trading
Commission (CFTC) consulted and
coordinated with the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, the Comptroller of the Currency and the Securities and Exchange Commission in developing this rule. Based on this
collaboration, the CFTC’s final rule mirrors the language being adopted by the other financial regulators.

The CFTC authority to implement the Volcker Rule is for the banking entities for which we are the primary financial regulatory agency. As of today, the CFTC estimates that our authority primarily applies to approximately 110 registered swap dealers
and futures commission merchants (FCMs) that would each individually be banking entities under the Volcker Rule. Grouped by corporate affiliation these represent about 45 different business enterprises.

As a foundation, the final Volcker Rule requires banking entities to have a robust compliance program, including defined limits on market making, underwriting and hedging activities as well as continuous monitoring and management of such activities. It also requires reporting to regulators on specific metrics and trading details. This transparency will enhance the CFTC’s ability to oversee swap dealers and

FCMs.

Banking entities’ customers and counterparties will continue to be provided liquidity through the banking entities’ permitted market making. The banking entities are permitted to do so as long as each trading desk’s market-maker inventory is designed not to exceed, on an ongoing basis, the reasonably expected near-term demands of clients, customers or counterparties. The banking entities will be required to maintain an ongoing compliance program and follow the rule’s limits on market-maker inventory and financial exposure. For instance, banking entities would not be able to stockpile or accumulate positions over time that do not meet expected near-term customer demand.

The final Volcker Rule also permits hedging to reduce identified, specific risks from the banking entity’s individual or aggregated positions. Permitted hedging activity will be required to (1) be designed to and (2) demonstrably reduce or otherwise significantly mitigate one or more specific, identifiable risks. The final rule’s preamble further states that this activity is not intended to be hedging of generalized risks based on non-position specific modeling or other considerations. Hedging of the general assets and liabilities of the banking entity or a guess as to the direction of the economy will no longer be permitted.

Hedging strategies and positions are subject to analysis, including required correlation analysis, as well as an ongoing recalibration requirement to ensure it is not prohibited proprietary trading.

The Commission also has the legal authority to enforce the Volcker Rule. If the
Commission believes there is a violation,

Dodd-Frank Section 619 and the final rule state that it can, after providing an opportunity to respond, order the registrant to stop that activity. The Commission also can use existing authority to discipline registrants, including FCMs, swap dealers,

and others. The CEA and Commission rules provide that we may restrict, suspend or revoke a registration for good cause. Depending on the facts and circumstances, violation of Dodd-Frank Section 619 may rise

to that level.

The talented CFTC staff working along with my fellow Commissioners—Mike Dunn, Jill Sommers, Bart Chilton, Scott O’Malia and Mark Wetjen—really have delivered for the American public.

With this action, the staff of this small but remarkably effective agency will have completed 68 rulemakings, orders and guidances. Though lacking adequate resources, the CFTC staff has diligently sorted through nearly 60,000 public comment letters. They have met with members of the public more than 2,200 times to discuss

reform.

These common-sense reforms have been truly transformative.

Bright lights of transparency now are shining on the $380 trillion swaps market. The public can see the price and volume of every transaction, like a modern-day tickertape. Transparent, regulated trading platforms are trading a quarter of a trillion dollars in swaps each day. A majority of the swaps market is now being centrally cleared—lowering risk and bringing access to anyone wishing to

compete.

Ninety-one swap dealers have registered and—for the first time—are being overseen for their swaps activity.

I couldn’t be more proud of this dedicated group of public servants.

I am honored to have served along with them during such a remarkable time in the history of this agency.

Appendix 3—Statement of

Commissioner Bart Chilton

High Roller’s Room

I’m pleased to be voting on a final Volcker Rule. Frankly, two-and-a-half weeks ago, I had grave doubts about getting this done in a meaningful fashion. It had become weaker than the original proposal. But, thankfully,

and I thank the Chairman for his tireless efforts, we have a rigorous and robust rule

before us.

If you’ve ever been to a casino, many of them have a high roller’s room. There’s usually a sign about a $1000 minimum bet. Many have ornate gaming tables and heavy draperies. If you walk around, you can catch a glimpse inside. But other than betting a lot of money, I’m not sure what goes on in there. And, that’s fine . . . some high rollers lose

and some win.

But, what if what the high rollers did in that room impacted all of us? What if it impacted consumers, our economy and our country? What if what the high rollers did in
that room cost us $417 billion dollars (in a big bank bailout) because the games they were playing were tanking the economy?

That’s why we need a strong Volcker Rule. We should never again be put in a circumstance where too big to fail high rollers play games of chance with our nation. This rule takes a heavy velvet rope with brass ends across the doorway and closes the high roller’s room. (Maybe they’ll put in more Blazing 7s or Wheel of Fortunes.)

The dilemma in drafting the final rule has been that there are certain permitted forms of trading that have been difficult to define. Fortunately, the language has been solidified tightly to avoid loopholes.

First, the key parts of the law, and what I have focused on for a very long time, are the words surrounding hedging. Proprietary hedging is allowed under the law, but speculative trading—risky gambles for the house—are exactly what Volcker sought to end. This rule does that by requiring hedges be designed to mitigate and reduce actual risk, and not just by an accidental or

collateral effect of the trade. We also have better correlation language in the rule, correlation that shows that the hedging ‘‘activity demonstrably reduces or otherwise significantly mitigates the specific, identifiable risk(s) being hedged.’’ This is key—the risk has to be specific and identifiable. You can’t just say, ‘‘Ah, oh, that? Hmm, it was a hedge.’’ Nope, we aren’t going to let ya play that game. The position needs

to be correlated with the risk.

Furthermore, there is now an ongoing requirement to recalibrate the position, the


### 6074 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

1 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer
Protection Act, Public Law 111–203, 124 Stat. 1376
(2010).

2 12 U.S.C. 1851. 3 5 U.S.C. 500 et seq.

4 Gina Chon, ‘‘CFTC Goes Its Own Way Over
Volcker Rule,’’ Fin. Times, November 23, 2013. 5 See SIFMA, ISDA & IIB v. CFTC, No. 13–CV– 1916 (D.D.C.).

6 Dodd-Frank Act § 2(12).

7 Senators Carl Levin and Jeff Merkley, co-authors of § 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act, emphasized the importance of enforcement to the success of the Volcker Rule by urging the five responsible agencies to ‘‘provide coordinated and consistent enforcement, including data sharing by regulators’’ in their implementation of a final rule. Letter from Hon. Jeff Merkley, Member, United States Senate,
and Hon. Carl Levin, Member, United States Senate,
to Hon. Ben Bernanke, Chairman, Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, Hon. Thomas Curry, Comptroller of the Currency, Department of the Treasury, Hon. Gary Gensler, Chairman, Commodity Futures Trading Commission, Hon. Martin Gruenberg, Acting Chairman, Federal Deposit Insurance Commission, and Hon. Mary Shapiro, Chairman, Securities and Exchange Commission (Apr. 26, 2012) (on file with
the Commission). hedge, in order to ensure that the position remains a hedge and does not become speculative. When people say this version of the Volcker Rule will stop circumstances like the London Whale, this ongoing recalibration provision is exactly what will help avoid

similar debacles.

Second, the same goes for market making. Yes, market making is allowed, but only for

the benefit of the banks’ customers—for their customers and not solely in order to collect market maker fees provided by the exchange or for any proprietary speculative reason. Full stop.

Third, on portfolio hedging: One of the changes that has been made is that we have defined what a portfolio is NOT—it can’t be some amorphous set of excuses for doing a trade. You can’t call deuces and one-eyed jacks wild after the hand has been dealt. You

can’t do an after-the-fact extract of a set of trades as a rationale for a hedge.

Fourth, I’ve spoken many times about perverse bonus structures that reward the
macho macho men traders. The idea, and it is contained in actual rule text language, is that big bonuses and rewards in banking should not be tied to flyer bets. Our first proposal was fairly poorly drafted on this. It didn’t differentiate between prohibited proprietary trading and permitted proprietary trading very well. My view of the language that compensation should be ‘‘designed’’ not to reward or incentivize prohibited trading is that this is a sufficiently narrow test. One of the ways we will determine if something is designed in this way is how, in fact, traders are paid. So we will look after-the-fact at the

payouts.

Finally, the Volcker Rule won’t be implemented until July of 2015. That’s ages in these morphing markets where new games seem to be played all the time. I guarantee there will be efforts to find loopholes, figure out ways around what has been written. That’s the way of the world. So, my final thought is that this rule must not be static. Regulators need to continue to monitor what is taking place. We need our regulatory eyes in the sky, but also to look around the corner for what’s coming next, and be nimble and quick, to ensure that what we do today holdsup and that the high roller’s room isn’t reopened.

While this may be the end of part of the rulemaking process, it is, and must be, the beginning of a process, that continues.

Thank you.

Appendix 4—Dissenting Statement of

Commissioner Scott D. O’Malia

I respectfully dissent from today’s

Commission vote on the final rule implementing § 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act, 1 commonly known as the ‘‘Volcker Rule.’’ I cannot support a rulemaking that undermines the regulatory process, nor clearly delineates the Commission’s new jurisdiction and enforcement authority under § 13 of the Bank Holding Company Act of
1956 (‘‘BHC Act’’) 2 and fails to include procedures that afford due process to market participants.

Former Supreme Court Justice Louis D. Brandeis, who earlier in his career was instrumental in establishing the Federal Reserve System, stated: ‘‘If we desire respect
for the law, we must first make the law respectable.’’ But respect—and integrity of process—is what has been most lacking in the Commission’s approach to rulemaking.

I believe the Commission must get back to the basics of good government and proper rulemaking. I cannot vote for a final rule that is hardly the product of meaningful consideration by the full Commission, but instead was negotiated exclusively by the
Chairman. In addition, I cannot vote for a

final rule where the Commission has not devoted enough attention to providing sufficient clarity and due process in the enforcement of new and untested regulatory authority, but still imposes significant obligations upon market participants at an unknown—but surely considerable—cost.

Abuse of Process

Throughout the Commission’s rulemakings under the Dodd-Frank Act, I have urged the Commission to act faithfully in accordance with the applicable statutory authorities and
the Administrative Procedure Act (‘‘APA’’). 3 However, in the implementation of one of the most important mandates issued by Congress in response to the financial crisis, the Commission seems to have forgotten the basics of agency rulemaking. I am deeply troubled by the egregious abuse of process in this rulemaking. Without a doubt, it far surpasses all other previous transgressions to

date.

The first opportunity each Commissioner had to review a partial draft of the nearly 1,000-page final rule came only three weeks prior to today’s vote. Further, because the Commission was operating in an information
vacuum, the fact that the Commissioners were not reviewing the working interagency draft—but instead had the ‘‘CFTC-preferred’’ version of the rule—only came to light a few days later. 4 The Commission did not receive a near-final draft of the rule (with language agreed to by all five agencies) until just six days prior to the vote, despite repeated requests by Commissioners for a version of the draft then in circulation amongst the responsible agencies. This six-day draft was not even accompanied by the courtesy of a summary or term sheet in order to aid the Commission in digesting, at the last minute, this incredibly complex and dense final rule.

I am disappointed that today’s vote on the final rule is besmirched by the purposeful circumvention of measured review by each Commissioner’s office. It is simply not possible to carefully weigh a final rule— particularly one with as much detail and consequence as the Volcker Rule—in the briefest of timeframes. Accordingly, I am concerned that the lack of meaningful participation by the full Commission in the rulemaking process has therefore seriously impaired the ability of the Commission, as a deliberative body, to engage in reasoned decision-making.

Congress established the CFTC as an independent agency led by a Commission—

not a director—to act as steward to the futures and swaps markets. In doing so, Congress entrusted each of the Commissioners to independently use his or her experience and expertise to carefully review and deliberate upon all Commission action, including rulemaking. Final rules should reflect the input and collective opinion of the Commission as a whole, but today’s vote falls far short of that

fundamental standard.

It is imperative that the Commission respect the letter and spirit of the law and adhere faithfully to APA requirements in our implementation of this new statutory authority granted by Congress under the BHC Act. Unfortunately, the Commission’s rulemaking over the past three years has been aptly referred to as ‘‘regulation by fiat.’’ 5 We cannot continue down this path of reflexive, knee-jerk regulation that fails to provide clarity and certainty to market participants. The Commission must get back to the basics and return to a thoughtful, measured approach to regulating our markets in an open and transparent manner.

Jurisdiction and Enforcement Authority

I also believe that the basics of any rulemaking are jurisdiction and enforcement. However, the final rule fails to provide clear and consistent procedures for both (1) the Commission’s new enforcement authority
under § 13 of the BHC Act and (2) due process for market participants.

As a threshold matter, the Volcker Rule may give us concurrent, and potentially overlapping, jurisdiction as the ‘‘primary financial regulatory agency’’ 6 of a Commission registrant or registered entity, so long as there is some type of corporate relationship with a banking entity. It is

essential that the Commission continue to work with the other responsible agencies on implementation to further outline the scope of each agency’s jurisdiction, maximize regulatory efficiency, and provide consistency for market participants, with a minimum of duplicative and costly requirements and wasted resources. 7 The Commission must also be mindful of foreign


### 6075 Federal Register / Vol. 79, No. 21 / Friday, January 31, 2014 / Rules and Regulations

8 7 U.S.C. 1 et seq.

9 7 U.S.C. 19(a).

10 Section 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act, paragraph
(e)(2), which is entitled Anti-evasion—Termination of Activities or Investment, provides that ‘‘Notwithstanding any other provision of law, whenever an appropriate Federal banking agency, the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, as appropriate, has reasonable cause to believe that a banking entity or nonbank financial company supervised by the Board under the respective agency’s jurisdiction has made an investment or engaged in an activity in a manner that functions as an evasion of the requirements of this section (including through an abuse of any permitted activity) or otherwise violates the restrictions under this section, the appropriate Federal banking agency, the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, as appropriate, shall order, after due notice and opportunity for hearing, the banking entity or nonbank financial company supervised by the Board to terminate the activity and, as relevant, dispose of the investment. Nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to limit the inherent authority of any Federal agency or State regulatory authority to further restrict any investments or activities under otherwise applicable provisions of

law.’’ 11 See, e.g., 12 U.S.C. 1818(i).

12 7 U.S.C. 9(c)(4)(A).

13 7 U.S.C. 6s. 14 7 U.S.C. 12a.

15 7 U.S.C. 8a(2)(E).

16 7 U.S.C. 8a(2)(H).

17 7 U.S.C. 8a(3).

18 17 CFR 3.60. regulators and seek harmonization in the extraterritorial application of our jurisdiction, in accordance with principles of international comity.

I am concerned that the Commission has not devoted enough attention to delineating our enforcement authority and procedures under the Volcker Rule, including the implications of not promulgating the final rule under the Commodity Exchange Act (‘‘CEA’’). 8 This is important because the final rule is only being promulgated under the BHC Act. Consequently, the Commission is limited to only the enforcement measures provided for by § 13(e)(2) of the BHC Act. By not also promulgating the final rule under the
CEA, the Commission cannot use its full

suite of enforcement tools under the CEA to ensure compliance with the Volcker Rule.

If the Commission wanted to use its enforcement powers under the CEA, the final rule must be promulgated under the CEA and undergo cost-benefit consideration pursuant to § 15(a) of the CEA. 9 But, by choosing to forgo any cost-benefit analysis and promulgate the Volcker Rule solely under the
BHC Act, the Commission has thus limited its enforcement powers.

To illustrate this point, it is critical to emphasize that the Commission’s authority

under the Volcker Rule is not derived from
the CEA, which established the CFTC and its jurisdiction over the futures and swaps

market. Section 619 of the Dodd-Frank Act
amends the BHC Act, which is administered by the Federal Reserve Board. The Volcker
Rule is codified as § 13 of the BHC Act and confers limited enforcement authority to the Commission under § 13(e)(2) to order an affected party to ‘‘terminate the [violative] activity’’ and ‘‘dispose of the investment.’’ 10 First, although the statutory text of § 13(e)(2) suggests that the Commission may, essentially, issue a cease and desist order to a banking entity engaging in violative activity, the Commission has not promulgated any provisions in the final rule

that would define and delineate such an

order.

The issue of enforcement action is not a problem for the banking agencies, who have broad supervisory powers over the safety and soundness of banking entities, and considerable enforcement powers under § 8 of the BHC Act, or §§ 8 or 39 of the Federal Deposit Insurance Act 11 (as described in the preamble to the final rule). Those powers are conferred to the banking agencies as prudential regulators. The Commission, however, is not a prudential regulator of its registrants or registered entities and does not have the same powers as the banking agencies.

Second, I have serious concerns that by not including specific procedures in the final rule for an enforcement action taken by the Commission pursuant to § 13(e)(2), the Commission is not affording due process to any party that might be the subject of a future enforcement action. The statutory text in § 13(e)(2) explicitly states that ‘‘due notice and opportunity for hearing’’ must be provided. But, the final rule does not contain any procedures for notice or hearing, and in fact does not even mention that statutory requirement.

Third, I am also concerned that the Commission may nevertheless try to read its enforcement powers under the CEA into its limited enforcement authority under the BHC Act. The final rule, in new § 75.21(b), states that ‘‘the Commission may take any action permitted by law to enforce compliance with section 13 of the BHC Act and this part, including directing the banking entity to restrict, limit, or terminate any or all activities under this part and dispose of any

investment.’’

That provision, without being promulgated under the CEA and undergoing cost-benefit consideration, cannot permit the use of enforcement powers provided for in the CEA. The enforcement powers the Commission has under the CEA explicitly only apply to violations of ‘‘this Act’’ (the CEA), including ‘‘any rule, regulation, or order of the

Commission promulgated in accordance with

. . . this Act’’ (emphasis added). 12

Although it would be possible for the Commission to exercise its power over registration of a Commission registrant or registered entity as a matter of right, it is

unclear to me whether the Commission has actually promulgated rules that permit the revocation of registration for a swap dealer.

Section 4s of the CEA 13 governs the registration and regulation of swap dealers and major swap participants, but does not explicitly address revocation of registration.

Section 8a of the CEA 14 explicitly applies to the registration of an exclusive list of Commission registrants (intermediaries), but does not include swap dealers. Section 8a of

the CEA authorizes the Commission to revoke registration, but only in certain circumstances as described in, for example,
§§ 8a(2)(A)–(H), 8a(3), and 8a(4).

Although some of those provisions may permit the revocation of registration of a swap dealer, it is secondary to, for example, either a finding by a court of law or another Federal or State agency that a violation of the

CEA occurred, 15 or that the principal of a swap dealer was statutorily disqualified from
registration, 16 or that the swap dealer willfully aided or abetted in the violation of the CEA by another person, or failed to supervise a person that violated the CEA. 17 Because these powers over registration only apply where there has been a violation of the CEA, I do not see how they can be applied
to a violation of § 13 of the BHC Act.

Commission regulation § 3.60 18 provides procedures for revocation of registration, but only pursuant to §§ 8a(2), 8a(3), and 8a(4), which do not directly apply to swap dealers as just discussed.

I am concerned that, because there does not appear to be any Commission regulation that permits the revocation of registration for a swap dealer, and because § 75.21 of the final rule does not include any procedures for an enforcement action taken by the Commission pursuant to § 13(e)(2) of the

BHC Act, the Commission would not able to effectively enforce the Volcker Rule. Further, the Commission’s enforcement powers under

the CEA are not available to enforce the

Volcker Rule because the final rule was not promulgated under the CEA. I also reiterate that I am deeply troubled by the omission of procedures to afford due process to market
participants.

Conclusion

As the Commission moves towards finalizing the last of the rules mandated by

the Dodd-Frank Act, I believe it’s about time that it got back to the basics of good government and proper rulemaking. The final

rule does neither because of the abuse of process in its rulemaking and the lack of due process and clarity in its enforcement procedures. Because of these fundamental flaws in the final rule, I cannot support it.

[FR Doc. 2013–31476 Filed 1–30–14; 8:45 am]

**BILLING CODE 6351–01–P**